Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) | Release 6.0.0
User Provisioning Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA
Issue 1 | June 2013
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contents
About this document
xlvii
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................ xlvii
Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xlvii
xlvii
Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................... xlvii
xlvii
Conventions used
................................................................................................................................................................... xlviii
xlviii
Related information
Technical support
................................................................................................................................................................. xlix
xlix
........................................................................................................................................................................... li
li
Safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
General notes on safety
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-4
Basic safety aspects .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-7
1-7
Specific safety areas
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1-11
........................................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1-25
................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-34
1-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
iii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................ 1-49
1-49
................................................................................................................................................ 1-53
1-53
........................................................................................................................................................ 1-63
1-63
................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2-6
Security concepts
...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2-7
User provisioning
................................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-13
................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-14
......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2-24
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-20
2-20
...................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2-26
......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-35
2-35
Administer user logins on the OCS application using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2-40
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 2-67
2-67
.................................................................................. 2-76
2-76
...................................................................... 2-77
2-77
..................................................................... 2-79
2-79
................................................................................................................................... 2-80
2-80
...................................................................... 2-81
2-81
...................................................................................................................................................... 2-82
2-82
............................................................................................ 2-83
2-83
................................................................................................. 2-86
2-86
......................................................................... 2-88
2-88
................................................................................................................... 2-90
2-90
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
v
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User management and administration procedures on the WDM application using the WebUI
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-91
2-91
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-94
2-94
.................................................................................................................. 2-98
2-98
................................................................................................................................ 2-100
2-100
........................................................................................................................................................... 2-102
2-102
.............................................................................................................................................. 2-107
2-107
.............................................................................................. 2-109
2-109
......................................................... 2-111
2-111
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-112
2-112
Procedure 2-36: Setting / viewing SNMP user activity logging properties .................................................... 2-113
2-113
SNMP Logging
..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-114
2-114
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-116
2-116
......................................................................................................................................... 2-117
2-117
............................................................................................................................................................ 2-118
2-118
................................................................................................................ 2-120
2-120
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
vi
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 2-122
2-122
..................................................................................................................... 2-126
2-126
....................................................................................................... 2-127
2-127
.................................................................................................................... 2-129
2-129
............................................................................................................ 2-130
2-130
.................................................................................................................... 2-131
2-131
........................................................................................................................... 2-133
2-133
........................................................................................................................ 2-136
2-136
............................................................................................................................................. 3-8
3-8
......................................................................... 3-11
3-11
................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
vii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................... 3-18
3-18
................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3-25
................................................................................................................................................................ 3-30
3-30
.............................................................................................................. 3-41
3-41
........................................................................................... 3-42
3-42
........................................................................................... 3-43
3-43
............................................................................................ 3-44
3-44
.......................................................................................................................... 3-45
3-45
Procedure 3-11: Modify the ASAP of the Customer LAN interface ................................................................... 3-57
3-57
Procedure 3-12: Configure LAN interfaces to form a multi-shelf compound ................................................. 3-59
3-59
Procedure 3-13: Create a network interface on the embedded communication channels (ECCs)
Procedure 3-14: Modify the ASAP of a network interface
........... 3-63
3-63
..................................................................................... 3-66
3-66
............................................................................... 3-67
3-67
Procedure 3-16: Remove GCC legs from the ECC protection group
................................................................. 3-69
3-69
.................................................................................................................... 3-75
3-75
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
viii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................. 3-78
3-78
.................................................................................................................... 3-80
3-80
Procedure 3-22: Enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table
......................................................... 3-81
3-81
Procedure 3-23: Delete a static IP route from the IP routing table ....................................................................... 3-85
3-85
Procedure 3-24: Create the NTP Server address ......................................................................................................... 3-87
3-87
Procedure 3-25: Manage the NTP server address ....................................................................................................... 3-89
3-89
Procedure 3-26: Retrieve the NTP sync state ............................................................................................................... 3-91
3-91
Procedure 3-27: Configure the global OSPF parameters ......................................................................................... 3-93
3-93
Procedure 3-28: Create an OSPF area
............................................................................................................................ 3-96
3-96
.......................................................................................................................... 3-98
3-98
........................................................................... 3-104
3-104
........................................................................................ 3-109
3-109
................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-111
3-111
Procedure 3-35: View network (NE name, NE IP, software release) map information
............................. 3-113
3-113
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ 3-127
3-127
......................................................................................................................... 3-143
3-143
................................................................................................................................................................... 3-147
3-147
............................................................................................................. 3-148
3-148
..................................................................................................................... 5-6
5-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
x
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5-18
................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-43
5-43
...................................................................................................................... 5-46
5-46
............................................................................................... 5-53
5-53
.................................................................................. 5-57
5-57
..................................................................................................... 5-61
5-61
........................................................................................................... 5-66
5-66
......................................................... 5-74
5-74
.................................................................................................. 5-76
5-76
...................................................... 5-89
5-89
...................................................... 5-92
5-92
........................................................................................ 5-97
5-97
................................................................................................................. 5-99
5-99
............................................... 5-101
5-101
................................................................................................................................. 5-109
5-109
....................................................................................... 5-111
5-111
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xi
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................ 5-126
5-126
.................................................................................................................... 5-131
5-131
.............................................................................................................................. 5-135
5-135
......................................................................................................... 5-146
5-146
................................................................................................................................................................... 5-147
5-147
.............................................................................................................................................. 5-152
5-152
................................................................................................................................................. 5-154
5-154
...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-176
5-176
...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-179
5-179
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... 5-181
5-181
........................................................................... 5-182
5-182
........................................................................................................................................... 5-186
5-186
.................................................................................................................................................. 5-190
5-190
.............................................................. 5-451
5-451
................................................................................................................................................ 5-453
5-453
............................................................................... 5-456
5-456
Procedure 5-47: Retrieve information related to equipment protection groups ............................................ 5-457
5-457
Procedure 5-48: Retrieve and edit optical channel parameters ........................................................................... 5-459
5-459
Procedure 5-49: Diagnose equipment
.......................................................................................................................... 5-460
5-460
........................................................................................................................... 5-463
5-463
................................................. 5-465
5-465
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................ 5-489
5-489
..................................................................................................................... 5-497
5-497
......................................................................... 5-520
5-520
.................................................................................................................................... 5-531
5-531
........................................................................................................................................ 5-548
5-548
11QPE24 L2 Features
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-1
11QPE24 Quality of Service (QOS) .................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6-3
11QPE24 QOS CLI commands ........................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6-5
11QPE24 Ethernet Ring Protection .................................................................................................................................... 6-9
6-9
11QPE24 ERP CLI commands .......................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6-14
11QPE24 Ethernet OAM ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6-15
11QPE24 Ethernet OAM CLI commands ..................................................................................................................... 6-27
6-27
11QPE24 Port Mirroring
..................................................................................................................................................... 6-29
6-29
..................................................................................................................... 6-32
6-32
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 6-47
6-47
.................................................................................................................................... 6-49
6-49
.......................................................................................................................................... 6-53
6-53
................................................................................................ 6-58
6-58
............................................................................................................................. 7-5
7-5
Procedure 7-2: Create an Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) ................................................................ 7-7
7-7
Procedure 7-3: Display Alarm Assignment Profiles .................................................................................................. 7-10
7-10
Procedure 7-4: Display Alarm Assignment Profiles assigned to specific entities
Procedure 7-5: Manage ASAP profile
............................................................................................................................ 7-12
7-12
.......................................... 7-11
7-11
.................................................................... 7-14
7-14
............................................................................................................................. 7-16
7-16
............................................................................................................................... 7-18
7-18
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-19
7-19
................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-24
7-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xv
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... 7-25
7-25
Procedure 7-11: Display active alarms or alarm level on a shelf or slot/card .................................................. 7-26
7-26
Procedure 7-12: View alarms history log
...................................................................................................................... 7-27
7-27
............................................................................................................................................................... 7-30
7-30
.............................................................................................................. 7-31
7-31
.......................................................................................................... 8-3
8-3
..................................................................................................... 8-5
8-5
............................................................................................... 8-8
8-8
..................................................................................................... 8-12
8-12
.............................................................................................. 8-15
8-15
..................................................................................................... 8-18
8-18
................................................................................................... 8-22
8-22
...................................................................................................... 8-24
8-24
......................................................................................................... 8-27
8-27
Procedure 8-7: Take an external timing reference out of service for maintenance purposes
Procedure 8-8: Take an external timing input port out (BITS) out-of-service
Procedure 8-9: Restore timing reference
.................... 8-30
8-30
................................................ 8-32
8-32
...................................................................................................................... 8-34
8-34
................................................................................... 8-36
8-36
Procedure 8-11: Retrieve provisioning and state information of external timing references
.................... 8-38
8-38
Procedure 8-12: Retrieve provisioning and state information of external timing input ports
................... 8-39
8-39
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xvi
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................ 8-41
8-41
............................................................................................... 8-43
8-43
...................................................................... 9-16
9-16
........................................................................................................ 9-30
9-30
.................................................................................................... 9-34
9-34
Procedure 9-8: Retrieve configuration parameters and status information of an SNC protection
group ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-36
9-36
10
................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-1
Introduction
Protection
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10-4
Provisioning procedures
Procedure 10-1: Create protection group
.................................................................................................................... 10-16
10-16
............................................................................................................................................................... 10-17
10-17
............................................................................................................................................................... 10-19
10-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xvii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... 10-27
10-27
........................................................................................................... 10-29
10-29
............................................................................................................... 10-40
10-40
............................................................................................................................................................ 10-50
10-50
Procedure 10-10: Provision wave keys on an encoder port to support dangling OT procedure ............. 10-55
10-55
Wave Key Encoder .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-57
10-57
Procedure 10-11: Set expected network output power ........................................................................................... 10-58
10-58
Procedure 10-12: View wave keys (decoder ports) ................................................................................................. 10-59
10-59
Wave Key Decoder .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-60
10-60
Procedure 10-13: Clear wave keys ................................................................................................................................ 10-62
10-62
Procedure 10-14: Set power ............................................................................................................................................. 10-63
10-63
Set Power ................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-64
10-64
Procedure 10-15: View channel power summary
.................................................................................................... 10-65
10-65
................................................................................................. 10-69
10-69
................................................................ 10-72
10-72
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 10-83
10-83
....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-86
10-86
.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-94
10-94
...................................................................................................................................................... 10-97
10-97
............................................................................................................................... 10-109
10-109
................................................................................................................... 10-114
10-114
............................................................................................................................................................. 10-115
10-115
............................................................................................... 10-117
10-117
.................................................................................. 10-119
10-119
.............................................................. 10-120
10-120
................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11-1
Introduction
Cross-connection types ......................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11-2
Different ways to create a cross-connection ................................................................................................................. 11-7
11-7
Different ways to modify a cross-connection ............................................................................................................... 11-8
11-8
Provisioning procedures
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xix
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................ 11-10
11-10
.............................................................................................................. 11-15
11-15
................................................................................................................ 11-18
11-18
................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12-1
.......................................................................................................... 12-10
12-10
...................................................................................................... 12-11
12-11
......................................................................................................................................................... 12-13
12-13
................................................................................................. 12-17
12-17
................................................................................................... 12-19
12-19
...................................................................................................................................................... 12-20
12-20
.......................................................................................................................................... 12-21
12-21
............................................................................................................................ 12-23
12-23
.................................................................................................................................. 12-26
12-26
................................................................................................................................................... 12-29
12-29
............................................................................................................ 12-30
12-30
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 12-10: Connect Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 to 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S ..................... 12-34
12-34
13
................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13-1
................................................................................................................................. 13-7
13-7
................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14-1
................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15-1
............................................................................................................................................ 15-8
15-8
................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16-1
................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16-3
............................................................................................................................. 16-6
16-6
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................ 16-25
16-25
....................................................................................................................... 16-52
16-52
...................................................................... 16-55
16-55
............................................................................................................... 16-58
16-58
..................................................................................................................... 16-61
16-61
Procedure 16-8: Modify the threshold settings of a TCA profile ....................................................................... 16-63
16-63
Procedure 16-9: Retrieve the threshold settings of a TCA profile ..................................................................... 16-65
16-65
Procedure 16-10: Delete a TCA profile ....................................................................................................................... 16-66
16-66
Procedure 16-11: Retrieve a list of facilities that use a particular TCA profile
............................................ 16-67
16-67
.................................................................................................................................................................... 16-70
16-70
.................................................................................................... 16-72
16-72
........................................................................................ 16-74
16-74
................................................................................................................................................... 16-75
16-75
............................................................................................................... 16-77
16-77
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................... 16-81
16-81
........................................................................................................................... 16-93
16-93
......................................................................................................................................... 16-94
16-94
.............................................................................................................................................. 16-95
16-95
........................................................................................................................................................ 16-96
16-96
............................................................................................................................................ 16-97
16-97
................................................................................................................................... 16-99
16-99
........................................................................................... 16-100
16-100
................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17-1
................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17-3
................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-6
17-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxiii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................... 17-14
17-14
................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18-1
................................................................................. 18-14
18-14
Procedure 18-4: Switch from the current release to the new release ................................................................ 18-18
18-18
Procedure 18-5: Switch back from the current release and database to previous release
......................... 18-20
18-20
Procedure 18-6: Make the current release software the permanent active software ................................... 18-22
18-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxiv
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... 18-31
18-31
Routine procedures
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19-1
................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-2
19-2
Supporting procedures
Overview
................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20-1
General information
.............................................................................................................................................................. 20-5
20-5
...................................................................................... 20-6
20-6
...................................................................................................................................................................... 20-8
20-8
........................................................................................................................................................ 20-14
20-14
................................................................................................................................................ 20-15
20-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxv
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tool tip
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-16
20-16
.................................................................................................................................................................. 20-17
20-17
Common Commands
......................................................................................................................................................... 20-18
20-18
............................................................................................................................................................. 20-23
20-23
............ 20-37
20-37
Procedure 20-3: Logout from Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
........ 20-41
20-41
.................................................................................................................................... 20-48
20-48
........................................................................................................................... 20-51
20-51
................................................................................................................ 20-52
20-52
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxvi
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of tables
1
...................................................................... xlix
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................. 1-39
1-6
1-7
............................................................. 1-59
1-8
............................................................ 1-60
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
3-1
3-2
3-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
................................................................................................................................................ 1-21
1-21
.................................................... 1-36
................................................................. 1-37
.............................................................................. 1-41
............................................................................................................................................. 2-13
2-13
........................................................................................................... 2-13
........................................................................................................... 2-32
................................................................................................. 2-35
........................................................................... 3-6
..................................................................................................................... 3-19
............................................................................................................................ 3-81
...................................................................... 5-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxvii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
Value ranges for the shelf field in the AID depending on the shelf type
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
8-1
8-2
8-3
10-1
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
............................................................................................. 5-119
......................................................................................................................... 5-137
................................................................................... 5-486
............................................................................................... 5-489
................................................................................................... 5-491
............................................................................. 5-492
.............................................................. 5-494
.......................................... 5-549
.... 5-549
.......................................................................................................................... 5-550
................................................................................................................................. 5-555
....................................................................................................................................... 5-571
.............................................................. 5-571
.............................................................................................................................. 5-576
........................................................................................................ 5-577
............................................................................................................. 16-8
................................................................................................................... 16-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxviii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-5
16-6
16-7
16-8
16-9
......................................................................................................................... 16-13
.................................................................................................................... 16-13
................................................................................................................. 16-15
........................................................................................................... 16-15
................................................................................................................. 16-16
......................................................................................... 16-21
............................................................................................... 16-21
............................................................................................................ 16-22
............................................................................................................................... 16-23
................................................................................................................................................ 16-36
16-36
......................................................................................................... 16-28
.................................................................................................................................... 16-49
................................................................................................................................................ 16-51
16-51
............................................................................................................ 16-89
18-1
....................................................................................................................... 18-15
20-1
20-2
.......................................................................................................................................... 20-30
................................................................................................ 20-37
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxix
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxx
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
1-1
......................................................................................... 1-6
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
Multilabel (PSS-64)
1-6
.......................................................... 1-28
1-7
.......................................................... 1-29
1-8
.......................................................... 1-30
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market) .................................................................. 1-40
1-13
............................................................. 1-60
1-14
............................................................ 1-61
3-1
4-1
5-1
Shelf interconnection
............................................................................................................................................. 5-47
5-47
5-2
Shelf interconnection
............................................................................................................................................. 5-51
5-51
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
.................................................................................................................... 1-14
................................................................................................................................ 1-15
................................................................................................................................... 1-16
.............................................................................................................................................. 1-17
1-17
...................................................... 1-31
.......................................................... 1-32
.................................................................................................... 1-33
..................................................................................................................... 4-3
................................................................................................ 5-100
................................................................................... 5-104
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxi
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8
Example for highlighted cards in the display pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
........ 5-122
5-9
6-1
6-2
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
............................................................................. 9-16
9-5
............................................................................. 9-17
11-1
14-1
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-6
16-7
................................................................................................ 16-40
16-8
................................................................................................ 16-44
16-9
................................................................................................ 16-48
................................................................................................ 16-53
....................................... 5-166
......................................................................................................................... 6-10
................................................................................................................. 6-11
............................................................................. 0-1
......................................................................................... 9-10
............................... 11-14
....................................................................................................................... 16-6
................................................................................................ 16-19
...................................................................................................................................... 16-33
19-1
................................................................................................................................................... 19-6
19-6
19-2
19-3
19-4
19-5
19-6
.......................................................................................................................................... 19-8
................................................................................................................................................. 19-8
19-8
................................................................................................................................................... 19-9
19-9
.................................................................................................................................... 19-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-7
........................................................................................................................ 19-13
19-8
19-9
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
................................................................................................................................................... 19-14
19-14
....................................................................................................................................... 19-16
..................................................................................................................................... 20-11
........................................................................................................................... 20-12
................................................................................................................ 20-13
....................................................................................................................... 20-14
................................................................................................................................................. 20-16
20-16
............................................................................................................................... 20-17
........................................................................................................... 20-18
....................................................................................................................................... 20-20
20-20
.......................................................................................................................................... 20-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxiii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxiv
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
2
2-2
2-3
2-4
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-52
2-52
2-5
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-53
2-53
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
Change password
2-12
Send a short free form text message to other users ..................................................................................... 2-63
2-13
Modify command access security level assigned to a TL1 command. ................................................ 2-65
2-14
2-15
Copy security sensible files or data from/to an NE to/from a remote file server
2-16
2-17
2-18
........................................................................................ 2-77
2-19
...................................................................................... 2-79
2-20
........................................................................................ 2-81
2-21
2-22
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-42
2-42
..................................................................................................... 2-45
............................................................................................ 2-49
.................................................................................................................... 2-55
........................................................................................................................................................ 2-56
2-56
............................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-59
.................................................................................................................................................... 2-61
2-61
................................................ 2-67
............................ 2-69
................ 2-75
................................................................................................... 2-76
............................................................................................................. 2-83
................................................................................................................... 2-86
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxv
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-23
........................................................................................... 2-88
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
Change password
2-29
2-30
.......................................................................................................................................... 2-104
2-31
.......................................................................................................................................... 2-105
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-45
...................................................................................................................................... 2-129
2-129
2-46
...................................................................................................................................... 2-131
2-131
2-47
2-48
..................................................................................................................................... 2-90
................................................................................................................................ 2-97
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-100
2-100
........................................................................................................................................ 2-106
..................................................................................................... 2-108
................................................................................................................ 2-109
........................................................................... 2-111
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-115
2-115
........................................................................................................................................................... 2-117
2-117
............................................................................................................................. 2-119
.................................................................................................................................. 2-120
....................................................................................................................................... 2-122
.......................................................................................................................... 2-124
....................................................................................................................................... 2-126
......................................................................................................................... 2-127
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxvi
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................ 3-27
3-2
........................................................................................................................ 3-29
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
.......................................................................................................... 3-42
3-9
.......................................................................................................... 3-43
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
................................................................................................................ 3-31
............................................................................................................ 3-34
................................................................................................ 3-36
............................................................................................................... 3-38
............................................................................................................................. 3-41
.............................................................................................................. 3-44
................................................................... 3-59
............................. 3-63
....................................................................................................... 3-66
................................................................................... 3-69
...................................................................................................................................... 3-75
.................................................................................... 3-78
...................................................................................................................................... 3-80
........................................................................... 3-81
........................................................................................ 3-85
........................................................................................................................ 3-89
................................................................................................................................ 3-91
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxvii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
.......................................................................................................... 3-106
3-34
.......................................................................................................... 3-109
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-96
3-96
............................................................................................................................................ 3-98
................................................................................... 3-102
............................................................................................. 3-104
............................................... 3-113
......................................................................................................... 3-115
.................................................................................................................................................. 3-127
3-127
................................................................................................................................... 3-140
........................................................................................................................................... 3-143
........................................................................................................................................ 3-146
............................................................................................................................... 3-148
.......................................................................................................... 3-93
............................................................................................. 4-2
......................................................................................................... 5-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxviii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
Deprovision equipment
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
........................................................................ 5-89
5-15
....................................................................... 5-92
5-16
5-17
5-18
Provision an GBE/GBE10
5-19
5-20
Remove a facility
.................................................................................................................................................. 5-107
5-107
5-21
Restore a facility
................................................................................................................................................... 5-109
5-109
5-22
......................................................................................................... 5-111
5-23
........................................................................................................ 5-113
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
Reboot NE
5-28
.................................................................................................................................. 5-50
.............................................................................................................. 5-53
................................................................................................. 5-57
......................................................................................................................................... 5-64
................................................................................................................... 5-70
........................................................................................................... 5-72
........................................................................... 5-74
.................................................................................................................... 5-76
....................................................................................... 5-95
.......................................................................................................... 5-97
................................................................................................................................... 5-99
................................................................. 5-101
.................................................................................... 5-115
....................................................................................................................... 5-125
............................................................................................................................................................... 5-129
5-129
...................................................................................................................................... 5-131
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xxxix
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-29
................................................................................................................................................ 5-135
5-135
5-30
5-31
5-32
Delete a shelf
5-33
Test LEDs
5-34
Create a card
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-40
Reboot card
5-41
Delete a card
5-42
5-43
5-44
.............................................................................. 5-448
5-45
................................................................................ 5-451
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-49
Diagnose equipment
5-50
5-51
5-52
........................................................................................................................... 5-146
.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-151
5-151
................................................................................................................................................................ 5-152
5-152
........................................................................................................................................................... 5-175
5-175
................................................................................................................. 5-180
............................................................................................. 5-182
................................................................... 5-185
............................................................................................................................................................. 5-186
5-186
........................................................................................................................................................... 5-188
5-188
........................................................................................................................... 5-402
................................................................................................. 5-456
............................................................................................. 5-459
............................................................................................................................................ 5-460
............................................................................................................................................ 5-463
................................................................... 5-465
11QPE24 L2 Features
6-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xl
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View NE alarms
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
......................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-3
............................................................................... 7-7
................................................................................................................. 7-10
....................................................................................................................................... 7-23
7-23
................................................................................................................................................. 7-25
7-25
........................................................................................................................................ 7-27
................................................................................................................................ 7-31
........................................................................................ 7-35
8-2
............................................................................................................... 8-8
8-3
............................................................................................................. 8-15
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
.......................................................................................................................... 8-3
................................................................................................................... 8-22
..................................................................................................................... 8-24
........................................................................................................................ 8-27
................................... 8-30
............................................................... 8-32
..................................................................................................................................... 8-34
..................................................................................................... 8-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xli
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
8-11
..................................... 8-38
8-12
.................................... 8-39
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
..................................................................................................................... 9-32
9-7
.................................................................................................................... 9-34
9-8
..................................................................................................................... 9-20
................................................................................................................... 9-27
.............. 9-36
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
...................................................................................................................................... 10-16
................................................................................................................................ 10-22
...................................................................................................................................... 10-27
............................................................................................................................. 10-29
......................................................................................................................... 10-34
............................................................................................................ 10-36
................................................................................................................................. 10-40
................................. 10-55
............................................................................................................... 10-58
..................................................................................................................... 10-59
.................................................................................................................................................... 10-62
10-62
................................................................................................................................................................. 10-63
10-63
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xlii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 10-69
.................................................................................... 10-72
.................................................. 10-75
...................................... 10-78
................................................................................. 10-83
................................................................................................................................................. 10-92
10-92
................................................................................................ 10-96
.................................................................................................................................................... 10-116
10-116
12
Create a cross-connection
11-2
Modify a cross-connection
11-3
Delete a cross-connection
11-4
.................................................................................................................................. 11-10
................................................................................................................................ 11-15
.................................................................................................................................. 11-18
12-2
12-3
12-4
............................................................................................................................ 12-10
........................................................................................................................ 12-11
................................................................................................................... 12-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xliii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-5
..................................................................................................................... 12-19
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
............................................................................................................... 12-28
.............................................................................................................................. 12-30
14
13-2
Release Loopback
13-3
16
................................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13-7
15
......................................... 12-34
........................................................................................................................... 14-4
15-2
15-3
16-2
16-3
Retrieve PM data
16-4
Initialize PM registers
16-5
16-6
16-7
16-8
16-9
............................................................................................................ 16-39
.................................................................................................................................................. 16-47
16-47
......................................................................................................................................... 16-52
16-52
....................................................................................... 16-55
................................................................................................................................. 16-58
....................................................................................................................................... 16-61
....................................................................................... 16-65
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xliv
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... 16-66
16-66
................................................................ 16-67
....................................................................................................... 16-69
............................................................................................................................................. 16-76
................................................................................................................................... 16-77
..................................................................................................................................................... 16-80
16-80
18
............................................................................................................................... 16-82
17-2
17-3
17-4
Download a database from a remote file server to the standby database ......................................... 17-27
17-5
17-6
17-7
................................................................................ 17-17
......................................... 17-22
18-2
Download a software generic from a remote file server to the standby software load .................. 18-9
18-3
18-4
18-5
Switch back from the current release and database to previous release
18-6
18-7
18-8
................................................................................................... 18-14
.................................................................................. 18-18
........................................... 18-20
..................................................... 18-22
............................................................................................................................. 18-25
........................................................................................ 18-31
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xlv
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
20
Routine procedures
19-1
19-2
19-3
............................................................................................................................................ 19-3
19-3
........................................................................................................................... 19-6
Supporting procedures
20-1
20-2
Call up the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
20-3
Logout from Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
20-4
20-5
20-6
Initial NE configuration
20-7
20-8
............................................................................................................ 20-27
............................. 20-37
.......................... 20-41
............................................................................................................................................. 20-46
...................................................................................................................................................... 20-48
20-48
..................................................................................................................................... 20-49
............................................................................................................................................. 20-51
.................................................................................................................................. 20-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xlvi
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Purpose
If the system is a WDM only application the WebUI is to be used (see The
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
If the system is a OCS only application the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC is to be
used (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
(p. 20-3)).
If the system is a mixed application the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC is to be used.
For configuring WDM specific parts the WebUI is to be started from the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation
Craft Terminal (ZIC) (p. 20-3)).
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Supported systems
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) supports WDM functionality
and OCS functionality within one node. The node consists of one WDM main shelf with
optional extension shelves and/or one OCS main shelf with optional extension shelves.
The WDM functionality is supported by Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S shelves. The OCS functionality is
supported by Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 shelves.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xlvii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Conventions used
The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numbering restarts
at 1 in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, the page
numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the third page in
chapter 2.
Cross-references
Cross-reference conventions are identical with the conventions used for page numbering
The first number in a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.
Keyword blocks
This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specific text
passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicate the
contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.
Typographical conventions
Text appearing on a graphical user interface (GUI), such as menu options, window
titles or push buttons:
Provision, Delete, Apply, Close, OK (push-button)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xlviii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in this document can be found in the Glossary unless it can be
assumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.
Related information
Table 1
Document title
Document code
8DG-61259-AAAA-TAZZQ
Provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems with the relevant information
and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury. Furthermore, the Safety
Guide is useful to prevent material damage to the equipment. The Safety Guide
must be read by the responsible technical personnel before performing relevant
work on the system. The valid version of the document must always be kept close
to the equipment.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TQZZA
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. The manual
demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative
tasks.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TMZZA
8DG-61259-AAAA-TKZZA
A step-by-step guide to system installation and set up. It also includes information
needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64)
8DG-61259-AAAA-TLZZA
A step-by-step guide to system installation and set up. It also includes information
needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 and PSS-32)
8DG-61259-AAAA-TJZZA
A step-by-step guide to system installation and set up. It also includes information
needed for pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS CLI Command Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-THZZA
Provides information about the Command Line Interface (CLI) for Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS and describes the CLI attributes and commands.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
xlix
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Table 1
Document title
Document code
8DG-61259-AAAA-TEZZA
(continued)
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations for the EPT.
The manual demonstrates how to perform system provisioning, operations, and
commissioning tasks.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS OCS TL1 Command Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TFZZA
Describes the external TL1 interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in terms of TL1
command, responses, and notification definitions.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Photonics TL1 Command Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TGZZA
Describes the external TL1 interface for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS in terms of TL1
command, responses, and notification definitions.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS GMPLS/GMRE Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TWZZA
8DG-61259-AAAA-TNZZA
8DG-61259-AAAA-TXZZA
Provides information for accessing the 1354 RM-PhM and using it to configure
and manage the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS DCN Planning and Engineering Guide (Photonic
applications)
8DG-61259-AAAA-TPZZA
8DG-61259-AAAA-TRZZA
8DG-61259-AAAA-TYZZA
Provides instructions for use and descriptions of the features of the Smart Compact
Ethernet Demarcation Device (Smart cEDD).
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Commissioning and Power Balancing Tool User Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TBZZA
Provides instructions for use and descriptions of the features of the Commissioning
and Power Balancing (CPB) Tool.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Electronic Documentation Library
8DG-61259-AAAA-TZZZA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
l
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
These documents can be downloaded from the Alcatel-Lucent Online Customer Support
Site (OLCS) (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com) or through your Local Customer
Support.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
li
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
lii
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter on safety provides users of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems with the
relevant information and safety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury.
Furthermore, this chapter may be useful to prevent material damage to the equipment.
This chapter on safety must be read by the responsible technical personnel before carrying
out relevant work on the system. The valid version of this document must always be kept
close to the equipment.
Contents
General notes on safety
1-3
1-4
1-7
1-11
1-12
Laser safety
1-13
1-20
Equipment grounding
1-25
Electrostatic discharge
1-26
1-34
Transportation
1-35
Storage
1-38
Installation
1-42
1-49
1-53
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-63
Event of failure
1-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section provides general information on the structure of safety instructions and
summarizes general safety requirements.
Contents
Structure of safety statements
1-4
1-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
E
L
MP
CAUTION
Lifting hazard
SA
F
G
H
Item
Structure element
Purpose
Safety symbol
Signal word
Hazard type
Safety message
Avoidance message
Identifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signal words
Meaning
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning symbols
Figure 1-1 Warning symbols defined for safety instructions:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
g_sfg_0001
Legend
1
13
Noxious substance
Electric shock
14
Explosion hazard
15
16
Risk of suffocation
Electromagnetic radiation
17
Pinch hazard
18
19
Inhalation hazard
Laceration hazard
20
Slip hazard
Corrosive substance
21
Trip hazard
10
22
Hazard of falling
11
Hot surface
23
Arc-flash hazard
12
24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This topic covers basic safety aspects relating to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) with which you must be familiar prior to installing or using the
product.
General safety requirements
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment, ensure that you read,
understand, and follow the following general safety requirements prior to installing or
using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
Ensure that transport, storage, installation, and operation of the system are conducted
only under specified permissible conditions. See the accompanying documentation
and information on the system.
Ensure that installation, configuration, and disassembly of the system are conducted
only by suitably qualified personnel and with reference to the appropriate
documentation. Due to the complexity of the system, personnel require special
training.
Follow all instructions marked on the product, including both general instructions and
the stated methods for avoiding hazards.
Do not operate the system unless all appropriate safety measures, precautions, and
instructions have been taken or followed. Any faults and errors that might affect
safety must be reported immediately by the user to appropriate personnel responsible
for safety.
Operate the system only under the environmental conditions and with the connections
described in the documentation.
Modifications to any part of the system, including software, should be conducted only
by trained and qualified personnel and only in a manner as authorized by
Alcatel-Lucent. Alcatel-Lucent disclaims liability for any damages arising from
unauthorized modifications, and unauthorized modifications may lead to a voiding of
any and all warranties.
Ensure that only components that are recommended by the manufacturer and are
listed in the procurement documents are used.
Avoid use of non-system software. The use or installation of non-system software can
adversely affect the normal functioning of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use tested and virus-free data carriers (memory sticks, DVDs, CDs, ) only.
Ensure that any work that has any impact on safety facilities, the clearance of faults,
and the maintenance of equipment are carried out only by trained and qualified
personnel and in conjunction with the appropriate documentation. Use only approved
measuring and test equipment.
Ensure that calibrations, special tests after repairs, and regular safety checks are
conducted, documented, and archived.
Use only specified chemicals or materials.
Consult material safety data sheets (MSDSs) or the equivalent information when
working with hazardous chemicals.
Observe the following safety instructions, which are of particular importance for
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems:
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems contain optical circuit packs that can emit laser
radiation assessed as IEC Hazard Level 1M.
Therefore, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems must be installed in restricted locations,
according to IEC 60825-2 and EN 60825-2, where there is no ready access to the
general public, but only to authorized persons who have received adequate training in
laser safety.
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the
marking label.
This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part
of the building installation.
This equipment is intended to be provided with an appropriate branch circuit
protection on both the A and B 48/60 V DC input feeds as follows:
40 A (max.) for the 1830 PSS-16 system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect up to six (6) power supply connections when removing power from the
system.
Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to the building ground.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guides which
are available for PSS-16/32/32S, PSS-36, and PSS-64.
During installation and handling (for example transport), heavy equipment like racks
or pre-installed subracks must be secured to avoid tipping over.
For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Installation and System Turn-Up Guides which are available for PSS-16/32/32S,
PSS-36, and PSS-64.
Install only equipment identified in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and
System Turn-Up Guides for PSS-16/32/32S, PSS-36, and PSS-64 provided with this
product. Use of other equipment may result in improper connection of circuitry
leading to fire or injury to persons.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not disassemble this product. Installation and
service should be performed by trained personnel only. Opening or removing covers
or circuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect
re-assembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequently used.
If a system with dual power feed is operated with only one Power Supply, Filter, and
Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical connectors on the
backplane carrying a voltage of 48 V DC can be touched. This can cause electric
shocks. Always use both Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8)
and Fan Units (FAN3T8) to ensure safe operation.
Slots and openings in this product are provided for ventilation. To protect the product
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product
should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts, which could result in a risk of fire or
electrical shock.
Never spill liquids of any kind on the product.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
General notes on safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12
Laser safety
1-13
1-20
Equipment grounding
1-25
Electrostatic discharge
1-26
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
acoustic noise.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser safety
System design
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system complies with the regulations FDA/CDRH 21 CFR
1040.10 and 1040.11 issued by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH)
of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) as a Class I laser product and with the
IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60825-1 standards as a Class 1 Optical Fiber Telecommunication laser
product.
The system has been designed to help ensure that the operating personnel are not
endangered by laser radiation during normal system operation. The safety measures
specified in the FDA/CDRH regulations and the international standards IEC 60825-Part 1
and 2, respectively, are met.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Labels
1830 PSS-16/PSS-32
The following figure shows the multilabel affixed on the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack. It includes the laser warning
label.
Figure 1-2 Multilabel (1830 PSS-16/PSS-32)
Note: Here, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf label is shown. Safety information
on shelf labels for 1830 PSS-16 and PSS-32 is identical, only the list of supported
power supplies is different.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-32S
The following figure shows the multilabel affixed on the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32S subrack. It includes the laser warning label.
Figure 1-3 Multilabel (1830 PSS-32S)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-36
The following figure shows the multilabel affixed on the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36 subrack. It includes the laser warning label.
Figure 1-4 Multilabel (1830 PSS-36)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS-64
The following figure shows the multilabel affixed on the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 subrack. It includes the laser warning label.
Figure 1-5 Multilabel (PSS-64)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Beware of the following potential sources of danger which will remain despite all safety
measures taken:
Laser classes
The maximum output power of laser radiation depends on the type of laser diode used.
The international standards IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60825-1, respectively, as well as the
FDA/CDRH regulations define the maximum output power of laser radiation for each
laser class in accordance with the wavelength.
The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission or the reflected
laser emission to cause injury to the eye or skin during normal operating conditions.
Laser safety instructions
Read the relevant descriptions in the manuals before taking equipment into operation
or carrying out any installation and maintenance work on the optical port units, and
follow the instructions. Ignoring the instructions may result in hazardous laser
radiation exposure.
Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber
microscope, because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits
significantly increases the risk of eye damage.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is still switched on.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
If you are not sure that the optical source is switched off, check to ensure that the
optical switch is switched off by measuring the output power with an optical power
meter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Laser safety
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Laser radiation
WARNING
Laser hazard
Devices that are designated as having hazard level 1M laser radiation can cause damage
to eyes.
Do not view directly with non-attenuating optical instruments.
WARNING
Laser hazard
Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 MDIO connections are not protected and may defeat the
Automatic (Optical) Power Reduction (APR) when a fault occurs in the power filter or
associated circuitry, and when repairs are being made to the power filter module on
which the MDIO connector is located.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product complies with the applicable IEC standards and the
Food and Drug Administrations Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(FDA/CDRH) regulations. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product conforms to Class 1
Laser Product according to IEC standards and FDA/CDRH regulations.
FDA/CDRH regulations
Laser products are classified in accordance with the FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR 1010 and
1040. The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission to cause
injury to the eye or skin during normal operating conditions.
In the United States, lasers and laser systems in the infrared wavelength range (greater
than 700 nm) are assigned to one of the following classes. Please refer to FDA/CDRH
laser classification (p. 1-20):
Class I
Class IIIb
Class IV
Laser classification is dependent upon operating wavelength, output power and fiber
mode field diameter (core diameter).
IEC requirements
Class 1
Class 1M
Class 3R
Class 3B
Class 4
Laser classification is dependent upon the following: operating wavelength, output power,
fiber core/mode field diameter, and time base. Other parameters may be required for
non-fibered laser products, such as beam divergence/diameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table cites the FDA/CDRH classification of typical Alcatel-Lucent laser
products at the designated wavelengths that terminate into a single-mode 8.8 m mode
field diameter fiber. Different mode field diameters and multimode fibers will yield
different optical power levels.
Table 1-1
Laser class
Wavelength
1310 nm
1.53 mW
+1.85 dBm
1550 nm
8.52 mW
+9.3 dBm
1310 nm
500 mW
+27 dBm
1550 nm
500 mW
+27 dBm
1310 nm
> 500 mW
1550 nm
> 500 mW
IIIb
IV
Explanatory note: In the United States, lasers and laser systems are assigned to one of the
following classes: Roman numerals I, IIa, II, IIIa, IIIb, and IV. Classes I, IIIb and IV
apply to lasers of all wavelengths. Classes IIa, II and IIIa apply only to those lasers
operating within the visible wavelength range (400-700 nm). Alcatel-Lucent laser
products typically operate in the infrared wavelength range (greater than 700 nm) and,
therefore, are primarily in the Class I or Class IIIb classifications.
OFCS hazard levels
The maximum mean power for each hazard level for the most important wavelengths and
optical fiber types used in optical fiber communications (OFCS) (see Hazard level
assignment (p. 1-22)) is presented in the following table from IEC 60825-2 standard. For
an OFCS, the hazard level from IEC 60825-2 is closely related to the laser classification
procedure in IEC 60825-1.
Table 1-2
Wavelength and
fiber type
633 nm (MM)
Hazard level
1
1M
2M
0,39 mW
3,9 mW
1 mW
10 mW
(-4,1 dBm)
(+5,9 dBm)
(0 dBm)
(+ 10 dBm)
3R
See Terms and
Definitions 3.9 in
3B
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
the Standard
780 nm (MM)
850 nm (MM)
0,57 mW
5,6 mW
(-2,5 dBm)
(+7,5 dBm)
0,78 mW
7,8 mW
(-1,1 dBm)
(+8,9 dBm)
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-2
(continued)
Wavelength and
Hazard level
fiber type
980 nm (MM)
1M
1,42 mW
14,1 mW
(+1,53 dBm)
(+11,5 dBm)
1,42 mW
2,66 mW
(+1,53 dBm)
(+4,2 dBm)
15,6 mW
156 mW
(+12 dBm)
(+21,9 dBm)
15,6 mW
42,8 mW
(+12 dBm)
(+16,3 dBm)
10 mW
384 mW
(+10 dBm)
(+25,8 dBm)
1420 nm (SM)
10 mW
115 mW
(+10 dBm)
(+20,6 dBm)
10 mW
136 mW
(+10 dBm)
(+21,3 dBm)
980 nm (SM)
1310 nm (MM)
1310 nm (SM)
1550 nm (SM)
2M
3R
3B
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
7,26 mW
500 mW
(+8,6 dBm)
(+27 dBm)
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
80 mW
500 mW
(+19 dBm)
(+27 dBm)
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
500 mW
(+27 dBm)
Notes:
1.
Class 3R only exists if the maximum power is within five times the Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) of
Class 1. Please refer to the IEC 60825-1 Ed. 2.0 (2007) and IEC 60825-2 Ed. 3.1 (2007) standards for
detailed information.
2.
The fibre parameters used are the most conservative case. Listed figures for the = 1310 and 1550 nm are
calculated for a fibre 11 microns mode field diameter (MFD) and those for = 980 nm are for 7 microns
MFD.
3.
Many systems operating at 1550 nm with the use of erbium doped fibre amplifiers (EDFAs) pumped by 1480
nm or 980 nm lasers use transmission fibres with smaller MFDs. For example, 1550 nm dispersion shifted
fibre cables have upper limit values of MFD of 9,1 microns.
Hazard level refers to the potential hazard from laser emission at any location in an
end-to-end optical fiber communication system that may be accessible during service or
in the event of a failure. The assignment of hazard level uses the AELs for the classes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hazard levels for optical transmission equipment are assigned in either of the following
two ways:
The actual output power from the connector or the fiber cut.
If automatic power reduction is used, the output power at the connector or fiber cut at
one second after automatic power reduction takes place, provided that maximum
output and restart conditions are met.
Classifications for the following Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WDM circuit packs are IEC
Class 1M and FDA/CDRH Class IIIB:
ALPHG
AHPHG
AHPLG
CWR8
CWR8B
CWR8-88
WR8-88A
WR8-88AF
WR2-88
AM2325A
ALPFGT
AM2125A
AM2125B
AM2318A
A2P2125 Hybrid Amplifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MESH4
RA2P
Based on the above, individual packs are affixed with a small Hazard Level 1M label
shown in the following illustration. Additional laser safety warnings are listed on product
shelf labeling, see Figure 1-5, Multilabel (PSS-64) (p. 1-17) and Figure 1-2,
Multilabel (1830 PSS-16/PSS-32) (p. 1-14).
All other Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WDM circuit packs are IEC Class 1 and FDA/CDRH
Class I and, therefore, are assigned a hazard level 1.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TDM circuit pack and module classification
Classifications for the following Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TDM circuit packs and
modules are IEC Class 1M and FDA/CDRH Class IIIB:
130SCUP
11QCUPC
24ANMB
24ET1GB
8ET1GB
10SD10G
24SDM
XS-64.2b
All other Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TDM circuit packs are IEC Class 1 and FDA/CDRH
Class I and, therefore, are assigned a hazard level 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Equipment grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment grounding
Importance of proper grounding
An essential aspect for both personal safety and equipment integrity is proper grounding.
To avoid differences of potential, a common ground (GRD) is used for all system part
including peripheral equipment, such as a craft terminal for example.
For safety reasons, each touchable metallic part is connected to GRD by design.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for more
detailed information regarding grounding.
CAUTION
Electric-shock hazard
If the system is not installed in MESH-BN grounding environment but in a star grounding
scheme, all electrical cables such as LAN or timing cables can carry dangerous electrical
current on their shielding.
Take extreme care when plugging or unplugging electrical cables in installations with
star grounding. Never touch grounded parts of the system with one hand when plugging
or unplugging electrical cables with the other hand.
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system is designed to permit the connection of the grounded
conductor of the DC supply circuit to the grounding conductor at the equipment.
1. This equipment must be connected directly to the DC supply system grounding
electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to
which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected.
2. This equipment must be located in the same immediate area (such as, adjacent
cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded
conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and also the
point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system shall not be grounded elsewhere.
3. The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as this equipment.
4. There must be no switching or disconnection devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electrostatic discharge
Introduction
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), caused by touching with the hand for example, can destroy
semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system is then no
longer assured.
Industry experience has shown that all semiconductor components can be damaged by
static electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The electrostatic
discharge can also affect the components indirectly via contacts or conductor tracks. The
electrostatic charges are produced by various charging effects of movement and contact
with other objects. Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials
are measured in areas with low relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause
damage can occur anywhere.
The barred-hand symbol
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD instructions
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can permanently destroy semiconductor components.
Observe the following ESD instructions to avoid damage to electrostatic-sensitive
components:
Assume that all solid-state components and assemblies are sensitive to ESD.
Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid electrostatic charging.
Touch the circuit packs at the edges or the insertion and removal facilities only.
Touch the SFP or XFP modules at the edges only.
Ensure that the rack is grounded.
Wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap (connected to the rack ESD bonding point,
for example).
Work in an ESD safe work area or workstation. An ESD safe work area should be
equipped with a grounded ESD wrist strap and a grounded ESD mat or ESD
dissipative work surface.
A grounded ESD mat or work surface must have a ground cord with one end attached
to the mat or surface and the other end connected to a ground point (the rack ESD
bonding point, for example). Do not work with ESD sensitive devices unless the area
is properly equipped.
Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to the rack ESD bonding point.
Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packaging. Circuit
packs and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitably
protected against build-up of charge.
Whenever possible, maintain the relative humidity of air above 20%.
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
At the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subrack, if there is any damage on the cable jackets
(e.g. cutting or scratching due to vibration or installation) there is the risk to short cut
48VDC with RTN or GND.
Always check the cable jackets at the strain relief brackets at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32S power supply filters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electric shock
DANGER
Electric-shock hazard
The 4-mm banana plug at the end of the ESD wrist-strap cord is intended to be only used
for connecting to the ESD jack on the rack/subrack ESD bonding point. Connecting the
banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply units may lead to the
risk of electric shock.
Never connect the banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply
units.
Figure 1-6 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack
Legend:
A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-7 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack
Legend:
A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-8 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 subrack
Legend:
A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-9 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subrack
Legend:
A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-10 ESD bonding point at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 subrack
Legend:
A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Specific safety areas
Electrostatic discharge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A
A
Legend:
2
Note: For working on ANSI installation (SNBF rack) use the ESD bonding point at
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To enable rapid orientation, safety instructions are given on the following pages, which
are assigned to various stages in the life cycle of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment
(deployment phases).
Deployment phases
Contents
Transportation
1-35
Storage
1-38
Installation
1-42
1-49
1-53
1-63
Event of failure
1-66
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Transportation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Transportation
Weight
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack weighs up to 125 kg (276 lbs), a
fully equipped rack up to 215 kg (474 lbs). A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subrack weighs up to 84.5 kg (186.3 lbs). A rack
equipped with two Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subracks
weighs up to 259 kg (571 lbs). Although Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subracks weigh less, a fully equipped subrack can still weigh more than
30 kg (66 lbs).
Such a fully equipped rack or subrack can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked
over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people and/or a lifting device to transport and position
the rack or subrack.
NOTICE
Damage to system components due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped rack or subrack can cause serious damage to the rack or subrack if it is
knocked over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people or a lifting device to transport and position the
rack or subrack.
Packaging
NOTICE
Adverse effect on operation due to incorrect packaging
Dampness and soiling can cause corrosion or tracking paths which can result in
malfunctioning of the system components. Shocks can cause damage.
Protect the system components against dampness, soiling, and shocks. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Transportation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environmental conditions
NOTICE
Damage to system components under extreme environmental conditions
Extreme environmental conditions can damage system components and cause
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the climatic limits for transportation and storage of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
equipment are complied with during transportation; please see Environmental
conditions for transportation (p. 1-36).
Environmental conditions for transportation
ETSI market
For the transportation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard
EN 300 019-1-2, class 2.3 Public transportation are met. This class applies to
transportation where no special precautions have been taken. The conditions covered
include transportation in unventilated enclosures and in non-weather-protected conditions
with restrictions on the general open-air climates, excluding cold climates.
For quick reference, Table 1-3, Temperature and humidity levels for transportation
(ETSI market) (p. 1-36) shows the most important climatic values specified in the
requirement.
Table 1-3
Conditions
Limits
40C (40F)
70C (158F)
40C (104F)
ANSI market
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Transportation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For quick reference, Table 1-4, Environmental conditions for transportation (ANSI
market) (p. 1-37) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 1-4
Conditions
Limits
40C (40F)
70C (158F)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Storage
Weight
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack weighs up to 125 kg (276 lbs), a
fully equipped rack up to 215 kg (474 lbs). A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subrack weighs up to 84.5 kg (186.3 lbs). A rack
equipped with two Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subracks
weighs up to 259 kg (571 lbs). Although Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subracks weigh less, a fully equipped subrack can still weigh more than
30 kg (66 lbs).
Such a fully equipped rack or subrack can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked
over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people and/or a lifting device to transport and position
the rack or subrack.
NOTICE
Damage to system components due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped rack or subrack can cause serious damage to the rack or subrack if it is
knocked over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people or a lifting device to transport and position the
rack or subrack.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Circuit packs must therefore always be kept in antistatic covers. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible. Always observe the ESD instructions (see Electrostatic
discharge (p. 1-26)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packaging
NOTICE
Adverse effect on operation due to incorrect packaging
Dampness and soiling can cause corrosion or tracking paths which can result in
malfunctioning of the system components. Shocks can cause damage.
Protect the system components against dampness, soiling, and shocks. Use the original
dissipative packaging if possible.
Environmental conditions
NOTICE
Damage to system components under extreme environmental conditions
Extreme environmental conditions can damage system components and cause
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the climatic limits for transportation and storage of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
equipment are complied with during storage; please see Environmental conditions for
storage (p. 1-39).
Environmental conditions for storage
ETSI market
For the storage phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN 300 019-1-1,
class 1.2 Weather-protected, not temperature-controlled storage locations are met. This
class applies to weather-protected storage having neither temperature nor humidity
control. The location may have openings directly to the open air, that means, it may be
only partly weather-protected.
For quick reference, Table 1-5, Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI
market) (p. 1-39) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 1-12, Temperature and humidity levels for
storage (ETSI market) (p. 1-40).
Table 1-5
Conditions
Limits
25C (13F)
55C (131F)
10%
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-5
Conditions
Limits
100%
Figure 1-12 Temperature and humidity levels for storage (ETSI market)
o
F
194
176
158
140
C
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
122
104
86
68
50
32
14
4
22
40
58
29
0.5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
g-pipg-0281
Legend:
1
Air temperature
ANSI market
For the storage phase, the following specifics of Telcordia Requirement GR-63-CORE
are met:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For quick reference, Table 1-6, Environmental conditions for storage (ANSI market)
(p. 1-41) shows the most important limits specified in the requirement.
Table 1-6
Conditions
Limits
40C (40F)
70C (158F)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installation
Risk of electric shock
WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Risk of short circuits when power is supplied to the High Power Connection, Fuse &
Alarm Panel (HPCFAP) during the installation of subrack power cables. Contact with
energized parts can cause serious personal injury.
Before connecting any subrack power cables be sure that all circuit breakers that are
located in the HPCFAP are in the OFF position.
Weight
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack weighs up to 125 kg (276 lbs), a
fully equipped rack up to 215 kg (474 lbs). A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subrack weighs up to 84.5 kg (186.3 lbs). A rack
equipped with two Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subracks
weighs up to 259 kg (571 lbs). Although Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subracks weigh less, a fully equipped subrack can still weigh more than
30 kg (66 lbs).
Such a fully equipped rack or subrack can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked
over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people and/or a lifting device to transport and position
the rack or subrack.
NOTICE
Damage to system components due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped rack or subrack can cause serious damage to the rack or subrack if it is
knocked over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people or a lifting device to transport and position the
rack or subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
Warning labels on the system and especially on the optical components warn of the
dangers of invisible laser radiation. Removed, concealed or illegible labels can lead to
incorrect action and thus cause serious injuries to the eyes of operating staff.
Ensure that the laser warning labels are not removed or concealed and are always clearly
legible.
Acoustic noise
WARNING
Acoustic noise hazard
The operation of more than one system could cause noise levels in working environments
(for example system test floors) that are harmful to human beings.
The infrastructure of such facilities needs to take care for the protection of work force in
that environment. National laws and regulations for safe working places need to be taken
into account.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Hold circuit packs only at the edges or on the insertion and removal facilities. Always
observe the ESD instructions (see Electrostatic discharge (p. 1-26)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condensation
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
Condensation can occur in the network element or its components during transport,
especially on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can cause malfunctioning,
short-circuits or other damages of the circuit packs.
Ensure that circuit packs and subracks have reached at least the cold start temperature of
the system and are dry before taking them into operation. The cold start temperature of
the system is 5C (+23F); see the section Climatic conditions for stationary
operation (p. 1-58).
Electric shock
DANGER
Electric-shock hazard
The 4-mm banana plug at the end of the ESD wrist-strap cord is intended to be only used
for connecting to the ESD jack on the rack/subrack ESD bonding point. Connecting the
banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply units may lead to the
risk of electric shock.
Never connect the banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply
units.
Risk of pinching
CAUTION
Pinch hazard
Your fingers can be pinched when sliding in the fan unit.
Do not place your fingers on top/bottom of the fan unit when sliding it into the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
If the wrong type of circuit breaker is used with this equipment, the equipment may be
severely damaged due to overcurrent.
Always ensure that the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack is installed in combination
with a Power Distribution Unit - ETSI or Power Distribution Unit - ANSI (PDU1C,
PDU2C), respectively. The circuitbreakers used in the PDU1C/PDU2C allow a maxium
current of 50 A.
Never install the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack in combination with a High Power
Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP). The circuitbreakers used in the HPCFAP
allow a maxium current of 100 A.
Over-voltage damage
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
Potential over-voltage damage to equipment from OSP (outside plant) connections
The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are suitable for connection to
intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building ports of the
equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building
interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089) and require isolation
from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly must use shielded
intra-building cabling/wiring that is grounded at both ends.
If Type 2, 3a/5a, 4, or 4a ports of the equipment, or subassembly require a shielded cable,
intra-building ports of the equipment, or subassembly, are suitable only for connection to
shielded intra-building cabling that is grounded at both ends. This requirement applies to
paired conductor interfaces as well as coaxial interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
If the wrong type of circuit breaker is used with this equipment, the equipment may be
severely damaged due to overcurrent.
Always ensure that the system is installed in combination with the correct Power
Distribution Unit - ETSI or Power Distribution Unit - ANSI (PDU1C, PDU2C),
respectively. The circuit breakers used in the PDU1C/PDU2C allow a maxium current of
50 A.
Never install the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack in combination with a High Power
Connection Fuse and Alarm Panel (HPCFAP). The circuitbreakers used in the HPCFAP
allow a maxium current of 100 A.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Fire hazard
Inadequate heat dissipation can cause heat accumulation or even a fire in the network
element.
You must therefore ensure that:
All the required fan units are installed (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: one,
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: two)
All empty slots are covered with the correct blank front plates; for details about the
recommended face plates for the different subrack types refer to the Product
Information and Planning Guide
The covers and cable ducts are mounted (only valid in the case of BT/BTC removal)
The dust filter is not clogged
That for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 the orientation of the dust filter is correct, such
that the dust filter carrier prevents the dust filter from being sucked into the fan unit
(see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide).
For the installation of the half-slot adapter (8DG09811AAAA), the half-slot adapter
tool (8DG07796AA) must be used to avoid short cuts during half-slot adapter
insertion and installation.
Detector diodes
NOTICE
Destruction of the detector diodes caused by too high an input power
Connecting the output and input of optical circuit packs with a transmit power in excess
of 3 dBm over short distances will cause the destruction of the detector diodes, as the
input power is then too high.
Use an optical attenuator pad of approximately 10 to 20 dB when establishing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can find the receiver sensitivities and the minimum overload thresholds in the
Technical Specifications chapter in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems operate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation
can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as long as
the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (see
Laser safety (p. 1-13)).
Acoustic noise
WARNING
Acoustic noise hazard
The operation of more than one system could cause noise levels in working environments
(for example system test floors) that are harmful to human beings.
The infrastructure of such facilities needs to take care for the protection of work force in
that environment. National laws and regulations for safe working places need to be taken
into account.
Power wiring
NOTICE
Destruction of components due to incorrect power wiring
Incorrect power wiring can cause equipment damage.
All power wires must be properly connected before powering up the system by switching
on the circuit breakers. For details see Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System
Turn-Up Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Arcing
WARNING
Power Interface: Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply
plug
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36:
Before removing or connecting the power supply lugs at the Power Interface, ensure that
the line circuit breakers on the PDU1C/PDU2C are in the OFF position.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Before removing the power supply cable at a Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8), ensure that all associated circuit breakers
that are located in the external High Power Connection, Fuse & Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
are in the OFF position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electric shock
DANGER
Electric-shock hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: If the system is operated with only one Power Interface
Card (PFC), electrical connectors on the backplane carry a voltage of 48 V DC which
can cause electric shocks if accidentally touched.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: If the system is operated with only one Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical connectors
on the backplane carry a voltage of 48 V DC which can cause electric shocks if
accidentally touched.
Always use the correct system configuration to ensure safe operation:
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Two Power Interface Cards (PFC), one Fan module
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Two Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards
(PSF3T8), two Fan Units (FAN3T8).
Supply voltage
NOTICE
Destruction of components due to a supply voltage of incorrect polarity or
too high
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS equipment operates at a nominal voltage of 48 V (40.5 V to
57 V) or 60 V (50.0 V to 72.0 V) . A supply voltage outside these specifications or of
incorrect polarity can lead to permanent damage of system components.
Ensure that the supply voltage has the correct range and polarity before connecting the
voltage. Ensure also the correct polarity (sequence) of both power feeders.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fusing
NOTICE
Fire hazard
If the system is not secured by appropriate circuit breakers, a short-circuit can cause
severe damage to the system, for example a fire in the network element.
Protect all supply lines with line circuit breakers matched to the load of the subrack
equipment. Note the relevant guide values in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation
and System Turn-Up Guide.
Condensation
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
Condensation can occur in the network element or its components during transport,
especially on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can cause malfunctioning,
short-circuits or other damages of the circuit packs.
Ensure that circuit packs and subracks have reached at least the cold start temperature of
the system and are dry before taking them into operation. The cold start temperature of
the system is 5C (+23F); see the section Climatic conditions for stationary
operation (p. 1-58).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems operate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation
can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as long as
the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (see
Laser safety (p. 1-13)).
Arcing
WARNING
Power Interface: Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply
plug
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36:
Before removing or connecting the power supply lugs at the Power Interface, ensure that
the line circuit breakers on the PDU1C/PDU2C are in the OFF position.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Before removing the power supply cable at a Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8), ensure that all associated circuit breakers
that are located in the external High Power Connection, Fuse & Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
are in the OFF position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-53
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electric shock
DANGER
Electric-shock hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: If the system is operated with only one Power Interface
Card (PFC), electrical connectors on the backplane carry a voltage of 48 V DC which
can cause electric shocks if accidentally touched.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: If the system is operated with only one Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) and Fan Unit (FAN3T8), electrical connectors
on the backplane carry a voltage of 48 V DC which can cause electric shocks if
accidentally touched.
Always use the correct system configuration to ensure safe operation:
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Two Power Interface Cards (PFC), one Fan module
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Two Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards
(PSF3T8), two Fan Units (FAN3T8).
WARNING
Laser hazard
Warning labels on the system and especially on the optical components warn of the
dangers of invisible laser radiation. Removed, concealed or illegible labels can lead to
incorrect action and thus cause serious injuries to the eyes of operating staff.
Ensure that the laser warning labels are not removed or concealed and are always clearly
legible.
Acoustic noise
WARNING
Acoustic noise hazard
The operation of more than one system could cause noise levels in working environments
(for example system test floors) that are harmful to human beings.
The infrastructure of such facilities needs to take care for the protection of work force in
that environment. National laws and regulations for safe working places need to be taken
into account.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-54
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Hot-surface hazard
Hot surfaces of system components can cause burns to the hands.
Do not touch system components that are marked with the hot surfaces warning label.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Hold circuit packs only at the edges or on the insertion and removal facilities. Always
observe the ESD instructions (see Electrostatic discharge (p. 1-26)).
Electric shock
DANGER
Electric-shock hazard
The 4-mm banana plug at the end of the ESD wrist-strap cord is intended to be only used
for connecting to the ESD jack on the rack/subrack ESD bonding point. Connecting the
banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply units may lead to the
risk of electric shock.
Never connect the banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply
units.
Risk of pinching
CAUTION
Pinch hazard
Your fingers can be pinched when sliding in the fan unit.
Do not place your fingers on top/bottom of the fan unit when sliding it into the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-55
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Fire hazard
Inadequate heat dissipation can cause heat accumulation or even a fire in the network
element.
You must therefore ensure that:
All the required fan units are installed (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S, and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: one,
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: two)
All empty slots are covered with the correct blank front plates; for details about the
recommended face plates for the different subrack types refer to the Product
Information and Planning Guide
The covers and cable ducts are mounted (only valid in the case of BT/BTC removal)
The dust filter is not clogged
That for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 the orientation of the dust filter is correct, such
that the dust filter carrier prevents the dust filter from being sucked into the fan unit
(see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide).
For the installation of the half-slot adapter (8DG09811AAAA), the half-slot adapter
tool (8DG07796AA) must be used to avoid short cuts during half-slot adapter
insertion and installation.
NOTICE
System shut-down when switching off all power supply feeders
Bringing the circuit breakers of all power supply feeders in the OFF position leads to a
shut-down of the complete system.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: When carrying out maintenance work at one of the two
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock Interface Cards (PSF3T8) A or B, switch off only those
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-56
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
circuit breakers that are directly associated to the corresponding PSF3T8. For each
PSF3T8 there are three power supply feeders, and each power supply feeder has an
associated circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are located in the High Power
Connection, Fuse & Alarm Panel (HPCFAP).
Risk of equipment damage during maintenance activities
NOTICE
Equipment can be damaged during in-service replacement of components
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: During in-service replacement of system components above
the Fan Unit, there is a risk that nuts, cable ends, or other objects may fall into the Fan
Unit.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: During in-service replacement of the upper Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8) A, there is a risk that nuts, cable ends, or other
objects may fall into the upper fan tray (Fan Unit A).
Take utmost care to prevent nuts or cable ends from falling into the system.
Detector diodes
NOTICE
Destruction of the detector diodes caused by too high an input power
Connecting the output and input of optical circuit packs with a transmit power in excess
of 3 dBm over short distances will cause the destruction of the detector diodes, as the
input power is then too high.
Use an optical attenuator pad of approximately 10 to 20 dB when establishing
connections over short distances for test purposes.
Receiver sensitivities
You can find the receiver sensitivities and the minimum overload thresholds in the
Technical Specifications chapter in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-57
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Short-circuit
NOTICE
Destruction of circuit packs in the event of a short-circuit
A short-circuit in the network element can cause destruction of electronic components
and thus malfunctioning of the complete system.
You must therefore not handle objects such as a screwdriver in the circuit pack area of the
subrack.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36: Always use the special extraction tool for the insertion and
the removal of bus termination cards.
Climatic conditions
NOTICE
Damage to system components under extreme environmental conditions
Extreme environmental conditions can damage system components and cause
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the Climatic conditions for stationary operation (p. 1-58) are complied
with during operation.
Climatic conditions for stationary operation
For the stationary operation phase, the requirements according to the ETSI Standard EN
300 019-1-3, class 3.1E, Temperature-controlled location with exceptional conditions
are met. This class applies to a permanently temperature-controlled enclosed location.
Humidity is usually not controlled.
For quick reference, Table 1-7, Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI
market) (p. 1-59) shows the most important climatic values specified in the requirement.
The related climatogram is shown in Figure 1-13, Temperature and humidity levels for
operation (ETSI market) (p. 1-60).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-58
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-7
Conditions
Limits
Rack level (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64)
Normal operating:
Normal operating:
5C (41F)
5C (41F)
5C (28F)
5C (28F)
Normal operating:
Normal operating:
40C (104F)
45C (113F)
50C (122F)
55C (131F)
5%
Figure 1-13 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ETSI market)
o
140
60
122
50
104
40
86
30
68
20
50
10
32
14
10
20
22
30
25
20
1.5
1.0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
1
2
g-pipg-0282
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-59
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Legend:
1
Air temperature
Values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%
Normal operating conditions: values outside of this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
ANSI market
For the stationary operation phase, the following specifics of Telcordia Requirement
GR-63-CORE are met:
R4-6 [72]: Ambient temperature and humidity limits as shown in Table 1-8,
Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) (p. 1-60) and Figure
1-14, Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market) (p. 1-61)
R4-8 [74], R4-9 [136], R4-10 [75]: Requirements for altitude
R4-68 [110], R4-69 [111], R4-70 [112], R4-72 [114], R4-75 [117], R4-81 [122],
R4-82 [123]: Requirements for dynamic shock, vibration, and earthquake. The chassis
resistance of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS is compliant with zone 4 earthquake and office
vibrations.
Table 1-8
Conditions
Ambient1 temperature
Range
Range
Short-term2
30 K/h (54F/min)
Range
Operating
5% to 85%
Short-term
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-60
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1.
Ambient refers to conditions at a location 1.5 m (59 in) above the floor and 400 mm (15.8 in) in front of
the equipment.
2.
Short-term refers to a period of not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 15 days in
1 year. This refers to a total of 360 hours in any given year, but no more than 15 occurrences during that
1-year period. The long-term operating temperature range is 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) on rack level and
0C to 45C (32F to 113F) on shelf level (see Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI
(p. 1-61)). It is given for the purposes of reliability assessment.
Figure 1-14 Temperature and humidity levels for operation (ANSI market)
o
158
70
140
60
122
50
104
40
86
30
68
20
50
10
32
14
10
24
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
g-pipg-0280
Legend:
1
Air temperature
Short-term conditions
The following describes the Frame/Shelf level according to Telcordia and ETSI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-61
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETSI rack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a 300 mm ETSI rack with
one installed subrack (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64), including optional rack doors
and side-panels.
ETSI subrack-level
All ETSI EN 300 019 environmental conditions apply to a stand-alone subrack
(Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36). For certain tests the subrack may have to be mounted
into an open rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-62
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems operate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation
can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as long as
the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (see
Laser safety (p. 1-13)).
Arcing
WARNING
Power Interface: Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply
plug
Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36:
Before removing or connecting the power supply lugs at the Power Interface, ensure that
the line circuit breakers on the PDU1C/PDU2C are in the OFF position.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64: Before removing the power supply cable at a Power Supply,
Filter, and Clock Interface Card (PSF3T8), ensure that all associated circuit breakers
that are located in the external High Power Connection, Fuse & Alarm Panel (HPCFAP)
are in the OFF position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-63
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Weight
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack weighs up to 125 kg (276 lbs), a
fully equipped rack up to 215 kg (474 lbs). A fully equipped Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36
or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subrack weighs up to 84.5 kg (186.3 lbs). A rack
equipped with two Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S subracks
weighs up to 259 kg (571 lbs). Although Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 subracks weigh less, a fully equipped subrack can still weigh more than
30 kg (66 lbs).
Such a fully equipped rack or subrack can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked
over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people and/or a lifting device to transport and position
the rack or subrack.
NOTICE
Damage to system components due to unsecured rack or subrack
A fully equipped rack or subrack can cause serious damage to the rack or subrack if it is
knocked over or dropped.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transportation and secure the rack or subrack against dropping.
Always use a sufficient number of people or a lifting device to transport and position the
rack or subrack.
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces
CAUTION
Hot-surface hazard
Hot surfaces of system components can cause burns to the hands.
Do not touch system components that are marked with the hot surfaces warning label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-64
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Hold circuit packs only at the edges or on the insertion and removal facilities. Always
observe the ESD instructions (see Electrostatic discharge (p. 1-26)).
Electric shock
DANGER
Electric-shock hazard
The 4-mm banana plug at the end of the ESD wrist-strap cord is intended to be only used
for connecting to the ESD jack on the rack/subrack ESD bonding point. Connecting the
banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply units may lead to the
risk of electric shock.
Never connect the banana plug to AC or DC wall sockets or any type of power supply
units.
Disposal
The equipment in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system series must be disposed of at the
end of its lifetime. Please contact us in this case and we will arrange for proper and
environment-friendly disposal of your equipment (most parts of the system can be
recycled).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-65
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Safety requirements in specific deployment phases
Event of failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event of failure
Hazard levels
In the event of failure, the hazard levels given in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product
Information and Planning Guide apply. The hazard levels define the potential optical
hazard at any accessible location within an optical fiber telecommunication system. See
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide.
Invisible laser radiation
WARNING
Laser hazard
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems operate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation
can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as long as
the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (see
Laser safety (p. 1-13)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
1-66
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
S2ecurity administration
procedures
Overview
Purpose
2-5
2-6
Security concepts
2-7
User provisioning
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-20
Login sessions
2-24
2-26
Authentication
2-35
2-40
2-42
2-45
2-49
2-50
2-52
2-53
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-59
2-60
2-61
Procedure 2-12: Send a short free form text message to other users
2-63
2-65
2-67
2-68
2-69
2-73
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-79
2-80
2-81
2-82
2-83
2-86
2-88
2-90
2-91
2-93
2-94
2-97
2-98
2-99
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-100
2-101
2-102
2-104
2-105
2-106
2-107
2-108
2-109
Syslog Administration
2-110
2-111
CLI Logging
2-112
2-113
SNMP Logging
2-114
2-115
2-116
2-117
2-118
2-119
2-120
User Preferences
2-121
2-122
2-123
2-124
2-125
2-126
2-127
RADIUS Properties
2-128
2-129
2-130
2-131
2-132
2-133
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-135
2-136
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
This section provides descriptive information concerning the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Security management and user administration on the OCS application.
Contents
User administration concept
2-6
Security concepts
2-7
User provisioning
2-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
User permission
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Security concepts
Overview
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS uses logins, passwords, authentication, and access levels to
protect against unauthorized access. It also keeps a security log.
RADIUS server support for user authentication
The NTPv4 protocol supports authentication using either symmetric key or public key
cryptography. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS implements authentication using the symmetric
key cryptography feature. This method ensures an unbroken chain of trust between the
client system and the primary servers at the root of the timing distribution network. This
chain is known as the provenance of the client. The protocol provides the credentials to
ensure that the source of the timing signal is not being spoofed since the attacker does not
have the cryptographic key information to provide authentic credentials.
When authentication is in use, every message contains a message authentication code
(MAC) appended to the NTP header in the message. The MAC is calculated using a
cryptographic hashing algorithm (in the form of SHA-1 or MD5) to produce a
mathematical fingerprint that uniquely identifies each message. The hashing algorithm
used is up to the user. Under the symmetric key method, both the server and the client
share a key, that is distributed outside this protocol. The server uses the key to create the
MAC. When the message arrives, the client uses the key to create its own version of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
MAC. The client then compares its calculation to the MAC inserted in the message.
When the two codes match the client concludes that the message was indeed sent from
the intended server.
User identifiers
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS users are required to log in with a user identifier and a password
at the start of a session. To ensure security, they should log out at the end of a session. If a
user is inactive for a configurable period of time, the user is logged off automatically.
This period can be set up by the administrator in a range from 0 to 999 min. The default
value is 60 min.
The system supports up to 512 different user IDs. The user management is performed by
a user with administrative privileges. User management includes addition and deletion of
users as well as assigning privileges to them. Multiple logins with the identical user
identifier will be denied.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS has five pre-installed default users for external TL1 login which
cannot be deleted: SERVICE, EML001, EML002, USER05, and Unprvlgd.
For internal purposes Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following default users
which cannot be deleted: WDMUSER1, ZICUSR, OMSREAD{1,2},
OMSPROV{1,2}, OMSCONF{1,2}, OMSNETADMIN{1,2}, and
OMSSEC{1,2}.
The SERVICE user allows an Alcatel-Lucent technician to log-in to the NE. The initial
password for this user is contained in the persistent database and can be modified. The
User Security Level of this user is 5, as well any security administrator user. The
SERVICE user cannot be deleted, but can be disabled and enabled.
The ZICUSR is for internal use only and cannot be used for logins from outside.
User identifiers that are strings of 5 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters where
the first character is an alphabetic character. The following special characters are also
valid: % (percent), + (plus sign), # (number sign), and _ (underscore).
Dormant account management
Dormant accounts are those users that have not logged on for a period of time. A user
with sufficient security privileges is able to provision per User ID a User ID aging
interval expressed in days. At the end of this interval, a User ID is disabled and inhibited
from logging in if during this interval it has never been used to login. The longest interval
allowed is 999 days with a minimum of 1 day. The default for the system-wide user
identifier aging interval is 60 days.
The system allows to disable the User ID aging per user by setting the User ID aging
interval to 0. After a user's User ID has been disabled, the system allows a privileged user
to reactivate (enable) the disabled User ID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The system resets the User ID aging interval per user when
User ID aging is not applicable to system default users and super users.
User community authorization level (UCAL)
The system supports user privilege categories for accessing functionality on the system.
A user community authorization level (UCAL) is assigned to each user ID by the
administrator when the user ID is created. This numerical value between 1 and 5 defines
the access privileges for the user. A user community authorization level of 5 stands for
administrative privileges.
For each possible transaction with the system, that means for each TL1 command, a
command community authorization level (CCAL) is defined. A user can only perform a
transaction if his or her UCAL is greater or equal to the CCAL of the transaction.
A super user (that means a system administrator with security administration privileges,
indicated by UCAL equal to 5) is able to:
A normal user (that means a user without administration privileges, indicated by UCAL
less than 5) is able to:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Passwords
The system informs the user when the password expiry date is nearly reached. Default
is 7 days before the expiration.
The system forces the user to enter a new password at the login attempt after
password expiration, if the user has the ability to change the password.
For a user updating a password, there is a specified minimum period of waiting before
an existing password can be updated.
For a user updating a password, the system does not allow the reuse of a specified
number of most recently used passwords. This discourages password flipping.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system supports the configuration of access control lists
(ACL) or filters to limit the access to the administration and other management protocols
only to certain ranges of authorized source IP addresses and ports. It is also possible to
configure multiple disjoint ranges specified through IP network and mask. IP access
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
control lists can be configured for filtering traffic, which is forwarded by the network
element. One use-case for this is to prevent attacks to the network from hijacked CPE
boxes.
Firewall traversal
The NE or the underlying protocols used by the NE do not pose any restriction for
firewalls in the management or control plane. For instance:
System log
The NE maintains a system log with a size of up to 50 MB. Among all other commands
and responses, also the ones related to security are stored. A filter capability is available
to retrieve only security events. The events/responses are kept in a non-volatile memory.
The log can be retrieved from the NE. The logs are stored in a file that can be retrieved by
the management system via SFTP, to optimize bandwidth and simplify the request
mechanism.
Secure shell
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides a way to secure the traffic between the operator and
the network element with strong encryption and cryptographic protection to provide
confidentiality, integrity, and replay protection. The system supports secure shell 2
(SSH-2) encryption for TL1 communication, also on the debug port.
For host authentication, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following:
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports secure file transfers from and to other hosts.
NE-NE and NMS-GNE IPoIP (IP over IP) tunneling
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The NE internal communication security applies for multi-shelf network elements with
compound architecture. Inter-compound communication is required when uplink cards
are successfully provisioned in the OCS compound . The system provides a default user
for TL1 based communication between the WDM application and the OCS application.
Only one session at a time is allowed for this user. The list of allowed IP addresses can be
set for this user to allow only logins from the IP address of the WDM compound.
SSL/TLS
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system supports SSL/TLS secured HTML communication
for access of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC . All communication associated with
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC uses separate SSL/TLS connections.
Host-to-host authentication between the NMS and the NE, and between the ZIC and the
NE is done using a certificate distribution based on SSL. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
system supports a management for the certificates that are used by SSL and TLS for
server authentication.
Secure mode for open ports
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system is configured in a way that non-essential ports and
services are avoided:
Only logical ports that are needed to manage the equipment are open
Only physical ports that are needed to manage the equipment are open
Ports needed for example for debug access are only opened on user request.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system supports user activity logs (UAL, also known as
command logs) that are compatible with the Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS format:
The Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS user is supported in the UAL: The logs report the
name of Alcatel-Lucent 1350 OMS user as configured
File transfer of UAL: The logs are transferred from the NE to the Alcatel-Lucent
1350 OMS via SFTP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
User provisioning
Predefined user profiles
Table 2-1
Default User
USER05
EML001
EML002
Unprvlgd
Default Password
identifier
ADMIn005
Eml__001
Eml__002
Only4ReadXX
The users described here are intended for NE internal communication purposes. They are
all used internally and not configureable.
Table 2-2
Default User
for OMS
for ZIC
for WDM
compound
OMSREAD1
ZICUSR
WDMUSER1
OMSREAD2
OMSPROV1
OMSPROV2
OMSCONF1
OMSCONF2
OMSNETADMIN1
OMSNETADMIN2
OMSSEC1
OMSSEC2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
This section provides descriptive information concerning the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Security management and user administration on the WDM application.
Contents
User accounts and privileges
2-15
2-20
Login sessions
2-24
2-26
Authentication
2-35
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Note: The administration of all security functions is only accessible to Admin and
Service users (i.e. the system will only allow access to these security functions to
users with appropriate security administration privileges). The Service user is not
capable of creating/deleting/modifying user profiles. The NE does not allow deletion
of the default users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The user levels, the privileges assigned to each level, and their intended use are
summarized in Table 2-3, User privilege levels (p. 2-16).
Table 2-3
Level
Service
Admin
The Admin user can peform all functions accessible via WebUI,
CLI and TL1. The Admin user cannot utilize debugging and
software development tools.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Table 2-3
(continued)
Level
Provisioner
NTP settings
Database backup/restore
Technology Types
IP routes
OSPF areas
User Preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
attributes
1830 PSS
2-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Table 2-3
(continued)
Level
Provisioner (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Table 2-3
(continued)
Level
Observer
For Connections:
IP routes
OSPF areas
Database backup/restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Login security controls access to the NE(s) by individual users. Client Authentication for
logging in and auditing on each NE requires a user ID (UID) and a complex password.
Security administration enables the system to deny a user access to the NE. The NE
authenticates the user ID against the NE's local security database. Based on this, the NE
either accepts or denies login access to the NE. Access may be denied during one of the
following points in time:
When the user first attempts to log in and the login attempt is denied.
During an active session and the user is disconnected by the NE.
After the user logs into an NE with a valid user ID and Password, user functions can be
performed based on the assigned User Access Privilege (UAP).
User identification and user password definition
User identifier (UID)
User identity is specified using a UID that is a unique identifier used by an NE for
security management. A UID code is a non-confidential, unique, and auditable
representation of a user such as the login name. The NE supports UIDs that are strings of
5 to 12 case-sensitive characters including upper-case letters [A-Z], lower-case letters
[a-z], numbers, and special characters. The first character must be alphabetic. For User
ID, the following special characters are accepted as valid characters for the User ID: %
(percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign) and _ (underscore).
The following conditions apply to UIDs:
Each authorized user (a person, device or a software process having operations related
command inputs access) must have a UID. Each UID must be unique on the NE (i.e.
the system does not support 2 UIDs that are the same).
At any given instant in time, the NE internally maintains the identity of all UIDs
logged on at that time.
The NE supports a maximum of 255 unique UIDs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The PID cannot be the same as the associated UID, nor can it be the reverse of the
associated UID.
The password must not have three consecutive identical characters.
The NE will not prevent a user from choosing an already existing password (more
than one user can have the same password).
Note: For all Password attributes, if a value exists, the WebUI displays it as
******** (8 asterisks). This allows the user to know that a value exists.
Password administration
The NE supports the ability for a user with security administration privileges to specify
the following user password attributes: the password age (in days); the number of days
that the existing password can continue to be used before a new password becomes
mandatory; the number of times that the existing password can continue to be used before
a new password becomes mandatory; the password obsolescence interval that must elapse
before an obsolete password can be reused.
A user with security administration privileges can provision a system-wide password
aging interval to encourage users to change passwords periodically. The following
applies:
The default for system-wide password aging interval is 30 days. The allowed range is
from 1 to 999 days.
The system allows the ability to disable the system-wide password aging interval, by
assigning a value of 0 (zero) days.
A password grace period and number of logins allowed after password expiration can also
be provisioned. The following applies:
The default for the number of logins allowed after password expiration is 3.
the password is expired and neither a grace period nor number of logins is permitted
after password expiration
the password is expired and either a grace period or a number of logins is permitted
after password expiration, but the provisioned value(s) is expired (i.e., the user has no
more days to use the expired password, or no more logins allowed with the expired
password).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Users have the ability to change their own password on demand. To change a password,
the user must enter the current password, the new password, and the confirmed new
password (Note: For an Admin user changing another users password, only the new
password value needs to be entered). The NE checks the password for proper length and
syntax in accordance with established password requirements. Before updating the NE's
database, the NE ensures that the current password is different from the new password
and that the new password and confirmed new password are the same. An error message
is generated to notify the user if any of the password requirements are not met.
Adding a User
A user with appropriate security level privileges (Admin user) can add new users to the
User Security Database and to specify for each user his/her User Access Privilege (UAP).
The UAP specifies the set of commands a user can execute based on the access privilege
of the user and of the command.
Note: A maximum of only 1 Service user is allowed in the NE. Multiple users of the
other user levels are allowed.
The NE provides the ability to specify an initial password pertaining to the new user. The
user is prompted to change the password when one of the following conditions occurs:
when that user establishes a session for the first time after the initial password is
assigned
when that user establishes a session for the first time after a user password has been
reset by an administrative action.
A user with appropriate security level privileges can delete existing user profiles from the
User Security Database. If the specified user is currently logged on, then the user is also
logged off. Users with security administration privileges can delete any existing user
profile except default users' profiles.
Note: A user with administration or service privileges cannot delete his/her own user
profile. The Admin user cannot delete the Service user, and the Service user cannot
delete himself.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The ability to edit an existing user profile entry (created when entering a user) is provided
to users with appropriate security level privileges. The following conditions apply:
Only users with appropriate administration privileges can change a user profile
database entry for another user.
Only users with administrator privileges can edit the User Security Level User
attributes that exist for each user's profile. The security level user attributes are: user
privilege level, link timeout, and user-id status. It is not possible to modify the UID or
user security level of factory default users.
Any change to the privilege(s) granted to a user do not apply to the user if the user is
currently logged in. Any such change will take effect after the next login.
A user with security administration privileges can retrieve any or all user profile
entries.
Only those parameter values that are actually applied for the specified UID are
reported. This means that those system-wide parameters that have been modified, but
still not applied to the specified UID, are reported with their previous values.
Enabling/disabling a user
A user with appropriate security level privileges can disable existing user profiles in the
User Security Database. If the specified user is logged on, then the user is also logged off.
A user cannot disable himself/herself. A user cannot disable his own user profile.
A user with appropriate security level privileges can enable existing and previously
disabled user profiles in the User Security Database for a specified user(s).
Note: The Admin user can disable and enable all users including the Service user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Login sessions
Overview
There is no limit to the number of simultaneous active sessions per user ID. One user ID
can log into the NE multiple times (via WebUI, TL1, CLI, and SNMP), the maximum of
which is restricted by the number of sessions supported by the NE. The NE creates an
entry in the Security log when a user logs into and logs off from the NE indicating the
UID and the established User Session Number.
The ability to authenticate a session (i.e., activate a user session) is established with the
NE by logging in an existing user through a UID and a PID. The NE will deny the
activation of a user session if authentication for the user cannot be established (e.g. the
specified password does not match the user's password on the NE, the user profile does
not exist on the NE, etc.).
The NE allows a user to cancel a current session which was previously authenticated by a
login request by providing a logoff function for the current session.
The following applies to canceling a user session:
Only users with appropriate administration privileges are able to logoff other users.
Otherwise users can only logoff themselves.
Users with administration privileges and also the Service user can logoff other users
with administration privileges.
A command request to cancel a session will terminate a single active user session on
the addressed NE. In addition any supporting connection which after the termination
of this session is no longer supporting other sessions or connections, is also
terminated.
Session timeout
The NE supports auto log out and auto disconnect of user sessions based upon user link
inactivity (i.e. an idle user). Inactivity is defined as lack of user input. The inactivity
interval (period which triggers log out) is provisionable on a system basis. The longest
such interval allowed for an idle user is 999 minutes, with a minimum of 1 minute and a
default of 60 minutes. The system allows the ability to disable the User Session Link
Timer attribute, on a system basis, by assigning the zero value. A value of 0 implies no
idle timeout, (i.e. the user can remain idle forever).
When the session timer expires, the NE logs out and disconnects a user's session to the
NE. The session timer is reset/restarted by successful user login and user session link
communication input activity after the login occurs.
Each properly logged-in session will either be logged out by the user or by system
inactivity or by connection interruption. When a session is terminated (e.g., normal
logoff, power failure, a break in the physical or logical connection), the NE ensures that
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
the port drops immediately and terminates the user processes running at the time of
logoff. When the next user attempts to log on to that physical or logical port, the user is
required to go through the entire login procedure including identification and
authentication.
The admin user may configure unique per user session timeout, based on the UID profile.
If provisioned, the timeout value may take on any value up to the system maximum. If
provisioned, the user-defined session timeout takes precedence over the system-wide
session timeout value provisioned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The system supports the ability to set the NE to function in an encrypted or normal mode.
Encrypted or normal mode should be set during initial commissioning. There is no default
mode. Only the administrative user can invoke the security mode on the NE. Changing
the mode from encrypted to normal, or vice versa, causes a warm reboot of the active
Main EC. All current user sessions will be logged off as a result.
The NE does not allow the encrypted mode setting if there is no SSH key initialized on
the system. Encrypted mode can only be turned on after the NE has already generated an
SSH key. The NE applies the following guidelines when setting the mode to either
encrypted or normal. These settings apply to the OAMP port only.
In encrypted mode:
SSH is enabled
port 69 (tftp) remains open for the internal transfers from the main EC to other circuit
packs on the local NE
NTP port (123) is allowed to be enabled
SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests to the
NE are disabled
SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE
In normal mode:
SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests are not allowed by the NE
SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE
CLI over the craft serial port is not encrypted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The NE supports the enabling and disabling of the following external ports: OAMP, VoIP,
E1, E2, ES1 and ES2 for extension shelves. Only an administrative user has the ability to
enable/disable these interfaces. The serial/console port cannot be disabled.
Note: The two external LAN ports, E1 and E2, connect to externally managed
devices, like RAMAN power booster amplifiers. One User Panel is supported on the
Master Shelf of an NE to provide a maximum of 2 LAN ports for external RAMAN
or Booster devices per NE.
TFTP, FTP, and SFTP
TFTP, FTP, and SFTP file transfer protocols are supported for both encrypted mode and
normal mode.
The following applies:
SFTP (secure FTP) is a program that uses SSH to transfer files. Unlike standard FTP, it
encrypts both commands and data, preventing passwords and sensitive information from
being transmitted in the clear over the network. It is functionally similar to FTP, but
because it uses a different protocol, standard FTP client can't be used to talk to an SFTP
server, nor an FTP server can be connected with a client that supports only SFTP.
The following applies:
FTP and SFTP passwords are stored in the database using AES encryption.
No user interface displays the password for the FTP and SFTP server.
SFTP or TFTP are used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or in normal
mode.
Note: Only one tftp transfer can be initiated at a time.
Secure Shell (SSH) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure
channel between two network devices. SSH is designed as a replacement for telnet and
other unsecure remote shells which send information (notably passwords) in plaintext,
leaving them open to interception. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality
and integrity of data over an unsecure network, such as Internet. SSH allows a trusted
path of communication between two ends (e.g., NE and EMS) using encryption of the
data stream.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The 1830 NE supports SSHv2. This applies to 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S and the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 (Edge Device).
The NE supports the generation of the SSH crypto Key. This crypto key needs to be
generated before the NE is set to encrypted mode. The NE allows the generation of
the crypto key when the NE mode is normal or encrypted.
SSH Keys can be zeroized (regenerated) in encrypted mode.
The NE supports AES encryption. SSH key must be encrypted with AES before
storing in the disk.
Note: Security mode can only be changed to encypted when:
For security purposes, the system generates a security log to provide an audit trail record
that supports after-the-fact investigation of specific activities (e.g., logins, modification of
critical system resources). The security log provides a means for the Security
Administrator to investigate, audit, detect, and analyze security events in order that proper
remedial actions can be taken. Security logs are protected from unauthorized access and
no modification by any user or process, even debug tools, is allowed.
The system provides the ability to a user with sufficient security level privileges to
retrieve security event log reports that were generated by the system for a given UserID
and between a specified From Date and Time and To Date and Time.
The following applies to the security log:
The security log has a circular (or equivalent) recording mechanism (i.e., oldest
record overwritten by newest), and an appropriate administrator has the capability to
retrieve, print, copy, and upload the security log for long-term storage.
When the security log has reached 90% of its maximum size, the NE sends an
appropriate event to the security administrator.
The security event log file is protected from tampering by any user defined in the user
security database and cannot be deleted by any user defined in the user security
database.
The security event log file is stored in non-volatile memory and survives system
restarts/resets.
The security event log file does not survive software generic upgrades and power
reset.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Each NE is able to log the following classes of information in the security log:
the identification, address and security level of the user that initiated the action that is
being logged
the actual attempted action that is being logged (the echo of the command/response
message)
an indication of the success or failure of the activity (command completion code)
the date and the time the action (i.e. the command or the message) occurred
Note: The security event log file does not record actual or attempted passwords that
are entered in as passwords.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports logging of user activities. Activities are collected in a
user activity log (UAL) in a user-readable format. All user actions via the WebUI are
logged and stored in this UAL along with the time and date of the action, the source IP
address and or user name of the operator, and the action itself. One entry is captured for
each user action. The purpose of this log is to provide non-repudiation.
The administrator can also transfer the UAL log to a remote file server (RFS). The RFS
can be the management system itself, or some other server - the choice is up to the
operator. This transfer mechanism can be performed using FTP or SFTP.
Log file transfer
The WebUI can retrieve and display parameters related to the last log transfer request.
The WebUI also allows the user to modify and view server information for the log file
transfer. When the user initiates a log file transfer, after receiving a successful response
from the NE, the WebUI displays a message to the user indicating that the file transfer has
been initiated. The WebUI then allows the user to navigate to other WebUI screens. The
user can then go back to the Log File Transfer screen to view the status of the transfer.
Note: Log file transfer can also be done via CLI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
System access control prevents an otherwise authenticated (valid) user from unauthorized
access. Not all system resources are available to every user, and restricting resource
availability is extremely important to securing a safe and trusted network. System access
control allows only authorized users access to the NE. Access control level is associated
with each user and is maintained through the User Security Level attribute.
To execute any command, a user needs a User Security Level (User Access Privilege)
including the Command Security Level (Command Access Privilege) assigned to the
command being executed. If the user is denied the privilege of executing a command due
to an insufficient User Security Level, the system indicates to the user that the command
request is invalid due to insufficient privileges.
All physical ports of the NE exercise system access control. This includes direct access
serial and LAN ports (CIT, external OAMP network access, etc.) and access via an
Embedded Communications Channel (ECC) as in the case of GCC between the 1830-PSS
and the 1830-PSS1 (Edge Device).
Any failed login attempt immediately reports to the user that the login process has failed
or is invalid. Information such as invalid user ID or invalid password is not reported.
The NE performs the entire user authentication procedure even if the UID that is entered
is not valid. After a failed login attempt, the system delays for 2 seconds prior to
presenting the next login prompt. This applies to human interaction interfaces (e.g. CLI,
TL1, WebUI).
After the maximum number of consecutive invalid login attempts for a session has been
reached, the system records in the security log the IP address of the source along with the
UID and an intrusion transient condition is reported.
Access control lists (ACL)
The WebUI supports viewing a list of all filters and their associated patterns. Each filter
may be associated with up to 256 patterns. The WebUI also supports creating a new filter.
Up to 100 filters may be defined on the system
The WebUI supports adding a pattern to an existing Filter ID. When adding a pattern, the
WebUI displays a picklist of existing patterns that are not already associated with this
filter to choose from. The user must specify a Pattern Index with each selected pattern.
The WebUI also supports deleting a pattern from an existing Filter ID. A filter can only be
deleted when all patterns have been removed for this filter.
Note: If the user specifies a Pattern Index that is already associated with this Filter ID,
the WebUI will delete the existing Pattern/Filter pair and create a new one with the
specified Pattern ID/Index.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Patterns
The WebUI supports viewing a list of all patterns used for IP access control. The WebUI
also supports creating, modifying, deleting, and viewing of patterns. A pattern can only be
deleted if it is not associated wth a filter.
Ports
The WebUI supports viewing a list of all port to ACL filter associations.
The WebUI allows a user to create, modify, and view an association between an ACL
filter and a specified port and direction. When creating or modifying an association, the
WebUI displays a picklist of existing filters to choose from. An association between a
filter and port/direction can also be deleted.
Note: Up to 2 filters can be associated with each port, one in the Receive direction
and one in the Transmit direction. If a filter/port association already exists in a
direction, the WebUI will not allow the creation of another association to this port in
the same direction.
The following ports support ACL filtering.
Table 2-4
Card
Port
Signal Rate
112PDM11
L1
OTL4.4
11DPE12
L{1-2}
OTU2
11DPE12A, 11DPE12E
L{1-2}
OTU2
11DPM12
L{1-2}
OTU2
11QPA4, 11QPEN4
L{1-4}
OTU2
11QPA4, 11QPEN4
C{1-4}
OTU2
11QPE24
X{1-4}
OTU2, 10GbE
11STAR1, 11STAR1A
L1
OTU2
11STAR1, 11STAR1A
C1
OTU2
11STMM10
C{1-10}
OTU1
4DPA4
L{1-2}
OTU1
OSC
A2P2125, AM2125A,
AM2318A, OSCT
OSCSFP
MTC1T9
USRPNL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
For the following ports, the user can view the system-defined port/filter associations. The
user may not edit the associations for these ports.
Table 2-5
Card
Port
EC
CIT
AUX
EC
LAN-PPP
EC
LAN-NODE
MTC1T9
CIT
MXEC320H
MTC1T9
LAN-PPP
MXEC320H
MTC1T9
LAN-NODE
MXEC320H
The optical intrusion detection feature gives the user the ability to have an optical
intrusion alarm raised upon detection of an outside plant fiber loss. A span loss could be
due to a hacker stripping away the fiber cladding and bending the fiber to cause light
leakage.
The system allows the user the ability to set the threshold values and retrieve baseline
values and threshold values for each optical line. Provisioning of optical intrusion
detection settings is supported on the following cards: A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG,
ALPHG, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A and OSCT.
The WebUI allows the user to set the Optical Intrusion Loss Threshold value. The
system will raise a MAJ alarm Optical Intrusion Detected against the optical line (OTS)
if the loss detected is equal to or greater than the specified threshold limit during a given
interval. The system also allows a user to clear an optical intrusion detected alarm.
The WebUI supports modifying and viewing of the following optical intrusion detection
attributes
Monitoring Enabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
General risks can be related to inadequate security policies or human factors. Security
processes often rely on well-designed controls that ensure the confidentiality, integrity,
and availability of data and services for the data center. TheAlcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) DWDM platform provides integrated physical layer encryption that
lowers data center security risks and increases data confidentiality, integrity, and
availability, based on security best practices and common security frameworks used in
data center environments.
Data integrity means detecting and avoiding unauthorized access to, or modification of,
data. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides several security mechanisms to ensure the
integrity of data communication services across the DCC, and the integrity of the
equipment itself. Comprehensive security logs allow an administrator to detect
non-authorized changes to device configuration, complemented by real-time intrusion
prevention alarms. Optical intrusion detection (OID) constantly checks the status of each
optical fiber by monitoring changes in optical loss. A threshold value can be set to raise
an alarm for possible optical intrusion when the optical loss changes beyond the
configured level.
DCC transport risks are related to the uncertainty that vulnerabilities could be exploited to
damage or remove sensitive data assets. To reduce the opportunity for attack, and
therefore the security risk, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can be enabled to function in
secure mode, which provides a hardened device configuration with the following
restrictions:
Only the essential logical and physical ports needed to manage the system are open
Software debug functions are disabled
Services of the embedded OS are disabled, as well as any interactive OS access
Only secure NE management protocols such as Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and
SNMPv3 are supported
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS also supports the security of the optical links within the DCC
with the following capabilities:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports the following interface types for DCC
applications:
For additional details of the Secure Data Center Connect (DCC) application, see the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Authentication
Overview
Authentication is the act of verifying a claimed identity, providing a basis for setting up
private communications with full data integrity and logging management activity. The
system supports the following different methods of authentication.
RADIUS authentication
Local NE Authentication
SNMP
RADIUS authentication
RADIUS allows the user to be authenticated and authorized at the same time. The
RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profile or profiles. Based on the
user profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server not only allows the user to
have access to the NE, but also grants the user the user's privilege level. The RADIUS
client works with Steel-Belted RADIUS, WinRADIUS, and FreeRadius servers. The NE
supports provisioning of up to 2 RADIUS Servers. The administrative privilege user can
add/delete the specific RADIUS server.
The following applies:
The administrative privilege user can Enable/Disable the RADIUS servers without
deleting their configuration.
When two servers are configured and enabled, the NE queries the second RADIUS
server (RAD2) only if the first server (RAD1) does not respond after the appropriate
timeout and retries.
Web users are authenticated from the local stored database regardless of whether
RADIUS is enabled.
SNMP users are not authenticated by RADIUS.
RADIUS functionality can be used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or
normal mode.
A login by the Service user is never authenticated using RADIUS for any user
interfaces (CLI, TL1, WebUI). The authentication for the Service user is always local.
Table 2-6
Vendor Code
7483
Yes
2 for NMS
Attribute format
Decimal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Table 2-6
Attribute value
(continued)
0 for observer
1 for provisioner
2 for admin
RADIUS attributes
Timeout: This is the timeout (in seconds) for the NE to wait for a response from the
RADIUS server. A failure is declared after the timeout is elapsed. The supported value
range for timeout is 1 to 1000. The default value is 5.
Retries: This is the number of attempts that the NE will try to contact the specified
RADIUS server that has failed to respond during the previous request(s). If there is no
response from the server after the specified tries, then the NE will try to contact the
second RADIUS server if one is provisioned. The supported value range for retries is
1 to 100. The default value is 3.
The NE supports the following RADIUS server attributes. The RADIUS attributes can be
configured, edited, deleted, and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative
privilege. The "sharedSecret" parameter cannot be retrieved.
ServerNum: This is the AID for the RADIUS server. The acceptable values are RAD1
and RAD2.
IPAddr: This is the IP address of the specified RADIUS server.
Port: This is the authentication port of the RADIUS server. The valid value is from 1
to 65000. The default port value is 1812.
sharedSecret: This is the shared secret key between the NE and the target RADIUS
server. This key is an ascii string between 5 to 32 characters.
Status: This is RADIUS server status. The valid values are the following
Enabled - The RADIUS server is online. This is the default value.
The NE supports configuring the following authentication ordering behavior options that
can be configured and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative privilege.
LOCAL: Authentication is based on the local NE's security database. This is the
default.
RADIUS: Authentication is based on the RADIUS server's database.
RADIUS-THEN-LOCAL: The authentication is attempted first using the RADIUS
server's database. If the RADIUS server is not reachable then authentication is based
on local NE's security database.
Note: If the RADIUS server is reachable and the user profile does not exist in
RADIUS server's database, then the authentication fails and the user is denied access.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Local NE authentication
Local NE Authentication is accomplished via the UID and PID pair created and stored on
the local NE.
Note: The access to the database (for authentication) of the NE where user profiles
are stored, is allowed only on a local connection. This is for the Service user to access
locally via connection to RS232 or local CIT port.
SNMP authentication
The local NE can authenticate and authorize users based on SNMP. SNMP provides for
both security versions and security levels. A security version is an authentication strategy
that is set up for a user and the group in which the user resides. A security level is the
permitted level of security within a security version. A combination of a security version
and a security level will determine which security mechanism is employed when handling
an SNMP packet. Three security versions are available: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and
SNMPv3.
The following applies to SNMP:
The NE supports separate DB records for SNMPv3 users. SNMPv3 users are different
from the CLI/TL1/WebUI users. SNMPv3 users can be provisioned via 1354
RM-PhM or WebUI.
The system supports creation of a default SNMP user at initial startup with a known
password. This known password permits 1354 RM-PhM to perform auto-discovery of
NEs. The default SNMP user cannot be deleted. It can only be disabled.
The NE supports changing SNMPv3 users' authentication (auth) and privacy (priv)
passwords.
The system supports enabling and disabling SNMP users.
The NE supports sending Authentication Failure traps and supports enabling and
disabling the sending of Authentication Failure Traps.
The system allows cloning a new SNMP user from an existing user.
Even if RADIUS authentication is enabled on the system, login access to the NE via
SNMP is always based on the UID and PID pair resident on the NE.
Note: Following are two scenarios when the user must update SNMPv3 passwords:
1. Upgrading from a previous release.
After the upgrade, the authentication (auth) and privacy (priv) passwords for
SNMPv3 default user (v3DefaultUser) must be updated.
2. Following a change to the loopback IP address (including the initial loopback IP
address provisioning from its default value).
After the warm restart, the authentication (auth) and privacy (priv) passwords for
all SNMPv3 users, including the ones for SNMPv3 default user (v3DefaultUser).
must be updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The NTPv4 protocol supports authentication using either symmetric key or public key
cryptography. Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS implements authentication using the symmetric
key cryptography feature. This method ensures an unbroken chain of trust between the
client system and the primary servers at the root of the timing distribution network. This
chain is known as the provenance of the client. The protocol provides the credentials to
ensure that the source of the timing signal is not being spoofed since the attacker does not
have the cryptographic key information to provide authentic credentials.
When authentication is in use, every message contains a message authentication code
(MAC) appended to the NTP header in the message. The MAC is calculated using a
cryptographic hashing algorithm (in the form of SHA-1 or MD5) to produce a
mathematical fingerprint that uniquely identifies each message. The hashing algorithm
used is up to the user. Under the symmetric key method, both the server and the client
share a key, that is distributed outside this protocol. The server uses the key to create the
MAC. When the message arrives, the client uses the key to create its own version of the
MAC. The client then compares its calculation to the MAC inserted in the message.
When the two codes match the client concludes that the message was indeed sent from
the intended server.
SNMP trap destinations
The system supports editing and retrieval of SNMP trap destinations. Trap destinations
are SNMP managers provisioned to listen to traps coming from the NE. These SNMP
managers may or may not also be actively managing the NE.
The following SNMP trap server attributes are supported:
ID - this is the ID of the SNMP trap server. The system supports up to 10 remote trap
servers. This value is required to discern which trap server the user is addressing.
Possible values are 1 thru 10.
Destination IP - this is the IP address of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP
address of the server that serves as the trap destination.
String - this is the community string sent to the SNMP trap server. It is an ascii string
from 1 to 32 characters.
Port - this is the (IP address) port of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP address
port of the server that serves as the trap destination.
Timeout - Specifies the time (round trip), in hundreths of a second, after which the
connection times out if no reply is received. Following a timeout, a retry is attempted,
up to the number of retries specified by the retry variable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Retry Count - Specifies an integer value for the number of times the network element
will attempt to retry the connection in the event of a timeout.
SNMP version - the SNMP version to use when formatting the trap. Valid versions are
v1, v2c, and v3.
NMS Station Group ID - Specifies an integer value that uniquely identifies the NMS
workstation serving as the trap destination. (Use 0 for all third party SNMP trap
servers).
Note: Traps are sent in SNMPv2 or SNMPv3 format, depending on the security level
of the NE. If the NE is encrypted, then all traps are encrypted, so the traps will be in
v3 format. All SNMPv3 traps are sent with the SNMPv3 default user. In normal
mode, the version can be v2 or v3.
The system supports creation, editing, deletion, and retrieval of SNMP community
strings. Community strings are necessary for authentication (e.g. if the manager comes
into the NE via SNMPv2). Provisioning of these tasks is accomplished via CLI, WebUI,
and SNMP.
Note: If the NE is in encrypted mode, the user can still configure these community
strings, but the remote SNMP manager will connect via SNMPv3.
The following SNMP community attributes are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedures are to be used for user management. It is suggested to use
User administration concept (p. 2-6) as an entry point for user administration activities.
Furthermore, it is recommended to have a list prepared of all the users that probably will
need to have access to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC and the NEs, especially if
several user logins are to be created or modified for different NEs. The list should contain
the designated user IDs, associated passwords, access privileges and other related security
parameters, and should be as complete as possible.
Contents
Procedure 2-1: Create a user login
2-42
2-45
2-49
2-50
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-59
2-60
2-61
Procedure 2-12: Send a short free form text message to other users
2-63
2-65
2-67
2-68
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
2-69
2-73
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-79
2-80
2-81
2-82
2-83
2-86
2-88
2-90
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
ENT-USER-SECU
You must have a User Community Authorization Level of 5 to perform this task.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC navigation pane, select System NE Security
Users.
Then select Create User, either by selecting Action from the main menu or by using the
context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Create User window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the User Identifier text box, then type in the User Identifier assigned
to the new user.
Reference: See User identifiers (p. 2-8).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Password text box, then type in the password assigned to the new
user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The password may be preliminary. Each user is permitted to change her/his own
password.
Reference: See Passwords (p. 2-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Re-EnterPassword text box, then type in the password again.
The password may be preliminary. Each user is permitted to change her/his own
password.
Reference: See Passwords (p. 2-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the User Community Authorization Level text box and enter the
respective User Community Authorization Level for the new user.
Reference: See User community authorization level (UCAL) (p. 2-9).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the User Name text box, then type in the User Name assigned to the
new user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
0
Disabled, no user session link timeout will occur.
1 to 999
Time in minutes, indicates the LNKTMR time interval. A user session link timeout
occurs if the user session link is inactive with regards to user TL1 input for the time,
in minutes, indicated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Fixed Password you can specify whether the user is created with the ability to
change his/her password.
No. The password is not fixed and can be changed by the user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Users with fixed password is cannot login multiple times despite the MAXSESSION
setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure that the settings in the Create User window are correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties General window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Password Aging Interval spin box select the desired value. You can also enter the
value directly.
Additional information The Password Aging Interval indicates the number of days
that a user password (PID) is aged before the system prompts the user to change to a
new password.
Zero, Password aging on user accounts is disabled. User passwords are not
deactivated/disabled by password aging.
1-360
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
In the Minimum Password Aging Interval spin box select the desired value. You can also
enter the value directly.
Additional information The Minimum Password Aging Interval indicates the
number of days that a user password (PID) is aged before the user is allowed to
change to a new password.
Zero, Minimum Password aging on user accounts is disabled. User passwords can
be changed without a minimum aging.
1-360
In the Pre Expiration Password Interval spin box select the desired value. You can also
enter the value directly.
Additional information The Pre Expiration Password Interval indicates the number
of days that an NE sends a message to a user for alerting of the next password
expiration.
0 Zero, Pre Expiration on user accounts is disabled. No alert message will be sent.
1-7
In the Max Failed Attempts spin box select the desired value. You can also enter the
value directly.
Additional information The Max Failed Attempts indicates the maximum number of
failed login attempts before an NE logs out a user and locks out the user channel.
Zero, Max Failed Attempts on user accounts is disabled. No limit to the failed
login attempts.
1-15
In the Password History spin box select the desired value. You can also enter the value
directly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Additional information The Password History indicates the number of last used
password to be used for the comparison with the new password, when entered for
changing. The new password must be different from all of the passwords in the
history.
1-15
In the Keep Alive Message Interval spin box select the desired value. You can also enter
the value directly.
Additional information The Keep Alive Message Interval indicates the time interval
1-240
In the Maximum Sessions spin box select the desired value. You can also enter the value
directly.
Additional information The Maximum Number of Simultaneous Sessions defines
the number of simultaneous sessions allowed per UID. Attempts to activate more
sessions for a given UID than allowed by this parameter are denied. The value can be
provisioned using this parameter, on a system-wide basis for accounts where the user
is able to change their password. For users who are unable to change their password,
the maximum number of simultaneous sessions is limited to 1.
1-6
The number of simultaneous sessions allowed on the NE for any user that is able
to change their password. Only 1 session is allowed for users that are unable to
change their password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
In the User Session Activity Link Timer Defaul spin box select the desired value. You
can also enter the value directly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Additional information The User Session Activity Link Timer Default specifies
system's default value for the amount of time (in minutes) that the User Session link is
inactive with regards to user TL1 input/output, before a user session link time-out
occurs.
1-999
Time in minutes, indicates the LNKTMR time interval. A user session link
time-out occurs if the user session link is inactive with regards to user TL1
input/output for the time, in seconds, indicated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
RTRV-DFLT-SECU
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties General window opens displaying system-wide user security
parameters.
Reference: See System-wide user security parameters (p. 2-50).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Meaning...
1-360
1-360
1-7
1-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Parameter ...
Meaning...
Password History
1-15
1-240
1-36
1-999
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to delete a user login. Please note that default users cannot be deleted.
Related TL1 commands
DLT-USER-SECU
Important! Any user administration changes will not take effect until the next login
session. If you delete a logged in user, he will be logged out.
The procedure itself is limited to the necessary steps to delete an existing user login using
the NE User Provisioning window.
Required privileges
You must have a User Community Authorization Level of 5 to perform this task.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Delete.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
INH-USER-SECU
Important! Any user administration changes will not take effect until the next login
session. If you delete a logged in user, he will be logged out.
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged in to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
Select a user in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
main menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Inhibit User Login.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-53
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to allow reinstatement of a user that has been disabled by Procedure
2-5: Inhibit a user login (p. 2-53) or if the user has been inhibited due to exceeding the
number of failed login attempts (security INTRUSION alarm will be raised in such case)
and if the user has not logged in for a time longer than his individual User ID Aging
period.
Related TL1 commands
ALW-USER-SECU
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Allow User Login.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-54
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
RTRV-USER-SECU
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
Select a user in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
main menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties General window opens, displaying user profile information.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-55
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to edit the existing user profile entries, identified by the User Identifier
(UID), in the User Security Database.
Note: You must have security administrator privileges.
Related TL1 commands
ED-USER-SECU
Important! Any user administration changes will not take effect until the next login
session. Only a logged out user can be modified.
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
Select a user in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
main menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties General window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the User Community Authorization Level select the desired value in the User
Community Authorization Level spin box.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-56
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Place the cursor in the User Name text box, then type in the User Name assigned to the
new user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Session Activity Link Timer select the respective value.
The User Session Activity Link Timer specifies the amount of time (in minutes) that the
User Session link must be inactive with regards to user input before a user session link
timeout occurs.
0
Disabled, no user session link timeout will occur.
1 to 999
Time in minutes, indicates the LNKTMR time interval. A user session link timeout
occurs if the user session link is inactive with regards to user TL1 input for the time,
in minutes, indicated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
0
UID aging is disabled.
1 to 999
Number of days left for the user to log in, before UID expiration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Fixed Password you can specify whether the user is created with the ability to
change his/her password.
Yes
No
No. The password is not fixed and can be changed by the user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-57
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Users with fixed password is cannot login multiple times despite the MAXSESSION
setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Allowed IP you can enter a &-separated list of allowed source IP addresses for
login with the User Identifier.
An empty list indicates that login to UID is allowed from all IP addresses.
If the parameter is specified without value, then the IP address list is cleared (empty
list).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-58
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
CANC-USER-SECU
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
Select a user in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
main menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Loggoff.
Result: The Logoff User window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-59
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to retrieve information on all active (connected) and/or authenticated
(logged on) users.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-STATUS
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select View Users Status.
Result: The View User Status window opens.
the IP Address,
indicating where the user is connecting from. If the user is connected to the NE by
means of a TCP/IP connection the address is in the form {0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255}{0-255}. If the user is connected by the OSI stack the address is ECC, and if the user is
connected on the CIT LAN port, the address is FDBGLAN.
OMSID, the 1350 OMS operator name, in the case of login from OMS (ZIC).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-60
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Normal
The user changes his/her own password, when required, unless the user has UCAL=5
or has fixed password.
The user Password Identifier (PID) must be changed periodically, depending on the
password aging period, minimum password aging period and password history of the
old last passwords not to be reused.
When a PID is changed, the new password must differ from the old password(s). In
order to avoid that a password can get accidentally echoed if invalid syntax is used,
the responsemessage echoes only the TL1 command name without any parameter.
The new password is to be entered twice, to avoid mis-typed password, with
consequent impossibility of logging in.
Forced
The administrator user changes another users password. This can only be done when
the other user is logged out (-> CANC-USER-SECU procedure). Password History
and Minimum Password Age do not apply to this case. Entry of the old password is
not required.
Related TL1 commands
ED-PID
ED-USER-SECU
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-61
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
Place the cursor in the Old Password text box, then type in the old password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the New Password text box, then type in your new password.
Reference: See Passwords (p. 2-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Re-Enter New Password text box, then type in your new password
again.
Reference: See Passwords (p. 2-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on OK.
Important! Please note that any user administration changes will not take effect until
the next login session.
After changing your password you have to exit the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC and
to relaunch a new session using your new password.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-62
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to send a short free form text message to other users.
Related TL1 commands
SEND-USER-MSG::ALL
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then
to all users
to a single user
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-63
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Place the cursor in the Message text box, then type in the message to be submitted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Apply.
Result: If you have sent a message to all users, a User Message screen pops showing
your message. You can close this screen by clicking on Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-64
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to change the command access security level (CCAL - Command
Community Authorization Level) assigned to a TL1 command.
Note: You must have security administrator privileges.
Related TL1 commands
ED-CMD-SECU
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security TL1
Commands.
Select a TL1 Commands in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC main window.
You can select any one of the TL1 command codes excluding the following TL1
command codes (i.e. the following commands keep always the factory default value):
ACT-USER
CANC-USER
CANC-USER-SECU
DLT-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
ED-USER-SECU
ALW-USER-SECU
INH-USER-SECU
ED-CMD-SECU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-65
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT
SET-ATTR-SECULOG
INIT-SSH-KEY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties General window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Command Community Authorization Level spin box select the desired value.
Additional information The Command Community Authorization Level, specifies
1-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-66
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to display command access security level assigned to a TL1 command.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-CMD-SECU
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties General window opens displaying the command access
(p. 2-68).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-67
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Meaning...
Command
TL1 Command Code, specifies the TL1 command code for which
the security level is assigned.
The value can be any one of the TL1 command codes excluding the
following TL1 command codes (i.e. the following commands keep
always the factory default value):
Command Community
Authorization Level
ACT-USER
CANC-USER
CANC-USER-SECU
DLT-USER-SECU
ENT-USER-SECU
ED-USER-SECU
ALW-USER-SECU
INH-USER-SECU
ED-CMD-SECU
SET-ATTR-SECUDFLT
SET-ATTR-SECULOG
INIT-SSH-KEY
0-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-68
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to copy security sensible files or data from/to an NE from/to a remote
file server.
Note: This procedure is allowed to security administrators only.
The following types of file transfer are supported:
The following file names, for the files to be transferred, shall be applied:
id_rsa.pub, for the file with the NE Public SSH Key, generated by RSA, to be
transferred from NE to remote file server
id_dsa.pub, for the file with the NE Public SSH Key, generated by DSA, to be
transferred from NE to remote file server
sslcsr.pem, for the NE CSR file in PEM format, to be transferred from NE to RFS
sslcert.pem, for the NE X509 Certificate file in PEM format, to be transferred from
RFS to NE
COPY-RFILE-SECU
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-69
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Log File Transfer
Start Copy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Properties General.
Result: The Security File Transfer window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOCSSHKEY
LOCSSLKEY
LOCCSRPEM
RFSX509PEM
LOCALUAL
In the TO spin box specify the entity that gets created as the result of the command
completion:
RFSSSHKEY
RFSSSLKEY
RFSCSRPEM
LOCX509PEM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-70
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
RFSUAL
Remote File Server User Activity Log File in Text Zipped format)
Additional information
The following table shows the allowed combinations for the parameters FROM and TO
FROM
TO
LOCSSHKEY
RFSSSHKEY
LOCALUAL
RFSUAL
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:User ID enter the user identifier used for the connection on the
RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Password enter the user password used for the connection on the
RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:FtpHost enter the IP address of the host (the Remote File Server).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
In the field LOCATION:Url-Path specify the details of how the specified resource (i.e. the
directory where the file(s) reside) can be accessed.
The following syntax has to be used:
[/]<cwd1;>/<cwd2;>/.../<cwdN;>
Without the optional leading `/` character, the path is interpreted as a file path relative to
the users's login directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
In the field From Date and Time specify the beginning date and time used to filter the
logged events from the seculog buffer.
The following syntax has to be used:
{03-37}-{01-12}-{01-31}-{00-23}-{00-59}- {00-59}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
In the field To Date and Time specify the ending date and time used to filter the logged
events from the seculog buffer.
The following syntax has to be used:
{03-37}-{01-12}-{01-31}-{00-23}-{00-59}- {00-59}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Click on Send.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-72
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Meaning...
FROM
LOCSSHKEY
LOCALUAL
Specifies the entity that gets created as the result of the command
completion:
RFSSSHKEY
LOCALUAL
Remote File Server User Activity Log File in zipped text format
The following list shows the allowed combinations for the
parameters FROM and TO
LOCSSHKEY RFSSSHKEY
LOCALUAL RFSUAL
Protocol
LOCATION:User ID
Specifies the user identifier used for the connection on the RFS.
LOCATION:Password
Specifies the user password used for the connection on the RFS.
LOCATION:FtpHost
LOCATION:Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-73
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Parameter ...
Meaning...
LOCATION:Url-Path
Specifies the details of how the specified resource (i.e. the directory
where the file(s) reside) can be accessed.
The following syntax has to be used:
[/]<cwd1>/<cwd2>/.../<cwdN>
[/]<cwd1;>/<cwd2;>/.../<cwdN;>
Specifies the beginning date and time used to filter the logged
events from the seculog buffer.
The following syntax has to be used:
{03-37}-{01-12}-{01-31}-{00-23}-{00-59}- {00-59}
Specifies the ending date and time used to filter the logged events
from the seculog buffer.
The following syntax has to be used:
{03-37}-{01-12}-{01-31}-{00-23}-{00-59}- {00-59}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-74
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Please refer to the individual procedures for information about the required privileges.
Required equipment
Instructions
Procedure 2-18: Generate a new SSL key for SSL authentication (p. 2-77)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 2-19: Request a new certificate for SSL authentication (p. 2-79)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To upload certificate request, see Procedure 2-15: Copy security sensible files or data
from/to an NE to/from a remote file server (p. 2-69)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download certificate, see Procedure 2-15: Copy security sensible files or data from/to
an NE to/from a remote file server (p. 2-69).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-75
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to install a new X.509 certificate generated and signed by NMS client,
in accordance to a CSR previously generated, onto the NE.
Once issued, this will trigger the NE to perform some consistency check on the certificate
file to be installed and, in case of successful validation, the certificate will be actually
installed on the NE.
Important! This is allowed to a security administrator only.
Related TL1 commands
INIT-SSL-CERT
you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC and the respective network
element.
in accordance to a CSR previously generated and submitted by the NE by means of
INIT-SSL-CSR command.
the X.509 certificate file (PEM format) to be installed, has to be preliminary
downloaded from NMS machine to the NE, see Procedure 2-15: Copy security
sensible files or data from/to an NE to/from a remote file server (p. 2-69).
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
SSL&Certificates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Install Signed Certif..
Result: The access control rule is configured accordingly.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-76
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to trigger the NE to generate a new Public/Private key pair associated
to the NE itself, and to be used in the context of SSL authentication.
A new SSL key is generated to replace the default SSL key and certificate, or to renew the
SSL key e.g. in the case that the security of the current SSL key can no longer be
guaranteed.
The generated key has to be embedded in a X.509 certificate, either self signed or issued
by a Certification Authority, to be installed onto the NE and used during the SSL
authentication phase. See Procedure 2-19: Request a new certificate for SSL
authentication (p. 2-79).
Important! This is allowed to a security administrator only.
Related TL1 commands
INIT-SSL-KEY
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Access Control Lists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Start SSL key generation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-77
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Using the field Key Type specify the algorithm to generate the specified new NE key pair.
RSA
DSA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Key Length specify the length of the new NE key pair to be generated.
{512-4096}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-78
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
INIT-SSL-CSR
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Access Control Lists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Start SSL key generation.
Result: The Request SSL Certificate window opens.
Reference: See Certificate for SSL authentication (p. 2-80).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-79
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Meaning...
TID
CN
ORG
{0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{0-255}
ORGUNI
LOC
STATE
COUNTRY
represents the two-letter ISO code for the country where your
organization is location, e.g.: IT.
Value:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-80
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
RTRV-SSL-KEY
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Access Control Lists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Retrieve SSL key .
Result: The SSL key window opens.
Reference: See Current NE Public Key. (p. 2-82).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-81
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Meaning...
Key Type
The field Key Type specify the algorithm to generate the specified
new NE key pair.
Key Length
RSA
DSA
{512-4096}
The currently active SSL Public Key for the NE (SSL Server) The
parameter is reported as a quoted string with PEM format
Value:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-82
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to configure RADIUS server attributes so that the client can
communicate with a server for authentication.
Important! This is allowed to a security administrator only.
Related TL1 commands
ENT-RADIUS-SERVER
RTRV-RADIUS-SERVER
Radius server
RADIUS allows the user to be authenticated and authorized at the same time. The
RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profile or profiles. Based on the
user profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server not only allows the user to
have access to the NE, but also grants the user the user's Privilege Level.
RADIUS is a networking protocol, based on RADIUS servers, that provides centralized
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) services. The user sends a
connection request to a Network Access Server (NAS), which acts as RADIUS client and
sends a RADIUS access request to the RADIUS server.
The RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profiles. Based on the user
profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server accepts or rejects the NAS request.
In turn the NAS accepts or, respectively, rejects the user connection.
Before you begin
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Radius server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-83
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Create RADIUS Server Configuration.
Result: The Create RADIUS Server window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Server Number select the RADIUS server to be used.
The valid values are the following:
RAD1
RAD2
In the field IP Address enter the IP address of the specified RADIUS server (RAD1 or
RAD2).
{1-99, 101-126,128-223}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{0-25 5}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Port enter the authentication port of the RADIUS server.
Valid values are from 1 to 65000. The default port value is 1812.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Secret Key enter the shared secret key between the NE and the target
RADIUS server.
This key is an ascii string between 5 to 32 characters. The secret key is encrypted on the
NE using AES or 3DES..
<5-32 VALID PID CHARACTERS>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Status select the RADIUS server status to be used.
The server status refers to the NE configuration, i.e. whether the NE shall attempt to use
the specified server or not. It does not reflect the servers operational state and
reachability.
The valid values are the following:
ENABLE
DISABLE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-84
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-85
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
ED-RADIUS-SERVER
RTRV-RADIUS-SERVER
Radius server
RADIUS allows the user to be authenticated and authorized at the same time. The
RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profile or profiles. Based on the
user profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server not only allows the user to
have access to the NE, but also grants the user the user's Privilege Level.
RADIUS is a networking protocol, based on RADIUS servers, that provides centralized
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) services. The user sends a
connection request to a Network Access Server (NAS), which acts as RADIUS client and
sends a RADIUS access request to the RADIUS server.
The RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profiles. Based on the user
profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server accepts or rejects the NAS request.
In turn the NAS accepts or, respectively, rejects the user connection.
Before you begin
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Radius server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-86
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Select a RADIUS Server in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS ZIC main menu and click on Modify.
Result: The Modify RADIUS Server window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field IP Address enter the IP address of the specified RADIUS server (RAD1 or
RAD2).
{1-99, 101-126,128-223}-{0-255}-{0-255}-{0-25 5}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Port enter the authentication port of the RADIUS server.
Valid values are from 1 to 65000. The default port value is 1812.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Secret Key enter the shared secret key between the NE and the target
RADIUS server.
This key is an ascii string between 5 to 32 characters. The secret key is encrypted on the
NE using AES or 3DES..
<5-32 VALID PID CHARACTERS>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Status select the RADIUS server status to be used.
The server status refers to the NE configuration, i.e. whether the NE shall attempt to use
the specified server or not. It does not reflect the servers operational state and
reachability.
The valid values are the following:
ENABLE
DISABLE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-87
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use this procedure to set the authentication parameters which are used during access to
the RADIUS servers.
Important! This is allowed to a security administrator only.
Related TL1 commands
SET-RADIUS-AUTH
RTRV-RADIUS-AUTH
Radius server
RADIUS allows the user to be authenticated and authorized at the same time. The
RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profile or profiles. Based on the
user profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server not only allows the user to
have access to the NE, but also grants the user the user's Privilege Level.
RADIUS is a networking protocol, based on RADIUS servers, that provides centralized
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) services. The user sends a
connection request to a Network Access Server (NAS), which acts as RADIUS client and
sends a RADIUS access request to the RADIUS server.
The RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profiles. Based on the user
profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server accepts or rejects the NAS request.
In turn the NAS accepts or, respectively, rejects the user connection.
Before you begin
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Radius server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-88
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Set RADIUS Server Authentication.
Result: The Set RADIUS Server Authentication window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Authentication Order specify the authentication criteria for the user
when logging to NE.
Valid values are:
LOCAL
RADIUS
The NE shall first search for the user ID in the local NE database. If the user ID is
found in the local database, then the user shall be authenticated via the local database.
Otherwise, the NE shall authenticate the user via RADIUS..
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Retries define the number of attempts that the NE will try to contact the
specified RADIUS server that has failed to respond to the initial request. If there is no
response from the server after the specified number of retries then the NE will try to
contact the second RADIUS server if one is provisioned (status: "Enabled").
The supported value range for retries is 0 to 100. The default value is 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Timeout define the timeout (in seconds) for the NE to wait for a response
from the RADIUS server. The failure is declared after the timeout is elapsed.
The supported value range for timeout is 1 to 1000. The default value is 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-89
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
DLT-RADIUS-SERVER
RTRV-RADIUS-SERVER
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Radius server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the RADIUS Server to be deleted in the list displayed in the right part of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC main menu and change it's status to Disabled. See
Procedure 2-22: Modify RADIUS server attributes (p. 2-86).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the RADIUS Server in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC main menu and click on Delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-90
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedures are to be used for user management. It is suggested to use
Security management and user administration on the WDM application (p. 2-14) as an
entry point for user administration activities.
Furthermore, it is recommended to have a list prepared of all the users that probably will
need to have access to the WebUI and the NEs, especially if several user logins are to be
created or modified for different NEs. The list should contain the designated user IDs,
associated passwords, access privileges and other related security parameters, and should
be as complete as possible.
Contents
Procedure 2-25: Create a user
2-93
2-94
2-97
2-98
2-99
2-100
2-101
2-102
2-104
2-105
2-106
2-107
2-108
2-109
Syslog Administration
2-110
2-111
CLI Logging
2-112
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-91
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
2-113
SNMP Logging
2-114
2-115
2-116
2-117
2-118
2-119
2-120
User Preferences
2-121
2-122
2-123
2-124
2-125
2-126
2-127
RADIUS Properties
2-128
2-129
2-130
2-131
2-132
2-133
2-135
2-136
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-92
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
Result: The Create User screen is displayed (see The Create User window
(p. 2-94)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter appropriate information (see Configuring user accounts (p. 2-20) and The
Create User window (p. 2-94)) and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-93
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Values/Format
Additional Info
User ID
<5-12 chars>
Access Privilege
Observer
Provisioner
Administrator
Status
Enabled
Disabled
{1-999}
Disabled (uncheck)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-94
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Attribute
Password
Values/Format
Additional Info
Valid values for the Password
are 8 to 32 case-sensitive
alphabetic [a-z, A-Z], numeric
[0-9] or special characters.
A valid password must
contain at least 1 lowercase
alphabetic, 1 uppercase
alphabetic, 1 numeric and 1
special character. The
following special characters
are accepted as valid
characters for the Password:
% (percent sign), + (plus
sign), # (pound sign)_
(underscore) ! (exclamation
point), @ (at sign), $ (dollar
sign), (double quotation
mark), & (ampersand),
(apostrophe), ( (left
parenthesis), ) (right
parenthesis), * (asterisk), and
. (period). The first character
can be any alphabetic,
numeric or valid special
character, except the # (pound
sign).
In addition, the following
rules apply to the Password
value:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-95
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Attribute
Confirm Password
Values/Format
Additional Info
Must have the same value as
Password.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-96
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Modify available fields (see Configuring user accounts (p. 2-20)and The User
Security Administration screen (p. 2-98)) and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-97
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Values/Format
Additional Info
User ID
<5-12 chars>
Access Privilege
Service
Administrator
Provisioner
Observer
Status
Enabled
Disabled
{1-999}
Disabled
Login Failures
<integer>
Last Login
<date time>
Create
Details
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-98
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-99
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the old password and the new password, and confirm the new password. Then click
Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-100
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-101
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Values/Format
User ID
Additional Info
ID of the user that
successfully logged in and
started the session.
If there is no value, the
session has not been
successfully authenticated
with a valid login.
User Type
Unknown
CLI (Telnet)
CLI (SSH)
CLI (Console)
WebUI
Secure WebUI
TL1 (Raw)
TL1 (Telnet)
TL1 (SSH)
SNMP
Source
<PortName> or <IP
address>
Login Time
<date/time>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-102
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Session ID
Terminate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-103
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-107)).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-104
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-107)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter User ID, Password, and Access Privilege information. and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-105
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-107)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-106
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Values/Format
Additional Info
User ID
<1-32 chars>
Access Privilege
NMS
Admin
Provisioner
Observer
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Create
Details
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-107
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use the following procedure to view or modify system security attributes (see System
security features (p. 2-26)).
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-108
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-109
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Syslog Administration
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Server IP
<IP address>
Port
{1-65535}
Logging Threshold
Emergency
Alert
Critical
Error
Warning
Notice
Info
Debug
Logging Enabled
(checkbox)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-110
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use the following procedure to set/view CLI user activity logging properties.
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-111
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
CLI Logging
Attribute
Additional Info
Admin
Read
Write
Provisioner
Read
Write
Service
Read
Write
Observer
Read
Write
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-112
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use the following procedure to set/view SNMP user activity logging properties.
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-113
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
SNMP Logging
Attribute
Additional Info
Admin
Read
Write
Provisioner
Read
Write
Service
Read
Write
Observer
Read
Write
NMS
Read
Write
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-114
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-115
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Value/Format
Additional Info
Number
{1-2,147,483,647}
Time
<date time>
Source IP
<IP address>
Description
<0-255 chars>
Data
<0-255 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-116
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-117
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Value/Format
Additional Info
Number
{1-2,147,483,647}
Chronologically-ordered log
entry.
Time
<date time>
Source
<shelf/slot/port>
Card
Category
Alarm/Event Type
Critical
Major
Minor
State Change
User Action
General Event
Not Alarmed
None
Unknown
Not Reported
Security
Warning
Description
<0-255 chars>
Condition
SA
Data
<0-255 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-118
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the log is retrieved (see previous procedures), click the Export to Excel symbol.
Note: To use the Export to Excel feature, Internet Explorer must be configured as
follows:
1. In the IE tools menu select Internet Options -> Connections - > LAN Settings ->
Advanced (under Proxy server options)-> Exceptions (add IP address of NE to
Exceptions)
2. Close all IE instances (windows) and re-establish the WebUI connection to the
NE.
Note: The user should also ensure the following in the Internet Browser: Under
Internet Explorer ->Tools ->Internet Options -> Security tab select the Customer
Level button; Scroll down to the ActiveX controls and plug-ins and set Initialize and
Script ActiveX controls not marked as safe for scripting to either Enable or Prompt.
Click OK, and when prompted Are you sure? click Yes. Click OK to close out the
Internet Properties window. When the Excel button is pressed from the WebUI, if
Prompt was selected in the ActiveX controls, a popup for an ActiveX control on this
page might be unsafe to interact with other parts of the page. Do you want to allow
this interaction? will appear. Click Yes and Excel will launch, opening a file with the
retrieved log info.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-119
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Setting/viewing user preferences
Note: User preferences are stored on the local PC for each user and are remembered
from session to session; they are not stored on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-120
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
User Preferences
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Alarm Auto-Refresh
(checkbox)
mm/dd/yy HH:MM:SS
AM/PM
dd-mm-yy HH:MM:SS
(checkbox)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-121
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > RADIUS > Servers.
Result: The RADIUS Server screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
Result: The Create RADIUS Server screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-122
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Values/Format
Additional Info
Server
RAD1
RAD2
Server IP
<IP address>
Port
1-65000
1812 (default)
Shared Secret
<5-32 chars>
<5-32 chars>
Status
Enabled
Disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-123
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > RADIUS > Servers.
Result: The RADIUS Servers screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-124
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Values/Format
RAD1
RAD2
Additional Info
Identifier of the RADIUS
server.
Server IP
<IP address>
Port
Range: {1-65000}
1812 (default)
Shared Secret
<5-32 chars>
<5-32 chars>
Server Enabled
(checkbox)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-125
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > RADIUS > Servers.
Result: The RADIUS Servers screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-126
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > RADIUS > Properties
Result: The RADIUS Properties screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-127
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
RADIUS Properties
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Timeout (seconds)
{1-1000}
Retries
{1-100}
Authentication Order
Local
Local authentication is
RADIUS
RADIUS authentication is
authentication is attempted
first using the RADIUS server
database. If the RADIUS
server is not reachable, then
authentication is based on the
NEs security database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-128
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use the following procedures to create trap destinations. Refer to SNMP authentication
(p. 2-37).
Before you begin
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
Result: The Create SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-129
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Value/Format
Additional Info
ID
<1-32 chars>
Destination IP
<IP address>
Port
Timeout
1500 (default)
Retry Count
{0-255}
3 (default)
SNMP Version
v1
v2c (default)
v3
{0-65535}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-130
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use the following procedures to delete trap destinations. Refer to SNMP authentication
(p. 2-37).
Before you begin
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-131
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Use the following procedures to view trap destinations. Refer to SNMP authentication
(p. 2-37).
Before you begin
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-132
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Value/Format
Additional Info
ID
<1-32 chars>
Destination IP
<IP address>
Port
Timeout
1500 (default)
Retry Count
{0-255}
3 (default)
SNMP Version
v1
v2c (default)
v3
Create
Range: {0-65535}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-133
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Attribute
Delete
Value/Format
Additional Info
Delete a selected trap
destination.
NOTE:Traps are not sent to a
deleted destination. Ensure
that other destinations are
available and operational
before deleting an existing
destination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-134
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
The following procedure are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify Community Strings, enter appropriate values in the respective fields and click
Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-135
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Values/Format
Additional Info
Administrator
<1-20 chars>
admin_snmp (default)
Observer
<1-20 chars>
observer_snmp (default)
Provisioner
<1-20 chars>
provisioner_snmp (default)
NMS
<1-20 chars>
nms_snmp (default)
<1-20 chars>
3rdpnms_snmp (default)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
2-136
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures which have to be performed for the data
communication setup.
Contents
Data communication on the OCS application
3-4
3-5
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
User interfaces
3-13
Communications network
3-18
3-21
CIT port
3-24
3-25
3-27
3-29
View IP Addresses
3-30
3-31
3-34
3-36
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-38
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-57
3-59
3-63
3-66
3-67
Procedure 3-16: Remove GCC legs from the ECC protection group
3-69
3-71
3-73
3-75
3-78
3-80
Procedure 3-22: Enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table
3-81
3-85
3-87
3-89
3-91
3-93
3-96
3-98
3-100
3-101
Procedure 3-31: Configure the IP address range for the OSPF area
3-102
3-104
3-106
3-109
3-111
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-35: View network (NE name, NE IP, software release) map
information
3-113
Network Map
3-114
3-115
3-116
3-117
3-118
3-119
IP Routes
3-120
3-121
3-122
3-123
3-127
OSPF Areas
3-128
3-132
3-133
3-137
3-138
3-140
3-142
3-143
NTP Properties
3-145
3-146
3-147
3-148
3-149
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This chapter deals with the basic theoretical background of Data Communication
Networks (DCNs) and provides DCN configuration guidelines for Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS systems.
Contents
Basic DCN principles
3-5
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This subsection serves as an entry point, it describes the basic DCN principles.
Purpose of a data communication network
A Data Communication Network (DCN) is used for the exchange of management data.
This section provides an overview of the Data Communication Network and describes the
type of communication between the nodes in the network and the used protocols.
OTN management network
Fast Ethernet LAN ports (OAMP) provide the interface between the OTN management
network and the External (outband) DCN Topology towards the management system.
OAMP LAN redundancy is ensured when connecting both OAMP LAN ports from the
two FLC cards to LAN switches that support Rapid Spanning Tree protocol (RSTP)
according to IEEE802.1D-2004.
For initial configuration the Zero Installation Craft application (ZIC) can be accessed via
the CIT LAN ports on each FLC card while afterwards the OAMP LAN ports have to be
used. In addition the CIT LAN ports can be used for debug access. In case the network
element consist of main and extension shelves only the LAN ports on the main shelf FLC
cards provide management and ZIC access.
Embedded Communication Channels ECC
The Embedded Communication Channels (ECC) are part of the OTN line signal (GCC)
and are used for inband transport of management information. The ECC terminate on the
OTN port cards that are connected via shelf internal links (ECC Link) or inter-shelf LAN
connections (ILAN) to the First-Level-Controller (FLC) where the communication stack
is running.
The physical communication between each OTN port card and the first level controller in
the same shelf is based on TDM full duplex point-to-point links operating at 19.44 Mb/s
bitrate as a point-to-point serial link. Each ECC link pair from the OTN port cards are
duplicated to both shelf FLC_A and FLC_B as a double star topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For multishelf configuration, ECC traffic from extension shelves is transported from
extension shelf FLC to main shelf FLC via GbE ILAN.
Per system, there is a maximum number of ECC channels of 512, independent of
bandwidth.
Table 3-1
ECC Channel
Type
GCC
(OTU2/ODU2)
256
GCC
(OTU2e/ODU2e)
168
GCC
(OTU3/ODU3)
64
GCC
(OTU3e2/
ODU3e2)
64
GCC
(OTU4/ODU4)
20
64
DCN protocols
Name
Service / Protocol
Application
TL1 over SSH, SSH for debug access, control plane CLI over SSH,
SSH file transfer (SFTP), ntp, HTTPS (ZIC), RMI over SSL/TLS
(ZIC), CORBA-MTNM (ASON Mgmt of control plane)
Presentation
Session
Transport
TCP, UDP
Network
Data Link
MAC (802.1D),
Physical
GCC
802.3 Ethernet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The management of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS s based on the use of the Transaction
Language 1 (TL1, defined by Telcordia Technologies standards (formerly Bellcore).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Please observe the following engineering guidelines when configuring a DCN with
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems involved:
75 simultaneous telnet encoded connections are supported (all over port 6085)
75 simultaneous raw encoded connections are supported (each either over port 6084
or over port 3082)
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GCC0 - two bytes within OTUk overhead. GCC0 can be used to carry management
information.
GCC1/GCC2- four bytes (each of two bytes) within ODUk overhead. These bytes can
be used for management information or for control-plane signaling information
(GCC2 is not supported in current relase).
GCC bandwidth depends on line rate. For example GCC0 bandwidth in case of OTU2 is
about 1.3 Mbit/s as for OTU3 its bandwidth is about 5.2 Mbit/s.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports Internet Protocol Access Control Lists.
The Internet Protocol Access Control Lists are administered on a per NE basis. They meet
U.S. Government security requirements and corporate security requirement. IP ACLs
cover source and/ or destination IP addresses, protocols and ports. They include blocking
source/destination IP addresses, ports and protocol IDs.
For detailed information refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS DCN Planning and
Engineering Guide (Photonic applications), chapter DCN configuration, Security, NE
firewall with provisionable IP access control lists (IP ACL).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section deals with the basic theoretical background of Data Communication
Networks (DCNs) on the WDM application.
Contents
User interfaces
3-13
Communications network
3-18
3-21
CIT port
3-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User interfaces
Overview
The NE hosts LAN, serial, and debug interfaces sufficient to support EMS, local craft
terminal and serial or LAN based processor access for debug purposes. The NE supports
a single LAN IP address (Router ID) for all LAN functions. This address is provisionable
and is required when bringing up the system. This is the IP address used for all IP
communications over the OSC, GCC0, and OAMP if the OAMP port assumes the Router
ID.
A Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) interface provides access for local craft workers to
WebUI, CLI, and TL1 interfaces via local craft PCs. The WebUI interface provides a
graphical user interface to the node software using HTML, JavaScript, and Java. The
application runs on the NE and is controlled and viewed through a standard web browser
that is provided by the PC.
A local craft terminal (laptop or PC) connected either through a serial or a LAN interface
can establish TL1 or CLI connections to any NE reachable via the local NE. In addition,
the LAN interfaces can establish SNMP connections to any SNMP management system
that is reachable via the local NE.
On initial turn-up, the systems IP address (Router ID) is 172.16.0.1. The Router ID can
be provisioned via a connection to the serial craft port using the appropriate CLI or TL1
command. The Router ID can also be provisioned via the CIT port, whereby the user
simply connects his laptop to the CIT port of the master Equipment Controller (EC) and
accesses the WebUI.
Note: The following applies to the CIT:
When a user manually configures the CIT Port Admin State, the CIT Auto State is
disabled
When a user manually disables the CIT Auto State the CIT Port Admin State is
automatically set to the default value of Enabled.
The web user interface (WebUI) provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
The WebUI interface is accessed using a web browser running on a computer that is
connected via Ethernet to the NE, either directly or over a LAN. The WebUI supports
provisioning, administration, performance monitoring, and display of alarms and
conditions from the NE. It provides an intuitive, easy-to-use tool to assist in the initial
installation and troubleshooting of NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a line-oriented user interface that runs on the NE.
A user can access the CLI using a terminal device connected to the NE. The CLI provides
commands that allow the user to configure, manage, and monitor the NE, the NE
interfaces, and the services running on the NE.
Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
TL1 is a common protocol for NE management. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TL1
interface is a text-based command line interface that allows the operator to configure and
manage Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS hardware, software, and services.
Note: TL1 is functionally and structurally defined by Telcordia documents such as
GR-831, GR-199 & GR-474.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS provides a User Panel (USRPNL) located on the main
shelf, which supports the majority of communication connections for the NE. This user
panel includes the following ports:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are four (4) general purpose switched auto-sensing LAN ports (10/100BaseTX), for
connection to EMS/NMS, VoIP, and externally managed devices. The four general
purpose switched auto-sensing LAN ports on the user panel are as follows:
The OAMP port is used to connect to the External Management System (EMS) and is
the main control interface to the NE. The signaling format is 10/100BaseT. By
default, the OAMP LAN inherits the Router ID IP address when the OAMP LAN port
is enabled for service. However, the user is free to change the IP address of the
OAMP LAN port.
The VoIP port is used to connect to an IP phone. With IP phones at every site,
customers/field technicians can talk to one another simply by dialing the IP address of
the destination phone. The IP address and status of the port can be user provisioned.
There are two External LAN ports (which can be used to connect to externally
managed devices), labeled E1-LAN and E2-LAN. These ports are auto-sensing, so
either a cross-over or straight-thru Ethernet cable can be used.
The ports designated as the OAMP and Craft ports on the USRPNL, support access to the
CLI and TL1 commands. Further, the serial craft port (which is the DB-9/USB-B port)
supports only CLI and TL1, and the OAMP port also supports SNMP management. The
VoIP port on the USRPNL is disabled by default. External IP address and MAC address
remain fixed and follow the active LAN ports on the USRPNL. There is one MAC for the
OAMP port and one MAC for the VoIP port. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE's MAC
addresses associated with the LAN ports on the USRPNL are installed/assigned at the
factory.
Note: The USRPNL status LED reflects status of the USRPNL itself rather than shelf
status.
Attention: The OAMP port supports both fixed configuration and auto mode. It is
provisionable via CLI or WebUI. It is not recommended to have one side as auto and
other as fixed configuration. The configuration should match on either side.
The user panel OAMP port was meant to connected to a router/switch. In a fixed
configuration, when connected to a PC/laptop, a crossover cable must be used. In
auto-negotiation mode, either straight or crossover cable can be used.
User panel replacement
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE supports two craft ports including a female (DB9) and a USB-B port. Both ports
support local RS-232C serial interface for connection to a CIT via serial link.
Either the DB9 port or the USB-B port can be used to connect serially to the NE.
However, only one port can be active at any given time. The NE automatically detects the
presence of a laptop (or any equivalent active device) when it is connected to the USB-B
port on the USRPNL. When both USB-B port and DB9 ports are simultaneously
connected, preference is given to the USB-B port. The USB-B port becomes active, and
the DB9 port is rendered inactive.
Note: The parity setting for the USB port must be set to Odd. The parity setting for
the DB9 interface must be set to None.
Equipment controller (EC)
Every PSS-32 and PSS-16 shelf contains one or two ECs (depending on whether
redundancy is desired). The EC provides four auto-sensing RJ45 LAN ports. The first
port (labeled CIT) located at the topmost of the EC, is dedicated for CIT connection. The
CIT port is active for ECs residing on the master shelf and disabled for ECs residing on
sub-shelves. The user may plug the CIT laptop into either of the Master ECs CIT port
and the SW will auto switch to the active EC.
Configurable attribute values on the two Master CIT ports are always the same; updating
the values on one port will automatically update the values on the other port. However,
when a newly introduced redundant EC is installed, CIT port data from the first EC would
need to be copied to the CIT port on the new EC.
The CIT port supports DHCP server. When a connection (e.g. using a laptop) is detected,
the NE provides an IP address in response to the DHCP request from the laptop. The CIT
port allows the client to connect locally to manage the NE, and it can also allow the client
to connect to any remote NE reachable by the local NE. The port also supports SNMP
(via 1354 RM-PhM) and FTP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
User interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The available addresses start at the beginning of the network address range as long as
they don't conflict with either the broadcast or local address. The DHCP server assigns the
IP to the client PC when connected to CIT port in the following manner:
If assign 192.168.5.5/29, and the dhcp_range is 10, the available addresses are
192.168.5.1,2,3,4,6
Note: The WebUI does not run the full features like the 1354 RM-PhM. The CIT port
will only provide basic NE management (for local and remote management via
SNMP). IP Routing functions in 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S and Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-1 have to be configured so that all NEs intended to be managed, are
reachable from the local NE. In other words, IP applications from any external DCN
network will work only when there is full IP reach capability to every GNE and RNE
in the network.
The bottom two ports on the EC (labeled ES1 and ES2) are used to connect to
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS extension shelves (sub-shelves). The 1830 PSS NE may be
comprised of multiple 1830 shelves. In order to enable protected communication between
1830 PSS shelves which comprise one NE (single TID), ES1/ES2 ports on these shelves
need to be connected in a daisy-chain fashion.
Note: Direct cabling of ES1/ES2 ports between two different 1830PSS nodes may
impact the ethernet connectivity of all XCOM ports such as OAMP, VOIP, E1, E2 &
CIT.
Failure of any EC in a duplex controller configuration does not prohibit communication
between the affected sub-shelf and the main shelf. Likewise, failure of any EC in a
simplex controller configuration does not prohibit communication between the main shelf
and all other sub-shelves, unless the simplex EC is the controller for the master Shelf.
Note: For detailed procedure on Replacing Equipment Controller, see the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
Matrix and Controller Card (MTC1T9)
Every Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S shelf contains two MTC1T9 cards. Like the EC, it
has CIT, ES1 and ES2 ports. Since the PSS-32S is always configured as an extension
shelf, the CIT port is disabled. The ES1 and ES2 ports are used to connect to the main
shelf and other extension shelves.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Communications network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Communications network
The basic communications network architecture for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS includes
all LAN interfaces, OSC interfaces, and GCC interfaces. LAN interfaces include the
OAMP, VoIP, E1, E2, CIT, and Extension Shelf (ES) connections. The OSC interfaces can
vary from one up to 8, one for each degree. The OSC carries node-to-node
communication, sharing of OSPF LSAs, wavetracker keys, SCOT messages, etc.
Note: Wave key opaque LSAs can only be enabled in one OSPF Area.
Note: The external communication (Voice/data) through the LAN ports (VoIP, OAMP,
E1, E2) in the User Interface Panel (USRPNL) are lost (dropped) when the active
controller (EC) fails (by autonomous or manual switchover command). The
communication will be established again when the EC becomes active. This also
applies to OSC and GCC as well.
For the communications network, static routes or OSPF must be used.
The GCC interfaces can vary from 1 up to 32, depending on the number of supported
Optical Transponders (OT's) that are provisioned for GCC0 termination.
Note: GCC0 terminations on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system are supported by
the following:
These ports are used for connecting with the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 (Edge
Device), Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 or other Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NEs.
For newly added GCC interfaces in new or existing installations it is highly
recommended to immediately set the interface GCC to standard mode of operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Communications network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connection Type
Maximum Value
Comment
WebUI
16 sessions
CLI
10 sessions
SNMP
10 sessions
GCC0
32
OSC
20
128
256
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Communications network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-2
(continued)
Connection Type
Maximum Value
Comment
Active users
32
Combinations of TL1,
WebUI, CLI, and SNMP users
52
32 GCC0 + 20 OSC
256
Number of provisionable
OSPF areas supported on the
NE
Note: Once the maximum allowed count of 20 TL1 sessions are open, the user needs
to cancel the current TL1 log-in session(s) to allow any new users. A new user needs
to wait for 2 minutes to log-in after cancelling any of the already logged-in users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Gateway Network Element (GNE) is defined as an NE that provides user access to all
NEs within the maintenance subnetwork. Any Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS can function as a
gateway NE. The GNE is able to send over the ECC (OSC and GCC0) the TL1
commands which are destined for a Remote NE. The GNE routes the messages between
members of the maintenance subnetwork.
The NE maintains a Gateway mapping table which contains mapping entries for every
reachable NE on the network. Each entry in the table contains the TID of the NE and its
corresponding IP address. The table contains entries for every reachable NE (over the
OSC for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS , as well as over the GCC for the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-1). The gateway mapping table is capable of holding a maximum of 128
entries.
Note: Upon reaching the maximum of 128 entries, the NE will raise an alarm to
indicate that the maximum size has been reached.
The NE supports creating and deleting system-level OSPF areas. The NE can be part of
up to 3 OSPF areas, in addition to the default backbone area (0-0-0-0). After an OSPF
Area is created, it can then be assigned to an OAMP, VOIP, E1, E2, OSC or GCC
interface. Opaque LSAs are used to advertise/distribute association parameters.
Note: OSPF does not need to run on the CIT, since this port is meant to be local LAN
(i.e. a stub network, not one where routes need to be discovered).
When OSPF is enabled on the OAMP or GCC0 interfaces, the default area for those
interfaces is 0. When OSPF is enabled on the OSC interface, the default area for this
interface is also 0. However, the system supports configuration of different areas on
these supported interfaces.
The GNE functionality supported in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS comes in handy if a
customer does not want to enable OSPF on the OAMP interface. Without OSPF to
discover the internal network and distribute this network to the management DCN, the
EMS is not able to directly connect to any remote NE (RNE). Connection method must
then be made thru the GNE. For example, in order to connect to an RNE, the customer
must first telnet to the GNE and from there, connect to the desired RNE.
Note: If any NEs are GNEs using static IP routing and then are reconfigured as
non-GNEs, any routers on the local subnet should have their ARP entries cleared so
that re-routing may take place immediately.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In a network design where OSPF is enabled on the GNE OAMP management
ports or static routes are configured such that an alternate path for the 1830 NEs is
available via the customer DCN in addition to inter-NE paths via OSC/GCC
interfaces the following should be adhered too:
1. At the GNE NEs the Loopback IP should be provisioned with the snmp_src option
such that all SNMP requests to the NE must use only the Loopback IP of the NE
(the OAMP IP address will not be valid for SNMP requests). Likewise any SNMP
traps from the NE will contain the Loopback IP as the source IP address.
2. When OSPF is enabled at the OAMP port the OSPF metric should be provisioned
to be greater than the largest Inter-NE path cost. This will allow for NE-NE
application data messages to prefer inter-NE paths over customer DCN paths.
3. When static routes are configured at the GNE in order to provide an alternate path
for the 1830 NEs via the customer DCN in addition to inter-NE paths via
OSC/GCC interfaces - the distance value provisioned for each static route should
be greater than 110. This will allow for NE-NE application data messages to
prefer inter-NE paths over customer DCN paths.
For applications based on IP stack (i.e. SNMP, ftp, telnet), the EMS directly
communicates with the RNE, without using any translation function on the GNE. In this
case, all IP packets are routed to the appropriate destination, and the GNE does not need
to perform any association or mediation services.
To provide redundant paths between NMS and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network, dual
GNE configurations may be used (two examples of dual GNE configurations are shown
in Figure 3-1, Dual GNE configurations (p. 3-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For NE-to-EMS messages, the GNE routes the TL1 message over an IP address to the
appropriate EMS based on the connection on which the message was received.
Note: Enabling and disabling of TL1 autonomous messaging is supported via the
WebUI. The default state is for messages to be suppressed. To enable TL1
autonomous messaging, check TL1 Autonomous Messages Enabled in the System
Properties window display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
CIT port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CIT port
Remote NE management via the CIT port(s) can be supported, but only if the operator
assigns unique IP addresses to these CIT ports. Either CIT port on the active EC or
standby EC (if equipped) can be used to connect to the external device (e.g. laptop).
The system allows a user (Admin or Service user) to auto-disable the CIT port status.
Disable Port Automatically can only be set to Yes if Source IP is configured (does not
equal 0.0.0.0).
Note: Configurable attribute values on the two CIT ports are always the same;
updating the values on one port will automatically update the values on the other port.
When a redundant EC is installed, CIT port data from the first EC would need to be
copied to the CIT port on the new EC.
Once the laptop verifies that it can talk to its gateway, then the user can run the CIT,
telnet to the TL1 port, or telnet into the CLI. From the locally connected-to-CIT-port
laptop the NE will respond as follows:
If the user runs the WebUI, the NE responds with a login screen.
If the user runs the telnet session to the TL1 port the NE responds with a TL1
command prompt.
If the user runs the telnet session to the CLI, the NE responds with a CLI login
prompt.
The SNMP function is fully supported over the CIT, so the CIT can be used to
manage the entire Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network if needed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes procedures which have to be performed for data communication
setup in a OCS application.
Contents
Procedure 3-1: Change the Site Identifier (SID)
3-27
3-29
View IP Addresses
3-30
3-31
3-34
3-36
3-38
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-57
3-59
3-63
3-66
3-67
Procedure 3-16: Remove GCC legs from the ECC protection group
3-69
3-71
3-73
3-75
3-78
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-80
Procedure 3-22: Enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table
3-81
3-85
3-87
3-89
3-91
3-93
3-96
3-98
3-100
3-101
Procedure 3-31: Configure the IP address range for the OSPF area
3-102
3-104
3-106
3-109
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to change an already provisioned NE name (also referred to as the Site
Identifier (SID)).
NE names
SET-SID
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select System Commands Set Site Identifier, either by selecting Action from
the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Set Site Identifier window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the SID text box and key in the new SID observing the following
configuration rules:
The SID must start with a letter and must end with an alphanumeric character.
Consecutive hyphens (-) are not allowed.
Number of hyphens must not be greater than 4.
Click Apply to assign the new SID and to dismiss the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Exit the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC. Then restart the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC.
Repeat a refresh of the 1830 PSS ZIC page in the browser window until the new NE
name is present in NE TID field and ZIC SERVER state is ALIGNED. Then launch ZIC
application again.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure if you want to view the IP and MAC addresses of an NE.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-IP-ADDR
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
View IP Addresses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View IP Addresses
Purpose
This window is used to display the TCP/IP addresses in the network element NE).
Fields and parameters
Meaning
Active FLC IP
Control Plane IP
FLC A IP
FLC B IP
LAN Gateway
Loopback IP
IP Mask
MAC Address
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-IP-ADDR
RTRV-IP-ADDR.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Active FLC IP Address enter the IP address for the currently active FLC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Neither the network nor the host portion of the address (with respect to the value of
the MASK parameter) when viewed in binary format may be all 0s or all 1s.
This address follows the active FLC on each FLC EPS switch.
The factory default is 18-70-1-3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field FLC-A IP Address modify the IP address of the left FLC.
Additional information: {1-99,101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}.
Neither the network nor the host portion of the address (with respect to the value of
the MASK parameter) when viewed in binary format may be all 0s or all 1s.
The factory default is 18-70-1-1. This address is always configured on the (front
view) leftmost FLC card (Slot 73 in PSS-64 system, Slot 23 in PSS-36 system)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field FLC-B IP Address modify the IP address of the right FLC.
Additional information: {1-99,101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}.
Neither the network nor the host portion of the address (with respect to the value of
the MASK parameter) when viewed in binary format may be all 0s or all 1s.
The factory default is 18-70-1-2. Once changed, this parameter cannot be reset to the
factory default. This address is always configured on the rightmost FLC card (Slot 75
in PSS-64 system Slot 40 in PSS-36 system)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Subnet Mask enter the subnet mask of the network the NE is connected to on
the Customer LAN.
Additional information: {128-255} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-248}
In the field LAN Gateway enter the internet Protocol address of the gateway router,
connected to the OAMP LAN
Additional information: {1-99,101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}
Internet Protocol address of the gateway router, connected to the OAMP LAN. The
address must be part of the IP subnet configured on the OAMP LAN via the
ACTIVEFLCIP, FLCAIP, FLCBIP, MASK parameters. The address must not be
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The IP change is sent to NE and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC shows the
updated address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to set or modify the loopback IP address of the NE, which is shared as
interface address by all ECC network interfaces (NETIF), IP over IP tunnel interfaces
(IPIPT), and which is also used as OSPF router Id.
Note: This IP address can also be set using Procedure 20-1: Initialize the NE using
EZ setup tool (p. 20-27).
Related TL1 commands
ED-IP-ADDR
RTRV-IP-ADDR
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking.
Then select IP Addresess, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using
the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC IP Address window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Loopback IP Address enter the loopback address of the NE.
Note: This address is an alias to the SYSTEM IP address as set up with Procedure
3-6: Modify the TCP/IP stack parameters (p. 3-38).
Additional information: The address 0-0-0-0 is not allowed.
The NE loopback address is also used as OSPF Router Id. The address must not be
part of the IP subnet configured on the customer LAN via the ACTIVEFLCIP,
FLCAIP, FLCBIP, MASK parameters. The address must not be identical to the CPIP
address.
The factory default is 0-0-0-0.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC IP Address window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to set the control plane IP addresses of the NE, if not already done
using Procedure 20-1: Initialize the NE using EZ setup tool (p. 20-27).
Related TL1 commands
ED-IP-ADDR
RTRV-IP-ADDR
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking.
Then select IP Addresess, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using
the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC IP Address window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Control Plane IP Address enter the control plane node IP address of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The address must not be part of the IP subnet configured on the customer LAN via the
ACTIVEFLCIP, FLCAIP, FLCBIP, MASK parameters. The address must not be
identical to the LOOPBACKIP address.
The factory default is 0-0-0-0.
Note: This address is an alias to the control plane IP address as set up with
Procedure 3-6: Modify the TCP/IP stack parameters (p. 3-38).
Note: After the GMRE processes have been activated by setting the GMRE
Administrative State to UP the Control Plane IP address cannot be modified
anymore.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC IP Address window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure can also be used to configure TCP/IP parameters for some of the
interfaces:
The configured IP address on System AID is the NE's loopback IP address, which is
shared as interface address by all unnumbered network interfaces.
The configured IP address on System AID will be also used as OSPF Router ID.
The configured IP address on control plane node AID is used as TDM control plane node
address. This address has to be provisioned, before the TDM control plane is started on
the NE. This address is used by the control plane for communicating with direct
neighbors.
Related TL1 commands
ED-IP-IF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking IP
Addresses IP Interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage IP Interfaces window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYSTEM
Loopback Address
CPN
LAN-OAMP
Customer LAN
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Modify.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage IP Interfaces window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the Internet Protocol address of the NE on the addressed interfacein the IP Address
field.
For the IP address the following restrictions exist:
Possible values are {1-99, 101-126, 128-223} - {0-255} - {0- 255} - {0-255}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to add a new access control rule to the NE firewall.
Important! This is allowed to a security administrator only.
Related TL1 commands
ENT-IPACLIST
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Access Control Lists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened
with the right mouse button, select Add Rule.
Result: The Create access control rule window opens.
Reference: See Internet Protocol Access Control Lists (p. 3-45).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to modify an existing access control rule of the NE firewall.
Important! This is allowed to a security administrator only.
Related TL1 commands
ED-IPACLIST
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Access Control Lists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an access control rule in the list displayed in the right part of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC main menu and click on Modify.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DLT-IPACLIST
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Access Control Lists.
Result: The Access Control Lists are displayed in the display pane of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-IPACLIST
Prior to performing this task, you must be logged into the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
and the respective network element.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System NE Security
Access Control Lists.
Result: The Access Control Lists are displayed in the display pane of the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The device supports the configuration of access control lists (ACL) or filters to limit the
access to the administration and other management protocols only from certain ranges of
authorized source IP addresses and ports. It is also possible to configure multiple disjoint
ranges specified through IP network and mask.
Access control lists are configurable on NEs to filter traffic which is destined for the NE
itself and forwarded by the NE. E.g.:
Filter rules
Packet filter rules for traffic destined to the NE can be defined by specifying ID as a
specific service value.
There is one filter chain for each service of the NE, specified via the ID parameter.
Each filter chain is an ordered list of rules. When matching a packet against rules of a
chain, the rules of the chain are applied one-by-one according to the given order. If one
rule matches, the TARGET action, specified by that rule is executed on the packet.
No further rules in the chain are applied to that packet, after one rule matched.
This matching mechanism allows to define and make use of conflicting rules.
As a typical example, a rule for accepting a set (A) of packets can be followed by a rule
for dropping a superset (B, including A) of packets. In sum, this has the effect of dropping
all packets in set B except for those, which are also in set A.
As a factory default, each chain contains a single rule, which unconditionally accepts
every packet. To define a more restrictive rule set, the following procedure can be
applied:
First append rules to the chain, which accept all desired specific traffic types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When specifying Index, the new rule is inserted before the existing rule indicated by the
value of Index. When inserting a rule into a chain, Index values of all existing rules (of
the same chain) with the same or a higher Index value are incremented by one.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Meaning...
ID
FORWARD
IP forwarding chain
TL1RAWUNSEC
Input chain for the raw encoded TL1 service on TCP port 3082
TL1RAW
Input chain for the raw encoded TL1 over SSH port 6084
TL1TELNET
Input chain for the telnet encoded TL1 over SSH port 6085
ZIC
DBG
CPMGT
CPCLI
Input chain for the control plane CLI over SSH port 6087
CPRSVP
CPOSPFTE
Input chain for the control plane OSPF-TE protocol (data plane
routing)
CPLMP
Input chain for the control plane LMP protocol on UDP port 701
NTP
OSPF
ICMP
MON
ALL
ALL AID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Index
Interface Input
LAN-{OAMP, CIT}
Customer LAN
only packets coming in on the specific interface can match the
rule
NETIF-{1-512}
NETIF-ALL
IPIPT-{1-64}
IPIPT-ALL
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Interface Output
LAN-{OAMP, CIT}
Customer LAN
only packets coming in on the specific interface can match the
rule
NETIF-{1-512}
NETIF-ALL
IPIPT-{1-64}
IPIPT-ALL
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
IP Protocol
{0-255}
ICMP
IGMP
TCP
UDP
RSVP
OSPFTE
OSPF
ALL
{0-255}
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
ICMP Code
{0-255}
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Source Port.
{0-65535}
TL1RAWUNSEC
TL1RAW
TL1TELNET
HTTPS
SSH
CPMGT
CPCLI
NTP
MON
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Source Addr
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-53
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Destination Port
{0-65535}
TL1RAWUNSEC
TL1RAW
TL1TELNET
HTTPS
SSH
CPMGT
CPCLI
NTP
MON
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-54
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
State
INVALID
NEW
ESTABLISHED
RELATED
ALL
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-55
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Treatment
ACCEPT
DROP
REJECT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-56
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to modify the ASAP of the Customer LAN interface.
This applies to the following ports:
OAMP:
The OAMP faceplate LAN connector on the main shelf FLC cards. This is intended
for connecting the NE to the DCN for central management
ED-LAN.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties Alarm Severity - Set either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Edit Alarm Profile Pointer window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Alarm Profile select the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to be used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-57
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-58
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedures to configure shelf interconnection LAN Ports on MTX cards for
setting up a multi-shelf compound.
For compound concept information refer to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information
and Planning Guide.
Interconnection in a single multi-shelf compound
When extension shelves are used the main shelf and the extension shelves must be
interconnected by LAN cables in the following way to form a single compound:
The external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the left matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the left matrix card of the neighbor
shelves.
The external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the right matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1, ES2) of the right matrix card of the neighbor
shelves
The ES1 interfaces of a shelf are always connected to the ES2 interfaces of its
neighbor shelf.
This must be done from one shelf to the next shelf until a ring closure is achieved.
A single compound can be configured as OCS or as WDM compound and both can be
interconnected as well. Compound interconnnect is done via OAMP LAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-59
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-LAN.
Required equipment
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking
Internal LAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANPORT-1-1-71-ES1
LANPORT-1-1-71-ES2
LANPORT-1-1-72-ES1
LANPORT-1-1-72-ES2
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-11-ES1
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-11-ES2
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-15-ES1
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-15-ES2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-60
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties General either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Properties General window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking
Internal LAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
LANPORT-1-1-71-ES1
LANPORT-1-1-71-ES2
LANPORT-1-1-72-ES1
LANPORT-1-1-72-ES2
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-11-ES1
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-11-ES2
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-15-ES1
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-15-ES2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties Alarm Severity - Set either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-61
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Alarm Profile select the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to be used.
Additional information: Select LBL-ASAPLAN-SYSDFLT, if not already selected.
For further information on alarm profiles refer to the Product Information and
Planning Guide, table System-defined ASAP instances.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-62
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to create a network interface on the ECC for data communication
purposes.
This procedure creates an ECC protection group with the ECC channel specified as its
single member and automatically enables IP on the network interface.
ECC termination is done on IO cards. ECC bytes are transported between IO cards and
the central ECC routing component on FLC cards via dedicated bidirectional backplane
links.
You can add or remove ECC channels to/from the ECC protection group (see Procedure
3-15: Add a GCC leg to an ECC protection group (p. 3-67)).
The ECC channel can be the GCC0 of the specific OTU facility. The GCC0 is identified
by means of the OTU AID and the (optional) DCCCHNL parameter.
The ECC channel can be the GCC1 of the specific ODU facility. The GCC1 is identified
by means of the ODU AID and the (optional) DCCCHNL parameter.
ECC backplane capacity restrictions
The following ECC backplane capacity restrictions apply per I/O card:
a 2XANY40G card provides 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the FLC
dedicated to ECCs from port 1, and 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the
FLC dedicated to ECCs from port 2.
a 10XANY10G card provides 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the FLC
a 43SCUP card provides 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the FLC.
an ODU2 GCC uses 22 ECC backplane bytes
an OTU2 GCC uses 22 ECC backplane bytes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-63
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENT-NETIF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Add facilty select the ODU facilty which should be used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field ECC Channel specify the type of the referred ECC channel.
GCC0
GCC1
If needed you can reference Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAPNETIF) instance
by selecing the respective Alarm Profile User Label.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-64
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the Status field you can specify the administrative status of the network interface:
ENABLED
DISABLED
Once enabled the network interface is taken into service, and IP is automatically
enabled on the network interface. Once disabled the network interface is taken out of
service.
Important! While the PPP and IP protocols are automatically enabled on a newly
created network interface, OSPF has to be enabled manually. Make sure to enable
OSPF on each newly created network interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure that the settings in the Network Interfaces Provisioning Dialog window are
correct.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The command is sent.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To add or remove ECC channels to/from the ECC protection group see Procedure 3-15:
Add a GCC leg to an ECC protection group (p. 3-67).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-65
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-NETIF
RTRV-NETIF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking
Network Interfaces .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties Alarm Severity - Set either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Edit Alarm Profile Pointer window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Alarm Profile select the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to be used.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-66
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ECC protection group can contain both GGC0 and GCC1, but not of the same port
ECC protection group can only contain GCC from within same shelf
The following ECC backplane capacity restrictions apply per I/O card:
a 2XANY40G card provides 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the FLC
dedicated to ECCs from port 1, and 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the
FLC dedicated to ECCs from port 2.
a 10XANY10G card provides 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the FLC
a 43SCUP card provides 297 bytes ECC backplane capacity towards the FLC.
ED-NETIF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-67
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select ECC Facilities Add, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Network Interfaces Add DCC Facilities
Dialog opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Add facilty select the ODU facilty which should be used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field DCC Channel specify the type of the referred ECC channel.
GCC0
GCC1
Click Apply.
Result: The command is sent.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-68
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to remove GCC legs from a ECC protection group.
Related TL1 commands
ED-NETIF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the NETIF from which you want to remove a GCC leg.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select ECC Facilities Manage, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Network Interfaces Add DCC Facilities
Dialog opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-69
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Network Interfaces Remove DCC Facility
Dialog opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The GCC leg is removed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-70
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-NETIF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking
Network Interfaces.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties General, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Properties Gereal window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Status you can specify the administrative status of the network interface:
ENABLED
DISABLED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-71
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-72
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to delete a network interface and an ECC protection group. This puts
all member channels of the ECC protection group to the non-terminated state, disables
data communication on those channels, and frees all ECC resources previously held by
those channels.
Related TL1 commands
DLT-NETIF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Delete, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the
context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Delete Network Interface window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-73
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-74
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to establish IP-in-IP Tunnels (IPIPT) between NEs and towards
Network Management System. The IP tunnels are basically uni-directional and have to be
created from each side to get a bi-directional tunnel.
IP-in-IP tunnel
This function allows NEs to build Out-of-band protection links for In-Band (ECC) links
used by the control plane, or to tunnel management traffic through parts of the External
DCN topology, which are under different administrative control. The NE supports GRE
encapsulation according to RFC2784 and IP-in-IP encapsulation according to RFC2003.
The encapsulation method used on a tunnel can be defined and retrieved respectively
using this procedure.
The remote endpoint of the IP-in-IP tunnel can be specified and retrieved as the IP
address of the remote NE respectively via the ENT-NE-IPIPT and RTRV-NE-IPIPT
commands.
The local and remote endpoint addresses are the addresses used as source and destination
IP addresses in the outer delivery IP header of the encapsulated packet.
Local interface address
The local interface address is the address, which is used as source IP address in the
inner/payload IP header of locally originated packets, which are sent via the tunnel.
For this purpose either the IP address is used to which the service is bound that is using
the tunnel or in all other cases the NE loopback address is used that was specified in
Procedure 3-3: Set the FLC IP Addresses of the NE (p. 3-31).
The loopback IP address is the local IP address for all unnumbered interfaces and must be
configured first, before any tunnel can be configured.
IP routing
When OSPF is used, it shall be possible to assign the tunnel interface to any of the OSPF
areas configured on the NE. If no additional area is configured then the backbone area
(0.0.0.0) is used by default. The IP-in-IP tunnel can be configured to be bound to a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-75
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENT-NE-IPIPT
RTRV-NE-IPIPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the AID text box, the identifier of the specific IP-in-IP tunnel can be modified.
Note: The AID value will be pre-populated with the next available AID. Can be
changed, but usually not necessary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Local Tunnel Endpoint IP Address text box, then type in the IP
Address of the Local Tunnel Endpoint.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-76
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional info The local tunnel endpoint address has to be identical to the local NE
Place the cursor in the Remote Tunnel Endpoint IP Address text box, then type in the IP
Address of the Remote Tunnel Endpoint.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
GRE
IPINIP
Using the field Bound 2 LAN, select LAN to which the tunnel is bound.
The only possible value is LAN-OAMP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Alarm Profile you can reference to an existing IPIPT related Alarm
Severity Assignment Profile instance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure that the settings in the Create IP-in-IP Tunnel window are correct and
corresponds to the settings of the remote tunnel endpoint.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The IP-in-IP tunnel is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-77
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to set the alarm severity profile of an IP-in-IP tunnel.
Related TL1 commands
ED-NE-IPIPT
RTRV-NE-IPIPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Alarm Profile you can reference to an existing IPIPT related Alarm
Severity Assignment Profile instance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure that the settings in the Edit Alarm Profile Pointer window are correct.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-78
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-79
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DLT-NE-IPIPT
RTRV-NE-IPIPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking
IP-in-IP Tunnel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Delete, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the
context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Delete IP-in-IP Tunnel window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Yes.
Result: The IP-in-IP Tunnel is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-80
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table
Related TL1 commands
ENT-NE-IPRT
IP routing parameters
The NE allows to create multiple static routes to the same (DESTADDR, MASK) via
different interfaces. The METRIC parameter shall be used to decide which of the routes
shall be used for forwarding decisions. The route with the lowest METRIC value shall
take precedence.
Table 3-3
Parameter Name
Meaning
Range
AID
NETIF
LAN
IPIPT
Destination IP Address
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-81
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-3
(continued)
Parameter Name
Meaning
Range
065535
Advertise
Y,
N
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-82
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the AID field select the identifier of the local interface to be used for the IP route.
The AID specifies the network interface instance, via which the static route is directing
outgoing traffic:
LAN-OAMP: the OAMP LAN on the active main shelf FLC card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Destination IP Address text box, then type in the IP Address of the
destination host or network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Route Network Mask text box, then type in the IP subnet Mask of
the route.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Next Hop Router IP Address text box, then type in the IP address
of the next interface in the route.
Note: Only required if AID is addressing a LAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Advertise specify whether the IP route is leaked into routing protocols.
Yes
No (default)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Router Metric you can specify the cost metric of the route
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure that the settings in the Create IP Route window are correct.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-83
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The new static route is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-84
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to delete a static IP route from the IP routing table
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-NE-IPRT
DLT-NE-IPRT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select IP Routes Manage either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage IP Routes window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
Result: The Delete IP Route window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-85
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-86
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to create the IP address of a trusted Network Time Protocol (NTP)
server.
NTP servers
NTP servers are used for time of day synchronization when the NTP protocol is enabled .
You can enter up to 10 NTP trusted servers.
Note: It is expected that all external time servers are running on the same time-base,
i.e. that all of them are synchronized from a reliable master clock.
Related TL1 command
ENT-NTP-ADDR.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field IP address enter the network address of the NTP server.
Note: To separate the fields use a hyphen instead of a dot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-87
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-88
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to view and delete the IP address of the Network Time Protocol (NTP)
server.
NTP servers
NTP servers are used for time of day synchronization when the NTP protocol is enabled .
You can enter up to 10 NTP trusted servers.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-NTP-ADDR
DLT-NTP-ADDR
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-89
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Delete NTP Address window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The IP address of the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server is deleted
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-90
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this retrieve parameters and current operating mode. of the Network Time Protocol
(NTP) server.
NTP servers
NTP servers are used for time of day synchronization when the NTP protocol is enabled .
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-NTP
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
HOLDOVER
NTP is enabled but the NE has lost NTP server connectivity, and is using the last
known clock update to synchronize its clock
NTPSYNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-91
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An NTP server is selected and the NE is using the NTP protocol to synchronize its
clock.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-92
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-OSPF
ED-OSPF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Manage OSPF Parameters either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage OSPF Parameters window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Modify.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Edit OSPF window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Autonomous System Boundary Router State specify if importing of
external routes into OSPF should be enabled or disabled on the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-93
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Static Route External Metric specify the cost metric value to be set in all
AS-External LSAs (Type 5 LSAs).
This parameter only takes effect, if Autonomous System Boundary Router State was set
to Y.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Static Route External Metric Type specify the metric type to be set in all
AS-External LSAs (Type 5 LSAs).
The metric value is assumed comparable to intra-AS metric values.
INT
EXT
External metric type (metric type 2). The metric value is assumed higher than the path
cost of any intra-AS path.
This parameter only takes effect, if Autonomous System Boundary Router State was set
to Y.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Default Route External Metric specify the cost metric value to be set in
all AS-External LSAs (Type 5 LSAs), which result from Advertised default routes (see
Procedure 3-22: Enter (add) a new static IP route in the IP routing table (p. 3-81)).
This parameter only takes effect, if Autonomous System Boundary Router State was set
to Y.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Default Route External Metric Type specify the metric type to be set in
all AS-External LSAs (Type 5 LSAs), which result from ADVERTISED default routes.
INT
Internal metric type (metric type 1). The metric value is assumed comparable to
intra-AS metric values.
EXT
External metric type (metric type 2). The metric value is assumed higher than the path
cost of any intra-AS path.
This parameter only takes effect, if Autonomous System Boundary Router State was set
to Y.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-94
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-95
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENT-OSPF-AREA
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Create OSPF Area either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Create OSPF Area window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field AID select an OSPF area identifier for the area you want to create.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Area Type specify the type of the OSPF area.
NORM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-96
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STUB
Using Stub Default Metric spinner select the value to be used or type the value directly in
the field.
Only relevant for stub areas
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Import Type 3 LSAs you can specify if the Type 3 LSAs (Summary LSAs)
are imported into a stub area or a default route will be advertised. Set this parameter to
No makes the area to a totally-stubby area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The OSPF area is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-97
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-OSPF-AREA
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Manage OSPF Area either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage OSPF Area window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the OSPF area you want to modify and click Modify.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Edit OSPF Area window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Area Type specify the type of the OSPF area.
NORM
STUB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-98
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using Stub Default Metric spinner select the value to be used or type the value directly in
the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Import Type 3 LSAs you can specify if the Type 3 LSAs (Summary LSAs)
are imported into a stub area or a default route will be advertised.
Note: Settings this parameter to No makes the area to a totally-stubby area.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-99
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DLT-OSPF-AREA
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Manage OSPF Area either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage OSPF Area window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the OSPF area you want to delete and click Delete.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Delete OSPF Area window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-100
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values
Meaning...
AID
OSPF Area Id
Area Type
NORM
Default: 1
Range:
[1..65535]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-101
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to configure IP address ranges for OSPF areas on an OSPF Area
Border Router (ABR).
The OSPF IP RANGE is used to summarize and filter out routes between OSPF Areas. If
an OSPF IP Range is not specified, then all routes are sent out of the area as is. Up to
three (3) OSPF IP address ranges can be configured per OSPF area.
Related TL1 commands
ENT-OSPF-IPRANGE
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Create IP Range either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Create OSPF IP Range window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Area ID text box, then type in the identifier for the OSPF area.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-102
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Advertise Address specify if the summary address is advertised outside the
area or not.
Yes
No
Place the cursor in the Ip Address text box, then type in the IP address prefix of this
address range.
Together with RANGEMASK, this specifies the address range. The network portion
of the address when viewed in binary format may not be all zeros or all ones, the host
portion must be all zeros.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Range Mask text box, then type in the range mask.
Together with IP address prefix, this specifies the address range. The network portion
of the address when viewed in binary format may not be all zeros or all ones, the host
portion must be all zeros.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The IP address range for the OSPF area is configured.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-103
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to delete an OSPF IP address range at an OSPF Area Border Router
(ABR).
The OSPF IP RANGE is used to summarize and filter out routes between OSPF Areas. If
an OSPF IP Range is not specified, then all routes are sent out of the area as is. Up to
three (3) OSPF IP address ranges can be configured per OSPF area.
Related TL1 commands
DLT-OSPF-IPRANGE
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Manage IP Range either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage OSPF IP Range window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-104
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Network Interfaces Remove OSPF IP
Range Dialog opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The OSPF IP range is removed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-105
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-OSPF-IF
ED-OSPF-IF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Manage OSPF Interface Parameters either by selecting Action
from the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse
button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage OSPF Interface Parameters
window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the OSPF enabled entity, whose OSPF interface parameters are to be edited.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-106
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IPIPT-{1-64}
LAN-OAMP
Customer LAN
NETIF-{1-512}
Click on Modify.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Edit OSPF Interface window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Status specify whether the OSPF protocol is enabled or disabled on the
addressed network interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Area select the OSPF area the interface should belong to.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Hello Interval Timer specify the OSPF Hello interval timer in seconds.
Factory default: 10 seconds
Note: This value should not be modified. It must be equal in all routers in order to
enable OSPF adjacencies between them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Dead Timer specify the OSPF Router Dead timer in seconds. Factory
default: 40 seconds
Note: This value should not be modified. It must be equal in all routers in order to
enable OSPF adjacencies between them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Cost Metric specify the cost metric of the route.
Additional information Factory default values:
1 for LAN,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-107
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Router Priority specify the OSPF Router Priority.
Note: Router Priority is only relevant for Designated Router selection on broadcast
networks (LAN-OAMP).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Using the field Passive Mode specify the OPSF passive mode.
Additional information Factory Default:
Yes on LAN,
N on NETIF, and IPIPT
Possible values:
Yes
Passive Mode is enabled, i.e. no OSPF packets are sent via the interface, but the
interface is advertised as stub network in Router LSAs.
No
Passive Mode is disabled, i.e. OSPF packets are sent via the interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click Apply.
Result: The specifications are sent.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-108
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Authentication enabling/disabling
Authentication algorithm (for future extensions)
Authentication key and key identifier
ED-OSPFIF-SECU
RTRV-OSPFIF-SECU
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking .
Then select OSPF Manage OSPF Authentication either by selecting Action from the
main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC OSPF Authentication Settings window
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the OSPF interface, for which you want to modify the OSPF authentication setting.
The following OPSF enabled entities can be selected:
IPIPT-{1-64}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-109
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN-OAMP
Customer LAN
NETIF-{1-512}
Click on Modify.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Modify Authentication Settings window
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Authentication specify the authentication algorithm. This parameter can
only be set away from NONE if a valid KEY and ID are set. If it is changed from MD5 to
NONE the formerly provisioned values for KEY and KEYID will be kept.
NONE (default)
MD5
In the field KEY enter the OSPF Authentication Key used for MD5 128bit hash value
calculation.
Note: The OSPF Authentication Key is handled like a password, i.e. it is suppressed
in any response and cannot retrieved.
The string can be 1 to 16 characters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field ID specify the OSPF Authentication Key ID to be used for MD5 1hash
value key calculation.
Range: 1- 255
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The specifications are sent.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-110
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes procedures which have to be performed for data communication
setup in a WDM application.
Contents
Procedure 3-35: View network (NE name, NE IP, software release) map
information
3-113
Network Map
3-114
3-115
3-116
3-117
3-118
3-119
IP Routes
3-120
3-121
3-122
3-123
3-127
OSPF Areas
3-128
3-132
3-133
3-137
3-138
3-140
3-142
3-143
NTP Properties
3-145
3-146
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-111
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-147
3-148
3-149
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-112
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to view network (NE name, NE IP, software release) map
information.
Before you begin
The following procedures are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to
the NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-113
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Network Map
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Map
Attribute
Value/Format
Network Element IP
Software Release
Additional Info
Name of network element
found on the network via
OSC and GCC interfaces.
<IP address>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-114
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The WebUI allows the user to view and/or modify the system-wide IP route
parameters for metric settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Networking > IP Route Redistribute Metrics.
Result: The IP Route Redistribute Metric Settings screen is displayed with current
values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the metric settings, enter attribute values and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-115
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
{1,2}
{0-16777214}
{1,2}
{0-16777214}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-116
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
Result: The Create Static IP Route screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-117
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Default Route
(checkbox)
Destination IP
<IP address>
Mask
<IP address>
Next Hop
<IP address>
Distance
{1-255} (default = 1)
Redistribute
Yes
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-118
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-119
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
IP Routes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP Routes
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Destination IP
<IP address>
Mask
<IP address>
Next Hop
<IP address>
Distance
{1-255} (default = 1)
Redistribute
Yes
No
Create
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-120
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-121
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The WebUI supports displaying all OSPF Areas configured on the NE. To help
in modifying OSPF Area ID on the USRPNL ports, the WebUI displays a picklist of
Area IDs configured. Up to 4 OSPF areas (including the default) may be configured
on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
Result: The Create OSPF Areas screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-122
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Area Index
{0-3}
Area ID
<IP address>
Area Type
Normal
Stub
Totally Stub
NSSA
NSSA Totally Stub
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-123
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Area Type
(continued)
Yes
Yes
No
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-124
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
NSSA Router Translation
Values/Format
Candidate
Always
Never
Not Applicable
Additional Info
Determines behavior of
NSSA ABR router translation
of internal area type 7 LSAs
to type 5 LSAs, which get
propagated into other areas.
Candidate: OSPF selects one
of candidate routers to be a
translator for this area.
Always: The router will
always be used as translator
for this area.
Never: The router will never
be used as translator for this
area.
Not Applicable: Value with
Area Type is Normal, Stub or
Totally Stub.
For the default area (0.0.0.0),
this field is read-only.
This field is only applicable if
the Area Type field is set to
NSSA or NSSA Totally Stub.
{0-16777215}
Not Applicable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-125
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Virtual Link IP
Values/Format
<IP address>
Not applicable
Additional Info
Allows for the creation of a
virtual link for this area.
OSPF requires that all areas
attach directly to area 0.0.0.0,
but the attachment need not
be physical. One can take any
physical arrangement of areas
and attach them logically
through OSPF virtual links.
NOTE: Specify the Loopback
interface IP address of the NE
to terminate the virtual link.
This NE should have an
interface that is connected to
Area 0.0.0.0 and a non 0.0.0.0
Area.
NOTE: A virtual link must be
configured on both NEs.
Virtual links can not be
established through Area
0.0.0.0.
For the default area (0.0.0.0),
this field is read-only.
This field is only applicable if
the Area Type field is set to
Normal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-126
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-127
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OSPF Areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSPF Areas
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Area Index
{0-3}
Area ID
<IP address>
Area Type
Normal
Stub
Totally Stub
NSSA
NSSA Totally Stub
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-128
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OSPF Areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Area Type
(continued)
Yes
Yes
No
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-129
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OSPF Areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
NSSA Router Translation
Values/Format
Candidate
Always
Never
Not Applicable
Additional Info
Determines behavior of
NSSA ABR router translation
of internal area type 7 LSAs
to type 5 LSAs, which get
propagated into other areas.
Candidate: OSPF selects one
of candidate routers to be a
translator for this area.
Always: The router will
always be used as translator
for this area.
Never: The router will never
be used as translator for this
area.
Not Applicable: Value with
Area Type is Normal, Stub or
Totally Stub.
For the default area (0.0.0.0),
this field is read-only.
This field is only applicable if
the Area Type field is set to
NSSA or NSSA Totally Stub.
{0-16777215}
Not Applicable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-130
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OSPF Areas
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Virtual Link IP
Values/Format
<IP address>
Not applicable
Additional Info
Allows for the creation of a
virtual link for this area.
OSPF requires that all areas
attach directly to area 0.0.0.0,
but the attachment need not
be physical. One can take any
physical arrangement of areas
and attach them logically
through OSPF virtual links.
NOTE: Specify the Loopback
interface IP address of the NE
to terminate the virtual link.
This NE should have an
interface that is connected to
Area 0.0.0.0 and a non 0.0.0.0
Area.
NOTE: A virtual link must be
configured on both NEs.
Virtual links can not be
established through Area
0.0.0.0.
For the default area (0.0.0.0),
this field is read-only.
This field is only applicable if
the Area Type field is set to
Normal.
Create
Details
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-131
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-132
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Area Index
{0-3}
Area ID
<IP address>
Area Type
Normal
Stub
Totally Stub
NSSA
NSSA Totally Stub
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-133
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Area Type
(continued)
Yes
Yes
No
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-134
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Candidate
Determines behavior of
NSSA ABR router translation
of internal area type 7 LSAs
to type 5 LSAs, which get
propagated into other areas.
Always
Never
Not Applicable
{0-16777215}
Not Applicable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-135
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Virtual Link IP
<IP address>
Not applicable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-136
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-137
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
In the WebUI expand the equipment tree to select System > PSS-32 or PSS-16 Shelf >
USRPNL > VOIP
Note: On PSS-36 shelf, this is on the MT0C card: System > PSS-36 Shelf > MT0C >
VOIP
Result: In the Port Details tab, the Port Interface Settings screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure the first NE IP Address (e.g., 160.1.1.2) and VOIP phone IP (e.g., 160.1.1.3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure the second NE IP Address (e.g., 170.1.1.2) and VOIP phone IP (eg: 170.1.1.3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For both NEs and VOIP phones, configure the Mask as 255.255.240.0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For both NEs, click on the OSPF details tab and set OSPF routing to ENABLED or
REDISTRIBUTE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For both VOIP phones, configure Default Gateway as the VOIP port IP of the
corresponding NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-138
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the Port Details tab and select Port Enabled for both NEs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Check to ensure that the following values are configured for the VOIP port for both NEs:
When dialed from one VOIP phone to the other (e.g., dialing 160.1.1.3 from 170.1.1.3 or
vice versa), voice communication should be heard at both ends. The communication is
point-to-point (one caller and one callee at a time) as long as the OSC is connected
between the NEs. If five NEs are connected in different directions through OSC, then
each NE can communicate to the other four NEs (one at a time). There is no broadcast
capability.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-139
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Providing time of day setting (including both time and date) by user command.
Ability to provide time stamping accurate to within +/- 500 msec. per day.
Synchronize the NE clock from an NTP server.
Support customer provisionable time offset from UTC for all system time displays
and event time stamps.
The NE is capable of synchronizing its time of day via Network Time Protocol (NTP). It
is possible to provision up to three (3) NTP servers and it is also possible to delete an
NTP server. The user can retrieve the attributes and service state of all designated NTP
servers via user command. The following applies:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-140
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: When configuring NTP servers on an NE network the provisioned NTP server
IP addresses should be that of external NTP servers and not the IP of GNE(s).
Appropriate DCN provisioning must be done such that the external NTP servers are
reachable from all NEs within the network.
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-141
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Index
{1-3}
Server IP
<IP address>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-142
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE is capable of synchronizing its time of day via Network Time Protocol (NTP). It
is possible to provision up to three (3) NTP servers and it is also possible to delete an
NTP server. The user can retrieve the attributes and service state of all designated NTP
servers via user command. The following applies:
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-143
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-144
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
NTP Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NTP Properties
Attribute
Values/Format
NTP Enabled
(checkbox)
Clock Mode
Free Running
Additional Info
Holdover
NTP Sync
Free RunningNTP is
not enabled, or the NE is
not synchronized to an
NTP server and is instead
using its own internal
clock as a source.
HoldoverNTP is
enabled but the NE has
lost NTP server
connectivity, and is using
the last known clock
update to synchronize its
clock.
NTP SyncNTP is
enabled, and the NE is
using the NTP protocol to
synchronize to an NTP
server.
<IP address>
Estimated Drift
(microseconds/seconds)
x.xxxxxx
x.xxxxxx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-145
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The WebUI displays a table with all the NTP keys configured on the NE. The
following attributes are displayed: Index, Type, Key. The WebUI supports create,
modify, view and delete of an NTP key.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-146
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Index
{1-65535}
Type
MD5
Additional Info
Unique index of the NTP
server.
SHA1
Key
<0-40 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-147
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE date and time are capable of being modified via user interface command
If NTP synchronization is enabled, attempts to modify date and time are denied.
The system ensures the date/time is set and reported within the valid range supported
by the user commands. The valid date range is from 1-Jan-2005 to 31-Dec-2059.
The NE preserves the correct time and date through a restart/reboot of the processors
where there is no loss of power, and also when a module or device (hard disk) has
been replaced.
The NE internal time of day clock uses the calculated UTC time from the selected
NTP server, when enabled, as modified by the user-provisioned offset. All messages,
event reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps use this time of day.
Note: Time/date changes may cause partial or incomplete PM data, depending on the
magnitude of the time change. Time/date changes will not affect the application of
security measures such as password aging.
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The valid range for year is 2008 to 2020. Date and time cannot be modified if
NTP synchronization is enabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-148
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Date
<day:month:year>
Time
<hour:minute:second>
<0-35 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-149
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
3-150
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures which have to be performed for setting up the
converged node of OCS and WDM application.
Related information
For background information see Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide (PIPG),
Contents
Procedure 4-1: Connect OCS application to WDM application
4-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system supports WDM functionality and OCS switching
functionality within one node. Both functionalities are separated into two different
compounds:
Each compound consists of one main shelf and zero or more extension shelves. Each
main shelf has an own IP address and is attached to management communication via
OAM port.
Interconnection via IP enables to function as a converged node, supporting WDM and
OCS.
One of the main shelves can be the host for GMRE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Uplink cards
Uplink cards can be used within a PSS-36 or PSS-64 shelf of a OCS application. The
uplink cards are auto-provisioned.
Autoprovisioning means assigning default configuration parameters to an equipment
component at the time when it is physical plugged in first. The default configuration
parameters are read from the NE database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create Physical Topology on PSS32 (between PSS32 SFD/CWR port and OCS).
Additional information SFD ports which support OCS-type OCONNs are the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the Physical Topology window additional create a loopback connection for the
LD's DCM port and one between LD SIG and SFD OMD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create OCH connection between SFD/CWR port and LD Line port. (The OCS port can
not be used .)
Select Connections OCH Cross Connections from WebUI Menu Bar.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
4-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
5quipment provisioning
E
procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures to be carried out for the provisioning of the
hardware components of an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element (NE) by using the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) or WebUI.
Note:
The terms board, card, circuit pack or unit are used interchangeably throughout this
document.
Contents
OCS equipment provisioning
5-5
5-6
5-15
5-18
5-19
5-43
5-44
5-46
5-50
5-53
5-57
5-61
5-64
5-66
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-70
5-72
5-74
5-76
5-84
5-89
5-92
5-95
5-97
5-99
5-101
5-107
5-109
5-111
5-113
5-115
5-117
5-123
5-125
System Properties
5-126
5-129
Reboot Options
5-130
5-131
Firmware
5-134
5-135
Firmware
5-136
Shelf provisioning
5-137
5-142
Create Shelf
5-143
5-146
Shelf Properties
5-147
5-151
5-152
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf LEDs
5-153
OT slot/card provisioning
5-154
5-175
Provision Card
5-176
5-177
5-178
Card Inventory
5-179
5-180
5-181
5-182
5-184
5-185
5-186
5-187
5-188
Delete Card
5-189
Port/facility provisioning
5-190
5-402
5-446
5-447
5-448
5-449
5-451
5-453
5-456
5-457
5-459
5-460
5-462
5-463
5-465
5-469
5-470
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-480
5-482
5-483
5-484
5-489
5-497
5-501
5-509
5-520
5-531
5-539
5-541
5-548
TL1 parameters
5-579
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes equipment provisioning principles for the OCS application of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element (NE)
Contents
Different kinds of equipment provisioning
5-6
5-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MT960C or MT1T9C (Agnostic Matrix Card for the PSS-36 subrack, with a
switching capacity of up to 960 Gb/s or 1.9 Tb/s )
MT1T9 or MT3T8 (Agnostic Matrix Card for the PSS-64 subrack, with a
switching capacity of up to 1.9 Tb/s or 3.8 Tb/s)
First-level Controllers:
FLC_A (protected or protecting card) in slot 23 of the PSS-36 subrack, or slot 73
of the PSS-64 subrack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I/O cards
Optical modules (SFP, XFP).
Autoprovisioning
Manual provisioning
Preprovisioning
Deprovisioning.
MANEQ
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Autoprovisioning
Provisioning
Preprovisioning
Deprovisioning
Reprovisioning.
Plug-in of a card
Power on after a power-interruption.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deprovisioning
Manually take the old optical module out of service by means of a management
command (ED-EQPT).
Remove the old optical module.
Insert a different (but compatible) SFP/XFP into the same OM socket.
Manually take the new optical module into service by means of a management
command (ED-EQPT).
The ports on the I/O cards are subdivided into so-called port groups which share a
common port group mode. This port group mode, in combination with the available types
of optical interface modules (SFPs/XFPs), determines the provisioning opportunities for
the ports. Ports in the same port group must be consistently provisioned.
For example, it is not possible to provision a port for a Gigabit Ethernet client signal
while a port in the same port group is already provisioned for an SDH or SONET client
signal.
The following port groups are defined:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1
Port groups
I/O card
Port groups
4XANY10G
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
10XANY10G
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
Ports 5/6
Ports 7/8
Ports 9/10
10XSTH10G
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
Ports 5/6
Ports 7/8
Ports 9/10
10XETH10G
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
Ports 5/6
Ports 7/8
Ports 9/10
10XOTH10G
Ports 1/2
Ports 3/4
Ports 5/6
Ports 7/8
Ports 9/10
24XANYMR
Ports 1-8
Ports 9-16
Ports 17-24
24XSTHMR
Ports 1-8
Ports 9-16
Ports 17-24
8XETH1G
Ports 1-8
24XETH1G
Ports 1-8
Ports 9-16
Ports 17-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1
Port groups
(continued)
I/O card
Port groups
2XANY40G
Port 1
Port 2
43SCUP
Port 1
130SCUP
Port 1
The following port group modes and associated client selection modes are supported per
I/O card:
Table 5-2
I/O card
Client selectors
4XANY10G
OTH_OTH
ETHSTH_OTH
10XSTH10G
PWRSV
STH_STH
10XANY10G
PWRSV
OTH_OTH
ETHSTH_OTH
PWRSV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-2
(continued)
I/O card
Client selectors
10XETH10G
ETHSTH_OTH
10XOTH10G
PWRSV
OTH_OTH
ETHSTH_OTH
24XANYMR
PWRSV
ETHSTH_OTH
STH_OTHSTH
24XANYMRB
PWRSV
ETHSTH_OTH
STH_OTHSTH
24XSTHMR
PWRSV
STH_STH
8XETH1G
8XETH1GB
PWRSV
ETHSTH_OTH
PWRSV
ETHSTH_OTH
PWRSV
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-2
(continued)
I/O card
Client selectors
24XETH1G
ETHSTH_OTH
PWRSV
ETHSTH_OTH
PWRSV
OTH_OTH
PWRSV
OTH_OTH
PWRSV
OTH_OTH
PWRSV
24XETH1GB
2XANY40G
43SCUP
130SCUP
The following optical interface modules (SFPs/XFPs) are supported, depending on the
respective client selection mode:
Table 5-3
GBEODU0
GBE10ODU2
GBE10ODU2E
STM1T
STM4T
STM16T
STM64T
STM16
STM64
OC48
OC192
OC3T
OC12T
OC48T
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-3
OC192T
OTU2
OTU2E
Notes:
1.
The 2 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G), , 43SCUP and 130SCUp do not support optical interface
modules (SFPs/XFPs) but have fixed ports.
2.
<xx>: the two middle digits are placeholders for the actual wavelength, e.g. <xx>=53 for a
wavelength=1531nm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Take all the rules and guidelines in the following list into consideration as the
ordering in the list does not necessarily reflect the order of importance.
Observe the following general rules and guidelines with regard to the subrack
configuration:
1. Never operate an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system without a fan unit for more
than two (2) minutes to avoid overheating of the system.
Leaving the fan unit out of operation for more than two minutes may cause the
respective network element to fail.
2. Cover unequipped I/O card slots and OM sockets with blank front plates or OM
socket covers to guarantee proper cooling, airflow and EMC behavior. Do not
leave unequipped slots uncovered for more than five (5) minutes to avoid
overheating of the system. Disregarding this warning could cause the system to
fail and voids warranty. Blank front plates are available as orderable items (see
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide). Parent
boards for optical modules are shipped with the OM sockets covered.
The cooling of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system relies on sufficient airflow.
Uncovered slots or OM sockets prevent an adequate cooling because
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems make use of the stack effect.
3. Before plugging the first pluggable optic into a slot configure the port group.
Otherwise when plugging an SFP/XFP a default port group would be
automatically configured to indicate that a SFP/XFP has been plugged. (see Port
groups and port group modes (p. 5-9))
4. In principle provisioning of the 43SCUP IO-Card is restricted to the lower full I/O
slots in the PSS-64 shelf by temperature restrictions for these IO-Cards. But as up
to 15 43SCUPs are allowed under special circumstances provisioning of 43SCUPs
in the upper rows is allowed.
The inlet temperature to the shelf is not allowed to exceed 40 C. To control which
ambient temperature range is allowed for the PSS-64 shelf you have to explicitly
commit the environmental condition. This is done by a system-wide configuration
parameter.
Environmental Conditions Restricted (ENVCONDRSTR)
Y YES
normal temperature range; relevant for PSS64 shelves within the system;
certain equipment allowed in the upper row
N NO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
exceptional temperature range; relevant for PSS64 shelves within the system;
certain equipment not allowed in the upper row
5. In principle provisioning of the 130SCUP IO-Cards is restricted to the lower full
I/O slots in the PSS-64 shelf by temperature restrictions for these IO-Cards. Under
special circumstances provisioning of 130SCUPs in the upper rows is allowed.
The inlet temperature to the shelf is not allowed to exceed 40 C. To control which
ambient temperature range is allowed for the PSS-64 shelf you have to explicitly
commit the environmental condition. This is done by a system-wide configuration
parameter.
Environmental Conditions Restricted (ENVCONDRSTR)
Y YES
normal temperature range; relevant for PSS64 shelves within the system;
certain equipment allowed in the upper row
N NO
exceptional temperature range; relevant for PSS64 shelves within the system;
certain equipment not allowed in the upper row
N NO
exceptional temperature range; relevant for PSS64 shelves within the system;
certain equipment not allowed in the upper row
7. Due to temperature restrictions the follwowing XFPs are restricted on the lower
Full I/O slots of the PSS-64 Shelf:
tunable XFPs for WDM (LRT11G1TU)
CWDM XFP SR<xx>W11G1TUC
(<xx>={47,49,51,53,55,57,59,61} ; maps to RI MNEMONIC:
X11MC<xx>SC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes equipment provisioning principles for the WDM application of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network element (NE)
Contents
WDM equipment management specifics
5-19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detection of physical insertion and removal (via backplane equipage leads) is supported
for the following circuit packs which reside in 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S shelf slots.
EC
MTC1T9
USRPNL
PF
FAN
HKPCNTL
A2325A/A2P2125/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG/AM2125A/AM2125B/AM2318A
OPSB
OSCT
PTPCTL
PTPIO
SFC
SFD
SVAC
MESH4
MVAC
RA2P
WR2-88
WR8-88A
WR8-88AF
WTOCM
WTOCMA
pluggable SFP/XFP modules
I/O cards
Uplink cards
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM
ITLB
ITLU
SFD40
SFD40B
SFD44
SFD44B
Note: To allow a customer to use these modules beyond the range of the electronic
inventory link, these modules can be also provisioned as unmanaged, indicating that
they are to be treated by the system as present without reading the electronic
inventory link.
Insertion or extraction of a module does not cause equipment faults to occur on other
equipment entities, except extraction of the FAN module may eventually cause equipment
temperature faults. However, extraction of a module may cause facility signal faults on
other modules.
Note: For PSS-32, once the fan is extracted, two minutes is the maximum
recommended time interval for fan replacement (one minute for PSS-16). Replacing
the fan unit may necessitate a database restore.
Cascaded OTs
1830 PSS supports cascaded OTs. For this configuration, a signal is added at an OT client
port and multiplexed onto the higher bandwidth line port. The signal is then added at a
second higher-rate OT, and multiplexed to its line port. The reverse path is taken when the
signal is dropped.
Note: There may be multiple "OT B"s connected to "OT A", and each "OT B" need
not be the same card type.
The following cards support symmetric configurations, where the OTs are cascaded on
both the A-end and Z-end of a service:
11STMM10 OTU1 client port (OT A) connected to a 4DPA4 line port (OT B). Up to
four 4DPA4 OTs may be connected to one 11STMM10.
11DPM12 OTU1 client port (OT A) connected to a 4DPA4 line port (OT B). Up to
four 4DPA4 OTs may be connected to one 11DPM12.
11QPEN4 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPE12 line port (OT B). Up to
four 11DPE12 OTs may be connected to one 11QPEN4. This configuration provides
encrypted transmission for GbE services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11QPEN4 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPE12A line port (OT B). Up
to four 11DPE12A OTs may be connected to one 11QPEN4. This configuration
provides encrypted transmission for GbE services.
11QPEN4 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPE12E line port (OT B). Up
to four 11DPE12E OTs may be connected to one 11QPEN4. This configuration
provides encrypted transmission for GbE services.
11QPEN4 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPM12 line port (OT B). Up
to four 11DPM12 OTs may be connected to one 11QPEN4. This configuration
provides encrypted transmission for GbE and FC100/FC200/FC400 services.
43SCX4 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPM12 line port (OT B). Up to
four 11DPM12 OTs may be connected to one 43SCX4.
43SCX4E OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPM12 line port (OT B). Up
to four 11DPM12 OTs may be connected to one 43SCX4E.
43STX4P OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPM12 line port (OT B). Up
to four 11DPM12 OTs may be connected to one 43STX4P.
112SCX10 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPM12 line port (OT B). Up
to ten 11DPM12 OTs may be connected to one 112SCX10.
112SNX10 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPM12 line port (OT B). Up
to ten 11DPM12 OTs may be connected to one 112SNX10.
112SNX10 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11QPEN4 line port (OT B). Up
to 10 11QPEN4 cards may be connected to one 112SNX10. Not supported with
11QPEN4 FC1200 client.
130SCX10 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11DPM12 line port (OT B). Up
to ten 11DPM12 OTs may be connected to one 130SCX10.
130SCX10 OTU2 client port (OT A) connected to an 11QPEN4 line port (OT B). Up
to 10 11QPEN4 cards may be connected to one 130SCX10. Not supported with
11QPEN4 FC1200 client.
An internal topological link is provisioned between the OT A client port and the OT B
line port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It is possible to reset a specified equipment entity or the entire NE. Different possible
levels of restart are:
Warm restart (a.k.a. soft reset and software reboot): Previous hardware state is
retained, and transmission is not affected.
Cold restart (a.k.a. hard reset, power cycle, and power-up): Hardware state is
completely reinitialized from scratch without reference to the previous state.
Transmission may be affected.
Note: Cold restart of a transmission-carrying pack kills traffic, and thus cold restart is
not allowed on an in-service pack. The pack must either be in maintenance state or
out-of-service as described below:
1. Put the pack (and ports) into maintenance state before performing the cold restart.
In maintenance state the cross connects can remain in place, and transmission is
still carried.
2. Perform a cold restart of the entire NE, instead of pack-by-pack. The TL1
command "INIT-SYS" allows this without individually changing all pack/port
admin states in the system -- if the user specifies the "forced" option. The CLI
command "config admin resetne" offers an equivalent to this "forced" option.
Note: After a cold restart of an 11QPEN4 in ESNCP configuration, Encryption
Current Key Mismatch may occur. The user must then provision new keys on both
nodes and switch to them, or use the Key Management Tool (KMT) to do the same
action. Once the switch occurs, communication is restored.
Manual restart can be applied individually to any of the following circuit pack types: EC,
LD, OSCT, CWR, OT, OPS, SVAC, MVAC, WR, MESH, WTOCM (see Instructions
(p. 5-186)). Manual restart of the entire NE performs restart of all of these circuit pack
types (see Instructions (p. 5-129)).
Note: The following recommended procedures will avoid causing the wavelength
power directed towards the Line Out direction (egress of the node) from spiking when
the SVAC/MVAC is unpowered or cold reset.
The physical fiber patch cord to the C1 input of the SVAC/MVAC should be
disconnected prior to issuing a cold reset of the pack, and prior to removal of the
pack from the shelf.
The physical fiber patch cord to the C1 input of ALL the SVAC/MVAC packs
should be disconnected in a shelf that is to be cold reset.
The physical fiber patch cord to the C1 input of ALL the SVAC/MVAC packs
should be disconnected prior to powering off the shelf containing the packs for an
extended period of time.
The physical fiber patch cord to the C1 input of ALL the SVAC/MVAC packs
should be disconnected prior to power cycling or powering on the shelf containing
the packs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: USRPNL, FAN, PF, SFC, SFD, ITLB, ITLU, and DCM have no processors and
cannot be restarted.
Mandatory equipment
Each shelf contains mandatory modules with which it must be equipped. Some of the
shelves can also be equipped with optional modules.
1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-16
One shelf controller (EC) in either slot 1 or slot 18 (for PSS-32) or slot 2 or 12 (for
PSS-16)
Two power modules (PF)
A fan module (FAN)
User interface panel (USRPNL) mandatory on the main shelf only, and not allowed
on other shelves
Active EC - This EC is responsible for all run time EC operations in the system.
Standby EC - This EC is responsible for monitoring the operation of the Active EC,
access to all shared resources and for updating its own persistent storage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Master EC - Any EC that is in a shelf with a shelf ID of one (see Shelf provisioning
(p. 5-137)). This shelf is defined as the Master shelf for the system.
Subtending EC - Any EC that is in a shelf with a shelf ID greater than one (see Shelf
provisioning (p. 5-137)). A shelf with a shelf ID greater than one is defined as a
subtending shelf.
Each shelf contains one Active EC. A standby EC is present if the shelf is redundant. If
the shelf ID is one, that shelf is designated as the Master shelf. The Active and Standby
ECs in the Master shelf are designated as Master ECs. There is always one and only one
Master shelf per node. This shelf will always contain an Active Master EC and
connectivity to the USRPNL. If the node has only one shelf, the Active Master EC
performs the functionality of both the Master and the Subtending EC. If the node consists
of multiple shelves, the Master shelf contains the Master EC and all subsequent shelves
contain Subtending ECs.
Note: The circuit pack hardware is identical for both the Master and Subtending EC.
Only the behavior of the pack changes based on the slot position and the shelf ID.
Note: For 1830 multi-shelf configuration, if one shelf is redundant, all shelves should
be redundant.
Note: Admin State for Ethernet ports cannot be independent. If a switch over from
active with Ethernet port Admin state enabled to standbywith Ethernet port Admin
state disabled, a loss of communication will occur. The admin state of Ethernet ports
must match.
Important! One and only one shelf in each NE can have the role of Main Shelf. This
is designated by a backplane rotary dial setting of 0x81 (Shelf Role = Main Shelf,
Shelf ID = 1). When a new Universal shelf boots up and finds that its rotary dial is set
to 0x81, it automatically provisions itself with AID = SHELF-1. It automatically
provisions its shelf type according to its actual hardware: TL1 TYPEID =
UNV_SHELF_16 (if PSS-16), or UNV_SHELF (if PSS-32). It then begins to perform
the role of the main shelf. For details on how to change the rotary dial, see Rotary
dial backplane setting (p. 5-137).
The Master EC performs the following functions:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Active Master EC is responsible for maintaining the power state of all cards in
the same shelf and is responsible for monitoring voltage from the power filters in the
same shelf.
The Active Master EC monitors the health of all packs in the same shelf and monitors
the health of all shelves in the node.
The Standby Master EC is responsible for monitoring the operation of the Active EC,
access to all shared resources and for updating its own persistent storage.
Note: To replace the Active Master EC, it is necessary to switch the Active so it
becomes the Standby EC, and therefore can be replaced without disrupting the
system.
The Subtending EC is responsible for the following functions:
The Matrix/Controller card (MTC1T9) is designed for use with Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32S shelves. It combines the control functions of first-level and second-level
controller cards used in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64
shelves. It also has a 1.9 Tb/s agnostic switch matrix switch, capable of switching 1.92
Tb/s of ODU traffic. Packet traffic is transparently mapped into ODU along with
SDH/SONET. Two Matrix/Controller cards are required on each Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32S shelf.
On the Matrix/Controller card, five groups of functionalities are implemented:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hardware resources and software functions required for communication between the
NE and the managing system. This functionality encompasses the implementation of
external LAN interfaces and ECC interfaces as well as the implementation of the
communication stacks needed to communicate with different Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS neighbor NEs.
Debug LAN access for service personnel, can be enabled or disabled by the operator
Management interfaces for management communication networks (MCN) and
signaling communication networks (SCN), for example TL1.
Management agents including event reporting and logging, equipment database
management, SW downloading and management, performance monitoring
management, alarm management, security management.
USB interface for software installation
Management of the network element database, resident on a mass storage (for
example, SSD).
The function of the Second-level controller (SLC) is control and management of the part
concerning SDH/SONET, OTN, and packet functionality. The control infrastructure is
managed by a controller module. Extension shelves can be controlled from the SLC
through the LAN switch.
The Clock reference unit (CRU) provides reference to clock and timing frame
synchronization used in all SDH/SONET units and for external timing.
The Switch fabric matrix accomplishes ODU and packet switching functions (central
scheduler). The alarm and performance monitoring overhead processing and protection
management functionality as well as packet functionality (central scheduler) is managed
by dedicated devices. SNC protection for ODU is also supported by the switch fabric
matrix.
The LAN switch performs the management of the internal and external local area network
(LAN) to be used for communication among microprocessor and/or for propagation of
control packets extracted from the data path. Extension shelves can be connected to the
matrix card unit through LAN cable
MTC1T9 cards have to be installed redundantly for transmission and control reliability
reasons. One MTC1T9 card will be active. The inactive MTC1T9 card enters a standby
state which implies that it can take over the active role once the former active card has
given up its role. Both cards operate in a hot-standby relationship (they operate the same
code due to same triggers), and data is synchronized
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each Power Filter module is capable of sustaining the entire load of the system so that its
partner can be replaced upon failure without disrupting transmission. Each shelf has its
own power connections and is powered independently from the other shelves in the NE.
The shelf power and ground connectors are located at the front of the shelf coming into
the PF cards at the lower left and lower right of the shelf.
FAN modules
The shelf is cooled by four variable-speed fans. The fans are housed in a replaceable FAN
tray. The FAN tray contains the variable-speed fans and a controller, which communicates
with the active control card to control the FAN speed.
1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S supports the ability to control fan speed via the WebUI.
When the Fan module is selected in the WebUI equipment tree, the fan speed can be set to
the following values:
Non-mandatory equipment
Auto-provisioning, also referred to as Plug & Play, where the EC provisions a card
upon discovering it.
The supported packs and slot locations for a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf are shown
in Table 5-4, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Circuit Pack Slot Allocation (p. 5-27)
Table 5-4
Card
Slot Location
Height / Number
of Slots
112PDM11
2-17
Full/1
112SCA1
2-15
Full/3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-4
Card
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
112SCX10
2-15
Full/3
112SNA1
2-15
Full/3
112SNX10
2-15
Full/3
11DPE12
2-17
Full/1
11DPE12A
2-17
Full/1
11DPE12E
2-17
Full/1
11DPM12
2-17
Full/1
11QPA4
2-17
Full/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-4
Card
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
11QPE24
2-16
Full/2
11QPEN4
2-17
Full/1
11STAR1
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
11STAR1A
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
11STGE12
2-17
Full/1
11STMM10
2-17
Full/1
130SCX10
2-16
Full/2
43SCA1
2-15
Full/3
43SCGE1
2-15
Full/3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-4
Card
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
43SCX4
2-15
Full/3
43SCX4E
2-16
Full/2
43STA1P
2-15
Full/3
43STX4
2-15
Full/3
43STX4P
2-15
Full/3
4DPA2
4G Dual Port
Pluggable AnyRate
Transponder (2
clients)
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
4DPA4
4G Dual Port
Pluggable AnyRate
Transponder (4
clients)
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
A2325A
2-17
Full/1
A2P2125
2-16
Full/2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-4
Card
Description
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
AHPHG/AHPLG
2-17
Full/1
ALPHG
2-17
Full/1
AM2125A
2-17
Full/1
AM2125B
2-17
Full/1
AM2318A
2-17
Full/1
CWR8
Colorless Wavelength
Router 44-channel
2-16
Full/2
CWR8-88
Colorless Wavelength
Router 88-channel
2-16
Full/2
EC
Equipment Controller
1,18
Half/1
FAN
FAN
37
Full/1
MESH4
2-17
Full/1
MVAC
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
MVAC8B
Bidirectional Multiple
port Variable
Attenuator Card
2-17
Full/1
OPSA
Optical Protection
Switch card
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-4
Card
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
OPSB
Optical Protection
Switch card with
non-latching switch
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
OSCT
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
PF
Power Filter
19,36
Half/1
PTPCTL
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
PTPIO
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
RA2P
Raman Amplifier, 2
pumps
2-17
Full/1
SFC2
2 channel static
CWDM filter
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
SFC4
4 channel static
CWDM filter
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
SFC8
8 channel static
CWDM filter
2-17
Full/1
SFD5
5 channel static
DWDM filter
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
SFD8
8 channel static
DWDM filter
2-17
Full/1
SVAC
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
USRPNL
Full/1
WR2-88
1x2 Optimized
Wavelength Router,
88 channel
2-16, 20-34
Half/2
WR8-88A
Wavelength Router
88-channel
2-16
Full/2
WR8-88AF
Wavelength Router,
88 channel with
FlexGrid
2-16
Full/2
WTOCM
Wavelength Tracker
Optical Channel
Monitoring card
2-17, 20-35
Half/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-4
Card
WTOCMA
Slot Location
2-17, 20-35
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
Half/1
The supported packs and slot locations for a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S shelf are
shown in Table 5-5, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32S Circuit Pack Slot Allocation
(p. 5-33)
Table 5-5
Card
Slot Location
Height / Number
of Slots
10AN10G
2-9, 12-19
Full/1
11QCUPC
2-9, 12-19
Full/1
130SCUP
2-8, 12-18
Full/2
24ANM
2-9, 12-19
Full/1
24ET1GB
1G Ethernet OTN
Client card (24 ports)
2-9, 12-19
Full/1
BTC
42, 43
Half/1
HKPCNTL
Housekeeping/
Control card
45
Half/1
FAN
FAN
40
Full/1
MTC1T9
10, 11
Full/2
PF
Power Filter
37, 39
Half/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The supported packs and slot locations for a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf are shown
in Table 5-6, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 Circuit Pack Slot Allocation (p. 5-34)
Table 5-6
Card
Slot Location
Height / Number
of Slots
112PDM11
Full/1
11DPE12
Full/1
11DPE12A
Full/1
11DPE12E
Full/1
11DPM12
Full/1
11QPA4
Full/1
11QPE24
Full/2
11QPEN4
Full/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-6
Card
Description
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
11STAR1
Half/1
11STAR1A
Half/1
11STGE12
Full/1
11STMM10
Full/1
4DPA2
4G Dual Port
Pluggable AnyRate
Transponder (2
clients)
Half/1
4DPA4
4G Dual Port
Pluggable AnyRate
Transponder (4
clients)
Half/1
A2325A
Full/1
A2P2125
Full/2
AHPHG/AHPLG
Full/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-6
Card
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
ALPHG
Full/1
AM2125A
Full/1
AM2125B
Full/1
AM2318A
Full/1
EC
Equipment Controller
2,12
Half/1
FAN
FAN
21
Full/1
MESH4
Full/1
MVAC
Half/1
MVAC8B
Bidirectional Multiple
port Variable
Attenuator Card
Full/1
OPSA
Optical Protection
Switch card
Half/1
OPSB
Optical Protection
Switch card with
non-latching switch
Half/1
OSCT
Half/1
PF
Power Filter
1,11
Half/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-6
Card
Slot Location
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
PTPCTL
Half/1
PTPIO
Half/1
RA2P
Raman Amplifier, 2
pumps
Full/1
SFC2
2 channel static
CWDM filter
Half/1
SFC4
4 channel static
CWDM filter
Half/1
SFC8
8 channel static
CWDM filter
Full/1
SFD5
5 channel static
DWDM filter
Half/1
SFD8
8 channel static
DWDM filter
Full/1
SVAC
Half/1
USRPNL
Full/1
WR2-88
1x2 Optimized
Wavelength Router,
88 channel
Half/2
WR8-88A
Wavelength Router
88-channel
Full/2
WR8-88AF
Wavelength Router,
88 channel with
FlexGrid
Full/2
WTOCM
Wavelength Tracker
Optical Channel
Monitoring card
Half/1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-6
Card
WTOCMA
Slot Location
3-9, 13-19 (main)
3-10, 13-20
(non-main)
(continued)
Height / Number
of Slots
Half/1
For a PSS-32 shelf slots 2-17 and 20-35 are considered universal slots (i.e., installation of
any Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS DWDM circuit pack is permitted) and any inserted circuit
pack is auto-provisioned. For PSS-32S shelf, the universal slots are 2-9, 12-19, 21-36. For
a PSS-16 shelf the universal slots are 3-9, 13-19.
If a single-slot card is inserted in a slot provisioned for a different type of single-slot card,
a mismatch is declared, causing a state transition against the provisioned card. Likewise
for a multi-slot card inserted into the same slots already provisioned for a different type of
multi-slot card of the same height and width.
If a single-slot card is inserted in one of the slots provisioned for a multi-slot card, the
following changes occur:
If the single-slot card is inserted in the slot acting as reference for the multi-slot card,
a mismatch is declared, causing a state transition against the provisioned card.
If the single-slot card is inserted in the slot different from the one acting as reference
for the multi-slot card, a mismatch is declared, causing a state transition against the
slot entity for the slot of the inserted card
If more than one card is inserted in slots provisioned for the multi-slot card, the net
result in terms of state changes is the pure sum of the results for each card inserted.
If a multi-slot card is inserted into the NE and one of the slots is already provisioned for
another single-slot or multi-slot card, the following changes occur.
If the slot acting as reference for the plugged multi-slot card is also acting as reference
for a provisioned card, a mismatch is declared, causing a state transition against the
provisioned card.
If the slot acting as reference for the plugged multi-slot card is not also acting as
reference for a provisioned card, a mismatch is declared, causing a state transition
against the slot entity for the reference slot of the inserted card.
Note: For a selected slot, if a card is present (i.e. not empty) but not provisioned, the
WebUI will pre-populate the Provisioned Type attribute with the present card type.
The user can select a different card type from the pick list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning hierarchy
Objects must be provisioned in order from higher level to lower level according to the
following hierarchy:
Shelf
Circuit pack
Port/facility, including SFP/XFP if applicable
Equipment states
The NE supports equipment Secondary State (SST) values as described below to indicate
the cause for being in a particular PST:
MEA to indicate that the equipment entity physically present in the system is invalid
(the inserted module is inconsistent with slot provisioning data or the inserted module
is of incompatible revision).
UAS to indicate that the equipment entity is not provisioned.
AINS to indicate that the equipment is waiting for the correction of the off-normal
condition (UEQ). Alarms will not be generated for the entity if AINS is present.
The NE supports SST values as described below to provide additional state information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
States can be nested if they share common behavior with minor differences. Transitions
can originate and terminate from either a parent state or a child state. Transitions
originating from a parent state apply to all of its child states. The following defines four
major administrative parent states:
Unassigned State: An entity is unassigned when provisioning for it does not exist,
either because it was never provisioned, or because it was deleted.
Admin Out-of-Service State: A provisioned entity can be configured out-of-service.
In this state a card does not provide service, but does perform fault monitoring (results
of which can be retrieved). It does not generate alarms or conditions. A card cannot be
put in this state if any of its ports are admin in-service.
Admin In-Service State: A provisioned entity can be configured in-service. In this
state a card provides service, performs fault monitoring, and generates alarms and
conditions.
Admin Maintenance State: A provisioned entity can be configured in maintenance
to perform a temporary maintenance activity on it. In this state a card continues to
provide service and performs fault monitoring (results of which can be retrieved). But
it does not generate alarms or conditions. A card cannot be put in this state if any of its
ports are admin in-service.
State transitions are determined by user operations and autonomous system processing
(e.g. fault detection). A user can perform the following operations on equipment entities:
Enter/Delete provisioning.
Edit provisioned parameter values.
The same equipment state machine covers all modules. But for mandatory modules, some
states and transitions do not apply, due to the following rules:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An equipment condition is SA if the equipment has supported facilities below it, and
for any of its supported facilities a LOS would be service affecting.
An equipment condition is NSA if the equipment has no supported facilities below it,
and for any of its supported facilities a LOS would not be service affecting.
The system supports the ability to modify the provisioned data associated with an
equipment entity. The modifications take effect immediately. This capability allows the
Primary State (PST) and Secondary State (SST) parameters to be modified for all
equipment entities except shelves and mandatory equipment. The user is able to perform
the following equipment state changes:
System SONET/SDH operation mode. This affects system-wide naming of cards and
ports. It affects the content of alarm and event text. When the mode is changed, PM is
restarted with cleared counters, new PM names, and new TCA defaults. Byte filtering
changes to conform to the specified standard. The NE clears its database and clears all
services.
Note: When switching between SDH or SONET mode, the user needs to hard reboot
(cold reset) the LC packs.
System default AINS timer value. This applies to all ports that do not have an
individual port-level AINS timer provisioned.
Deprovisioning
Deletion of mandatory equipment in a PSS shelf is not allowed: (i.e., PF, FAN,
USRPNL, active EC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deletion of a PSS shelf is not allowed if it contains any provisioned modules (except
mandatory equipment).
Deprovisioning procedures on an entity do not cause equipment faults on other
equipment entities.
Pre-provisioning
A user can pre-provision any empty slot in a PSS shelf which supports non-mandatory
modules for a specific equipment type. The pre-provisioning must take into account
module height and width, and will fail if an already-assigned or invalid slot is used.
Pre-provisioning requires that the network element be equipped with a control card only.
All of the other components, including additional shelves, are assigned slots or locations
to create a virtual configuration that can be implemented at a later time. You can use all of
the provisioning commands to pre-provision a network element, including those used for
service provisioning.
Modules inserted in a pre-provisioned slot have their state determined by module fault
status, module mismatch status (comparison of actual type and pre-provisioned type), and
operator-provisioned PST value.
Note: It is possible to pre-provision equipment by downloading and activating a
previously stored database.
Automatic in-service (AINS)
Auto-provisioning, also referred to as Plug & Play, means that new non-mandatory
equipment is detected and configured automatically upon card insertion (or controller
restart), if allowed in that location, and if there is no conflict (mismatch) with other
provisioning. Auto-provisioned modules have their initial state determined by module
fault status.
Note: If a card is deleted when it is still physically present, it will not be
rediscovered and auto-provisioned until it is physically removed and reinserted, or
until the system reboots (whichever comes first).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-44
5-46
5-50
5-53
5-57
5-61
5-64
5-66
5-70
5-72
5-74
5-76
5-84
5-89
5-92
5-95
5-97
5-99
5-101
5-107
5-109
5-111
5-113
5-115
5-117
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SET-PRMTR-NE
RTRV-PRMTR-NE
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select System.
Result: System is highlighted in the navigation pane. The display pane provides
categories of system level configuration information under Contents of 'System'.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on System in the navigation pane, and select Properties General from
the context menu that opens.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window contains a table with the common system
parameters. The parameters USERLABEL , PROVMODE, ALTITUDE, AINSSTDFLT,
OTUDFLTASAP, ODUNDFLTASAP, ODUPTFDFLTASAP, AUNDFLTASAP, STSNDFTASAP,
ENVCONDRSTR, and Third Party Modules are configurable.
Reference: General properties of the system as a whole (p. 5-470)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In multi-shelf configurations the main shelf and the extension shelves must be
interconnected by LAN cables in the following way:
The external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the left matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the left matrix card of the neighbor shelves
The external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the right matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the right matrix card of the neighbor
shelves
The external LAN interfaces ES1 are always connected to the external LAN interfaces
ES2 of the neighbor shelf
This must be done from one shelf to the next shelf so that a ring closure is
accomplished
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the LAN connections in a configuration with three shelves.
Figure 5-1 Shelf interconnection
Shelf # w
Left
ES1
Right
ES1
Left
ES2
Right
ES2
Shelf # x
Left
ES1
Right
ES1
Left
ES2
Right
ES2
Shelf # y
Left
ES1
Right
ES1
Left
ES2
Right
ES2
ENT-EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the part of equipment you want
to create via Equipment Rack 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Create Shelf , either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using
the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Enter Shelf dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Shelf enter the extension shelf number. A maximum 7 extension shelves is
allowed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Matrix Size define the planned bandwidth switching capacity (Gb/s) of the Shelf.
Additional information
960
1920
3840
Matrix Size mismatch If the provisioned Matrix Size is higher than the used MTX a
wrong Secondary State (SST) for one matrix in the new created extension shelf is
indicated.
If a new extension shelf is provisioned with a higher Matrix Size than the MTX used
in the shelf one MTX shows MEA (Mismatch of Equipment Attributes). The second
matrix will not boot, but no MEA is reported.
Follow the given indication to change MTXs or MTXSIZE. For the second MTX
MEA will be reported as soon as the first MTX matches with the MTXSIZE.
Remark: It is always allowed to provision a higher Matrix Size than the MTX used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
airflow restriction of the different rack types and the position of the shelf in the rack.
HP36
High Power Application for PSS36 Shelf (default)
HP36LOWSUBR
High Power Application for PSS36 Shelf and subrack is mounted as the lower
subrack in a ETSI rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Alarm Profile define the alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) .
Additional information A reference to an existing (equipment related) Alarm Severity
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In multi-shelf configurations the main shelf and the extension shelves must be
interconnected by LAN cables in the following way:
The external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the left matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the left matrix card of the neighbor shelves
The external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the right matrix card must be connected to
the external LAN interfaces (ES1,ES2) of the right matrix card of the neighbor
shelves
The external LAN interfaces ES1 are always connected to the external LAN interfaces
ES2 of the neighbor shelf
This must be done from one shelf to the next shelf so that a ring closure is
accomplished
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the LAN connections in a configuration with three shelves.
Figure 5-2 Shelf interconnection
Shelf # w
Left
ES1
Right
ES1
Left
ES2
Right
ES2
Shelf # x
Left
ES1
Right
ES1
Left
ES2
Right
ES2
Shelf # y
Left
ES1
Right
ES1
Left
ES2
Right
ES2
RMV-EQPT
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the shelf you want to remove via
Equipment Rack 1 Shelf (2..31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Service State Unassign, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Unassign dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to provision a equipment entity regardless of whether the equipment is
plugged in the slot or not.
The procedure can be used to provision one of the following equipment:
PSS-36 Shelf
PSS-64 Shelf
2XANY40G (2x 40G ANY Card)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-53
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
A card or interface module that has not been provisioned, is reflected by the PST and SST
parameters (only if the SHELF has been provisioned ): :
If equipped:
PST=OOS-MA
SST=UAS
If unequipped:
PST=OOS-AUMA
SST=UAS & UEQ
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To provision a specific part of equipment in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection
tree select a free and for this part of equipment allowed slot via Equipment Rack 1
Shelf 1
Related information See Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning
Guide (PIPG), chapter 4 Product description for the allowed location of the IO
cards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Assign <part of equipment>, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: A window opens, for configuring the part of equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Provisioned Type select the type of the equipment to be provisioned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-54
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10XANY10G, 4XANY10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, LRT11G1TU, SR<xx>W11G1TUC,
SR<xx>W11G1TUI, LR<xx>W11G1TUC, LR<xx>W11G1TUI,
LR<xx>DW11G1TUC, USER}
10XETH10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, USER}
10XOTH10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, LRT11G1TU,SR<xx>W11G1TUC,
SR<xx>W11G1TUI, LR<xx>W11G1TUC, LR<xx>W11G1TUI,
LR<xx>DW11G1TUC, USER}
24XANYMR:
{SR10G155TU, SL10G155TU, SL20G155TU, SR10G622TU, SL10G622TU,
SL20G622TU, SR12G7TU, IR12G7TU, LR12G7TU, LR22G7TU, IR12G7AU,
1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
24XETH1G, 8XETH1G:
{IR12G7AU, 1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
24XANYMRB:
{SR10G155TU, SL10G155TU, SL20G155TU, SR10G622TU, SL10G622TU,
SL20G622TU, SR12G7TU, IR12G7TU, LR12G7TU, LR22G7TU, IR12G7AU,
1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
24XETH1GB, 8XETH1GB:
{IR12G7AU, 1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
10XSTH10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, USER}
24XSTHMR:
{SR12G7TU, IR12G7TU, LR12G7TU, LR22G7TU, IR12G7AU, USER}
Note: The following modules have no SFPs/XFPs and the values FIXED PORT is set
automatically::
2XANY40G
11QCUP
11QCUPC has SFPs/XFPs, but handled as NO SFPs/XFPs
43SCUP
130SCUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-55
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Automatic In-Service select the Automatic in service mode to which the
equipment is to be set:
AINS
If the addressed equipment is currently being plugged out, then standing conditions
are suppressed for this equipment. If the address equipment is currently being plugged
in, then standing conditions are raised (they get only be cleared and suppressed if the
equipment gets plugged out later). Note: There is no autonomous transition by a timer
threshold as applicable by transmission facilities.
NOWAIT
In the field SS-Bit you can configures the SS-Bit SONET/SDH overhead transmit value.
The value of the parameter is usable only on SDH/SONET terminated signals (not on
SDH/SONET transparent signals):
SS00
SS10
In the field Alarm Profile you can assign an Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP)
to the selected entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-56
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to provision a equipment entity regardless of whether the equipment is
plugged in the slot or not.
Related TL1 commands
Related information
A card or interface module that has not been provisioned, is reflected by the PST and SST
parameters (only if the SHELF has been provisioned ): :
If equipped:
PST=OOS-MA
SST=UAS
If unequipped:
PST=OOS-AUMA
SST=UAS & UEQ
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To provision a specific part of equipment in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection
tree select a free and for this part of equipment allowed slot via Equipment Rack 1
Shelf 1 <Slot with usable card type>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-57
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allowed interface modules: The SFP/XFP modules are restricted per card type:
10XANY10G, 4XANY10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, LRT11G1TU, SR<xx>W11G1TUC,
SR<xx>W11G1TUI, LR<xx>W11G1TUC, LR<xx>W11G1TUI,
LR<xx>DW11G1TUC, USER}
10XETH10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, USER}
10XOTH10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, LRT11G1TU,SR<xx>W11G1TUC,
SR<xx>W11G1TUI, LR<xx>W11G1TUC, LR<xx>W11G1TUI,
LR<xx>DW11G1TUC, USER}
24XANYMR:
{SR10G155TU, SL10G155TU, SL20G155TU, SR10G622TU, SL10G622TU,
SL20G622TU, SR12G7TU, IR12G7TU, LR12G7TU, LR22G7TU, IR12G7AU,
1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
24XETH1G, 8XETH1G:
{IR12G7AU, 1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
24XANYMRB:
{SR10G155TU, SL10G155TU, SL20G155TU, SR10G622TU, SL10G622TU,
SL20G622TU, SR12G7TU, IR12G7TU, LR12G7TU, LR22G7TU, IR12G7AU,
1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
24XETH1GB, 8XETH1GB:
{IR12G7AU, 1000BSXU, 1000BLXU, 1000BZXU, USER}
10XSTH10G:
{SR111G1AU, IR211G1AU, LR211G1AU, USER}
24XSTHMR:
{SR12G7TU, IR12G7TU, LR12G7TU, LR22G7TU, IR12G7AU, USER}
Note: The following modules have no SFPs/XFPs and the values FIXED PORT is set
automatically::
2XANY40G
11QCUP
11QCUPC has SFPs/XFPs, but handled as NO SFPs/XFPs
43SCUP
130SCUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-58
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information See Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning
Guide (PIPG), chapter 4 Product description for the allowed location of the IO
cards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Assign <XFP or SFP>, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: A window opens, for configuring the part of equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Provisioned Type select the type of the equipment to be provisioned.
Reference: Refer to list in Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Client Select select the client selection mode for the equipment to be
provisioned
Additional info: See Table 5-2, Port group modes and client selection modes
(p. 5-11).
Note: The payload type ODU3E2 is not supported by the ports of the 2xANY40G
IO-Card . But the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC shows ODU3E2 for the
2XANY40G ports as available value.
Do not select ODU3E2 for 2XANY40G ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Automatic In-Service select the Automatic in service mode to which the
equipment is to be set:
AINS
If the addressed equipment is currently being plugged out, then standing conditions
are suppressed for this equipment. If the address equipment is currently being plugged
in, then standing conditions are raised (they get only be cleared and suppressed if the
equipment gets plugged out later). Note: There is no autonomous transition by a timer
threshold as applicable by transmission facilities.
NOWAIT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-59
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Alarm Profile you can assign an Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP)
to the selected entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-60
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FLC36EA (First Level Controller card for enhanced performance application for
PSS-36
ECHC (First Level Controller card in PSS-64)
Matrix Circuit Packs / MTX (Matrix card with various switching capacity)
MT960C (Matrix card with 960G switching capacity)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-61
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RMV-EQPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the part of equipment you want
to remove via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf (1..31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Service State Remove, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Remove dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Command Mode you can choose between NORM and FORCED.
Required Forced Mode Settings for IOC/SFP/XFP/Port: If the command is executed
for addressed equipment entities that have its SST parameter being set to SDEE, then
the MODE parameter must be specified with the value FRCD to succeed.
This applies to:
IOC
SFP/XFP
Port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-62
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required Forced Mode Settings for Equipment Group If the command is executed
for equipment that is part of a protection group which is currently active (having the
SST parameter being set to the value WKG),, the action is refused with the text:
The active FLC/MTX cannot be taken OOS!. This applies to:
Required Forced Mode Settings for OOS of Mate Equipment: If the addressed
equipment entities shall be set to OOS (with the accompanied PST parameter value
OOS) and the equipment that has mate equipment and the mate equipment is not in
state IS, then the CMDMDE parameter must be specified with the value FRCD to
succeed. This applies to:
FAN3T8 (Fan)
PSF3T8 (Power supply)
Required Forced Mode Settings for OOS of specific Equipment: If the addressed
equipment entities shall be set to OOS (with the accompanied PST parameter value
OOS), then the CMDMDE parameter must be specified with the value FRCD to
succeed.
This applies to:
HPCFAP
FAN in PSS-36
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-63
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to deprovision an equipment object entity at the physical location
identified by its Access Identifier (AID) and deprovisions the specified equipment,
regardless of whether the equipment is installed in the system.
The procedure can be used for the following equipment:
PSS-36 Shelf
PSS-64 Shelf
2XANY40G (2x 40G ANY Card)
10XANY10G (10x 10G ANY Card)
4XANY10G (4x 10G ANY Card)
DLT-EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-64
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the part of equipment you want
to de-provision via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf (1..31) <Slot>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Unassign, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by using the
context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that the selected part of equipment will
be unassigned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-65
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mixed Operation
The two MTXs have same capacity but are produced from different vendors
(STM/LSI)
Note: STM und LSI MTXs with same capacity can be not differentiated by the
Mnemonic only the APN in the RIM is different.
Mixed Operation is only supported temporarily for MTX exchange or upgrade. If a mixed
operation is detected by the system, a condition MIXOPERAT is raised.
Related TL1 commands
ALW-SWDX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT
RTRV-DX-EQPT
SW-DX-EQPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-66
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the standby agnostic matrix card
via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf 0x:PSSxx.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Switching State Inhibit Switch, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Inhibit Switch to Duplex dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the newly inserted agnostic
matrix card for which you want to enable autonomous or manual equipment protection
switching via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf 0x:PSSxx
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Switching Allow Switch, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-67
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make the newly inserted agnostic matrix card the active one.
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the part of equipment for which
you want to perform the switch via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf (1 ... 31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Then select Switching Switch, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Switch Duplex dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Under Command Mode you can choose between NORM and FORCED. For MTX upgrade
NORM (and not FORCED) should be used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click Switch.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Click Yes.
Result: Now an equipment protection switch from the currently active unit to the
standby unit takes place. As a result, the formerly standby unit becomes active, and
the formerly active unit becomes standby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the standby agnostic matrix card
via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf 0x:PSSxx.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Then select Switching State Inhibit Switch, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Inhibit Switch to Duplex dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-68
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference: Refer to Procedure 19-3: Common card mounting rules (p. 19-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
19
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the newly inserted agnostic
matrix card for which you want to enable autonomous or manual equipment protection
switching via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf 0x:PSSxx
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Then select Switching Allow Switch, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Allow Switching dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
22
23
Right-click on System in the navigation pane, and select Properties General from
the context menu that opens.
Result: The Properties - General window opens.
Reference: General properties of the system as a whole (p. 5-470)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-69
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to configure an optical interface port. Modifies the specified facility
parameter values previously autoprovisioned when it's underlying equipment module was
provisioned.
Related TL1 commands
ED-ODU0
ED-ODU1
ED-ODU2
ED-ODU2E
ED-ODU3
ED-ODU3E2
ED-ODU4
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree under Facilities, and select the desired Optical Channel Group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane, right-click on the optical interface port , and select Properties
General from the context menu that opens.
In the navigation pane, click on or select the optical interface port, and select Action
Properties General from the main menu bar.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-70
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
Result: The Properties - General window opens which contains a table with the
column groups. To modify a specific parameter of a column group you have to select
the respective column group radio button before.
Reference: See General properties of an OTU port facility (p. 5-489).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Command Mode you can choose between NORM and FORCED.
Additional information: Two different values shall be supported depending on the
NE REGION
This applies to:
FRCD for ETSI
NORM for ANSI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-71
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-OCH
RTRV-OCH
RMV-OCH
RST-OCH
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree under Facilities, and select the desired Optical Channel Group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane, right-click on the Optical Channel, and select Properties
General from the context menu that opens.
In the navigation pane, click on the Optical Channel, and select Action Properties
General from the main menu bar.
Result:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-72
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Properties - General window opens which contains a table with the
column groups. To modify a specific parameter of a column group you have to select
the respective column group radio button before.
Reference: See General properties of an optical (p. 5-531).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Command Mode you can choose between NORM and FORCED.
Additional information: Two different values shall be supported depending on the
NE REGION
This applies to:
FRCD for ETSI
NORM for ANSI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-73
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to perform remote laser shutdown on OTH network ports.
Related TL1 commands
ED-OCH
RTRV-OCH
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree under Facilities, and select the desired Optical Channel Group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane, right-click on the Optical Channel, and select Properties
General from the context menu that opens.
In the navigation pane, click on the Optical Channel, and select Action Properties
General from the main menu bar.
Result:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-74
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Properties - General window opens which contains a table with the
Double-click inside the Actual Laser State table cell and select Off.
Note: OCH facility must be Out Of Service to switch laser off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-75
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to create an ODUn path termination with a default substructure.
The following two principle ways to create an ODUn path termination can be
distinguished:
When I/O cards are inserted into an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS shelf, then facilities are
automatically created, namely:
Then, you can create an ODUn (n = 2, 3, 3E2 or 4) path termination with a default
substructure by making a cross-connection between the unterminated ODUn and a virtual
ODUn path terminated entity from an ODUn pool.
The procedure Implicitly create an ODU path termination (p. 5-78) describes how to
make such a cross-connection.
Explicit (manual) creation of an ODUn path termination
A higher order ODUn path termination can be created manually by explicitly selecting an
ODUPTF (terminated ODU) facility from a pool of ODUPTF entities.
The following higher order ODUPTF entities are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-76
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The virtual slot number that identifies a terminated ODUn entity is 71.
When a higher order ODU2, ODU3, ODU3E2 or ODU4 path termination is created
manually, it is created with a default payload type ODUMPT21 (ODUk multiplex
structure with 1.25G Tributary Slots) and a default payload structure with:
8 x ODU0 for an ODU2 path termination and the default payload type ODUMPT21
or
32 x ODU0 for an ODU3E2 path termination and the default payload type
ODUMPT21 or
10 x ODU2 for an ODU4 path termination and the default payload type ODUMPT21
The default payload type is ODUMPT21 (ODUk multiplex structure with 1.25G
Tributary Slots). For manual creation of ODUn path termination via ZIC the selection of
payload type is mandatory (valid payload type: ODUMPT21).
For ODU3 and ODU2 path termination two payload types are possible ODUMPT21
(default payload type) or ODUM.
For payload type ODUMPT21 the default payload structure is N x ODU0 where N=8
for ODU2 path termination and N=32 for ODU3 path termination.
For payload type ODUM the default payload structure is N xODU1 where N=4 for
ODU2 path termination and N=16 for ODU3 path termination.
ENT-ODUPTF
ENT-CRS-ODU2
ENT-CRS-ODU3
ENT-CRS-ODU3E2
ENT-CRS-ODU4
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU2
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-77
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU4
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the desired
OTU2, OTU3, OTU3E2 or OTU4 port in the navigation tree under Facilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-78
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODU3 NIM
g-upg-0060
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-79
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the protecting facility into the Alternate field, or use the button to open the
Alternate window, and select the protecting facility from the facilities available in the
Alternate window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
cross-connection)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the SNCP operates in revertive mode, then set the wait to revert timer under Revert
Delay Time.
Possible values are 0 to 15 minutes in steps of 1 minute. The default setting is 0.
The Revert Delay Time can be ignored if the SNCP operates in non-revertive mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Hold Off Time, set the hold-off timer for automatic protection switching.
Possible values are:
0 to 80 ms in steps of 20 ms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Under SubNetwork Protection Type, set the protection type of the SNCP.
The protection type of an ODU SNCP is:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-80
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
0 to 45 ASCII characters
The following characters are not allowed for the text string itself:
* (asterisk)
\ (backslash)
(double quote)
> (greater-than)
< (less-than)
; (semicolon)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
0 to 45 ASCII characters
The following characters are not allowed for the text string itself:
* (asterisk)
\ (backslash)
(double quote)
> (greater-than)
< (less-than)
; (semicolon)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-81
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and ODUPOOL.
As a result, the facility types ODU2T (terminated ODU2), ODU3T (terminated ODU3),
ODU3E2T (terminated ODU3E2), and ODU4T (terminated ODU4) become visible in
the navigation tree under ODUPOOL.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
select ODU2T.
select ODU3T.
select ODU3E2T.
select ODU4T.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the desired facility type (ODU2T, ODU3T, or ODU3E2T) in the navigation
pane, then select Assign ODUn from the Action menu.
In case of an ODU2T, select Assign ODU2.
In case of an ODU3T, select Assign ODU3.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-82
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
window opens:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-83
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-ODUPTF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose one of the following options to find the desired ODU path termination:
1. Selection of ODU path termination from ODUPOOL:
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and ODUPOOL.
As a result, the existing ODU path terminations become visible in the navigation tree
under ODUPOOL.
The existing ODU path terminations (ODU2T-, ODU3T-, ODU3E2T-,
ODU4T-) are grouped into ODU facility groups:
ODU2TLP- (ODU2T facility group), and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-84
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the ODU facility group that contains the ODU path termination you want to
configure. As a result, the ODU path terminations contained in the selected ODU
facility group are listed in the display pane.
2. Selection of an ODU path termination for transparently mapped client signals:
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and select the desired client signal rate.
Possible selections are:
GBE
GBE10
OC3
OC12
OC48
OC192
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
STM-64
ODU path terminations for transparently mapped client signals can be identified by
means of their associated Name which becomes visible in the display pane when
expanding the selection tree underFacilities in the navigation pane.
The following ODU path terminations can be distinguished:
GBEODU0T - Gigabit Ethernet transparently mapped into ODU0.
GBE10ODU2T - 10 Gigabit Ethernet transparently mapped into ODU2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-85
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the display pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the ODU path
termination (, ODU2T-, ODU3T-, ODU3E2T-, ODU4T-, GBEODU0T,
GBE10ODU2T, OC3ODU0T, OC12ODU0T, OC48ODU1T, OC192ODU2T,
STM1ODU0T, STM4ODU0T, STM16ODU1T, STM64ODU2T) you want to configure
by clicking on it.
Then choose one of the following options to open a relevant dialog box:
Right-click on the selected ODU path termination, and select Properties General
from the context menu that opens.
In the Action menu, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties - General window related to the selected ODU path
termination opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Properties - General window, you can change the type of payload by clicking in
the Payload Type field, and selecting the desired value.
Payload Type: This parameter indicates the type of payload being carried by the
ODUk. It is used to compare the incoming payload type with the expected type in
BSCBR:
1000BASEX
STM1OC3
STM4OC12
ODUk multiplexed structure with 2.5G Tributary Slots for OTU2 and above rates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-86
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODUMPT21
AMCC
CAMCC
AMCC mapping used for transparent GBE10 for interworking with Cienna
equipment.
OLDAMCC
GFP
For GBE10ODU2 facilities, you can define the Type of client signal fail format and the
propagation of Client Signal Fail indicatinon in the Properties - General window
Reference: See General properties of an ODU path termination facilty (p. 5-509).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Trail Trace Identifier (TTI) column group of the Properties - General window,
you can provision trail trace identifier parameters.
To modify a parameter, click in the respective field, and either enter the desired value
directly, or select the desired value from a list of possible values.
Reference: See General properties of an ODU path termination facilty (p. 5-509).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Degraded Supervision column group of the Properties - General window, you
can provision error monitoring parameters.
To modify a parameter, click in the respective field, and either enter the desired value
directly, or select the desired value from a list of possible values.
The following error monitoring parameters are configurable:
Burst Interval
Burst Threshold
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-87
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference: See General properties of an ODU path termination facilty (p. 5-509).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-88
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to change the payload type of an ODU path termination.
Related TL1 commands
ED-ODUPTF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and ODUPOOL.
As a result, the existing ODU path terminations become visible in the navigation tree
under ODUPOOL.
The existing ODU path terminations (ODU2T-, ODU3T-, ODU3E2T-,
ODU4T-) are grouped into ODU facility groups:
Select the ODU facility group that contains the ODU path termination you want to
configure. As a result, the ODU path terminations contained in the selected ODU facility
group are listed in the display pane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-89
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the display pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the ODU path
termination (ODU2T-, ODU3T-, ODU3E2T-) you want to modify by clicking on
it.
Then choose one of the following options to open a relevant dialog box:
Right-click on the selected ODU path termination, and select Properties Convert
to PT20/PT21 from the context menu that opens.
In the Action menu, select Properties Convert to PT20/PT21.
Result: The Convert to PT20/PT21 Facilty window related to the selected ODU path
termination opens.
Additional info: termination substructure
PT20 (ODUM)
ODUk multiplexed structure with 2.5G Tributary Slots for OTU2 and above rates.
PT21 (ODUMPT21)
PLDTYPE=ODUM (PT20)
[T#PN-ts[-ts-ts-ts][&T#PN-ts[-ts-ts-ts]]]
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21 (PT21)
T#PN-ts[-ts[-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts]][&T#PN-ts[-ts[-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts]]]]
where
PN is Port Number of the constituent
T is the constituent type with the following general allowed values: ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3
"ts" is the Multi Stucture Identifier (MSI) slot number
The overall bandwidth of the specified constituents must exactly match the rate of the
port..
T=ODU1with one ts value (range 1..4) for ODU2 entity and PLDTYPE=ODUM
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..8) for ODU2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1with two ts values (range 1..8) for ODU2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1 with one ts value (range 1..16) for ODU3 entity and PLDTYPE=ODUM
T=ODU2 with four ts values (range 1..16) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-90
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1with two ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2 with eight ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2E with nine ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1with two ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2 with eight ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2E with eight ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU3 with thirty two ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1 with two ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2 with eight ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2E with eight ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU3 with thirty one ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-91
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to change the path termination substructure of an ODU path
termination.
Related TL1 commands
ED-ODUPTF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree under Facilities, and ODUPOOL.
As a result, the existing ODU facility types become visible in the navigation tree under
ODUPOOL.
Expand the ODU facility type that contains the ODU facility group you want to
configure.
The existing ODU path terminations (ODU2T-, ODU3T-, ODU3E2T-,
ODU4T-) are grouped into ODU facility groups:
Expand the ODU facility group that contains the ODU path termination you want to
configure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-92
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window select the desired
ODU path termination. As a result, the lower order ODUs contained in the selected ODU
path termination are listed in the display pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the display pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the lower order
ODU you want to modify by clicking on it.
Then choose one of the following options to open a relevant dialog box:
Right-click on the selected ODU path termination, and select Assign ODU<y> from
the context menu that opens.
In the Action menu, select Assign ODU<y>.
Result: The Provision ODU<x> Dialog related to the selected ODU path termination
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the field Payload Type select the Payload Type to be used.
ODU payload structure of the ODUPTF entity Depending on the selected payload
PLDTYPE=ODUM (PT20)
[T#PN-ts[-ts-ts-ts][&T#PN-ts[-ts-ts-ts]]]
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21 (PT21)
T#PN-ts[-ts[-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts]][&T#PN-ts[-ts[-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts-ts]]]]
where
PN is Port Number of the constituent
T is the constituent type with the following general allowed values: ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2, ODU2E, ODU3
"ts" is the Multi Stucture Identifier (MSI) slot number
The overall bandwidth of the specified constituents must exactly match the rate of the
port..
T=ODU1with one ts value (range 1..4) for ODU2 entity and PLDTYPE=ODUM
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..8) for ODU2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1with two ts values (range 1..8) for ODU2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1 with one ts value (range 1..16) for ODU3 entity and PLDTYPE=ODUM
T=ODU2 with four ts values (range 1..16) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-93
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1with two ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2 with eight ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2E with nine ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1with two ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2 with eight ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2E with eight ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU3 with thirty two ts values (range 1..32) for ODU3E2 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU0 with one ts value (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU1 with two ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2 with eight ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU2E with eight ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
T=ODU3 with thirty one ts values (range 1..80) for ODU4 entity and
PLDTYPE=ODUMPT21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-94
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DLT-ODUPTF
RMV-ODUPTF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and ODUPOOL.
As a result, the existing ODU path terminations become visible in the navigation tree
under ODUPOOL.
The existing ODU path terminations (ODU2T-, ODU3T-, ODU3E2T-,
ODU4T-) are grouped into ODU facility groups:
ODU2TLP- (ODU2T facility group), and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-95
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the ODU facility group that contains the ODU path termination you want to
delete. As a result, the ODU path terminations contained in the selected ODU facility
group are listed in the display pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the selected ODU path termination, and select Unassign from the
context menu that opens.
In the Action menu, select Unassign.
Result: A confirmation window opens with the message:
The selected Facility (ies) will be unassigned. Do you wish
to continue? Yes/No
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-96
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-STM1
ED-STM4
ED-STM16
ED-STM64
ED-OC3
ED-OC12
ED-OC48
ED-OC192
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and select the desired optical SDH/SONET port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-97
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane, right-click on the optical SDH/SONET port, and select
Properties General from the context menu that opens.
In the navigation pane, click on the optical SDH/SONET port, and select Action
Properties General from the main menu bar.
Result:
Result: The Properties - General window opens which contains a table with the
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-98
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-GBE
ED-/GBE10
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree under Facilities, and select the desired optical GBE/GBE10 port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-99
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane, right-click on the optical GBE/GBE10 port, and select
Properties General from the context menu that opens.
In the navigation pane, click on the optical GBE/GBE10 port, and select Action
Properties General from the main menu bar.
Result:
Result: The Properties - General window opens which contains a table with the
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-100
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS, Release 6.0.0, supports TCM for the following signal rates:
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2e
ODU3
ODU3e2
ODU4
The system supports provisioning 3 levels of TCM freely to one of the 6 levels defined by
G.709.
The following figures show examples of the TCM monitor points.
Figure 5-6 Examples (1 of 4)
HO ODU TCM HO ODU TCM
(position A)
(position B)
ODU path
NIM - ingress
HO ODU TCM
(position A)
Matrix
OTU
ODU path
NIM - egress
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-101
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HO ODU
PTF
Matrix
OTU
ODU path
NIM - ingress
LO ODU TCM
(position A)
Matrix
HO ODU
PTF
ODU path
NIM - egress
ODU TCM
(position A)
Matrix
Transparent
Payload;
STMn, OCn,
GBE[10]
The first example shows the possible monitoring points for an un-terminated ODUk, with
two monitoring points directed towards the interface and one monitoring point directed
towards the matrix. In addition, it also shows ODUk Path NIM monitoring, monitoring
both Ingress and Egress direction and OTU termination The second example shows the
possible monitoring points for a terminated ODUk with all three directed towards the
interface. The third example shows the TCM monitoring points for the LO ODU NIM,
and the fourth example shows the TCM monitoring points for transparent non-OTN
clients.
Note: The TCM monitoring points can either be unused (not provisioned) or can be
provisioned as a non-intrusive monitoring (NIM) point or as a TCM termination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-102
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following sub-characteristics of the TCM monitoring method are selectable based on
ODUk TCM non-intrusive monitoring:
the position of the TCM non-intrusive monitoring (NIM) point. Note that only
position A or B can be selected; see also the examples above.
A 1+1 ODUk SNC/N based on TCM NIM protects against defects in the server layer of
the ODUk and against continuity, connectivity, and error degradation defects in the
selected ODUk TCM sublayer itself. Protection switching is triggered by a non-intrusive
monitoring of the ODUk TCM sub-layers at the tail end of the protected domain.
These are the characteristics of a 1+1 ODUk SNC/N based on TCM NIM:
One out of the six available TCM sublayers can be selected for the non-intrusive
monitoring
ENT-TCM
ED-TCM
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-103
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the desired
OTU2, OTU3, OTU3E2 or OTU4 port in the navigation tree under Facilities.
As a result, the unterminated ODU2 (ODU2 NIM), unterminated ODU3 (ODU3
NIM), unterminated ODU3E2 (ODU3E2 NIM) or unterminated ODU4 (ODU4 NIM)
is displayed in the display pane. The following figure illustrates this using an ODU3
NIM as an example.
Figure 5-7 Example for the representation of an ODU3 NIM
ODU3 NIM
g-upg-0060
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane, right-click on the facility, and select Assign TCM from the
context menu that opens.
In the navigation pane, click on the faciltity, and select Action Assign TCM from
the main menu bar.
Result: The Provision TCM Dialog window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Level, set the TCM level of the newly created entity.
Possible values are
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-104
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
AM
After Matrix
BM
Before Matrix
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCT
TCN
Under Relative Position, define the relative position of the TCM monitor point.
The lower the position sequence, the closer the TCM monitor point to the client/matirix.
This means that the consequent action of the lower numbered position sequence TCM
monitor point affects the higher numbered position sequence TCM monitor point
Possible values are
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Overhead Add, define if the provisioned TCM Overhead is to inserted or not.
Possible values are
Yes
No
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Overhead Remove, define if the received TCM Overhead is discarded or not
Possible values are
Yes
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-105
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click Apply.
Result: The Properties - General - TCM window opens.
Reference: See Properties of a Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) entity
(p. 5-520).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
12
13
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-106
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to take a facility out of service for maintenance purposes.
Related TL1 commands
RMV-GBE
RMV-GBE10
RMV-OC3
RMV-OC12
RMV-OC48
RMV-OC192
RMV-ODU0
RMV-ODU1
RMV-ODU2
RMV-ODU2E
RMV-ODU3
RMV-ODU3E2
RMV-ODU4
RMV-ODUPTF
RMV-OTU
RMV-TCM
RMV-STM1
RMV-STM4
RMV-STM16
RMV-STM64
Required privileges
You must have a User Community Authorization Level of 3 to perform this task.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-107
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC navigation pane, expand the selection tree under
Facilities to select the desired facility.
Note: Some facilities are only available via display pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Service State Remove, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Remove dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Command Mode you can choose between NORM and FORCED.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-108
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RST-GBE
RST-GBE10
RST-OC3
RST-OC12
RST-OC48
RST-OC192
RST-ODU0
RST-ODU1
RST-ODU2
RST-ODU2E
RST-ODU3
RST-ODU3E2
RST-ODU4
RST-ODUPTF
RST-OTU
RST-TCM
RST-STM1
RST-STM4
RST-STM16
RST-STM64
Required privileges
You must have a User Community Authorization Level of 3 to perform this task.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-109
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC navigation pane, expand the selection tree
underFacilities to select the desired facility.
Note: Some facilities are only available via display pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Service State Restore, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Restore dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-110
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to enable autonomous or manual equipment protection switching for
agnostic matrix cards.
Important! Traffic may be switched via inactive MTX card, pulling the inactive
MTX may destroy traffic.
At first trouble-shoot an INT-ERR alarm. If necessary, perform a forced switch to the
MTX card that has not such an alarm. It is strongly recommended that INT-ERR alarms
must be repaired before removing or rebooting MTXes.
Note: The procedure applies to the following card types:
ALW-SWDX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT
RTRV-DX-EQPT
SW-DX-EQPT
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-111
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the agnostic matrix card for
which you want to enable autonomous or manual equipment protection switching via
Equipment Rack 1 Shelf 0x:PSSxx
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Switching Allow Switch, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Allow Switching dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-112
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to inhibit autonomous or manual equipment protection switching for
agnostic matrix cards.
Important! Traffic may be switched via inactive MTX card, pulling the inactive
MTX may destroy traffic.
At first trouble-shoot an INT-ERR alarm. If necessary, perform a forced switch to the
MTX card that has not such an alarm. It is strongly recommended that INT-ERR
alarms must be repaired before removing or rebooting MTXes.
Note: The procedure applies to the following card types:
ALW-SWDX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT
RTRV-DX-EQPT
SW-DX-EQPT
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-113
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the agnostic matrix card for
which you want to inhibit autonomous or manual equipment protection switching via
Equipment Rack 1 Shelf 0x:PSSxx.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Switching State Inhibit Switch, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Inhibit Switch to Duplex dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-114
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALW-SWDX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT
RTRV-DX-EQPT
SW-DX-EQPT
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-115
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the part of equipment for which
you want to perform the switch via Equipment Rack 1 Shelf (1 ... 31)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Switching Switch, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Switch Duplex dialogue box is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Command Mode you can choose between NORM and FORCED (not applicable to
the FLC equipment protection group.)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Switch.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes.
Result: Now an equipment protection switch from the currently active unit to the
standby unit takes place. As a result, the formerly standby unit becomes active, and
the formerly active unit becomes standby.
Important! If you perform a manual equipment protection switch for FLCs, the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC will exit, and you will have to re-launch it once the
equipment protection switch is complete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-116
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INIT-SYS
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select Equipment Rack 1 Shelf
(1 ... 31). Then select the board or circuit pack, for which you want to initiate a circuit
pack reset .
Then select Initialize Board, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by
using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-117
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Initialize Board window opens.
MT3T8 - Matrix card for PSS-64, with a switching capacity of 3.84 Tb/s
MT1T9 - Matrix card for PSS-64, with a switching capacity of 1.92 Tb/s
MT1T9C - Matrix card for PSS-36, with a switching capacity of 1.92 Tb/s
MT960C - Matrix card for PSS-36, with a switching capacity of 960 Gb/s
I/O cards:
2 40G ANY Port Unit (2XANY40G)
4 10G ANY Card (4XANY10G)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-118
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Card gets power cycled. All FPGAs of the card are pumped again. For the
First-level Controller (FLC), this implies a file system repair action. If applied to
active cards that are involved in an equipment protection, then an implicit
equipment protection switch will happen.
Table 5-7
Circuit pack
Type of restart
Matrix card
First-level Controller
(FLC)
COLD
Exception:
Define the Command Execution Mode using the respective radio button:
Forced
Normal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-119
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional info For the active matrix card or the active FLC, and if the Phase
parameter is set to any value other than APPL, the Command Execution Mode must
be set to Forced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree, select the shelf, then select
one of the cards involved in the equipment protection group in the Contents tab or
Graphical View tab.
Right-click on the selected card, and select Switching View from the context
menu that opens. The View Duplex Switching Equipments window opens.
In the View Duplex Switching Equipments window, read the status of the
equipment protection group from the Group State column.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-120
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The alignment process typically takes approximately 10 minutes, and the sequence of
status indications is as follows:
During the alignment process, the group state is ALIGNING, that is the protection
group prepares the inactive module for the standby role.
After the alignment process has finished, the group state can take on one of the
following values:
NOREQ - No switch request active on the protection group.
DEGRADED - Protection group in degraded state.
When the group state of an equipment protection group has any value other than No
Request (NOREQ), then the cards pertaining to that equipment protection group are
highlighted with a light red background in the display pane of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC under Contents. This is illustrated in the following figure using the matrix
cards and FLCs in a PSS-36 shelf as an example.
The exact group state can then be retrieved as described above.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-121
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-8 Example for highlighted cards in the display pane of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-122
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning is the process of assigning values to parameters that determine the operating
characteristics of the system. The values of the provisioned parameters determine how
you interface with an NE and how the NE functions with various installed entities. Each
provisionable parameter has a factory-supplied original value when software is first
loaded onto an NE. These values become the current value upon launching the software
and are the values used by the system. All provisioned parameters and values are
preserved in the systems non-volatile memory and are protected and can be retrieved on
demand or restored upon recovering from power failure. Copies of these parameter
settings can also be used by other identical NEs.
User access to Equipment Management functions is available via all supported user
interfaces. Therefore, all externally user provisionable parameters can be set using the
WebUI, TL1, CLI, or EMS (1354 RM-PhM). Autonomous notifications are generated for
the following equipment-related events:
physical removal/insertion
failure/recovery
warm/cold restart
primary/secondary state changes
logical removal/restoration
provisioning creation/deletion/changes
Contents
Procedure 5-26: View or modify NE parameters
5-125
System Properties
5-126
5-129
Reboot Options
5-130
5-131
Firmware
5-134
5-135
Firmware
5-136
Shelf provisioning
5-137
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-123
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-142
Create Shelf
5-143
5-146
Shelf Properties
5-147
5-151
5-152
Shelf LEDs
5-153
OT slot/card provisioning
5-154
5-175
Provision Card
5-176
5-177
5-178
Card Inventory
5-179
5-180
5-181
5-182
5-184
5-185
5-186
5-187
5-188
Delete Card
5-189
Port/facility provisioning
5-190
5-402
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-124
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Login to the NE and using the WebUI, select System from the equipment tree. Select the
Provision/Info function.
Result: System properties are displayed under the Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-125
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
System Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System Properties
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
<1-20 chars>
Description
<0-255 chars>
User-specified description of
the network element.
Software Release
<0-20 chars>
Loopback IP
<IP address>
<IP address>
OCS IP
<IP address>
{0-3}
<IP address>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-126
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
System Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
SNMP Source
Any IP interface
Loopback IP only
(checkbox)
UI Mode
Normal (default)
Encrypted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-127
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
System Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
(checkbox)
AINS Timer
<Hours-Minutes,
Temperature Units
Celsius
Fahrenheit
EC Programmed Capacity
Unknown
4G
16G
SONET/SDH Mode
SONET
SDH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-128
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select System from the equipment tree and select the Reboot tab.
Result: The Reboot Options screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-129
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Reboot Options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reboot Options
Attribute
Additional Info
Warm Reboot
Cold Reboot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-130
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the card from the equipment tree and click the Firmware tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI displays a picklist of valid values for the card type. For each card type, there is
a default firmware version.
The WebUI supports configuring firmware for the following card types:
4DPA2,
4DPA4,
11DPE12,
11DPE12A,
11DPE12E,
11DPM12,
11QPA4,
11QPE24,
11QPEN4,
11STAR1,
11STAR1A,
11STGE12,
11STMM10,
130SCX10,
43SCGE1,
43SCA1,
43SCX4,
43SCX4E,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-131
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
43STA1P,
43STX4,
43STX4P,
112PDM11
112SCA1,
112SCX10,
112SNA1,
112SNX10,
A2325A,
A2P2125,
AHPHG,
AHPLG,
ALPHG,
AM2125A,
AM2125B,
AM2318A
CWR8,
CWR8-88,
MESH4,
MVAC,
MVAC8B,
OPSA,
OPSB,
OSCT,
PTPCTL
PTPIO
RA2P,
SVAC,
WR2-88,
WR8-88A,
WR8-88AF
WTOCM,
WTOCMA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-132
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-133
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Firmware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Firmware
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Provisioned Release
<32 chars>
User-selected firmware
release.
--default--" indicates the
default firmware release for
the current software release.
NOTE: The firmware
upgrade will take effect after
the card is cold rebooted.
Provisioned On
<date/time>
Active Release
<64 chars>
Activated On
<date/time>
Load State
None
Loaded
Failed
Timeout
Init[1-10]
Elapsed Time
<MM:SS>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-134
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-135
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Firmware
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Firmware
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Location
<shelf/slot>
Card Type
Provisioned Release
<32 chars>
User-selected firmware
release.
--default--" indicates the
default firmware release for
the current software release.
Provisioned On
<date/time>
Active Release
<64 chars>
Activated On
<date/time>
LoadState
None
Loaded
Failed
Timeout
Init[1-10]
Elapsed Time
<MM:SS>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-136
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf provisioning
Overview
The 1830 PSS supports the following shelf types: PSS-32 universal shelf, PSS-16
universal shelf, DCM shelf, SFD40 shelf, SFD40B shelf, SFD44 shelf, SFD44B shelf,
ITLB shelf and ITLU shelf. The DCM, SFD44, SFD44B, ITLB and ITLU shelves are all
passive module shelves.
Table 5-8, 1830 PSS Shelf Combinations (p. 5-137) lists the combinations of PSS-32,
PSS-32S, and PSS-16 shelves that are supported in a single NE.
Table 5-8
PSS-16
Subtending
Universal Shelf
Type
Number of
Subtending
Universal Shelves
Non-Universal
Shelf Types
PSS-16
0 to 7 PSS-16 shelves
DCM
PSS-32
0 to 23 PSS-32
shelves
ITLB, ITLU
Maximum 23
combined
PSS-32
SFD40, SFD40B,
SFD44, SFD44B
PSS-16
0 to 8 PSS-16 shelves
DCM
PSS-32
0 to 23 PSS-32
shelves
ITLB, ITLU
PSS-32S
0 to 1 PSS-32S
shelves
SFD40, SFD40B,
SFD44, SFD44B
Maximum 23
combined
Important! Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS requires that filler blanks be used in all un-used
slots in a shelf to ensure proper airflow and cooling.
PSS shelf
Rotary dial backplane setting
On each PSS shelf, a shelf ID number and a shelf role can be set via a physical
mechanism (rotary dial) on the backplane. Up to 8 bits of information can be set. The
rotary dial for each shelf must be set to a valid value, and the value must be unique within
the same NE.
The values of the rotary dial are interpreted as follows:
Bits 4-3-2-1-0 code the shelf ID number, an integer in the range 1-24.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-137
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bit 7 (the most significant bit), codes the shelf role according to the following rule:
Bit 7 = zero: Shelf Role = Not-Main Shelf
Bit 7 = one: Shelf Role = Main Shelf
Note: Bits 6-5 of the register must be set to 0 (zero).
If any new shelf begins to boot with an invalid or non-unique rotary dial setting, it is
prevented from completing initialization, and it is not assigned an AID. A system
PRCDRERR alarm is raised (if the main shelf is operational). The new shelf begins
blinking all its LEDs and continues until the situation is resolved.
Note: The rotary dial must not be changed after the shelf has been discovered by the
system.
Important! A unique shelf ID is required for each shelf.
Main shelf
One and only one shelf in each NE can have the role of Main shelf. This is designated by
a backplane rotary dial setting of 0x81 (Shelf Role = Main Shelf, Shelf ID = 1). When a
new PSS-32 shelf boots up and finds that its rotary dial is set to 0x81, it automatically
provisions itself with AID = SHELF-1 and TYPEID = UNV. It then begins to perform the
role of the main shelf.
Note: Two main shelves (i.e. two NEs) cannot be connected by internal LAN cable as
if they belonged to a single NE (i.e., as if one was subordinate to the other).
Not-Main shelf
A Not-Main shelf is pre-provisioned by user command specifying a unique Shelf AID and
specifying TYPEID = UNV. The shelf number of the Shelf AID should be set equal to the
expected rotary dial setting. For example, if the pre-provisioned AID is SHELF-3, the
shelf is expected to have a rotary dial setting of 0x03.
A shelf AINS mode parameter can be set to prevent immediate loss of communication
alarming against a newly pre-provisioned shelf.
When a new Not-Main shelf (with valid and unique rotary dial setting) is detected by the
system (by internal LAN discovery), it is checked against current pre-provisioned shelf
definitions. If a match is found, the new shelf is assigned the pre-provisioned shelf AID.
Match is defined as follows.
The shelf number of the pre-provisioned shelf AID must be equal to the actual value
read from the rotary dial, and the pre-provisioned shelf TYPEID value must be UNV.
When a newly detected not-main shelf (with valid and unique rotary dial setting) does not
match any pre-provisioned definition, it is auto-provisioned. The shelf number of the
shelf AID is automatically assigned the actual value read from the rotary dial. The
TYPEID is automatically set to UNV.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-138
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFDs multiplex and de-multiplex optical channel signals.The SFD40 100GHz Channel
Spacing Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer and the SFD40B with 50GHz frequency shift
are used to multiplex and to demultiplex forty optical channels in the C-Band. The SFD44
and SFD44B are passive standalone rack-mounted devices that are not slot-resident. The
SFD has an optical line-level interface to an ITLB, ITLU, or CWR circuit pack (or an LD,
in the case of an end terminal node). The SFD44 is modeled by the system as a shelf of
type SFD44, with one fixed slot containing a card of type SFD44. The SFD44B is
modeled by the system as a shelf of type SFD44B, with one fixed slot containing a
card of type SFD44B.
The ITLB/ITLU is designed to be used in combination with the SFD44 and SFD44B. The
ITLB/ITLU combines and de-muxes the odd and even sets of signals into a single group
of 88-channel group of signals with 50GHz spacing. The ITLB/ITLU is modeled by the
system as a shelf of type ITLB/ITLU, with one fixed slot containing a card of type
ITLB/ITLU.
DCM is a passive rack-mounted device that is not slot-resident. The DCM is modeled as a
shelf of type DCM, with one fixed slot containing a card of type DCM. There are 3
different sizes of DCM. Up to 16 DCMs (depending on size) can reside together in a
shelf-like housing with no backplane. DCMs provide optical line-level dispersion
compensation to LD or OSCT circuit packs. There are SMF, LEAF, and TWRS fiber
types for the DCM modules. The NE supports a fibertype attribute for DCMs to allow the
user to provision or have the NE auto provision the type (if inventoried).
Any provisioning of a new SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/ITLU/DCM shelf
automatically provisions the contained
SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/ITLU/DCM card. Deprovisioning an
SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/ITLU/DCM shelf automatically de-provisions
(deletes) the SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/ITLU/DCM card, and this is the
only way to delete an SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/ITLU/DCM card.
SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/DCM shelves have no rotary dial mechanism.
Instead, each SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/DCM shelf is identified by a
unique serial number which is stored on the RI EEPROM, and is also externally visible
on the equipment label.
Transmission association
Shelf provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Serial Number was pre-provisioned with the default value (i.e. has not yet been
specified): The actual shelf type must equal the pre-provisioned TYPEID value. In
this case, Serial Number is now automatically assigned the actual serial number read
from the SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/ITLU/DCM.
Shelf provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Serial Number value can be modified by the user whenever needed. For
example, when an SFD40/SFD40B/SFD44/SFD44B/ITLB/ITLU/DCM is physically
replaced without deletion of its provisioning, Serial Number must be changed from
the old serial number to the new one.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-141
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to create (pre-provision) a shelf (see Shelf provisioning
(p. 5-137)).
Note: The WebUI supports creation (pre-provisioning) for all shelves, except the main
shelf (see Shelf provisioning (p. 5-137)).
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-142
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Create Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create Shelf
Attribute
Provisioned Type
Value/Format
Empty
Additional Info
Type of shelf.
External DCM
ITLB
ITLU
PSS-4 Universal
PSS-16 Universal
PSS-32 Universal
PSS-32S Universal
SFD40
SFD40B
SFD44
SFD44B
Shelf ID
<0-31 chars>
Description
<0-255 chars>
User-specified description of
the shelf.
AINS Enabled
(checkbox)
Serial Number
<0-16 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-143
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Create Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Is Managed
Value/Format
(checkbox)
Additional Info
Indicates whether the shelf is
expected to be managed via
the serial electrical inventory
wire. When enabled,
inventory readability indicates
presence or absence. When
disabled, the shelf is treated
as always present, even
though there is no
communication.
Not applicable to PSS-4,
PSS-32, and PSS-32S
Universal shelves.
Expected PF (Amps)
PF B Expected Amps
Expected Volts
48 (default) V dc
60 V dc
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-144
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Create Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
High Voltage Threshold
(Volts)
Value/Format
35.0 - 85.0
Default:
57 V dc (when Expected
Volts is 48 V dc)
72 V dc (when Expected
Volts is 60 V dc)
35.0 - 85.0
Default:
40.5 V dc (when
Expected Volts is 48 V
dc)
50 V dc (when Expected
Volts is 60 V dc)
2 (default)
(checkbox)
1-5
Additional Info
Specifies the high voltage
threshold for the power filter
input voltage. The default
value is the high voltage
specified in the operating
range.
Specifies the low voltage
threshold for the power filter
input voltage. The default
value is the low voltage
specified in the operating
range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-145
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to view/modify shelf properties (see Shelf provisioning
(p. 5-137)).
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: There are restrictions on which shelves and parameters can be modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the shelf from the equipment tree and select the Provision/Info function.
Result: The Shelf Properties screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-146
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf Properties
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Empty
External DCM
ITLB
ITLU
PSS-4 Universal
PSS-16 Universal
PSS-32 Universal
PSS-32S Universal
SFD40
SFD40B
SFD44
SFD44B
Provisioned Shelf Type
External DCM
ITLB
ITLU
PSS-4 Universal
PSS-16 Universal
PSS-32 Universal
PSS-32S Universal
SFD40
SFD40B
SFD44
SFD44B
Shelf Name
<0-31 chars>
Description
<0-255 chars>
User-specified description of
the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-147
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
AINS Enabled
(checkbox)
Expected PF (Amps)
48 (default) V dc
60 V dc
35-80
Default:
57 V dc (when Expected
Volts is 48 V dc)
72 V dc (when Expected
Volts is 60 V dc)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-148
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
35-80
Default:
40.5 V dc (when
Expected Volts is 48 V
dc)
50 V dc (when Expected
Volts is 60 V dc)
2 (default)
(checkbox)
1-5
Is Managed
(checkbox)
Company ID
<0-4 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-149
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Mnemonic
<0-8 chars>
The Alcatel-Lucent
mnemonic for the shelf.
Applicable to PSS-4
Universal shelf only.
CLEI
<0-10 chars>
<0-14 chars>
<0-14 chars>
Factory ID
<0-4 chars>
Serial Number
<0-16 chars>
Date
<0-6 chars>
Extra Data
<46 bytes>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-150
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Select the shelf from the equipment tree and click Delete.
Note: For an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16 shelf, all
cards except the active EC, FAN, USRPNL, and PF must be manually deleted before
a shelf can be deleted.
For an 1830 PSS-32S shelf, all cards except the BTC, HKPCNTL, FAN, MTC1T9
and PF must be manually deleted before a shelf can be deleted.
For SFD40, SFD40B, SFD44, SFD44B, ITLB, and ITLU shelves, the card is
automatically deleted by the NE when the shelf is deleted. The card must be in a valid
state for deletion before the shelf can be deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-151
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the PSS shelf from the equipment tree and select the Test/Analysis function.
Result: The Shelf LEDs screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-152
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Shelf LEDs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shelf LEDs
Attribute
Additional Info
Test LEDs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-153
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OT slot/card provisioning
4DPA2 OT
The 4DPA2 is a half-height, single-wide dual transponder that has two client ports with
SFP optics directly associated with two line ports. It also supports a single E-SNCP
protection group, which uses both line ports to protect one of the two client ports. With
E-SNCP only one client port is supported. The 4DPA2 is an optimized version of the
4DPA4 for application in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16.
The following client signals are supported:
OC48/STM16
1GbE
4DPA4 OT
The 4DPA4 OT, sometimes referred to as the MSC (Multi-Service Card), is a half-height,
single-wide card that accepts up to four client signals via SFP optics, and performs
non-blocking multiplexing into one or both line ports. It has dual pluggable OTU1 line
ports that support B&W, CWDM, or DWDM line signals, and supports a variety of
sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder mappings.
There are four pluggable client interfaces: two at the top, and two at the bottom. The
middle of the faceplate has sockets for the dual line interfaces: two eVOA SFPs and two
line port SFPs. Line transmit fibers are externally connected through the eVOA ports for
Wavetracker functionality. There is a pack status LED in the upper right corner of the
faceplate. Each port has a dedicated port status LED, and each port also has a second
LED. The second LED is used on client ports is used to indicate dynamic Ethernet
activity, and is not used on line ports and eVOA ports.
Two card mode values are supported for 4DPA4: DualTran and FlexMux. The "Card
Mode" parameter determines the feature type of the 4DPA4 main firmware image. It
affects many fundamental aspects of card and port behavior, including:
How the near-end node reads LosProp data sent by the far-end node.
Whether or not E-SNCP protection is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-154
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning the cardmode parameter is allowed only when there are no connections and
all ports are unassigned. Otherwise it is denied. As with other parameters, cardmode can
be provisioned on a card that is physically present, physically absent, or pre-provisioned.
Note: Changing the cardmode automatically clears any non-default provisioning of
firmware release (package identifier), and automatically triggers a cold restart of the
card to download the default version of the firmware line corresponding to the new
cardmode.
DualTran card mode
When cardmode=DualTran, FC400 is the only client signal type supported. Client ports
C1 and C3 can be used, but C2 and C4 cannot be used. Provisioning of C2 and C4 are
denied. FC400 commands apply to 4DPA4 only in this card mode. TL1 and CLI
commands specific to other client signal types are denied. Line ports are created
automatically. ODU1 commands are denied. Timeslots do not exist, and E-SNCP
protection is not supported.
When cardmode=DualTran, client port parameters and line port parameters behave or
apply as appropriate for the Dual Transponder FC400 feature. Examples: OPRMODE,
OTURATE, and FCMODE parameters have different values in FC400 image.
OPRMODE is read-only. TS, NETSMAP, FETSMAP, PLDTYPE, and ODU0INTERWK
parameters do not apply. Parameters specific to SONET, SDH, or 1GBE do not apply.
FlexMux card mode
When cardmode=FlexMux, all client signal types are supported except FC400. All four
client ports can be used. TL1 and CLI command specific to FC400 are denied. Line ports
are created manually. ODU1 commands apply. Timeslots exist to flexibly assign line port
bandwidth for sub-ODU1 clients. E-SNCP protection is available. When
cardmode=FlexMux, client port parameters and line port parameters behave or apply as
appropriate for the Flexible Mux feature.
11DPE12(A/E) OT
The 11DPE12, 11DPE12E (enhanced), and 11DPE12A (2nd generation 11EPE12E) are
12xGbE MUX OT single slot, full height cards, providing an Ethernet multiplexing
platform that aggregates up to twelve full-rate GbE client services onto two 10G paths,
supported by B&W/CWDM/DWDM line-side PTM optics. By providing unrestricted
throughput and MAC PDU transparency for up to ten GBE clients, this pack offers
Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) service transport with Q_in_Q tagging mechanism,
as defined in MEF and ITU-T documents.
The 11DPE12, 11DPE12E, and 11DPE12A support 88 channels when configured with a
tunable XFP. When configured with a fixed channel XFP, only 44 even channels are
supported. Fixed odd channel XFPs are not supported. The fixed channel XFPs supported
on these line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from these XFPs may only
traverse 100 GHz systems.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-155
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The 11DPE12E and 11DPE12A contain a more sophisticated switch which
enables the development of advanced features in future releases. The 11DPE12A
supports the IEEE 1588v2 Precision Timing Protocol (PTP).
The 11DPE12(A/E) card supports the following features:
Statistical L2 multiplexing
Supports FullRate, SubRate, QinQ operational mode
Full 88 channel C-band DWDM support
Terminal loopback and facility loopback
Supports E-SNCP protection in QinQ mode
If the 11DPE12(A/E) card has an E-SNCP protection group provisioned, modifying the
Operational Mode from FullRate to SubRate or QinQ is not allowed.
11DPE12A enhancements
The 11DPE12A is a 12xGbE MUX OT variant that supports the IEEE 1588v2 Precision
Timing Protocol (PTP). The following features and enhancements are provided on the
11DPE12A:
IEEE 1588v2
Beginning in Release 6.0 PTPIO and PTPCTL cards can be used in conjunction with
11DPE12A to support IEEE 1588v2 PTP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-156
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Architectural changes
New L2 switch
Large Look-aside FPGA for IEEE 1588v2 and Y.1731
Enhanced controller and RAM
Support for 10/100/1000BASE-T SFP with embedded WT encoder
Enhanced Data features
Existing 11DPE12E features (QinQ for EVPL, CIR/PIR, E-SCNP, etc), except
Y-cable and ESNCP across mate packs
1588V2 PTP OC master/slave, BC over OTN HWready (CMCC CI version)
Ethernet OAM enhancements (IEEE 802.1ag CFM [CC, LB], ITU-T Y.1731 FM
[RDI, CSF], LPT, G.8021-compliant FM processes)
OAM and LPT on 10GbE client ports
Service OAM (CFM and Y.1731) and Link-Pass-Through (LPT) is available also
on 10GbE client ports (configured with special UNI port role)
SyncE support
Ethernet PM enhancements
11DPE12A supports the following additional optical pluggable modules in R6.0:
Bidirectional 1GbE SFP 20km and 40km, uplink and downlink
(1000BASE-BX20-U, 1000BASE-BX20-D, 1000BASE-BX40-U,
1000BASE-BX20-D)
The following features are supported on the 11DPE12A variant of the 12xGbE MUX OT
by PTPCTL and PTLIO cards:
Addressing: Unicast/multicast/hybrid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-157
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet OAM
Maintenance Association - For each Maintenance Domain, the WebUI displays a table
listing all the configured maintenance associations. For each Maintenance Domain,
the WebUI supports create, modify and view of up to 400 maintenance associations.
The WebUI supports adding and deleting a Remote MEP ID to a maintenance
association. A Remote MEP ID can only be added if a maintenance end point exists.
The WebUI supports deletion of a maintenance association if there are no
maintenance end points associated with it.
Maintenance End Point - For each Maintenance Association, the WebUI displays a
table listing all the configured maintenance end points. For each Maintenance
Association, the WebUI supports create, modify and view of up to 100 maintenance
end points. For each Maintenance End Point, the WebUI displays a table of the MEP
CCM database. The MEP CCM database can only be retrieved if a remote MEP ID
has been provisioned on the MA. The WebUI supports deletion of a maintenance end
point only if the Remote MEP ID on the MA has been deleted.
For the 11DPE12A/E card, the WebUI displays an object with the label MEP under
the card. This object represents all MEPs (Maintenance End Points) for the port.
TheWebUI displays a list of all active alarms for all MEPs on the selected card. The
user can select a MEP and then display a list of condition types that are applicable to
the selected MEP. A refresh button is provided so that the user can refresh the alarm
list.
CFM Stack - For the 11DPE12A/E card, the WebUI displays a table of MEP data
representing the CFM stack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-158
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PTP ToD
The WebUI supports modify and view of the PTP ToD (Time of Day) interface
attributes for each of the ToD interfaces on the card.
ToD interfaces are created and deleted with the card
A PTP Clock is automatically created when the Clock Mode is changed from
PTP Disabled to another mode.
A PTP Clock is automatically deleted when the Clock Mode is changed to PTP
Disabled.
Domain can only be modified if Clock Enabled = No.
PTP Port
The WebUI displays a table with all PTP ports provisioned on a PTP Clock
The WebUI supports creating up to 14 PTP ports per PTP clock. (If Clock Mode =
Ordinary Clock Master or Ordinary Clock Slave, only one PTP Port may
be created per PTP Clock. If Clock Mode = Boundary Clock, multiple PTP ports
may be created.)
The WebUI supports deletion of a PTP port. (The port cannot be deleted when
Port Enabled = Yes.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-159
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WebUI supports the following Fault functions on a per-PTP object basis:
The WebUI displays a list of all active alarms on the selected PTP object. A
refresh button is provided, so that the user may refresh the alarm list. The WebUI
will not automatically update the screen for new alarms and clears. Note: there are
no severity filters for this alarm list.
The WebUI displays a list of condition types that are applicable to the selected
object.
PTP ToD
A user may modify the facility alarm severity for a selected condition type.
A user may revert to the default severity for all condition types of a specified
category.
11DPE12A enhancements
The 11DPE12A is a 12xGbE MUX OT variant that supports the IEEE 1588v2 Precision
Timing Protocol (PTP). The following features and enhancements are provided on the
11DPE12A:
IEEE 1588v2
11DPM12 OT
The 11DPM12 transponder is a single slot wide, full height card supporting dual
pluggable line ports with flexible any-rate client signal aggregation and add/drop. With
two line ports and flexible traffic configuration, the 11DPM12 OT can provide ADM on a
blade and E-SNCP functionalities. All client signals can be transported in a bit-transparent
or character-transparent manner over OTN.
The 11DPM12 card supports the following features:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-160
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Two OTU2 line ports (10.709Gbps, provisionable) with EFEC (G.975.1 I.4) and RS
FEC (G.709), supported by CWDM or DWDM pluggable optics (XFPs) and tunable
DWDM XFP. DWDM XFPs DTV control function is supported at both line ports
11QPA4/11QPEN4 OT
The 11QPA4/11QPEN4 is a 10G, Quad port, any rate module with four client interfaces.
This module supports four independent multi-rate 10G channels. The 11QPA4A is the
temperature hardened version of this module.
The 11QPA4/11QPEN4 has four pluggable client interfaces (C1, C2, C3, and C4), four
pluggable line interfaces (L1, L2, L3 and L4) and four VOA sockets (VA1, VA2, VA3 and
VA4). The pack has a status LED, but does not support status LEDs for the optical ports
and VOA ports due to physical limitations on the faceplate, but the WEBUI does support
LED status for all ports.
The 11QPEN4 offers provisionable encryption attributes for the optical data center
connect feature.
The 10G pluggable line port supports 88 channels when configured with a tunable XFP.
When configured with a fixed channel XFP, only 44 even channels are supported. Fixed
odd channel XFPs are not supported. The fixed channel XFPs supported on these line
ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from these XFPs may only traverse 100
GHz systems.
The 11QPA4/11QPEN4 transponder supports four independent Multi-rate 10G channels
and an 8G Fibre channel. The following client signals are supported.
OTU2
STM-64, OC-192 (11QPA4)
10GbE WAN PHY (11QPA4)
10GbE LAN PHY
FC800
FC1200
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-161
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In this mode, the circuit pack is processing signal in both transmission directions
(ingress, from client port towards the line side, from line side to client port). The
board supports C1 to L1 ADD_DROP. The board supports C2 to L2 ADD_DROP.
The board supports C3 to L3 ADD_DROP. The board supports C4 to L4
ADD_DROP.
CrossRegen (11QPA4)
In this mode, the Line port input signal is looped towards another line port output
through 8x8 matrix. The client XFP is not necessarily provisioned or equipped, and no
alarm or performance monitoring is associated with those client ports. The circuit
pack supports CrossRegen between any two line ports.
AddOnly (11QPA4)
In this mode, each Line port involved in the multicast connection is provisioned for
ADD_ONLY mode with the source client port specified.
DropContinue (11QPA4)
In this mode, the card is processing the signal in the egress direction and looping the
signal from the line side input towards the line side output. The alarms in the unused
direction are masked.
11QPE24
The 11QPE24 is a double-width full height pack providing Ethernet aggregation and
switching capabilities for its 10/100/1000 client ports and four OTN-mapped (OTU2) or
native 10GE line ports. The card is equipped with 24 Client ports, currently client ports
1-22 can be provisioned for service. All optics on the 11QPE24 are provided by pluggable
transmission modules (PTMs).
11QPE24 supports the pluggable optics shown below for the following ports:
24 SFP slots for Client ports. Both optical and electrical SFPs are supported.
4 XFP slots for the 10G Line ports
4 SFP VOA slots
The 10G pluggable line port of the 11QPE24 supports 88 channels when configured with
a tunable XFP. When configured with a fixed channel XFP, only 44 even channels are
supported. Fixed odd channel XFPs are not supported. The fixed channel XFPs supported
on these line ports are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic from these XFPs may only
traverse 100 GHz systems.
The 11QPE24 supports the following features:
24 SFP slots for Client ports. Both optical and electrical SFPs are supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-162
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following interfaces are supported on the ports of the 11QPE24 with the appropriate
PTM:
Line interface
OTU2
Client interface
1GbE
10GbE
11STAR1/11STAR1A OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-163
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the line side interface (L1), standard ITU-T G.709 digital structures are used. Line
side Forward Error Correction is provisionable for standard G.709 FEC (Reed-Solomon
(255, 239)) or enhanced FEC (EFEC) for higher coding gain. The L1 transmitter can be
tuned to any of the 88 channels supported by the system.
Attention: If the 11STAR1A is provisioned with FECTYPE set to EFEC2, there is a
small chance that under certain situations, traffic would be impacted. The two ends
would no longer be able to pass traffic correctly. Cold reboot of the 11STAR1A packs
on both ends must be executed to recover. Therefore, it is highly recommended to
always use FECTYPE = EFEC or RSFEC. The default setting for the 11STAR1A is
EFEC.
As with all supported OTs, the 11STAR1/11STAR1A can be configured for different
customer applications. The following user provisioning is supported on both the C1 and
L1 ports of the 11STAR1/11STAR1A OT:
This means that a minor port-level alarm will have no effect on the pack status LED. This
exception pertains only to the 11STAR1.
11STGE12 OT
11STGE12 Optical Transponder is a GbE multiplexing unit that allows the user to
aggregate up to 10 GbE services onto a 10G digital structure. The pack is designed in a
way that allows flexible port to service provisioning.
Note: Ports 1-10 are available for transporting GbE services while ports 11 and 12
should remain unassigned.
11STGE12 OT supports Ethernet Private Line bi-directional services for up to 10 client
ethernet signals with MAC layer transparency including transparency to client domain
VLAN tag(s). 10 GbE ports can be transported simultaneously with full throughput and
all frame sizes up to Jumbo size of 9216.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-164
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can enable/disable Auto-negotiation independently on all 10 client ports. Each of
the 10 client facing ports is implemented as an SFP module to allow flexible physical
layer configuration.
As with all supported OTs, the 11STGE12 can be configured for different customer
applications. The following user provisioning is supported on C1-10 and L1 ports of the
11STGE12 OT:
Performance monitoring
11STMM10 OT
GbE -> Ethernet private line service using GFP-T encapsulation and code word
transparency for client signal.
OC3/OC12/OC48 -> Terminated SONET services (applicable for SONET system
mode).
STM1/STM4/STM16 -> Terminated SDH services (applicable for SDH system
mode).
Note: For 11STMM10, VC3 structures in SDH mode are not supported.
CBR2G5 -> Bit transparent transport of OC48/STM16 clients (compliant with G.709)
FC100/FC200/FC400 -> Fibre channel services (either FC or FICON mode)
OTU1 -> Terminated OTU1 trail functions
Note: When used in transparent mode, the local onboard oscillator is used. PJE's may
be generated over time. This may impact transparent STM-4 working.
Each of the 10 client facing ports is implemented as an SFP module to allow flexible
physical layer configuration.
Client bit streams characteristic information is adapted to a server carrying digital
structure and mapped into contiguous bandwidth slot on a DWDM line port digital
structure. Figure 5-9, 11STMM10 OT signal processing from client port to DWDM line
port (p. 5-166) shows logical signal processing from the client port to the DWDM line
port. Line port structure consists of 4 ODU1s multiplexed into an ODU2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-165
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-9 11STMM10 OT signal processing from client port to DWDM line port
For the purpose of bandwidth allocation and flexible Client transport configurations,
DWDM Line port defines 64 virtual time slots (4 sets of 16). Time slots are identified as
ODU1 # followed by time slot #. ODU1 # ={1,2,3 & 4} while time slot # ={1, 4, 7, 10,
13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 37, 40, 43, 46}
Each client adapted information takes fixed amount of bandwidth expressed in virtual
time slots in the following way:
At the time of client port type provisioning, the user enters the starting time slot of the
contiguous bandwidth area on the line port which will transport client adapted
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-166
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overall bandwidth required to transport client adapted information does not exceed 64
time slots. In addition to that rule the following provisioning rules apply:
1. Any port can carry any supported signal type
2. Sum of individual OC3/STM1 and OC12/STM4 plus two times sum of OC48/STM16
needs to be less than or equal to 8.
3. OC48/STM16 or CBR2G5 can start on the ODU1 boundaries (time slots 1-1, 2-1, 3-1
or 4-1)
4. OC12/STM4 can start only on the 4 time slot boundary (1-1, 1-13, 1-25, 1-37, 2-1,
)
Each 11STMM10 encodes its port and time slot map and sends it in-band to the peer
11STMM10 pack to validate provisioning match. If port number, signal type, and time
slot provisioning on the two ends doesnt match, FEPORTMISMATCH alarm is declared.
If the user reconfigures client port allocation by deleting OC3/STM1 or OC12/STM4
services in order to configure OC48/STM16 service, there is a potential that internal
Pointer Processor resources will be fragmented (2 adjacent PP sections needed for
OC48/STM16 processing may not be available). 11STMM10 SW uses optimal algorithm
for assigning internal resources so that simple service provisioning (addition) never
causes this condition. However, deletion and reconfiguration of previously configured
services may in some cases exhibit this behavior. If internal PP resources are not available
for OC48/STM16 service, provisioning will be denied. To avoid this condition the user
can either retrieve available PP sections (show resource command) prior to re-configuring
the 11STMM10 to determine which OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4 ports need to be deleted
(to free up at least one pair of PP sections 1&2, 3&4, 5&6 or 7&8) or use transparent
OC48/STM16 option by provisioning CBR2G5 signal type (there is no PP section
allocation for CBR2G5 transport).
Note: For 11STMM10, a summary of resource allocation for Sonet/SDH or PCS can
be displayed in the WebUI by clicking on the Resources tab, selecting the Resource
Type, and clicking Retrieve.
As with all supported OTs, the 11STMM10 can be configured for different customer
applications. The following user provisioning is supported on C1-10 and L1 ports of the
11STMM10 OT:
Performance monitoring
Note: For 11STMM10 (10xAny ) card, SONET PM counters increment & LOF is
reported after enabling client Facility Loopback. (LOF/LOS by fault gets reported due
to loopback position. PM counters get incremented due to LOF/LOS reported by
fault.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-167
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
112PDM11 OT
The 112PDM11 is a high capacity Ethernet muxponder OT that supports Data Center
Interconnections. It can multiplex up to ten 10Gb/s Ethernet (10GE) client signals into an
OTU4 frame for transport to the network over an OTM-0.4v4 optical interface.
Although this transponder is generically called a 100G transponder, the OTU4 nominal
bit rate on the line interface is 111.809 Gb/s, with a bit rate tolerance of 20ppm. The
multiple client interfaces can all be provisioned to transport 10GE client signal types.
The 112PDM11 pack is implemented as a single slot wide pack, capable of operating at
any channel in the C-band 1830 PSS frequency grid. The pack can be equipped with up to
10 SFP+ pluggable modules on its client interfaces, and supports a 100G (4x28G) CFP on
the line side.
The 112PDM11 has one tunable transceiver CFP module in line side which has four
sub-port interfaces L1, L2, L3 and L4. An OTU4 facility is carried over four OTLC
physical ports, the first physical port in the OTLC group (L1) is designated to be the
index forfacility management of OTU4 and ODU4.
The first 10 client interfaces of the 112PDM11 (C1-C10) can be equipped with SFP+
pluggable modules and the last client interface can be equipped with an QSFP+ pluggable
module.
Bit synchronous mapping of a constant bit rate client signal into and from an OTU4
signal is supported
The 112PDM11 operates in ADD_DROP or REGEN modes.
ADD_DROP mode permits transport of client signals to the line side output.
REGEN mode puts the pack in regeneration mode, where the OTU4 line receive
signal is terminated, regenerated, and sent out the line transmit port. When used in
REGEN mode, the client interfaces are not used, and the SFP+ modules do not need
to be present.
Note: Due to thermal requirement, the PSS-32 shelf must be equipped with the
high-power fan (FAN32H) when an 112DPM11 card is installed in the shelf.
112SCA1/112SNA1 OT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-168
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line side optics can be tuned to any of the 88 wavelengths for 112SCA1 over the
extended C-band (Freq: 191.150 THz to 196.050 THz)
Supports Alcatel-Lucent Enhanced FEC (~9.2 dB coding gain at 1E-15 for ~7-%
overhead)
Wave tracker supports optical power auto-management. User configurable option
to disable the WT for the interoperability application with other systems without
WT
112SCX10/112SNX10/130SCX10 OT
Three versions of the 100G Mux OT are supported: 112SCX10, 112SNX10, and
130SCX10. The 112SCX10/112SNX10 OT is a three-slot-wide (130SCX10 is two-slot
wide) full-height pack, that supports multiplexing of up to ten 10G client signals into one
OTU4 line interface. The 112SCX10/112SNX10/130SCX10 OT supports one line
interface (non-pluggable) and ten client interfaces with XFP modules (B&W, CWDM).
The line side optics of the 112SCX10/112SNX10/130SCX10 OT can be tuned to 99
channels in the C-band. Each port has a dedicated port status LED.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-169
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 112SCX10, 112SNX10, and 130SCX10 operate in the optical C band with other
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32/PSS-36 OTs.
The 112SCX10 OTs use Polarization Division Multiplexing NRZ Quadrature Phase Shift
Keying (PDM NRZ QPSK) pulse format on the line interface. A line side coherent
receiver, combined with a digital signal processor (DSP), provides compensation of linear
transmission impairments (chromatic dispersion, PMD) and reduction of intra-channel
non-linear transmission impairments (Self Phase Modulation (SPM) and non-linear phase
noise). The 112SNX10 OT is identical to the 112SCX10 OT, except that the 112SNX10
OT has enhanced OSNR performance.
For the 130SCX10, FEC type = SDFEC is supported
The 112SCX10, 112SNX10, and 130SCX10 OT supports the following functional
features:
The line side optics can be tuned to any of the 88 wavelengths for 112SCX10 over
the extended C-band (Freq: 191.150 THz to 196.050 THz)
Support Alcatel-Lucent Enhanced FEC (~9.2 dB coding gain at 1E-15 for ~7-%
overhead)
Wave tracker supporting optical power auto-management. User configurable
option to disable the WT for the interoperability application with other systems
without WT
Client side supports the following features:
The mother board supports four key functions: client access, client signal processing,
control architecture, and power supply. Client access is through the ten XFP modules (B
& W and CWDM). Short, long, and extended reach XFP modules are supported. Client
signal processing includes: Status, Alarms, PM, FEC, and pre-mapping of the client signal
into p-ODTU24.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-170
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 43SCA1 OT supports one client port and one, single OTU3 line interface. This pack
is referred to as a 40G Add/Drop or more simply 40G A/D OT. Like the 43SCX4 OT
(see below), the 43SCA1 OT uses a pulse format with Polarization Division Multiplexing
NRZ Binary Phase Shift Keying (PDM NRZ BPSK) on the line interface. It has a line
side coherent receiver, combined with a digital signal processor (DSP), that provide
compensation for linear transmission impairments (chromatic dispersion, PMD) and
reduction of intra-channel non-linear transmission impairments (Self Phase Modulation
(SPM) and non-linear phase noise). The line side optics of the 43SCA1 OT can be tuned
to any of the 99 wavelengths in the extended C-band.
The following client signal types are supported:
OC-768/STM-256
OTU3
43SCX4/43SCX4E OT
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The client interfaces support XFP pluggable modules (B&W and CWDM). The following
client signal types are supported:
OC-192/STM64
10GBE (GFP-F, GFP-P, CBR11096, CBR11049)
OTU2 (10.709, 11.049, 11.096)
FC800
43SCGE1 OT
The 43SCGE1 is a 43G Single Port Tunable Coherent GBE Transponder (1 client).
The following client signal type is supported:
40GbE LAN
43STA1P OT
The 43STA1P is a 3-slot wide, full height 43G Single Port Tunable Anyrate Add/Drop
Transponder. It contains transmit and receive optics as well as multiplexer, driver,
clock/data recovery, demultiplexer, and control functionality.
The 43STA1P accepts a single OC-768/STM-256 client signal and an OTU3 Line
interface with full-band tunable optics. The line interface can be used to select any one of
88 channels (50 GHz spacing). Channel frequency can be provisioned automatically or
manually.
The following signals are supported on the line side:
OTU3
OTU3
OC-768/STM-256
43STX4 OT
The 43STX4 OT is a three slot wide, full height OT that accepts up to four bi-directional
sub-43G client signals and multiplexes them into the 43G DWDM line signal. The
module has XFP pluggable modules on the client interface ports, and uses LC type optical
connectors on all interfaces.
The following client signals are supported:
OC192/STM64
OTU2
10GbE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-172
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Up to 4 independent client signals can be multiplexed and sent out on the line side. Any
combination of client signals is supported. On the line side, the 43STX4 OT supports
full-band tunable optics, capable of supporting all 44 even channels (100GHz spacing).
The frequency of the channel can be provisioned manually or automatically.
43STX4P OT
The 43STX4P transponder accepts up to four bi-directional sub-43G client signals and
multiplexes them into the 43G DWDM line signal. The module has XFP pluggable
modules on the client interface ports, and uses LC type optical connectors on all
interfaces.
The following client signals are supported:
OC192/STM64
OTU2
10GbE
Up to four independent client signals can be multiplexed and sent out on the line side.
Any combination of client signals is supported.
On the line side, the 43STX4P OT supports full band tunable line side optics, capable of
supporting 44 even channels (at 100GHz spacing). The frequency of the channel can be
provisioned manually or automatically. It also supports eVOA management and WT
encoding functions.
MVAC/MVAC8B
The Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC/MVAC8B) contains an array of eight fast
optical VOA and WaveTracker encoders to condition alien wavelengths to pass through
the TOADM system.
The MVAC supports unidirectional (single-strand) connections to and from its ports. The
MVAC8B supports bidirectional connections to and from its ports.The alien wavelength
passes through the MVAC/MVAC8B when added to the network for Wavelength Tracker
encoding and monitoring. When the wavelength is dropped from the network, it does not
go through the MVAC.
The MVAC is a half-height module and the MVAC8B is a full-height module. These can
be configured in any of the universal slots in the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S shelves.
MVAC ports do not support bidirectional connections. MVAC8B do support bidirectional
connections.
SVAC
The single port variable attenuation card is used as a bridge by the compatible wavelength
transponders into Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16 DWDM domain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-173
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OT slot/card provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following are the basic functions provided by SVAC as demarcation and adaptation
for so-called alien (foreign wavelength) channel:
Channels +/- 50GHz from a 40G signal may not be used unless the 40G signal has passed
through an ITLB or a 50GhZ WSS (drop <or thru> direction of a CWR8-88). The
restrictions include the following:
1. If the 40G demand enters through a colorless port (CLS) on the CWR8-88, then the
NE will block 10G channels from being allowed on the adjacent (50GHz away)
channels for the same optical line as the 40G channel. This restriction applies to add,
mesh, and thru channels at this node only. The restriction is limited to the node at
which the 40G channel is added colorlessly. The remainder of the path is not restricted
until it possibly passes through a regeneration location. If the 40G channel is added
colorlessly at both ends, then the restriction occurs for the optical lines at each end of
the demand.
2. For 40G demands - there are no restrictions on neighbor channels 100GHz away.
3. If the 40G demand enters through a SFD44/ITLB/CWR8-88, then there is no
restriction on neighbor (50GHz away) channels.
4. If the 40G demand enters through a SFD44/CWR8 or through a colorless port (CLS)
on the CWR8, then the NE will block channels from being allowed on the adjacent
(50GHz away) channels for the length of the demand route in the network until after it
passes thru the 50GHz WSS on the CWR8-88, or passes thru an ITLB.
If the 40G demand makes a mesh connection from a CWR8 towards a CWR8-88 (it is
a mesh add channel at the CWR8-88), then the NE will block 10G channels from
being allowed on the adjacent (50GHz away) channels for the same CWR8-88 optical
line as the 40G channel. This restriction applies to add, mesh, and thru channels at this
node. There would be no restrictions further down the route until the next
regeneration location.
Note: The CWR8-88 end terminals must be co-located. The loss budgets are designed
for fiber jumper loss only between the NEs and not for intervening spans.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-174
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: For provisioning 2-slot height cards and 2-slot width cards, adjacent slots must
be empty.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an empty slot from the equipment tree for pre-provisioning of a card and select the
Provision/Info function.
Result: The Provision Card screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-175
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Provision Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision Card
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Provisioned Type
Type of card
Primary State
In Service
In Service, AINS
Out of Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-176
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
tab.
Note: The Primary State (PST) setting of specific cards can be provisioned from
this screen. A card cannot be placed Out of Service (OOS) if any ports on the card
are in service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The units displayed are dependent on the value of the system setting. If set
to Celsius, the attribute values are displayed in Celsius. If set to Fahrenheit, the
attribute values are displayed in Fahrenheit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-177
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
The WebUI supports retrieving and displaying all provisioned and equipped cards in the
NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-178
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Card Inventory
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Inventory
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Shelf
Slot
Status
Equipped
Provisioned
Card Type
Software Load
<0-20 chars>
Company ID
<0-4 chars>
Mnemonic
<0-8 chars>
The Alcatel-Lucent
mnemonic for the card.
CLEI
<0-10 chars>
<0-14 chars>
<0-14 chars>
Factory ID
<0-4 chars>
Serial Number
<0-16 chars>
Date
<0-6 chars>
Extra Data
<0-46 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-179
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
The WebUI retrieves and displays pluggable module inventory for all applicable cards in
the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-180
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Vendor
<0-16 chars>
Module Type
<0-8 chars>
CLEI
<0-10 chars>
<0-14 chars>
<0-14 chars>
Factory ID
<0-4 chars>
Serial Number
<0-18 chars>
Date
<0-6 chars>
Frequency
<0-4 chars>
Interchangeability Marking
<0-6 chars>
Acronym Code
<0-12 chars>
Extra Data
<0-46 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-181
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The active controller will deny any and all requests from CLI, WebUI and PhM
when a switchover is taking place.
The active controller will deny manual requests for a switchover when a backup
or restore is taking place.
The system will abort any backup or restore that is taking place if an automatic
switchover takes place.
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the controller from the equipment tree and select the Protection Switch tab.
Result: The Controller Protection Switch Settings screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To manually switch to the inactive controller select the Force Protection Switch option
and click Submit.
Note: A switch is not allowed if:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-182
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The WebUI displays a warning to the user indicating that the active and
standby controller will be rebooted and all users will be logged off. The user will be
allowed to continue with the request or cancel. Upon continuing with the request, the
WebUI will logout the user.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-183
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Protection Setting
Active
Inactive
Unequipped
Unknown
Standby Controller Ready to
Protect
Yes
(checkbox)
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-184
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to upgrade EC (in-service upgrade from simplex to duplex).
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If another pack needs to be upgraded, place it in slot 1 and perform the
procedure again.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-185
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the card from the equipment tree and select the Reboot tab.
Result: The Reboot Options screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-186
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional Info
Warm Reboot
Cold Reboot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-187
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the card from the equipment tree and select the Delete tab.
Result: The Delete Card screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-188
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Delete Card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete Card
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Provisioned Type
Primary State
In Service - Normal
In Service - Abnormal
Out of Service - Autonomous
Out of Service - Management
Out of Service - Auto and
Management
Secondary State
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-189
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port/facility provisioning
Port/facility states
IS, IS-NR to indicate In_Service, Normal state. The entity is capable and allowed to
provide its provisioned functions. (IS and IS-NR are used interchangeably.)
IS-ANR to indicate In_Service_Abnormal state. The entity is capable of most
functions, is allowed to provide its provisioned functions, but is operating in a
degraded or abnormal state (e.g., non-alarmed BER Signal Degrade threshold
crossing on an OCn or STS).
OOS-AU to indicate Out_Of_Service-Autonomous state. The entity is not available
for providing its provisioned functions but the entity is not intentionally suspended by
external management command (from an OS or craft interface) from performing these
functions. In general, the cause of the incapability is due to an unsolicited autonomous
event detected in the system or in the associated network (e.g., LOS detected).
OOS-AUMA to indicate Out_Of_Service-Autonomous_and_Management state. The
entity is not available for providing its provisioned functions because an OOS-AU
state transition has occurred and the entity is intentionally suspended by external
management command (from an OS or craft interface) from performing its
provisioned functions.
OOS-MA to indicate Out_Of_Service-Management state. The entity is intentionally
suspended by external management command (from an OS or craft interface) from
performing its provisioned functions, but the entity may still be operationally capable
of performing its provisioned functions.
AINS to indicate Automatic In-Service state. The facility is in a delay transition (to
IS) state. The transition to IS is pending on the correction of off-normal conditions on
the facility (such as FAF for termination point). Alarms will not be generated if AINS
is present. Once the off-normal conditions are cleared, the facility will transition to IS
according to the autonomous rules of the OOS-AU state. When using the ENT
command to provision an entity, if the requested state in the command is IS and the
required resource is not present (such as circuit pack is not present for the equipment
or valid signal is not present for the termination point), then the entity will enter the
OOS-AU state and alarms will be generated. However, if the AINS value is also
present in the SST field in the ENT command, then no alarms will be generated.
FAF to indicate Facility Failure state. The associated facility entity has failed, (e.g.,
LOS, LOF condition).
FLT applies to ports with pluggable modules and indicates pluggable module failure,
mismatch or module missing condition.
MT to indicate when a port is in maintenance. It generates traffic and monitors for
faults, but it only generates non-reported conditions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-190
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SGEO to indicate Supporting Entity Outage. The associated supporting entity has
failed or is out-of-service due to management action (OOS-MA or OOS-AUMA).
UAS to indicate Unassigned. The entity has not been assigned with the necessary
provisioning data. No service activity or maintenance activity (including monitoring,
testing, or service recovery) is permitted in this state since the necessary data has not
been assigned.
The NE allows the client port object entity to be created and provisioned. Attribute
values identified as default are set initially unless they are explicitly defined in the
provisioning command.
The NE allows a modification of the provisioned parameters of a port object entity.
The NE allows deprovisioning of a provisioned port entity.
The NE allows retrieving the provisioned parameters and the state of a port object
entity.
The states of the C1 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port states
are supported:
The user can provision the 11STAR1 OT for the following client signal types:
10GbE LAN
8G Fibre Channel (FC800) - 11STAR1A only
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-191
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OC-192
STM-64
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STAR1 C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to 10GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
encmode
errfrmdrop
Errored Frame Drop Mode. This attribute, when enabled, will discard
all received errored frames. Select either:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-192
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
10GB-ZR
10GB-SR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STAR1A C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to FC800:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-193
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
X8FCLC-L
X8FCSN-I
Default: Auto
encmode
losprop
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STAR1 C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to FC1200:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-194
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
10GB-SR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2C
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STAR1 C1 interface when the
provisioned signal type is either OC-192, STM-64, or 10GbE WAN PHY:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
J0_ex
Expected J0. Configure expected J0. Enter a value that depends on the
J0 format selected (1-byte or 16-byte):
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-195
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
J0_fmt
trccmp
moduletype
losprop
sdth
Attribute Definition
J0 format Configure the J0 format. Select from one of the following:
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
sfth
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-196
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STAR1 C1 interface when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
channeltx
fectype
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
gccstat
gcctype
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-197
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
ospf helloint
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable.
Default: NUL ()
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-198
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf md5keyid
Attribute Definition
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
mtu
oturate
OTU rate Specifies the client OTM0.2 rate. Enter one of the following
values:
11.049 (Gb/s)
11.096 (Gb/s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-199
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STAR1 C1 interface when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-200
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the frequency of the tunable transponder.
Enter one of the following: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580,
9575, 9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525,
9520, 9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470,
9465, 9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360,
9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305,
9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250,
9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9215, 9200, 9195,
9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170}
fectype
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
RegenResp
Default: LaserOn
gccstat
gcctype
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-201
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf helloint
Attribute Definition
HELLO INTERVAL of the OSPF interface. By default, the interface is
set to 10 seconds. This is the time elapsed before the next HELLO
PDU is sent.
Range: 1-65535
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable.
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
mtu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-202
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Attribute Definition
ODU2 Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the OT
will take a consequent action or pass the received signal. Enter one of
the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-203
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The states of the C1-10 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
The user can provision the 11STMM10 OT for the following client signal types:
OTU1
GbE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-204
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OC3
STM1
OC12
STM4
OC48
STM16
CBR2G5
FC100
FC200
FC400
For each of the above client signal types, the user can provision different attributes as
described in the following subsections.
GbE client port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STMM10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to GbE :
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
encmode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-205
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
losprop
moduletype
timeslot
[line | vts]
Description
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
Specifies the time slot on the line port and on the ODU1. Enter this
keyword followed by the following:
Enter the keyword line to specify the ODU1 on the line port,
followed by a value from the following range:
{0-4}
Enter the keyword vts to specify the time slot of the ODU1,
followed by a value from the following range:
Range: {0 or 1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,25,28,31,34,37,40,43,46}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-206
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STMM10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to CBR2G5 :
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the wavelength of a pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
sdth
sfth
jo
Default: 10-6
Default: 10-3
Configure J0 attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-207
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
losprop
mappingmode
moduletype
timeslot
[odu1 | vts]
Description
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
Specifies the type of mapping of the CBR2g5 signal into the ODU1
structure
bitsync (default)
async
Specifies the time slot on the line port. Both odu1 and vts must be
entered at the same time. Enter this keyword followed by the
following:
Enter the keyword odu1 to specify the ODU1 tributary within the
line port, followed by a value from the following range: {0-4}
Enter the keyword vts to specify the STS3c time slot within the
ODU1, followed by a value from the following range: {0 or 1, 4,
7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 37, 40, 43, 46}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-208
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STMM10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to OC3/OC12/OC48 and STM1/STM4/STM16 :
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the wavelength of a pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
sdth
sfth
Default: 10-6
Default: 10-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-209
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
jo
losprop
Description
Configure J0 attributes:
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-210
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
moduletype
timeslot
[line | vts]
Description
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
Specifies the time slot on the line port and on the ODU1. Enter this
keyword followed by the following:
Enter the keyword line to specify the time slot on the line port,
followed by a value from the following range:
{0-4}
Enter the keyword vts to specify the time slot of the ODU1,
followed by a value from the following range:
For OC-3 or STM1clients:
Range: {0 or 1,4,7,10,13,16,19,22,25,28,31,34,37,40,43,46}
For OC-12 or STM4 clients:
Range: {0,1,13,25,37}
For OC-48 or STM16 client:
Range: {0 or 1}
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The 11STMM10 muxponder uses GFP-T encoding to transfer all traffic
generated by the FC equipment to the remote end of the circuit. GFP-T encoding
requires valid FC fill words in the FC signal used. (See paragraph at the end related to
FC test sets). The 11STMM10 does not provide buffer credit management and expects
the attached FC switches to be provisioned to handle all buffer credits over the
extended distance. For Brocade, best practice is to use the long distance LS mode.
11STMM10 1G/2G/4G FC doesnt support long distance LD mode.
Use of the 1830 11STMM10 is to extend an inter-switch link (ISL) over the DWDM
network. The expectation is the attached ports in the FC switch are provisioned to
G-port in Brocade systems and E-ports in Cisco Systems and have their speeds locked
to the rate to be used: i.e., the default auto-negotiation (AN) for speeds should not be
used- hard set to 4G, 2G or 1G should be used instead. Brocade licensing for distance
extension and calculation and provisioning of buffering should be coordinated with
local Brocade network engineering.
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STMM10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to 1, 2 or 4 Gb/s Fiber channel:
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the wavelength of a pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
fcmode
losprop
fc (default)
ficon
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-212
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
moduletype
timeslot
[odu1 | vts]
Description
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
Specifies the time slot on the line port. Both odu1 and vts must be
entered at the same time. Enter this keyword followed by the
following:
Enter the keyword odu1 to specify the ODU1 tributary within the
line port, followed by a value from the following range: {0-4}
Enter the keyword vts to specify the STS3c time slot within the
ODU1, followed by a value from the following range: {0 or 1, 4,
7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 37, 40, 43, 46}
Note: Port channel is either not set or typically set to 850. Assure that the right
multimode jumpers are used if 850nm is used and single mode fibers are used for
CWDM and 1310 and 1550 lasers.
Losprop shall be laserOff for interoperability with Brocade and Cisco FC Switches.
Other options shall be left to default. Brocade and Cisco FC switches need to be
provisioned port to specific line rate (4G, 2g or 1G) instead of using the
auto-negotiation speed option. Make sure FC switches are properly configured to use
the 1830 link as an ISL. Typically, an E-port and fabric switch provisioning and FC
buffer credit provisioning necessary for using 1830 in a FC transport application
across a distance.
Most common moduletype used is the 4FCSN-I for FC400.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-213
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure the receiver powers are between the optical overload and the minimum
receiver sensitivity.
Timeslot needs to be set for 24 separate vts for FC400, and 12 separate vts for FC200
and 6 separate vts for FC100.
If Timeslot is set to numbers less than required, errored behavior or dropped frames
will occur- potentially without being reported.
The 11STMM10 is designed to transport valid FC fill word ordered sets (such as
IDLEs and ARBs) and valid FC frames as defined in INCITS T11 FC-FS-2. Many FC
test sets have several modes that do not comply with the fill word requirement. The
11STMM10 is NOT designed to transport FC signals that do not contain some fill
words because the 11STMM10 rate adapts to the different clocks at the FC switches
at both ends and will add or remove fill words as necessary to compensate for the
differences in clocks at both ends. Without opportunities for rate adaptation, internal
buffering will underflow or overflow and cause errors.
Provisioning the 11STMM10 to 4GFC transports can also be used to transport 4G
FICON. (also true at 2G and 1G rates).
FICON and FC are only differentiated at layer 4 and above of the protocol stack. The
11STMM10 pack only gets involved in layer 2 and below and therefore support
FICON and FC equally well when provisioned for FC.
OTU1 client port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STMM10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU1:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
channeltx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-214
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward Error Correction Type. Enter one of the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
Note: When interconnecting MSC and 11STMM10, the only
configuration supported is NOFEC. GCC termination on 10xANY
when FEC is enabled is not supported.
gccstat
ospf helloint
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-215
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf md5status
Attribute Definition
mtu
moduletype
losprop
SI-16.1
SL-16.1
SL-16.2
SL-16.2C
SS-16.1A
SS-16.2C
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-216
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf area
Attribute Definition
Specifies the area ID for the GCC0 channel. A valid area identifier
consists of four integer values separated by periods, for example
0.0.0.5. The specified area must have been previously configured on
the NE at the system-level.
Default: 0.0.0.0
timeslot [odu1
odu1_trib vts vts]
tti
Specifies the time slot on the line port. Both odu1 and vts must be
entered at the same time. Enter this keyword followed by the
following:
Enter the keyword odu1 to specify the ODU1 tributary within the
line port, followed by a value from the following range: {0-4}
Enter the keyword vts to specify the STS3c time slot within the
ODU1, followed by a value from the following range: {0 or 1, 4,
7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, 37, 40, 43, 46}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-217
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11STMM10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU1:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The line interface on the 11STMM10 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU2
and ODU2 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
OTU2 line port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the frequency of the tunable transponder.
Enter one of the following: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580,
9575, 9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525,
9520, 9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470,
9465, 9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360,
9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305,
9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250,
9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195,
9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-218
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward error correction mode. Specifies the type of forward error
correction on the interface port. Enter one of the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
tti
Note: The enhanced FEC allows the greatest span distances without regeneration, but
it does add the most delay to the transport of the signal. For the 11STM10 pack, an
end to end circuit using a total delay of 243, 235, and 231 microseconds for FC-100,
FC-200 and FC-400, respectively. Each 5 us of delay is equivalent to the delay in 1
km of fiber. These delays must be accounted for in the Fibre Channel switch buffer
credit calculation.
The EFEC with protection scheme is not allowed for deployments where the use of
RFEC is mandatory (I.e. EMC Distance Extension Solution).
The RSFEC allows for significant span distances without regeneration, and it has
greatly reduced delay to the transport of the signal. For the 11STM10 pack an end to
end circuit using a total delay of 101, 93, 89 microseconds for FC-100, FC-200 and
FC-400, respectively.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-219
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
tti
Attribute Definition
ODU2 Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the OT
will take a consequent action or pass the received signal. Enter one of
the following:
The states of the C1-C12 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-220
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
Description
Specifies the wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
autoneg
enabled
disabled (default)
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-221
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
moduletype
Description
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
The line interface on the 11STGE12 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU2
and ODU2 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
OTU2 line port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the frequency of the tunable transponder.
Enter one of the following: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580,
9575, 9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525,
9520, 9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470,
9465, 9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360,
9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305,
9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250,
9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195,
9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-222
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward error correction mode. Specifies the type of forward error
correction on the interface port. Enter one of the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
oturate
OTU rate. Specifies the line OTU2 rate. Enter one of the following
values:
Default: 11.096
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-223
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field within the ODU2
payload overhead. pldtype has a default value and is based on the
encoded client signal.
ptmmresp
tti
The states of the C1-C12, L1, L2, VA1, and VA2 ports are provisioned independently. The
following port states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-224
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
Note: For 11DPE12(E), the line-side laser is shut down if the port state is provisioned
to "down". The line-side laser is turned on if the port state is set to "up" or
"maintenance".
11DPE12(A/E) client port provisioning
Description
Specifies the wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
autoneg
enabled
disabled (default)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-225
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
ethmtu
Description
Specify the max transport unites on the specified port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. The range of the
value is 1518-9600 bytes.
Default: 9600
losprop
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to Link
pass through function (pass the Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of SYNC
(LSS) or other defect from the far-end client-facing receiver).
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
shutdownany turn off the transmitter when the client port any
flow has failure
shutdownall turn off the transmitter when the client port all
flows have failure
Default: disable
Note : this parameter can be provisioned only when the FlowCM is
CSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-226
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
moduletype
ssmtrans
Description
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-227
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Specifies the wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
losprop
moduletype
stpid
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-228
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Configure the C{1-12} client ports with the CE-VLAN ID map attributes on the
11DPE12(A/E) card. This command is only applicable when the card mode is set to
Subrate or QinQ mode.
Port Attribute
vts{1-10}
Description
Specifies the virtual time slot within the port.
The valid values are: vts1, vts2, vts3, vts4, vts5, vts6, vts7, vts8, vts9,
vts10.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-229
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
cmode
Description
Classification mode, it is used to differ classification mode in Q in Q
mode. The value of the cmode can be: SVLANID, CEVLANID, and
PORT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-230
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following OTU2 attributes are provisionable on the 11DPE12(A/E) L1,2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-231
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ethmtu
Attribute Definition
Specify the Ethernet max transport unites on the specified port. Enter
this keyword to display the current setting. The range of the value is
1518-9600 bytes.
Default: 9600
fectype
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
gccstat
gcctype
ospf helloint
ospf deadint
ospf metric
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-232
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf md5key
Attribute Definition
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable.
Default: NULL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
packettype
mtu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-233
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
oturate
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XL-64.2D
XL-64TU
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
OTU rate. Specifies the line OTU2 rate. Enter one of the following
values:
Default: 11.096
stpid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-234
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Holdofftimer
Specifies whether this port will use a hold-off timer to delay taking a
consequent action for line failure.
Default: Disabled
compatibilityMode
Default: defaultMode.
ODU2 line port provisioning
The following ODU2 attributes are provisionable on the 11DPE12(A/E) L1,2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
pldtype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field within the ODU2
payload overhead. pldtype has a default value and is based on the
encoded client signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-235
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
tti
Attribute Definition
ODU2 Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the OT
will take a consequent action or pass the received signal. Enter one of
the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-236
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following 10Gbe attributes are provisionable on the 11DPE12(A/E) L1,2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
Specify the Ethernet max transport unites on the specified port. Enter
this keyword to display the current setting. The range of the value is
1518-9600 bytes.
Default: 9600
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-237
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
stpid
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XL-64.2D
XL-64TU
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
Default: stpid1.
portRole
UNI
NNI
Default: NNI
pvid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-238
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
losprop
Attribute Definition
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
Default: laserOn
Note: this attribute can be provisioned is applicable only when the
portRole is UNI and FlowCM is APS/PCC or CCM.
lptca
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to Link
pass through function (pass the Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of SYNC
(LSS) or other defect from the far-end client-facing receiver ). Enter
this keyword to display the current setting. To change the setting, enter
this keyword followed by one of the following:
shutdownall-turn off the transmitter when the client port all flows
have failure
Default: disable
Note : this parameter can be provisioned only when the portRole is
UNI and the FlowCM is CSF.
Holdofftimer
Specifies whether this port will use a hold-off timer to delay taking a
consequent action for line failure.
Default: Disabled
VTS line port provisioning
Note: Configure the L{1-2} line ports with the classification mode map attributes in
Q in Q mode on the 11DPE12(A/E) card. This command is only applicable when the
card mode is set to QinQ mode.
Port Attribute
vts{1-100}
Description
Specifies the virtual time slot within the port.
The valid values are: vts{1-100}.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-239
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
cmode
Description
Classification mode, it is used to differ classification mode in Q in Q
mode. User must enter the keyword followed by specific cmode,
cmode_value and cmode_direction.
Note: In 11DPE12E, when we use the CCM mode for FlowCM (flow
continuity monitoring), the line port ingress VTS SVLAN ID and line
port egress VTS SVLAN ID should be same. So when the pack
FlowCM is set to CCM and the line ingress VTS#i entity COMDE
and line egress VTS#i entity COMDE are set as SVLAN tagged , the
line ingress VTS#i and line egress VTS#i entity SVLAN ID should be
same .
Note:
The VA port on the 11DPE12(A/E) OT supports the OCH attributes for the eVOA ports
(VA{1-2}) on the 11DPE12(A/E) card as defined in the following table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-240
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VA port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by the following:
Attribute Definition
Display the provisioned LAG information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-241
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
create
Attribute Definition
Create a LAG on the pack. Follow this keyword with the following:
lacp: Specify the LACP status, the value can be enable or disable.
When the LACP is enable, it means that the LACP function is
supported. When the LACP is disable , it means that the LACP is
not supported and the manual LAG configuration is supported .
(Default value is enable)
maxport: Specify the max ports that the LAG can support.
Value range: 1 to 4. (Default value is 4).
Mtu: Specify the max transport unite for the LAG ports.
Value range: 1518 to 9600. (Default value is 9600).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-242
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
Modify
Delete
Attribute Definition
Modify LAG parameter on the pack. Follow this keyword with the
following:
maxport: Specify the max ports that the LAG can support.
Value range: 1 to 4. (Default value is 4).
Mtu: Specify the max transport unite for the LAG ports.
Value range: 1518 to 9600. (Default value is 9600).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-243
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
add attachedport
<interface>
modify attachedport
<interface>
delete attachedport
<interface>
Attribute Definition
Attach physical ports to the LAG and set the lag port parameters ,
Follow this keyword with the following:
actadmstate: Specify the lag port actor admin state . Enter this
keyword followed by either of the following values:
Lacpactivity: the value can be active or passive (Active LACP
is encoded as a 1; Passive LACP is encoded as a 0). Default
value is active
Lacptimeout: the value can be short or long (Short Timeout is
encoded as a 1; Long Timeout is encoded as a 0). Default
value is short
Aggregation: the value can be only true (TRUE (encoded as a
1) indicates that the System considers this link to be
Aggregateable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation).
Modify the lag port parameters. Follow this keyword with the
following:
actadmstate: Specify the lag port actor admin state . Enter this
keyword followed by either of the following values:
Lacpactivity: the value can be active or passive (Active LACP
is encoded as a 1; Passive LACP is encoded as a 0). Default
value is active
Lacptimeout: the value can be short or long (Short Timeout is
encoded as a 1; Long Timeout is encoded as a 0). Default
value is short
Aggregation: the value can be only true (TRUE (encoded as a
1) indicates that the System considers this link to be
Aggregateable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-244
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The states of the C[1-12], L[1-2], and VA[1-2] ports are provisioned independently. The
following port states are supported:
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
The user can provision the 11DPM12 OT for the following client signal types:
1GbE
1GbE LOODUK
HDSDI
HDSDI LOODUK
OTU1
ODU1
Note: Once an OPTSG cross-connection between the client port and ODU1PTF is
created, the ODU1PTF timeslot will be visible.
Note: To regenerate the STM-1 within the 1830 network, it is recommended to
regenerate the STM-1 interface via the OTU1 Client Port-Client Port connection, or
via Line-Line Port Pass-thru ODU0/ODU1 connections to optimize jitter and
transmission performance.
If the STM-1 Client-Client configuration is needed, the total OPTSG cascading
number should be less than 30 and the number of STM-1 regenerations
(client-to-client connections) should be less than 11.
For each of the above client signal types, the user can provision different attributes as
described in the following subsections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-245
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is either OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 or STM-1, STM-4, STM-16:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
container
Select the container that will be used for client signal to ODU2
multiplexing structure.
Default: NULL
Note:
J0
looduk
mappingmode
Specify the mapping mode for constant bit rate client signals OC48
into OPUk .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-246
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
For OC-3:
SS-1.1
SL-1.1
SL-1.2
SL-16.2C
SS-16.1A
SS-16.2C
For OC-12
SS-4.1
SL-4.1
SL-4.2
SL-16.2C
SS-16.1A
SS-16.2C
For OC-48
losprop
SI-16.1
SL-16.1
SL-16.2
SL-16.2C
SS-16.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-247
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 / STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 LOODUK client port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is either OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 or STM-1, STM-4, STM-16
LOODUK. It is applicable only when the client container is ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex.
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
Attribute Definition
LO ODUk Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the
OT will take a consequent action or pass the received signal.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
state
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-248
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is HDSDI:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
container
Select the container that will be used for client HD-SDI to ODU2
multiplexing structure.
Default: NULL
looduk
moduletype
SS-16.1A
SS-16.2C
SL-16.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-249
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
losprop
Attribute Definition
Attribute that controls the status of the client-side transmitter during
signal failures on the line port, or when a far-end failure signal is
received on the line side. Enter one of the following:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is HDSDI LOODUK. It is applicable only when the client
container is ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex.
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
Attribute Definition
LO ODUk Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the
OT will take a consequent action or pass the received signal.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
state
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-250
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is 1GbE:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
Select the container that will be used for client HD-SDI to ODU2
multiplexing structure.
Default: NULL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-251
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
looduk
Attribute Definition
Configure client 1GbE ports LO ODUk attributes for ODU2
multiplexing structure.
Note: This entry is applicable only when user select ODU0 container
for the 1GbE port.
moduletype
losprop
1000B-LX
1000B-SX
1000B-T
1000B-ZX
SS-16.1A
SS-16.2C
SL-16.2C
GE-BX20U
GE-BX20D
GE-BX40U
GE-BX40D
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-252
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is 1GbE LOODUK:
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
Attribute Definition
LO ODUk Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the
OT will take a consequent action or pass the received signal.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
state
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-253
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is 3GSDI:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
Select the container that will be used for client HD-SDI to ODU2
multiplexing structure.
Default: none
looduk
moduletype
3GSDI-SH
3GSDI-MH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-254
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
losprop
Attribute Definition
Attribute that controls the status of the client-side transmitter during
signal failures on the line port, or when a far-end failure signal is
received on the line side. Enter one of the following:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is 3GSDI LOODUK:
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
Attribute Definition
LO ODUk Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the
OT will take a consequent action or pass the received signal.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
state
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-255
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is FC100, FC200, FC400:
Note: The 11DPM12 does not provide buffer credit management and expects the
attached FC switches to be provisioned to handle all buffer credits over the extended
distance. For Brocade, best practice is to use the long distance LS mode. 11DPM12
1G/2G/4G FC doesnt support long distance LD mode.
Use of the 1830 11DPM12 is to extend an inter-switch link (ISL) over the DWDM
network. The expectation is the attached ports in the FC switch are provisioned to
G-port in Brocade systems and E-ports in Cisco Systems and have their speeds locked
to the rate to be used: i.e., the default auto-negotiation (AN) for speeds should not be
used- hard set to 4G, 2G or 1G should be used instead. Brocade licensing for distance
extension and calculation and provisioning of buffering should be coordinated with
local Brocade network engineering.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-256
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
Select the container that will be used for client signal to ODU2
multiplexing structure.
Default: none
Note:
Allowable containers for FC100 are odu0.
Allowable containers for FC200 are odu1.
Allowable containers for FC400 are oduflex.
fcmode
fc
ficon
Default: fc
looduk
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-257
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
acceptable Client port moduletype values.
For FC-100:
2FCLC-L
2FCSN-I
4FCLC-L
4FCSN-I
SS-16.1A
For FC-200:
2FCLC-L
2FCSN-I
4FCLC-L
4FCSN-I
SS-16.1A
For FC-400:
losprop
4FCLC-L
4FCSN-I
Note: Port channel is either not set or typically set to 850. Assure that the right
multimode jumpers are used if 850nm is used and single mode fibers are used for
CWDM and 1310 and 1550 lasers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-258
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Losprop shall be laserOff for interoperability with Brocade and Cisco FC Switches.
Other options shall be left to default. Brocade and Cisco FC switches need to be
provisioned port to specific line rate (4G, 2g or 1G) instead of using the
auto-negotiation speed option. Make sure FC switches are properly configured to use
the 1830 link as an ISL. Typically, an E-port and fabric switch provisioning and FC
buffer credit provisioning necessary for using 1830 in a FC transport application
across a distance.
Most common moduletype used is the 4FCSN-I for FC400.
Make sure the receiver powers are between the optical overload and the minimum
receiver sensitivity.
Provisioning the 11DPM12 to 4GFC transports can also be used to transport 4G
FICON. (also true at 2G and 1G rates).
FICON and FC are only differentiated at layer 4 and above of the protocol stack. The
11DPM12 pack only gets involved in layer 2 and below and therefore support FICON
and FC equally well when provisioned for FC.
FC100, FC200, FC400 LOODUK client port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is FC100, FC200, FC400 LOODUK:
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
Attribute Definition
LO ODUk Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the
OT will take a consequent action or pass the received signal.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
state
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-259
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU1:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
channeltx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-260
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward Error Correction Type. Enter one of the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
gccstat
moduletype
mtu
SI-16.1
SL-16.1
SL-16.2
SL-16.2C
SS-16.2C
SS-16.1A
ospf helloint
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-261
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf deadint
Attribute Definition
DEAD INTERVAL of the OSPF interface. By default, the Interface is
set to four times the value of the HELLOINT, so the default is 40
seconds. The dead interval is a timer used to timeout inactive
adjacencies. The dead interval value must always be greater than the
hello interval value.
Range: 1-65535
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable.
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5status is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-262
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 C1-12 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU1:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-263
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The line interface on the 11DPM12 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU2,
ODU2, and ODU2 LOODUK {1-8} transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
OTU2 line port provisioning
The following OTU2 attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 L1,2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-264
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward error correction mode. Specifies the type of forward error
correction on the interface port. Enter one of the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
Note:
gccstat
ospf helloint
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-265
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf md5status
Attribute Definition
postfecber
prefecber
mtu
holdofftimer
Default: Disabled
It is recommended to set holdoff timer parameter to enable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-266
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
tti
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XL-64.2D
XL-64TU
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
Note: The enhanced FEC2 (EFEC2) allows the greatest span distances without
regeneration, but it does add the most delay to the transport of the signal. For the
11DPM12 pack, an end to end circuit using a total delay of 157, 154, and 153
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-267
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following ODU2 attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 L1,2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
exp_looduk
Attribute Definition
Modify the exptected LO ODUk structures of HO ODU2 attributes:
To modify LO ODUk of HO ODU2, users must enter a string
containing odukType#oduid-tsMap.
When multiple looduk is needed, users must use & to separate them.
When no string is provided, system will display all expected LO
ODUk of HO ODU2 attributes.
odukType Specifies the ODUk type. Following values are the valid
ODUkTypes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-268
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
pldtype
Attribute Definition
ODU2 Payload Type
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by a 2-digit hexadecimal value.
Must be the same on both ends.
Default: 0x21
Multiplexing between OCS and WDM
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-269
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tx_looduk
Attribute Definition
Modify the exptected LO ODUk structures of HO ODU2 attributes:
To modify LO ODUk of HO ODU2, users must enter a string
containing odukType#oduid-tsMap.
When multiple looduk is needed, users must use & to separate them.
When no string is provided, system will display all expected LO
ODUk of HO ODU2 attributes.
odukType Specifies the ODUk type. Following values are the valid
ODUkTypes.
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11DPM12 L1,2 interface: when the
provisioned signal type is ODU2 LOODUK {1-8}:
Provisionable
Attribute
state
Attribute Definition
Set the LO ODUK admin state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-270
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The VA port on the 11DPM12 OT supports the OCH attributes for the eVOA ports
(VA{1-2}) on the 11DPM12 card as defined in the following table.
VA port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by the following:
Default: auto
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-271
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The states of the C[1-4], L[1-4], and VA[1-4] ports are provisioned independently. The
following port states are supported:
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
Note: For 11QPA4/11QPEN4 the line-side laser is shut down if the port state is
provisioned to "down". The line-side laser is turned on if the port state is set to "up" or
"maintenance".
The user can provision the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 OT for the following client signal types:
10GbE
OTU2
FC-10G
FC-8G
For each of the above client signal types, the user can provision different attributes as
described in the following subsections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-272
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11QPA4 C1-4 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is either OC-192 or STM-64:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
J0
Configure J0 attributes.
j0_ex - Expected J0. Enter this keyword followed by either one of the
following:
Default: 16
trccmp - J0 trace compare. This keyword enables and disables the
comparison between the incoming J0 value and the provisioned (i.e.,
expected) value.
Default: disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-273
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
sdth
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
sfth
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-274
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
encmode
cbrlan11.049
cbrlan11.096
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-275
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
10GB-ZR
10GB-SR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-276
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
channeltx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the transmit channel frequency.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
fectype
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
gccstat
moduletype
losprop
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-277
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf helloint
Attribute Definition
HELLO INTERVAL of the OSPF interface. By default, the interface is
set to 10 seconds. This is the time elapsed before the next HELLO
PDU is sent.
Range: 1-65535
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
postfecber
prefecber
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-278
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
mtu
Attribute Definition
Maximum transmission unit. The default is 1473 Bytes.
Range: 576 - 1500
oturate
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-279
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Note: The 11QPA4 and 11QPEN4 transponder for 10GFC (FC-1200) uses constant
bit rate encoding to transfer all ordered set generated by the FC equipment to the
remote end of the circuit. The 11QPA4 does not provide buffer credit management
and expects the attached FC switches to be provisioned to handle all buffer credits
over the extended distanceBrocade licensing for distance extension and calculation
and provisioning of buffering should be coordinated with local Brocade network
engineering. For Brocade, best practice is to use the long distance LS mode. 11QPA4
and 11QPEN4 8G/10G FC do not support long distance LD mode.
Use of the 1830 11QPA4/11QPEN4 is to extend an inter-switch link (ISL) over the
DWDM network. The expectation is the attached ports in the FC switch are
provisioned to G-port in Brocade systems and E-ports in Cisco Systems and have
their speeds locked to the rate to be used: i.e., the default auto-negotiation (AN) for
speeds should not be used- hard set to 8G or 10G should be used instead.
Recommendation is to turn off Brocade Forward Error Correction (FEC) for ports that
support it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-280
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
encmode
cbrlan11.049
cbrlan11.096
Default: gfp-f
errfrmdrop
enabled
disabled
Default: disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-281
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
XI-64.1
10GB-SR
10GB-ZR
XS-64.2B
XS-64.2C
XL-64.2C
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
speeds should not be used- hard set to 8G or 10G should be used instead.
Recommendation is to turn off Brocade Forward Error Correction (FEC) for ports that
support it.
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
moduletype
encmode
B&W: {1310}
X8FCLC-L
X8FCSN-I
losprop
Note: The following apply for using 1830 PSS 11QPA4 and 11QPEN4 with 8G
(FC-800) Fibre Channel Switches:
Port channel is either not set or typically set to 1310. Assure that the right single mode
jumpers are used.
Make sure the receiver powers are between the optical overload and the minimum
receiver sensitivity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-283
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Losprop will be laserOff for interoperability with 1,2,4,8G Brocade and 1,2,4,8,10G
Cisco FC Switches. Losprop will be laserOn for interoperability with 10G Brocade
FC Switches. Other options will be left to default. Brocade and Cisco FC switches
need to be provisioned port to specific line rate (8G) instead of using the
auto-negotiation speed option. Make sure FC switches are properly configured to use
the 1830 link as an ISL. Typically, an E-port and fabric switch provisioning and FC
buffer credit provisioning necessary for using 1830 in a FC transport application
across a distance.
The 11QPA4/11QPEN4 at 8GFC is designed to transport valid FC fill word ordered
sets (such as IDLEs and ARBs) and valid FC frames as defined in INCITS T11
FC-FS-2. Many FC test sets have several modes that do not comply with the fill word
requirement. The 11QPA4/11QPEN4 at 8GFC is NOT designed to transport FC
signals that do not contain some fill words because the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 rate
adapts to the different clocks at the FC switches at both ends and will add or remove
fill words as necessary to compensate for the differences in clocks at both ends.
Without opportunities for rate adaptation, internal buffering will underflow or
overflow and cause errors.
Provisioning the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 to 8GFC/10GFC transports can also be used to
transport 8G/10G FICON.
FICON and FC are only differentiated at layer 4 and above of the protocol stack. The
11QPA4 /11QPEN4 pack only gets involved in layer 2 and below and therefore
support FICON and FC equally well when provisioned for FC.
11QPA4/11QPEN4 line port provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-284
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Not settable for internal topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
DWDM frequencies: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575,
9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520,
9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410,
9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355,
9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300,
9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245,
9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190,
9185, 9180, 9175, 9170}
channeltx
gccstat
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-285
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
oprmode
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
XL-64.2C
XL-64.2D
XL-64TU
XS-64.2C
X8FCLC-L
Default: ADDDROP
ospf helloint
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-286
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
Attribute Definition
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
postfecber
prefecber
mtu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-287
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward error correction mode. Specifies the type of forward error
correction on the interface port:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
oturate
OTU rate Specifies the client OTM0.2 rate. Enter one of the following
values:
11.049 (Gb/s)
11.096 (Gb/s)
Note: this parameter is provisionable only when the line side oprmode
is CROSSREGEN.
tti
CrossRegPartner
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-288
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
multicastfrom
Attribute Definition
Display the multicastfrom information when oprmode is addonly.
Value: C{1-4}, None
Note: when oprmode is not addonly, this field displays as none.
Note: The following apply for using 1830 PSS 11QPA4 and 11QPEN4 with 8G
(FC-800) Fibre Channel Switches:
The EFEC2 allows the greatest span distances without regeneration, but it does add
the most delay to the transport of the signal. For the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 pack, an end
to end circuit uses a total delay of approximately 157 microseconds for FC-800. Each
5 us of delay is equivalent to the delay in 1 km of fiber. This delay is in addition to the
delay on the fiber between the DWDM systems and must be accounted for in the
Fibre Channel switch buffer credit calculation. EFEC provides long span distances but
will lower latency than EFEC2. For the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 pack, an end to end
circuit, EFEC uses a total delay of approximately 59 microseconds for FC-800.
The RSFEC allows for significant span distances without regeneration, and it has
greatly reduced delay to the transport of the signal as compared to EFEC2 or EFEC.
For the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 pack, an end to end circuit, RSFEC uses a total delay of
approximately 15.5 microseconds for FC-800. Only RSFEC is qualified for use with
IBM IB DDR applications.
Note: For IBM IB DDR port channel is either not set or typically set to 1310. Use
XFP X8FCLC-L. Assure that the right single mode jumpers are used.
Make sure the receiver powers are between the optical overload and the minimum
receiver sensitivity.
Losprop should be laserOff for interoperability with IBM IB DDR. Other options
should be left to default.
The supported PSIFB DDR configuration with IBM does not use any 1830 protection
schemes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-289
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pldtype
Attribute Definition
ODUkp to CBRx mapping mode. This attribute specifies the mappng
mode that wil be used when the client port signal is provisioned to
OC-192, STM-64 or 10GbE WAN.
ptmmresp
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-290
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following encryption attributes are provisionable only on the 11QPEN4 L1-4
interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
Attribute Definition
display
next Key
Specifies a next encryption key for the interface port. Enter this
keyword followed by string of 64 Hexadecimal digits, or enter this
keyword without any parameters to display the date/time of when the
nextkey was set.
wkat
encryptstate
switchkey
Note:
The VA port on the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 OT supports the OCH attributes for the eVOA
ports (VA{1-4}) on the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 card as defined in the following table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-291
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VA port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by the following:
Default: auto
The states of the C[1-22], X[1-4], and VA[1-4] ports are provisioned independently. The
following port states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-292
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can provision the 11QPE24 OT for the following client signal types:
1GbE
FE
10GbE
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11QPE24 C1-22 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is 1GbE:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
1000B-LX
1000B-SX
1000B-T
1000B-T2
1000B-ZX
SL-16.2C
SS-16.1A
SS-16.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-293
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ssmtrans
Attribute Definition
Manually configure SSM/Quality Level Transmission in each port.
The value can be:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11QPE24 C1-22 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is FE:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
100BLX10
1000B-T2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-294
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ssmtrans
Attribute Definition
Manually configure SSM/Quality Level Transmission in each port.
The value can be:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11QPE24 X(1-4) interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is TENGIGE:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-295
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
channeltx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the transmit channel frequency.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
moduletype
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XL-64.2D
XL-64TU
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
10GB-SR
Default: auto
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-296
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ssmtrans
Attribute Definition
Manually configure SSM/Quality Level Transmission in each port.
The value can be:
The line interface on the 11QPE24 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU2
and ODU2 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
ODU2 line port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11QPE24 X(1-4) interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is ODU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
pldtype [value]
Attribute Definition
Configure the value of Payload Type Field within the ODU2 payload
overhead. pldtype has a default value and is based on the signal rate:
0x85 for oturate 11.096, 0x84 for oturate 11.049
Range: 0-255
ptmmresp
Default: disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-297
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-298
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 11QPE24 X(1-4) interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
channeltx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-299
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward error correction mode. Specifies the type of forward error
correction on the interface port:
Default: efec2
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
gccstat
Default: disabled
gcctype
moduletype
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XL-64.2D
XL-64TU
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
Default: auto
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-300
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf helloint
Attribute Definition
HELLO INTERVAL of the OSPF interface. By default, the interface is
set to 10 seconds. This is the time elapsed before the next HELLO
PDU is sent.
Range: 1-65535
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
The key used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5status is enable.
Default: NULL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
oturate
Default: 11.096
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-301
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ssmtrans
Attribute Definition
Manually configure SSM/Quality Level Transmission in each port.
The value can be:
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-302
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by the following:
Default: auto
The states of the C(1-10) and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
The user can provision the 112PDM11 OT for the following client signal types:
tengige
For each of the above client signal types, the user can provision different attributes as
described in the following subsections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-303
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112PDM11 C(1-10) interface when the
signal type is provisioned to tengige:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected wavelength of the pluggable module. Enter this
keyword to display the current setting. To change the setting, enter this
keyword followed by one of the following values:
CWDM: {1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, 1611}
B&W: {850, 1310, 1550}
Not set: None
moduletype
losprop
S10GB-LR
S10GB-SR
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-304
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Not settable for internal topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values::
DWDM frequencies: {9570, 9560, 9550, 9540, 9530, 9520, 9510,
9500, 9490, 9480, 9470, 9460, 9450, 9440, 9430, 9420, 9410, 9400,
9390, 9380, 9370, 9360, 9350, 9340, 9330, 9320, 9310, 9300, 9290,
9280, 9270, 9260, 9250, 9240, 9230, 9220, 9210, 9200, 9190, 9180,
9170, 9575, 9565, 9555, 9545, 9535, 9525, 9515, 9505, 9495, 9485,
9475, 9465, 9455, 9445, 9435, 9425, 9415, 9405, 9395, 9385, 9375,
9365, 9355, 9345, 9335, 9325, 9315, 9305, 9295, 9285, 9275, 9265,
9255, 9245, 9235, 9225, 9215, 9205, 9195, 9185, 9175}
Channeltx
dtvcontrol
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-305
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
gccstat
Attribute Definition
Specifies the status of GCC0 signal processing.
- Set to enabled to enable GCC0 processing.
- Set to disabled to disable GCC0 processing.
Default: disabled
holdofftimer
Mtu
ospf helloint
ospf deadint
ospf metric
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable.
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-306
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf md5status
Attribute Definition
Set to enable - The MD5 authentication is activated on the OSPF area.
Set to disable - The MD5 authentication is not required on the OSPF
area
This parameter can be set to enable only if a md5key and md5keyid
have been set.
Default: disable
The states of the C1 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port states
are supported:
The user can provision the 112SCA1 OT for the following client signal types:
100GbE
OTU4
ODU4
For each of the above client signal types, the user can provision different attributes as
described in the following subsections.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-307
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCA1 C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to 100GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
errfrmdrop
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Specifies whether inbound error frames are discarded or passed. This
attribute is only meaningful for GFP transport modes. Enter this
keyword followed by either of the following values:
C113G4C
C113G10C
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-308
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCA1 C1 interface when the
provisioned client signal type is ODU4:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCA1 C1 interface when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU4:
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward Error Correction Type. Enter one of the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
moduletype
C113G4C
C113G10C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-309
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
losprop
Attribute Definition
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
Note: When the client losprop is set to laserOff and the ODU4 AIS is
detected at line RX port, the client laser will be shut off.
tti
The line interface on the 112SCA1 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU4
and ODU4 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-310
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Not settable for internal topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
DWDM frequencies: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575,
9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520,
9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410,
9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355,
9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300,
9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245,
9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190,
9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165, 9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135,
9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
fectype
Operation Mode. Specifies the mode of the pack. Enter this keyword
followed by one of the following values:
add_drop
regen
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-311
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field of a Payload Structure
Identifier in the OTUk frame. pldtype has a default value and is based
on the encoded client signal. This attribute only applies when the
client signal is not an OTM0.2 signal.
Default: 20
ptmmresp
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-312
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The user can provision the 112SNA1 OT for the following client signal types:
100GbE
OTU4
ODU4
For each of the above client signal types, the user can provision different attributes as
described in the following subsections.
100GbE LAN client port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNA1 C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to 100GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
errfrmdrop
Attribute Definition
Specifies whether inbound error frames are discarded or passed. This
attribute is only meaningful for GFP transport modes. Enter this
keyword followed by either of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-313
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
C113G10C (10x10G)
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter one of the following:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNA1 C1 interface when the
provisioned client signal type is ODU4:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-314
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNA1 C1 interface when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU4:
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward Error Correction Type. Enter one of the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
moduletype
losprop
C113G4C
C113G10C
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
Note: When the client losprop is set to laserOff and the ODU4 AIS is
detected at line RX port, the client laser will be shut off.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-315
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The line interface on the 112SNA1 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU4
and ODU4 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-316
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Not settable for internal topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
DWDM frequencies: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575,
9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520,
9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410,
9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355,
9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300,
9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245,
9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190,
9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165, 9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135,
9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
channelrx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-317
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward error correction mode. Specifies the type of forward error
correction on the interface port.
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field of a Payload Structure
Identifier in the OTUk frame. pldtype has a default value and is based
on the encoded client signal. This attribute only applies when the
client signal is not an OTM0.2 signal.
Default: 20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-318
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
tti
Attribute Definition
ODU2 Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the OT
will take a consequent action or pass the received signal. Enter one of
the following:
The states of the C1-10 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-319
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
The user can provision the 112SCX10 OT for the following client signal types:
10GbE LAN
OTU2
ODU2
OC-192
STM-64
FC800
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to 10GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-320
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
encmode
errfrmdrop
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Encapsulation mode. This attribute is used to provision the
encapsulation mode used to map the 10GbE LAN signal. Select from
one of the following:
Errored Frame Drop Mode. This attribute, when enabled, will discard
all received errored frames. Select either:
10GB-ZR
10GB-SR
L-64.2
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-321
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is either OC-192 or STM-64:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
J0_ex
J0_fmt
trccmp
moduletype
Expected J0. Configure expected J0. Enter a value that depends on the
J0 format selected (1-byte or 16-byte):
10GB-ZR
10GB-SR
L-64.2
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-322
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
losprop
mappingmode
Attribute Definition
Attribute that controls the status of the client-side transmitter during
signal failures on the line port, or when a far-end failure signal is
received on the line side. Enter one of the following:
sfth
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-323
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward Error Correction Type. Enter one of the following values:
Note: The 100G MUX OTs support the following FECTYPES on the
client interfaces: RSFEC, NOFEC, EFEC, and EFEC2.
Note: In 100G packs, the corrected counts can increase incrementally
due to preFec errors. This is normal behavior for 100G packs.
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
moduletype
losprop
oturate
10GB-ZR
10GB-SR
L-64.2
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
OTU rate Specifies the client OTM0.2 rate. Enter one of the following
values:
11.049 (Gb/s)
11.096 (Gb/s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-324
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-325
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to FC800:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
moduletype
X8FCLC-L
X8FCSN-I
Default: Auto
losprop
The line interface on the 112SCX10 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU4
and ODU4 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-326
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Not settable for internal topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
DWDM frequencies: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575,
9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520,
9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410,
9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355,
9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300,
9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245,
9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190,
9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165, 9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135,
9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
channeltx
fectype
Note: The 100G MUX OTs support the following FECTYPES on the
client interfaces: RSFEC, NOFEC, EFEC, and EFEC2.
Note: In 100G packs, the corrected counts can increase incrementally
due to preFec errors. This is normal behavior for 100G packs.
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
oprmode
Operation Mode. Specifies the mode of the pack. Enter this keyword
followed by one of the following values:
add_drop
regen
Note: The 100G OTs in REGEN mode are unidirectional where Line
Input port is connected to one Line while the Line Output port is
connected to a different line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-327
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
regenresp
Attribute Definition
Regeneration Response. Specifies the consequent action of the line
TX laser when the OT is configured for regeneration mode
(oprmode=regen) . Enter this keyword followed by one of the
following values:
laseron
laseroff
Default: laseron
postfecber
prefecber
tti
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field of a Payload Structure
Identifier in the OTUk frame. pldtype has a default value and is based
on the encoded client signal. This attribute only applies when the
client signal is not an OTM0.2 signal.
Default: 20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-328
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ptmmresp
tti
Attribute Definition
ODU2 Payload Type Mismatch Response. Specifies whether the OT
will take a consequent action or pass the received signal. Enter one of
the following:
The states of the C1-10 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-329
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
The user can provision the 112SNX10 OT for the following client signal types:
10GbE LAN
OTU2
ODU2
OC-192
STM-64
FC800
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to 10GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-330
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
encmode
errfrmdrop
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Encapsulation mode. This attribute is used to provision the
encapsulation mode used to map the 10GbE LAN signal. Select from
one of the following:
Errored Frame Drop Mode. This attribute, when enabled, will discard
all received errored frames. Select either:
10GB-ZR
10GB-SR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-331
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is either OC-192 or STM-64:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
J0_ex
J0_fmt
trccmp
moduletype
Expected J0. Configure expected J0. Enter a value that depends on the
J0 format selected (1-byte or 16-byte):
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-332
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
losprop
mappingmode
Attribute Definition
Attribute that controls the status of the client-side transmitter during
signal failures on the line port, or when a far-end failure signal is
received on the line side. Enter one of the following:
sfth
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-333
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward Error Correction Type. Enter one of the following values:
Note: The 100G MUX OTs support the following FECTYPES on the
client interfaces: RSFEC, NOFEC, EFEC, and EFEC2.
Note: In 100G packs, the corrected counts can increase incrementally
due to preFec errors. This is normal behavior for 100G packs.
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
moduletype
losprop
oturate
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
OTU rate Specifies the client OTM0.2 rate. Enter one of the following
values:
11.049 (Gb/s)
11.096 (Gb/s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-334
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-335
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 112SNX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to FC800:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
moduletype
X8FCLC-L
X8FCSN-I
Default: Auto
losprop
The line interface on the 112SNX10 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU4
and ODU4 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-336
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Not settable for internal topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
DWDM frequencies: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575,
9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520,
9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410,
9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355,
9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300,
9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245,
9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190,
9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165, 9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135,
9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
channeltx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-337
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
fectype
Attribute Definition
Forward error correction mode. Specifies the type of forward error
correction on the interface port.
Note: The 100G MUX OTs support the following FECTYPES on the
client interfaces: RSFEC, NOFEC, EFEC, and EFEC2.
Note: In 100G packs, the corrected counts can increase incrementally
due to preFec errors. This is normal behavior for 100G packs.
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
oprmode
Operation Mode. Specifies the mode of the pack. Enter this keyword
followed by one of the following values:
add_drop
regen
Note: The 100G OTs in REGEN mode are unidirectional where Line
Input port is connected to one Line while the Line Output port is
connected to a different line.
regenresp
laseron
laseroff
Default: laseron
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-338
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field of a Payload Structure
Identifier in the OTUk frame. pldtype has a default value and is based
on the encoded client signal. This attribute only applies when the
client signal is not an OTM0.2 signal.
Default: 20
ptmmresp
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-339
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The states of the C1-10 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-340
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can provision the 130SCX10 OT for the following client signal types:
10GbE LAN
OTU2
ODU2
OC-192
STM-64
FC800
The following attributes are provisionable on the 130SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to 10GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
encmode
errfrmdrop
Errored Frame Drop Mode. This attribute, when enabled, will discard
all received errored frames. Select either:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-341
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
10GB-ZR
10GB-SR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
The following attributes are provisionable on the 130SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned signal type is either OC-192 or STM-64:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-342
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
J0_ex
J0_fmt
moduletype
losprop
mappingmode
Attribute Definition
Expected J0. Configure expected J0. Enter a value that depends on the
J0 format selected (1-byte or 16-byte):
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-343
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
sfth
Attribute Definition
Attribute that specifies the BER threshold to declare a Signal Fault
condition. Enter a value from the following range for the bit error rate,
expressed as 10-n.
The following attributes are provisionable on the 130SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the receive channel frequency. Not settable for internal
topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
fectype
Note: The 100G MUX OTs support the following FECTYPES on the
client interfaces: RSFEC, NOFEC, EFEC, and EFEC2.
Note: In 100G packs, the corrected counts can increase incrementally
due to preFec errors. This is normal behavior for 100G packs.
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-344
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
oturate
Attribute Definition
Pluggable module type. This attribute specifies the pluggable module
type expected in the socket identified by the port AID. Enter one of
the acceptable Client port moduletype values:
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
OTU rate Specifies the client OTM0.2 rate. Enter one of the following
values:
11.049 (Gb/s)
11.096 (Gb/s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-345
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 130SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-346
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 130SCX10 C1-10 interfaces when the
signal type is provisioned to FC800:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
moduletype
X8FCLC-L
X8FCSN-I
Default: Auto
losprop
The line interface on the 130SCX10 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU4
and ODU4 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-347
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Not settable for internal topology connections.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
DWDM frequencies: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575,
9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520,
9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410,
9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355,
9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300,
9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245,
9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190,
9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165, 9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135,
9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
channeltx
fectype
Attribute that configures the Forward Error Correction (FEC) type. Set
to one of the following values:
Default: sdfec
Note: Set line port Admin State down before changing FEC type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-348
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
oprmode
Attribute Definition
Operation Mode. Specifies the mode of the pack. Enter this keyword
followed by one of the following values:
add_drop
regen
Note: The 100G OTs in REGEN mode are unidirectional where Line
Input port is connected to one Line while the Line Output port is
connected to a different line.
regenresp
laseron
laseroff
Default: laseron
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-349
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field of a Payload Structure
Identifier in the OTUk frame. pldtype has a default value and is based
on the encoded client signal. This attribute only applies when the
client signal is not an OTM0.2 signal.
Default: 20
ptmmresp
tti
The states of the C1-4 and L1-2 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-350
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can provision the 4DPA4 OT for the following client signal types:
GbE
OC3
STM1
OC12
STM4
OC48
STM16
FC100, FC200, FC400
For each of the above client signal types, the user can provision different attributes as
described in the following subsections.
Note: For 4DPA4, available bandwidth validation is done only when timeslots are
assigned; not when the client port is created. (This is different from 11STMM10 OT
behavior.)
GbE client port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA4 C1-4 interfaces when the signal
type is provisioned to GbE :
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the expected wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-351
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
losprop
moduletype
Description
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-352
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
timeslot
[line | vts]
Description
Specifies the line port and the timeslot on the line port, that the client
port will be mapped to. Both line and vts parameters must be included.
Both must be zero, or both must be non-zero. Enter the keyword
timeslot followed by:
The following attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA4 C1-4 interfaces when the signal
type is provisioned to OC3/OC12/OC48 and STM1/STM4/STM16 :
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the expected wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
losprop
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-353
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
moduletype
Description
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-354
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
timeslot
[line | vts]
Description
Specifies the line port, and the timeslot on the line port, that the client
port will be mapped to. Both line and vts parameters must be included.
Both must be zero, or both must be non-zero. Enter the keyword
timeslot followed by:
Note: The 4DPA4 does not provide buffer credit management and expects the
attached FC switches to be provisioned to handle all buffer credits over the extended
distance Brocade licensing for distance extension and calculation and provisioning of
buffering should be coordinated with local Brocade network engineering. For
Brocade, best practice is to use the long distance LS mode. 4DPA4 1/2/4GFC does not
support long distance LD mode.
4DPA4 DualTran and FlexMux is only designed for unprotected non-trunked links.
Use of the 1830 4DPA4 is to extend an inter-switch link (ISL) over the DWDM
network. The expectation is the attached ports in the FC switch are provisioned to
G-port in Brocade systems and E-ports in Cisco Systems and have their speeds locked
to the rate to be used: i.e., the default auto-negotiation (AN) for speeds should not be
used - hard set to 1G or 2G or 4G should be used instead.
The following attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA4 C1-4 interfaces when the signal
type is provisioned to FC100, FC200, FC400:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-355
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FC100 and FC200 apply only in FlexMux card mode. FC400 applies only in DualTran
card mode.
Port Attribute
channel
fcmode
losprop
moduletype
Description
Specifies the expected wavelength of the pluggable module. Enter this
keyword to display the current setting. To change the setting, enter this
keyword followed by one of the following values:
fc (default)
ficon
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-356
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
timeslot
[line | vts]
Description
Specifies the line port, and the timeslot on the line port, that the client
port will be mapped to. Both line and vts parameters must be included.
Both must be zero, or both must be non-zero. Enter the keyword
timeslot followed by:
Note: Port channel is either not set or typically set to 1310nm for single mode or
850nm for multi mode. Assure that the right jumpers are used.
Make sure the receiver powers are between the optical overload and the minimum
receiver sensitivity.
Losprop shall be set to laserOff for interoperability with 1,2,4G Brocade.
Other options shall be left to default. Brocade switches need to be provisioned port to
specific line rate (1,2,4G) instead of using the auto-negotiation speed option. Make
sure FC switches are properly configured to use the 1830 link as an ISL. Typically, an
E-port and fabric switch provisioning and FC buffer credit provisioning necessary for
using 1830 in a FC transport application across a distance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-357
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA4 C1-4 interfaces when the signal
type is provisioned to FE:
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the expected wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
hdsdirate
Specifies the HD-SDI signal rate. Applies only when port type =
hdsdi.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
Default = 1.485/1.001
losprop
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-358
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
moduletype
timeslot
[line | vts]
Description
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
Specifies the line port, and the timeslot on the line port, that the client
port will be mapped to. Both line and vts parameters must be included.
Both must be zero, or both must be non-zero. Enter the keyword
timeslot followed by:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-359
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following OTU1 attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA4 L1 and L2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
channelrx
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected receive channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Enter this keyword to display the current setting.
To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-360
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
channeltx
fectype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected transmit channel frequency or wavelength of
the pluggable module. Enter this keyword to display the current
setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of
the following values:
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
gccstat
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-361
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified line
port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following:
FlexMux:
SL-16.1
SL-16.2C
SL-16.2D
SS-16.1A
SS-16.2C
DualTran:
oprmode
ospf helloint
4FC-OC
4FC-OD
ospf deadint
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-362
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
ospf metric
Attribute Definition
METRIC or Cost of the OSPF interface. By default, the interface is set
to 40.
Range: 1-65535
ospf md5key
Key is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5keyid is entered. The value is 1 to 16
ASCII characters. The string can be 1 to 16 uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric characters; the first character can not be a numeric
value. This parameter is mandatory if md5_status is enable
Default: NUL ()
ospf md5keyid
md5keyid is used for MD5 128bit hash value key calculation. This
parameter is mandatory if md5staus is enable.
Range: 1- 255
Default: 1
ospf md5status
mtu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-363
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure the OTU1 Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Note: The RSFEC allows for significant span distances without regeneration, and it
has greatly reduced delay to the transport of the signal. For the 4DPA4 pack, in case
of end to end circuit, RSFEC uses a total delay of approximately 31 microseconds for
FC-100, 28 microsecond for FC-200 and 36 microsecond for FC-400.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-364
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following ODU1 attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA4 L1 and L2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
odu0interwk
Attribute Definition
Standard ODU0 Interworking. When disabled, ODU1 Payload Type
should be set to 0x80 and there is proprietary encoding of OPTS OH
in PSI bytes and LosProp in APS/PCC bytes. The 4DPA4 can then
interwork at 2xODU0 only with another 4DPA4 at the far end. When
enabled, ODU1 Payload Type should be set to 0x20 (ODU multiplex
structure) and there is no proprietary use of PSI or APS/PCC bytes.
The 4DPA4 can then interwork with standard 2xODU0 equipment at
the far end. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-365
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Note:
The VA port on the 4DPA4 OT supports the OCH attributes for the eVOA ports
(VA{1-2}) on the 4DPA4 card as defined in the following table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-366
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VA port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
fVOA
The states of the C1,2 and L1,2 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
The user can provision the 4DPA2 OT for the following client signal type:
STM16
OC48
1GbE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-367
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA2 C1,2 interfaces when the signal
type is provisioned to OC48 or STM16:
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the expected wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
moduletype
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-368
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA2 C1,2 interfaces when the signal
type is provisioned to 1GbE:
Port Attribute
channel
Description
Specifies the expected wavelength of the pluggable module.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
For 4DPA2, the line port is automatically created when the client port is created and the
line port is deleted when the client port is deleted. The L1 and L2 interface on the 4DPA2
OT supports provisionable parameters as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-369
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following OC48 or STM16 attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA2 L1 and L2
interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Enter this keyword to display the current setting.
To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-370
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following 1GbE attributes are provisionable on the 4DPA2 L1 and L2 interface:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
moduletype
Attribute Definition
Specifies the expected channel frequency or wavelength of the
pluggable module. Enter this keyword to display the current setting.
To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following values:
The states of the C1 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port states
are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-371
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
cnfigure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
The user can provision the 43SCA1 OT for the following client signal types:
OC-768
STM-256
ODU3
OTU3
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43SCA1 C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to OC-768 or STM-256:
Port Attribute
jo
Description
Configure J0 attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-372
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
losprop
sdth
Description
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
sfth
Note: When real Payload Type Mismatch and far-end OC-768/STM256 LOF are
detected simultaneously, the real Payload Type Mismatch defect will not be raised.
OTU3 client port provisioning
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43SCA1 C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to OTU3:
Port Attribute
losprop
fectype
Description
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-373
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Attribute
tti
Description
Configure OTU3 Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Note: For 43SCA1 pack, the regeneration mode or transparent mode refers only to the
line transmit direction.
ODU3 line port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-374
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The line interface on the 43SCA1 OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU3 and
ODU3 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
OTU3 line port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the receive frequency.
Set to {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565,
9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515, 9510,
9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465, 9460, 9455,
9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410, 9405, 9400,
9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355, 9350, 9345,
9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290,
9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235,
9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180,
9175, 9170, 9165, 9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135, 9130, 9125,
9120, 9115}
Not set: None
channeltx
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-375
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure OTU3 Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Attribute Definition
ODUkp to CBRx mapping mode. This attribute specifies the mappng
mode that wil be used when the client port signal is provisioned to
OC-768 or STM-256.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-376
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The states of the C1 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port states
are supported:
The user can provision the 43SCGE1 OT for the following client signal types:
40GbE LAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-377
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43SCGE1 C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to 40GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
errfrmdrop
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Specifies whether inbound error frames are discarded or passed. This
attribute is only meaningful for GFP transport modes. Enter this
keyword followed by either of the following values:
C43g4c (40GbE)
The line interface on the 43SCGE1 supports provisionable parameters at the OTU4 and
ODU4 transport layers as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-378
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
channeltx
fectype
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the receive frequency.
Set to {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565,
9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515,
9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365,
9360, 9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315,
9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265,
9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215,
9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165,
9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135, 9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
Set to {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565,
9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515,
9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365,
9360, 9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315,
9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265,
9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215,
9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165,
9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135, 9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-379
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure OTU3 Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field of a Payload Structure
Identifier in the OTUk frame. pldtype has a default value and is based
on the encoded client signal.
Default: 20
ptmmresp
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-380
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The states of the C1-4 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-381
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can provision the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) OT for the following client
signal types:
FC800
10GbE LAN
OC-192
STM-64
OTU2
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
moduletype
losprop
X8FCLC-L
X8FCSN-I
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-382
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) C1-4
interface when the signal type is provisioned to 10GbE LAN:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
encmode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-383
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
moduletype
losprop
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
10GB-SR
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) C1-4
interface when the provisioned signal type is either OC-192 or STM-64:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-384
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
J0_ex
J0_fmt
trccmp
moduletype
losprop
mappingmode
Attribute Definition
Expected J0. Configure expected J0. Enter a value that depends on the
J0 format selected (1-byte or 16-byte):
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-385
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) C1-4
interface when the provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Specifies the channel frequency for the client port.
Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To change the
setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the following values:
fectype
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
moduletype
10GB-ZR
XI-64.1
XL-64.2C
XS-64.2b
XS-64.2C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-386
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
losprop
tti
Attribute Definition
Attribute that controls the status of the client-side transmitter during
signal failures on the line port, or when a far-end failure signal is
received on the line side. Enter one of the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-387
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) C1-4
interface when the provisioned client signal type is OTU2:
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the receive frequency.
Set to {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565,
9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515,
9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365,
9360, 9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315,
9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265,
9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215,
9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165,
9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135, 9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-388
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
channeltx
oprmode
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the transmit frequency.
Set to {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565,
9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515,
9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465,
9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365,
9360, 9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315,
9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265,
9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215,
9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170, 9165,
9160, 9155, 9150, 9145, 9140, 9135, 9130, 9125, 9120, 9115}
postfecber
prefecber
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-389
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the frequency of the tunable transponder.
The following applies to 43STX4:
Enter one of the following: {0, 9600, 9590, 9580, 9570, 9560, 9540,
9530, 9520, 9510, 9500, 9490, 9480, 9470, 9460, 9450, 9440, 9430,
9420, 9410, 9400, 9390, 9380, 9370, 9360, 9350, 9340, 9330, 9320,
9310, 9300, 9290, 9280, 9270, 9260, 9250, 9240, 9230, 9220, 9210,
9200, 9190, 9180, 9170}
The following applies to 43STX4P:
Enter one of the following: {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580,
9575, 9570, 9565, 9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525,
9520, 9515, 9510, 9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470,
9465, 9460, 9455, 9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415,
9410, 9405, 9400, 9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360,
9355, 9350, 9345, 9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305,
9300, 9295, 9290, 9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250,
9245, 9240, 9235, 9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9215, 9200, 9195,
9190, 9185, 9180, 9175, 9170}
fectype
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-390
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure OTU3 Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
Attribute Definition
Specifies the value of the Payload Type field of a Payload Structure
Identifier in the OTUk frame. pldtype has a default value and is based
on the encoded client signal.
Default: 20
ptmmresp
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-391
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
tti
Attribute Definition
Configure Trail Trace Indentifier attributes:
The states of the C1-C12 and L1 ports are provisioned independently. The following port
states are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-392
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user can provision the 43STA1P OT for the following client signal types:
OC-768
STM-256
OTU3
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43STA1P C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to OC-768 or STM-256:
Port Attribute
jo
Description
Configure J0 attributes:
losprop
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
Note: When real Payload Type Mismatch and far-end OC-768/STM256 LOF are
detected simultaneously, the real Payload Type Mismatch defect will not be raised.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-393
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following attributes are provisionable on the 43STA1P C1 interface when the signal
type is provisioned to OTU3:
Port Attribute
losprop
Description
Specifies how the near end client facing transmitter port reacts to a
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF) or other defect from the
far-end client-facing receiver. Enter this keyword to display the
current setting. To change the setting, enter this keyword followed by
one of the following:
Note: OTU3 client port provisioning is intended for OTU3 regeneration configuration
between a pair of 43STA1P OTs. OTU3 port provisioning may not be used as NNI
port connected to third party OTN network due to lack of FEC field
termination/processing, ODU3P layer monitoring (ODU3 defects or path BIP-8
monitoring at ODUkP/T layer isnt supported) or GCC[n] channel processing. OTUk
monitoring functions, including section BIP-8 is supported.
Note: For 43STA1P pack, the regeneration mode or transparent mode refers only to
the line transmit direction.
43STA1P line port provisioning
The line interface on the 43STA1P OT supports provisionable parameters at the OTU3
and ODU3 transport layers, as defined in the following tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-394
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the frequency of the tunable transponder.
Set to {9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565, 9560,
9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515, 9510, 9505,
9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465, 9460, 9455, 9450,
9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410, 9405, 9400, 9395,
9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355, 9350, 9345, 9340,
9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290, 9285,
9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235, 9230,
9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180, 9175,
9170}
Not set: None
fectype
Note: Changing fectype while admin status is 'up' can cause loss of
traffic/data link (GCC). Changing fectype should only be made in
'down' state.
postfecber
prefecber
tti
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-395
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Definition
ODUkp to CBRx mapping mode. This attribute specifies the mappng
mode that wil be used when the client port signal is provisioned to
OC-768 or STM-256.
tti
The states of the G{1-8} ports are provisioned independently. The following port states
are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-396
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The G port on the MVAC OT supports the OCH attributes for the eVOA ports (G{1-8})
on the MVAC card as defined in the following table.
VA port provisioning
Attribute Definition
Specifies the pluggable module type to be used on the specified
interface port. Enter this keyword to display the current setting. To
change the setting, enter this keyword followed by one of the
following:
The states of the C{1-8} ports are provisioned independently. The following port states
are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-397
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
Attribute Definition
description
detail
PM
state
type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-398
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the frequency of the channel at the L{1-8}
port output of the MVAC8B:
Set to {0, 9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565,
9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515, 9510,
9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465, 9460, 9455,
9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410, 9405, 9400,
9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355, 9350, 9345,
9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290,
9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235,
9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180,
9175, 9170}
The configured channel value is only used for manual power
management.
description
detail
PM
power
Specifies the expected optical output power level of the L{1-8} port.
Choose a value from between the range -20 dBm to +4 dBm.
The provisioned power value is only used for manual power
management.
state
type
The states of the C1 port are provisioned independently. The following port states are
supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-399
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ains - Provision the state to ains to set the admin state to Automatic In-Service. When
in this state, the port is allowed to transition to the in-service (Up) state if it is
operationally capable. That is, when all alarms on that port have cleared and the
ainstimer has expired. When in this state, the user can choose from the following:
configure the properties of the ainstimer to use either the system value, or to enter
the number of hours and minutes (1 minute to 96 hours). The default value of the
ainstimer is system.
Set ains to enabled
Set ains to disabled
Attribute Definition
description
detail
PM
state
type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-400
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port/facility provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisionable
Attribute
channel
Attribute Definition
Attribute that configures the frequency of the channel at the L1 port
output of the SVAC.
Set to {0, 9605, 9600, 9595, 9590, 9585, 9580, 9575, 9570, 9565,
9560, 9555, 9550, 9545, 9540, 9535, 9530, 9525, 9520, 9515, 9510,
9505, 9500, 9495, 9490, 9485, 9480, 9475, 9470, 9465, 9460, 9455,
9450, 9445, 9440, 9435, 9430, 9425, 9420, 9415, 9410, 9405, 9400,
9395, 9390, 9385, 9380, 9375, 9370, 9365, 9360, 9355, 9350, 9345,
9340, 9335, 9330, 9325, 9320, 9315, 9310, 9305, 9300, 9295, 9290,
9285, 9280, 9275, 9270, 9265, 9260, 9255, 9250, 9245, 9240, 9235,
9230, 9225, 9220, 9215, 9210, 9205, 9200, 9195, 9190, 9185, 9180,
9175, 9170}
The configured channel value is only used for manual power
management.
description
detail
PM
power
state
type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-401
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24ANM: {1-24}
24ET1GB: {1-24}
11DPE12(A/E) : L{1,2}, VA{1,2}
11DPM12 : L{1,2}, VA{1,2}
Related information
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
11STAR1/11STAR1A line port (L1)
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the
11STAR1/11STAR1A card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 11STAR1/11STAR1A line
port settings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-402
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11STAR1/11STAR1A OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line
port.
Result: OTU2 attributes are displayed under the OTU2 Details tab. For ODU2
attributes, select the ODU2 Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 11STMM10 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 11STMM10 line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11STMM10 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-403
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: OTU2 attributes are displayed under the OTU2 Details tab. For ODU2
attributes, select the ODU2 Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify an 11STMM10 client
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11STMM10 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 11STGE12 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 11STGE12 line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11STGE12 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line port.
Result: OTU2 attributes are displayed under the OTU2 Details tab. For ODU2
attributes, select the ODU2 Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-404
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Only ports 1-10 are provisionable. Ports 11 and 12 are not supported.
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify an 11STGE12 client
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11STGE12 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11DPE12(A/E) line
port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11DPE12(A/E) OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 or L2 line
port.
Result: For an unprovisioned line port, the Unprovisioned Line Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a line port that is already provisioned, the Line Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU2 attributes, select the OTU2 Details tab. For ODU2 attributes, select the ODU2
Details tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-405
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU2 or ODU2 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11DPE12(A/E) VA
port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11DPE12(A/E) OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select VA1 or VA2
port.
Result: For an unprovisioned VA port, the Unprovisioned VA Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a VA port that is already provisioned, the VA Details screen is displayed
and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11DPE12(A/E) OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-406
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11DPM12 line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11DPM12 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 or L2 line port.
Result: For an unprovisioned line port, the Unprovisioned Line Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a line port that is already provisioned, the Line Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU2 attributes, select the OTU2 Details tab. For ODU2 attributes, select the ODU2
Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU2 or ODU2 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11DPM12 VA port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11DPM12 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select VA1 or VA2 port.
Result: For an unprovisioned VA port, the Unprovisioned VA Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a VA port that is already provisioned, the VA Details screen is displayed
and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-407
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify an 11DPM12 client
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11DPM12 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11QPA4/11QPEN4
line port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the line
port.
Result: For an unprovisioned line port, the Unprovisioned Line Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a line port that is already provisioned, the Line Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU2 attributes, select the OTU2 Details tab. For ODU2 attributes, select the ODU2
Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU2 or ODU2 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attention: The following steps are provided for 11QPEN4 encryption provisioning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-408
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat provisioning of same WKAT and nextkey at the 11QPEN4 port at the other end of
the encrypted service and click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click the checkbox for encryption enabled at the other end of the encrypted service and
click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11QPA4/11QPEN4
VA port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the VA
port..
Result: For an unprovisioned VA port, the Unprovisioned VA Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a VA port that is already provisioned, the VA Details screen is displayed
and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-409
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11QPA4/11QPEN4 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client
port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11QPE24 line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11QPE24 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select line port.
Result: For an unprovisioned line port, the Unprovisioned Line Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a line port that is already provisioned, the Line Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU2 attributes, select the OTU2 Details tab. For ODU2 attributes, select the ODU2
Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU2 or ODU2 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-410
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11QPE24 VA port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11QPE24 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the VA port..
Result: For an unprovisioned VA port, the Unprovisioned VA Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a VA port that is already provisioned, the VA Details screen is displayed
and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify an 11QPE24 client
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 11QPE24 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The WebUI supports creation of 11QCUPC line ports. The supported signal
rates are dependent on the port group mode.
The WebUI supports modify and view of 11QCUPC line ports. The user must first
specify the port role when creating the port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-411
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 11QCUPC line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a port, select desired line portL1-L4 from the equipment tree.
Result: For an unprovisioned port, the Unprovisioned Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a port that is already provisioned, the Card Properties screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: For a port that is already provisioned, the Card Properties screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-412
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The WebUI supports creation of 10AN10G ports. The supported signal rates are
dependent on the port group mode.
The WebUI supports modify and view of 10AN10G ports. The user must first specify
the port role when creating the port.
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 10AN10G port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a port, select desired Port 1-10 from the equipment tree.
Result: For an unprovisioned port, the Unprovisioned Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a port that is already provisioned, the Card Properties screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The WebUI supports creation of 24ANM ports. The supported signal rates are
dependent on the port group mode.
The WebUI supports modify and view of 24ANM ports. The user must first specify
the port role when creating the port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-413
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 24ANM port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a port, select desired Port 1-24 from the equipment tree.
Result: For an unprovisioned port, the Unprovisioned Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a port that is already provisioned, the Card Properties screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The WebUI supports creation of 24ET1GB ports. The supported signal rates are
dependent on the port group mode.
The WebUI supports modify and view of 24ET1GB ports. The user must first specify
the port role when creating the port.
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 24ET1GB port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-414
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a port, select desired Port 1-24 from the equipment tree.
Result: For an unprovisioned port, the Unprovisioned Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a port that is already provisioned, the Card Properties screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 112PDM11 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 112PDM11 line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 112PDM11 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line port.
Result: OTL4.4 attributes are displayed under the OTL4.4 Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 112PDM11 card.
Provisioning for ports {L2-L4} is different than L1 The WebUI supports view-only of
the 112PDM11 line ports (L2-L4) attributes
The following procedure describes how to view the 112PDM11 line port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 112PDM11 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L2-L4 line port.
Result: OTL4.4 attributes are displayed under the OTL4.4 Details tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-415
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify an 112PDM11 client
port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 112PDM11 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 112SCA1/112SNA1
card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 112SCA1/112SNA1 line
port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 112SCA1/112SNA1 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line
port.
Result: OTU4 attributes are displayed under the OTU4 Details tab. For ODU4
attributes, select the ODU4 Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-416
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 112SCA1/112SNA1 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select C1 client
port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the
112SCX10/112SNX10/130SCX10 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the
112SCX10/112SNX10/130SCX10 line port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-417
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 130SCUP card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 130SCUP line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 130SCUP OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line port.
Result: Attributes are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 4DPA4 line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 4DPA4 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 or L2 line port.
Result: For an unprovisioned line port, the Unprovisioned Line Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a line port that is already provisioned, the Line Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-418
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU1 attributes, select the OTU1 Details tab. For ODU1 attributes, select the ODU1
Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU1 or ODU1 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the 4DPA4 VA port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 4DPA4 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select VA1 or VA2 port.
Result: For an unprovisioned VA port, the Unprovisioned VA Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a VA port that is already provisioned, the VA Details screen is displayed
and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify a 4DPA4 client port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 4DPA4 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-419
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The line port is automatically created when the client port is created.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 4DPA2 line port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 4DPA2 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 or L2 line port.
Result: Attributes are displayed under the Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify a 4DPA2 client port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 4DPA2 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 43SCA1 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 43SCA1 line port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43SCA1 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line port.
Result: 43SCA1 line port attributes are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-420
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU3 attributes, select the OTU3 Details tab. For ODU3 attributes, select the ODU3
Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU3 or ODU3 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify a 443SCA1 client port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43SCA1 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select C1 client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 43SCGE1 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 43SCGE1 line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43SCGE1 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line port.
Result: 43SCGE1 line port attributes are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU3 attributes, select the OTU4 Details tab. For ODU4 attributes, select the ODU4
Details tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-421
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU4 or ODU4 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify a 43SCGE1 client port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43SCGE1 OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select C1 client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E
/ 43STX4(P) card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E /
43STX4(P) line port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) OT in the equipment tree to show ports.
Select L1 line port.
Result: 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) line port attributes are displayed under the
Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU3 attributes, select the OTU3 Details tab. For ODU3 attributes, select the ODU3
Details tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-422
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU3 or ODU3 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify a 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E
/ 43STX4(P) client port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43SCX4 / 43SCX4E / 43STX4(P) OT in the equipment tree to show ports.
Select the client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The line port is automatically created and deleted with the 43STA1P card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the 43STA1P line port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43STA1P OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 line port.
Result: 43STA1P line port attributes are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OTU3 attributes, select the OTU3 Details tab. For ODU3 attributes, select the ODU3
Details tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-423
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OTU3 or ODU3 line port settings, enter parameters and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify a 43STA1P client port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the 43STA1P OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select C1 client port.
Result: For an unprovisioned client port, the Unprovisioned Client Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a client port that is already provisioned, the Client Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the client port, specify the primary state and signal rate of the port and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The LINE port is automatically created and deleted with the
A2325A/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the
A2325A/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG LINE port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-424
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIG port is automatically created and deleted with the
A2325A/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the
A2325A/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG SIG port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the OSC port, enter pluggable module type and primary state and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: A2325A/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG/AM2125A
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the
A2325A/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG/AM2125A DCM port settings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-425
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The LINE port is automatically created and deleted with the OSCT card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the OSCT LINE port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the OSCT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select LINE port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIG port is automatically created and deleted with the OSCT card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the OSCT SIG port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the OSCT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIG port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab. To display
SIG port attributes, select the SIG Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-426
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the OSC port, enter pluggable module type and primary state and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OSCSFP port.
Note: For an OSCSFP port that is already provisioned, the provisionable settings
can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create the OSCSFP port, enter pluggable module type and primary state and click
Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The LINEIN port is automatically created and deleted with the
A2P2125/AM2125A/AM2125B/AM2318A card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-427
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The LINEOUT port is automatically created and deleted with the
A2P2125/AM2125A/AM2125B/AM2318A card.
Note: When the cover is removed from the output port of
A2P2125/AM2125A/AM2125B/AM2318A equipped with a protective cover switch,
the optical amplifier will shut down. The shut down occurs within 150 ms of the time
that the cover is removed. An APR-Active Port Switch condition is raised against the :
A2P2125/AM2125A/AM2125B/AM2318A - LINE OUT port.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the
A2P2125/AM2125A/AM2125B/AM2318A LINEOUT port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIG port is automatically created and deleted with the CWR8/CWR8-88
card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the CWR8/CWR8-88 SIG port
settings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-428
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the CWR8/CWR8-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIG port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The OMD port is automatically created and deleted with the CWR8/CWR8-88
card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the CWR8/CWR8-88 OMD
port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the CWR8/CWR8-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select OMD port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The THRU port is automatically created and deleted with the
CCWR8/CWR8-88 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the CWR8/CWR8-88 THRU
port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the CWR8/CWR8-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select THRU port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-429
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the CWR8/CWR8-88
CLS [1-8] port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the CWR8/CWR8-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select the CLS port..
Result: For an unprovisioned CLS port, the Unprovisioned CLS Port screen is
displayed.
Note: For a CLS port that is already provisioned, the CLS Details screen is
displayed and attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM port
Note: The DCM port is automatically created and deleted with the DCM card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the DCM DCM port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the DCM in the equipment tree to show ports. Select DCM port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
EC CIT port
Note: The CIT port is automatically created and deleted with the EC card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the EC CIT port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the EC in the equipment tree to show ports. Select CIT port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-430
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The ES1 and ES2 ports are automatically created and deleted with the EC card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the EC ES1 and ES2 port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the EC in the equipment tree to show ports. Select ES1 or ES2 port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The CIT port is automatically created and deleted with the MTC1T9 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the MTC1T9 CIT port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the MTC1T9 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select CIT port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The E1/E2 and ES1/ES2 ports are automatically created and deleted with the
MTC1T9 card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-431
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the MTC1T9 E1/E2 and
ES1/ES2 port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the MTC1T9 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select E1/E2 or ES1/ES2 port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The OAMP port is automatically created and deleted with the MTC1T9 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the MTC1T9 OAMP port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the MTC1T9 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select OAMP port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIGIN and SIGOUT [1-4] ports are automatically created and deleted with
the MESH4 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the MESH4 SIGIN and
SIGOUT [1-4] port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the MESH4 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIGIN or SIGOUT [1-4]
port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-432
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The A and B ports are automatically created and deleted with the OPSA/OPSB
card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the OPSA/OPSB A and B port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the OPSA/OPSB in the equipment tree to show ports. Select A or B port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
Note: The settings are view-only for users with Observer and Provisioner
privileges.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIG port is automatically created and deleted with the OPSA/OPSB card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the OPSA/OPSB SIG port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the OPSA/OPSB in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIG port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-433
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PF TRUMON port
Note: The PF TRUMON port is supported on the PF for the PSS-32S shelf only.
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the PF TRUMON port
settings. . For creation, the user will specify the signal rate of the port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the PF OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select desired port.
Result: For an unprovisioned port, the Unprovisioned Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a PF port that is already provisioned, the Details screen is displayed and
attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure describes how to create, view, or modify the PTPCTL P port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the PTPCTL OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select desired port.
Result: For an unprovisioned port, the Unprovisioned Port screen is displayed.
Note: For a P port that is already provisioned, the Details screen is displayed and
attributes can be viewed or modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-434
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The ports are automatically created and deleted with the PTPCTL card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the PTPCTL port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the PTPCTL OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select desired port.
Result: Attributes are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
PTPIO line port (1-2), SIG port (1-2), TP port (1-2), ITP port (1-2)
Note: The port are automatically created and deleted with the PTPIO card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the PTPIO port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the PTPIO OT in the equipment tree to show ports. Select desired port.
Result: Attributes are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The LINEIN port is automatically created and deleted with the RA2P card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the RA2P LINEIN port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the RA2P in the equipment tree to show ports. Select LINEIN port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-435
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The LINEOUT port is automatically created and deleted with the RA2P card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the RA2P LINEOUT port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the RA2P in the equipment tree to show ports. Select LINEOUT port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The OMD port, EXP port, and Channel ports are automatically created and
deleted with the SFC/SFD card. The EXP port is not applicable to the SFD40,
SFD40B, SFD44, SFD44B, and SFC8.
Important! The default state for SFD channel and expansion ports is down and users
need to manually turn them up to In Service after provisioning these.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the SFC/SFD OMD port, EXP
port, and Channel ports settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the SFC/SFD in the equipment tree to show ports. Select OMD port, EXP port, or
Channel ports.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIG, E and O ports are automatically created and deleted with the
ITLB/ITLU card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the ITLB SIG, E and O port
settings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-436
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the ITLB in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIG, E or O port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIGIN, EOUT and OOUT ports are automatically created and deleted with
the ITLB/ITLU card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the ITLU SIGIN, EOUT and
OOUTport settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the ITLU in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIGIN, EOUT or OOUT port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SVAC L1 port
Note: The L1 port is automatically created and deleted with the SVAC card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the SVAC L1 port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the SVAC in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L1 port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-437
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SVAC C1 port
Note: The C1 port is automatically created and deleted with the SVAC card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the SVAC C1 port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the SVAC in the equipment tree to show ports. Select C1 port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The G ports are automatically created and deleted with the MVAC card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the MVAC G [1-8] port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the MVAC in the equipment tree to show ports. Select G [1-8] port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The L [1-8] ports are automatically created and deleted with the MVAC8B card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the MVAC8B line port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the MVAC8B in the equipment tree to show ports. Select L [1-8] port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-438
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The C [1-8] ports are automatically created and deleted with the MVAC8B
card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the MVAC8B C [1-8] port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the MVAC8B in the equipment tree to show ports. Select C [1-8].
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The OAMP and VOIP ports are automatically created and deleted with the
USRPNL card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the USRPNL OAMP and
VOIP port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the USRPNL in the equipment tree to show ports. Select OAMP or VOIP port.
Result: Port Interface settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view or modify OSPF parameters for the OAMP and VOIP ports, select the OSPF
Details tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-439
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI expand the equipment tree to select System > PSS-32 Shelf > USRPNL > E1
or E2
Result: In the Port Details tab, the Port Interface Settings screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the E1/E2 port. Each E1/E2 port should be on a
unique subnet within the DCN. For example: Our GNE OAMP IP address was
192.168.5.57/20 so we configured the E1 IP to be 182.168.11.1/24 and the E2 to be
182.168.12.1/24. Ensure that the configured subnet does not overlap with any other
subnet in the DCN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the OSPF details tab and provision the E1/E2 port routestate to redistribute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the Port Details tab and provision the E1/E2 port admin state to up..
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the Raman/EDFA box, set the IP address in the same subnet as the E1/E2 port IP
address: for example, for the Raman connected to E1 set the Raman IP address and subnet
mask to be 182.168.11.170/24. Set the Raman/EDFA box default gateway IP address as
the IP address of the E1 port (in our case 182.168.11.1).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-440
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the E1/E2 port of the PSS-32 to the Raman/EDFA Ethernet port. If more than
two Raman/EDFA boxes are necessary then a L2 switch may be placed between the
E1/E2 port and the Raman/EDFA boxes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using static routes to connect to the 1830 network from the customer DCN, than add
static routes for the E1/E2 subnets on all necessary customer routers. On every 1830 GNE
add a default route using the subtending router interface IP address and set the redistribute
option in the default route. If the OSPF routing protocol is used on the customer DCN
instead of static routes, then enable OSPF on all GNE OAMP ports (using cli set OAMP
port routestate to enable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On all PhM servers or client PCs, it is necessary to modify the Ethernet NIC MTU size
from the default 1500 to 1491.
Note: This procedure needs to be followed for each Raman/EDFA box that is
connected to an E1/E2 port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: The SIG port is automatically created and deleted with the WR2-88 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR2-88 SIG port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR2-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIG port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The THRU port is automatically created and deleted with the WR2-88 card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WWR2-88 THRU port
settings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-441
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR2-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select THRU port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The ADDIN [1-8] port is automatically created and deleted with the WR2-88
card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR2-88 ADDIN [1-8] port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR2-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select ADDIN [1-8] port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The DROPOUT port is automatically created and deleted with the WR2-88
card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR2-88 DROPOUT port
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR2-88 in the equipment tree to show ports. Select DROPOUT port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-442
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The SIG port is automatically created and deleted with the WR8-88A/WR888AF card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF SIG
port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF in the equipment tree to show ports. Select SIG port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The THRU port is automatically created and deleted with the
WR8-88A/WR8-88AF card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF
THRU port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF in the equipment tree to show ports. Select THRU
port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The ADDIN [1-8] port is automatically created and deleted with the
WR8-88A/WR8-88AF card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF
ADDIN [1-8] port settings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-443
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF in the equipment tree to show ports. Select ADDIN
[1-8] port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The DROPOUT port is automatically created and deleted with the
WR8-88A/WR8-88AF card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF
DROPOUT port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF in the equipment tree to show ports. Select DROPOUT
port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The MESHOUT [1-3] port is automatically created and deleted with the
WR8-88A card.
The following procedure describes how to view or modify the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF
MESHOUT [1-3] port settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WR8-88A/WR8-88AF in the equipment tree to show ports. Select MESHOUT
[1-3] port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-444
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand the WTOCM/WTOCMA in the equipment tree to show ports. Select IN port.
Result: Provisionable settings are displayed under the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-445
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-447
5-448
5-449
5-451
5-453
5-456
5-457
5-459
5-460
5-462
5-463
5-465
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-446
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-PRMTR-NE
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on System in the selection tree, and select Properties General from the
context menu that opens.
Result: The Properties - General window opens, displaying the general properties of
the system.
Reference: See General properties of the system as a whole (p. 5-470).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-447
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to display the events and conditions that are currently present for a
system component.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-COND-EQPT
RTRV-COND-ALL
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choose one of the following methods to invoke the View Current Conditions window for
the desired system component:
In the selection tree, right-click on System, and select View Current Conditions from
the context menu that opens.
Expand the selection tree down to shelf level, then right-click on Shelf, and select
View Current Conditions from the context menu that opens.
Expand the selection tree down to board or facility level, then right-click the
respective board or facility in the main window, and select View Current Conditions
from the context menu that opens.
Result: The View Current Conditions window opens, displaying the events and
conditions that are currently present for the selected system component.
Reference: See View Current Conditions (p. 5-449).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-448
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The View Current Conditions window serves to retrieve the current status of any
reported, alarmed, not alarmed or not reported conditions (also referred to as events in
the following) for a particular system component.
Parameters
Parameter
Value
Description
Name
Alphanumeric string of up to 20
characters.
Notification Code
CR - Critical
MJ - Major
MN - Minor
WR - Warning
NA - Not Alarmed
NR - Not Reported
Condition Type
Service Affecting
Date Occured
Time Occured
Location
Direction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-449
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Value
Description
Monitored Value
Threshold Level
Time Period
1-day
15-minutes
Condition types
The condition types are described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide, chapter Alarm and condition details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-450
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to display remote inventory for any entity in the system, which is
physically present in the system and
is provisioned or
is the first un-provisioned entity in the equipment module hierarchy (e.g.: If an IOC is
un-provisioned, Remote-information is not retrievable from plugged in SFP/XFPs.)
RTRV-RI
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the system in the selection tree, and select Properties Remote
Inventory from the context menu that opens.
Note: If no SLC is installed no Remote Inventory information of either the FLC nor
other system components can be retrieved. The SLC collects all Remote Inventory
information of the system also the Remote Inventory information info of the FLC.
The SLC then gives this info to the FLC, which makes it accessible using the ZIC.
If there are no Remote Inventory information for the FLC displayed, please at first
perform a refresh of the FLC by right-click on the FLC in the selection tree, and select
Refresh from the context menu that opens.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-451
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Remote Inventory window opens, displaying the remote inventory
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-452
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Remote Inventory window serves to retrieve the current status of any reported,
alarmed, not alarmed or not reported conditions (also referred to as events in the
following) for a particular system component.
The Remote Inventory window serves to retrieve remote inventory information for any
entity in the system, which is physically present in the system and
is provisioned
is the first un-provisioned entity in the equipment module hierarchy (e.g.: If an IOC is
un-provisioned, Remote-information is not retrievable from plugged in SFP/XFPs.)
Parameters
Parameter
Value
AID Type
COMPANY
Description
up to 14 bytes
MNEMONIC
up to 12 Bytes>
CLEI
up to 10 Bytes >
PARTNUM
up to 14 Bytes
FACTORY
up to 4 Bytes / FACTORY
IDENTIFIER)
SERIAL
serial number
DATE
{{00-99}-{01-12}-{01-31}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-453
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Value
Description
EXTRADATA
VENDORNAME
VENDORCOMPANY
X{{0-9,A-F}{0-9,A-F}}[3] (hex
string)
VENDORPARTNUM
VENDORREVLVL
VENDORSERIAL
VENDORDATE
{{00-99}-{01-12}-{01-31}
VENDORWAVELENGTH
{0 - 65535
Vendor Wavelength in
nanometer [nm] of the third
party interface module
(SFP/XFP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-454
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Value
Description
VENDORTRANSCODES
{BASE-PX, BASE-BX10,
100BASE-FX, 100BASE-LX-LX10,
1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-CX,
1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-SX,
10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR,
10GBASE-ER, 10GBASE-LRM,
10GBASE-SW, 10GBASE-LW,
10GBASE-EW, 1xFC-MMF,
1xFC-SMF, 2xFC-MMF, 2xFC-SMF,
1xFC-SX, 1xFC-LX,
1xFC-Copper-Active,
1xFC-Copper-Passive,
10GFC-1200-MX-SN-I,
10GFC-1200-SM-LL-L,
10GFC-ER-1550nm,
10GFC-IR-1300nm-FP,
ESCON-MMF, ESCON-SMF, I-64.1r,
I-64.1, I-64.2r, I-64.2, I-64.3, I-64.5,
S-64.1, S-64.2a, S-64.2b, S-64.3a,
S-64.3b, S-64.5a, S-64.5b, L-64.1,
L-64.2a, L-64.2b, L-64.2c, L-64.3,
P1L1-2D2, V-64.2a, V-64.2b, V-64.3,
OC192-SR, SONET-reach-specifierbit1, SONET-reach-specifier-bit2,
OC48-LR, OC48-IR, OC48-SR,
OC12-LR, OC12-IR, OC12-SR,
OC3-LR, OC3-IR, OC3-SR
VENDORFIBERTYPE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-455
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve TL1 parameters regarding TL1 encoding over TCP/IP.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-NE-TL1
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on System in the selection tree, and select TL1 Parameters from the context
menu that opens.
Result: The TL1 Parameters window opens, displaying parameters regarding TL1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-456
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve the relevant parameters related to the equipment protection
groups of FLCs and agnostic matrix cards.
Related TL1 commands
ALW-SWDX-EQPT
INH-SWDX-EQPT
RTRV-DX-EQPT
SW-DX-EQPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select Equipment in
the navigation tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on Equipment, and select Switching View from the context menu that
opens.
In the Action menu, select Switching View.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-457
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The View Duplex Switching Equipments window opens, displaying the
relevant parameters related to the equipment protection groups of FLCs and agnostic
matrix cards.
Reference: See Parameters of equipment protection groups (p. 5-539).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-458
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-OCH
ED-OCH
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window,, select the desired
OCH port in the navigation tree underFacilities.
As a result, the OCH channels are displayed in the display pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on an OCH channel, and select Properties General from the context
menu that opens.
In the Action menu, select Properties General.
Result: The Properties General window opens, displaying the relevant parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-459
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DGN-EQPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select Equipment Rack1 Shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on Shelf in the selection tree, and select Diagnostics from the context menu
that opens.
Result: The Diagnose Equipment window opens, displaying the general properties of
the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Send.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-460
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
displayed as a table:
Parameter
Details
AID
LNKFROMMTX
PSS64 subrack
Three heading letters for a quadrant coding "xyQ"
(x={L,R} for left or right quadrant and y={T,B} for the top
or bottom quadrant;
For PSS36 subrack.
-
16 digits for link set failure coding (one per I/O slot from
left upper to the right lower corner, first left to right then
top down) indicating the number of failed links out of the
number of used links from the I/O slots to the specified
matrix slot. The value range per digit is "0-9", "A", "-":
where the value 0 indicates no failure, the values 1-9
indicate partial link failures, the value A indicates that all
links are failed (at maximum 10), and the value - indicates
that the I/O slot is not equipped.
PSS64 subrack
Three heading letters for a quadrant coding "xyQ"
(x={L,R} for left or right quadrant and y={T,B} for the top
or bottom quadrant;
For PSS36 subrack.
-
16 digit positions for link set failure coding (one per I/O
slot from left upper to the right lower corner, first left to
right then top down) indicating the number of failed links
out of the number of used links from the specified matrix
slot to the I/O slots. The value range per digit is "0-9", "A",
"-": where the value 0 indicates no failure, the values 1-9
indicate partial link failures, the value A indicates that all
links are failed (at maximum 10), and the value - indicates
that the I/O slot is not equipped.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-461
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure turns on each LED in all shelves of the compound for 30 seconds
(color: amber). Then all LEDs return to their true states.
Related TL1 commands
DGN-EQPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the Shelf in the selection tree, and select LED Test from the context menu
that opens.
Result: The LED Test window opens, displaying the general properties of the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Yes.
Result: All LED in all shelves of the compound are turned on for 30 seconds (color:
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-462
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DGN-EQPT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Networking
Internal LAN
Then select VLAN Discovery, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by
using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The VLAN Discovery window opens, displaying the general properties of the
system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Send.
Result: The on-demand diagnostic tests, provides the following information,
displayed as a table:
Parameter
Details
SHELFAID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-463
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
ES1L
ES1R
ES2L
ES2R
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-464
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve the following set of analog parameters from any optical
module in the system (pluggable as well as fixed mounted):
RTRV-DDM
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select an optical module via
Equipment Rack Shelf Slot Port
Then select Digital Diagnostic Monitoring, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Digital Diagnostic Monitoring window opens.
Details
AID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-465
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
PROVISIONEDTYPE
to RI MNEMONIC:X11MC<xx>SC)
SR<xx>W11G1TUI (<xx>={47,49,51,53,55} ; maps to RI
MNEMONIC: X11MC<xx>SI)
LR<xx>W11G1TUC (<xx>={47,49,51,53,55,57,59,61} ; maps
to RI MNEMONIC:X11MC<xx>LC)
Note: <xx> are the two middle digits for the actual wavelength,
e.g. <xx>=53 for a wavelength= 1531nm
SR10G155TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S155S15I)
SL10G155TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S155S40I)
SL20G155TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S155S80I)
SR10G622TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S622S15I)
SL10G622TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S622S40I)
SL20G622TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S622S80I)
FIXED (Optical module cannot be changed e.g. 2x 40G ANY
Card)
NOTAPPL (Not Applicable, for unprovisioned modules)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-466
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Actual type
to RI MNEMONIC:X11MC<xx>SC)
SR<xx>W11G1TUI (<xx>={47,49,51,53,55} ; maps to RI
MNEMONIC: X11MC<xx>SI)
LR<xx>W11G1TUC (<xx>={47,49,51,53,55,57,59,61} ; maps
to RI MNEMONIC:X11MC<xx>LC)
Note: <xx> are the two middle digits for the actual wavelength,
e.g. <xx>=53 for a wavelength= 1531nm
SR10G155TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S155S15I)
SL10G155TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S155S40I)
SL20G155TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S155S80I)
SR10G622TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S622S15I)
SL10G622TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S622S40I)
SL20G622TU (maps to RI MNEMONIC: S622S80I)
FIXED (Optical module cannot be changed e.g. 2x 40G ANY
Card)
UNKNOWN Unknown Type, the system cannot be determined
the type e.g. the RIM is corrupted or the card does not belong
to the 1830 system.
UNPLUGGED Unplugged , the module slot is empty.
Temperature
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-467
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
TXBIASCURR
TXPWR
RXPWR
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-468
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-470
5-480
5-482
5-483
5-484
5-489
5-497
5-501
5-509
5-520
5-531
5-539
5-541
5-548
TL1 parameters
5-579
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-469
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window, invoked for the system, provides the following
information:
Parameter
Values
Details
AID
ACTSW
1830 PSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-470
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Release
Identification
{E, F, P,
R}{00-99}.{00-99}.{0099}
Release Date
E
Engineering Load. When software has
progressed to the point where
components and functions are brought
together in a single testable load (Internal
load only).
F
First Office Application, the software
load is intended for FOA evaluation and
testing and is qualified to carry traffic
under specified conditions or constraints
(Load given to customer during
development that could be changed to an
R load pending customer acceptance).
P
Preliminary, the software load is only
intended for evaluation and testing under
controlled, nontraffic-bearing conditions
(Load given to customer during
development, not meant for deployment
or real traffic).
R
Released, the software load is fully
qualified to carry traffic per applicable
ALU specifications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-471
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Matrix Size
NODETYPE
PSS
USERLABEL
Up to 15 characters
enclosed in double quotes.
Allowed values are
alphanumeric characters
and dashes ("-").
REGION
ANSI, ETSI
PROVMODE
AUTOEQ, MANEQ
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-472
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
AINSSTDFLT
AINS
(related to
facilities only)
NOWAIT
OTU
ODUn
ODUPTF
AUn
STSn
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-473
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
OTUDFLTASAP
ASAPDFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-474
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
ODUPTFDFLTASA
P
ASAPDFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
ODUNDFLTASAP
ASAPDFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-476
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
AUNDFLTASAP
ASAPDFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-477
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
STSNDFLTASAP
ASAPDFLT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-478
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
AINSTHDFLT
(related to
facilities only)
PARTNERNE
STATUS
COMPLETE,
IN-PROGRESS
Third Party
Modules
Yes, No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-479
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window, invoked for a shelf, provides the following
information:
Parameter
Values
Description
Secondary State
Provisioned Type
PSS64
PSS36
Actual Type
PSS64, PSS36
Matrix Size
960
Name
Primary State
1920
3840
Switching
Capacity 1
Switching
Capacity 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-480
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Description
Describes the SDH/SONET Switching
Capacity of the shelf in the unit of GBit/s
Switching
Capacity STH
Connected TRU
NONE
HPCFAP-1-<shelf>-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-481
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window, invoked for a shelf, provides the following
information:
Parameter
Values
Description
Name
TRU-1-128
Primary State
Provisioned Type
TRU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-482
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window, invoked for an I/O card, provides the following
information:
Parameter
Details
Name
Primary State
Indicates the primary state of the I/O card; see Primary and
secondary states of system components (p. 5-541).
Secondary State
Indicates the secondary state of the I/O card; see Primary and
secondary states of system components (p. 5-541).
Provisioned Type
Indicates the type of I/O card which is provisioned for the slot.
Actual Type
Indicates the type of I/O card which is currently present in the slot.
Automatic-In-Service
Note that the AINS mode cannot be changed anymore once the I/O
card is plugged.
Autoprovisioning
ON - autoprovisioning is allowed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-483
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General
The following general parameters are available for optical SDH/SONET ports:
Table 5-9
Parameter
Details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-484
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-9
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Name
Indicates the access identifier (AID) of the optical SDH/SONET port; see Overview
of access identifiers (p. 5-548).
Examples of possible AIDs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 are:
STM16-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
STM-16 port on a 24 Multirate ANY client port card
STM64-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
STM-64 port on a 10 10G ANY client port card
STM16-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
STM-16 port on a 24 Multirate ANY client port card
STM64-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
STM-64 port on a 10 10G ANY client port card
Primary State
Indicates the primary state of the I/O card; see Primary and secondary states of system
components (p. 5-541).
Secondary State
Indicates the secondary state of the I/O card; see Primary and secondary states of
system components (p. 5-541).
Port Type
Indicates the type of port facility, see Types of optical SDH/SONET port facilities
(p. 5-484).
Possible values are:
2).
In SDH mode:
STM-1 transparently mapped into ODU0
STM-4 transparently mapped into ODU0
STM-16 transparently mapped into ODU1
STM-64 transparently mapped into ODU2
In SONET mode:
OC-3 transparently mapped into ODU0
OC-12 transparently mapped into ODU0
OC-48 transparently mapped into ODU1
OC-192 transparently mapped into ODU2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-485
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-9
Parameter
Details
Manager Access
Control
(continued)
MNGPLN - Port is under the control of the management plane, that is under the
control of a management system.
CP&MNGPLN - Port control is shared between the control plane and the
management plane.
[not specified] - Port control is not yet assigned, that is the port is neither
controlled by CP nor MNGPLN.
The following AINS parameters are available for optical SDH/SONET ports:
Table 5-10
Parameter
Details
Automatic
In-Service
Threshold
Specifies how long an input signal must be present on the facility without a failure
condition before the system automatically transitions the facility into the In-Service
state.
The threshold is given in the HHH-MM (hours-minutes) format, where HHH
ranges from 0 to 168, and MM ranges from 0 to 59. The overall value range is from
0 to 168 hours. The default value is determined by the AINSTHDFLT; see General
properties of the system as a whole (p. 5-470).
Automatic
In-Service Timer
Specifies how much time is currently remaining on the AINS timer before the facility
is placed into the In-Service state. The timer value, given in the HH-MM
(hours-minutes) format, is truncated to the next highest minute - for example, a timer
value of 1 minute and 5 seconds is displayed as 00-02.
Note that the current value of the AINS timer is not persistent through an FLC switch
or cold restart. All running AINS timers will be reset and restarted following these
events.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-486
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-10
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Automatic
In-Service Criteria
Determines which fault criteria must be present to trigger the state transition to the
In-Service state.
NOLOS - the clear event of a loss of signal (LOS) condition triggers the state
transition.
NOSF - the clear event of the last present signal fail (SF) condition triggers the state
transition.
Port monitoring mode, determines whether the port is monitored for defects or not, and
whether detected alarm conditions are reported or not.
Possible settings are:
NMON (Not monitored) - The incoming port signal is monitored for defects but the
conditions defined by the Primary State Correlation parameter are not reported.
MON (Monitored) - The incoming port signal is monitored for defects, and
Primary State
Correlation (valid
LOS - Loss of signal (LOS) conditions are not reported when the port monitoring
mode is NMON (Not monitored).
ALL - When the port monitoring mode is NMON (Not monitored) then no alarm
The following trace messaging parameters are available for optical SDH/SONET ports:
Table 5-11
Parameter
Details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-487
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-11
Parameter
Details
Expected
Section Trace
Msg. Format
Determines the format of the expected section trace identifier (J0 byte).
Expected
Section Trace
Message
Trace
Monitoring On
Indicates whether the receive signal is monitored for the detection of a trace identifier
mismatch (TIM).
Possible settings are:
Trace Mismatch
Consequent
Action
Determines if consequent actions (insertion of an all-ones signal, and SSF signaling towards
the client layer) are to be performed if a trace identifier mismatch (TIM) is detected.
The only possible value for this parameter is Yes, that is consequent actions are enabled by
default. However, the setting of this parameter is only relevant if TIM detection is enabled
(Trace Monitoring On).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-488
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTU2
OTU2E
OTU3
OTU3E2
OTU4
General
The following general parameters are available for OTU port facilities:
Table 5-12
Parameter
Details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-489
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-12
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Name
Indicates the access identifier (AID) of the OTU port facility; see Overview of access
identifiers (p. 5-548).
Examples of possible AIDs for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 are:
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,2}
OTU3 on a 2 40G ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{33-39,41-47}-{1}
OTU3E2 on a 1 43G Switchponder 43SCUP
OTU-{1}-{1-9}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OTU2E on a 10 10G ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{33-48}-{1-4}
OTU2E on a 4 11G Switchponder 11QCUP
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OTU2 on a 10 10G ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{33-48}-{1-4}
OTU2 on a 4 11G Switchponder 11QCUP
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,2}
OTU3 on a 2 40G ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
OTU3E2 on a 1 43G Switchponder 43SCUP
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
OTU2E on a 10 10G ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
OTU2 on a 10 10G ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1}
OTU4 on a 130SCUP)
Primary State
Indicates the primary state of the OTU port facility; see Primary and secondary states
of system components (p. 5-541).
Secondary State
Indicates the secondary state of the OTU port facility; see Primary and secondary
states of system components (p. 5-541).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-490
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-12
Parameter
Details
Manager Access
Control
(continued)
MNGPLN - Port is under the control of the management plane, that is under the
control of a management system.
CP&MNGPLN - Port control is shared between the control plane and the
management plane.
[not specified] - Port control is not yet assigned, that is the port is neither
controlled by control plane nor management plane.
The following AINS parameters are available for OTU port facilities:
Table 5-13
Parameter
Details
Automatic
In-Service
Threshold
Specifies how long an input signal must be present on the facility without a failure
condition before the system automatically transitions the facility into the In-Service
state.
The threshold is given in the HHH-MM (hours-minutes) format, where HHH
ranges from 0 to 168, and MM ranges from 0 to 59. The overall value range is from
0 to 168 hours. The default value is determined by the AINSTHDFLT; see General
properties of the system as a whole (p. 5-470).
Automatic
In-Service Timer
Specifies how much time is currently remaining on the AINS timer before the facility
is placed into the In-Service state. The timer value, given in the HH-MM
(hours-minutes) format, is truncated to the next highest minute - for example, a timer
value of 1 minute and 5 seconds is displayed as 00-02.
Note that the current value of the AINS timer is not persistent through an FLC switch
or cold restart. All running AINS timers will be reset and restarted following these
events.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-491
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trace Messaging
The following trace messaging parameters are available for OTU port facilities:
Table 5-14
Parameter
Details
Expected Incoming
Destination Access
Point Identifier
The expected Destination Access Point Identifier (DAPI) part of the Trail Trace
Identifier (TTI) on the OTUk layer.
Expected Incoming
Source Access Point
Identifier
Hexadecimal format
TTI values are displayed as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The TTI consists of
an X followed by 15 hexadecimal values, each represented by 2 ASCII
characters.
Text format
TTI values are displayed as a text string consisting of 15 ASCII characters. ASCII
NULL characters (00 hex) are represented by . character. If the TTI consists of
ASCII NULL characters only, then 15 . characters will be displayed. If the TTI
contains unsupported characters, then a question mark (? character) will be
displayed for those characters.
The expected Source Access Point Identifier (SAPI) part of the Trail Trace Identifier
(TTI) on the OTUk layer.
The following formats are supported:
Hexadecimal format
TTI values are displayed as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The TTI consists of
an X followed by 15 hexadecimal values, each represented by 2 ASCII
characters.
Text format
TTI values are displayed as a text string consisting of 15 ASCII characters. ASCII
NULL characters (00 hex) are represented by . character. If the TTI consists of
ASCII NULL characters only, then 15 . characters will be displayed. If the TTI
contains unsupported characters, then a question mark (? character) will be
displayed for those characters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-492
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-14
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Transmit
Destination Access
Point Identifier
The transmitted Destination Access Point Identifier (DAPI) part of the Trail Trace
Identifier (TTI) on the OTUk layer.
Transmit Operator
Specific Field
hexadecimal format
TTI values are displayed as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The TTI consists of
an X followed by 15 hexadecimal values, each represented by 2 ASCII
characters.
Text format
TTI values are displayed as a text string consisting of 15 ASCII characters. ASCII
NULL characters (00 hex) are represented by . character. If the TTI consists of
ASCII NULL characters only, then 15 . characters will be displayed. If the TTI
contains unsupported characters, then a question mark (? character) will be
displayed for those characters.
The Transmit Operator Specific Identifier part of the Trail Trace Identifier (TTI) on the
OTUk layer.
The following formats are supported:
Transmit Source
Access Point
Identifier
hexadecimal format
TTI values are displayed as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The TTI consists of
an X followed by 64 hexadecimal values, each represented by 2 ASCII
characters.
Text format
TTI values are displayed as a text string consisting of 32 ASCII characters. ASCII
NULL characters (00 hex) are represented by . character. If the TTI consists of
ASCII NULL characters only, then 32 . characters will be displayed. If the TTI
contains unsupported characters, then a question mark (? character) will be
displayed for those characters.
The transmitted Source Access Point Identifier (SAPI) part of the Trail Trace Identifier
(TTI) on the OTUk layer.
The following formats are supported:
hexadecimal format
TTI values are displayed as a sequence of hexadecimal values. The TTI consists of
an X followed by 15 hexadecimal values, each represented by 2 ASCII
characters.
Text format
TTI values are displayed as a text string consisting of 15 ASCII characters. ASCII
NULL characters (00 hex) are represented by . character. If the TTI consists of
ASCII NULL characters only, then 15 . characters will be displayed. If the TTI
contains unsupported characters, then a question mark (? character) will be
displayed for those characters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-493
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-14
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Trail Trace
Identifier
Monitoring
Indicates whether the receive signal is monitored for the detection of a trace identifier
mismatch (TIM). If monitoing is enabled, then this parameter further determines if
only DAPI, only SAPI, or both SAPI and DAPI are monitored for the comparison
between the incoming and the expected TTI.
Possible settings are:
DAPI - TIM detection is enabled and only DAPI is used for that purpose.
SAPI - TIM detection is enabled and only SAPI is used for that purpose.
SAPIDAPI - TIM detection is enabled, and both DAPI and SAPI are used for that
purpose.
Trace Mismatch
Consequent Action
The following ingress error monitoring parameters are available for OTU port facilities:
Table 5-15
Parameter
Details
Burst Interval
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-494
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-15
Parameter
Details
Burst Threshold
Indicates the number of errored blocks that must be exceeded before a second is
declared a degraded second.
Possible settings are:
Forward Error
Correction Enable
Mode
Indicates if Forward Error Correction (FEC) is used or not, and the directionality of the
FEC, if used.
Possible settings are:
NO FEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-495
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-15
Parameter
Details
Forward Error
Correction Type
EFEC Enhanced FEC (proprietary) for 10G interfaces (= AMCCs enhanced FEC)
AFEC Alcatel-Lucent enhanced FEC Compliant with G.975.1 for 40G interfaces (=
EFEC2 Enhanced FEC Compliant with G.975.1 for 10G interfaces (enhanced FEC
for 10G)
Note:
Prior to R5.0 the following definition was used:
EFEC Enhanced FEC Compliant with G.975.1 (= ALU's enhanced FEC for 10G)
which in case of a In-Service-Upgrade (ISU) to R5.0 was migrated to the new R5.0
EFEC2 definition.
Values valid for:
OTU3E2: AFEC
OTU3: RSFEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-496
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window, invoked for an optical module, provides the following
information:
Note: Fixed ports are handled as "SFP/XFP modules" which are already plugged in,
when the card is plugged in the system.
Fixed Ports are available on the following IO-Cards:
Parameter
Details
Name
Primary State
Indicates the primary state of the optical module; see Primary and
secondary states of system components (p. 5-541).
Secondary State
Indicates the secondary state of the optical module; see Primary and
secondary states of system components (p. 5-541).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-497
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Provisioned Type
SR12G7TU (S2G7D2I )
IR12G7TU (S2G7D15E )
LR12G7TU (S2G7D40E )
LR22G7TU (S2G7D80E )
IR12G7AU (S2G7M15I )
1000BSXU (S1GE05I )
1000BLXU (S1GE10I )
1000BZXU (S1GE80I )
SR111G1AU (X11M10I )
IR211G1AU (X11M40I )
LR211G1AU (X11M80E )
LRT11G1TU (X11MDTNC )
SR<xx>W11G1TUC (<xx>={47,49,51,53,55,57,59,61};
X11MC<xx>SC)
LR<xx>W11G1TUC (<xx>={47,49,51,53,55,57,59,61};
X11MC<xx>LC)
LR<xx>W11G1TUI (<xx>={47,49,51,53,55,57,59,61};
X11MC<xx>LI;)
SR10G155TU (S155S15I)
SL10G155TU (S155S40I)
SL20G155TU (S155S80I)
SR10G622TU (S622S15I)
SL10G622TU (S622S40I)
SL20G622TU (S622S80I)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-498
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Actual Type
Automatic-In-Service
Note that the AINS mode cannot be changed anymore once the
optical module is plugged.
Autoprovisioning
ON - autoprovisioning is allowed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-499
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Client-Select
STM64T
STM64 over OTN transparent (STM64 mapped transparently to
ODU2 terminated)
OC192T
OC192 over OTN transparent (OC192 mapped transparently to
ODU2 terminated)
STM16T
STM16 over OTN transparent (STM16 mapped transparently to
ODU1 terminated)
OC48T
OC48 over OTN transparent (OC48 mapped transparently to
ODU1 terminated)
STM4T
STM4 over OTN transparent (STM4 mapped transparently to
ODU0 terminated)
OC12T
OC12 over OTN transparent (OC12 mapped transparently to
ODU0 terminated)
STM1T
STM1 over OTN transparent (STM1 mapped transparently to
ODU0 terminated)
OC3T
OC3 over OTN transparent (OC3 mapped transparently to
ODU0 terminated)
STM64
STM64 terminated
OC192
OC192 terminated
STM16
STM16 terminated
OC48
OC48 terminated
OTU2
OTU2 terminated
OTU2E
OTU2E terminated
OTU3
OTU3 terminated
OTU3E2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTU3E2 terminated
5-500
1830 PSS
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OTU4
OTU4 terminated
GBEODU0
GBE over OTN (GBE mapped to ODU0 terminated)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window, invoked for a GBE/GBE10 port, is used to display
parameters of the GBE/GBE10 port.
Property windows typically use mutable tables, which contain editable or non-editable
text fields, spinners, or combo boxes.
Description
The Properties - General window, invoked for a GBE/GBE10 port, provides the
following information:
Parameter
Values
Details
Command Mode
Forced
Normal
Name
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64:
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-10}
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36:
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12,
13,16-21}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,
12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
Primary State
Indicates the primary state of the GBE/GBE10 port; see Primary and
secondary states of system components (p. 5-541).
Secondary State
Indicates the secondary state of the GBE/GBE10 port ; see Primary and
secondary states of system components (p. 5-541).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-501
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
CSF Laser
C(onsequent)
A(ction)
No Action
No action is to be
performed on the
facility in case of CSF
Laser Shutdown
Laser-shutdown is to
be performed on the
facility in case of CSF
Unidirectional
connections
For unidirectional
connections the following
has to be set:
SSF Laser
C(onsequent)
A(ction)
No Action
No action is to be
performed on the
facility in case of SSF
Laser Shutdown
Laser-shutdown is to
be performed on the
facility in case of SSF
Unidirectional
connections
For unidirectional
connections the following
has to be set:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-502
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Flow Control
Mode
NO-PAUSE
ASYMMETRIC-PAUSE
Asymmetric pause
toward link partner.
The transmitter can
transmit pause frames
but will not process
received pause frames
(Factory Default)This
value is only
applicable for the
following PORTTYPE
value: GFPFODU
ASYMMETRIC-PAUSEOPENLOOP
Asymmetric pause
toward link partner
with buffer. In this
function, pause frames
are transmitted at
regular intervals, as
against sending pause
frames when its
receiver buffer reaches
certain level as is done
in Asymmetrical Pause
Function. This value is
only applicable for the
following PORTTYPE
value: GFPFODU
TRANSP
5-503
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Port Type
CBRODU
Ethernet is mapped as
CBR into ODUn (i.e.
PLDTYPE of
corresponding ODUPTF is
equal to value
'1000BASEX' in case of
GBE or 'BSCBR'in case of
GBE10)
GFPFODU
CBR
Mapping of GBEn as
CBR
GFPF
PPOS
Mapping of GBEn as
extended payload
(AMCC mapping)
PPOSC
Mapping of GBEn as
extended payload
(CAMCC mapping)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-504
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Associated TID
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64:
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-10}
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36:
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12,
13,16-21}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,
12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
Associated AID
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-10}
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36:
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12,
13,16-21}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,
12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
NE Native AID
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,
33-48}-{1-10}
Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-36:
GBE-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,12,
13,16-21}-{1-24}
GBE10-{1-7}-{1-9}-{2-9,
12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-505
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
ALMPROF (visible
via Properties
Alarm Severity View)
1-40 alphanumeric
characters (plus '-')
assigned as the userlabel
for the desired profile.
Factory Default is
userlabel for ASAP#1 for
this entity type
TCAPROF
menu)
<user-label>1-40
alphanumeric characters
(plus '-') assigned as the
userlabel for the desired
profile.
Factory Default is
userlabel for THP#1 for
this entity type
[{0-167}-{0-59}], [168-0]
Automatic
In-Service Timer
Velues:
[{0-167}-{0-59}],
[168-0] (
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-506
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Automatic
In-Service
Criteria
NOLOS
the clear event for LOS
triggers the state
transition
NOSF
the clear event for last
present SF condition
triggers the state
transition
Port Mode
Primary State
Correlation
LOS, ALL
AUTO
the conditions as defined by PSTCORR
are not reported and transition to.
MON
if condition as defined by AINSCRIT is
cleared and AINSTIMER has expired.
NMON
the conditions as defined by PSTCORR
are not reported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-507
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Manager Access
Control
<null>
CP
MNGPLN,
TRANSP
Auto-negotiation
frames are passed
through transparently.
This value is only
applicable for the
following PORTTYPE
value: CBRODU
Restriction:
The parameter is
applicable for the
following GBE
command modifier
values: GBE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-508
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General window, invoked for a ODU path termination facilty,is used to
display and modify parameter of the ODU path termination facilty.
Property windows typically use mutable tables, which contain editable or non-editable
text fields, spinners, or combo boxes.
Description
The Properties - General window, invoked for a ODU path termination facilty, provides
the following information:
Parameter
Details
Command Mode
NE Native AID
Forced
Normal
ODU4-{1-7}-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}
ODU3E2-{1-7}-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}
ODU3-{1-7}-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}
ODU2E-{1-7}-{shelf}-{slot}-{1-10}
ODU2-{1-7}-{1-9}-72-{101-4802}
ODU2-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
ODU1-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
ODU0-{1-7}-{1-9}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-509
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Primary State
IS-NR
In Service - Normal
IS-ANR
In Service - Abnormal
OOS-AU
OOS-AUMA
OOS-MA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-510
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Secondary State
Secondary state, specifies the secondary state of the addressed ODU PTF.
Possible values are:
AINS
Automatic In-Service
BUSY
Busy
CP
Control Plane
CPMP
CPMPE
DSBLD
Disabled.
FAF
Facility Failure
MDLT
Manual Delete
MP
Management Plane
NOIMP
PMD
PSI
SDEE
STBYH
STBYS
TRM
WRK
Working
UAS
Unassigned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-511
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Payload Type
1000BASEX
ASCBR
BSCBR
ODUk multiplexed structure with 2.5G Tributary Slots for OTU2 and
above rates.
ODUMPT21
AMCC
CAMCC
OLDAMCC
GFP
Indicates the kind of format of signal carrying client signal fail indication.
The signal is generated by the addressed ODU to the far end.
(valid for
GBE10ODU2
facilities only!)
LCS
Loss of Client signal. GFP frame reporting CSF indication has UPI
equal to 1, that means Loss of Client signal, this value is not
recommended by Standard ITU-T G.7041.
LCCS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-512
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
NONE
FWD
FWDBWD
AINS parameters visible when selecting AINS in the Column Groups box.
Automatic
In-Service
Threshold
Specifies how long an input signal must be present on the facility without a
failure condition before the system transitions the facility into the
In-Service state. [{0-167}-{0-59}], [168-0] Time, specifies the duration of
an alarm free signal, in HH-MM format, where value HH indicates the time
duration in hours and value MM indicates the time duration in minutes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-513
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Automatic
In-Service Timer
Specifies how much time is currently remaining on the AINS timer before
the facility is placed in service.
Trace parameters visible when selecting Trail Trace Identifier (TTI) in the Column Groups box.
Expected
incoming Source
Access point
Identifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-514
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Trail Trace
Identiifer
Monitoring
DAPI
TIM detection is enabled and only DAPI is used for the purpose.
SAPI
TIM detection is enabled and only SAPI is used for the purpose.
SAPIDAPI
TIM detection is enabled and both DAPI and SAPI are used for the
purpose.
Trace Mismatch
Consequent
Action
DISABLE
ENABLE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-515
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Transmit
Operator
Specific Field
2 10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-516
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Burst Threshold
1 329492
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-517
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Associated TCMs
ODU4TCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1- 6}-AM
TCM NIM at ODU4 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU4TCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1- 6}-AM
TCM Termination at ODU4 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU3E2TCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1- 6}-AM
TCM NIM at ODU3E2 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU3E2TCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1- 6}-AM
TCM Termination at ODU3E2 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU3TCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1-6}- AM
TCM NIM at ODU3 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU3TCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1-6}- AM
TCM Termination at ODU3 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU2TCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1-6}- AM
TCM NIM at ODU2 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU2TCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-<ID>-{1-6}- AM
TCM Termination at ODU2 Termination on virtual or preset plane
ODU2ETCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-10}-{1- 6}-AM
TCM NIM at transparent mapping ODU2E Termination on
10XANY10G
ODU2ETCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-10}-{1- 6}-AM
TCM Termination at transparent mapping ODU2E Termination on
10XANY10G
ODU2TCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-10}-{1-6 }-AM
TCM NIM at transparent mapping ODU2 Termination on
10XANY10G
ODU2TCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-10}-{1-6} -AM
TCM Termination at transparent mapping ODU2 Termination on
10XANY10G
ODU1TCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-24}-{1-6 }-AM
TCM NIM at transparent mapping ODU1 Termination on
24XANYMR
ODU1TCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-24}-{1-6} -AM
TCM Termination at transparent mapping ODU1 Termination on
24XANYMR
ODU0TCN-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-24}-{1-6 }-AM
TCM NIM at transparent mapping ODU0 Termination on
24XANYMR
ODU0TCT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{1-24}-{1-6} -AM
TCM Termination at transparent mapping ODU0 Termination on
24XANYMR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-518
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Payload
Structure
Specifies the ODU payload Structure of the ODUPTF entity (i.e. the
embedded tributaries in terms of ODU1, ODU2). The string must match the
pattern [T#PN-ts[-ts-tsts][& T#PN-ts[-ts-ts-ts]]]* where PN is Port Number
of the constituent and T is the constituent Type with the following general
allowed values: ODU1, ODU2 and "ts" is the Multi Stucture Identier (MSI)
slot number . The overall bandwidth of the specified constituents must
exactly match the rate of the port. This parameter isonly valid when the
PLDTYPE=ODUM and when the ODUPTF is not ODU1
Manager Access
Control
<null>
CP
MNGPLN,
TERM
TRANSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-519
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Properties - General - TCM window, invoked for a TCM facilty, is used to display
and modify parameter of a Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) entity.
Description
Details
IS
In Service
OOS
Out Of Service
This parameter is valid for both TCM NIM and TCM termination.
Secondary State
Secondary state, specifies the secondary state to which the facility is set.
Possible values are:
AINS
Automatic In-Service
AINS-DEA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-520
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
NE Native AID
OTUODU4TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3E2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1,2}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at higher order ODU2E NIM on a 10G ANY Multiport Card)
OTUODU2ETCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1-4}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at higher order ODU2 NIM on a 10G ANY Multiport Card)
OTUODU2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1-4}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU3TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU3 NIM which is contained in ODU4 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU3E2ODU3TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU3 NIM which is contained in ODU3E2 on virtual
or preset plane)
ODU4ODU2ETCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU2E NIM which is contained in ODU4 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU3E2ODU2ETCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU2E NIM which is contained in ODU3E2 on virtual
or preset plane)
ODU3ODU2ETCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU2E NIM which is contained in ODU3 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU4ODU2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU2 NIM which is contained in ODU4 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU3E2ODU2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU2 NIM which is contained in ODU3E2 on virtual
or preset plane)
ODU3ODU2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU2 NIM which is contained in ODU3 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU4ODU1TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU1 NIM which is contained in ODU4 on virtual or
preset plane)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
5-521
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
NE Native AID
(continued)
ODU3E2ODU1TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU1 NIM which is contained in ODU3E2 on virtual
or preset plane)
ODU3ODU1TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU1 NIM which is contained in ODU3 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU2ODU1TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-8}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU1 NIM which is contained in ODU2 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU4ODU0TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU0 NIM which is contained in ODU4 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU3E2ODU0TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU0 NIM which is contained in ODU3E2 on virtual
or preset plane)
ODU3ODU0TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU0 NIM which is contained in ODU3 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU2ODU0TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-8}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM NIM at lower order ODU0 NIM which is contained in ODU2 on virtual or
preset plane)
ODU4TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3E2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2ETCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-AM
ODU1TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1-24}-{1-6}-AM
ODU0TCN-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-AM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-522
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
NE Native AID
(continued)
OTUODU4TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3E2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1,2}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM Termination at higher order ODU2E NIM on a 10G ANY Multiport Card)
OTUODU2ETCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1-4}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
(TCM Termination at higher order ODU2 NIM on a 10G ANY Multiport Card)
OTUODU2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1-4}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU3TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU3TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2ETCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2ETCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU1TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
NE Native AID
(continued)
ODU3E2ODU1TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU1TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU1TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-8}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU0TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU0TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU0TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU0TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-8}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3E2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{ID}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2ETCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-AM
ODU1TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{1-24}-{1-6}-AM
ODU0TCT-1-{shelf}-{slot}-{port}-{1-6}-AM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-524
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Command Mode
AINS parameters
Automatic
In-Service
Threshold
Specifies how long an input signal must be present on the facility without a failure
condition before the system transitions the facility into the In-Service state.
[{0-167}-{0-59}], [168-0] Time, specifies the duration of an alarm free signal, in
HH-MM format, where value HH indicates the time duration in hours and value MM
indicates the time duration in minutes.
This parameter is valid for both TCM NIM and TCM termination.
Determines if consequent action of sending AIS will be taken on the TCM defect.
Possible values are:
ENABLE
DISABLE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-525
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Expected incoming
Destination Access
point Identifier
Expected incoming Destination Access Point Identifier (EXPDAPI). If the ASCII mode
is used then the double quotes are mandatory and the string can be less than 15
characters, while if the HEXA mode is used the prefix 'X' is mandatory and there shall
be exactly 30 characters.
Expected incoming Destination Access Point Identifier. Displayed either as HEX text
or Quoted ASCII string.
Hex textI
This consists of 15 ASCII characters. If the trace to be displayed is all ASCII NULLs
(00 Hex), then 15 "." characters will be displayed. If the it contains ASCII characters
other than those listed here, then the "?" character will be displayed for those
characters. The string starts with the first character after the CRC byte.
Expected incoming
Source Access point
Identifier
Expected incoming Source Access Point Identifier (EXPDAPI). If the ASCII mode is
used then the double quotes are mandatory and the string can be less than 15
characters, while if the HEXA mode is used the prefix 'X' is mandatory and there shall
be exactly 30 characters.
Expected incoming Source Access Point Identifier. Displayed either as HEX text or
Quoted ASCII stringT.
Hex textI
This consists of 15 ASCII characters. If the trace to be displayed is all ASCII NULLs
(00 Hex), then 15 "." characters will be displayed. If the it contains ASCII characters
other than those listed here, then the "?" character will be displayed for those
characters. The string starts with the first character after the CRC byte.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-526
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
LTC defect
Response
ENABLE
DISABLE
Determines if the incoming/received signal is monitored for the detection of Trail Trace
Identifier Mismatch defect. If monitoring is enabled, further determines if only DAPI,
only SAPI or both SAPI/DAPI are monitored for TIM defect generation.
Possible values are:
DAPI
TIM detection is enabled and only DAPI is used for the purpose.
SAPI
TIM detection is enabled and only SAPI is used for the purpose.
SAPIDAPI
TIM detection is enabled and both DAPI and SAPI are used for the purpose.
This parameter is valid for both TCM NIM and TCM termination
Trail Trace
Identifier Mismatch
Response
This parameter determines whether a Consequent Action will be taken such as sending
AIS for a TCM termination or use for switch criteria for SNCP for TCM NIM or pass
the received signal upon detection of a TCM layer trace Mismatch at its input.
DISABLE
ENABLE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-527
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Transmit
Destination Access
point Identifier
This parameter determines the Transmit TTI channel content of the Path Monitoring
overhead of an TCM information structure.
There are two options for entering this parameter: Hex String or Quoted String.
Hex textI
This consists of 0-15 ASCII valid input characters. The string will be padded with
ASCII NULL character if length is less than 15. The header byte is generated by the
NE
This parameter is valid for TCM termination only.
Transmit Operator
Specific Identifier
This parameter determines the Transmit TTI channel content of the Path Monitoring
overhead of an TCM information structure.
There are two options for entering this parameter: Hex String or Quoted String.
Hex textI
This consists of 0-32 ASCII valid input characters. The string will be padded with
ASCII NULL character if length is less than 32. The header byte is generated by the
NE
This parameter is valid for TCM termination only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-528
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Transmit Source
Access point
Identifier
This parameter determines the Transmit TTI channel content of the Path Monitoring
overhead of an TCM information structure.
Displayed either as HEX text or Quoted ASCII string.
Hex textI
This consists of 15 ASCII characters. If the trace to be displayed is all ASCII NULLs
(00 Hex), then 15 "." characters will be displayed.
Degraded Supervision parameters
Burst Interval
Specifies the number of consecutive bad seconds (see parameter Burst Threshold) to
be detected before declaring a signal degrade defect (SDBER) . The defect is cleared if
Burst Interval consecutive good seconds (see parameter Burst Threshold) are
detected.
Possible values are:
Burst Threshold
2 10
Ingress Burst Threshold specifies a number of errored blocks on the TCM layer. A
second is declared as good if the number of detected errored blocks within one second
is less than BRSTTH; otherwise the second is declared as bad second.
This parameter is valid for both TCM NIM and TCM termination
Possible values are:
for ODU0
{1-10210} for TCM carried by ODU0 (ODU0TCM)
for ODU1
{1-20420} for TCM carried by ODU1 (ODU1TCM)
for ODU2
{1-82026} for TCM carried by ODU2 (ODU2TCM)
for ODU2E
{1-82300} for TCM carried by ODU2E (ODU2ETCM)
for ODU3
{1-329492} for TCM carried by ODU3 (ODU3TCM)
for ODU3E2
{1-341478} for TCM carried by ODU3E2 (ODU3E2TCM)
for ODU4
{1-856388} for TCM carried by ODU4 (ODU4TCM)
TCM parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-529
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Level
Position
AM
After Matrix
BM
Before Matrix
This parameter is valid for TCM termination only.
Role
TCT
TCN
Overhead Remove
The received TCM OH is discarded and all zeros TCM overhead is inserted.
This parameter is valid for TCM termination only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-530
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In the following table, OCh port represents the port to which the optical
pertains.
The Properties - General window, invoked for an optical , provides the following
information:
Parameter
Details
Name
Primary State
Indicates the secondary state of the OCh port; see for general
description.
IS In-Service
Secondary State
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
Indicates the secondary state of the OCh port; see for general
description.
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-531
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Frequency in GHz
AINS -
Indicates how long an input signal must be present on the OCh port
without a failure condition before the system takes the OCh port into
the In-Service state.
Automatic In-Service
Threshold
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-532
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
AINS -
Indicates the criteria for taking the OCh port into the In-Service
state.
Automatic In-Service
Criteria
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-533
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
AINS -
Determines if the conditions for the facility are reported or not. The
criteria for leaving the AUTO state autonomously depends on the
current value of the parameter Automatic In-Service Criteria. In
addition the set of conditions which are considered for the alarm
correlation with Port Mode depends on the current value of the
parameter Primary State Correlation.
Port Mode
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
LOS
ALL
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-534
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Misc. -
Misc. -
OTU Level
Misc. -Encoding
OTU2
OTU2E
OTU3
OTU3E2
OTU4
NRZ
Non-Return-to-Zero (for OTU2/OTU2E)
NRZ
Non-Return-to-Zero (for OTU3)
COHPMBPSK
Coherent Polarisation Multiplexing Binary Phase-Shift Keying
(for OTU3E2)
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-535
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
On
Off
CHANWK1
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
CHANWK2
UPLINK
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-536
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
CMDMDE
RMCONPORT
BW
FIXED
TUNABLE
UPLINK
TCAPROF
UPLINK
TXDELTAPOWER
UPLINK
TXTARGETPOWER
UPLINK
The parameter specifies the target transmit power (unit: mBm)at the
addressed WaveTracker (TXTARGETPOWER: Transmit Target
Power).
{-9999 - 9999}
The parameter is applicable for the following OCH types:
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-537
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
WTENABLE
WTENABLEKEYS
UPLINK
WTENABLEPWRCTL
UPLINK
UPLINK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-538
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The View Duplex Switching Equipments window displays the parameters related to the
equipment protection groups in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system; it provides the
following information:
Parameter
Details
Active
Standby
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-539
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
GROUP STATE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-540
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IS In service
The entity is capable and allowed to provide its provisioned functions. The IS primary
state usually relates to equipment entities.
Secondary states
ACT Active
The entity is currently in use and has spare operating capacity for further usage
demand. When applied to a facility entity, this value means that the entity is
cross-connected (the entity is a constituent leg of a cross-connection) and additional
cross-connection capacity is available, such that more one-way cross-connections can
be added.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-541
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BUSY Busy
The entity is currently in use and has no spare operating capacity for further usage
demand. For example, a head end bridge with 2 broadcast legs, or a connected test
access port are both BUSY.
CP Control Plane
The facility or connection is under management by the control plane for data services.
DSBLD Disabled
The facility entity is prohibited from carrying traffic, for example because the
required supporting equipment is not provisioned or provisioned for another service.
LPBK Loopback
A loopback activity is currently being performed on the entity.
MT Maintenance
The standby FLC is in a temporary maintenance state (for example during
Backup/Restore).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-542
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The performance monitoring counters (current and history counters) have been
removed from memory.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-543
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For an equipment port of an IO card with matrix interface, SDEE is set if:
the associated OCn/STMn/GBE10 facility is in SDEE (port with non OTN client
port)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-544
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Port/SFP/XFP has the SDEE SST set if at least one Facility supported by it has
the SDEE SST set
Just the presence of a facility does not constitute SDEE on the Port/SFP/XFP
SDEE is set by control plane, if:
The OTU is assigned to MP, associated TCM entity is assigned to CP. Note, that
this state is a transient state. It will be left automatically by CP removing the TCM
entity.
The detailed state of affected entities is the following: OCH/OTU/OTUODUn:
SST=MP,SDEE; MGRACD=MGNPLN
The OTU is assigned to MP, associated TCM is not assigned to any plane. Note,
that this state is outside the CP scope.
The detailed state of affected entities is the following: OCH/OTU/OTUODUn:
SST=MP,SDEE; MGRACD=MGNPLN
The OTU and associated TCM entity are assigned to MP. Note, that this state is
outside the CP scope.
The detailed state of affected entities is the following: OCH/OTU/OTUODUn:
SST=MP,SDEE; MGRACD=MGNPLN
The OTU and associated TCM entity are not assigned to any plane. Note, that this
state is outside the CP scope.
The detailed state of affected entities is the following: OCH/OTU/OTUODUn:
SST=SDEE; MGRACD=<>
The OTU is not assigned to any plane, associated TCM is assigned to MP. Note,
that this state is outside the CP scope.
The detailed state of affected entities is the following: OCH/OTU/OTUODUn:
SST=SDEE; MGRACD=<>
The OTU is not assigned to any plane, the associated TCM entity is assigned to
CP.
The detailed state of affected entities is the following: OCH/OTU/OTUODUn:
SST=SDEE; MGRACD=<>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-545
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TRM Terminated
The facility entity has been given termination parameters, that means, the entity has
been connected and its path has been terminated (as a result of the connection) or the
parent entity has been terminated as a result of its subentities being connected. For
line entities, this state indicates that the entity is supporting cross-connections.
UAS Unassigned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-546
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The entity has not been assigned with the necessary provisioning data. No service
activity or maintenance activity (including monitoring, testing, or service recovery) is
permitted in this state since the necessary data has not been assigned.
UEQ Unequipped
There is no system component in the addressed position.
WRK Working
The entity is currently providing service as part of a protection group (for instance,
selector is selecting this entity in a path protection configuration).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-547
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Access identifiers (AIDs) are used for addressing particular components within an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system, like a shelf, circuit pack, slot or port, for example.
Types of access identifiers
Equipment AIDs
Facility AIDs - AIDs related to Input/Output (I/O) facilities of the system
Timing Reference AIDs
ASAP (Alarm Severity Assigned Profile) AIDs
The following conventions are used for the description of access identifiers:
If certain values (or a value range) are possible for an entry, then these values are
given in curly braces, for example:
{1,17,33,49} represents a discrete set of possible values
{1-9} represents a value range
Optional AID components are enclosed in square brackets, for example [SFP/XFP#].
Equipment AIDs
where:
equipment name represents the type of equipment
bay# represents the bay number
bay has always the fixed value 1
slot# represents the slot number or position within the shelf in which the
equipment is present
SFP/XFP/PORT# represents the SFP, XFP, or port number within the slot
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-548
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The numeric shelf/slot/ID values depend on the shelf type (for example PSS-64, PSS-36).
The shelf/slot/ID ranges are defined in the following tables.
Table 5-16
Value ranges for the shelf field in the AID depending on the shelf
type
Shelf type
Shelf range
Description
PSS64
{1}
PSS36
{1-31}
TRU
{128-255}
Table 5-17
Supported PROVISIONEDTYPES
SHELF
PSS36, PSS64
BTC
PF
PSF3T8, PSFC
FAN
FAN3T8
FLC
ECHC, FLC36EA
MTX
24XANYMR
8XANYMR
8XETH1G, 8XETH1GB
10XANY10G
4XANY10G
4XANY10G
2XANY40G
2XANY40G
130SCUP
130SCUP, 112CFPTB
43SCUP
43SCUP
11QCUP
11QCUP, 11QCUPC
SFC8
SFC8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-549
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-17
Supported PROVISIONEDTYPES
SFP
XFP
SR<xx>W11G1TUC,
SR<xx>W11G1TUI
LR<xx>W11G1TUC
LR<xx>DW11G1TUC
LR<xx>W11G1TUI
ONETRU
ONETRU
HPCFAP
HPCFAP
Important! A shelf of shelf type PSS64 will always be used as main shelf. So the
shelf value will always be {1} although in the following examples the theoretical
range of {1-31} is mentioned.
Table 5-18
Component
1830 PSS-64
1830 PSS-36
Shelf
SHELF-{1}-{31}
SHELF-{1}-{1-31}
Main shelf
SHELF-1-1
SHELF-1-1
First-level Controller
FLC-{1}-{1-31}-{73,75}
FLC-{1}-{1-31}-{23,40}
FLC-{1}-{1-31}-73
FLC-{1}-{1-31}-23
FLC-{1}-{1-31}-75
FLC-{1}-{1-31}-40
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-{71,72}
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-{11,15}
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-71
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-11
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-72
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-550
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-18
Component
(continued)
1830 PSS-64
1830 PSS-36
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-{71,72}-{SCNAUX,VOIP,
ES1, ES2, E1, E2}
MTX-{1}-{1-31}-{11,15}-{SCNAUX,VOIP,
ES1, ES2, E1, E2}
LANPORT-{1}-{1-31}-{73,75}-{OAMP,
CIT}
FLC-{1}-{1-31}-{23,40}-{OAMP,CIT}
LANPORT-{1}-{1-31}-{71,72}-{ES1, ES2}
LANPORT-{1}-{1-31}-{11,15}-{ES1, ES2}
PF-{1}-{1-31}-{91,94}
PF-{1}-{1-31}-{44,45}
Top-Rack-Unit shelf
TRU-{1}-{1-31}
HPCFAP-1-{128-255}-1
Fan unit
FAN-{1}-{1-31}-{92,93}
FAN-{1}-{1-31}-{41}
10XANY10G-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}
10XANY10G-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
4XANY10G-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}
4XANY10G-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,3,5,7,
9}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,3,
5,7,9}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,3}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,
3}
2XANY40G-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}
2XANY40G-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,2}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,
2}
8XANYMR-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}
8XANYMR-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
24XANYMR-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}
24XANYMR-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,9,17}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,9,
17}
XFP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
XFP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
XFP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
XFP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
SFP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
SFP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
SFP-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-8}
SFP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-8}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-2}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-2}
11QCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-16,33-48}
11QCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-551
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-18
Component
(continued)
1830 PSS-64
1830 PSS-36
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-16,33-48}-{1,3}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,
3}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-16,33-48}-{1-4}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
43SCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}
43SCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}
130SCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,4147}
130SCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}
130SCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,4147}
130SCUP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}{1}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,4147}-{1}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}--{2-7,9-15,33-39,4147}-{1}
PORTGP-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
SFC8-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}
SFC8-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1471,
1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, 1611,
OMD}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1471,
1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, 1611,
OMD}
OTS-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}{OMD}
OTS-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{OMD}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1471,
1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, 1611}
PORT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1471,
1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, 1611}
BT3T8-{1}-{1-31}-{81,82,85,86}
BTC-{1}-{1-31}-{81,82,83,84,85,86}
BTC-{1}-{1-31}-{42,43}
BTC-{1}-{1-31}-84
BTC-{1}-{1-31}-43
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
Facility AIDs
where:
facility type represents the facility type (for example OC192, or ODU3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-552
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
shelf# represents the number of the shelf within the specified bay.
slot# represents the number of the slot or position within the shelf in which the
facility is present. For facilities on virtual ODU planes the slot number 71 is used.
For facilities on the Preset AID plane the slot number 72 is used.
facility# represents the facility number. This facility number depends on the
type of facility; see the corresponding facility AID formats which are described in
the following.
where:
the elements ranging from facility type to slot# correspond to the general
facility AID format as described above,
OC# is the OC facility number within the slot ,
SDH facility AIDs are of the form:
facility type - bay# - shelf# - slot# - STM# [ - AU4#]
where:
the elements ranging from facility type to slot# correspond to the general
facility AID format as described above,
STM# STM facility (port) number within the slot.
OTN facility AIDs are of the form:
facility type - bay# - shelf# - slot# - facility# [ - ODU#]
where:
the elements ranging from facility type to slot# correspond to the general
facility AID format as described above,
facility# is the facility (port) number within the slot or the facility number
within the ODU plane.
ODU# is the lower order ODU facility number.
WDM facility AIDs are of the form:
facility type - bay# - shelf# - slot# - facilityID# [ -tributaryID#]
where:
the elements ranging from facility type to slot# correspond to the general
facility AID format as described above,
facility# is the facility (port) number within the slot or the facility number
within the ODU plane.
tributaryID# is the tributary identifier. The tributary identifier is either the
tributary number, the tributary mnemonic name, the optical wavelength or the
optical frequency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-553
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
prefix
is the TCM facility name. The TCM facility name is the name of the OTN facility
containing the TCM facility followed by either TCN for a TCM NIM or TCT
for a TCM termination.
the elements ranging from bay# to slot# correspond to the general facility AID
format as described above,
facility#
ODU#
level#
position
where:
the elements ranging from facility type to slot# correspond to the general
facility AID format as described above,
facility# is the facility (1/10 GbE port) number within the slot.
Important! A shelf of shelf type PSS64 will always be used as main shelf. So the
shelf value will always be {1} although in the following examples the theoretical
range of {1-31} is mentioned.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-554
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
Facility
OC-48 on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
OC48-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
OC48-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
OC48STS48C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-1
OC48STS48C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{124}-1
OC48STS12C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{1,
5,9,13}
OC48STS12C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{124}-{1,5,9,13}
OC48STS3C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}{116}
OC48STS3C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{124}-{116}
OC48STS1-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{116}-{1-3}
OC48STS1-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}{116}-{1-3}
OC-3 on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
OC3-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-1
OC3-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}-1
OC-12 on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
OC12-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
OC12-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
OC-192 on a 4 10G
ANY client port card
OC192-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OC192-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OC-192 on a 10 10G
ANY client port card
OC192-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OC192-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
OC192STS48C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{1, OC192STS48C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{117,33,49}
10}-{1,17,33,49}
OC192STS12C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{1, OC192STS12C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{15,9,13,17,21,25,29,33,37,41,45,49,53,57,61}
10}-{1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29,33,37,41,45,49,53,57,
61}
OC192STS3C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}{1-64}
OC192STS3C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}-{1-64}
OC192STS1-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{164}-{1-3}
OC192STS1-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}-{1-64}-{1-3}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-555
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
STM-1 port on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
STM1-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
STM1-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
STM-4 port on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
STM4-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
STM4-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
STM-16 port on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
STM16-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
STM16-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
STM16AU4-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{116}
STM16AU4-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{124}-{1-16}
STM16AU44C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{1, STM16AU44C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,5,
5,9,13}
9,13}-{1-16}
STM16AU416C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}{1}
STM16AU416C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{124}-{1}
STM-64 port on a
10 10G ANY client
port card
STM64-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
STM64-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
STM64AU4-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{164}
STM64AU4-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}-{1-64}
STM64AU44C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{1, STM64AU44C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{15,9,13,17,21,25,29,33,37,41,45,49,53,57,61}
10}-{1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29,33,37,41,45,49,53,57,
61}
STM64AU416C-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}{1,17,33,49}
STM64AU416C-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}-{1,17,33,49}
STM-64 port on a
4 10G ANY client port
card
STM64-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
STM64-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,2}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,2}
OTN
OTU3 on a 2 40G
ANY client port card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-556
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
OTU4 on a 1 100G
Switchponder 130SCUP
/ 1x100G Switchponder
Test Board 112CFPTB
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}-{1}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
OTU3E2 on a 1 43G
Switchponder 43SCUP
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}-{1}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
OTU2 on a 4 11G
Switchponder 11QCUP
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OTU2 on a 4 10G
ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OTU2E on a 4 10G
ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OTU2 on a 10 10G
ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
OTU2E on a 10 10G
ANY client port card
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OTU-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,2}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,2}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}-{1}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}-{1}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OCH-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OTUODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OTUODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OTUODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OTUODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-557
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
OTUODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
OTUODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
OTUODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OTUODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}
OTUODU3-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,2}
OTUODU3-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,2}
OTUODU3E2-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}{1}
OTUODU3E2-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
OTUODU4-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}{1}
OTUODU4-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}
ODU4ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-{33-39,41-47}-{1}-{180}
ODU4ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}{180}
ODU3E2ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3E2ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU4ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}
ODU3E2ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}
ODU3E2ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3E2ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU3E2ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU4ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}
ODU4ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}
ODU3E2ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3E2ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-558
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
ODU4ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}
ODU4ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}
ODU3E2ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3E2ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU4ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}
ODU4ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}
ODU3E2ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3E2ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}
ODU2ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}-{1-8}
ODU2ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}-{1-8}
ODU2ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}-{1-8}
ODU2ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}-{1-8}
ODU3ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{1-4}
ODU3ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{1-4}
ODU3ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{1-16}
ODU3ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{1-16}
ODU3ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{1-32}
ODU3ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{1-32}
ODU2ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4810}-{1-4}
ODU2ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2110}-{1-4}
ODU2ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4810}-{1-8}
ODU2ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2110}-{1-8}
ODU4 termination
ODU4-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}
ODU4-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}
ODU4 termination on
Preset AID plane
ODU4-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}{01}
ODU4-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}{01}
ODU3E2 termination
ODU3E2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}
ODU3E2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-559
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
ODU3E2 termination on
Preset AID plane
ODU3E2-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-7,9-15,33-39,41-47}
{01}
ODU3E2-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}{01}
ODU3 termination
ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}
ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}
ODU2 termination
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}
ODU3 termination on
Preset AID plane
ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{01,02}
ODU3-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{01,02}
ODU2 termination on
Preset AID plane
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-72-{1-16,33-48}
{01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,1 0}
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-9,12,13,16-21}
{01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,1 0}
Transparent mapping
ODU2E on a 4 10G
ANY client port card
ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
Transparent mapping
ODU2E on a 10 10G
ANY client port card
ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
ODU2E-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
Transparent mapping
ODU2 on a 4 10G
ANY client port card
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
Transparent mapping
ODU2 on a 10 10G
ANY client port card
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
ODU2-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
Transparent mapping
ODU1 on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
ODU1-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
Transparent mapping
ODU0 on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
Transparent mapping
ODU0 on a
8 Multirate ANY
client port card
ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-8}
ODU0-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-8}
OTUODU4TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,4147}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3E2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3E2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,
41-47}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3E2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-560
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
OTUODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,2}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,
2}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1-4}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{110}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1-10}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1-4}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1-10}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-561
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
ODU3ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}-{1-8}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}-{1-8}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-562
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
ODU2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}-{1-8}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}-{1-8}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-6}-AM
ODU4TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3E2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3E2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU3 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on preset plane
ODU4ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-2-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2E
NIM which is contained
in ODU4 on preset plane
ODU4ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,1620}-{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-2-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-2-{201-2102}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on preset plane
ODU4ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-2-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-563
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
ODU3ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{14}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{14}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{116}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{116}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on preset plane
ODU4ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on preset plane
ODU4ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4810}-{18}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2110}-{184}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4810}-{18}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2110}-{18}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4810}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2110}-{1-6}-AM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-564
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{16}-AM
ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}-{16}-AM
ODU2ETCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}-{16}-AM
ODU2TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}{1-6}-AM
ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{16}-AM
ODU1TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}{1-6}-AM
ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{16}-AM
ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}{1-6}-AM
ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{16}-AM
ODU0TCN-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-8}{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
higher order ODU3 NIM
on a 2 40G ANY client
port card
OTUODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1,2}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1,
2}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
higher order ODU4 NIM
on a 1 100G
Switchponder 130SCUP
/ 1x100G Switchponder
Test Board 112CFPTB
OTUODU4TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,4147}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU4TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-8,12,16-20}-{1}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
higher order ODU3E2
NIM on a 1 43G
Switchponder 43SCUP
card
OTUODU3E2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-7,9-15,33-39,4147}-{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU3E2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-565
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
TCM Termination at
higher order ODU2E
NIM on a 4 10G ANY
client port card
OTUODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1-4}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
higher order ODU2E
NIM on a 10 10G
ANY client port card
OTUODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{110}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}{1-10}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
higher order ODU2 NIM
on a 4 10G ANY client
port card
OTUODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{14}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
higher order ODU2 NIM
on a 10 10G ANY
client port card
OTUODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
OTUODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU3 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on virtual plane
ODU4ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU3 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on virtual
plane
ODU3E2ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2E
NIM which is contained
in ODU4 on virtual
plane
ODU4ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2E
NIM which is contained
in ODU3E2 on virtual
plane
ODU3E2ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2E
NIM which is contained
in ODU3 on virtual
plane
ODU3ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on virtual plane
ODU4ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-566
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on virtual
plane
ODU3E2ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3 on virtual plane
ODU3ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on virtual plane
ODU4ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-16}-{1-80}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on virtual
plane
ODU3E2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3 on virtual plane
ODU3ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on virtual
plane
ODU3E2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3 on virtual plane
ODU3ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-32}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU2 on virtual plane
ODU2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}-{1-4}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}-{1-4}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU2 on virtual plane
ODU2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-384}-{1-8}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-192}-{1-8}{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
ODU4 Termination on
virtual plane
ODU4TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-6}-AM
ODU4TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
ODU3E2 Termination
on virtual plane
ODU3E2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3E2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-6}-AM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-567
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
TCM Termination at
ODU3 Termination on
virtual plane
ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
ODU2 Termination on
virtual plane
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-64}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-71-{1-32}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU3 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on preset
plane
ODU3E2ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2E
NIM which is contained
in ODU3E2 on preset
plane
ODU3E2ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2E
NIM which is contained
in ODU3 on preset plane
ODU3ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on preset
plane
ODU3E2ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU2 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3 on preset plane
ODU3ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on preset
plane
ODU3E2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3 on preset plane
ODU3ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU4 on preset plane
ODU4ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU4ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}{1-80}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3E2 on preset
plane
ODU3E2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3E2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}{1-32}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-568
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU3 on preset plane
ODU3ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU3ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{132}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU1 NIM
which is contained in
ODU2 on preset plane
ODU2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4810}-{18}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2110}-{18}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
lower order ODU0 NIM
which is contained in
ODU2 on preset plane
ODU2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4810}-{18}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
ODU2ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2110}-{18}-{1-6}-{AM,BM}
TCM Termination at
ODU4 Termination on
preset plane
ODU4TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{33-39,41-47}-{0-1}{1-6}-{AM}
ODU4TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{2-8,12,16-20}-{0-1}{1-6}-{AM}
TCM Termination at
ODU3E2 Termination
on preset plane
ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
ODU3 Termination on
preset plane
ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{1-6}-AM
ODU3TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
ODU2 Termination on
preset plane
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{101-4802}-{1-6}-AM
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-72-{201-2102}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
transparent mapping
ODU2E Termination on
a 10 10G ANY client
port card
ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{16}-AM
ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{110}-{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
transparent mapping
ODU2E Termination on
a 4 10G ANY client
port card
ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}-{16}-AM
ODU2ETCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
transparent mapping
ODU2 Termination on a
10 10G ANY client
port card
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}-{16}-AM
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
transparent mapping
ODU2 Termination on a
4 10G ANY client port
card
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}-{16}-AM
ODU2TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}{1-6}-AM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-569
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-19
(continued)
Facility
TCM Termination at
transparent mapping
ODU1 Termination on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{16}-AM
ODU1TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
transparent mapping
ODU0 Termination on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}-{16}-AM
ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}{1-6}-AM
TCM Termination at
transparent mapping
ODU0 Termination on a
8 Multirate ANY
client port card
ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-8}-{16}-AM
ODU0TCT-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-8}{1-6}-AM
ODUPOOL-{1}-{1-31}-1
ODUPOOL-{1}-{1-31}-1
GbE port on a
24 Multirate ANY
client port card
GBE-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-24}
GBE-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-24}
GbE port on a
8 Multirate ANY
client port card
GBE-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-8}
GBE-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-8}
10 GbE port on a
4 10G ANY client port
card
GBE10-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-4}
GBE10-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-4}
10 GbE port on a
10 10G ANY client
port card
GBE10-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
GBE10-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,16-21}-{1-10}
OTS at SFC8
Mux/Demux Port
OTS-1-{1}-{1-31}-OMD
OTS-1-{1}-{1-31}-OMD
OMSOCH at SFC8
Mux/Demux port
GBE10-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}-{1-10}
OMSOCHIF at SFC8
Optical Channel I/O
ports
Gigabit Ethernet
Optical Linet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-570
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Component
Access identifier
SYNC-{1}-{1-31}-0
BITS-{1}-{1-31}-{0,1}
where:
ASAP name represents the name of the respective type of ASAP.
ASAP index# represents the number of the ASAP instance for that type of ASAP.
Note: The ASAP index values 0 and 1 or 0-4, depending on the ASAP type, are
related to the system-defined ASAPs (null and factory default ASAPs), while the
other index values correspond to user-defined ASAPs.
Table 5-21
Access identifier
ASAPEQPT-{0-4}
ASAPEQPT-{5-255}
ASAPBITS-{0-4}
ASAPBITS-{5-255}
ASAPTIMING-{0-4}
ASAPTIMING-{5-255}
ASAPOC3-{0-4}
ASAPOC3-{5-255}
ASAPOC12-{0-4}
ASAPOC12-{5-255}
ASAPOC48-{0-4}
ASAPOC48-{5-255}
ASAPOC192-{0-4}
ASAPOC192-{5-255}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-571
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-21
Access identifier
ASAPSTS1-{0-4}
ASAPSTS1-{5-255}
ASAPSTS3C-{0-4}
ASAPSTS3C-{5-255}
ASAPSTS12C-{0-4}
ASAPSTS12C-{5-255}
ASAPSTS48C-{0-4}
ASAPSTS48C-{5-255}
ASAPGBE-{0-4}
ASAPGBE-{5-255}
ASAPGBE10-{0-4}
ASAPGBE10-{5-255}
ASAPSTM1-{0-4}
ASAPSTM1-{5-255}
ASAPSTM4-{0-4}
ASAPSTM4-{5-255}
ASAPSTM16-{0-4}
ASAPSTM16-{5-255}
ASAPSTM64-{0-4}
ASAPSTM64-{5-255}
ASAPVC4-{0-4}
ASAPVC4-{5-255}
ASAPVC44C-{0-4}
ASAPVC44C-{5-255}
ASAPVC416C-{0-4}
ASAPVC416C-{5-255}
ASAPODU4-{0-4}
ASAPODU4-{5-255}
ASAPODU3E2-{0-4}
ASAPODU3E2-{5-255}
(continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-572
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-21
Access identifier
ASAPODU3-{0-4}
ASAPODU3-{5-255}
ASAPODU2E-{0-4}
ASAPODU2E-{5-255}
ASAPODU2-{0-4}
ASAPODU2-{5-255}
ASAPODU1-{0-4}
ASAPODU1-{5-255}
ASAPODU0-{0-4}
ASAPODU0-{5-255}
ASAPTCM-{0-4}
ASAPTCM-{5-255}
ASAPOTU-{0-4}
ASAPOTU-{5-255}
ASAPOCH-{0-4}
ASAPOCH-{5-255}
ASAPOTS-{0-4}
ASAPOTS-{5-255}
ASAPOMS-{0-4}
ASAPOMS-{5-255}
ASAPSECU-{0-1}
ASAPNETIF-{0-4}
ASAPNETIF-{5-255}
ASAPIPIPT-{0-4}
ASAPIPIPT-{5-255}
ASAPLAN-{0-4}
ASAPLAN-{5-255}
(continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-573
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
THP name represents the name of the respective type of THP.
THP index# represents the number of the THP instance for that type of THP.
Note: The THP index values 0 and 1 are related to the system-defined THPs (null and
factory default THPs), while the other index values correspond to user-defined THPs.
Table 5-22
Threshold profile
Access identifier
THPOC3-{0-1}
THPOC3-{2-127}
THPOC12-{0-1}
THPOC12-{2-127}
THPOC48-{0-1}
THPOC48-{2-127}
THPOC192-{0-1}
THPOC192-{2-127}
THPSTM1-{0-1}
THPSTM1-{2-127}
THPSTM4-{0-1}
THPSTM4-{2-127}
THPSTM16-{0-1}
THPSTM16-{2-127}
THPSTM64-{0-1}
THPSTM64-{2-127}
THPODU4-{0-1}
THPODU4-{2-127}
THPODU3E2-{0-1}
THPODU3E2-{2-127}
THPODU3-{0-1}
THPODU3-{2-127}
THPODU2E-{0-1}
THPODU2E-{2-127}
THPODU2-{0-1}
THPODU2-{2-127}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-574
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-22
(continued)
Threshold profile
Access identifier
THPODU1-{0-1}
THPODU1-{2-127}
THPODU0-{0-1}
THPODU0-{2-127}
THPODU4TCM-{0-1}
THPODU4TCM-{2-127}
THPODU3E2TCM-{0-1}
THPODU3E2TCM-{2-127}
THPODU3TCM-{0-1}
THPODU3TCM-{2-127}
THPODU2ETCM-{0-1}
THPODU2ETCM-{2-127}
THPODU2TCM-{0-1}
THPODU2TCM-{2-127}
THPODU1TCM-{0-1}
THPODU1TCM-{2-127}
THPODU0TCM-{0-1}
THPODU0TCM-{2-127}
THPOTU4-{0-1}
THPOTU4-{2-127}
THPOTU3E2-{0-1}
THPOTU3E2-{2-127}
THPOTU3-{0-1}
THPOTU3-{2-127}
THPOTU2E-{0-1}
THPOTU2E-{2-127}
THPOTU2-{0-1}
THPOTU2-{2-127}
THPOCH-{0-1}
THPOCH-{2-127}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-575
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Common AIDs
Component
The following AIDs are related to traffic bearing equipment that is not yet provisioned :
Generic Shelf AID
MDL-{1}-{1-31}
MDL-{1}-{1-31}
MDL-{1}-{1-31}-{1-64}
MDL-{1}-{1-31}-{1-32}
MDL-{1}-{1-31}-{1-64,71-76,
81-86,91-94}
MDL-{1}-{1-31}-{1-45}
MDL-{1}-{1-31}-{1-16,33-48}{1-24}
MDL-{1}-{1-31}-{2-9,12,13,1621}-{1-24}
NETIF-{1-512}
NETIF-{1-512}
OSPFAREA-{0-3}
OSPFAREA-{0-3}
OSPFAREA-{1-3}
OSPFAREA-{1-3}
IPIPT-{1-64}
IPIPT-{1-64}
LAN-{OAMP, CIT}
LAN-{OAMP, CIT}
OAMP LAN
LAN-{OAMP}
LAN-{OAMP}
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-<slot>{OAMP, CIT}
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-<slot>{OAMP, CIT}
LANPORT-1-1-<shelf>-<slot>{OAMP, CIT}
LANPORT-1-1-<shelf>-<slot>{OAMP, CIT}
LANPORT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{ES1, LANPORT-1-<shelf>-<slot>-{ES1,
ES2}
ES2}
The following generic AID is used to address all entities in a particular command:
ALL AID
ALL
ALL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-576
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-23
Component
(continued)
The following generic AID is used to indicate that no entity is addressed or that no relation to
another entity exists:
None AID
NONE
NONE
The following AIDs are related to firewall filter chain (IP ACL):
Table 5-24
Component
Meaning
FORWARD
IP forwarding chain
TL1RAWUNSEC
TL1RAW
Input chain for the raw encoded TL1 over SSH port
6084
TL1TELNET
Input chain for the telnet encoded TL1 over SSH port
6085
ZIC
DBG
CPMGT
CPCLI
Input chain for the control plane CLI over SSH port
6087
CPRSVP
CPOSPFTE
CPLMP
NTP
OSPF
ICMP
MON
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-577
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-24
(continued)
Component
Meaning
NETIF-ALL
IPIPT-ALL
Database AIDs
Access identifier
ACTDSKDB
STBYDB
RFSDB
Access identifier
LOCPMGLB
RFSPMGLB
Software AIDs
Access identifier
STBYSW
RFSSW
ACTSW
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-578
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
TL1 parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TL1 parameters
Overview
The TL1 Parameters window displays the parameters related TL1 encoding over TCP/IP;
it provides the following information:
Parameter
Details
6084
Prompt
6085
The prompt string used for TL1 over telnet encoding. This prompt
string is a text string which can include (in addition to the TL1
character set) the following control characters:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-579
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
TL1 parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
5-580
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
6
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides descriptions and CLI commands for the 11QPE24 L2 features. For
CLI command details and parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
Contents
11QPE24 Quality of Service (QOS)
6-3
6-5
6-9
6-14
6-15
6-27
6-29
6-32
11QPE24 Services
6-33
6-40
6-44
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-51
6-53
6-55
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-56
6-57
6-58
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 11QEP24 is designed with Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms on both ingress and
egress to support multiple services per physical port. It has extensive and flexible
capabilities to classify, police, shape, and mark traffic. The 11QEP24 supports eight
forwarding classes internally named: Network-Control, High-1, Expedited, High-2,
Low-1, Assured, Low-2 and Best-Effort. Support for 802.1ad 4P3D and other forwarding
classes is also provided.
The 11QEP24 uses QoS policies to control how QoS is handled at distinct points in the
service delivery model. There are different types of QoS policies for the different QoS
needs at each point. QoS policies are defined in a global context in the 11QEP24 and only
take effect when they are applied to a relevant entity. QoS policies are uniquely identified
with a policy ID number or name. Policy ID 1 or Policy ID default is reserved for the
default policy which is used if no policy is explicitly applied.
The QoS policies within the 11QEP24 can be divided into three main types:
QoS policies are used for classification, defining metering and queuing attributes and
marking.
Slope policies define WRED slope profiles for each forwarding class queue.
Port scheduler policies determine how queues are scheduled.
QOS policies
Common to all services are policies that are assigned to the service. Policies are defined
at a circuit pack level and then applied to a service. Policies are used to define service
enhancements. QoS policies are applied on service ingress, access port egress, and uplink
port ingress & egress.
The types of QoS policies that are supported on the 11QPE24 pack are:
SAP Ingress QoS policies which define different classes of traffic within a service at
SAP ingress.
Service ingress QoS policies are applied to the customer-facing Service Access Points
(SAPs). Traffic that enters through the SAP is classified to map it to a Forwarding
Class (FC). Each FC is assigned to a separate egress queue for scheduling.
Forwarding classes are associated with meters/policier on ingress. The mapping of
traffic to meters can be based on combinations of customer QoS marking (IEEE
802.1p bits) and MAC criteria, or DSCP. The definition includes the number of
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
forwarding class meters for unicast traffic and the meter characteristics (like CIR,
PIR, etc.). Each of the forwarding classes can be associated with different unicast
parameters. A service ingress QoS policy also defines up to three meters per
forwarding class to be used for multipoint traffic. There can be up to 16 meters in total
per Service ingress QOS policies.
A QoS policy must be created before it can be applied to a SAP. Only a single SAP
ingress QoS policy can be associated with a SAP. If an ingress QoS policy is not
assigned to a SAP, a default ingress QoS policy is assigned by the system.
Service ingress, access egress, and network QoS policies are defined with a scope of
either template or exclusive. Template policies can be applied to multiple entities (such as
SAPs and ports) whereas exclusive policies can only be applied to a single entity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the Services CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
Configuration Commands
QOS
create
sap-ingress
description
scope
num-qos-classifiers
meter
adaptation-rule
cbs
mbs
mode
rate
default-fc
fc
broadcast-meter
meter
multicast-meter
unknown-meter
mac-criteria
entry
action
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
match
dot1p
dst-mac
etype
src-mac
ip-criteria
entry
action
match
dscp
ipv6-criteria
entry
action
match
dscp
access-egress
description
scope
fc
dot1p-in-profile
dot1p-out-profile
queue
remarking
adaptation-rule
rate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
network
description
scope
ingress
default-action
dot1p
meter
adaptation-rule
cbs
mbs
rate
fc
meter
multicast-meter
egress
fc
dot1p-in-profile
dot1p-out-profile
remarking
network-queue
description
queue
adaptation-rule
rate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
port-scheduler-policy
description
mode
queue
slope-policy
description
queue
high-slope
low-slope
non-tcp-slope
time-average-factor
max-avg
max-prob
start-avg
shutdown
Show Commands
sap-ingress
access-egress
network
port-scheduler-policy
network-queue
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ethernet ring protection (ERP) switching offers ITU-T G.8032 specification compliance
to achieve resiliency for Carrier Ethernet networks. Because it is simple, robust, and
optimized for rings, it is faster and more reliable than, and therefore preferred over, IEEE
802.1 Spanning Tree Protocols in ring networks. Like STP networks, ERP normally keeps
one link in the ring blocked to user traffic, but also like MSTP, it is possible to run
multiple ring sessions on the same physical ring, with different blocked links in each.
This enables load balancing on the ring when traffic patterns allow.
Eth-rings can interwork with other rings with single or dual interconnections. In R5.1,
only stand-alone rings are supported, and only on uplink (NNI) ports, but multiple
non-interworking ring instances are supported.
In R5.1 only VPLS services can use ERP (epipes are emulated as two-node ERPs). All
VPLS services may be protected by one Eth-ring instance, or arbitrarily divided among
several.
ERP is instantiated on uplink (NNI) ports, and ERP switching is triggered by NNI port
failures, and also optionally by Eth-OAM CCM link faults detected by Down MEPs on
the ring ports, for a ring topology in which links are not directly connected. Although ring
switching can be held off to allow underlying protection to operate first, this in not usual:
the advantage of ERP is its native fast (~50 ms) protection switching.
Eth-rings use the G.8032 standard protocol for control, and participating nodes exchange
protocol messages using Y.1731-defined OAM frames called R-APS. R-APS frames are
sent by MEPs belonging to an MA not associated with a service, and positioned on ring
paths. R-APS frames are tagged and should be configured with a unique (not shared with
a service or other ring) VID when the ring port has dot1q encapsulation, and with a
unique outer VID when the ring port has qinq encapsulation (the inner VID doesnt
matter). In R5.1, Eth-rings are only on individual NNI ports (no LAGs), and NNI ports
only use qinq encapsulation.
Basic G.8032 ERP Operation
R-APS messages that carry the G.8032 protocol are sent on dedicated protocol VLAN
called ERP VLAN (or Ring Control Instance). In the revertive case, and initially in the
non-revertive case, G.8032 Protocol ensures that the Ring Protection Link (RPL) owner
blocks the RPL link. R-APS messages are periodically multicast in both directions to
simultaneously inform other nodes in the Ring about the blocked port in the RPL owner
node. In non-revertive mode any link may be the blocked link; it is the last one to recover
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
from a failure. (Revertive operation ensures a known configuration and is required when
multiple concurrent rings are used for load balancing. Non-revertive operation avoids the
extra traffic hit caused by reversion.) Y.1731 Ethernet OAM APS is the basis of the
R-APS messages.
Y.1731 CC messages are typically used by nodes in the ring to monitor the health of each
link in the ring in both directions. However CC messages are not mandatory. Other link
layer mechanisms are considered for example Ethernet LOS (Loss of Signal) when the
nodes are directly connected.
Ring Startup Convergence
Initially each Ring Node blocks one of its links and notifies other nodes in the ring about
the blocked link (RPL Owner blocks the RPL). Once a ring node in the ring other than the
RPL Owner learns that another link is blocked, the node unblocks its blocked link
possibly causing FDB flush in all links of the ring for the affected service VLANs. This
procedure results in unblocking all links but the RPL and the ring normal (or idle) state is
reached. In revertive mode the RPL link is always the link that is blocked when all links
are operable after the revert (WTR) time. In non-revertive mode the RPL link is no
different from other ring links (until a clear command is issued, which restores the RPL as
blocked). Each time there is a topology change that affects reachability, the nodes may
flush their FDB and MAC learning takes place for the affected service VLANs, allowing
forwarding of packets to continue, some on new paths. Flushing is triggered by the
G.8032 state machine and the 11QPE24 implementation allows flooding of traffic during
the flushing interval to expedite traffic recovery.
Figure 6-1 G.8032 Ring in the Initial State
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When a ring failure occurs, the node or nodes detecting the failure (by local port fault or
by Y.1731 OAM CC monitoring) send R-APS message in both directions. This allows the
nodes at both ends of the failed link to block forwarding to the failed link preventing it
from being active. In revertive mode, the RPL Owner (or in non-revertive mode,
whichever node(s) are blocking) then unblocks the previously blocked RPL and triggers
FDB flush for all nodes for the affected service instances by R-APS. The ring is now in
the protecting state and full ring connectivity is restored. MAC learning takes place to
allow Layer 2 packet forwarding on a ring.
Figure 6-2 G.8032 Ring in the Protecting State
Once the failed link recovers, the nodes that blocked the link again send the R-APS
messages indicating no failure this time. This in turn triggers the RPL Owner to block the
RPL link (following Wait-to-Restore timeout) and indicate the Blocked RPL link the ring
in R-APS message, which when received by the nodes at the recovered link cause them to
unblock that link and restore connectivity (again all nodes in the ring perform FDB Flush
and MAC learning takes place). In non-revertive mode the RPL ignores the messages
from the nodes with blocked links, and they remain blocked; no FDB flushing is needed.
The ring is back in the normal (or idle) state.
ERP Implementation
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the 11QPE24 implementation, the Ethernet Ring control instance is built from a
dedicated dummy VPLS service on each node with VPLS SAPs that carries only R-APS
messages. It is not used for subscriber data.
Use of ETH-CFM MEPs
Within each path, Y.1731 Down MEPs are used to exchange R-APS specific information
(when control-mep is enabled). For this function they behave more like MIPs than
standard Down MEPs: they copy and forward received R-APS PDUs rather than
terminate them, terminating only if they originated locally. This allows faster propagation
of information than hop-by-hop signaling as is done by spanning tree protocols.
The MEPs can also optionally exchange fast CCM for node-to-node fault detection. This
is especially necessary when nodes are not directly connected by Ethernet links so that
not all faults are detected by the ports. CCM messages can be configured with intervals
between 3.3 msec and 100 msec, the former providing fault detection time of 10 msec.
Because the path Down MEP is monitoring the link, and not a service, it is typically
configured at a low MD level, although this is not required.The control tag (raps-tag)
defined under each eth-ring path is used by the MEP for encapsulating and forwarding the
CCMs and the G.8032 R-APS messages used for the protection function.
Fault Detection
For fault detection using CCMs, three CC messages must be missed for a fault to be
declared on the associated path. After it receives the fault indication, the protection
module declares the associated ring link down and the G.8032 state machine sends the
appropriate messages to open the blocked link and flush the learned addresses.
Service Allocation to Ring Instances
G.8032 supports multiple data channels (services) per ring control instance (R-APS tag).
G.8032 also supports multiple control instances such that each instance can have its RPL
on a different link providing for a load balancing capability. However once services have
been assigned to one instance, the same services on other nodes must be on the same ring
instance. When there is any one link failure or any one node failure in the ring, the
G.8032 protocol is capable of restoring traffic among all remaining nodes for these data
services.
Each NNI (uplink) port supports up to 10 ring instances which can coexist with
unprotected VPLS SAPs. In R5.1, Eth-Rings are not supported on LAGs.
Rings on Access Ports (Future)
In a future release, Ethernet R-APS can be configured on any port configured for access
mode using dot1q, q-in-q encapsulation enabling support for Ethernet R-APS protected
services on the service edge towards the customer site, or within the Ethernet backbone.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E-Line, E-LAN (and E-Tree in the future) services can be given Ethernet R-APS
protection and the services are configured independent of the Ring properties. The
intention of this is to cause minimum disruption to the service during Ethernet R-APS
failure detection and recovery. Note that E-Line services are provided using the VPLS
service construct because Epipes are not currently supported by ERP.
QoS Considerations
Ethernet ring CC and R-APS messages transmitted over the SAP queues using the default
egress QoS policy use NC (network class) as a forwarding class. If user traffic is assigned
to the NC forwarding class, it competes for the same bandwidth resources with the
Ethernet CCMs. As CCM loss could lead to unnecessary switching of the Ethernet ring,
congestion of the queues associated with the NC traffic should be avoided. The operator
must configure different QoS Policies to avoid congestion for the CCM forwarding class
by controlling the amount of traffic assigned into the corresponding queue. For the same
reason, the ccm-ltm-priority setting for the control MEPs should always be the highest
priority.
Operator Switch Commands
The user can control ring switching by commands in the tools>perform>eth-ring context.
The force command puts the target path into the blocked state, which remains regardless
of faults or other force commands in the ring. Unless otherwise constrained (fault or
force), the RPL owner removes its block at that time. The manual command is similar,
except that the block remains only while the ring is fault-free. The clear command, which
applies to the ring instance, removes either of the above local commands. In the revertive
mode it also clears an active WTR or WTB timer to cause immediate reversion; in the
non-revertive mode it causes reversion to the RPL owner.
Timers
The user can configure the guard and revert timers. The guard timer is used to prevent
stale R-APS messages, circulating after a local Signal Fail clears, from affecting the state
machine. It may need to be tuned to optimize for different size rings. The revert timer,
also known as Wait to Restore (WTR), is only effective in revertive mode, and enforces
delay to allow bouncing faults to settle before the RPL owner reverts to the normal
blocked state.
There is a non-configurable Wait to Block (WTB) timer used by the RPL owner to delay
reversion to the blocked state following the removal of an operator switch command, to
ensure there is no other forced switch on the ring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the ERP CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Configuration Commands
eth-ring
description
guard-time
revert-time
rpl-node
node-id
compatible-version
path
description
rpl-end
eth-cfm
mep
ccm-enable
ccm-ltm-priority
control-mep
low-priority-defect
mac-address
shutdown
sub-ring
interconnect
propagate-topology-change
Show Commands
eth-ring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The IEEE and the ITU-T have loosely cooperated to define the protocols, procedures and
managed objects to support service based fault management. Both IEEE 802.1ag standard
and the ITU-T Y.1731 recommendations support a set of tools that allow operators to
deploy the necessary administrative constructs, management entities and functionality of
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (ETH-CFM). These include continuity and
connectivity checking, one-shot loopback, and MAC based link trace. The ITU-T has also
implemented advanced ETH-CFM for carrier service providers, including Eth-AIS, APS,
proactive loss and delay measurement for SLA monitoring, and on-demand versions for
troubleshooting.
ETH-CFM uses Ethernet frames which are distinguishable by Ethertype 0x8902. In
certain functions a reserved multicast address is used to identify the maintenance level at
the MAC layer. However, the multicast MAC addressing is not used for every function or
in every case. The Operational Code (OpCode) in the common CFM header is used to
identify the type of function carried in the CFM packet. ETH-CFM frames are only
processed by IEEE 802.1 bridges. With CFM, interoperability can be achieved among
different vendors equipment in the service provider network, and customer premises
bridges.
Target applications
Ethernet Link OAM (802.3ah, Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM)) runs between peer
MACs on a point-to-point link. It is typically used on UNIs, i.e. between provider
equipment and customer equipment. It may also be tunneled through the provider
equipment.
Ethernet Service OAM (ETH-CFM) is more general and can be used to monitor a link
similar to Link OAM (their capabilities overlap somewhat, not completely), but can also
monitor services through the network. For a provider, a service OAM instance begins and
ends at the UNI-Ns of the service. A customer can also run service OAM instances among
its UNI-Cs. These can interact to a limited degree. The providers network can also be
partitioned with each partition monitored separately between the E-NNIs.
Ethernet Service OAM can also be applied to monitor Ethernet Ring spans, providing an
APS channel and fault monitoring per span.
Service OAM Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Domain
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 (VPN ID) Hex value as described in RFC 2685, Virtual Private Networks Identifier
32 (icc-format) Exactly 13 characters from the ITU-T recommendation T.50
(essentially printable ASCII characters).
Note: When a VID is used as the short MA name, 802.1ag will not support VLAN
translation because the MAID must match all the MEPs. The default format for a short
MA name is an integer. Integer value 0 means the MA is not attached to a VID.
In the 11QPE24, the MA is not directly configured for a VLAN. For an MA used for
service monitoring, it picks up the appropriate VID by being attached to a service through
the bridge ID parameter, which is configured to be the service ID. In Fig. 1 each color
represents a different MA, but all are for the same service (VLAN). For an MA used for
ERP MEPs, no bridge ID is configured. The VLAN used is that of the raps-tag
parameter.
Maintenance Endpoints
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Messages (LBM) and Linktrace Messages (LTM). All other CFM functions are
transparent to these entities. Only one MIP is allowed per SAP. The creation of the MIPs
can be done when the lower level domain is created (explicit). This is controlled by the
use of the mhf-creation mode within the association under the bridge-identifier. MIP
creation is supported on SAPs. By default, no MIPs are created. Only one MIP can exist
on a given port for a particular service, usually automatically configured at the configured
MD level just above the highest level MEP. This conserves resources. Only the Down
portion of MIPs are supported in R5.1.
CFM Configuration Location
There are two locations in the configuration where ETH-CFM is defined. The
infrastructure: domains, associations (including linkage to the service id), MIP creation
method, common ETH-CFM functions and remote MEPs, are defined under the top level
eth-cfm command. It is important to note, when Y.1731 functions are required the context
under which the MEPs are configured must follow the Y.1731 specific formats (domain
format of none, MA format icc-format). Once these parameters have been entered, a MEP
and possibly a MIP can be defined within the service under the SAP.
Loopback
Linktrace
A linktrace message (LTM) is originated by a MEP and targeted to a peer MEP. Its
function is similar to IP traceroute, tracing a specific MAC address through the service.
The peer MEP responds with a linktrace reply (LTR) after successful inspection of the
LTM. The MIPs along the path also process the LTM and respond with LTRs to the
originating MEP if the received LTM has a TTL greater than 1 and forward the LTM if a
look up of the target MAC address in the Layer 2 FDB is successful. The originating
MEP expects to receive multiple LTRs and from processing the, can put together the route
to the target bridge. The target MEP (or any MEP) terminates the LTM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The target MAC address is carried in the payload of the LTM. Each MIP receiving the
LTM checks whether it knows the target MAC address (via the FDB). In order to use
linktrace the target MAC address must have been learned (or statically configured) by the
nodes in the network. If so, an LTR is sent back to the originating MEP. Also, a MIP
forwards the LTM out of the port where the target MAC address was learned.
The LTM uses a multicast destination address. On a broadcast LAN, it can be received by
multiple nodes connected to that LAN. But, at most, one node will send a reply, the one
with a path to the target.
The following linktrace related functions are supported:
Delay Measurement
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The specification uses various sequence numbers in order to determine in which direction
the loss occurred. Alcatel-Lucent has implemented the required counters to determine loss
in each direction. In order to properly use the information that is gathered the following
terms are defined;
Count The number of probes that are sent when the last frame is not lost. When the
last frame(s) is or are lost, the count and unacknowledged equals the number of
probes sent.
Out-Loss (Far-end) Packets lost on the way to the remote node, from test initiator
to the test destination.
In-Loss (Near-end) Packet loss on the way back from the remote node to the test
initiator.
Unacknowledged Number of packets at the end of the test that were not responded
to.
The per-probe specific loss indicators are available when looking at the on-demand test
runs, or the individual probe information stored in the MIB.
On-Demand ETH-SLM
The on-demand function can be executed from CLI or SNMP. The on-demand tests are
meant to provide the carrier a way to perform spot testing. However, this approach is not
meant as a method for storing archived data for later processing. The probe count for
on-demand SLM has a range of one to 100 with configurable probe spacing between one
second and ten seconds. This means it is possible that a single test run can be up to 1000
seconds in length. Although possible, it is more likely the majority of on-demand cases
will use 100 probes or less at a one second interval. A card may only initiate and maintain
a single active on-demand SLM test at any given time. A maximum of one storage entry
per remote MEP is maintained in the results table. Subsequent runs to the same peer can
overwrite the results for that peer. This means, when using on-demand testing the test
should be run and the results checked prior to starting another test.
Proactive Test SLM/DM
Proactive Test is an extension of on-demand tests for SLM and DM. Proactive means they
run continuously once started, and measurement results are binned similar to other L2
binning with optional TCAs on maximum and average values measured during a bin
interval. Proactive tests are typically used to monitor a service demarked by Up-MEPs.
Proactive SLM and DM are configured similarly to the on-demand tests. One difference
is that forwarding class is specified instead of priority. Each proactive test has an
associated PMON policy which defines the TCAs and binning as for other L2 PMON.
The test begins when the policy is attached, after which parameters and policy-id cant be
changed. Identical on-demand and proactive tests may be run simultaneously. The number
of simultaneous proactive tests is 32 64 per type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Proactive SLM is used to calculate Frame Loss Ratios. It is a single ended measurement
with counts of sent frames embedded. Average FLR is calculated over the entire bin
interval. Max and Min FLR are determined from FLR calculated over subintervals within
a bin. FLR measurement interval is configurable in policy
Note: There is no 15-min bin for FLR.
Proactive DM bins min, max, and average round-trip delay, and one-way delay
variation per direction.
Proactive Test PMON is similar to other L2 PMON. Eight policies per type are
configurable. TCAs are settable on max and average counters .
The principal use of Proactive Test use cases is for monitoring a service, e.g. SLA
verification
Between Up MEPs
Point to Point
Multipoint.
The user can create a new proactive test until system resources are exhausted.
Proactive tests are configured on MEPs.
Proactive tests make measurements at a particular CoS. A MEP can potentially
have tests configured at every CoS.
An on-demand test can be run with the same parameters as a proactive test.
A responder for a two-way test is not configured. When a valid SLM PDU is
received by a MEP, a responder with associated counters is automatically created
if sufficient resources are available. The responder replies with SLR PDUs based
on its counters. When a valid DMM PDU is received by a MEP, a DMR response
is sent if sufficient resources are available.
The user can show the proactive tests that exist on a card, including their type
(SLM or Delay).
The ETH-SLM packet format contains a test-id that is internally generated and not
configurable. The test-id is visible for the on-demand test in the display summary. It is
possible for a remote node processing the SLM frames to receive overlapping test-ids as a
result of multiple MEPs measuring loss between the same remote MEP. For this reason,
the uniqueness of the test is based on remote MEP-ID, test-id and Source MAC of the
packet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Continuity Check Message (CCM) is a multicast frame that is generated by a MEP and
multicast to all other MEPs in the same MA. The CCM does not induce a reply message;
all MEPs generate CCM autonomously. To identify faults, the receiving MEP maintains
an internal list of remote MEPs it should be receiving CCM messages from. This list is
the remote-mepid configuration within the MA. When the local MEP does not receive a
CCM from one of the configured remote MEPs within a pre-configured period, the local
MEP raises an alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manually configure and delete remote MEP entries in the MEP monitoring database.
It is only required to provision remote MEPs. Local MEPs are automatically put into
the database when they are created.
CCM transmit interval: 3.3ms, 10ms, 100ms,1s,10s, 60s and 600s for Down-MEPs,
1s, 10s, 60s, 600s for Up-MEPs.
Default: 10s.
When configuring MEPs with sub-second CCM intervals, bandwidth consumption must
be taken into consideration. Each CCM PDU is 100 bytes (800 bits). Taken individually
this is a small value. However, the bandwidth consumption increases rapidly as multiple
MEPs are configured with subsecond CCMs. Sub-second enabled MEPs are supported on
the following:
The MEP stops hearing from one of the remote MEPs for 3.5 times CC interval
Hears from a MEP with a LOWER MD level
Hears from a MEP that is not part of the local MEPs MA
Hears from a MEP that is in the same MA but not in the configured MEP list
Hears from a MEP in the same MA with the same MEP id as the receiving MEP
The CC interval of the remote MEP does not match the local configured CC interval
The remote MEP is declaring a fault (port down)
An alarm is raised and a trap is sent if the defect is greater than or equal to the configured
low-priority-defect value.
Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is supported but by default is not recognized as a defect
condition because the low-priority-defect setting default does not include RDI.
Alarm Indication Signal
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) provides an Y.1731-capable MEP the ability to signal a
fault condition in the reverse direction of the MEP, out the back side. When a fault
condition is detected the MEP generates AIS packets at the configured client levels and at
the specified AIS interval until the condition is cleared. Currently a MEP configured to
generate AIS must do so at a level higher than its own. The MEP configured on the
service receiving the AIS packets is required to have the active side facing the receipt of
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the AIS packet and must be at the same level as the AIS. The absence of an AIS packet for
3.5 times the AIS interval set by the sending node clears the condition on the receiving
MEP.
AIS is intended for use in point-to point configurations, so care must be taken when used
in a VPLS service that it is configured as point-to-point.
CFM Connectivity Fault Conditions
CFM MEP declares a connectivity fault when its defect flag is equal to or higher than its
configured lowest defect priority. The defect can be any of the following depending on
configuration:
DefRDICCM
DefMACstatus
DefRemoteCCM
DefErrorCCM
DefXconCCM
802.3ah EFM OAM declares a link fault when any of the following occurs:
When 802.3ah EFM OAM declares a fault, the port goes into operation state down. The
SMGR communicates the fault to CFM MEPs in the service. OAM fault propagation in
the opposite direction (SMGR to EFM OAM) is not supported.
ETH-CFM on ETH-Rings
ETH-CFM is used to monitor services carried over an ETH-Ring, and supports the
functioning of the ring itself. Only the ring MD/MA/MEPs are supported in R5.1. Down
MEPs are used to monitor the links between ring ports of adjacent nodes. The ring MD
level is typically at the lowest available, 0. In R5.1 it must have no MD name, so that the
ring MA implicitly becomes Y.1731 (its name format can only be set to icc-based).
The MA has an implicit VLAN which is the raps-tag of the ring paths where the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MEPs are created. "The MEPs are configured as control-MEPs to exchange Ring APS
messages with their neighbors. By enabling 3.3 msec CCM they quickly detect faults to
trigger fast protection switching."
LINK OAM (EFM)
802.3ah Clause 57 (EFM OAM) defines the Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
(OAM) sub-layer, which provides mechanisms useful for monitoring link operation such
as remote fault indication and remote loopback control. In general, OAM provides
network operators the ability to monitor the health of the network and quickly determine
the location of failing links or fault conditions. EFM OAM described in this clause
provides data link layer mechanisms that complement applications that may reside in
higher layers.
OAM information is conveyed in slow protocol frames called OAM protocol data units
(OAMPDUs). OAMPDUs contain the appropriate control and status information used to
monitor, test and troubleshoot EFM OAM-enabled links. OAMPDUs traverse a single
link, being passed between peer OAM entities, and as such, are not forwarded by MAC
clients (like bridges or switches), unless configured to do so (see below).
The following EFM OAM functions are supported:
OAM Events
EFM OAM defines a set of events that may impact link operation. The following events
are supported:
These critical link events are signaled to the remote DTE by the flag field in OAM PDUs.
The 11QPE24 does not generate EFM OAM PDUs with these flags. However, it supports
processing of these flags in EFM OAM PDUs received from the peer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remote Loopback
EFM OAM provides a link-layer frame loopback mode that can be remotely controlled.
To initiate remote loopback, the local EFM OAM client sends a loopback control OAM
PDU by enabling the OAM remote-loopback command. After receiving the loopback
control OAM PDU, the remote OAM client puts the remote port into local loopback
mode.
To exit remote loopback, the local EFM OAM client sends a loopback control OAM PDU
by disabling the OAM remote-loopback command. After receiving the loopback control
OAM PDU, the remote OAM client puts the port back into normal forwarding mode.
Note that during remote loopback test operation, all frames except EFM OAM PDUs are
dropped at the local port for the receive direction, where remote loopback is enabled. If
local loopback is enabled, then all frames except EFM OAM PDUs are dropped at the
local port for both the receive and transmit directions. This behavior may result in many
protocols (such as STP or LAG) resetting their state machines.
EFM PDU Tunneling
Tunneling EFM OAM PDUs is only useful in a point-to-point service. Care must be taken
when used in a VPLS service that it is configured as point-to-point in the network. Ports
must be configured as null encapsulated SAPs.
When OAM PDU tunneling is enabled, 802.3ah OAM PDUs received at one end of are
forwarded. 802.3ah can run between devices that are located at each end of the service.
When OAM PDU tunneling is disabled (by default), OAM PDUs are dropped or
processed locally according to the efm-oam configuration (shutdown or no shutdown).
Note that enabling 802.3ah for a specific port and enabling OAM PDU tunneling for the
same port are mutually exclusive. Enforcement is performed on the CLI level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the Ethernet OAM CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command
details and parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
Release 6.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Configuration Commands
eth-cfm
mep
ais-enable
client-meg-level
interval
priority
ccm-enable
ccm-ltm-priority
control-mep
low-priority-defect
mac-address
shutdown
domain
association
bridge-identifier
mhf-creation
vlan
ccm-interval
remote-mepid
oam
linktrace
loopback
two-way-delay-test
two-way-slm-test
proactive-test
two-way-delay
two-way-slm
pmon-dm-policy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pmon-slm-policy
efm
local-loopback
remote-loopback
MC-LAG Commands
redundancy
mc-lag
propagate-hold-time
standby-mep-shutdown
Show Commands
eth-cfm
association
cfm-stack-table
domain
mep
redundancy
mc-lag
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ingress and egress packets are mirrored as they appear on the wire. This is important
for troubleshooting encapsulation and protocol issues.
When mirroring at ingress, an exact copy of the original ingress packet is sent to
the mirror destination while normal forwarding proceeds on the original packet.
When mirroring is at egress, the system performs normal packet handling on the
egress packet, encapsulating it for the destination interface. A copy of the
forwarded packet (as seen on the wire) is forwarded to the mirror destination.
Mirroring at egress takes place before the packet is processed by egress QoS.
Hence, there exists a possibility that a packet is dropped by egress QoS
mechanisms (because of RED mechanisms and so on) and thus not forwarded, but
it is still mirrored.
Mirroring source and destination can only be on the same card (local mirroring only,
no remote).
A mirror destination can terminate on only one port (Null SAP).
A mirror source can be a port, a port which is a member of a LAG, or a LAG (but not
both a LAG and its member).
Packets ingressing a port can have a mirror destination separate from packets
egressing another or the same port.
A total of four mirror destinations are supported (local only).
For port ingress mirroring, any number of source ports may be configured to one or
more mirror destinations but one ingress mirror source can be configured to only one
mirror destination.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For port egress mirroring, only a maximum of 4 egress mirror sources are allowed and
one egress mirror source can be configured to only one mirror destination.
Multiple concurrent mirroring sessions are allowed so traffic from more than one
ingress mirror source can be mirrored to the same or different mirror destinations.
Mirroring Performance
Replication of mirrored packets can, typically, affect performance and should be used
carefully.
Mirroring Configuration
Configuration Notes
Multiple mirroring service IDs (mirror destinations) may be created within a single
system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mirror sources:
The default state for a mirror source for a given mirror-dest service ID is no
shutdown. Enter a shutdown command to deactivate (disable) mirroring from that
mirror-source.
Mirror sources do not need to be shutdown to stop their mirror. When a mirror
destination is shutdown, mirroring is terminated for all sources defined locally for
the mirror destination service ID.
Mirror sources do not need to be shutdown to delete or change the port and
mirrored flow directions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the Port Mirroring CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command
details and parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)
Release 6.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Mirror Configuration Commands
mirror
shutdown
mirror-dest
sap
mirror-source
port
Show Commands
mirror mirror-dest
mirror
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
11QPE24 Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11QPE24 Services
Overview
Please note that both of these services use a VPLS based service model.
QoS Policies
Common to all services are policies that are assigned to the service. Policies are defined
at a circuit pack level and then applied to a service. Policies are used to define service
enhancements. The types of policies those are supported on the 11QPE24 pack are:
SAP Quality of Service (QoS) policies which allow for different classes of traffic
within a service at SAP ingress. QoS ingress policies determine the QoS
characteristics for a SAP. A QoS ingress policy applied to a SAP specifies the number
of meters, meter characteristics (such as forwarding class, committed and peak
information rates, etc.) and the mapping of traffic to a forwarding class. A QoS policy
must be created before it can be applied to a SAP. Only a single SAP ingress QoS
policy can be associated with a SAP. If an ingress QoS policy is not assigned to a
SAP, a default ingress QoS policy is assigned by the system.
Scheduler policies define the operating parameters (such as scheduling algorithm,
weights per priority). They are associated with physical ports.
Network QoS policies type port (uplink ingress and egress)
Network Queue QoS policies (egress Uplink port)
Access egress QoS policies
Slope QoS Policies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
11QPE24 Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Model
QoS policies, filter policies, and accounting policies are applied to each service
instead of correlating parameters and statistics from ports to customers to services.
The basic logical entities in the service model used to construct a service are:
Customers
Service Access Points (SAPs)
Customers
The terms customers and subscribers are used synonymously. The most basic required
entity is the customer ID value which is assigned when the customer account is created.
To provision a service, a customer ID must be associated with the service at the time of
service creation.
Service Access Points (SAPs)
Each subscriber service type is configured with at least one service access point (SAP). A
SAP identifies the customer interface point for a service. The SAP configuration requires
that slot, and port information be specified. The slot and port parameters must be
configured prior to provisioning a service. A SAP is a local entity to the 11QPE24 and is
uniquely identified by:
Depending on the port encapsulation, a physical port can have more than one SAP
associated with it. SAPs are created on ports designated as access or uplink (network
side
SAP, Port Encapsulation Types, and Identifiers
The port encapsulation type is an access property of a service Ethernet port. The
appropriate encapsulation type for the port depends on the requirements to support
multiple services on a single port and the capabilities of the downstream equipment
connected to the port. For example, a port can be configured for IEEE 802.1Q (referred to
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
11QPE24 Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
as dot1q) encapsulation in which each individual VLAN tag can be identified with a
service. When a SAP is created, the VLAN tag(s) (or lack of) belonging to the service is
identified by the encapsulation ID. This becomes, after shelf/slot/port, part of the SAP ID.
Ethernet Port Encapsulations
The following lists port encapsulation service options on access Ethernet ports:
Null Supports a single service on the port. For example, a single customer with a
single service customer edge (CE) device is attached to the port. The encapsulation ID
is always 0 (zero).
Dot1q Supports multiple services for one customer or services for multiple
customers. The encapsulation ID used to distinguish an individual service is the
VLAN ID in the IEEE 802.1Q header. For example, the port is connected to an
Ethernet switch with multiple downstream customers.
QinQ The QinQ encapsulation type adds a IEEE 802.1ad or 802.1Q tag to the
802.1Q tagged packets entering the access port to expand the VLAN space, producing
a double tagged frame.
The following lists port encapsulation service options on uplink Network Ethernet
ports:
QinQ The QinQ encapsulation type adds a IEEE 802.1ad or 802.1Q tag to the
802.1Q tagged packets entering the network to expand the VLAN space, producing a
double tagged frame.
On a dot1q- encapsulated port where a default SAP is configured, all packets with q-tags
not matching any explicitly defined SAPs will be assigned to this SAP. In this context, the
character * (encapsulation ID) indicates default which means allow through. The
default SAP also accepts untagged or priority tagged packets. A default SAP must be
configured explicitly. When a default SAP is not configured explicitly, packets not
matching any explicitly defined dot1q SAPs will be dropped.
Dot1Q Default SAP is represented as follows:
sap C1:*
11QPE24 L2 Features
11QPE24 Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Where C1 or X1 is the port and the example encapsulation ID 10 represents the CVLAN
of the packets.
Null SAP on a Null Port
On a null encapsulated port where a Null SAP is configured, all packets will be assigned
to this SAP.
One of the applications where this configuration can be applicable is Private Line, an
access connection of a subscriber who uses the whole port. The subscriber's VLAN tags
are transparent to the service provider.
The Null SAP is only supported on a null encapsulated port
Null SAP is represented as follows:
Sap C1
QinQ SAP is represented by the port identifier followed by the Q1.Q2 structure, Q1
represent the SVLAN and Q2 represent the CVLAN (the Ethertype configuration
determines whether Q1 is a standard SVLAN or a proprietary tag).
Q1.Q2 SAP: example (sap X1:1000.10) represents a SAP where the SVLAN is equal
to 1000 and the CVLAN is equal to 10. This is normally used when one CVLAN is
mapped to a SVLAN service. Note that the same SVLAN.CVLAN can be configured
on another uplink port SAP for resiliency.
Q.* SAP: example (sap X2:2000.*) represents a SAP where the SVLAN is equal to
2000 and the CVLAN is any value. This is normally used when Untagged or/and
unspecified CVLAN packets are mapped to a service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
11QPE24 Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Default QinQ SAPs (sap 1/1/20: *.*) are used to avoid the need to configure services on
all the intermediate nodes in the ring which are transiting the service. Default QinQ SAPs
matches all SVLAN tagged traffic which is not classified into any other SAP configured
on the same port.
Default QinQ SAP can co-exist with 0.* SAP on an uplink. A default QinQ SAP accepts
only tagged packets. Untagged packets or priority tagged packets are not accepted on
Default QinQ SAPs.
Default QinQ SAP is available for use only in a VPLS service created with svc-sap-type
parameter set to "null-star". Default QinQ SAP can be configured along with other SAPs
allowed in the same service (that is, service with svc-sap-type parameter set to
"null-star").
Note: Default QinQ SAPs in a VPLS service does not support any loop-avoidance
mechanisms such as G.8032. It is not recommended for use in a topology where
Layer-2 loop exists. It must be used carefully and is typically helpful to aggregate a
set of VLANs into a service towards an upstream node in a hub-spoke network
topology without Layer-2 loops.
Service SAP Type
Every service requires a service SAP type; it specifies the type of service and allowed
SAPs in the service:
null-star Specifies that the allowed SAP in the service that can be Null SAP, dot1q
Default SAP, Q.* SAP or Default QinQ SAP (aka *.* SAP).
dot1q Specifies that the allowed SAP in the service are Dot1q SAPs
dot1q-preserve Specifies that the allowed SAP in the service are Dot1q. The Dot1q
ID is not stripped after packets match the SAP.
any When svc-sap-type is set to any, for a explicit NULL SAP, the system
processes and forwards only packets with no VLAN tag (that is, untagged). All other
packets with one or more VLAN tags (even those with priority tag only) are not
processed and dropped. Users can use the service with svc- sap-type set to null-star, to
process and forward packets with one or more tags (including priority tag) on a null
SAP.
Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS) is a class of virtual private network service that
allows the connection of multiple sites in a single bridged domain over a provider-bridge
QinQ network. The customer sites in a VPLS instance appear to be on the same LAN,
regardless of their location. VPLS uses an Ethernet interface on the customer-facing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
11QPE24 Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(access) side which simplifies the LAN/WAN boundary and allows for rapid and flexible
service provisioning. A VPLS service provides connectivity between two or more SAPs.
The connection appears to be a bridged domain to the customer sites so protocols,
including routing protocols, can traverse the VPLS service.
VPLS Features
Extensive MAC and IP filter support. Filters can be applied on a per SAP basis.
Discard unknown
Separate aging timers for learned MAC addresses.
Ingress rate limiting for broadcast, multicast, and destination unknown flooding on a
per SAP basis.
IGMP snooping on a per-SAP basis.
The 11QPE24 pack performs the packet replication required for broadcast, unknown
destination unicast, and multicast traffic across the bridged domain. MAC address
learning is performed by the 11QPE24 to reduce the amount of unknown destination
MAC address flooding. Each 11QPE24 maintains a Forwarding Information Base (FIB)
for each VPLS service instance and learned MAC addresses are populated in the FIB
table of the service. All traffic is switched based on MAC addresses and forwarded
between all participating nodes.
VPLS and Rate Limiting
Traffic that is normally flooded throughout the VPLS can be rate limited on SAP ingress
through the use of service ingress QoS policies. In a service ingress QoS policy,
individual meters can be defined per forwarding class to provide rate-limiting/policing of
broadcast traffic, MAC multicast traffic and unknown destination MAC traffic. For more
info refer to the 11QPE24 Quality of Service PRD document.
Note: On the 11QPE24 card, setting the aggregate meter rate below the sap ingress
meter rate will have no aggregate meter effect.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
11QPE24 Services
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAP Encapsulations
VLPS services provide connectivity among SAPs compatible with and associated with
the service. The following SAP encapsulations are supported on the VPLS service:
null
Dot1q
Dot1q Default
The SAP encapsulation definition on Ethernet access ports defines which VLAN tags are
used to determine the service that the packet belongs:
1. Null encapsulation defined on ingress Any VLAN tags are ignored and the packet
goes to a port based service for the SAP.
2. Dot1q encapsulation defined on ingress Only first label is considered.
3. Dot1q Default encapsulation defined on ingress Tagged packets not matching any
of the configured VLAN encapsulations would be accepted. This is like a default SAP
for tagged packets.
4. Dot1q Explicit Null encapsulation defined on ingress Any untagged or priority
tagged packets are accepted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the Services CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
Customer Management Commands
customer
contact
phone
description
filter
mac-filter
default-action
description
scope
entry
action
match
dot1p
dst-mac
etype
src-mac
vpls
disable-aging
disable-learning
discard-unknown
fdb-table-size
local-age
mfib-table-size
service-name
mc-lag-binding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
igmp-snooping
query-interval
report-src-ip
query-src-ip
robust-count
Generic Commands
shutdown
description
sap
l2pt-termination
max-nbr-mac-addr
statistics
pmon-sap-policy
ingress
counter-mode
llf
static-mac
discard-unknown-source
ingress
filter
aggregate-meter-rate
qos
igmp-snooping
query-interval
robust-count
fast-leave
import
last-member-query-interval
max-num-groups
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
max-num-sources
mrouter-port
query-response-interval
send-queries
static
group
source
starg
version
customer
fdb-info
fdb-mac
service-using
sap-using
id
base
all
fdb
sap
pmon
l2pt
mfib
igmp-snooping
base
mrouters
port-db
querier
static
statistics
all
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mac
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Based on the IEEE 802.1AX standard (formerly 802.3ad), Link Aggregation Groups
(LAGs) are a form of inverse multiplexing of a logical interface to a group of physical
Ethernet links. In a Carrier context, they are used primarily for link protection, and
usually in an active/standby configuration: one link is in service and the other held in
standby in case of link failure. LAGs can also be used to increase the bandwidth available
between two devices, depending on the number of links installed (from 1 to 4), although
how much bandwidth is available depends on how well the traffic can be distributed
among the member links, with the constraint that a particular flow (conversation) must
always use the same link to avoid misordering. Flows are distributed among member
links using a hash function operating on packet parameters such as IP addresses or MAC
addresses.
LAGs can be statically configured or formed dynamically with Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP). The optional marker protocol described in IEEE 802.3ax is not
implemented. LAGs can be configured on where all member ports have the same rate.
LAGs are used for link protection of Ethernet services on UNIs, especially on 10 GbE
handoffs. They can also be used as a form of linear protection for NNI ports. LAGs may
be also be used for ERP paths.
Basic LAG Operation
A LAG is a logical port which behaves the same, from an L2 perspective, as a stand-alone
physical port. Its member ports have no L2 attributes; the LAG has no L1 attributes. For
example, a member port can be mirrored, but not a LAG; a LAG has QoS policies
applied, but not member ports.
The LAG function (traffic collection and distribution among members) can be manually
created, or it can be managed by the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). Without
LACP, members are always active unless failed. LACP facilitates active/standby
operation, and provides additional capability such as removing any members which are
looped among themselves. Alternatively, the LAG function can operate in the CE at each
end of the network, by 11QPE24 ports which tunnel the LACP messages rather than
terminating them. Up to 20 LAGs may be configured on an 11QPE24, and a LAG may
have as many as four members ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hashing
When a LAG has more than one active member, hashing is used to identify flows and
distribute the flow traffic among the members. For the 11QPE24, if the traffic is IP, then
hashing is based on IP SA and DA, and Source and Destination L4 ports. If it is not IP,
then hashing uses MAC SA and DA, Ethertype, and VLAN ID. In either case, if the
traffic is unlearned, Port ID is added to the hash.
Advanced LAG Operation
The LAG port threshold feature enables the following behavior. If the number of links
available (up) in a LAG is less than or equal to the configured threshold, then the LAG is
becomes operationally down. For example, assume a LAG consists of four physical links
and the threshold is set to two. If the number of operational links is equal to or drops
below two, the link is operationally down until the number of operational links is two or
more.
Active/Standby LAG
This is configured using subgroups. When using subgroups in a LAG, they should only be
configured on one peer of the LAG, not both. Only having one side perform the
active/standby selection guarantees a consistent selection and fast convergence (the
slave-to-partner flag can alternatively be used for this purpose). The active/standby
selection is signaled through LACP to the other side. The hold time should be configured
when using subgroups to prevent the LAG going down when switching between active
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and standby links in case no links are usable for a short time, especially in case a
subgroup consists of one member. LACP is used to make selection of active links
predictable and compatible with any vendor equipment
In summary, the 11QPE24 implementation of LACP supports the following
A given LAG member can be assigned to sub-groups. The selection algorithm then
assures that only members of a single sub-group are selected as active links.
The selection algorithm is effective only if LACP is enabled on a given LAG. At the
same time, it is assumed that connected system has also LACP enabled (active or
passive mode).
The algorithm will select active links based on following criteria:
Depending on the selection-criteria setting either the sub-group with the highest
number of eligible links or the sub-group with the highest aggregate weight (i.e. sum
of (65535 port priority)) of all eligible members is selected first.
If multiple groups satisfy the selection criteria, the sub-group being currently active
remains active. Initially, the sub-group containing the highest priority eligible link is
selected.
Only links pertaining to a single sub-group are active at any time.
An eligible member refers to a LAG member link which can potentially become
active. This means it is operationally up, and if the slave-to-partner flag is set, the
remote system did not disable its use (by signaling stand-by).
The selection algorithm works in a reverting mode. This means that every time the
configuration or status of any link in a LAG changes, the selection algorithm is re-run.
In case of a tie between two groups (one of them being currently active) the active
group remains active (no reverting).
On the 11QPE24, an ingress QoS policy is applied to the aggregate traffic of the LAG.
For example, if an ingress policy is configured with a policer of PIR 100Mb, for a SAP
configured on a LAG with two member ports, then the policer limits the traffic entering
the system through the two ports to a maximum of 100Mb.
Egress QoS policy shaper parameters are applied to all the ports that are members of the
LAG (all ports get the full SLA). For example, if an egress policy is configured with a
policer of PIR 100Mb, each port would get a PIR of 100 Mb. The advantage of this
method over a scheme where the PIR is divided equally among all the member ports of
the LAG, is that a single flow can consume the entire SLA. The disadvantage is that the
overall SLA can be exceeded if the flows span multiple
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the LAG CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Configuration Commands
lacp-system-priority
lag
description
encap-type
hold-time
lacp
lacp-xmit-interval
mac
mode
lacp-xmit-stdby
port
priority
subgroup
port-threshold
selection-criteria
shutdown
split-horizon-group
Show Commands
lag
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the MC-LAG CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details
and parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Multi-Chassis Redundancy Commands
redundancy
multi-chassis
source
peer
peer-name
description
shutdown
mc-lag
hold-on-neighbor-failure
keep-alive-interval
lag
flush-eth-ring-when-active
shutdown
sync
igmp-snooping
shutdown
MC-LAG
Sync
Show Commands
redundancy
multi-chassis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the PMON CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Configure PMON policies
pmon
pmon-sap-policy
description
bin-15min
bin-1day
tca-15min
tca-1day
ingresspktsdropped
ingressoctetsdropped
pmon-port-policy
description
bin-15min
bin-1day
tca-15min
tca-1day
port
queue
ifinpackets
ifoutpackets
ifinoctect
ifoutoctets
ifindiscards
ifoutdiscards
ifinerrors
ifouterrors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
highcapacitypkts
highcapacityoctets
pktsdropped
octetsdropped
pmon-slm-policy
description
bin-1day
flr-1day
tca-1day
anflr
xnflr
afflr
xfflr
pmon-dm-policy
description
bin-15min
bin-1day
tca-15min
tca-1day
abfd
xbfd
anfdv
xnfdv
affdv
xffdv
Show Commands
pmon
pmon-sap-policy
pmon-port-policy
pmon-slm-policy
pmon-dm-policy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the RMD CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
RMD Discovery Commands
rmd-discovery
rmd-access-interface
oui
start
rmd-access-interface
rmd
description
reset
port
autonegotiate
autonegotiate-fallback
duplex
speed
traffic
forwarding
eth-cfm
mep
ccm-enable
remote-mepid
shutdown
efm-oam
shutdown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Show Commands
RMD Discovery
rmd-discovery
Access-Interface
rmd-access-interface
rmd
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the Port CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
Basic Port Commands
port
split-horizon-group
ethernet
pmon-port-policy
access
egress
efm-oam
shutdown
accept-remote-loopback
mode
transmit-interval
tunneling
uplink
qos
queue-policy
egress-scheduler-policy
mode
mtu
autonegotiate
duplex
egress-rate
encap-type
lacp-tunnel
qinq-etype
speed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-53
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pool
slope-policy
Show Commands
port
pmon
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-54
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the Clear CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
VPLS Service Clear Commands
clear
service
id
fdb
igmp-snooping
port-db
querier
statistics
counters
sap
filter
mac
lag
port
rmd
pmon
port
sap
proactive-test
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-55
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the Tools CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Configuration Commands
tools
perform
eth-ring
clear
force
manual
lag
clear-force
force
force all-mc
clear-force all-mc
force peer-mc
clear-force peer-mc
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-56
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following is a list of the General CLI commands for 11QPE24. For command details and
parameters, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0
Command Line Interface Guide.
CLI Configuration Commands
split-horizon-group
description
Show Commands
split-horizon-group
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-57
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to configure Ethernet-Ring (one node). An Ethernet Ring is
built on a topology of 11QPE24 cards which have 10G ports daisy-chained in a closed
ring. As many as 10 Eth-Ring logical instances may be configured on a single 10G
physical ring. For Eth-ring protection, services are assigned to a particular instance
through their uplink SAP configuration.
Before you begin
raps-tag
association name
MEP ID
Any 11QPE24 node in the physical topology which has no service add/drop for some
Eth-rings must have a pass-through service configured on the uplink ports for all
services associated with those Eth-rings, including the ring control services. This can
be done with a single service having default QinQ (*.*) SAPs on the uplink ports at
those nodes.
Customer VPLS services access the ring by having SAPs specifying the ring ID
option when they are created on the uplink ports. For example with CLI, in a vpls
context, the following command could be used to create a SAP on a ring port: sap
1/7/X1:1000.5 eth-ring 13 create.
Create ring instance
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI procedure:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the equipment tree, select Ethernet Rings under the 11QPE24 card to display the
Ethernet Rings page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Create button to display the Create Ethernet Ring page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
On the equipment tree, select X1 under the 11QPE24 card to display the Unprovisioned
Port page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After the port is successfully provisioned, select the Ethernet Port tab.
Set Mode= Uplink. Encapsulation Type will automatically be set to QinQ when the
request is submitted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-59
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The downstream nodes will instantiate peer MEPs 3 and 4 on their paths.
CLI commands are:
config card 11qpe24 <shelf/slot> eth-cfm
domain <99> format none level <1>
association <1> format icc-based name <ring-13-east->
ccm-interval 3.3ms
remote-mepid 3
exit
association 2 format icc-based name <ring-13-west->
ccm-interval 3.3ms
remote-mepid <4>
exit all
WebUI procedure:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the equipment tree, select MEPs under the 11QPE24 card to display the Maintenance
Domains page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Create button to display the Create Maintenance Domain page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index = 99
Format = None
Level = 1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Go back to the Maintenance Domains page and select the created Maintenance Domain
(Index=99) in the table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-60
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Create button to display the Create Maintenance Association page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index = 1
Name = ring-13-{east}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Go back to the Maintenance Associations page and select the created Maintenance
Association in the table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Remote MEPs buton to display the Remote MEPs page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select the Create button to display the Create Remote MEP page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
12
Index = 2
Name = ring-13-west
Remote MEP ID = 4
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
config card 11qpe24 <shelf/slot> vpls <99> customer <2> svc-saptype any create
sap <1/7/X1:4093.4094> eth-ring <13> create
exit
sap <1/7/X2:4093.4094> eth-ring <13> create
exit all
WebUI procedure:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the equipment tree, select Services under the 11QPE24 card to display the Services
page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service ID = 99
Customer ID = 2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Go back to the VPLS page and select the created VPLS (ID = 99) in the table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the SAPs button to display the Service Access Points page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port ID = X1
SVLAN ID = 4093
CVLAN ID = 4094
Ethernet Ring ID = 13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-62
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port ID = X2
SVLAN ID = 4093
CVLAN ID = 4094
Ethernet Ring ID = 13
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: One node in the ring needs to be configured as rpl-node owner, and one path the
rpl-end, shown below. The node at the other end of the rpl-end path must be
configured as rpl-node nbr.
CLI commands are:
config card 11qpe24 <1/7> eth-ring <13>
rpl-node owner
path a <X1> raps-tag <4093.4094>
rpl-end
eth-cfm
mep <1> domain <99> association <1>
ccm-enable
control-mep
no shutdown
exit
exit
no shutdown
exit
path b <X2> raps-tag <4093.4094>
eth-cfm
mep <2> domain <99> association <2>
ccm-enable
control-mep
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-63
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
no shutdown
exit
exit
no shutdown
exit
no shutdown
exit
WebUI:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-64
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8. When the MEP is successfully created, select the created MEP from the Maintenance
End Points table and select the Details button
9. Modify the following on the MEP:
Control MEP Enabled = Checked.
10. Repeat Steps 4-9 to create another Maintenance End Point on Maintenance
Association (Index = 2) with:
MEP ID = 2
Direction = Down
Interface Type = Ethernet Ring Path
Interface = Eth Ring 13: Path B X2:4093.4094
MEP Active = Checked
Control MEP Enabled = Checked.
CCM Enabled = Checked
11QPE24 L2 Features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
6-66
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
7 larm management
A
procedures
Overview
Purpose
The present chapter describes the procedures which have to be performed for the alarm
management of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network elements
Alarm management in a combined OCS/WDM system
In a combined system, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC has one alarm list that contains
both OCS and WDM alarms.
Contents
OCS alarm management procedures
7-3
7-3
7-5
7-7
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-14
7-16
7-18
7-19
Introduction
7-19
7-23
Alarm List
7-24
7-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-26
7-27
Alarms Log
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
Alarmable Conditions
7-32
7-35
Environmental Alarms
7-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
View NE alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve detailed information about the current alarm status of a
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-ALM-ALL
Required privileges
You must have at least a User Community Authorization Level of 1 to perform this task.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select the bell symbol on the tool bar
or select Navigation Show Alarms from the main menu bar.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC View Current Alarms and Conditions
window opens.
Any reported alarm in the system is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To filter the displayed alarms and conditions you can select from the following options
using the Show spin box below the table:
All
Active Alarms
Standing Conditions
Suppressed Alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The View Current Alarms And Conditions window serves to retrieve the current status of
any reported, alarmed, not alarmed or not reported conditions (also referred to as events
in the following) for a particular system component.
Parameters
Parameter
Value
Description
Name
Alphanumeric string of up to 20
characters.
Possible values:
OCS
WDM
AID Type
Notification Code
CR - Critical
MJ - Major
MN - Minor
WR - Warning
NA - Not Alarmed
NR - Not Reported
Condition Type
Description
Service Affecting
SA - Service-affecting
Date Occured
Time Occured
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Value
Description
Location
Direction
Monitored Value
Threshold Level
Time Period
1-day
15-minutes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to create an Alarm Severity Assigned Profile (ASAP) instance for a
given profile type.
The ASAP is created as a clone of the factory default ASAP of the given type.
Related TL1 commands
ENT-ASAP-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create EQPT profiles, select the equipment node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
selection tree.
To create facility profiles, select the respective facility node in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
To create BITS, TIMING and NETIF profiles select System in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC selection tree
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Alarm Profiles Create, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the Profile Type drop down list box select the ASAP type for the ASAP that shall
be created.
Possible values are, when System was selected:
BITS
IPIPT
LAN
NETIF
TIMING
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the drop down list box Set as Default specify if the created ASAP shall become the
default ASAP for the entered ASAP type or not.
Yes
No
Note: It isnt necessary to apply a value for Set as Default. If nothing is selected the
new profile is created with the default values.
Note: It isnt necessary to apply a value for Clone From. If nothing is selected the
new profile is created with the default values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Label enter as string to address the ASAP in place of the AID.
Note: It isnt necessary to apply a value for User Label. If nothing is selected the new
profile is created with the default values.
Allowed characters are alphanumerics and dashes (-).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the drop down list box Clone From specify the index of the system-defined ASAP
instance to be cloned.
All Disabled
All Enabled
Non-Primary Disabled
System Default
Note: It isnt necessary to apply a value for Clone From. If nothing is selected the
new profile is created with the default values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-ASAP-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To display EQPT profiles, select the equipment node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
selection tree.
To display facility profiles, select the respective facility node in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
To display BITS, TIMING and NETIF profiles select System in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC selection tree
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Alarm Profiles View Assignments, either by selecting Action from the
main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The View Assignment Profile window is displayed showing Alarm
Assignment Profiles.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to display Alarm Assignment Profiles assigned to specific entities.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-ASAP-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To display Alarm Assignment Profiles assigned to a specific entity, select the entity in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties Alarm Severity View, either by selecting Action from the
main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alarm Severity window is displayed showing the Alarm Assignment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-ASAP-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Alarm Profiles Manage, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Show All Alarm Assignment Profile window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the drop down list box Promote as Default specify if the created ASAP shall
become the default ASAP for the entered PFTYPE or not.
Yes
No
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Label enter as string to address the ASAP in place of the AID.
Allowed characters are alphanumerics and dashes (-).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-ASAP-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To manage Alarm Assignment Profiles assigned to a specific entity, select the entity in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties Alarm Severity Set, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Edit Alarm Profile Pointer window is displayed showing Alarm
Using the drop down list box Alarm Porfile select the ASAP to be assigned to the selected
entity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the drop down list box Mode select the command execution mode.
Forced
Normal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-ASAP-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To edit EQPT profiles, select the equipment node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
selection tree.
To edit facility profiles, select the respective facility node in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
To edit BITS, TIMING and NETIF profiles select System in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC selection tree
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Alarm Profiles Edit, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Edit Alarm Assignment Profile window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an ASAP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Modify.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the drop down list box Notification Codes specify the notification code
CR
Critical alarm
MJ
Major alarm
MN
Minor alarm
WR
Warning Alarm
NA
Not Alarmed
NR
Not Reported
DFLT
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to delete an Alarm Severity Assigned Profile (ASAP) instance for a
given profile type.
Related TL1 commands
DLT-ASAP-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree selectSystem ,Facilities or Equipment
Then select Alarm Profiles Manage, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Show All Alarm Assignment Profiles window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble notifications are provided for and distinguish between equipment failures and
incoming signal failures.
Local notifications are consistent with the remote notifications for the same trouble.
Any single failure results in only one alarmed output message.
The system supports two modes for alarm reporting: SONET and SDH. The mode of
alarm reporting is defined by the system level MODE parameter.
The system supports autonomous reporting and logging of alarms and conditions for
equipment and facilities. All currently existing alarmed, not alarmed, and not reported
events are retrievable via all user interfaces.
When an entity is deleted, all of its associated alarms and conditions are cleared.
When an entity is not provisioned, no alarms or conditions are set against that entity.
If a condition error is associated with a non-provisioned entity, then it is set against
the SLOT entity with the same instance of the non-provisioned entity.
When an entity is logically removed (placed in OOS-[AU]MA state), clear messages
are sent for all the outstanding conditions on that entity that were autonomously
reported, except for the off-normal conditions. However, outstanding conditions on
that entity will still be retrievable.
You can change the default alarm severity for an alarm condition on a specific entity (for
example a port) or for all entities of the same type. While alarm severity is modifiable, the
service-affectedness of the condition cannot be modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE allows default alarm severities to be modified via all supported user interfaces,
and all user interfaces provide a means of reverting to the default alarm severities. All
user interfaces provide a means of listing the severities in effect.
The NE supports the following condition severities (notification codes) which are
reported to maintenance and operations personnel responsible for the equipment:
Critical (CR)
Major (MJ)
Minor (MN)
Warning (WR)
Not-Alarmed (NA)
Alarm reporting
The system supports autonomous reporting and logging of all alarms and conditions and
management and retrieval of alarm logs is available. Each trouble requiring craftsperson
action results in an alarm condition and is reported by three concurrent methods:
A trouble not requiring craftsperson action is reported via an automatic output message.
Incoming signal failures generate alarmed trouble notifications. Transient events (e.g.,
threshold crossing alerts) generate not-alarmed notifications as the default.
Each automatic output message includes, as a minimum, the following information:
After an autonomously reported standing condition has been cleared, an automatic output
message is generated by the NE indicating that the alarmed condition has been cleared.
The automatic output message has the same priority as that reported in the original alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The colors red, amber, yellow, cyan, and green indicating the severity of the trouble are
used on an NE's physical control/status display panel to visually represent various alarm
levels and status conditions at the NE's equipment location. The alarm LEDs for an entity
on the NE are lit according to the alarm level(s) being asserted by the NE. The level
priorities are:
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
None
Alarm hierarchy
For non-independent failures, only the highest trouble in the alarm hierarchy will be
reported. When a higher level alarm clears and lower level problems persist that were not
alarmed, the lower level problem will be alarmed. The timestamp of the alarm will be the
detection time of the problem not that of the higher level alarm clearing.
When a lower level alarm is cleared due to a logical removal of the entity, then it can be
retrieved by the related condition retrieval command. Its timestamp will be the time of the
command that logically removed the entity. If re-raised (logically inserted again) the
timestamp will be the time of original problem detection, not the time the logical insertion
occurred.
Equipment/ facility alarms
Equipment and facility failures are classified as either service-affecting (SA) or non
service-affecting (NSA), depending on whether they affect the service that the equipment
transports. Detectable faults on a module that affect the operation of that module results in
an alarm generated against the failed module. An error occurring between two pieces of
equipment results in an alarm on the receiving/detecting equipment.
Audible alarms
The NE provides audible alarm dry contacts and alarm cut-off capability. The alarm
cut-off function (in the alarm area of the WebUI toolbar) removes the signal from the dry
contacts, but does not affect the internal state of the NE, nor affect any of the visual
indicators.
Environmental (housekeeping) alarms
The NE provides eight input sensors and four output controls for status and management
of customer external equipment and environment. Upon successful provisioning of the
main shelf on an NE, all External Control Output Points (CPO) and all External Control
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Introduction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Input Points (CPI) are automatically created. Housekeeping (HKP) alarm provisioning is
persistent and stored in the database. If customer controls are active prior to a system
reset, they remain active through the reset and maintain their prior state following the
reset. On restoration of a backup database, customer controls are restored to their state at
the time of backup .
It is possible to configure user labels for each alarm input and control output for message
purposes on all user interfaces (via the local terminal and element manager). The labels
consist of ASCII text fields up to 30 characters. It is possible to modify each label at any
time.
Input sensors
The NE can receive and process eight separate customer-defined inputs for fault
conditions arising externally to the NE. These fault conditions are processed and reported
the same as for internally detected fault conditions. It is possible to disable the reporting
from any input if not used. The inputs are normally used for site specific alarms such as
open door, high temperature, high water level, etc. The system issues a database change
event when the HKP provisioning is updated.
Output controls
The NE drives four separate output station controls for customer defined site specific
facilities external to the NE, such as air conditioning, generators, etc. Operating an
external control means that a relay is activated to control some external device. Releasing
an external control means deactivating the relay. The polarity of an external output
control determines the relationship between the control state value and the physical signal
The states of the control relays are persistent through a restart or protection switch. That
is, at the completion of the restart or protection switch, the state of the outputs remain the
same as before the restart or protection switch. During the time that the NE restarts or
switch activity is in process, if the control relay states cannot be maintained, then they
default to the open contact state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Reports > Alarm List > {Total, Critical, Major, Minor}
Note: Alarms can also be selected via the alarms display area on the WebUI toolbar.
Result: The selected alarms are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Alarm List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm List
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Time
<date time>
Source
<shelf/slot/port>
Card
Category
Severity
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Description
<0-255 chars>
Condition
SA
Data
<0-255 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
The WebUI displays a list of all active conditions on the NE. The WebUI will allow the
user to filter the list based on Severity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to display active alarms or alarm level on a shelf or slot/card.
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The WebUI will display a list of all active alarms on the selected shelf or
slot/card and all entities hierarchically below.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the WebUI equipment tree, select the shelf or slot/card. Click the Fault function.
Result: The Alarm List/Alarm Level is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
The WebUI supports the following alarms history logs: All, Critical, Major, Minor, Not
Reported, Not Alarmed, Warning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Reports > Logs > Alarms > {All Alarms, Critical Alarms, Major
Alarms, Minor Alarms, Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Warnings}.
Result: The respective Alarms Log is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Alarms Log
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarms Log
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Number
{1-2,147,483,647}
Severity
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Not Alarmed
Not Reported
Time
<date time>
Source
<shelf/slot/port>
Card
Category
Description
<0-255 chars>
Condition
SA
Data
<0-255 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
The WebUI supports the following Event history logs: General, State Changes, User
Actions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Reports > Logs > Events > {General, State Changes, User
Actions}.
Result: The respective Events Log is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Number
{1-2,147,483,647}
Time
<date time>
Source
Identifier of the
component/area on which the
event occurred.
Card
Description
<0-255 chars>
Data
<0-255 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: A user may modify the shelf, card, and port level alarm severity for a selected
condition type. A user may revert to the default severity for all condition types of a
specified category.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select System from the equipment tree and click the Fault function.
Result: Alarmable Conditions screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Alarmable Conditions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarmable Conditions
Attribute Name
Value/Format
Additional Info
Condition
Override Severity
None
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Not Alarmed
Not Reported
Default Severity
Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Not Alarmed
Not Reported
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Alarmable Conditions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Name
Value/Format
Additional Info
Category
1GbE
10GbE
100GbE
40GbE
BITS
CBR2G5
CBRAR
COM
DDR
E1
ENV
ERP
EQPT
FC100
FC200
FC400
FC800
FC1200
FE
LAG
LINEREF
MEP
OC3/STM1
OC12/STM4
OC48/STM16
OC192/STM64
OC768/STM256
OCH
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU3
ODU4
ODUF
OMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-33
OPTSG
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Alarmable Conditions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute Name
Value/Format
(continued)
OTS
Additional Info
OTU1
OTU2
OTU3
OTU4
PLK
PTPCLOCK
PTPPORT
RMD
RMDIF
RMDIFMAU
RMDMEP
SAP
SVC
SYNC
TOD
TRU
VTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-16, the WebUI supports
provisioning of environmental alarms and external controls on the USRPNL card. For the
1830 PSS-32S shelf, environmental alarms and external controls are supported on the
HKPCNTL card. Once provisioned, the user can operate or release the control(s).
Attributes can be set for each port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI expand the equipment tree to select System > PSS-32 Shelf > USRPNL and
click on the Alarm Level tab.
Result: The Alarm List screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Environmental Alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Environmental Alarms
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Port
PSS-4: {1-3}
PSS-16: {1-6}
PSS-32: {1-8}
Alarm Message
<0-56 chars>
Polarity
Active High
Active Low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
7-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
8 DM timing provisioning
T
procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures which have to be performed for the configuration
of the system timing of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
Related information
Contents
Procedure 8-1: Configure the timing references
8-3
8-5
8-8
8-12
8-15
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-18
8-22
8-24
8-27
Procedure 8-7: Take an external timing reference out of service for maintenance
purposes
8-30
Procedure 8-8: Take an external timing input port out (BITS) out-of-service
8-32
8-34
8-36
8-38
8-39
8-41
8-43
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-SYNCN.
Related information
The system timing entity controls the timing selection. It covers everything related to the
NE internal clock and the system timing selection process.
One instance will be created/deleted in the context shelf provisioning/de-provisioning.
The timing reference covers a timing source which is used as input for the system timing
selection process.
2 instances ( 2 EXTERNAL timing references) are created/deleted in the context shelf
provisioning/de-provisioning
Each timing reference can be assigned (that means connected) to a port.
The following port types can be assigned to a timing reference:
BITS port (that means external timing reference) The clock reference selections
controlled by this command are applied uniformly to both CRUs.
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then ...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Internal Sync
System Timing
The select Properties General, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Properties General window opens.
The timing configuration parameters are shown which are currently assigned
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Sync Messaging drop-down list box, select if the timing reference selection for
system timing is using sync messaging (SSM Qualities) or not.
Possible values are:
System timing reference selection is done by SSM quality levels as first criteria and
by priorities as second criteria.
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These properties are used for provisioning for the following entities:
system timing
timing reference for system timing selection
Meaning...
Command Mode
Name
Forced
Normal
Sync Access Identifier, specifies either the timing node for the
system timing entity (delivering the system timing reference T0) or
a timing reference (external port connected to the timing selection
process) to which the command is directed.
Possible values
SYNC-1-<Shelf>-0
Specifies the currently used operation mode for the system timing.
LOCKED
AUTONOMOUS-HOLDOVER
This value indicates that all timing references available for the
system timing selection have failed and the clock is using data
previously acquired (when it was operating in the normal mode)
to control its output signal.
AUTONOMOUS-FREERUNNING
This value indicates that all timing references available for the
system timing selection have failed and that no data previously
acquired (when it was operating in the normal mode) is
available (e.g. after initial power-up).
FORCED-FREERUNNING
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Active Reference
Specifies either the AID of the currently selected (i.e. active) timing
reference for the system timing:
EXTREF-1-<Shelf>-{0,1}
NONE
Specifies the actual quality value level for the system timing.
PRC
SSUL
SSUT
SEC
DUS
PRS
Stratum 1 Traceable
ANSI quality level value is fixed to PRS
STU
ST2
Stratum 2 Traceable
ST3E
Stratum 3E Traceable
ST3
Stratum 3 Traceable
AUTO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Sync Messaging
No
Yes
NR
Manual
FORCED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-BITS.
Related information
This procedure modifies the provisioning of one or more ports dedicated to BITS
(Building Integrated Timing Supply) facilities for clock synchronization purposes. A
BITS is an external timing input signal. 2 BITS entities are created/deleted in the context
of shelf provisioning/de-provisioning.
The following signal types are supported if the node is provisioned to work in SDH
mode:
2 MHz signal
The following signal types are supported if the node is provisioned to work in SONET
mode:
For the timing cabling currently only two possibilities are allowed:
Symmetrical cable (100 Ohm / 120 Ohm) used for SONET mode
Unsymmetricalcable (75 Ohm) used for SDH mode
The adapter detection is used to create an alarm if the NE is configured in SONET mode
(ANSI) and an unsymmetrical cable is detected or if the NE is configured in SDH mode
(ETSI) and a symmetrical cable is detected.
Important! The used cabling is described in more detail in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64),
chapter 4, Procedure 4-9: Configure external timing connection.
In case a wrong cable is connected the signal is possibly not recovered and may result
in LOS or other alarms. It will be not detected that a wrong cable is connected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The type of interface detection can be triggered (in each case for both connectors) by
performing one of the following actions:
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Internal Sync
Input BITS Ports
The select Properties General, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Properties General window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under Signal Format specify the signal type for this timing input port (that means
incoming direction).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional info The parameter determines the capabilities of the timing input port in
2MBIT-NOSSM
2 Mbit/s framed signal with no SSM support - applicable for node working in
SDH mode
2MBIT-SSM
2 Mbit/s framed signal with SSM support - applicable for node working in SDH
mode.
SF
ESF
DS1 Extended Super Frame format with SSM support - applicable for node
working in SONET mode
ESF-NOSSM
DS1 Extended Super Frame format with non SSM support - applicable for node
working in SONET mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under SA Bit Location specify the Sa bit location used to carry the SSM information.
Note: The parameter is only applicable for the following signal types/formats:
2MBIT-SSM 2 Mbit/s framed signal with SSM support
Additional info The parameter determines the capabilities of the timing input port in
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Under DS1 Line Code specify the line code for the electrical DS1 or external timing
reference source.)
Additional info
AMI
B8ZS
Define the Command Execution Mode using the respective radio button:
Forced
Normal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These properties are used to provision one or more ports dedicated to BITS (Building
Integrated Timing Supply) facilities for clock synchronization purposes. A BITS is an
external timing input signal.
Fields and parameters
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Command Mode
Name
Forced
Normal
BITS-1-<Shelf>-0
BITS-1-<Shelf>-1
Primary State
IS
In Service
OOS
Out Of Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1
(continued)
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Signal Format
Specifies the signal type for this timing input port (that means
incoming direction).
The parameter determines the capabilities of the timing input port in
terms of SSM and fault supervision.
2MBIT-NOSSM
2MBIT-SSM
SF
ESF
DS1 Extended Super Frame format with SSM support applicable for node working in SONET mode - applicable for
node working in SONET mode
ESF-NOSSM
DS1 Extended Super Frame format with non SSM support applicable for node working in SONET mode
DS2 Line Code
Specifies the line code for the electrical DS1 or external timing
reference source.
AMI
B8ZS
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 8-1
(continued)
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
ASAP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-SYNCN.
Related information
This procedure modifies the provisioning of one or more ports dedicated to BITS
(Building Integrated Timing Supply) facilities for clock synchronization purposes. A
BITS is an external timing input signal. 2 BITS entities are created/deleted in the context
of shelf provisioning/de-provisioning.
The following signal types are supported if the node is provisioned to work in SDH
mode:
The following signal types are supported if the node is provisioned to work in SONET
mode:
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Internal Sync
Timing References - Electrical
The select Properties General, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Properties General window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Assigned Port field, enter the AID of the BITS facility
Possible values are:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Priority Drop-down list box, select the priority of the respective timing
reference.
Possible values are:
Make sure that all configured timing references have different priorities assigned.
Result: A priority list is created for the configured timing reference signals.
Timing reference selection If the System SSM Mode (can be set via SYNCMSG
drop-down list box) is set to Yes (QL Enable), then initially the signal with the highest
quality level is used as timing reference signal. If it fails, the system switches to the
signal with the next lower quality level. If there are several timing references with the
same quality level, they are used according to the priority list.
If the System SSM Mode is set to No QL Disable, then only the priorities of the timing
reference signals are evaluated.
If all available timing reference signals fail, then the timing generator enters the
autonomous holdover mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Provisioned Quality Value Drop-down list box, select the timing quality to be
assigned to the timing reference.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRC
PRS
SSUT
STU
SSUL
ST2
SEC
ST3E
ST3
AUTO (default)
AUTO (default)
For timing references, it is recommended to select AUTO. This means that the
Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is evaluated (provided that the System SSM Mode
is set to QL Enable). Alternatively, you may assign the actual quality level of the timing
reference source.
Result: The timing references are now used in the order of their quality level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: A confirmation window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Meaning...
Command Mode
Name
Forced
Normal
Sync Access Identifier, specifies either the timing node for the
system timing entity (delivering the system timing reference T0) or
a timing reference (external port connected to the timing selection
process) to which the command is directed.
Possible values
EXTREF-1-<Shelf>-{0,1}
IS
In Service
OOS
Out Of Service
Assigned Port
BITS-1-<Shelf>-{0,1}
NA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Priority
1-2
AUTO
PRC
SSUL
SSUT
SEC
PRS
STU
ST2
Stratum 2 Traceable
ST3E
Stratum 3E Traceable
ST3
Stratum 3 Traceable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Specifies the actual quality value level for the timing reference as
forwarded to the system timing selection process. The value is
derived from the incoming SSM value taking also the provisioned
QL value into account. In case of invalid SSM (i.e. not defined for
current application SONET or SDH), the value DUS is replied.
Specifies the actual quality value level for the system timing.
PRC
SSUL
SSUT
SEC
DUS
STU
ST2
Stratum 2 Traceable
ST3E
Stratum 3E Traceable
ST3
Stratum 3 Traceable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Signal Status
NORMAL
SF
WTR
NA
Yes
NO
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to perform a system timing reference switch to internal timing
manually.
The following actions can be performed:
OPR-SYNCNSW
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNC-1-1-0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you want to
Then
Then select
Then select
3
To apply your changes, that means to perform the selected
switch request,
click Apply.
click Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR-SYNCNSW
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXTREF-1-1-0
EXTREF-1-1-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you want to
Then
Then select
Then select
causes the system to be switched to the selected timing reference only if that timing
reference is working fault free and no other external request is present.
If SSM is enabled then the best incoming reference will be selected to be the active
reference. Thus a manual switch is only possible if the quality of the reference you
want to switch to is equal to the active reference. Switching between two references
of equal quality but different priority is possible while switching to a reference of
lower quality is not possible.
causes the system to be switched to the selected timing references regardless of the
state of the timing reference. Only if a Clear Reference Switch or a Lockout
command is present the Forced Switch is denied. A Forced Switch remains
active until it is removed by a Clear Reference Switch or a Lockout command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To apply your changes, that means to perform the selected
switch request,
click Apply.
click Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to release a previously executed switch commands for the system
timing entity or for a timing reference entity involved in the system timing reference
selection process.
Related TL1 commands
RLS-SYNCNSW
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depending if you want to executed the switch commands for the system timing entity or
for a timing reference entity involved in the system timing reference selection process,
you have to select differently.
If you want to release system timing
lockout for
Then
SYNC-1-1-0
SYNC-1-1-1
EXTREF-1-1-0
EXTREF-1-1-1
CLOCKSWITCH
REFSWITCH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
clears the current active command (Forced or Manual) for system timing selection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
click Yes.
otherwise,
click No.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to the system timing reference out-of-service. The system timing
reference is logically removed from facility/clock specific alarm reporting service.
Related TL1 commands
RMV-SYNCN
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXTREF-1-1-0
EXTREF-1-1-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The select Service States Remove, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Service States Remove window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Define the Command Execution Mode using the respective radio button:
Forced
Normal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: When using the Forced Command Execution Mode a confirmation window
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to take an external timing input port out of service for maintenance
purposes. The BITS entity is logically removed from facility/clock specific alarm
reporting service.
Related TL1 commands
RMV-BITS
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Internal Sync
Input BITS Ports
BITS-1-1-0
BITS-1-1-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The select Service States Remove, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Service States Remove window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Define the Command Execution Mode using the respective radio button:
Forced
Normal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: When using the Forced Command Execution Mode a confirmation window
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to force a specified facility in IS-NR state. The system timing entity is
restored to facility specific alarm reporting service.
Related TL1 commands
RST-BITS
RST-SYNCN
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
or
BITS-1-1-0
BITS-1-1-1
EXTREF-1-1-0
EXTREF-1-1-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The select Service States Restore, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar
or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A confirmation window opens, informing that the specified facility will be
placed in an IS-NR state. The system timing entity will be logically restored to facility
specific alarm reporting service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RD-SYNCN
Related informtion
The following signal types are supported if the node is provisioned to work in SONET
mode:
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Internal Sync
System Timing Internal Sync.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select View Sync Status, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by
using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Read Synchronization window opens.
STANDBY
NA
The master clock on the matrix shelf timing entity is operating such
that the output signal is totally internally controlled with no
influence of a present or previous external/master reference.
HOLDOVER
NORMAL
The slave clock is aligned to and tracking the master clock reference
and the master clock is aligned to and tracking the external clock
reference source.
NOTTRACKING
The slave clock is not aligned to and tracking the master clock
reference. A MISC-1 condition is active.
NA
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve provisioning and state information for the following
entities:
RTRV-SYNCN
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Internal Sync
System Timing Internal Sync.
In the main window select SYNC-1-1-0.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties General, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Properties General window opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve provisioning and state information for of one or more ports
dedicated to BITS (Building Integrated Timing Supply) facilities for clock
synchronization purposes. A BITS is an external timing input port.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-BITS
Related information
The following signal types are supported if the node is provisioned to work in SONET
mode:
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select System Internal Sync
Input BITS Ports.
In the main window select BITS-1-1-0 or BITS-1-1-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Properties General, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Properties General window opens.
Reference: See General properties of external timing input ports (p. 8-12).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BITS-1-1-0
BITS-1-1-1
The configuration parameters of these external timing inputs are described in the
following.
Related information
None.
Input Signal Format
The Input Signal Format is the format of the external timing input signal.
Table 8-2
SSM support
SONET synchronization
mode
SSM Support
The Synchronization Status Message (SSM) support can be enabled for framed 2-Mbit/s
(SDH synchronization mode) and ESF (SONET synchronization mode) external timing
input signals.
Table 8-3
SUPPORTED
NOT-SUPPORTED
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA bit Location
This parameter is only applicable in the SDH synchronization mode, and only in case the
selected signal format is 2MBIT-FRAMED, and SSM Support is enabled.
If the SSM Support is disabled, then the value of the SA bit Location parameter is of no
relevance.
If the SSM Support parameter is enabled, then the SSM is extracted from the Sa bits
starting at the location defined by the SA bit Location parameter.
Possible values are:
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related information
None.
Active system timing reference
Parameter
Possible values
Meaning
Active Timing
Reference
The currently active system timing reference which is used to derive the
system clock in the locked mode of system timing.
EXTREF-1-1-0
Switch Status
EXTREF-1-1-1
Manual,
Forced,
No Request
Timing references
The timing references include the external timing references. The parameters of the line
timing references and the external timing references are explained in the following tables.
Line timing references
Possible values
Meaning
Port AID
Not connected
1 (highest priority), 2, 3,
8 (lowest priority)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Possible values
Meaning
Signal Status
Normal
Failed
Wait-To-Restore
The timing reference signal has failed and is now being restored. A waiting
period is implemented for a defined time (wait-to-restore time) to see
whether the signal is stable, before the system switches back to it.
Not-Connected
Lockout
Lockout Status
No Lockout
QL Value
PRC
If the provisioned quality level (see QL Provisioned) has any value other
than AUTO, then the quality level is the same as the QL Provisioned.
SSUT
SSUL
If the provisioned quality level is AUTO, then the quality level has the same
value as the incoming SSM Value.
SEC
DNU (default setting)
Valid,
Invalid,
Not Applicable
Valid
Not Supported,
Invalid
Not Supported
Not Applicable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Possible values
Meaning
QL Provisioned
PRC
SSUT
SSUL
SEC
AUTO (default setting)
If the provisioned quality level is AUTO, then the incoming SSM Value is
used as the quality level.
Otherwise, if the provisioned quality level has any value other than AUTO,
then the incoming SSM Value is not used, but this provisioned value is used
as the quality level.
The quality level as received from the external signal when the signal has a
valid Input QL Status (see above).
SSUT
SSUL
SEC
DNU
UNSTABLE
NONE (default setting)
Output Lockout
State
Lockout
No Lockout
ASAP
In the SDH synchronization mode, the output signal at the external timing
output ports can be derived from the line timing references (Line 1
Line 6) via the Timing Link Switch (TLS), that means when the Derived
Output Timing: Prov. Source Selection is set to TLS (can be set via
Configuration Timing/Synchronization External Outputs).
The Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) of type System Timing
assigned to the respective timing reference.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Possible values
Meaning
Detail
Possible values
Meaning
Port AID
Not connected
1 (highest priority), 2, 3,
8 (lowest priority)
Signal Status
Lockout Status
QL Value
Normal
Failed
Wait-To-Restore
Not-Connected
Lockout
No Lockout
PRC
SSUT
SSUL
SEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Possible values
Meaning
Input QL Status
Valid,
Invalid,
Not Supported,
Not Applicable
Valid
Invalid
Not Supported
Not Applicable
PRS
STU
ST2
ST3
AUTO (default setting)
SSM Value
SSUT
SSUL
SEC
DNU
UNSTABLE
NONE (default setting)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Possible values
Meaning
Not applicable
Not applicable
ASAP
Detail
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
8-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
9 DM network
T
configuration procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures which have to be performed for the network
configuration. This comprises basically the functions of the cross-connection wizard and
the setup of network protections.
The following figure gives an overview of the available network protection mechanisms.
Figure 9-1 Overview of available network protection mechanisms
Ethernet/MPLS
Ethernet/MPLS
SDH/SONET
SDH/SONET
1830PSS
1870TTS
OTH
OTH vendor2
1830PSS
1870TTS
OTH vendor2
1830PSS
1870TTS
SDH/SONET/Packet
SNCP/UPSR
OTH
1+1 ODU1/2/2E/3 SNC/N
Restoration
OTM-0.2, OTM-0.3
SDH/SONET/Packet
SNCP/UPSR
Related information
For conceptual information see Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide (PIPG), chapter 5 Provisioning, section Protection switching.
For the basic cross-connection type see Cross-connection types (p. 11-2).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contents
Introduction
9-3
9-3
9-6
Provisioning procedures
9-10
9-10
9-16
9-20
9-27
9-30
9-32
9-34
9-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Create Cross Connections window
Purpose
The following fields/parameters are relevant for all types of cross-connections (protected,
unprotected), and they are displayed independent of the Display Options:
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
From Facility
To Facility
XC Type
Circuit ID
* (asterisk),
; (semicolon),
> (greater-than),
< (less-than),
/ (backslash)
are excluded.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following parameters are relevant for protected cross-connections only, and they are
only displayed if the Protection Parameters check box is selected under Display
options:
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Alternate Facility
Hold Off Timer, indicates whether a hold-off time shall pass before
a protection switch is performed.
Possible values:
Revertive
(relevant in revertive
mode only)
Possible values:
0 15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Protected Protection
Method
Protecting Protection
Method
Possible values: Y, N
Function
Import
Add
Wizard
Remove
Apply
Close
Help
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Meaning...
From Facility
To Facility
XC Type
Primary Status
Secondary Status
Possible values:
Possible values:
DSBLD Disabled.
UAS Unassigned
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
Circuit ID
* (asterisk),
; (semicolon),
> (greater-than),
< (less-than),
/ (backslash)
are excluded.
Alternate Facility
Active
Working
Protection
1-Way Point-to-Point,
2-Way Point-to-Point,
Hold Off Timer, indicates whether a hold-off time shall pass before
a protection switch is performed.
Possible values:
Revertive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field/parameter ...
Meaning...
(relevant in revertive
mode only)
Possible values:
0 15
Protected Protection
Method
Protecting Protection
Method
Possible values: Y, N
Function
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Button
Function
Protect
Unprotect
Split
Modify
Close
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning procedures
Procedure 9-1: Add a protection leg to a cross-connection
When to use
1WAY 1WAYSNCP
2WAY 2WAYSNCP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODUk specifics
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU0
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU1
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU2
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU2E
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU3
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU3E2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU4
CNVT-CCTPR-STS1
CNVT-CCTPR-STS3C
CNVT-CCTPR-STS12C
CNVT-CCTPR-STS48C
CNVT-CCTPR-VC4
CNVT-CCTPR-VC44C
CNVT-CCTPR-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage Cross Connections window.
Reference: Refer to Different ways to modify a cross-connection (p. 11-8).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Protect.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result:
If
then
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CNVT-CCTU-ODU0
CNVT-CCTU-ODU1
CNVT-CCTU-ODU2
CNVT-CCTU-ODU2E
CNVT-CCTU-ODU3
CNVT-CCTU-ODU3E2
CNVT-CCTPR-ODU4
CNVT-CCTPR-STS1
CNVT-CCTPR-STS3C
CNVT-CCTPR-STS12C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CNVT-CCTPR-STS48C
CNVT-CCTPR-VC4
CNVT-CCTPR-VC44C
CNVT-CCTPR-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage Cross Connections window.
Reference: Refer to Different ways to modify a cross-connection (p. 11-8).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Unprotect.
Result:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to create an SNCP (Sub-Network Connection Protection) for OTH
applications.
1+1 SNCP for:
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2E
ODU3
ODU3E2
ODU4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODUk specifics
Protection connections are allowed for ODUk NIMs and transparent transport ODUk
entities. In such cases, these entities are allowed to be the FROMPED, FROMPING, or
TO facilities.
Protection connections are also allowed for path terminated cross connections involving
virtual ODUk path terminated entities. However these entities always need to be the TO
facility of the connection. ODUk SNC/NC based on ODUkP Client Signal Non-Intrusive
Monitoring and ODUk SNC/N based on ODUkP/T Non-Intrusive Monitoring is
supported.
Transparent transport ODUk entities are only allowed to be the FROMPED/PING
facilities if the protection type is SNC/NC; Otherwise they are required to be the outgoing
TO facility.
SNC/NC protection for STM-n / OC-n clients
SNC/NC is only allowed when both protected/protecting entities are transparent transport
ODUk entities.
SNC/NC is only allowed, when both incoming protected and protecting transparent
tranport ODUs carry SDH/SONET client traffic. SNC/NC is only allowed, when in case
of SDH/SONET client signals both incoming protected and protecting client signals have
equal SDH/SONET rate.
The following SDH/SONET client traffic is supported:
SNC/I protection
SNC/I protection generally protects against failures in the server layer. The protection
process and the defect detection process are performed by two adjacent layers. The server
layer performs the defect detection process, and forwards the status to the client layer by
means of the Server Signal Fail (SSF) signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU0
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU1
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU2
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU2E
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU3
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU4
ENT-CRSPROT-STS1
ENT-CRSPROT-STS3C
ENT-CRSPROT-STS12C
ENT-CRSPROT-STS48C
ENT-CRSPROT-VC4
ENT-CRSPROT-VC44C
ENT-CRSPROT-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Create Cross Connections window opens.
In the field Connection Type select the type of cross-connection you want to set up.
Additional info: Connection Type
1WAYSNCP
2WAYSNCP
In the facility area, use the FROM and TO fields to populate the respective fields with the
needed facilities.
A transmission facility may be one of the following (both for unidirectional and
bidirectional transmission):
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2E
ODU3
ODU3E2
ODU4
In SDH networks:
VC-4
VC-4-4c
VC-4-16c
In SONET networks:
STS-1
STS-3c
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STS-12c
STS-48c
Repeat Count: By using the Repeat Count field, you can create a range of multiple
similar SNCP protection groups whereby the specified FROM and TO facility and the
Click Apply.
Result: The From Facility and To Facility fields of the table in the Create Cross
Connections window is populated with the selected facilities. In case you entered a
repeat count greater than 1, the corresponding number of rows will be displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNC/N
SNC/NC
SNC/I
PM Overhead
TCM-1 Overhead
TCM-2 Overhead
TCM-4 Overhead
TCM-3 Overhead
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCM-5 Overhead
TCM-6 Overhead
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that the hold-off time should be configured that an interaction with other protection
schemes (equipment protection) is taken into consideration. Via different hold-off times it
can be defined which protection should switch first. That avoids doubled switches.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Using the Revertive field, define whether the SNCP shall operate in revertive or
non-revertive mode.
Possible settings are:
In revertive mode, traffic will be reverted to the protected leg of the SNCP/UPSR
once the protected leg becomes available again after a protection switch to the
protecting leg.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Select the Revert Delay Time (Wait to restore (WTR) time) if the SNCP/UPSR is
working in revertive mode. Values between 0 and 15 min are allowed.
Important! When re-configuring a WTR (Wait to restore) timer during WTR state,
the WTR is restarted with the new provisioned time regardless of the already elapsed
time of the previous setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-CRSPROT-ODU01
ED-CRSPROT-ODU1
ED-CRSPROT-ODU2
ED-CRSPROT-ODU2E
ED-CRSPROT-ODU3
ED-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
ED-CRSPROT-ODU4
ED-CRSPROT-STS1
ED-CRSPROT-STS3C
ED-CRSPROT-STS12C
ED-CRSPROT-STS48C
ED-CRSPROT-VC4
ED-CRSPROT-VC44C
ED-CRSPROT-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage Cross Connections window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNC/N
SNC/NC
SNC/I
0, 30, 50, 70, 100, 300, 500, 700, 1000, 3000, 5000, 10000.
For ODUk path protection:
0, 20, 40, 80, and 100 up to 10000, in steps of 100.
Note that the hold-off time should be configured , that an interaction with other protection
schemes (equipment protection) is taken into consideration. Via different hold-off times it
can be defined which protection should switch first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the Revertive field, define whether the SNCP shall operate in revertive or
non-revertive mode.
Possible settings are:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In revertive mode, traffic will be reverted to the protected leg of the SNCP/UPSR
once the protected leg becomes available again after a protection switch to the
protecting leg.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Revert Delay Time (Wait to restore (WTR) time) if the SNCP/UPSR is
working in revertive mode. Values between 0 and 15 min are allowed.
Important! When re-configuring a WTR (Wait to restore) timer during WTR state,
the WTR is restarted with the new provisioned time regardless of the already elapsed
time of the previous setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU0
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU1
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU2
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU2E
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU3
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU4
DLT-CRSPROT-STS1
DLT-CRSPROT-STS3C
DLT-CRSPROT-STS12C
DLT-CRSPROT-STS48C
DLT-CRSPROT-VC4
DLT-CRSPROT-VC44C
DLT-CRSPROT-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage Cross Connections window
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Retrieve.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that retrieval of cross-connection may
Click OK.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that retrieval of cross-connection may
Click OK.
Result: All cross-connections of the selected type are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that deleting a cross-connection is
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU0
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU1
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU2
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU2E
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU3
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU3E2
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU4
OPR-PROTNSW-STS1
OPR-PROTNSW-STS3C
OPR-PROTNSW-STS12C
OPR-PROTNSW-STS48C
OPR-PROTNSW-VC4
OPR-PROTNSW-VC44C
OPR-PROTNSW-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Operate Switch, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by
using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Operate Protection Switch Dialogue
window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select if it should be switched from working to protection or vice versa in the field
Destination Of Switch.
The following options are possible:
Protected Facility
Protecting Facility
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the desired switch request in the field Switch Command Mode.
The following options are possible:
Forced Switch
Manual Switch
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The SNC protection group is switched.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU0
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU1
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU2
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU2E
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU3
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU3E2
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU4
RLS-PROTNSW-STS1
RLS-PROTNSW-STS3C
RLS-PROTNSW-STS12C
RLS-PROTNSW-STS48C
RLS-PROTNSW-VC4
RLS-PROTNSW-VC44C
RLS-PROTNSW-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Release Switch, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by
using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Release Protection Switch Dialogue
window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Result: The SNCP/UPSR protection switch is released.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve configuration parameters and status information of an SNC
protection group.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU0
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU1
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU2
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU2E
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU3
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU4
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS1
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS3C
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS12C
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS48C
RTRV-CRSPROT-VC4
RTRV-CRSPROT-VC44C
RTRV-CRSPROT-VC416C
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage Cross Connections window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Retrieve.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that retrieval of cross-connection may
Click OK.
Result: All cross-connections of the selected type are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To display all protection parameters select the Protection Parameters check box in the
Display Options field.
Result: The parameters as described in Manage Cross Connections window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
9-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
10
10 network
WDM
configuration procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures which have to be performed for the WDM network
configuration. This comprises basically the setup of WDM network protections,
Wavelength Tracker, FOADM / FOADM-TOADM system, and power settings.
Related information
For conceptual information see Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Information and
Planning Guide (PIPG), chapter 5 Provisioning, section Protection switching.
For the basic cross-connection type see Cross-connection types (p. 11-2).
Contents
Introduction
10-4
Protection
10-4
Provisioning procedures
10-16
10-16
10-17
10-19
10-22
10-23
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-34
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-36
10-40
Wavelength Tracker
10-50
10-55
10-57
10-58
10-59
10-60
10-62
10-63
Set Power
10-64
10-65
10-66
10-67
10-68
10-69
Wave Keys
10-70
10-72
10-73
10-74
10-75
10-76
10-78
10-83
Power settings
10-86
10-89
10-90
10-92
Power Adjustment
10-94
10-96
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Commissioning
10-97
10-109
10-114
Power Adjustment
10-115
10-116
10-117
10-118
10-119
10-120
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Protection
Y-cable protection
Y-cable protection is a line side (network side) protection mechanism which protects line
card, client side laser, network side laser, and network side fibers (assuming diverse fiber
routes). Y-cable protection is based on permanent head-end bridging and tail-end
selection, with a pair of OT cards at each end. The head-end bridge is done by employing
a 50% splitter on the Rx of the client-side ports. The incoming signal from the customer
equipment is split and received by both the working and protection OT cards. The tail-end
selection is done by having one of the working/protection OT cards turn its Tx client-side
laser on, while the other turns its laser off. This Tx signal is channelled through a joiner
(splitter in reverse direction) and sent to the customer equipment. Either the working or
the protection card can drive the signal through the joiner. The same configuration is used
in the reverse direction to provide protection in both directions.
Y-cable supports the protected OT configuration. A passive splitter/joiner (Y-cable) is
connected to a pair of client ports on redundant transponder packs (OTs) at one end of the
network, with the same arrangement at the other end of a point-to-point link across the
network. The OT line ports must be connected to diversely routed working and protection
lines across the network (no shared risk groups in common). The customer is responsible
for establishing diverse routes; there is no software verification of this.
Port numbers for Y-cable protection must match. In other words, port #1 can only be
paired in Y-cable protection arrangement with port #1 on the adjacent card. Similarly, port
#2 works with port #2 on the adjacent card, and so on.
Y-cable protection can be used with any supported type of OT, but the near-end working
OT must be connected to the far-end working OT and the near-end protection OT must be
connected to the far-end protection OT. The customer is responsible for seeing to it that
near-end and far-end OTs are the same. The ports must be provisioned for the same signal
rate and format at both ends of the network. The customer should normally configure
working and protection ports with the same threshold values.
Note: Both unidirectional and bidirectional are supported for Y-cable protection.
Note: Combination of E-SNCP and Y-cable protection on the same OT is not
supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Protection groups
The NE supports the definition of a Y-cable protection group. This logical object is the
basis for automatic and manual protection switching operations and notifications. A
Y-cable protection group represents the protection association between two client-side
ports of adjacent OT packs. Protection switching is performed only within an established
protection group. When there is no protection group, no protection switching can occur,
either manual or automatic.
An OT with 10 client ports can have up to 10 separate Y-cable protection groups.
Switching operations, both manual and automatic, are on a per protection group basis.
Each protection group operates completely independently of the others, with its own
protection state machine. For the first Y-cable protection group between a pair of adjacent
OT ports, the user is free to specify either port as the working port, and the other port as
the protection port. This choice designates one OT as the working card, and the other as
the protection card.
When there are multiple Y-cable protection groups between the same pair of OTs, the
working/protection port role designations must be specified consistently (i.e. all working
ports must be on one OT, and all protection ports must be on the other OT).
The WebUI supports create, modify, delete, and view functionality for protection groups
associated with a port. The following cards support Y-cable: 112SCX10, 112SNX10,
130SCX10, 11DPE12A, 11DPM12, 11QPA4, 11QPEN4, 11STAR1, 11STAR1A,
11STGE12, 11STMM10, 43SCX4, 43SCX4E, 43STA1P, 43STX4(P) and 4DPA4
(FlexMux).
Note: Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS does not support Y-cable protection on the 11STAR1,
11STAR1A, 11QPA4, 11QPEN4 packs when the client signal type is OTU2.
Note: For 11QPA4 8GFC/OC192/STM64/10GFC client ports, bi-directional and
uni-directional Y-Cable are supported. For Ethernet client ports (10GBE):
bi-directional Y-cable is supported. The 11QPA4 OT cannot support Y-cable
protection with OTM0.2 client.
112SCX10/112SNX10/130SCX10 Y-cable supports unidirectional and bidirectional
and non-revertive only. Revertive switching is not supported.
Note: For 11DPM12 the following applies:
The oduk cross-connect must be created from client ports Lo-oduk entity to L1 port
Lo-oduk entity. L2 port is not permitted to create oduk cross-connect with client port
in Y-cable protection group.
The Lo-ODUk ID in line port associated with client ports should be the same for local
working and protection ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Y-cable performance times may not be met on MUX OTs if more than 4 ports
on each OT belong to a protection group. Under this condition, the switch time can
exceed 50ms,
Uni-directional switching
Bidirectional switching
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Non-revertive switching
In non-revertive switching, the protection side remains active after the working line has
recovered from the failure that caused the automatic switch to protection, or after the user
switch-to-protection command is cleared.
Note: For 43STA1P and 43STX4(P), 4DPA2, and 4DPA4 OTs switching type must be
non-revertive.
Revertive switching
In revertive switching, the traffic is automatically switched back to the working line when
the working line has recovered from the failure or the user command is cleared. In the
failure-recovery case, the switch back to working is delayed until working has been
continuously good for the number of minutes specified by the WTR parameter. In the case
of clearing a user switch command, there is no delay.
Note: If Direction = Unidirectional, then Type must be Non-Revertive. For
Bidirectional, both Revertive and Non-Revertive are supported. Optical connections
must be created before a protection group, and a protection group must be deleted
before its optical connections.
OPS protection
For OPS protection of optical channels, the OPS is placed at the Optical Channel (OC)
layer, between the Optical Multiplexing layer and the Optical Channel to Optical Signal
(OCH/OS) adaptation, (i.e., the OT function).
The OPS supports two types of protected line configurations. In both cases, there is a
single unprotected OT at each end. In both cases, the working and protection lines must
be diversely routed across the network (no shared risk groups in common).
Internal OT, no SVACs - The OT line port is connected to the OPS SIG port. The OPS
A port and B port are connected to two different lines, either via SFD filter ports, or
via CWR8 colorless ports.
Alien/External OT, redundant SVACs - The alien OT is connected to the OPS SIG
port. The OPS A port and B port are connected to two different SVACs. The two
SVACs are connected to two different lines, either via SFD filter ports, or via CWR8
colorless ports.
Note: OPS protection can be used with two MVACs. For this type of protection an
OPS card is placed on the client-side optical path of the MVACs. Protection is
provided against both fiber cuts and MVAC failure.
OPS protection can be used with any supported type of OT (130SCX10, 112SCA1,
112SNA1, 112SCX10, 112SNX10, 11QPA4, 11QPEN4, 11STAR1, 11STAR1A,
11STGE12, 11STMM10). There is no restriction on physical location within the NE of
the associated OT, OPSA, SFD, CWR, or SVAC circuit packs. The packs can all be in
different shelves if desired. For packs in the same shelf, there is no requirement for
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
physical adjacency. In the receive direction (selector function), the two SFD/CWR ports
connected to the OPS A and B ports can have different frequencies. In the transmit
direction (splitter function), the two SFD/CWR ports must have the same frequency.
Protection groups
The NE supports the definition of an OPS protection group. This logical object is the
basis for automatic and manual protection switching operations and notifications. An OPS
protection group represents the protection association between the two line-side ports (A
and B) of a single OPSA pack. Protection switching is performed only within an
established protection group. When there is no protection group, no protection switching
occurs, either manual or automatic. The user is free to specify either of the line-side ports
(A or B) as the working port, and the other port as the protection port.
Note: For OPS protection group creation, ports A and B cannot be in-service. They
must be down or in maintenance state (mt). The default OPS port state is down.
Uni-directional switching
In the client side OPS protection configuration, two OTs are used. Protection is provided
against a line failure (such as fiber cut or LD failure), OT failure and shelf power failure.
The OPSB board with non-latching switch is used for client side OPS protection. The
following applies:
The OPSB board is only used in Client Side OPS Protection (OTUP: Optical
Translator Unit Protection). The user can not provision the protection mode type.
Only the OPSB board can be used as OPS type board in the Client Side OPS
Protection configuration.
The Client Side OPS Protection is supported in TOADM, ROADM and FOADM
nodes. The OPS type board is positioned between unprotected client equipment and
OT client side port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11QPA4
11STAR1
11STAR1A
11STMM10
The working and protection OT combinations supported in the Client Side OPS
Protection include.
For additional details see 1830 PSS Product Information and Planning Guide.
E-SNCP protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the source direction, traffic from the client ports is aggregated into one ODU1 line
signal, then the ODU1 signal is bridged into two parts, one for working path and another
for protection path. Both parts are inserted with OTU1 overhead and FEC code being sent
to the lines. The optical wavelengths are then modulated with WT encoder/eVOA before
sending to the SFD or FOADM.
In the receiving direction, the OT receives two OTU1 line signals (working and
protection). After FEC error correction and OTU1/ODU1 overhead termination
respectively, client traffic is extracted independently from the two line signals according
to the OPTS mapping structure determined for the outgoing direction. Then, depending
on the external switch commands for individual protection groups, or signal quality, the
traffic for each client port is selected independently from the working or protection line
port.
Note: On a given 4DPA4/4DPA2 card, either all services are protected, or all services
are unprotected. There can be no mixing or combining protected/unprotected services.
Note: Protection is not supported on a 11DPE12(E) card if Operational Mode =
Sub-rate. For 11DPE12(E) OT both revertive and non-revertive are supported when
Direction = Unidirectional.
Note: Combination of E-SNCP and Y-cable protection on the same 11QPA4 OT is not
supported.
Protection groups
Each protection group consists of one client port, plus the working line port and
protection line port. Up to 4 protection groups can be created - one for each client port.
Switching operations, both automatic switching and user commands, are on a per
protection group basis. Each protection group operates completely independently of the
others, with its own protection state machine.
The following applies:
Before starting the creation of protection group, at least one line port must be in IDLE
state (no client port has timeslot assignments to this line port). Otherwise, creation of
protection group is denied.
If initially both line ports are in IDLE state (no timeslot assignments), the user is free
to specify either line port as the working port and the other line port as the protection
port for the first protection group, but the subsequent protection group creations have
to follow working/protection designation by the first protection group.
If initially one line port has timeslot assignments, then all protection group creations
have to specify this line port as the working line port. Otherwise, creation of
protection group is denied.
For 11DPE12(A/E) and 4DPA4 OTs, if one or both of the line ports (L1 and/or L2) is
unassigned, then the protection group cannot be created. For 11DPE12(A/E), both line
ports must have Signal Rate = OTU2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODUk Protection
The WebUI supports create, modify, delete and view of ODUk protection groups. These
protection groups are supported on the following ODU facilities:
WDM cards
4QPA8 ODU1PTF{1-4}
Client/Line
For WDM Cards: When creating a protection group, the current ODU will be designated
as the Client. Working and Protection ODUs are on the line ports on the same card as the
Client.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WebUI will allow selection of working and protection ODUs as follows:
The NE will automatically create the working and protection ODUk XCs (if client XC
does not exist) or protection ODUk XC (if client XC does exist) when the protection
group is created.
For Client/Line: When creating a protection group, the current ODU will be designated as
the Client.
The WebUI will allow selection of working and protection ODUs as follows:
Protection switching is implemented via automatic switch events, or from user switch
commands (override automatic switching). The WebUI allows the user to request a
protection switch and supports the following switch commands:
Clear - Clears any existing user switch command. Does not clear any existing WTR
state. In some cases a clear command can result in an immediate switch.
Lockout of Protection - Makes working active and prevents any subsequent switch to
protection for any reason until the lockout is cleared.
Forced Switch to Protection - Makes protection active.
Forced Switch to Working - Makes working active.
Manual Switch to Protection - Makes protection active.
Note: These commands will be denied if an equal or higher priority request is already
in effect. Also, these commands will be denied if operation on the OT circuit packs is
not possible, whether due to circuit pack missing/failed, shelf or card communication
failed, or any other reason.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The OPSA card is used for 1+1 OMSP protection. The automatic protection switching is
based on optical LOS (Loss Of Signal) detection. In the transmit direction, all output
channels from SFD/ITLB card are split into two separate optical multiplex sections routed
to working and protection optical paths. In the receive direction, the OPSA selector picks
one of the two lines as the active path based on power monitoring or user manual
selection.
The following OT cards support OMSP protection:
11DPE12
11DPM12 (Note: OMSP performance times may not be met on 11DPM12 1GbE ports
which have autoneg=enabled.)
11QPA4
11QPEN4
11STAR1
11STMM10
112PDM11
112SCX10
112SNX10
Note: The switching threshold for OMSP should be set approximately 5 dB below the
total input power at each of the A and B ports. In addition, a minimum channel
loading is needed to optimize the switching speed. If there are no ILAs on either the
working or protection paths, a single channel is required. If there are ILAs on either or
both paths, then set the maximum number of spans on either path to M. At least 2M
channels should be loaded on the system for optimum switching speed.
When the A or B port is placed OOS (administrative down) the attenuator is set to
maximum attenuation (applies only to OPSA used in OCH protection mode).
When an OT is protected by OMSP, the laser protection parameter for its client or
clients must be set to laser on.
Attention: OMSP must not be mixed with other existing protection types.
For OMSP protection, power management can only be set as manual on the working and
protection path (this is a system default setting). To ensure the transmission performance,
LDs gain should be manually set and all channels power should be equalized by
modifying target output power at each OTs line port according to Alcatel-Lucent's Power
Budget table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Uni-directional switching
Optical Line Protection is a 1+1 protection scheme for the optical line OTS layer,
providing two separate fiber connections between adjacent network element degrees.
(These separate connections could be diversely physically routed.) An optical protection
switch pack provides the optical bridging function at the source end and switch selection
of one of the signals from the two possibilities at the receiving end.
The following LD type packs are supported in networks using OLP:
Node Config
DFOADM
AHPHG
None
AHPLG
AHPHG
AHPLG
A2325A
ROADM
AHPHG
None
AHPLG
AHPHG
A2325A
AHPLG
A2325A
ILA
AHPHG
Not applicable
AHPLG
A2325A
11DPE12A
11DPE12E
11DPM12 (Note: OLP performance times may not be met on 11DPM12 1GbE ports
which have autoneg=enabled.)
11QPA4
11STAR1
11STAR1A
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
112SNA1
112SNX10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning procedures
Procedure 10-1: Create protection group
When to use
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.
Result: The create APS Group screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Group ID
<integer>
Protection Mode
1+1 E-SNCP
protection
E-SNCP protection
Description
<0-50 chars>
User-specified description of
the protection group.
Client Port
shelf/slot/port or
shelf/slot/port/vts
Working Port
<shelf/slot/port>or
<shelf/slot/port/vts>
Protection Port
<shelf/slot/port> or
<shelf/slot/port/vts>
Switch Direction
Unidirectional (default)
In unidirectional switching,
local and remote ends switch
independently. In
bidirectional switching, local
and remote ends are
coordinated by an end-to-end
protocol so that both are on
working or both are on
protection. Only Y-cable
protection groups support
bidirectional operation.
Bidirectional
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Type
Revertive
Non-revertive
{1-20}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Group ID
<integer>
Protection Mode
E-SNCP protection
Description
<0-50 chars>
User-specified description of
the protection group.
Client Port
<shelf/slot/port>
ODU1PTF
<shelf/slot/odu1ptfid>
The ODU1PTF in a
LO-ODUk E-SNCP
protection group.
Working Port
<shelf/slot/port>or
<shelf/slot/port/
oduid>
Protection Port
<shelf/slot/port> or
<shelf/slot/port/
oduid>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Connection Direction
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Unidirectional
In unidirectional switching,
local and remote ends switch
independently. In
bidirectional switching, local
and remote ends are
coordinated by an end-to-end
protocol so that both are on
working or both are on
protection. Only Y-cable
protection groups support
bidirectional operation. When
creating a protection group,
this field is required if the
client port is not the endpoint
of an ODUk cross-connect;
otherwise this field is not
applicable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Type
Non-revertive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Group ID
<integer>
Description
<0-50 chars>
User-specified description of
the protection group.
Protection Mode
1+1 E-SNCP
E-SNCP protection
Client
shelf/slot/port or
shelf/slot/port/vts
Line
<shelf/slot/port/vts>
Working
<shelf/slot/port> or
<shelf/slot/port/vts>
Protection
<shelf/slot/port> or
<shelf/slot/port/vts>
Switch Status
Protection Lockout
Forced Switch
Signal Failure
Signal Degrade
Manual Switch
Wait to Restore
Far End Request
Do Not Revert
No Request
Unknown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Switch Direction
Unidirectional
In unidirectional switching,
local and remote ends switch
independently. In
bidirectional switching, local
and remote ends are
coordinated by an end-to-end
protocol so that both are on
working or both are on
protection. Only Y-cable
protection groups support
bidirectional operation.
Bidirectional
Type
Revertive
Non-revertive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
WTR (mins)
{1-20}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.
Result: The create APS Group screen is displayed if the selected port is not already a
member of an APS group. The APS Group Details screen is displayed if the selected
port is a member of an APS group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Note: Deletion of a protection group will be denied if there are still cross connects
that depend on the protection group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.
Result: The APS Group Details screen is displayed if the selected port is a member of
an APS group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Note: The WebUI does not allow the user to execute a switch command if the card is
not equipped. When a protection switch is requested, the WebUI displays a warning
message indicating that the switch could be service affecting (although traffic may be
unaffected). The user can continue with the request or cancel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.
Result: The APS Group Details screen is displayed if the selected port is a member of
an APS group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the switch request for the port and click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, click the OPSA card and select OMSP mode in the
Protection Mode tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select OPSA A or B port. On Port Details tab the switch
threshold for OPSA A/B port should be set by user independently. The switch threshold
can be manually provisioned by user for different configurations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The switch threshold should normally be provisioned to -4 dBm for the A and B inputs.
This will ensure that traffic restoration time will meet the target time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On Port Protection tab, the protection group can be established for OMSP. If OPSA A
port is assigned for working path, protection group should be provisioned on A Port
Protection tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
LD provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OMSP configuration, two ingress LDs should be placed on each NE for working and
protection OMS paths. An egress LD may be required for long fiber span transmission.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Two parameters LOS Mode and APR Delay Enabled should be checked on each LDs SIG
and Line ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the WebUI equipment tree, click AHPHGs SIG port, select SIG Details tab, and check
the LOS Mode as Auto.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, click AHPHG Line port and select Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11STMM10 provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To ensure 50ms traffic interrupt time on 11STMM10 OT, the parameters of holdoff timer
on line port and Los Propagation on client port must be enabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In WebUI equipment tree, click OTU2 port on 11STMM10 and select OTU2 Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In WebUI equipment tree, click each client port on 11STMM10 and select Port Details
tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11DPM12 provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To ensure 50ms traffic interrupt time on 11DPM12 OT, the parameters of holdoff timer on
line port must be enabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, click Client port for Port Details tab.
Note: For 1GbE client, the 50ms restoration time can only be met for the Ethernet
service if auto-negotiation is disabled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
11QPA4/11STAR1/112SCX10 provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, click Client port for Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If FC800 has been applied on 11QPA4 pack, the switch threshold values on OPSA A/B
ports should be provisioned as the A/B total input power minus 6dB.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Open physical topology view and establish bidirectional fiber connection for OMSP
configuration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open OCH XC view to establish two OCH XCs from OTU line port to ingress LDs line
port. One is working XC and one is protection XC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For pairs of XCs created on each OT pack, the working/protection attributes should be
specified consistently, i.e. all working XCs must be on the same ingress LD which has
topology association with OPSA working port (for example A port), and all protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XCs should be on the same ingress LD which has topology association with OPSA
protection port (for example B port).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In OMSP configuration, working and protection paths Power Management Type should
only be set to Manual. The power level along the path must be manually adjusted by the
user and would include operations such as modifying the OT target output power and
setting the working and protection LDs gain according to Power Budget Table. For
egress power adjustment on FOADM end terminal, OT target output power or/and egress
LDs gain should be adjusted to guarantee that the services leaves the node at the target
egress power per channel for working path. For protection path only egress LDs gain
should be allowed to be adjusted to achieve the target total egress power. (User does not
need to change OPSA VOA setting from default value (0dB)). For ingress power
adjustment on FOADM end terminal, ingress LDs gain adjust should be made to achieve
the target ingress power at the ingress LD Sig Out port. The target ingress power for
ingress LDs on working and protection path should be the same. The following procedure
is used to View/modify OA gain and tilt values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select OAs SIG port with SIG Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify gain in provisionable attributes, enter the Gain value according to the power
budget table and click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify tilt in provisionable attributes, enter the Target Tilt value according to the
power budget table and click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
In WebUI, select OT line port with Wave Keys Tab for OT with single tunable
transponder.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify Expected Network Output Power attributes enter the value according to
power budget table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For OT with VOA equipped select OT VA port with Wave Keys Tab and modify the
above attributes. The allowable setting value is from -5.5dBm to -20dBm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Retrieve the measured channel power on ingress LDs line port Wave Keys OUT tab of
working path.
Note: Power-per-channel parameter should be enabled on ingress LDs line port for
retrieving the information
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the value has not achieved the target egress power, calculate the offset and change the
OTs output power by an amount equal to this offset to ensure each channel leaves the
node at the same target power.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the resources in the network. Verify that the 11QPA4 transponders, XFP's, etc. are
installed and not in use.
In an initial state:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign the client ports. The client ports must be assigned before a protection group can be
created.
Note: Only the client ports that are matching the Working or Protected Line ports
should be assigned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Assign the network ports. The working or protected network ports must be assigned
before a protection group can be created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical topology
ITU programmed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the protection groups. A protection group logically connects the Client port and the
Network ports that are used for the E-SNCP protection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.
Result: The create APS Group screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Client port that corresponds with the protected (working) line port.
Use the right mouse control and select Configure Protection Group.
Verify/modify the field Protection Port to select the protecting (protection) line port.
Select Apply to create t he protection group.
Physical topology
ITU programmed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to configure OPS client side protection with OPSB card.
Before you begin
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a link between the OPSB A or B port and an OT that resides on the same NE
(Cases a, b, c, d).
Select the OSPB A|B port.
Select the OT client port.
Select BiDir.
CLI command example:
config interface topology 1/31/a internal 1/13/c1 bi
Create a link between the OPSB A|B port and an OT that resides on a different NE.
(Cases b, c, d)
Select the OSPB A|B port.
Select External and enter the External Address and Direction
CLI command example:
config interface topology 1/31/b external ext bi
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the working cross-connect, A-End Port = the line port of the OT that is connected
to the OPSB working port, as specified in the protection group. Set Protection
Mode= Working.
For the protection cross-connect, A-End Port = the line port of the OT that is
connected to the OPSB protection port, as specified in the protection group. Set
Protection Mode= Protection.
For both cross-connects, Z-end Port= the LD line port where the working and
protection paths exit the NE, respectively.
Note that for the cross-connects at the Z-end of an end-to-end service, the A-End Port
= the LD line port and the Z-End Port= OT line port.
Note: The working OT and protection OT do not need to be the same OT type. The
following OT combinations are supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to configure OLP (Optical Line Protection) protection.
Before you begin
Instructions
Note: These instructions assume packs required to build the main WDM nodal
topology have been inserted into the shelf, and have completed auto-provisioning of
the slot and pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, click the OPSA card to be used to protect a degree and
select OLP mode in the Protection Mode tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WeUI equipment tree select OPSA A or B port. On the Port Details tab, the switch
threshold for the OPSA A/B port should be set by the user independently. The switch
threshold can be manually provisioned by the user for different configurations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The switch threshold should be initially at its default value of -32 dBm. Evaluate if the
threshold needs to be modified, based on the OSC channel power that can be expected to
be received at the OPSA A/B In port by considering the loss from fiber attenuation and
SRS effect that may occur. As general guidelines:
SUL-1.20 OSC SFP - use -31.5 dBm for span loss up to 25 dB.
SEU-1.20 OSC SFP - use default of -28 dBm for span loss up to 21.5 dB.
SEU-1.20 OSC SFP - use -31.5 dBm for span loss up to 25 dB.
Note: The span losses are given at 1510 nm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The nodal topology for the ROADM, FOADM or ILA node should be provisioned
through the normal provisioning process for these node types.
Note: Note the power management type of each degree must be Manual.
Note: Note the Wavelength Tracker usage type of each degree must be set to a value
other than the default.
Note: Refer to the Manual Power Management sub-section (included in this topic) for
how to make these settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To protect a span by OLP, create a topological connection between the OPSA SIG port
and LD port nearest the span (LINE port):
Click the SIG port of the OPSA pack and the LINE port of the LD pack to be
connected.
Connect the ports together with a bidirectional connection by clicking the BiDir
button.
Click the Close button when done.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the Admin state of the OPSA A, B and SIG ports to Admin up:
In the WebUIs equipment tree, select the OPSA pack, and the port of interest.
In the Port Details tab, set the Primary State to In Service - Normal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the external topology address of each OPSA A/B port used in OLP protection mode:
Click the A or B port of the OPSA pack to be modified and click the Modify button.
Enter the External Address of the upstream line (A/B port of mate OPSA) in the form
of IP- loopback address and shelf/slot/port number. For example 37.37.37.37 1/35/2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The following settings will be made automatically when the OLP protection
mode OPSA is topologically connected to a node degree, but the user may wish to
review the settings by viewing the appropriate port in the equipment tree.
LD LINE port connecting to OPSA, Port Details: APR Delay Enabled is Yes
(If equipped) Egress LD SIG port, SIG Details: LOS Mode is LOS N.
(If equipped) Egress LD LINE port, Port Details: APR Delay Enabled is Yes
(If equipped) WR2-88 SIG port, Port Details: APR Delay Enabled checkbox
ticked.
(If equipped) WR8-88A SIG port, Port Details: APR Delay Enabled checkbox
ticked.
(If equipped) WR8-88AF SIG port, Port Details: APR Delay Enabled checkbox
ticked.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Additional LD provisioning:
Attention: If there are other degrees in the same optical network that are in the same
optical domain and are not OLP protected, the user must configure the APR hold-off
timer/delay to enabled. CLI commands must be used to make this configuration at the
externally connecting LD port of an un-protected degree.
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent CLI Command Guide and the command:
Config interface [LDTYPE] [shelf/slot/port] aprholdoff.
Provision the NE degree normally, then use the CLI command to configure the APR
hold-off timer.
OT defect hold off configuration:
Note: Certain OT packs supported for the OLP feature require a defect hold-off timer
to be configured in order to meet 50 ms restoration time.
The following packs require configuration when OTU2 rate is used for the line port:
11STMM10
11DPE12
11DPE12A
11DPE12E
11QPA4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the OT and the line port (e.g. L1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To ensure 50 ms restoration time, the LOS propagation for client ports must be
provisioned as laser on:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the OT and the client port (e.g. C1).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Optical channel (OCH) cross-connects are made as unprotected connects to the
LD ports nearest to the OPSA pack providing OLP protection. OLP protection
provides essentially facility protection to the OTS entity.
Note: Usually the NMS will create the OCH XCs when services are provisioned,
however the following steps can be used to manually provision individual OCH XCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the OCH cross connections list from the Connections menu by selecting from it
OCH Cross Connects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provide A-End Port and Z-End Port corresponding to the correct direction. One end
should be the OT port, and the other end should be the LD LINE port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the OCH cross connections list from the Connections menu by selecting from it
OCH Cross Connects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provide A-End Port and Z-End Port corresponding to the correct direction. One end
should be the LD LINE port for one degree, and the other end should be an LD LINE port
for the other degree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
In nodal configurations where one or more degrees are OLP protected, the optically
interconnected degrees must be Manually power managed. Manual power managed is the
default state of the network element, therefore the user does not need to explicitly
provision degrees to Manual unless re-configuring a previously configured network
element. Refer to the procedures under section Port Power Management for details about
switching the power management type. For an OLP protected line, the power
management interface port remains the LD LINE port closest to the span (the one
connected to the OPSA in OLP mode).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Wavelength Tracker usage type for a degree is set using the port Power
Management tab. The WT usage type must be set prior to operating the system.
In the WebUIs equipment tree, select the LD LINE port closest to the span, and
the Power Management tab.
In the Wavelength Tracker Settings box, set the Wavelength Tracker Decoder
Usage value from the drop down list:
- WTD PPC On /Alarm On if the degree does not use the WTOCM pack for
channel monitoring.
- WTD PPC Off /Alarm Off if the degree is an ILA in a segment that uses
WTOCM packs.
- WTOCM if the degree uses a WTOCM pack for channel monitoring.
LD optical amplifier (OA) gain and tilt values can be adjusted through the port interfaces:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI's equipment tree, select the LD SIG port and then the SIG Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OA gain, enter the gain value according to the link planning output in the Gain
entry location. The user may also want to set the Minimum Gain and Maximum Gain
limits to remind him of the planned limits according to the network planning exercise, but
this is optional.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify OA gain tilt, enter the gain tilt value according to the link planning output in
the Target Tilt entry location.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI's equipment tree, select the LD SIG port of the ingress LD and then the SIG
Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the per channel target power, change the Per-Channel Output Power value and
click the Submit button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI's equipment tree, select the LD LINE port (connecting to External or the
OLP mode OPSA pack), change the Per-Channel Output Power value and click the
Submit button.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The OLP protection splits the optical signal at the head end of a span, and selects one of
the two spans at the sink end of a span through a switch. The total optical power at the
receiving end of a protected span must be kept in balance between the A and B In ports. A
PWRUNBALANCE condition indicates if the input power is not correctly balanced
(when both paths are lit and received at the sink end).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power can be balanced into the far end by adjusting the bridge end OPSA A/B Out
attenuator values through the port interfaces.
Note: These steps assume the bridge end OPSA A port connects to the sink end OPSA
A port.
In the WebUI's equipment tree of the downstream node of the span, select the OPSA A
port and on the Port Details tab note the Total Input Power. Call this Power_Ain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI's equipment tree of the downstream node of the span, select the OPSA B
port and on the Port Details tab note the Total Input Power. Call this Power_Bin.
Note: Note the power difference Power_Delta = Power_Ain - Power_Bin.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI's equipment tree of the upstream node of the span, select the OPSA A port
and on the Port Details tab note the VOA Attenuation. Call this VOA_A
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI's equipment tree of the upstream node of the span, select the OPSA B port
and on the Port Details tab note the VOA Attenuation. Call this VOA_B
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Remainder < 0, set VOA Attenuation of the upstream A port to 0 dB, and set VOA
Attenuation of the upstream B port to VOA_B plus Remainder dB.
Else, set VOA Attenuation of the upstream A port to Remainder dB.
To apply the attenuation change, change the value in VOA Attenuation and click the
Submit button.
Done.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For ROADM nodes, the channel Wavelength Tracker expected powers at the input and
output port of the WR2-88/WR8-88A/WR8-88AF need to be set to configure the WSS
(Wavelength Selective Switch). Refer to the Wave Key procedures section for information
about how to set a channel's expected power value at a port.
After making changes to initially provision a new channel, wait a few minutes to allow
the WSS adjustment to occur.
Manual power management for OTs with OLP:
To modify or adjust the transmit power from an OT towards the WDM line, use the
following procedures:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the OT of interest, and expand to view its ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Line port (e.g. L1) for an OT with WT encoding done directly by the Line port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the VA port (e.g. VA1) for an OT with WT encoding done by a fast VOA SFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the power transmitted to the line, change the Expected Network Output Power
and click the Submit button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for the pack to converge to the new target before making further adjustments. Use
the Refresh button to update the displayed data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Target the per channel power indicated by the WT expected power at the LINE port
connecting to the OLP mode OPSA.
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the LD LINE port of interest, and select the Wave
Keys Out tab.
Use the Refresh button to update the displayed data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In general, Manually power managed degrees require that the user configure the
Wavelength Tracker expected powers for newly provisioned channels. As a maintenance
activity, the user may need to update the expected powers for in-service channels. Refer
to the Wave Key procedures section for information about how to set a channel's expected
power value at a port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wavelength Tracker
Overview
The Wavelength Tracker identifier consists of a pair of numbers, called wave keys, that
are assigned to a wavelength. The wave key pair assigned to a wavelength is unique in the
network. A unique wave key pair is assigned for each individual circuit, or optical trail, in
the network. Thus if there are two or more circuits in a network that use the same
wavelength, each circuit is assigned a unique pair of wave keys. A network can support
multiple occurrences of the same wavelength only if they do not share a common fiber. In
order for a wave key pair to be unique, it can share one of its wave keys with another
optical trail in the network, but not both.
Encoding Wavelength Tracker identifiers
The Wavelength Tracker wave keys are encoded onto the wavelength for an optical trail at
network ingress. The following cards support wave key encoding:
112SCA1
112SCX10
112SNA1
112SNX10
130SCX10
130SCUP
11DPE12(A/E)
11DPM12
11QCUPC
11QPA4
11QPE24
11QPEN4
11STAR1
11STAR1A
11STMM10
11STGE12
43SCA1
43SCGE1
43SCX4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
43SCX4E
43STA1P
43STX4
43STX4P
4DPA4
SVAC
MVAC
MVAC8B
In order to trace a wavelength through the network, its presence at a port must be
detected. The presence or absence of a wavelength at a port is determined by equipping a
port with a Wavelength Tracker detector, which is able to detect and identify the wave
keys encoded onto a wavelength. In addition to detecting the wave keys encoded onto a
wavelength, the Wavelength Tracker detectors can also measure the optical power for
each encoded channel that passes through the port.
Associating the wave keys with an optical trail
The wave keys for an optical trail are assigned when the optical trail (service) is created.
Typically, the wave keys are automatically assigned by the NE software (ROADM rings
only) or the 1354 RM-PhM (ROADM, static, and mixed networks). Manual assignment is
also possible, though not recommended.
The following actions are performed when the optical trail is created:
the wave keys associated with the trail are assigned and are encoded at the service
endpoints (at a transponder or SVAC). A different wave key pair is assigned for each
direction.
the wave keys assigned to the trail are propagated to each Wavelength Tracker detect
point along the service path (as determined from the programmed fiber topology).
Each detect point is then programmed to expect to receive a certain set of wave keys.
Wavelength Tracker makes it possible to check and confirm the path that a wavelength
takes through the network. This capability allows the operator to ensure that the network
connections are correct. Since the Wavelength Tracker detection points are programmed
to expect a certain set of wave keys, wave keys that are unexpectedly received at a
detection point are flagged, and typically indicate a faulty cross-connection. Wavelength
Tracker, with its multiple detection points, immediately flags and pinpoints the location of
these faulty connections, allowing them to be discovered and corrected quickly and easily.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The ability of the Wavelength Tracker detection points to measure the optical power of
each channel passing through the port allows for:
When a service is provisioned, the system assigns expected power levels at the detection
points along the path of the service at the Auto power managed lines using data from the
Engineering Planning Tool. If any of the lines along the path of the service are Manual
power managed lines, the user will set the expected power levels at the detection points to
the observed power levels after adjusting the optical power control points.
Adding services to a network
If the new service path through the network crosses lines whose optical power
management type is set to Auto, the service will automatically ramp up to the target
egress power at the launch node. Along the lightpath, control loops will adjust attenuation
settings to bring the services optical power level into alignment with the target points
along the lightpath. Wavelength Tracker power deviation thresholds are set up around
expected powers along the entire lightpath automatically.
For a FOADM system or mixed FOADM-TOADM system containing lines that are auto
power managed and lines that manually power managed, the user must ensure that the
service reaches the correct operational power levels and that Wavelength Tracker
monitoring points are set correctly (see Instructions (p. 10-78)).
Reported information
Using the Wavelength Tracker information, the NE is able to identify all of the
wavelengths that pass through a Wavelength Tracker detect point. For each wavelength,
Wavelength Tracker reports the following information:
whether the channel is expected at the port or not (based on the service topology)
the optical power of the wavelength
The information is displayed graphically in the WebUI. The 1354 RM-PhM can display
data for the entire network, for example it can display a graph showing the optical power
for a service at all of the Wavelength Tracker detect points through which the service
passes.
Long haul Wavelength Tracker
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS supports both "standard" Wavelength Tracker (WT), for
regional applications, and Long-Haul Wavelength Tracker (LH-WT), for long haul
applications. LH-WT is supported by the WTOCM/WTOCMA card, which is connected
to the external facing LD on an optical line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A2P2125
A2325A
AHPHG
AHPLG
ALPHG
AM2125A
AM2125B
AM2318A
The MON ports for each LD on an optical line must connect to the same
WTOCM/WTOCMA.
The 1830 PSS supports both keyed and unkeyed optical channels. For keyed optical
channels, Wavelength Tracker functionality is enabled. For most unkeyed optical channels
(also referred to as unmanaged), Wavelength Tracker functionality is not enabled encoders/fVOAs on OTs are not populated or not enabled for integrated eVOA and
decoder points are not used in maintenance/monitoring functions. Ther following applies:
The NE allows mixing keyed and unkeyed optical channels on the same optical line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-53
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Wavelength Tracker
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An optical channel trail must be made up of all unkeyed OCH cross-connects or all
keyed OCH cross-connects for its entire length.
An unkeyed optical channel is not supported on an auto-power managed line if the
channel monitoring type is embedded WT (i.e. standard WT).
An unkeyed optical channel is supported on an auto-power managed line for the
following node types if the channel monitoring type is WTOCM/WTOCMA.
ILA
FOADM
TOADM
Note: The NE will not preclude support for the following node types: ROADM,
ROADM with Anydirection Add/Drop (Single Node, i.e. Config D), , but it is not
required by EPT.
Each line within an optical node, and each endpoint on an OMS span, must be configured
with the same WT capability, either long haul (with WTOCM/WTOCMA), or standard
(without WTOCM/WTOCMA).
Note: Creation of unkeyed cross connection is allowed when a CWR pack is involved
in the physical topology connection on a manual power management configuration.
The WTOCM/WTOCMA is used on the following node types for long haul
configurations:
TOADM
ROADM
Anydirection
FOADM end terminal with DGE in path
2D+FOADM
FOADM end terminal, with no DGE in path
ILA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-54
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to provision wave keys on an encoder port to support
dangling OT procedure.
Before you begin
In the WebUI, from the equipment tree select the L1 port for the OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, from the equipment tree select the VA port for the OT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-55
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Other validations:
Wave Key 1 and Wave Key 2 must both equal 0 or both not equal 0 at the time the
user submits the request
If Wave Key 1 and/or Wave Key 2 are modified, both attributes will be sent to the NE
(i.e., even if only one attribute is modified, both are sent to the NE).
The WebUI will display a pick list of valid wave keys per frequency. In addition, 0 is a
valid wave key value for each frequency
Note: Connection Type and Frequency are displayed on the Details page.
Note: If the conditions for modification are not met, then Wave Key 1 and Wave Key
2 are displayed as view-only.
Note: For OTs that support the 11 additional frequency values outside of the 88
channels supported by the 1830, only Wave Key 1 and Wave Key 2 = 0 are allowed.
Note: Cannot use dangling OTs connecting to the add/drop block of an Anydirection
Single-Node node.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-56
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Wave Key 1
{0-4096}
Wave Key 2
{0-4096}
Up
Down
Measured Network Output
Power (dBm)
(as displayed)
112SCA1, 112SCX10,
112SNA1, 112SNX10,
130SCUP, 130SCX10,
43SCA1, 43SCGE1, 43SCX4,
43SCX4E Line ports: {-17 to
+4}
11DPE12, 11DPE12A,
11DPE12E, 11QCUPC,
11QPA4, 11QPE24,
11QPEN4, 4DPA4, 4QPA8VA
ports: {-20 to -5.5}
11DPM12 VA ports: {-15 to
-5.5}
43STA1P, 43STX4 and
43STX4P line ports: {-20 to
-0.5}
{-20 to +4} for all other ports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-57
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Note: These operations can only be done if the port is manually managed. If the port
is auto managed, it belongs to an auto managed cross connect, and the keys can only
be modified as attributes of the cross connect. Power cannot be modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the appropriate port, select the Wave Keys tab, and
set Expected Network Output Power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-58
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree select the appropriate port, select Wave Keys In or Wave
Keys Out tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-59
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Frequency
{9170~9605}
{0-4096}
{0-4096}
{-40 to 11}
Off
{0-10}
{0-5}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-60
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Channel Status
Up
Down
Testing
Unassigned
Wave Keys Present
Yes
No
Set Power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-61
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Note: Wave keys can only be cleared for manually power managed ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the appropriate port and click on the Wave Keys In or
Wave Keys Out tab.
Result: The Wave Keys Decoder In/Out screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-62
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Note: Expected Power can only be set for manually power managed ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the appropriate port and click on the Wave Keys In or
Wave Keys Out tab.
Result: The Wave Keys Decoder In/Out screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-63
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Set Power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set Power
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Select this to set one or more
Expected Power attributes. If
not selected, Expected Power
will be set to Off.
{-40 to 11}
{0-10}
{0-5}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-64
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the appropriate port and click on the Wave Keys In or
Wave Keys Out tab.
Result: The Wave Keys Decoder In/Out screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-65
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Delta (dB)
{0-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-66
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI equipment tree, select the appropriate port and click on the Unexpected
Wave Keys tab.
Note: The following ports support unexpected wave key data when WTD is enabled.
WR2-88 SIG
WR8-88A/WR8-88AF SIG, THRU
WTOCM IN{1-4} port
WTOCMA IN{1-4} port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-67
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Direction
In
Out
Frequency
{9170~9605}
Wave Key
{0-4096}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-68
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
The WebUI displays wave key data for wave keys in use on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Reports > Wavelength Tracker > Port Wave Keys.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the ensuing Wave Keys screen, select Port, Direction, Frequency, or All and click
Retrieve.
Result: The selected wave key data is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-69
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Wave Keys
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wave Keys
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Port identifier.
Frequency
{9170~9605}
Direction
In
Out
Expected WK 1
{0-4096}
Expected WK 2
{0-4096}
{0-10}
{0-5}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-70
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Wave Keys
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Channel Status
Up
Down
Testing
Unassigned
WK Present
Yes
No
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-71
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
The WebUI displays all unexpected wave keys detected on the NE, or all missing wave
keys on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Reports > Wavelength Tracker > {Unexpected Wave Keys/Missing
Wave Keys}.
Result: The respective Wave Key data is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-72
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Frequency
{9170~9605}
Direction
In
Out
{0-4096}
Wave Key
Measured Power (dBm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-73
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Frequency
{9170~9605}
Direction
In
Out
Expected WK 1
{0-4096}
Expected WK 2
{0-4096}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-74
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to provision optical line's monitoring (WT mode or
WTOCM mode)
Before you begin
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After WTOCM pack is installed and provisioned, an association to the line side port that
it monitors must be provisioned.
Note: If the node is commissioned via the commissioning process, this association is
provisioned automatically for the user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After association of a WTOCM pack with a line side port, a setting must be made for the
line operation mode. This setting is made at the external Line port of the ingress LD of
the line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Regardless of WTOCM usage or not, a line setting needs to be made at the external Line
port now for all optical lines that defines the WT power display and OCh alarms
functionality.
Note: If the NE is provisioned by the commissioning process, these settings are made
automatically by the 1354 PhM / CPB tools which provision the EPT commissioning
file(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-75
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Power Management
Power Management Type
Automatic
Manual
{0-10}
{0-3.00}
(checkbox)
(checkbox)
(checkbox)
Commissioned Status
In Progress
Completed
Gain Adjustment Settings
Time Offset Past Hour
{00:00:00.0 - 23:59:59.9}
translated to/from
{0-86399.9}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-76
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
{00:00:00.0 - 23:59:59.9}
translated to/from
{0-86399.9}
{00:00.0 - 59:59.9}
WTD Inferred
WTOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-77
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
A FOADM system or mixed FOADM-TOADM system contains lines that are Auto
power managed and lines that Manually power managed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
View the power management type by selecting the Power Management tab of the Line
port of the ingress LD of a line.
Note: If the lightpath of the service traverses only lines that are Auto power managed,
then no further steps are required by the user. If the lightpath traverses a mix or Auto
power managed lines and Manually power managed lines, the following steps must be
followed:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the egress line of the origination point of the service is Automatically optical power
managed wait for one minute for the optical power to ramp up.
If the egress line of the origination point of the service is Manually optical power
managed adjust the setpoint (target output power) of the OT or SVAC Line port to
increase the optical power. If the service is an OT protected by OPSA, change the
OPSA VOA attenuation setting instead of the OT setpoint. Iteratively adjust the power
by steps of 5 dB or less, wait for thirty seconds to observe the result and check the
WT measured power at the egress point onto the line (the reverse direction ingress LD
Line Out port). The target output power range at the egress point is the WT expected
power +/- 0.5 dB.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-78
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the Expected Network Output Power field of the Wave Keys tab for the L1 port of
the OT or SVAC or for OPSA, set the voa attenuation field of the Switch tab for the A or
B port of the OPSA.
Set the VA1 or VA2 port setpoint if the OT is a 4DPA4, 11QPA4, and 11DPE12(E) using
a fast eVOA pluggable module in the VA1 (or VA2) port. If OT does not have a VA
(variable attenuator) port, set the L1 port target output power. If the OT does have a VA
port, set the VA port target output power. If the OT is protected by an OPSA pack, set the
OPSA A or B port VOA attenuation setting to adjust the optical power.
Note: If the optical output power of the OT or SVAC Line, or OPSA A/B port fails to
increase when the setpoint is increased use the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear the
problem.
If the WT optical output power at the egress point onto the line cannot reach within
0.5 dB of the WT expected power use the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear the
problem.
Changes to the power levels of existing services are expected and these services may
fall outside the range of 0.5 dB from the target power at line out. The already existing
services should remain within their WT deviation thresholds at line out.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the egress line for this network element is manually power managed, set the WT
expected powers at the WT detect points through the node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Only follow this step if there are more than 2 NEs including the add and drop
NEs along the lightpath.
Locate the next ingress line of the lightpath.
If the ingress line of this through path is Auto optical power managed, then proceed to
the egress line.
If the ingress line of this through path is Manually optical power managed, review
whether the ingress LD gain needs to be set. View the ingress LD Sig Out target
power per channel. Select the Sig Details tab to view the Per-Channel Output Power
field. Note the value of the per channel target power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
View the current WT power(s) of any service(s) present at the Sig port Out. Select the
Wave Keys Out tab for the Sig port of the ingress LD to view the Wave Key power for
each channel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-79
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change the gain of the ingress LD until the WT power(s) are centered around the target
power. For example, if there is one wavelength present and its optical power is -2 dBm
and the target is 0 dBm, increase the gain setting of the LD by 2 dB. Set the value of the
Gain field of the Sig tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After each gain adjustment wait for ten seconds to ensure the reported WT power(s) fully
reflect the gain change. If this is a manually optical power managed TOADM line set the
CWR8 Sig In expected power to the measured power after completing the ingress LD gain
change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Wave Keys Out tab for the Sig port of the CWR8 to set the Wave Key power
for the channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
If the egress line of this through path is Automatically optical power managed, move on
to the next line at the next NE.
If the egress line of this through path is Manually optical power managed, view the egress
point (reverse direction ingress LD Line Out port) target output power per channel. Select
the Port Details tab to view the Per-Channel Output Power field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
View the current WT power of the new service at the Line port Out. Select the Wave Keys
Out tab for the Line port to view the Wave Key power for the channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Calculate the difference between the WT measured power and the target power. If this is a
FOADM line, instruct the field personnel to change the attenuating pad on the path
between the ingress line and this egress line by this same amount only if the channel is
directed through the NE using the channel ports. For example, if the WT power is 2 dB
less than the target power, the attenuating pad value should be decreased by 2 dB. If the
WT power is 2 dB greater than the target power, the attenuating pad value should be
increased by 2 dB. If the WT power is within 1.0 dB of the target power, consider the
error acceptable and make no further changes. For a channel directed through the NE
using the express ports, the user should not need to change the pad value already in place.
Note that changes to the power levels of existing services are expected and these services
may fall outside the range of 1.0 dB from the target power at line out. The already
existing services should remain within their WT deviation thresholds at line out.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-80
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this is a TOADM line, change the expected power at the Thru Out port of the CWR8
until the WT power is within 0.5 dB of the target power. Wait at least one minute before
adjusting the power set point again to allow the control loop adjust. (Note that in the case
of a TOADM line, initially the measured WT will be very low or not measurable until the
expected power of the CWR8 Thru Out port has been set for the first time).
If the NE egress line is a Manually managed TOADM line change the expected power at
the Thru Out or CLS Out port of the CWR8 until the WT power is within 0.5 dB of the
target power. (In the case of a TOADM line, initially the measured WT will be very low
or not measurable until the expected power of the CWR8 Thru Out port has been set for
the first time). Follow an iterative process until the power observed at the egress Line Out
is in range. The controller converges slowly, therefore allow up to 2 minutes after making
a change for the power to converge to a new setpoint.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Select the Wave Keys Out tab for the Thru port to set the Wave Key power for the
channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
If the ingress or egress line for this through network element is manually power managed,
set the WT expected powers at the WT detect points through the node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Repeat this process for every through network element along the services lightpath.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
17
View the current WT power(s) of any service(s) present at the Sig port Out. Select the
Wave Keys Out tab for the Sig port of the ingress LD to view the Wave Key power for
each channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Change the gain of the ingress LD until the WT power(s) are centered around the target
power. For example, if there is one wavelength present and its optical power is -2 dBm
and the target is 0 dBm, increase the gain setting of the LD by 2 dB. Set the value of the
Gain field of the Sig tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-81
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
After each gain adjustment, wait for ten seconds to ensure the reported WT power(s) fully
reflect the gain change. If this is a manually optical power managed TOADM line, set the
CWR8 Sig In expected power to the measured power after completing the ingress LD
gain change.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Select the Wave Keys Out tab for the Sig port of the CWR8 to set the Wave Key power
for the channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
If the ingress line of this drop path is a Manually optical power managed TOADM line
and the service uses the CLS port, set the WT expected power at the drop port to the
default drop target power. View the drop target power. Select the CLS port details of the
CWR8 to view the drop target. Set the WT expected power to the same value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
Select the Wave Keys Out tab for the CLS port of the CWR8 to set the Wave Key power
for the channel. Wait for at least two minutes for the power level to reach the target value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23
If the ingress line for this drop network element is manually power managed, set the WT
expected powers at the WT detect points through the node. If the service is an OPSA
protected service the A or B port WT expected power value must be set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
Repeat the procedure steps above for the other direction of the service for a bi-directional
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
Repeat the procedure steps above for the protection service, if applicable.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-82
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This describes the procedure for adding an Add/Drop block to an existing ROADM to
create a node that supports the Anydirection/Anycolor configuration. The initial
configuration is a multi-degree ROADM composed of inter-connected WR8-88As. The
Anydirection configuration supports up to 8 degrees with no local add/drop on the
WR8-88As, or up to 7 degrees with local add/drop.
Before you begin
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 MESH4 card. If the initial configuration is >= 5 degree, then a MESH4 card is
needed with the top WR8-88A.
1 WR8-88A (top)
1 LD for Drop direction (A2325A)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-83
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Up to 8 CWR8-88s
Up to 8 OTs per CWR8-88 (a total of 64 OTs per A/D block can be supported)
Optional: WTOCMs for the LDs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision Level parameter for each WR card in the Add/Drop block. In WebUI:
WR8-88A card > WR tab or CWR8-88 Card > CWR tab.
When the top WR8-88A is configured as Level 1, this will automatically set the power
management type on WR8-88A SIG port to Auto, which is the required setting for an
Add/Drop block.
WR8-88As in the connection block will have Level = 0. This is the default value for the
WR cards, so should not need to be provisioned.
Note: The Level parameter must be provisioned before topological links are
provisioned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Level 1 WR8-88A is connected to/from each of the Connection block WR8-88As
(directly or through a MESH4 card).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision WTD Usage parameter for the add and drop directions. WTD Usage
(Wavelength Tracker Decoder Usage) is provisioned on the Level 1 WR8-88A in the
Add/Drop block.
Add direction:
In WebUI: WR8-88A SIG port > Power Management tab.
If WTD is used in the Add direction, this will normally be provisioned with WTD
Usage = wtdonon (-per-channel measurements = on, Channel alarms = on)
If WTOCM is used in the Add direction, this will normally be provisioned with WTD
Usage = wtocmad
Drop direction:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-84
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If WTD is used in the Drop direction, this will normally be provisioned with WTD
Usage = wtdonon (Power-per-channel measurements = on, Channel alarms = on)
If WTOCM is used in the Drop direction, this will normally be provisioned with
WTD Usage = wtocm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Run add adjustment and drop adjustment for the Add/Drop block. Add adjustment and
drop adjustment are run on the Level 1 WR8-88A card.
Add adjustment:
Drop adjustment
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-85
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power settings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power settings
Rebalancing in-service optical power levels
In-service rebalancing of the optical powers is supported on all of the NEs in a network.
A network rebalance may be required if the network is re-engineered, or it may be
performed as a preventive maintenance exercise.
If the network has been re-engineered, the user can reset targets and re-adjust power
levels around the network. When the rebalancing is performed as a preventive
maintenance exercise, the current power targets are used to re-adjust power levels
Only NE lines that are auto power managed can be power balanced using the Ingress
Adjustment or Egress Adjustment functions found in the Power Management tab (see
Instructions (p. 10-89)).
Lines that are manually power managed must be manually adjusted by the user and would
include tasks such as modifying the OT or SVAC target output power, OPSA VOA
attenuation, setting the LD gain, and re-setting WT expected power levels (if necessary).
Target Power Offset
The WebUI supports viewing and setting target power offset for the following ports:
Whether a particular card supports setting target power offset is dependent on its current
topology. The WebUI determines whether a given port supports egress, ingress, both, or
neither by the following:
If the LINE port Opposite Direction Port is set to another port, then only Egress is
supported.
If the LINE port Opposite Direction Port is unassigned, then neither Ingress nor
Egress are supported.
For AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A and RA2P LINEIN ports:
If the LINEIN port Opposite Direction Port is set, then Ingress is supported.
If the LINEIN port Opposite Direction Port is unassigned, then Ingress is not
supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-86
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power settings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WebUI supports modify and view of target power offset by technology type (see
Technology types (p. 10-87)) for each direction supported (ingress and/or egress).
Power Offset cannot be modified for technology types where OTU Bit Rate and/or
Encoding = {9001 10000}.
Per-channel target power offset
The WebUI supports modify and view of ingress and egress target power attributes per
optical channel. This is supported for the ingress and egress power adjust points. The
following applies:
A card supports modify/view of the ingress target power attributes if the card supports
ingress power adjustment.
Likewise, a card supports modify/view of the egress target power attributes if the card
supports egress power adjustment.
The WebUI does not allow modify/view of the target power attributes if the card is not
present in the shelf (i.e. the card is pre-provisioned). The WebUI displays a table of target
power data per frequency for each direction supported (ingress and/or egress).
Technology types
The WebUI supports create, modify and view of system-wide technology types. The
index to a technology type is the Bit Rate Key and Encoding Key as specified in the
following table.
Table 10-1
Attribute
Value/Format
Create
Modify
View
tnPowerMgmtBitRate
{1-10000} for
view
{1001-9000} for
create
Bit Rate
Description
tnPowerMgmtTechnologyTypesBitRateText
<0-50 chars>
Encoding Key
tnPowerMgmtEncoding
{1-10000} for
view
{1001-9000} for
create
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-87
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power settings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 10-1
Attribute
(continued)
MIB Attribute
Value/Format
Create
Modify
View
Encoding
Description
tnPowerMgmtTechnologyTypesEncodingText
<0-50 chars>
WTOCM
Calibration
(dB)
tnPowerMgmtTechnologyTypesWtocmCalib
{-5.00 to 5.00}
Default = 0
WTOCMA
Calibration
(dB)
tnPowerMgmtTechnologyTypesWtocmaCalib
{-5.00 to 5.00}
Default = 0
OSNR
Calibration
(dB)
nPowerMgmtTechnologyTypesOsnrCalib
{-5.00 to 5.00}
Default = 0
Note: The WebUI will not allow creation of a technology type that already exists. The
WebUI will not allow modify of OTU Bit Rate Description and Encoding Description
for reserved enum values (1-1000 and 9001-10000). The WebUI will not allow
modify of WTOCM Calibration for reserved enum values (9001-10000).
The WebUI supports deletion of a technology type if it meets the following conditions:
It is not a reserved type. Reserved types have OTU Bit Rate or Encoding = {1-1000,
9001-10000}.
It is not associated with a cross-connect. OTU Bit Rate/Encoding do not match the
AZ/ZA user-settable OTU Bit Rate/Encoding nor the AZ/ZA received OTU Bit
Rate/Encoding on a cross-connect.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-88
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the appropriate port from the equipment tree and click the Power Management
tab.
Result: The Port Power Management screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-89
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Power Management
Power Management Type
Automatic
Manual
{0-10}
{0-3.00}
(checkbox)
(checkbox)
(checkbox)
Commissioned Status
In Progress
Completed
Gain Adjustment Settings
Time Offset Past Hour
{00:00:00.0 - 23:59:59.9}
translated to/from
{0-86399.9}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-90
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
{00:00:00.0 - 23:59:59.9}
translated to/from
{0-86399.9}
{00:00.0 - 59:59.9}
WTD Inferred
WTOCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-91
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WebUI supports egress and/or ingress power adjustments for A2P2125, A2325A,
AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A, and RA2P cards. Select
the appropriate card from the equipment tree and click the Power Adjustment tab.
Result: The Egress Power Adjustment or Ingress Power Adjustment screen is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the LINE port Opposite Direction Port is set to itself, then both Ingress and
Egress adjust are supported.
If the LINE port Opposite Direction Port is set to another port, then only Egress
adjust is supported.
If the LINE port Opposite Direction Port is unassigned, then neither Ingress nor
Egress adjust is supported.
If the LINEIN port Opposite Direction Port is set, then Ingress adjust is supported.
If the LINEIN port Opposite Direction Port is unassigned, then Ingress adjust is
not supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-92
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the LINEOUT Opposite Direction Port is set, then Egress adjust is supported.
If the LINEOUT Opposite Direction Port is unassigned, then Egress adjust is not
supported.
Note: For power management alarm clearing procedures, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-93
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Adjustment
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
In Progress
Completed
<0-255 chars>
(checkbox)
Enables/disables a request to
start an in-service power
adjustment.
(checkbox)
Enables/disables a request to
abort the power adjustment
and return the power levels to
their original values.
{0-10}
{-3 to 3}
(as displayed)
Gain at Commissioning
Complete (dB)
{0-33}
In Progress
Completed
Power Adjust Result
<0-255 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-94
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
(checkbox)
Enables/disables a request to
start an in-service power
adjustment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-95
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: On the Power Commissioning screen, the WebUI supports modify and view of
up to 20 A2P2125, A2325A, AHPHG, AHPLG, ALPHG, AM2125A AM2125B,
AM2318A, OSCT), up to 16 RA2P cards, up to 16 MESH4 cards, up to 16 CWR8 or
CWR8-88 cards, and up to 16 WR2-88, WR8-88A, WR8-88AF cards on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-96
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Commissioning
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
{-30 to 11}
{0-10}
Ingress or Add/Drop
Per-Channel Output Power
(dBm)
{-30 to 11}
{0-10}
{0-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-97
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Maximum Flat Gain Offset
Value/Format
{-5 to 5}
Additional Info
Provides a correction to the
assumed maximum flat gain
value.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
adjustments.
{-3 to 0}
{0-10000}
{0-300}
{0-10000}
A2325A: {16-32}
AHPHG: {13-33}
AHPLG: {6-24}
ALPHG: {10-30}
AM2325B: {16-32}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-98
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Maximum Gain (dB)
Value/Format
Additional Info
A2325A: {16-32}
AHPHG: {13-33}
AHPLG: {6-24}
ALPHG: {10-30}
AM2325B: {16-32}
Allowed Gain Delta (dB)
{0-5}
{0-10}
{0-10}
{0-3.00}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-99
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Post-Compensated Tilt
Fraction
Value/Format
{0-3.00}
Additional Info
Used to modify the fraction of
upstream span SRS tilt post
compensated.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
tilt adjustments.
NOTE: This field is not
provisionable in the WebUI if
the pack is in Manual mode.
This field is only
provisionable once the pack is
in Auto mode. Please refer to
the required EPT model for
information.
{0-86399.9}
{0-86399.9}
{0-35999}
{0-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-100
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
{0-3.00}
{0-10}
{-3 to 3}
{-30 to 11}
{0-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-101
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Per-Channel Output Power
Deviation (dB)
Value/Format
{0-10}
Additional Info
Allowed per-channel egress
power deviation.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
power adjustments.
{-3 to 0}
{0-10000}
{0-300}
{0-10000}
AM2318A: {7-24}
AM2318A: {7-24}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-102
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
{0-5}
{0-10}
{0-10}
{0-18}
Pre-Compensated Tilt
Fraction
{0-3.00}
{0-3.00}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-103
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Post-Compensated Tilt
Fraction
Value/Format
{0-3.00}
Additional Info
Used to modify the fraction of
upstream span SRS tilt post
compensated.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
tilt adjustments.
NOTE: This field is not
provisionable in the WebUI if
the pack is in Manual mode.
This field is only
provisionable once the pack is
in Auto mode. Please refer to
the required EPT model for
information.
{0-35999}
{0-35999}
{0-35999}
{0-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-104
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
{0-3.00}
(checkbox)
(checkbox)
{0-10}
{-3 to 3}
{-10 to 10}
{-26.5 to -4}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-105
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
CWR8: {8-44}
{1-8}
CWR8-88: {8-88}
Additional Info
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
power adjustments.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
power adjustments.
MESH4
Per-Channel Output Power
(dBm)
{-30 to 11}
{0-18}
{7-24}
{7-24}
{-3 to 0}
{-30 to 11}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-106
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Per-Channel Output Power
(dBm)
Value/Format
{-30 to 11}
Additional Info
The per-channel target egress
power.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
power adjustments.
{0-10}
{0-10}
Fiber Type
ELEAF
SSMF
TWRS
Target Tilt (dB)
{-3 to 0}
Operational Mode
Power
Gain
Maximum Power
Expected Minimum Gain
{7.00} default
{0.00-25.00}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-107
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Commissioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Expected Maximum Gain
Value/Format
Additional Info
{25.00} default
{0.00-25.00}
{10.00} default
{2.00 to 20.00}
WR2-88
Optical Interconnect Line
Count
{1-2}
{1-8}
{0-3}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-108
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Gain
Maximum Power
ELEAF
SSMF
Additional Info
Specifies the operating mode
for the amplifier.
The expected fiber type of the
A2P2125.
TWRS
Raman Expected Minimum
Gain (dB)
{0.00-25.00}
{0.00-25.00}
{2.00 to 20.00}
{0.00-25.00}
{0.00-25.00}
{0.00-25.00}
{0.00-25.00}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-109
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Per-Channel Output Power
(dBm)
Value/Format
{-30 to 11}
Additional Info
The per-channel target egress
power.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
power adjustments.
{0-10}
{-3 to 0}
{0-300}
{0-10000}
{0-3.00}
{15-31}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-110
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
EDFA Maximum Gain (dB)
Value/Format
{15-31}
Additional Info
Desired maximum gain.
EPT parameter used by the
NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
power adjustments.
{0-5}
{0-18}
{0-10}
{0-10}
{0-3.00}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-111
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Post-Compensated SRS Tilt
Fraction
Value/Format
{0-3.00}
Additional Info
Used to modify the fraction of
upstream span SRS tilt post
compensated. EPT parameter
used by the NE to facilitate
commissioning and in-service
tilt adjustments.
NOTE: This field is not
provisionable in the WebUI if
the pack is in Manual mode.
This field is only
provisionable once the pack is
in Auto mode. Please refer to
the required EPT model for
information.
{0-3.00}
{0-86399.9}
{0-86399.9}
{0-35999}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-112
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
{0-10}
(checkbox)
(checkbox)
{0-10}
{-3 to 3}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-113
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power adjustment
Note: For each LD, the WebUI supports Egress and Ingress power adjustment for
both Ring (ASE Adjust) and Linear (Forced X-Conn Reqd) topologies.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-114
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Power Adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Adjustment
Attribute
Value/Format
LD
Side
Topology
Additional Info
In Progress
Complete
<0-255 chars>
ASE Mode
Enter
Exit
Perform ASE Power
Adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-115
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-116
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > GMRE > Feasibility File Transfer.
Result: The Feasibility File Transfer window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-117
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Note: The WebUI supports provisioning of OMS Line and Optical Impairment
parameters for each of the following port types:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > GMRE Commissioning > OMS Line Parameters.
Result: The OMS Line Parameters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-118
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Note: The WebUI supports provisioning of OMS Line and Optical Impairment
parameters for each of the following port types:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > GMRE Commissioning > Optical Impairment
Parameters.
Result: The Optical Impairment Parameters window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Retrieve.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-119
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to provision cross-phase modulation allowed wavelength set.
Before you begin
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > GMRE Commissioning > XPM Allowed
Wavelength Set.
Result: The Cross-Phase Modulation Allowed Wavelength Set window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Retrieve.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
10-120
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
11
11 traffic provisioning
TDM
procedures
Overview
Purpose
Contents
Introduction
11-2
Cross-connection types
11-2
11-7
11-8
Provisioning procedures
11-9
11-10
11-15
11-18
11-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Cross-connection types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Cross-connection types
Overview
Information is transmitted exclusively from the input termination point to the output
termination point (point-to-point); there is no routing in reverse direction.
Input TP
Output TP
Bidirectional Connection
Information is transmitted between input termination point and output termination point
in both directions (point-to-point).
Input TP
Output TP
In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point), one source and
one sink, a broadcast connection consists of one source and several sinks, different 'legs'
that share the same source termination point.
In the following example, information is broadcast from one input termination point to
the output termination points A, B and C on three legs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Cross-connection types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
output A
leg 1
input TP
leg 2
output B
leg 3
output C
A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections are
exhausted.
Note: Up to 10 tails are allowed for one broadcast/multicast cross connection.
Note: Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to
perform non-intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced
to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg.
Protected unidirectional connection
in case of
failure
A bidirectional connection is routed from input A to the output C (primary route). Input A
can be protected as shown in the following diagram:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Cross-connection types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A
C
B
in case of
failure
output A
input A
leg 2
output B
prot.
input B
leg 3
in case of
failure
output C
The diagram shows a broadcast connection from input A to the outputs A, B and C. The
legs 2 and 3 are protected via the protecting input B, whereas leg 1 is not protected.
Note: The current release only supports 1 to 2 broadcast.
Drop & continue connection
Output C is protected; when output C receives its input from the main input A, then the
connection is called normal, when output C receives its input from the protecting input B,
then the connection is called inverse.
All the connections are created in a single step of configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Cross-connection types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A
Input
Prot. input
C
Output
The following diagram shows an example of a drop & continue insert connection:
B
A
Input
C
Prot. input
Output
First connection:
a unidirectional broadcast connection routed from Input A to Output B and C
Second connection:
a protected unidirectional connection routed from Input C to Output A, with
protecting Input B
The matrix provides on a single pack either SDH/SONET switching or OTN switching,
but no gateway functionality (i.e. cross conection on VC/STS level and mapping the
resulting STMn/OCn signal into an ODU).
This functionality can be achieved via external optical fiber connection between the
SDH/SONET switching cards and TDM client cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Cross-connection types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VC4
STM-64
VC4
XC
24xAN S
24xAN S
24SDM
SDH/SONET
Switching
VC4
optical fiber
STM-16
Matrix
ODU
ODU2
XC
STM-64
OTN
Switching
OTN Capacity
OTM-0 .3
24xAN S
2x40G
24xAN
ANY
S
Network Load
10 x10G S
10x10G S
10SD10G
The following diagram shows an example how VC4s from STM-16 ports are groomed
into an STM-64 signal, which is then mapped into an ODU2 and sent out in an ODU3:
ODU
Note: It is required to have an optical fiber between the 10SD10G pack and the
10x10G ANY TDM Client load card.
Possible IO cards are:
This optical connection is not modeled by the system. Thus no special alarming is
done for this connection, i.e. the normal LOS alarming is applied.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description of the configuration options available in the Create Cross Connections
window, refer to Create Cross Connections window (p. 9-3).
Different ways
In principle, the following ways exist to open the Create Cross Connections window:
Navigate to the facility for which you want to create a cross-connection, and then
select either Action Go To Create Cross Connection from the main menu bar,
or right click on the selected facility, and select Go To Create Cross Connection
from the context menu that opens.
Using this option, the Create Cross Connections window will have the source facility
of the cross-connection already populated with the facility selected in the previous
steps, and you will need to enter the remaining values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description of the configuration options available in the Manage Cross Connections
window, refer to Manage Cross Connections window (p. 9-6) .
Different ways
In principle, the following ways exist to open the Manage Cross Connections window:
Navigate to the facility for which you want to create a cross-connection, and then
select either Action Go To Supporting Cross Connection from the main menu
bar, or right click on the selected facility, and select Go To Supporting Cross
Connection from the context menu that opens.
Using this option, the Manage Cross Connections window will have the
configuration parameters of the cross-connection already populated with the values of
the existing cross-connection selected in the previous steps, and you can modify these
configuration parameters according to your needs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provisioning procedures
Overview
Purpose
Contents
Procedure 11-1: Create a cross-connection
11-10
11-15
11-18
11-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ENT-CRS-ODU0
ENT-CRS-ODU1
ENT-CRS-ODU2
ENT-CRS-ODU2E
ENT-CRS-ODU3
ENT-CRS-ODU3E2
ENT-CRS-ODU4
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU0
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU1
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU2
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU2E
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU3
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
ENT-CRSPROT-ODU4
ENT-CRS-VC-4
ENT-CRS-VC-4-4C
ENT-CRS-VC-4-16C
ENT-CRS-STS1
ENT-CRS-STS3C
ENT-CRS-STS12C
ENT-CRS-STS48C
ENT-CRSPROT-STS1
ENT-CRSPROT-STS3C
ENT-CRSPROT-STS12C
ENT-CRSPROT-STS48C
ENT-CRSPROT-VC4
ENT-CRSPROT-VC4-4C
ENT-CRSPROT-VC4-16C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and navigate through the facility group and select a
specific facility.
Then select Go to Create Cross Connections, either by selecting Action from the
main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Create Cross Connections window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Connection Type select the type of cross-connection you want to set up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the facility area populate the respective fields with the needed facilities.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Create Cross Connections window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that the hold-off time should be configured , that an interaction with other protection
schemes (equipment protection or MS-SPRing /BLSR) is taken into consideration. Via
different hold-off times it can be defined which protection should switch first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Revert Delay Time if the SNCP/UPSR is working in revertive mode. Values
between 0 and 15 min are allowed.
Important! When re-configuring a WTR (Wait to restore) timer during WTR state,
the WTR is restarted with the new provisioned time regardless of the already elapsed
time of the previous setting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to navigate directly from a facility to the Create Cross Connections window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 11-1 Navigating directly from a facility to the Create Cross Connections
window (2 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-CRS-ODU0
ED-CRS-ODU1
ED-CRS-ODU2
ED-CRS-ODU2E
ED-CRS-ODU3
ED-CRS-ODU3E2
ED-CRS-ODU4
ED-CRSPROT-ODU0
ED-CRSPROT-ODU1
ED-CRSPROT-ODU2
ED-CRSPROT-ODU2E
ED-CRSPROT-ODU3
ED-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
ED-CRSPROT-ODU4
ED-CRS-VC4
ED-CRS-VC4-4C
ED-CRS-VC4-16C
ED-CRS-STS1
ED-CRS-STS3C
ED-CRS-STS12C
ED-CRS-STS48C
ED-CRSPROT-VC4
ED-CRSPROT-VC4-4C
ED-CRSPROT-VC4-16C
ED-CRSPROT-STS1
ED-CRSPROT-STS3C
ED-CRSPROT-STS12C
ED-CRSPROT-STS48C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and navigate through the facility group and select a
specific facility.
Then select Go to Supporting Cross Connections, either by selecting Action from
the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage Cross Connections window
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Retrieve.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that retrieval of cross-connection may
Click OK.
Result: All cross-connections of the selected type are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
Then
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DLT-CRS-ODU0
DLT-CRS-ODU1
DLT-CRS-ODU2
DLT-CRS-ODU2E
DLT-CRS-ODU3
DLT-CRS-ODU3E2
DLT-CRS-ODU4
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU0
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU1
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU2
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU2E
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU3
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
DLT-CRSPROT-ODU4
DLT-CRS-STS1
DLT-CRS-STS3C
DLT-CRS-STS12C
DLT-CRS-STS48C
DLT-CRS-VC4
DLT-CRS-VC416C
DLT-CRS-VC44C
DLT-CRSPROT-STS1
DLT-CRSPROT-STS3C
DLT-CRSPROT-STS12C
DLT-CRSPROT-STS48C
DLT-CRSPROT-VC4
DLT-CRSPROT-VC44C
DLT-CRSPROT-VC416C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree under Facilities, and navigate through the facility group and select a
specific facility.
Then select Go to Supporting Cross Connections, either by selecting Action from
the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Manage Cross Connections window
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Retrieve.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: All cross-connections of the selected type are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that deleting a cross-connection is
service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: The cross-connection is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-CRS-ODU0
RTRV-CRS-ODU1
RTRV-CRS-ODU2
RTRV-CRS-ODU2E
RTRV-CRS-ODU3
RTRV-CRS-ODU3E2
RTRV-CRS-ODU4
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU0
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU1
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU2
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU2E
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU3
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU3E2
RTRV-CRSPROT-ODU4
RTRV-CRS-VC4
RTRV-CRS-VC4-4C
RTRV-CRS-VC4-16C
RTRV-CRS-STS1
RTRV-CRS-STS3C
RTRV-CRS-STS12C
RTRV-CRS-STS48C
RTRV-CRSPROT-VC4
RTRV-CRSPROT-VC4-4C
RTRV-CRSPROT-VC4-16C
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS1
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS3C
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS12C
RTRV-CRSPROT-STS48C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, expand the
navigation tree underFacilities, and navigate through the facility group and select a
specific facility.
Then select Go to Supporting Cross Connections, either by selecting Action from
the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Mange Cross Connections window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Retrieve.
Result: A confirmation window opens, stating that retrieval of cross-connection may
take some time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Result: All cross-connections are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: PST values for unidirectional cross connections may be inconsistent and
misleading in certain cases.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
11-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
12
12 traffic provisioning
WDM
procedures
Overview
Purpose
12-3
12-8
Physical Topology
12-9
12-10
12-11
OCH Cross-Connects
12-13
12-15
12-17
12-19
ODUk Cross-Connects
12-20
12-21
12-22
12-23
12-24
12-26
12-28
12-29
12-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-31
12-32
12-33
12-34
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Physical topology
The WebUI displays a physical view of the NE topology. This view includes the shelves,
cards and ports applicable to fiber connection management, as well as the existing fiber
connections between ports on the NE.
The Physical Topology view allows the user to create a new fiber connection by selecting
2 ports on the displayed shelves and clicking Connect. Only those ports that are not
already part of a fiber connection are available for creating a new fiber connection. The
connection can be made between 2 ports on the same shelf or on different shelves.
A loopback connection can be created via the Physical Topology view by selecting an
A2325A/AHPHG/AHPLG/ALPHG DCM port, clicking Loopback, and then clicking
Connect.
The Physical Topology view allows the user to create an external connection by selecting
1 port on the shelf and clicking External. Only certain ports are valid external connection
points and these are the CWR8/CWR8-88 CLS port, LD Line port, OT Line port, SFC
OMD port, SFD OMD port, SFD channel ports, MVAC ports, ITLB SIG port, OPSA SIG
port, OT client ports, and SVAC client port. Enter the IP address and shelf/slot/port of the
external NE if configuring an LD line port as external and click Connect. If connecting a
different port type as external, enter identifying information for the destination port.
The Physical Topology view allows the user to delete an existing fiber connection by
selecting the line representing the fiber connection and clicking Disconnect. A fiber
connection cannot be deleted if there is a cross-connect associated with the fiber
connection.
A physical topology connection or assignment is denied by the system if making such a
connection or assignment would result in an invalid topology.
Note: Creation of unkeyed cross connection is allowed when a CWR pack is involved
in the physical topology connection on a manual power management configuration.
Note: When there is a topology change (adding branching topology to existing
topology) a warm reset of the EC must be performed to avoid unexpected channel
alarms.
Bidirectional / unidirectional fiber connection
The Physical Topology view allows the user to create a new fiber connection by selecting
2 ports on the displayed shelves, selecting the directionality (bidirectional or
unidirectional) and clicking Connect. The WebUI distinguishes between unidirectional
and bidirectional fiber connections on the physical topology graphical display by
displaying the unidirectional fiber connections with an arrow at the end of the line to
indicate the direction.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A bidirectional fiber connection may be made between a port and an external interface.
For this connection, the user selects one NE port and selects External. The user may
optionally enter address information for the external port.
A unidirectional fiber connection may be made between a port and an external interface.
The unidirectional connection may start on a port on the NE (i.e. the NE port is the
from port) or may end on a port on the NE (i.e. the NE port is the to port). For this
connection, the WebUI allows the user to indicate whether the internal port is the start or
end port of the connection. The user may optionally enter address information for the
external port.
Note: For a bidirectional connection, only those ports that are not already part of a
fiber connection are available for creating a new fiber connection.
For a unidirectional connection, only those ports that are not already part of a
bidirectional fiber connection, or part of a unidirectional fiber connection in the same
direction, are available for creating a new fiber connection.
For additional information on bidirectional/unidirectional fiber, see the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch Release 6.0 Product Information and Planning Guide. .
Bidirectional single-fiber transmission
SFC-2(A, B, C, or D)
SFC-4(A or B)
SFC-8
4DPA4
11STAR1
11STMM10
11DPE12(E)
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EVPL connections
Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) connections are full-rate or sub-rate cross-connects
within an 11DPE12(E) card. The WebUI supports provisioning of EVPL connections. All
EVPL connections are modeled as unidirectional in the NE. When creating a new
connection, the WebUI allows the user to request that a 2nd ZA connection be created. If
so requested, then the WebUI automatically creates 2 unidirectional connections stored
separately in the NE. The WebUI allows EVPL connections to be deleted if the GbE client
port has AdminState = Down.
Optical cross-connect
An optical cross-connect defines the optical path a service channel takes through the NE.
Cross-connects use the provisioned NE fiber topology to traverse the path through the NE
between the two ports that define the endpoints of the cross-connect. Within an NE, a
valid cross-connect is identified by an optical channel and the two ports at the endpoints
of the cross-connect. To add/drop a service, the cross-connect terminates at an OT line
port and the NE's network ingress/egress port (typically the Line port of the LD). For an
optical pass through service, the cross-connect terminates at network ports (typically LD
Line In/Out ports) at the entry and exit point of the NE. Within the network consisting of
the connected NEs, the service is identified by an Optical Channel (OCH) trail which
consists of several cross-connects hosted by each NE.
ODUk Cross Connects
ODUk Cross Connects are supported within an 11DPM12, 112PDM11, and the client/line
cards. The WebUI displays a list of all ODUk cross-connects on the NE. The WebUI
supports create, modify and view of an ODUk cross-connects and the WebUI supports
deletion of an ODUk cross-connect.
Note: ODUk cross connects need to all be built the same way (client to line, relative
to A to Z) on all client to line ports of the same MUX card. A-End and Z-End must be
on the same 11DPM12, 112PDM11, or client/line card (i.e. have the same values for
<shelf/slot>).
Connection service
The connection service allows OCH Trails to be connected through ports of the network
element by means of all optical switching. Optical trails can be added or dropped at each
network element that provides the appropriate transponders for the signal type. An optical
trail is composed of a series of optical cross-connects beginning at the source with an add
connection where a wavelength tracker key is applied to the optical signal, followed by a
series of through connections that route a signal to its destination, and culminating in a
drop connection at that destination where the signal is converted back to the appropriate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
client wavelength and format. Optical trails can be uni-directional or bi-directional, 1+1
protected or unprotected. Services are, for the purpose of this document Optical Channel
Trails (OCH Trails) which are composed of optical cross-connects.
The opposite direction port parameter defines the association between two uni-directional
ports so a bi-directional cross connection can be used with different uni-directional
topology connections. For the opposite direction port, the value "0" is used to unassign
the provisioned value.
For service additions to DWDM FOADM Optical Networks, or to verify the addition of
unplanned (not included in the original network design) services on TOADM or mixed
networks, (e.g., unplanned OPS protection, alien services, or 2.5G wavelengths) use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the new service (demand) into the 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool
(EPT), "run design", and "verify the design". See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic
Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide, the
sub-section on "WDM Demands" under the section titled "Traffic Design".
2. Create the commissioning file(s) in the EPT for the systems which the service
traverses, to send to the PhM.
3. Provision the new cards for the service using the procedure "Provision the System" in
Part III, Section 7, of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16
(PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.5.1 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide. This will use
the EPT commissioning files, which now contain the cards for the new service and
new provisioning information.
4. Re-adjust the power of the spans along the route of the new service, if necessary. For
TOADM or DWDM FOADM lines, for each of the spans where the new service
demand is added, passing through (if any) and dropped, run Egress and Ingress
adjustments to make the new EPT values effective. Use the procedure "Complete
commissioning on a mixed TOADM/FOADM system" from the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/32/16) Release 3.5.1 Installation and
System Turn-Up Guide procedures in Part III, Section 7, starting with the procedure
step 1 (skip the information on commissioning services as this is for greenfield
applications), for help in this activity.
Important! The EPT design must be up-to-date with the currently deployed network
before using the procedure above to add a new service to the network.
Connecting Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS OT with Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM
The line interface of the 1830 OTs can be fibered directly to a 1696R node for transport in
a 1696-based network. For this application, the 1830 OT provides a signal (with
WaveTracker encoding and power management) to the 1696R node. The OT itself is
installed in an 1830 shelf, and is managed by the 1830 node. This 1696R/1830
interworking application is sometimes called the dangling OT.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Description
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A dangling OT, or a group of dangling OTs, are 1830 optical transponders which are
plugged into an 1830 shelf and managed by the 1830 node. However, the dangling OT
line side optical ports (transmit and receive) are not fiber-connected to a CWR or OMD
pack in the 1830 NE. Instead, the line side ports are fibered to a 1696R node. In the CLI
user commands, there is a provisionable parameter (CONNTO) that is used to set up an
external connection (i.e., CONNTO=external) from the OT to the 1696R node. When
CONNTO=external, the user can enable wave key modulation functionality and control
the optical output power on the line side interface of the OT (see Instructions for L1
port (p. 10-55)). The 1696R equipment will then receive this signal (with wave keys
already encoded) from the 1830 OT.
Note: If a port is Auto power-managed, and either Tx or Rx for that port is changed
from External to NotConnected, then both Tx and Rx will be automatically changed
from Auto to Manual power management.
Note: An alien wavelength can enter the 1830 system through a variable attenuator
card (VAC) or via direct connection to a SFD channel or CWR CLS port.
If a VAC is used, the 1830 system is capable of encoding wave keys on the
wavelength.
If a VAC is not used, wavekeys will not be added to the wavelength by the 1830
system.
The system supports the configuration where the 1696R transponder is plugged into the
1696R shelf and the network port of the transponder is connected to 1830 SVAC channel
port. The SVAC itself can be part of 1830 TOADM or FOADM node. The 1830 SVAC
does encoding and power control for the 1696R transponder transmitter. The 1696R shelf
will manage the laser on and WT encoding off. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS and 1696R
shelf each has its own TID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopback, External, Disconnect, and Connect functions can be made via the display.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Physical Topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical Topology
Attribute
Shelf
Value/Format
{1-64}
Additional Info
Identifies the shelf number
that is currently displayed.
Select a different number to
display another shelf.
Clear
BiDir
UniDir
External
InterCompound
Request to create a
connection to an OCS shelf.
Loopback
Modify
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create the 10GbE LAN port. Then ODU2e has been created automatically when 10GbE
LAN has been provisioned.
CLI command: config interface 112PDM11 shelf/slot/port type tengige.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line side ODU4 has been substructured automatically by ten ODU2e with continuous
timeslots.
CLI command: show oduptf odu4 shelf/slot/port odu substructure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create cross-connection between 10GbE Client port and ODU2e in line ODU2e with fix
association as below:
CLI commands:
config odukxc 1/5/L1/1 1/5/C1 create odu2e bi
config odukxc 1/5/L1/9 1/5/C2 create odu2e bi
config odukxc 1/5/L1/17 1/5/C3 create odu2e bi
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the client port State, line port state, client ODU2e,line ODU4 state to IN-Service
(UP).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OCH Cross-Connects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCH Cross-Connects
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
A-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Z-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Frequency
<integer>
<0-60 chars>
Primary State
In Service
Out of Service
WK Configuration
Auto
Unkeyed
Manual
Direction
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Create
Details
A-Z Topology
Z-A Topology
A-Z Power
Z-A Power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
OCH Cross-Connects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
A-Z Trace
Z-A Trace
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Connection Attributes
Frequency
A-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Z-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
<0-60 chars>
Direction
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Protection Mode
Unprotected
Protection
Working
Primary State
In Service
Out of Service
Auto
Unkeyed
Manual
{0-4096}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
{0-4096}
Encoding
The type of
encoding/modulation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
Result: The Create OCH Cross-Connect Group screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision the Connection attributes by selecting the appropriate A-End port, Z-End port
details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the appropriate Direction, Protection Mode, and Admin State from their
respective lists.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the appropriate frequencies from the list for Frequency 1 to Frequency 4. The
available frequency range is 9170 ~ 9605.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the A-Z/Z-A User technology, select the appropriate Bit Rate and Encoding values.
Note: Z-A is enabled only if the Cross-connect is Bidirectional.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: ODUk cross connects need to all be built the same way. (client to line,
relative to A to Z) on all client to line ports of the same MUX card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
ODUk Cross-Connects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODUk Cross-Connects
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
A-End
Z-End
Rate
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2e
ODU4
ODUflex 3GSDI
ODUflex FC400
OPTSG
Name
<0-60 chars>
Direction
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Protection Mode
Unprotected (default)
Working
Protection
Create
Details
Delete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
A-End
Z-End
Rate
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2e
ODU4
ODUflex 3GSDI
ODUflex FC400
OPTSG
Name
<0-60 chars>
Direction
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Connections > EVPL > FullRate or Connections > EVPL > SubRate
and QinQ.
Result: The EVPL Connections window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Create.
Result: The Create EVPL Connection window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
A-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
A-End VTS
{1-10}
Z-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Z-End VTS
{1-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Connection Name
<0-60 chars>
A-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
A-End VTS
Z-End Port
<shelf/slot/port>
Z-End VTS
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Primary State
CIR (Mbps}
PIR (Mbps)
In Service
Out of Service
Default: 100
Default: 1000
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
PBS (Kbytes)
16
32
64
128
256 (default)
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
EBS (Kbytes)
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096 (default)
8192
16384
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Connection Name
<0-60 chars>
A-End Port
<shelf/slot/port> or
<shelf/slot/lag>
A-End VTS
<shelf/slot/port> or
<shelf/slot/lag>
Z-End VTS
Unidirectional
Primary State
In Service
Out of Service
Protection Mode
None
Protection
Working
CIR (Mbps}
Default: 10
1 Mbps granularity up to
10 Mbps
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
PIR (Mbps)
CBS (Kbytes)
Values/Format
Additional Info
Default: 1000
1 Mbps granularity up to
10 Mbps
16
32
64
128
256 (default)
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
PBS (Kbytes)
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096 (default)
8192
16384
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Displays a list of the ports that this cross-connect traverses on the NE in the A-Z or Z-A
direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Order
<integer>
Card Name
Type of card.
Port Name
<shelf/slot/port>
Port identifier.
Direction
In
Out
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Delta (dB)
{0-10}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Port Name
Card Type
Expected (dBm)
{-40 to 11}
Measured (dBm)
{0-5}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
On the PSS-32, the 11STAR1 client port needs to be provisioned as follows from PhM:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
provision an external connection from the 11STAR client port to the 1/7/X (where X
is 1 for line 1 and 2 for line 2)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision the external topology connection to connect the Line port to the 1/X/2
where X is slot of the 11STAR
Provision the admin state to up
Result: Once this is done you should be able to ping the PSS-1 through the PSS-32s.
This would also work if the PSS-1 is the IPGNE and you would be able to ping the
PSS-32 from the PSS-1.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
12-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
13
13 traffic maintenance
TDM
procedures
Overview
Purpose
13-2
13-7
13-9
View Loopback
13-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When having established a terminal loopback on a port of an I/O card this loop only
works if there is at least one XFP/SFP provisioned and plugged for any port within the
portgroup of the looped port.
Note: It is not necessary that the port where the loopback is established itself has an
XFP/SFP plugged.
Data links and loopback switching
The following types of loopback are supported for the OTH-TDM technology:
Facility loopback on an OTU facility - with or without AIS consequent action enabled
downstream
Terminal loopback on an OTU facility - with or without AIS consequent action
enabled downstream
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depending on the type of loopback switched and on the fact, whether consequent action
downstream is enabled or not, a loopback switched on a facility will cause specific traffic
outages. As, however, traffic outages on DROP side in general shall not influence CP
behavior, no related requirements are needed for loopbacks on CP side.
Facility and terminal loopback on Data Links of class INNI
It is assumed that this behavior is fulfilled automatically using usual INNI Data Link
supervision via TCM entities, if dTIM and dBDI are included as trigger for Fast Defect
Reporting on INNI Data Links.
Note: In case of a Data Link having Maintenance Mode set consistently in both
related nodes, loopback switching on one or both of the related OTU facilities
assigned as supporting facility for this Data Link will not cause any consequences for
services via this Data Link. This is due to the properties defined for the Maintenance
Mode.
Related TL1 commands
OPR-LPBK-OC192
OPR-LPBK-OC48
OPR-LPBK-OC12
OPR-LPBK-OC3
OPR-LPBK-OTU
OPR-LPBK-STMN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
Make sure that the port on which you want to operate a facility loopback is not
assigned/locked as timing reference, and that no DCC is enabled for that port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the entity for which you want to configure port loopback.
Note: The port must be in the OOS-[AI]MA state to perform a loopback. Otherwise
the Operate menu will be disabled
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Loopback Operate, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Operate Loopback window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
By means of the read-only field AID, verify that you selected the desired port,.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the location, in which the loopback is to be performed by means of the Location
drop-down list box.:
NEND
Near End
No value .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert AIS
Consequent Action is enabled and therefore AIS is inserted into downstream direction
after looping the signal.
Consequent Action is disabled and therefore the signal continues after the loop in
downstream direction without an AIS indication.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Loopback Type, by means of the Loopback Type drop-down list box.:
FACILITY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specifies a loopback at the receive side (from the network) to the transmit side (to the
network) of the specified facility.
TERMINAL .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RLS-LPBK-OC3
RLS-LPBK-OC12
RLS-LPBK-OC48
RLS-LPBK-OC192
RLS-LPBK-OTU
RLS-LPBK-STMN
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the entity for which you want to release port loopback.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Loopback Release, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Release Loopback window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
By means of the read-only field AID, verify that you selected the desired port,.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the location, in which the loopback is operating by means of the Location
drop-down list box.:
NEND
Near End
No value .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Loopback Type, by means of the Loopback Type drop-down list box.:
FACILITY
Specifies a loopback at the receive side (from the network) to the transmit side (to the
network) of the specified facility.
TERMINAL .
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve the TDM ports that are in a loopback within the specified
range of OC-. AIDs.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-LPBK-OC192
RTRV-LPBK-OC48
RTRV-LPBK-OC12
RTRV-LPBK-OC3
RTRV-LPBK-OTU
RTRV-LPBK-STMN
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the entity for which you want to release port loopback.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Loopback View, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by
using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The View Loopback window opens.
View Loopback
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View Loopback
Purpose
The View Loopback window can be used to request information whether a particular
TDM port is involved in a loopback.
Loopback information
For each TDM port that is involved in a loopback, the following information is displayed:
Parameter
Value
Description
Name
Location
Near End
Loopback Type
FACILITY,
TERMINAL
No (Consequent Action is
disabled; Signal is continued in
downstream direction)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
13-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
14
14 traffic maintenance
WDM
procedures
Overview
Purpose
14-2
14-4
14-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
14-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopbacks
Overview
Line (Facility) loopbacks - The received optical external transmission signal on the
target facility is capable of being looped from the port function input back toward the
port function output. It is permissible to loopback the electrical signal of the optical
interfaces as opposed to the optical signal. Each interface of a multiple interface port
function is capable of being looped back independently.
Terminal loopbacks - The electrical transmission signal on an optical interface port
function is capable of being looped from the port function output back toward the port
function input. Port functions include optical interfaces at various rates. The
placement of the terminal loopback on any particular port function is a compromise
between having the loopback be as close as possible to the physical interface and
having the terminal loopback support transparent data flow.
Note: Line terminal loopback release can take several minutes for traffic to recover
(10 minute maximum).
Note: Terminal and facility loopbacks are supported on all OT line and client ports
(not VA ports) with the exception of the 43STA1P client port.
Note: When a line facility loopback is established on an 11STAR1 OT pack, there is a
30 second delay from initiating the loopback to when it comes into effect. The reason
for this delay is because establishing the loopback requires changing the line-side PLL
settings, and it takes about 30 seconds for the PLL to lock after its settings have been
changed. The same 30 second delay applies to removing the line facility loopback.
Note: 11STMM10 line facility loopback terminates OTU2 and ODU2 overhead.
There is a lack of transparency with this type of loopback.
Note: To apply a loopback to a port it must first be set into Maintenance mode. This is
a safeguard that prevents the user from accidentally applying a loopback and
interrupting traffic. In order to put a network (line) port into maintenance, all of the
client ports associated with it must be in maintenance or admin down. Also, when a
port is in maintenance, it will flash green and any alarms that were present become
conditions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
14-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Loopbacks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
14-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enable loopback
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the WebUI, expand the equipment tree in the left pane to select the card and port for
loopback. Left click the port. Select the Provision/Info function.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Primary State field, select Maintenance from the drop-down list. Click Submit.
Note: the Maintenance option will not appear for a Line port until all associated
Client ports are in Maintenance state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Test/Analysis function for the port. Provision the loopback as desired. A green
checkmark in the box means the loopback is Enabled. Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
A warning message will appear that Enabling loopback will affect any service on the port.
Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
14-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: After performing all necessary maintenance procedures, you should disable the
loopback and remove the ports from Maintenance mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the WebUI, expand the equipment tree in the left pane to select the card and port for
loopback. Left click the port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Test/Analysis function for the port. Remove the loopback as desired. A blank
box means the loopback is Disabled. Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Provision/Info function. In the Primary State field, select In-Service/AINS
or In-Service from the drop-down list. Click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
14-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional Info
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
14-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
15
15 Ethernet/Data traffic
TDM
maintenance procedures
Overview
Purpose
15-2
15-5
15-7
15-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR-LPBK-GBE
OPR-LPBK-GBE10
Required equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Make sure that the port on which you want to operate a facility loopback is not
assigned/locked as timing reference, and that no DCC is enabled for that port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select Facility GBE GBE-Facility
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the entity for which you want to configure port loopback.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Loopback Operate, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Operate Loopback window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
By means of the read-only field AID, verify that you selected the desired port,.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the location, in which the loopback is to be performed by means of the Location
drop-down list box.:
NEND
Near End
No value .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Loopback Type, by means of the Loopback Type drop-down list box.:
FACILITY
Specifies a loopback at the receive side (from the network) to the transmit side (to the
network) of the specified facility.
TERMINAL .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert CSF
Consequent Action is enabled; CSF (Client Signal Fail inserted in the downstream
direction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RLS-LPBK-GBE10
RLS-LPBK-GBE
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select Facilty GBE GBE-Facilty
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the entity for which you want to release port loopback.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Loopback Release, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or
by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Release Loopback window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
By means of the read-only field AID, verify that you selected the desired port,.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the location, in which the loopback is operating by means of the Location
drop-down list box.:
NEND
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Near End
No value .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Loopback Type, by means of the Loopback Type drop-down list box.:
FACILITY
Specifies a loopback at the receive side (from the network) to the transmit side (to the
network) of the specified facility.
TERMINAL .
Click Apply.
Result: The loopback is released.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve the GBE/GBE10 facilities that are in a loopback within the
specified range of GBE/GBE10 AIDs.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-LPBK-GBE
RTRV-LPBK-GBE10
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree select Facilty GBE GBE-Facilty
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the entity for which you want to release port loopback.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Loopback View, either by selecting Action from the main menu bar or by
using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The View Loopback window opens.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The View Loopback window can be used to request information whether a particular
1 Gigabit Ethernet or 10 Gigabit Ethernet port is involved in a loopback.
Loopback information
For each 1 Gigabit Ethernet or 10 Gigabit Ethernet port that is involved in a loopback, the
following information is displayed:
Parameter
Value
Description
AID
Location
Near End
Loopback Type
FACILITY,
TERMINAL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
15-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
16
16
Performance
monitoring
procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the performance monitoring process and the procedures for
configuring the performance monitoring (PM) functions of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
systems.
Contents
OCS performance monitoring
16-3
16-6
Performance measurements
16-8
16-15
Thresholding
16-17
16-25
16-27
16-27
16-38
16-39
16-43
16-47
16-52
16-55
16-58
16-61
16-63
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-65
16-66
Procedure 16-11: Retrieve a list of facilities that use a particular TCA profile
16-67
16-68
16-69
PM Data [Card]
16-70
16-72
16-73
16-74
16-75
16-76
16-77
PM Data
16-78
16-80
Clear Bins
16-81
16-82
Port Baseline
16-84
16-86
16-87
PM reports General
16-89
16-92
16-93
16-94
16-95
PM reports Ethernet
16-96
16-97
16-98
16-99
16-100
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE B
NE I
REI
RDI
REI
RDI
TTP
NE Z
CTP
CTP
TTP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The selection between SDH and SONET behavior of performance monitoring is made by
setting the REGION parameter.
The REGION parameter can take on one of the following values:
A distinction has to be made between SDH and SONET concerning the underlying
performance monitoring concepts. SDH performance monitoring is based on the
evaluation of block errors while SONET performance monitoring is based on the
evaluation of bit errors (code violations).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH performance monitoring is based on the evaluation of block errors, where the block
size depends on the transmission layer. At the Regenerator Section (RS) layer, a block is
equivalent in size to an SDH frame. Therefore, the number of bits in an RS block is
dependent on the signal rate. One or more errored bits in the RS parity byte (B1 byte in
the RSOH) constitutes a single RS block error.
SONET performance monitoring
OTH performance monitoring is based on the evaluation of block errors, where the block
size depends on the transmission layer. Block errors are detected by means of a
bit-interleaved parity-8 (BIP-8) code.
At the OTUk Section layer, one or more errored bits in the Section Monitoring (SM) field
of the OTUk Section Overhead constitutes a single block error. At the ODUk path layer,
one or more errored bits in the Path Monitoring (PM) field of the ODUk Path Overhead
constitutes a single block error.
Contents
The performance monitoring process
16-6
Performance measurements
16-8
16-15
Thresholding
16-17
16-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Primary processing
Parameter processing
Binning and reporting
Primitive
processing
Event
processing
Binning
and
reporting
Path
g-upg-0010
Primary processing
Fundamental parameters are derived from errors detected in the transport signal,
classified into bit errors and defects, and accumulated over one-second periods.
Parameter processing
Performance parameters are calculated based on the evaluation and correlation of the
fundamental parameters obtained during the primary processing. Please also refer to
Performance parameters (p. 16-9) .
Binning and reporting
In the binning and reporting phase, the performance parameters obtained during the
parameter processing are accumulated in registers over measurement periods of 15
minutes and 1 day. The collection of registers associated to a monitoring point and
accumulation period is called a bin.
The start of the 15-minutes measurement periods is aligned with the quarter boundaries
(00,15,30, 45) of the NE clock. The 1-day measurement periods start at 00:00 (midnight)
related to UTC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Counting is done in current bins. At the end of the measurement period the bin is kept in
store as the first recent bin. In case more than one past measurement period is kept in
store, that entire collection is called the history bins. The first recent bin is also called
previous bin.
For each performance monitoring point (see Performance measurements (p. 16-8)), the
following bins exist:
Table 16-1
Types of bins
Current bins
Previous
Recent
31
History bins
At the end of each 15-minutes boundary, the contents of the current 15-minutes bin is
transferred to the previous 15-minutes bin. The current 15-minutes bins are then
automatically initialized to zero.
The 31 recent 15-minutes bins are stored in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) manner. At the end
of each 15-minutes boundary, the content of the previous bin is transferred to the recent
bins. When the storage capacity of 31 recent 15-minutes bins is reached, then with each
additional recent bin, the oldest of the existing recent bins is dropped. The 31 recent
15-minutes bins thus always contain the 31 most recent 15-minutes PM data.
Analogously, the same applies to the recent 1-day bins.
Effect of changing the NE time
When the time-of-day setting in the NE is changed, then the collection of PM counts in
each of the current 15-minutes and 1-day bins continues uninterruptedly. However, the
end time associated with the current bin will be changed according to the new time.
Important! Changing the date and time of the system may result in unreliable PM
data.
PM counts stored in previous and recent bins are not affected by changing the NE time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Performance measurements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance measurements
Performance monitoring points
Performance monitoring points can be any trail termination point (TTP) or connection
termination point (CTP) in the network element.
Possible TTPs and CTPs are:
When a facility is created, then, depending on the NE operation mode, the associated PM
registers will be created or not created by default according to the following table:
Table 16-2
Facility
NE operation mode
ANSI
ETSI
SONET Section
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
SDH RS
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
PM registers autonomously
created and counting
(PMSTATE = ON)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
GbE
PM registers autonomously
created and counting
(PMSTATE = ON)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
OTU
PM registers autonomously
created and counting
(PMSTATE = ON)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Performance measurements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-2
Facility
(continued)
NE operation mode
ODUk non-terminated
(NIM)
ODUk Terminated
(ODUkPTF)
ODUk TCM layer
(both NIM and terminated)
ANSI
ETSI
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
PM registers autonomously
created and counting
(PMSTATE = ON)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
No autocreation of PM
registers (PMSTATE = OFF)
When a facility is deleted via command or by using autodeletion procedures, all related
PM registers will be deleted.
Performance parameters
These performance parameters are supported by the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems:
Parameter
SDH
SONET
A near-end errored second is a one-second interval with one or more block errors (SDH) or bit errors
(SONET) or one or more defects ( RDI) in the incoming signal.
The ES counter is not incremented during a period of unavailability (see Unavailable Seconds).
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
A near-end SES is a one-second interval in which the amount of block errors (SDH) or bit errors
(SONET) has exceeded the SES threshold (see SES declaration threshold (p. 16-15)), or in which
at least one defect has been detected ( RDI) in the incoming signal.
The SES counter is not incremented during a period of unavailability (see Unavailable Seconds).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Performance measurements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-3
Parameter
(continued)
SDH
SONET
The BBE count is the accumulated number of block errors not occurring as part of a severely errored
second.
Code Violations (CV)
The CV count is the SONET equivalent to the SDH BBE count.
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
Near-end UAS determine the period of time during which the transmission route in the receive
direction is in the unavailability state. A period of unavailability begins at the onset of ten
consecutive near-end severely errored seconds. These ten seconds are considered to be part of the
unavailability period (UAP). A new period of availability begins at the onset of ten consecutive
non-severely-errored seconds. These ten seconds are considered to be part of the availability period.
The ES and SES counters are not incremented during a period of unavailability.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)
An SEFS is a second in which frame alignment has temporarily been lost (out-of-frame (OOF)
condition).
Out of Frame Seconds - Near End Regenerator Section (OFS-RS)
An OUFS is a number of one-second intervals containing at least one out-of-frame
error.(out-of-frame (OOF) condition).
Related information
Ethernet performance parameters are collected by means of MAC layer monitoring at the
1 GbE and 10 GbE LAN side.
The following Ethernet performance parameters are supported:
Table 16-4
Parameter
Meaning
EINB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Performance measurements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-4
Parameter
Meaning
EONB
(continued)
EONF
EIFE
EOFE
has a valid length field not matching the actual frame length
ETH-SYMERR
has a valid length field not matching the actual frame length
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Performance measurements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1.
The EINB, EONB, and EINF EONF, counters are rather traffic monitoring counters than
performance monitoring counters, as they monitor the traffic load in the network. The EIFE
and EOFE counter is a real performance monitoring counter as it gives an indication about
the performance of the network.
2.
Because of the difference in units, bytes versus frames, the counters cannot be correlated
with each other.
These are the OTH performance parameters supported by Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
systems:
Table 16-5
Parameter
OTUk
ODUk Path
Section
A near-end errored second is a one-second interval with one or more block errors or one or more
defects (for OTUk Section: LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM-S or AIS; for ODUk Path: OCI, LCK, PLM-P,
TIM-P or AIS) in the incoming signal.
The ES counter is not incremented during a period of unavailability (see Unavailable Seconds).
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
A near-end SES is a one-second interval in which the amount of block errors has exceeded the
OTUk/ODUk SES threshold (see SES declaration threshold OTH (p. 16-16)), or in which at
least one defect (for OTUk Section: LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM-S or AIS; for ODUk Path: OCI, LCK,
PLM-P, TIM-P or AIS) has been detected in the incoming signal.
The SES counter is not incremented during a period of unavailability (see Unavailable Seconds).
Background Block Errors (BBE)
The BBE count is the accumulated number of block errors not occurring as part of a severely errored
second.
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
Near-end UAS determine the period of time during which the transmission route in the receive
direction is in the unavailability state. A period of unavailability begins at the onset of ten
consecutive near-end severely errored seconds. These ten seconds are considered to be part of the
unavailability period (UAP). A new period of availability begins at the onset of ten consecutive
non-severely-errored seconds. These ten seconds are considered to be part of the availability period.
The ES and SES counters are not incremented during a period of unavailability.
Forward Error Correction corrected (FECC)
The FECC count is the accumulated number of detected and corrected FEC code violations per
frame.
The FECC counter is not incremented during a period when a LOS, LOF, LOM or AIS defect is
present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Performance measurements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1.
The PLM-P defect is only relevant in case the ODUk path is terminated.
2.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide for defect definitions.
Related information
The following overview shows the available SDH performance parameters and their
association to the monitoring points Regenerator Section (RS) and higher order path (path
termination and path monitoring at non-intrusive monitoring (NIM) points):
Table 16-6
Parameter
Path
ES
ES-RS
ES-HOVC
SES
SES-RS
SES-HOVC
BBE
BBE-RS
BBE-HOVC
UAS
UAS-RS
UAS-HOVC
Notes:
1.
2.
Please also see PM reports SDH Regenerator Section (p. 16-92), and PM reports
SDH higher order path (p. 16-93).
The following overview shows the available SONET performance parameters and their
association to the monitoring points Section, Line and path (path termination and path
monitoring at non-intrusive monitoring (NIM) points):
Table 16-7
Parameter
Path
CV
CVS
CVP
ES
ESS
ESP
SES
SESS
SESP
UAS
UASP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Performance measurements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-7
Parameter
Section
SEFS
(continued)
Path
SEFSS
Notes:
1.
Please also see PM reports SONET Section (p. 16-94) and PM reports SONET path
(p. 16-95).
Parameter
OTUk Section
ODUk Path
ES
ES-OTU
ES-ODU
ES-TCM
SES
SES-OTU
SES-ODU
SES-TCM
BBE
BBE-OTU
BBE-ODU
BBE-TCM
UAS
UAS-OTU
UAS-ODU
UAS-TCM
FECC
FECC
Notes:
1.
2.
Please also see PM reports OTUk Section (p. 16-97) and PM reports ODUk Path
(p. 16-98).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SES declaration threshold indicates the number of errored blocks (SDH) or code
violations (SONET) per second that must be exceeded to declare a second severely
errored.
Important! The value of the SES declaration threshold is preset to a meaningful
value (30% of the number of blocks per second) and cannot be changed.
SES declaration thresholds SDH
For SDH performance monitoring, the SES declaration threshold is the number of block
errors per second that must be exceeded to declare a second severely errored.
These SES declaration thresholds are defined for SDH performance monitoring:
Table 16-9
2400
STM-64
3668400
2400
For SONET performance monitoring, the SES declaration threshold is the number of
code violations per second that must be exceeded to declare a second severely errored.
These SES declaration thresholds are defined for SONET performance monitoring:
Table 16-10
Section
OC-3
155
OC-12
616
OC-48
2392
OC-192
8554
2400
Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Depending on the considered OTUk or ODUk signal level, the following table shows the
number of BIP-8 block errors that must be exceeded to declare a second severely errored:
Table 16-11
OTU2
OTU2E
OTU3
OTU3E2
OTU4
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2E
ODU3
ODU3E2
ODU4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thresholding
Threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) and TCA profiles
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS systems support threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) on a per
performance parameter basis by using TCA profiles. The TCA profiles are used to store
the threshold values of the performance parameters related to a specific parameter group
(for example parameters related to the SONET Section).
When thresholding is activated for a performance parameter (see Enabling/disabling
thresholding (p. 16-20)), the value of the parameter is compared aiganst the threshold
value on a second by second basis. When the current counter value equals or exceeds the
threshold value, then a threshold crossing alert will be reported as an event notification
with a resolution of one second.
As threshold crossing alerts are events, they are stored in the network element event log,
and displayed in the list of TCA events ).
Types of TCA profiles
In ANSI mode:
OC-3 (SONET Section and Line)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTU3
OTU3E2
OTU4
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2E
ODU3
ODU3E2
ODU4
ODU0TCM
ODU1TCM
ODU2TCM
ODU2ETCM
ODU3TCM
ODU3E2TCM
ODU4TCM
A default profile (DEFAULT) is predefined for each of these TCA profile types.
Additionally a predefined NULL profile exists. Predefined profiles cant not be changed.
Furthermore, you can modify or delete TCA profiles of these types.
The DEFAULT0 TCA profile is used to deactivate (disable) thresholding.
Default threshold settings
Refer to:
TCA modes
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the transient condition method, only one threshold, the so-called threshold report (TR)
threshold, is defined.
Note: The transient condition method is used for SONET interfaces and is a
configuration option for SDH interfaces.
When the counter value of a performance parameter equals or exceeds this threshold, then
a threshold report (TR, synonymous to threshold crossing alert) is generated and stored in
the network element alarm log.
No more than one threshold crossing alert will be generated per performance parameter
during a measurement interval unless the threshold value has been changed, or the
performance parameter has been reset (to zero). When the counter value again reaches or
exceeds the threshold, another threshold crossing alert will be reported.
The following figure illustrates the transient condition method:
Figure 16-3 Thresholding - Transient condition method
1
t
TR
TR
TR
g-upg-0037
Legend:
In the standing condition method, two thresholds are defined, a threshold report (TR)
threshold and a reset threshold report (RTR) threshold.
Note: The standing condition method is the default TCA mode for SDH interfaces,
and is used for all 15 minutes performance registers for which thresholding is
supported. However, for SDH interfaces also the transient condition method can be
chosen as a configuration option.
When the counter value of a performance parameter equals or exceeds the TR threshold,
then a threshold report (TR, synonymous to threshold crossing alert) is generated.
Only the first threshold crossing in a sequence of measurement intervals is reported. At
the end of the first interval in which the counter value did not exceed the RTR threshold, a
reset threshold report (RTR) is generated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
t
TR
RTR
g-upg-0038
Legend:
Enabling/disabling thresholding
Thresholding can be disabled for each performance parameter individually by setting the
associated threshold value to zero.
Assigning a TCA profile with all parameter thresholds set to zero (DEFAULT0 TCA
profile) can be used to disable thresholding for all performance parameters associated to a
particular port or tributary.
Default threshold settings
In the following tables, the default threshold settings of the TCA profiles are listed for
15-minutes and 1-day measurement intervals.
The threshold values for the 15-minutes measurement intervals indicate an unacceptable
performance level.
The threshold values for the 1-day measurement intervals indicate a degraded
performance level.
SDH Regenerator Section
These are the default parameter thresholds related to the SDH Regenerator Section:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-12
Performance parameter
1-day measurements
TR threshold
TR threshold
RTR threshold
OFS-RS
900
86400
BBE-RS
24000
200
36000
ES-RS
50
150
SES-RS
10
15
UAS-RS
10
10
Notes:
1.
The threshold values apply to STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 as well as STM-64 signal levels.
2.
See PM reports SDH Regenerator Section (p. 16-92) for the value ranges.
3.
These are the default parameter thresholds related to the SDH higher order path:
Table 16-13
Performance parameter
1-day measurements
TR threshold
RTR threshold
TR threshold
36000
200
48000
ES-HOVC
180
20
1500
SES-HOVC
15
20
UAS-HOVC
10
10
BBE-HOVC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SONET Section
These are the default parameter thresholds related to the SONET Section:
Table 16-14
Performance parameter
CVS
ESS
SESS
SEFSS
UASS
1-day measurements
OC-3
27
270
OC-12
77
770
OC-48
252
2520
OC-192
752
7520
OC-3
22
220
OC-12
62
620
OC-48
202
2020
OC-192
602
6020
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
OC-192
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
OC-192
OC-3
10
10
OC-12
10
10
OC-48
10
10
OC-192
10
10
Notes:
1.
See PM reports SONET Section (p. 16-94) for the value ranges.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SONET path
These are the default parameter thresholds related to the SONET path:
Table 16-15
Performance parameter
CVP
ESP
SESP
UASP
1-day measurements
STS-1
15
125
STS-3c
25
250
STS-12c
75
750
STS-48c
225
2250
STS-1
12
100
STS-3c
20
200
STS-12c
60
600
STS-48c
180
1800
STS-1
STS-3c
STS-12c
STS-48c
STS-1
10
10
STS-3c
10
10
STS-12c
10
10
STS-48c
10
10
Notes:
1.
ODUk
These are the performance monitoring parameters related to the ODUk Path that are
returned by the NE:
Table 16-16
Parameter
Description
1-day measurements
measurements
ES-ODU
50
150
SES-ODU
10
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Thresholding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-16
Parameter
(continued)
Description
1-day measurements
measurements
BBE-ODU
UAS-ODU
ODU0
6600
950447
ODU1
13200
1900894
ODU2
26401
3801788
ODU2E
26401
3801788
ODU3
212900
30672473
ODU3E2
221278
31788289
10
10
Notes:
1.
See PM reports ODUk Path (p. 16-98) for the value ranges.
OTUk
These are the performance monitoring parameters related to the OTUk Path that are
returned by the NE:
Table 16-17
Parameter
Description
1-day measurements
measurements
ES-OTU
50
150
SES-OTU
10
15
BBE-OTU
OTU2
26401
3801788
OTU2E
26401
3801788
OTU3
212900
30672473
OTU3E2
221278
31788289
10
10
UAS-OTU
Notes:
1.
See PM reports OTUk Section (p. 16-97) for the value ranges.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When a performance monitoring point is removed from the system, the associated
performance monitoring processing is stopped, and all associated current bins are
discarded.
Besides the explicit deletion of performance monitoring points via dedicated management
commands performance monitoring points will implictely be deleted as follows:
If a port unit is deleted all monitoring points related to that port unit will be removed.
the related performance monitoring points will be deleted but the history bins for those
monitoring points might still be visible (retrievable) for up to eight hours in the case of
15-minutes measurements and for up to one day in the case of 1-day measurements.
Therefore, ignore performance monitoring history data belonging to a date and time
outside the current activation period of individual performance monitoring points.
Interface standard of a port
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system allows ports to be operated according to the SDH or
SONET standard.
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
When FEC is enabled on a port with MS/Line performance monitoring enabled, then
the FECC counter will be started.
When FEC is disabled on a port with MS/Line performance monitoring enabled, then
the FECC counter will be reset to zero.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
While matrix equipment protection is inhibited, WARM resets of the active SLC can
cause loss of line PM data for several minutes until the active MTX is up and running
again.
FLC initialization
FLC initialization (via INIT-SYS command) occurs without equipment protection during
the accumulation period. Executing the initialization, the redundancy of the PM collection
is lost for some minutes. During this period, an initialization of the active card (FLC,
SLC) causes loss of PM data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-18, Cards and Ports that Support PM Data (p. 16-28) specifies which cards
and ports support PM data.
Table 16-18
Port
10AN10G
{1-10}
10ET1G
112PDM11
L{1-4}, C{1-10}
112SCA1
L1, C1
112SNA1
112SCX10
L1, C{1-10}
112SNX10
130SCX10
11DPE12
11DPE12A
11DPE12E
11DPM12
11QCUPC
L{1-4}, VA{1-4}
11QPA4
11QPEN4
11QPE24
11STAR1
L1 ,C1
11STAR1A
11STGE12
L1, C{1-10}
11STMM10
L1, C{1-10}
130SCUP
L1
1DPP24M
L1, C{1-21}
24ANM
{1-24}
24ET1GB
43SCA1
L1, C1
43SCGE1
L1, C1
43SCX4
L1, C{1-4}
43SCX4E
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-18
(continued)
Card
Port
43STA1P
L1, C1
43STX4
L1, C{1-4}
43STX4P
4AN10G
{1-4}
4DPA2
L{1,2}, C{1,2}
4DPA4
8ET1GB
{1-8}
A2325A
AHPHG
AHPLG
ALPHG
A2P2125
AM2125A
AM2125B
AM2318A
EC
OSCT
MVAC
G{1-8}
MVAC8B
L{1-8}, C{1-8}
RA2P
LINEIN
SVAC
L1, C1
WTOCMA
IN{1-4}-{9170~9605}
MTC1T9
PTPCTL
P {1-6}
PTPIO
Note: 11STMM10 hardware does not support GbE PM statistics in egress direction.
TX side PM data is not displayed for 4DPA2 client or line ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPR and OPT (Total CFP Lane power) are supported on Client Port
RX and Tx Individual Lane powers are displayed at port level
to provide instant notification, via alarms, that acceptable thresholds for data such as
CPU utilization or dropped packets have been crossed.
to provide a historical view of the performance of the network element over a given
period of time.
Performance monitoring functions are performed on physical and logical points within
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE which represent the boundary with other NEs or
external system. This allows user to define and monitor Quality Of Service at individual
points in which local NE interacts with other network entities. Figure 16-5, Performance
monitoring points in an 1830 PSS NE (p. 16-31) gives an illustration of PM points in an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The identified points in Figure 16-5, Performance monitoring points in an 1830 PSS
NE (p. 16-31) provide the following transport layer and PM monitoring types:
1. OTS layer -> monitored type(s): Total OPR
OCh channel within the OTS -> monitored types: (individual channel)
OPR
2. OTS layer -> monitored type(s): Total OPT
OCh channel within the OTS -> monitored types: (individual channel)
OPT
3. OPS layer -> monitored type(s): OPR & OPT
OTUk (Section Monitoring) layer -> monitored types: BBE (BIP-8), ES, SES, UAS,
FEC-EC & FEC-UBC
ODUk (Path Monitoring) layer -> monitored types: BBE (BIP-8), ES, SES & UAS
4. Client Optical -> monitored type(s): OPR & OPT
Client Digital -> refer to client specific monitored type specification in the next
section.
5. OSC Receive direction -> monitored type(s): OPR, CV, ES, SES, SEFS, Ethernet
Interface group
6. OSC Transmit direction -> monitored type(s): OPT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data from a card or interface is continually gathered for the performance monitoring
group, or groups, that apply to the interface or card. For each group, the data is placed
into two bins that collect the data over a specified time interval. The time interval for the
interval bins is 15 minutes or 24 hours. 24-hour bins collect data from midnight to
midnight based on UTC, not local time. Performance data is also placed into a raw bin.
The statistics in the raw bin accumulate until the contents of the raw bin are cleared.
At the end of each interval, the PM data is moved to the subsequent bin at the end of the
interval period, such that the contents of bin 0 (the active bin) are moved to bin 1, bin 1 to
bin 2, and so on. The contents of the last bin are discarded. You can configure each data
collection point for cards to use up to 8 bins for one day (24-hour) data, and up to 33 bins
for 15-minute data.
Note: Provisioning of number of bins is not supported for IO cards.
Note: After a cold reboot of a card, it is necessary to perform an INIT-REG command
in order to have a clean PM collection period.
Note: For IO and Uplink cards, PM collection is not impacted by FLC reboot.
Thresholds and threshold crossing alerts (TCAs)
Threshold values are considered as crossed when the value in the Current Register is
equal to or exceeds the value in the corresponding Threshold Register. No threshold for
clearing is supported. TCAs are reported via messages upon recognition of the threshold
crossings. A TCA is not considered as a standing condition. No clearance is reported at
the end of any monitoring period.
TCA messages for digital parameters identify the monitored facility, monitored parameter
register, current threshold value, current register value, time and date of the occurrence.
TCA messages for analog parameters identify the monitored facility, monitored parameter
register, current threshold value, current register value, baselined value, time and date of
the occurrence. TCA message output contains absolute measure value for the current
register value and not the deviation from associated baselined value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unlike the value of a counter parameter that can only increase in value unless its value
is reset, the value for a gauge parameter can increase or decrease continuously over time.
Analog parameters have two user configurable thresholds (notifyHigh and notifyLow) as
a high threshold and low threshold associated with the parameter respectively.
These threshold values are checked against the appropriate tidemark low and tidemark
high monitors and TCA notification raised if tidemark high exceeds the defined
notifyHigh value for the parameter and time period, or if tidemark low drops below the
defined notifyLow value for the parameter and time period.
Figure 16-6 Analog parameter TCA
Note: Term exceed used with tidemark low/high monitored parameters indicates that
tidemark high value is greater than the corresponding threshold or that tidemark low
is below the corresponding threshold.
For OT physical layer OPR, OPT parameters TCA profiles contain values for positive and
negative deviation relative to established baselined analog value for that port. Baselining
of OPR/OPT values can be established automatically (at the point the input signal is
applied to the port initially or laser initially enabled) or manually by user command.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: There are two ways of baselining optical signal power levels:
Automatic baselining
Automatic baselining of OPR and OPT parameters on OT ports is performed only
after the initial port creation and dLOS clearing or laser ON so that baseline value
can be established without user action. After initial auto-baselining, analog
parameters on OT ports will need to be manually baselined to acknowledge the
change in power reference.
Unlike manual baselining, auto-baselining does not occur if a baseline value is
already established.
Baselining applies to OT and OSC ports but not OCh and OTS ports. OCh and OTS port
thresholds are established during the commissioning phase.
For each threshold on a Current register, only one TCA is sent during an accumulation
period, unless the Current register is reset. If the Current register is reset and subsequently
its value again reaches or exceeds the threshold value, another TCA is sent. When a
threshold is crossed, the NE does not reset the register, but continues counting to the end
of the accumulation period.
Client/Line card and Uplink card PM TCA Operation
If a Client/Line card or Uplink card is already in service, and the card is subsequently
re-set, PM TCAs may still be reported during the time that the card is re-initializing.
In traditional WDM configurations with optical transponders (OTs), PM TCA reporting is
supported when the OT facility state is UP. For Client/Line and Uplink cards, PM TCAs
will be reported regardless of the facility state.
TCA profiles
As the PM data is collected, the attribute counters in the active bin (bin 0) get
incremented or updated each time an event, such as a SONET/SDH errored second,
occurs. If desired, you can configure and assign a profile to an interval to monitor the
value of each attribute in the active bin and raise a log event when a certain threshold
level is reached. When a specified threshold is crossed a log event is raised.
You can configure each PM group with up to eight profiles, all having different threshold
levels. The NE provides the ability to modify all TCA profiles. The threshold levels you
define in the profiles depend on two factors:
the interval length. For example, if you were gathering statistics for an interface over
15 minute and 24 hour intervals you would need to define two profiles, one that
defines the threshold values for the 15 minute interval and one that defines thresholds
for the 24 hour interval.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are 9 instances of each profile type supported. The user can inhibit individual
monitor type TCA messages by setting the threshold value in a TCA profile assigned to a
facility to 0 if the parameter is digital or to -99.99dB if the parameter is analog. Profiles
with index 7 contain factory default data with 15-min defaults preloaded while profile
with index 8 contains 1-day defaults preloaded. Instances 1-6 are initialized with all 0
values and can be customized by the user.
Note:
1. There is no restriction in assigning profile numbers to PM intervals.
2. PM profile supports default 15 minute and default 1 day values
3. The maximum value allowed for 15 minute threshold vs 1 day are not the same.
The system supports the following TCA profile types:
Note: The WebUI allows the user to select one or more PM Groups (including All)
and one or more Bin types (15-Minute, 1-Day, or Raw Counts) in a single user
request.
Note: For 112SCA/112SNA1 the following applies:
For CFP pluggable modules on the client interface, the system displays a snapshot
of the per lane CFP optical power levels (transmit and receive).
For the C113G4C and C113G4Cd pluggable modules, the system displays four
receive optical power lanes (RxPwr Lane {1-4}) and four transmit power lanes
(TxPwr Lane {1-4}).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the C113G10C pluggable module, the system displays ten receive optical
power lanes (RxPwr Lane {1-10}) and ten transmit power lanes (TxPwr Lane
{1-10}).
The per lane power levels are reported in real time. No binning or thresholding is
supported.
Performance monitoring data is recorded in logs or in bins. The logs record all of the
threshold crossing events that occurred on the network element. The bins hold data
gathered on a specific card or interface over a specific interval. In addition to the interval
bins, there is a raw bin for each PM group that continues to gather data until cleared.
Note: When PM data is not available, PM attribute names are displayed with their
values as "blank".
Note: As a result of a Loss of Signal (LOS) defect at a receive OT port, the user
interfaces will report an Out of Range indication.
1830 PSS-32S performance monitoring
When the OTUk/ODUNIM/ODUPTF facilities on the client/line and uplink cards in the
PSS-32S shelf are created, Performance Monitoring data collection is defined by the
following table.
Table 16-19
PSS-32S Facilities
Ingress PM
Facility
OCH (of OTUk
section of
DWDM uplink)
NE in SONET
mode
Enabled and
counting
NE in SDH
mode
Enabled and
counting
Egress PM
NE in SONET
mode
Enabled and
counting
NE in SDH
mode
Enabled and
counting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-19
PSS-32S Facilities
(continued)
Ingress PM
Facility
NE in SONET
mode
NE in SDH
mode
Egress PM
NE in SONET
mode
NE in SDH
mode
OTU
Enabled and
counting
Enabled and
counting
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
ODU (NIM)
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Disabled)
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Disabled)
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Disabled)
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Disabled)
ODUkPTF
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Enabled)
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Enabled)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
ODUk TCM
layer (both NIM
and terminated)
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Disabled)
Not Created
(PMMODE=
Disabled)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
When the PMMODE parameter is set to Enabled for the ingress direction (DIRN=RCV),
the ingress ODUNIM PM registers are created and counted only if the corresponding
POM parameter functionality is enabled. A POM value of Disabled is equivalent to the
PMMODE=Disabled. When the PMMODE parameter is set to Enabled for the egress
direction (DIRN=TRMT), the egress ODUNIM PM registers are created and counted
only if the corresponding EGPOM functionality is enabled. An EGPOM value of NO is
equivalent to PMMODE=Disabled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-39
16-43
16-47
16-52
16-55
16-58
16-61
16-63
16-65
16-66
Procedure 16-11: Retrieve a list of facilities that use a particular TCA profile
16-67
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SET-PMMODE-GBE
SET-PMMODE-GBE10
SET-PMMODE-OC192
SET-PMMODE-OC48
SET-PMMODE-OC12
SET-PMMODE-OC3
SET-PMMODE-ODU0
SET-PMMODE-ODU1
SET-PMMODE-ODU2
SET-PMMODE-ODU2E
SET-PMMODE-ODU3
SET-PMMODE-ODU3E2
SET-PMMODE-ODU4
SET-PMMODE-OTU
SET-PMMODE-TCM
SET-PMMODE-STM1
SET-PMMODE-STM4
SET-PMMODE-STM16
SET-PMMODE-STM64
SET-PMMODE-STS1
SET-PMMODE-STS3C
SET-PMMODE-STS12C
SET-PMMODE-STS48C
SET-PMMODE-VC4
SET-PMMODE-VC44C
SET-PMMODE-VC416C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the desired
port in the navigation tree underFacilities.
The navigation tree under Facilities is hierarchically structured according to the
facility type, the facility groups, and the associated ports. The following figure
illustrates this structure using an OTU2 facility as an example.
Figure 16-7 Example for the representation of facilities
Facility type
Facility group
Port
g-upg-0059
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Location field, specify whether near-end or far-end parameters (or both) are to be
monitored.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
S - OTU parameters
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the TIME Period field, specify whether the 15-minute or 1-day (24 hour) PM collection
register is to be enabled/disabled.
15-MIN
15 minutes registers
1-DAY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 hour registers
BOTH
If
then
click Apply.
click Cancel.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-PMMODE-GBE
RTRV-PMMODE-GBE10
RTRV-PMMODE-OC3
RTRV-PMMODE-OC12
RTRV-PMMODE-OC48
RTRV-PMMODE-OC192
RTRV-PMMODE-ODU0
RTRV-PMMODE-ODU1
RTRV-PMMODE-ODU21
RTRV-PMMODE-ODU2E
RTRV-PMMODE-ODU3
RTRV-PMMODE-ODU3E2
RTRV-PMMODE-ODU4
RTRV-PMMODE-TCM
RTRV-PMMODE-OTU
RTRV-PMMODE-OCH
RTRV-PMMODE-STM1
RTRV-PMMODE-STM4
RTRV-PMMODE-STM16
RTRV-PMMODE-STM64
RTRV-PMMODE-STS1
RTRV-PMMODE-STS3C
RTRV-PMMODE-STS12C
RTRV-PMMODE-STS48C
RTRV-PMMODE-VC4
RTRV-PMMODE-VC44C
RTRV-PMMODE-VC416C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the desired
port in the navigation tree underFacilities.
The navigation tree under Facilities is hierarchically structured according to the
facility type, the facility groups, and the associated ports. The following figure
illustrates this structure using an OTU2 facility as an example.
Figure 16-8 Example for the representation of facilities
Facility type
Facility group
Port
g-upg-0059
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: A table with the PM mode settings is displayed in the lower part of the
Retrieve PM Mode window. The table is populated with values for retrieval with
default settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Direction field, specify whether the signal in the receive direction or the signal in
the transmit direction is to be monitored (or both).
Possible values are:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Time Period field, specify whether the 15-minutes or 1-day PM register or both are
to be reported
Possible values are:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A table with the current PM mode settings is displayed in the lower part of the
Retrieve PM Mode window.
Reference: See Configuration parameters related to performance monitoring
(p. 16-87).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RTRV-PM-GBE
RTRV-PM-GBE10
RTRV-PM-OC192
RTRV-PM-OC48
RTRV-PM-OC12
RTRV-PM-OC3
RTRV-PM-ODU0
RTRV-PM-ODU1
RTRV-PM-ODU2
RTRV-PM-ODU2E
RTRV-PM-ODU3
RTRV-PM-ODU3E2
RTRV-PM-ODU4
RTRV-PM-TCM
RTRV-PM-OTU
RTRV-PM-STM1
RTRV-PM-STM4
RTRV-PM-STM16
RTRV-PM-STM64
RTRV-PM-STS1
RTRV-PM-STS3C
RTRV-PM-STS12C
RTRV-PM-STS48C
RTRV-PM-VC4
RTRV-PM-VC44C
RTRV-PM-VC416C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required privileges
You must have at least a User Community Authorization Level of 1 to perform this task.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the desired
port in the navigation tree underFacilities.
The navigation tree under Facilities is hierarchically structured according to the
facility type, the facility groups, and the associated ports. The following figure
illustrates this structure using an OTU2 facility as an example.
Figure 16-9 Example for the representation of facilities
Facility type
Facility group
Port
g-upg-0059
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: A table with the PM mode settings is displayed in the lower part of the View
PM Data window. The table is populated with values for retrieval with default
settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the View PM Data window, specify the desired parameters for the PM data selection.
For the available parameters, see PM reports General (p. 16-89).
Result: In the lower part of the View PM Data window, a PM report is displayed
Elements of a PM report
Elements of a PM report
Parameter
Details
Name
Monitored Type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-20
Elements of a PM report
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Monitored Value
For the value ranges of the monitored PM parameters, refer to PM reports SDH
Regenerator Section (p. 16-92).
This parameter indicates whether the near-end or far-end PM register is reported.
Location
Direction
Time Period
This parameter indicates the date when the PM collection period began.
Monitor Date
Monitor Time
Elapsed Time.
This parameter indicates the elapsed time for the current monitoring period or the
actual elapsed time for history monitoring periods.
This parameter is only relevant if the NE operates in ETSI mode.
Validity indication
The validity indication shows the validity of the register (bin) whose value is reported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Validity indication
Value
Meaning
LONG
PRTL
The time of day has been changed and as a result the current data collection
period is shorter than the normal accumulation period (10 seconds or more).
ADJ
Data was manually adjusted (reset via initialization command) during the
accumulation period.
NA
COMPL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to initialize the current 15-minutes or 1-day PM data registers, that is
reset the counter values in the respective register to zero.
Related TL1 commands
INIT-REG-GBE10
INIT-REG-GBE
INIT-REG-OC192
INIT-REG-OC48
INIT-REG-OC12
INIT-REG-OC3
INIT-REG-OTU
INIT-REG-TCM
INIT-REG-ODU0
INIT-REG-ODU1
INIT-REG-ODU2
INIT-REG-ODU2E
INIT-REG-ODU3
INIT-REG-ODU3E2
INIT-REG-ODU4
INIT-REG-STM1
INIT-REG-STM4
INIT-REG-STM16
INIT-REG-STM64
INIT-REG-STS1
INIT-REG-STS3C
INIT-REG-STS12C
INIT-REG-STS48C
INIT-REG-VC4
INIT-REG-VC44C
INIT-REG-VC416C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the navigation pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC window, select the desired
port in the navigation tree underFacilities.
The navigation tree under Facilities is hierarchically structured according to the
facility type, the facility groups, and the associated ports. The following figure
illustrates this structure using an OTU2 facility as an example.
Figure 16-10 Example for the representation of facilities
Facility type
Facility group
Port
g-upg-0059
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If
then
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-53
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Initialize Registers window, use the Time Period list to specify whether the
current 15-minutes or 1-day PM data registers are to be initialized by selecting 15-MIN or
1-DAY.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-54
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
COPY-RFILE
Important Information
The system state should be saved regularly both as a safety measure and a maintenance
activity in order to be able to restore the saved state at any future time.
Before you begin
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS must be in a stable state, that is no configuration changes or
maintenance actions must be started or must be in progress.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-55
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PM global file collection in the local NE. There is a maximum of one instance of
LOCPMGLB in the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:FTPHost: enter the IP address of the host (the remote file server).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Protocol: select the protocol to be used for file transfer.
Possible values are:
fish
ftp
In the field LOCATION:User ID enter the user identifier used for the connection on the
RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Password enter the user password used for the connection on the
RFS.
Note: For use of the local ftp host, the user/password are defined during the ftp server
configuration on the CT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-56
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This value supplies the details of how the specified resource (that is the directory where
the file(s) reside) can be accessed. It has the following syntax: [/]cwd1/cwd2/.../cwdN
where cwd1 to cwdN are strings that identify directories. For the ftp protocol, the cwd1cwdN portion of the url-path is interpreted as a series of FTP commands. Each of the cwd
elements is to be supplied sequentially, as the argument to an FTP CWD (change working
directory) command. For the fish protocol, the cwd1- cwdN portion of the url-path is
interpreted as an absolute file system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
12
13
14
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-57
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to create a new TCA profile instance of a specified profile type.
The new instance of TCA profile is created as a clone of the factory default TCA profilef
the specified type.
Related TL1 commands
ENT-TH-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Facilities node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Threshold Profiles Create, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The TCA Assignment Profile Creation window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the Profile Type drop down list box select the TCA profile type for the TCA profile
that shall be created.
SONET profile types:
OC192
OC48
OC12
OC3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-58
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STM16
STM64
STM4
STM1
OCH
OTU2
OTU2E
OTU3
OTU3E2
OTU4,
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU2E
ODU3
ODU3E2
ODU4,
ODU0TCM
ODU1TCM
ODU2TCM
ODU2ETCM
ODU3TCM
ODU3E2TCM
ODU4TCM}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the drop down list box Set as Default specify if the created TCA profile shall
become the default TCA profile for the entered TCA profile type or not.
Yes
No
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Label enter as string to address the TCA profile in place of the AID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-59
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-60
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-TH-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select theFacilities node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Threshold Profiles . Manage, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Show All TCA Assignment Profiles window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Modify.
Result: The Edit Alarm Profile window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Label you can change the string to address the TCA profile in place of
the AID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-61
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-62
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ED-TH-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Facilities node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Threshold Profiles . Edit, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Retrieve TCA Assignment Profile window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Label select the related user label of the TCA profile to be modified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Send.
Result: All related TCA profiles are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Modify
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-63
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field TCA threshold value you can enter the new value for the TCA threshold.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Threshold Level Clear you can enter the new value that indicates the value of
the threshold that will be used to clear an alert.
Note: This parameter is only supported if region is ETSI and only for 15 minutes
periods...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-64
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve values of thresholds for the specified monitored types in a
specified profile.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-TH-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Facilities node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Threshold Profiles Edit, either by selecting Action from the main menu
bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Retrieve TCA Assignment Profile window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Label select the related user label of the TCA profile to be displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Send.
Result: All related TCA profiles are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-65
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DLT-TH-PROF
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select theFacilities node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Threshold Profiles . Manage, either by selecting Action from the main
menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The Show All TCA Assignment Profiles window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Delete.
Result: The Delete Alarm Profile window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-66
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve a list of facilities that use a particular TCA profile
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-TCAP-ASGNMT
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Facilities node in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC selection tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then select Threshold Profiles View Assignments, either by selecting Action from
the main menu bar or by using the context menu opened with the right mouse button.
Result: The View Assignments window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the fields User Label and Profile Type select the values to retrieve a list of the related
facilities.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Send.
Result: All related facilities are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-67
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-69
PM Data [Card]
16-70
16-72
16-73
16-74
16-75
16-76
16-77
PM Data
16-78
16-80
Clear Bins
16-81
16-82
Port Baseline
16-84
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-68
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
In the WebUI, select the EC/MTC1T9 card and click the Performance function.
Result: The PM Data screen is displayed under the PM Report tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WebUI allows a user to clear current 15-min, 1-day, and/or free running (i.e. raw
counter) bins on an EC/MTC1T9 card. This request will clear the bins for all monitored
types on the card. To clear bins, click on the Bins tab, check the appropriate box(es), and
click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-69
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM Data [Card]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM Data [Card]
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Monitored Type
CPU Average
Heap Usage
Pool Usage
Monitored Value (%)
1-100
Validity
Adjusted
Complete
Long
Not Available
Partial
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-70
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM Data [Card]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Auto Refresh
(checkbox)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-71
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: Up to fifty historical bins for 1-day and 15-min are supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select the EC/MTC1T9 card and click the Performance function.
Result: The PM Data screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-72
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional Info
15-Minute
1-Day
Raw Counts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-73
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select System from the equipment tree and select Reports > TCA
Assignment.
Result: The TCA Profile Assignments are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-74
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Source
<shelf/slot>,
<shelf/slot/port>
Profile Type
Card
Digital Wrapper
DM
E1
Ethernet
Interface
OPR
OPT
ODURX
ODUTX
OTU
PCS
SDH
SONET
15-min Profile ID
{1-8}
1-day Profile ID
{1-8}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-75
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select System from the equipment tree and click the Performance
function.
Result: The TCA Profile Data screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-76
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select the port and click the Performance function.
Result: The PM Data screen is displayed under the PM Report tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WebUI will allow a user to clear current 15-min, 1-day, and/or free running (i.e. raw
counter) bins on a port. This request will clear the bins for all monitored types on the port.
To clear bins, click Clear Bins.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-77
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM Data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM Data
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
PM Group
CD
DGD
Digital Wrapper
E1
Encryption
Ethernet
FOFF
Interface
OPIN
OPOCHIN
OPOCHOUT
OPOUT
OPR
OPT
OSNR
PCS
PreFEC Bits
SDH
SONET
Frequency
{9170~9605}
Applicable to OPOCHIN,
OPOCHOUT and OSNR
groups only.
Start date/time of the
collection period.
Monitored Type
Monitored Value
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-78
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM Data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Validity
Adjusted
Complete
Long
Not Available
Partial
Status
Updated
Not Updated
Auto Refresh
(checkbox)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-79
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The WebUI will support setting the number of 15-min. and/or 1-day
accumulation bins on a port. Up to thirty-three 15-min historical bins and up to eight
1-day historical bins are supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select the port and click the Performance function.
Result: The PM Data screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Settings tab. Select the Profile Type and click Retrieve.
Result: The Port Configuration is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-80
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Clear Bins
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clear Bins
Attribute
Additional Info
PM Group
15-Minute
1-Day
Raw Counts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-81
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The WebUI will allow a user to view and set a baseline value for analog
parameters (OPR, OPT) on a port. The following port types support baselining:
10AN10G: {1-10}
10ET1G: {1-10}
24ANM: {1-24}
24ET1GB: {1-24}
112PDM11: L(1-4), C(1-10)
112SCA1, 112SNA1: L1
112SCA1, 112SNA1: C1
130SCUP: L1
130SCX10, 112SCX10, 112SNX10: L1,C{1-10}
11QCUPC: L(1-4), VA(1-4)
OSCT: OSCSFP
A2P2125, AM2125A, AM2125B, AM2318A: OSCSFP
43SCA1: L1, C1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-82
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
43SCGE1: L1
43STA1P: L1, C1
43SCX4, 43SCX4E, 43STX4, 43STX4P: L1, C(1-4)
MVAC: G{1-8}
MVAC8B: L(1-8), C(1-8)
SVAC: L1, C1
PTPCTL: P{1-6}
Note: For SVAC ports, OPT baselining is not supported on client ports and OPR
baselining is not supported on line ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select the port and click the Performance function.
Result: The PM Configuration screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To set baseline values, select Establish Baseline and enter Reason. Click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-83
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port Baseline
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port Baseline
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Reason
Establish Baseline
(checkbox)
Reason
New System
OT Replaced
{0-9}
Reason
Establish Baseline
(checkbox)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-84
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Port Baseline
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Reason
Value/Format
LOS Cleared
New System
OT Replaced
{0-9}
Additional Info
Specifies the reason for
baselining. {0-9} may be used
for user-defined values.
LOS Cleared is not applicable
to OPT baseline.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-85
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-87
PM reports General
16-89
16-92
16-93
16-94
16-95
PM reports Ethernet
16-96
16-97
16-98
16-99
16-100
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-86
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Details
Location
Direction
For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS , only performance monitoring in the receive direction is
supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-87
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-22
(continued)
Parameter
Details
PM State
Specifies whether the PM data collection for the corresponding Mode Type is enabled or
disabled.
Values are:
Time Period
This parameter specifies whether the 15-minutes or 1-day PM register or both are to be
reported.
Possible values are:
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-88
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM reports General
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM reports General
PM data selection
Parameter
Details
AID
In the AID field, you can specify whether PM data retrieval shall be triggered for a
particular type of facility or for all facilities of a particular type.
Monitored
parameter type
<Level> - Down; only those PM data for the specified parameter are reported that
are less-than or equal-to () the given level (2400 in the example).
<Level> - Down or Not Complete; only those PM data for the specified parameter
are reported that are less-than or equal-to () the given level (2400 in the example),
or which do not have a validity indication of COMPL (complete).
<Level> - Up; only those PM data for the specified parameter are reported that are
greater-than or equal-to () the given level (2400 in the example).
<Level> - Up or Not Complete; only those PM data for the specified parameter are
reported that are greater-than or equal-to () the given level (2400 in the example),
or which do not have a validity indication of COMPL (complete).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-89
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM reports General
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-23
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Location
Direction
For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS , only performance monitoring in the receive direction is
supported.
Time Period
This parameter specifies whether the 15-minutes or 1-day PM register or both are to be
reported.
Possible values are:
Monitor Date
This parameter specifies the (starting) date of the PM collection period for which PM
data is to be reported. The format of the Monitor Date is MM-DD (month-day).
The default setting is the current date.
Monitor Time
If the Time Period is set to 15-MIN or BOTH, then the Monitor Time parameter
specifies the (starting) time of the PM collection period for which PM data is to be
retrieved. If the Time Period is set to 1-DAY, then the value of the Monitor Time
parameter is ignored. The format of the Monitor Time is HH-MM (hour-minute).
The minutes {0-14}, {15-29}, {30-44}, and {45-59} specify the first, second, third,
and fourth 15-minutes period, respectively, within the specified hour.
The default setting is the current hour and beginning of the current 15-minutes window.
Number of
15-minute registers
This parameter indicates how many historical 15-minutes registers are to be reported in
addition to that PM register specified by means of the Monitor Date and Monitor Time
parameters.
The register specified by means of the Monitor Date and Monitor Time parameters will
be the first output followed by the Number of 15-minute registers previous registers.
Possible values are:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-90
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM reports General
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 16-23
(continued)
Parameter
Details
Number of 1-day
registers
This parameter indicates how many historical 1-day registers are to be reported in
addition to that PM register specified by means of the Monitor Date and Monitor Time
parameters.
The register specified by means of the Monitor Date and Monitor Time parameters will
be the first output followed by the Number of 1-day registers previous registers.
Possible values are:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-91
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These are the parameters of the SDH Regenerator Section performance monitoring
reports that are returned by the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day measurements
OFS-RS
0 - 900
0 - 86400
BBE-RS
0 - 2159100
0 - 207273600
ES-RS
0 - 900
0 - 86400
SES-RS
0 - 810
0 - 77760
UAS-RS
0 - 900
0 - 86400
Notes:
1.
The value ranges apply to STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 as well as STM-64 signal levels.
2.
All listed parameters are related to near-end performance monitoring. There is no far-end performance
monitoring for the SDH Regenerator Section.
3.
In addition to the value of each parameter, the time, date, and validity of the data (see Validity indication
(p. 16-50)) is returned by the NE for each parameter.
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-92
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These are the parameters of the SDH higher order path performance monitoring reports
that are returned by the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day measurements
BBE-HOVC
0 - 7199100
0 - 691113600
ES-HOVC
0 - 900
0 - 86400
SES-HOVC
0 - 810
0 - 77760
UAS-HOVC
0 - 900
0 - 86400
Notes:
1.
The value ranges apply to all signal levels (VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c, VC-4-64c for terminated higher order
paths, AU-4, AU-4-4c, AU-4-16c, AU-4-64c for unterminated higher order paths).
2.
In addition to the value of each parameter, the time, date, and validity of the data (see Validity indication
(p. 16-50)) is returned by the NE for each parameter.
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-93
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These are the parameters of the SONET Section performance monitoring reports that are
returned by the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day measurements
CVS
0 - 16383
0 - 1048575
ESS
0 - 900
0 - 65535
SESS
0 - 900
0 - 65535
SEFSS
0 - 900
0 - 65535
UASS
0 - 900
0 - 65535
Notes:
1.
The value ranges apply to OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 as well as OC-192 signal levels.
2.
All listed parameters are related to near-end performance monitoring. There is no far-end performance
monitoring for the SONET Section.
3.
In addition to the value of each parameter, the time, date, and validity of the data (see Validity indication
(p. 16-50)) is returned by the NE for each parameter.
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-94
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These are the parameters of the SONET path performance monitoring reports that are
returned by the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day measurements
CVP
0 - 16383
0 - 1048575
ESP
0 - 900
0 - 65535
SESP
0 - 900
0 - 65535
UASP
0 - 900
0 - 65535
Notes:
1.
SONET path includes the signal rates STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c, and STS-192c.
2.
In addition to the value of each parameter, the time, date, and validity of the data (see Validity indication
(p. 16-50)) is returned by the NE for each parameter.
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-95
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
PM reports Ethernet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM reports Ethernet
Parameters and value ranges
These are the Ethernet performance parameters (1 GbE and 10 GbE) that are returned by
the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes measurements
1-day measurements
EINB
0 - 281474976710655
0 - 281474976710655
EONB
0 - 281474976710655
0 - 281474976710655
EINF
0 - 281474976710655
0 - 281474976710655
EONF
0 - 281474976710655
0 - 281474976710655
EIFE
0 - 281474976710655
0 - 281474976710655
EOFE
0 - 281474976710655
0 - 281474976710655
ETH-SYMERR
0 - 4294967295
0 - 4294967295
Notes:
1.
In addition to the value of each parameter, the time, date, and validity of the data (see Validity indication
(p. 16-50)) is returned by the NE for each parameter.
2.
Related information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-96
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These are the performance monitoring parameters related to the OTUk Section that are
returned by the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day measurements
ES-OTU
0 - 900
0 - 86400
SES-OTU
0 - 810
0 - 77760
BBE-OTU
OTU2
11073600
1063065600
OTU2E
11473110
1101418560
OTU3
44481600
4270233600
OTU3E2
46099584
4294967295
OTU4
115612380
11098788480
0 - 900
0 - 86400
0 - 4294967295
0 - 4294967295
0 - 1006289762112
0 - 96603817162752
UAS-OTU
FECC
OTU2
OTU2E
OTU3
OTU3E2
OTU4
Notes:
1.
The FECC count is the accumulated number of detected and corrected FEC code violations per frame, over
the current accumulation period. Note that the FECC counter is not incremented during the times when a
LOS, LOF, LOM or AIS defect is present.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-97
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These are the performance monitoring parameters related to the ODUk Path that are
returned by the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day measurements
ES-ODU
0 - 900
0 - 86400
SES-ODU
0 - 810
0 - 77760
BBE-ODU
ODU0
1378350
132321600
ODU1
2757600
264643200
ODU2
11073600
1063065600
ODU2E
11473110
1101418560
ODU3
44481600
4270233600
ODU3E2
46099584
4294967295
ODU4
115612380
11098788480
0 - 900
0 - 86400
UAS-ODU
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-98
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These are the performance monitoring parameters related to the ODUk TCM Layer that
are returned by the NE:
Parameter
Description
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day measurements
ES-TCM
0 - 900
0 - 86400
SES-TCM
0 - 810
0 - 77760
BBE-TCM
ODU0T
1378350
132321600
ODU1T
2756700
264643200
ODU2T
11073600
1063065600
ODU2ET
11473110
1101418560
ODU3T
44481600
4270233600
ODU3E2T 46099584
4294967295
ODU4T
115612380
11098788480
0 - 900
0 - 86400
UAS-TCM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-99
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OCH near-end section layer parameters are monitored on DWDM uplink OCH on OTU2,
OTU2e, and OTU3e2 ports of the switchponder card 43SCUP and 130SCUP.
Parameters and value ranges
These are the performance monitoring parameters related to the OCH section near end
that are returned by the NE:
Parameter
Region
Description
Direction
Value range
15-minutes
measurements
1-day
measurements
OPR-AVG
ANSI
RCV
NA
NA
OPR-H
ANSI
RCV
4 to 9.9
4 to 9.9
ETSI
RCV
4 to 9.9
4 to 9.9
ANSI
RCV
-5 to -9.9
-5 to -9.9
ETSI
RCV
-5 to -9.9
-5 to -9.9
OPT-AVG
ANSI
TRMT
NA
NA
OPT-H
ANSI
TRMT
4 to 9.9
4 to 9.9
ETSI
TRMT
4 to 9.9
4 to 9.9
ANSI
TRMT
-5 to -9.9
-5 to -9.9
ETSI
TRMT
-5 to -9.9
-5 to -9.9
OPR-L
OPT-L
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
16-100
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
17
17
Database
backup and
restore procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the procedures for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE database backup
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE database restore. Furthermore, the procedure for
retrieving information about the current NE database is provided.
Contents
Backup and restore on the OCS application
17-3
17-4
17-5
17-6
Database management
17-7
Database backup
17-12
Database restore
17-14
17-16
17-17
17-18
17-22
17-24
Procedure 17-4: Download a database from a remote file server to the standby
database
17-27
17-30
17-32
17-33
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-34
17-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For step by step operating instructions, see OCS backup and restore procedures
(p. 17-16).
Contents
Configuration backup and restoration
17-4
17-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The volatile memory database (ACTV CPU DB) is maintained by the NE and reflects the
NE configuration, its alarm states and conditions. Two non-volatile disk database types
shall exist for the NE: the primary backup database (ACTV DSK DB) and the secondary
backup data base (STBY DB).
The databases also contain control plane related configuration, alarm states and
conditions. These control plane related data are seen as an integral part of the NE
database.
The primary backup database is maintained implicitly by the NE during its normal
operation. At any time, it reflects the state of the NE's volatile memory database.
Updating the primary backup database occurs online without interrupting the NE's normal
service operation.
The primary backup database can be copied to the secondary backup database by an
operator command (backup). The secondary backup database can be copied to the
primary backup database. After an FLC restart (or FLC switch) the memory database will
be reloaded from the restored disk database.
The secondary backup database can be copied to/from a remote file server (RFS) by
operator commands.
The NE supports autonomous reporting of memory database changes, in particular,
changes to provisioning state of the equipment and the facilities.
The backup and restore mechanism provides additional safety, for instance if a HW
problem occurs, which cannot be solved by redundancy mechanisms. In such a situation
the system is not operable anymore. Usually the defective HW (for instance the FLC) will
be changed and the software will be installed again. If you have saved the latest
configuration as a backup, you can easily restore that configuration.
Therefore, it is recommended to make a backup of the NE configuration database, each
time after you have made an important change of the NE's configuration, like for instance
after creation of new cross-connections or changing the Control System configuration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The system is equipped with redundant mass storage devices (SSD), that store all system
non-volatile data (for instance SW images, DB configurations, log files). The database
and NE software is only stored on the main shelf FLCs. The active FLC performs a file
replication mechanism with the standby FLC to keep them synchronized.
Backup storage
A backup is stored on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS. Making another backup will
overwrite the last one. If you want to keep a backup, you have to upload the backup from
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS to a remote server or to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
supporting host. The other way round, if you want to restore any backup that you have
stored on a server, you have to download that backup to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
before you can restore it.
To ensure that a backup is kept safely, make a second copy on another storage medium
like for instance CD-ROM (storing on CD-ROM is not explicitly described in this
chapter).
The figure below shows different locations of backups and the necessary operations to
transfer a backup to another location:
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Server
CD-ROM
upload
manually
copy
download
g-upg-0074
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For step by step operating instructions, see WDM backup and restore procedures using
WebUI (p. 17-32).
Contents
Database management
17-7
Database backup
17-12
Database restore
17-14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database management
Introduction
Before the NE can access the software and database servers, the NE must be configured
to point at the servers. Separate commands are used to configure the databases and
software servers. The servers must reside on a computer that is accessible from the NE.
The servers can be on the same computer or they can reside on two different computers.
The active non-volatile memory database is maintained by the NE and reflects the NE
configuration and NE provisioning. A temporary copy of the active database is created by
the NE before file transfer to an RFS. A temporary database space is also the destination
for remote file transfer from the RFS. The NE supports autonomous reporting of changes
to the active database that come about as the result of provisioning and configuration
changes.
Redundancy
The NE non-volatile memory (flash memory card) is considered to be part of the active
main EC. In the case of a redundant controller configuration, the system assures
consistency of non-volatile memory contents between the active and standby main shelf
controllers.
The system is responsible for replicating any change to the NE active database on the
active Main EC to the corresponding database on the standby Main EC (if available). In
particular, the implementation of the operations for creation of a database backup and
download of a database backup to the active Main EC is expected to have the
corresponding effects on the standby Main EC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
After reboot or insertion of a standby EC, an EC LED will indicate a status of Software
Download (flashing amber) until the standby database image is synchronized with the
primary.
Note: For 1830 multi-shelf configuration, if one shelf is redundant, all shelves should
be redundant.
Local database operations
Any failures in updating the database are reported by the NE. After a power failure, or in
the cases of severe faults, the system is capable of being automatically restored from the
active non-volatile memory database to the latest stable and consistent configuration that
existed before the failure occurred.
The system provides the ability to restore the active database (from the remote database),
and thus enable normal operations via each of the supported user interfaces. NE
software has a method for verifying the valid state of locally stored databases (e.g.,
checksum procedure).
The NE software checks to make sure that the SW database version is compatible with the
software generic. If not, or if the NE detects existence of an obsolete (i.e. no longer
supported) database, a corrupt or empty database, or a database from another system, the
database is marked as being invalid. No more than one database backup, database restore,
active and standby database synchronization, or software download operation is allowed
at the same time on the NE.
Remote database operations
The NE provides the capability to transfer database files from the local storage area on
the disk to a remote storage area on a RFS and vice-versa. Using this capability, operators
can perform remote database backup and remote database restore.
The NE supports the ability to retrieve information on a backed up database currently
existing on an RFS. Information includes the SID, NE type, and release of the NE on
which the backup took place, and the date and time at which the backup occurred. The
NE supports the ability to back up the active database to a database file on a Remote File
Server and to restore the NE database from a backup database on a Remote File Server.
The file transfer functionality works with any RFS supporting an IP connection, a
standard FTP file server, and also in an environment in which the Secure Shell transport
protocol (SSH), running on top of TCP/IP, yields a secure FTP file transport capability.
Note: The system does not automatically resume a previously started remote file
transfer operation (either direction) that was interrupted by an NE restart or Main EC
protection switch.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Each database file that is created with the BackupDatabase command maintains the
following data identifiers:
SID <1-20 CHARACTER SID> - System Identifier, identifies the provisioned system
identification.
BACKUP-DATE {YY-MM-DD:{08-99}-{1-12}-{1-31}} - Backup Date
BACKUP-TIME {HH:MM:SS:{0-23}:{0-59}:{0-59}} - Backup Time
Note: the active database, and for RFS database files, the BACKUP-DATE and
BACKUP-TIME values are the date and time, as reported by the NE, when the
backup was actually done.
The active database contains records indicating when the database has been backed up.
The following specifies initial and subsequent values of that data:
the directory on the RFS to which the database is backed up. This is equivalent to
the path on the RFS, to the directory where the database file resides.
the name of the remote database file
the BACKUP-DATE and BACKUP-TIME.
The NE writes or modifies all of the data specified above before the active Main
EC-resident temporary database copy is made.
The default filename format for each remote backup database file on the RFS is:
NEname_SWgeneric_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.bak
Note: It is possible for the user to override the default filename format, but the .bak
file extension must be used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A download of a database backup from the RFS (part of the database restore process)
will fail if there is not enough free space on the Active Main ECs flash memory. A
database failure condition-local (DBFL alarm) is raised.
A database backup (to an RFS database file) will fail if a copy of the active database
cannot be created because there is not enough free space on the Main ECs
non-volatile memory. If this occurs, a database failure condition-local (DBFL alarm)
is raised.
Any database failure condition that occurs during a database backup is cleared the
next time that a database backup is attempted.
In a duplex controller environment:
If the active Main EC database fails, the NE effects an automatic switch to the
standby Main EC.
If the standby Main EC controller fails, the standby EC becomes unavailable for
automatic protection, and an appropriate alarm/condition is raised.
A database synchronization failure alarm is raised if the active EC card is unable
to synchronize its database with the standby EC card.
The database backup and restore operations support the option of encrypted file transfer,
SFTP, using SSH (see System security features (p. 2-26)). The following applies:
Database backup and restore commands using SFTP will be denied if the Network
Element SSH Key is not initialized.
When the 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S database server is configured for the SFTP
protocol and the NE receives a backup database or restore database command, the NE
will establish an SSH connection with the external SSH server on the RFS over which
the encrypted file transfer can take place.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database management
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database backup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database backup
Overview
The system provides the capability for the user to backup the NE active database to a
Remote File Server. The process of doing a remote backup can be split into two different
phases: first, create a temporary copy of the active database on the NE; second, send this
database file to its remote storage destination. The following sequence outlines the
general principle for the backup of an NE database on a Remote File Server:
1. An initiator, often a managing system, sends a command to initiate the database
backup.
2. The NE makes a temporary copy of the active database.
3. After the temporary database has been created, the NE sends a message to the RFS
initiating the file transfer.
The following conditions apply to a database backup:
Database backup operation occurs with minimal impact to normal service operations
and does not impact service.
Note: This applies primarily during creation of the temporary database on the EC.
Thus new commands are allowed while transfer of a database file to the RFS is
occurring.
A database backup operation will backup the entire database content. The following
items are not part of the database and therefore are not backed up.
event logs
active alarms and conditions
site-specific data
The database backup operation writes database file identification information to
records in the active DB and the backed up database on the Remote File Server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database backup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The database backup operation includes a data integrity verification of the temporary
database.
The NE accomplishes the generation of database backups in 15 minutes or less.
If the temporary database cannot be read (meaning that the database cannot be
transported to the RFS) , a database failure condition-local (DBFL alarm) is set
against common equipment.
If the file transfer of the database to the RFS does not succeed, a database failure
condition-transport is set against common equipment.
The NE denies a request to back up the active database when:
a database backup event is currently in progress
a database restore event is currently in progress
Each of the Database Backup Failure condition types is a standing condition declared
against the COM entity. Each such condition is cleared when a Database Backup or
Database Restore is next attempted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Database restore
Overview
The system provides the capability for the user to download a previously backed up
database from a Remote File Server and to then have this database automatically
activated on the NE. The process of restoring an NEs working database is twofold - first,
download a backup from a remote location onto a target NE; second, restart the NE with
the downloaded database. The following sequence outlines the general principle for the
restoration of an NE's active database from a Remote File Server:
1. An initiator (often an OS) sends a command (RestoreDatabase) to the NE to initiate
the process of downloading a database from the RFS and then activating it on the NE.
2. The NE requests the download from the RFS and begins storing the downloaded file
as a temporary database on the active Main EC.
3. The NE marks the temporary database as the active database.
4. System software restarts the NE.
The following conditions apply to a database restore:
Database restoration has failed meaning that the transfer and data validation of
the remote database file has failed.
Database restoration has begun meaning that the external FTP session has begun.
The following conditions apply to SID
The NE SID is preserved in a database restoration if the database file being
restored came from the same SID (i.e. the database is being restored to the NE
from which the database was backed up)
If the restored database comes from a different NE, the SID will be changed to the
SID that is in the database being restored.
Database restoration does not interrupt or interfere with traffic on connections that are
not altered by the restoration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Database restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nativity check
The database restore command checks that the serial number of the User Panel is the
same as that in the database being restored. If not, the database is marked invalid after the
restore operation completion. It is possible to restore to an NE any remote database file
whose SID is the same as the SID of the NE that has received a database restore request.
In other words, the nativity of the database file to be restored must be that it originated
on the NE that is initiating the restore.
Note: For a User Panel replacement, the database restore operation supports a
forced option, where the restore is allowed despite failed nativity checks (see
Procedure 17-7: Restore database (p. 17-36)).
Database restore failure conditions
Important! On any restart, if the database is not aligned with the SW, or is otherwise
corrupted, the database is declared invalid. It is then the user's responsibility to either
restore a proper database or to clear the database. The NE saves some parameters
(SID, OAMP IP address, etc.) to SEEPROM. In case of a database corruption, the NE
will still be reachable and will have network connectivity. This will allow the user to
attempt to restore a good known database to the NE.
The NE system will deny the Restore Database request for any of the following reasons:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes the procedures for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE database backup
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE database restore for the OCS application.
Contents
Procedure 17-1: Backup the active database to the standby database
17-17
17-18
17-22
17-24
Procedure 17-4: Download a database from a remote file server to the standby
database
17-27
17-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to backup the primary backup data base to the secondary backup data
base (STBYDB) of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE.
Related TL1 commands
ACT-DB-BACKUP
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Send.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to transfer the configuration data of an NE to a remote file server.
Related TL1 commands
COPY-RFILE
ACT-DB-BACKUP
Important Information
The system state should be saved regularly both as a safety measure and a maintenance
activity in order to be able to restore the saved state at any future time.
Important! Ensure that a backup is made after you have changed the configuration of
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
The backup will be stored on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS (on both FLCs).
During the backup procedure, the persistency data, application configuration data and
control system configuration data of the NE are saved. If the NE supports GMRE, the
GMRE configuration is saved as well.
For redundant systems (that means with redundant FLCs)
Due to the redundant system control, there is no interruption on the active FLC during
the backup.
While the backup procedure is running, the standby FLC is not available.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS must be in a stable state, that is no configuration changes or
maintenance actions must be started or must be in progress.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Remote File Server(IP Addr.) enter the IP address of the host (the
remote file server).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Protocol select the protocol to be used for file transfer.
Possible values are:
sftp
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:User ID enter the user identifier used for the connection on the
RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Password enter the user password used for the connection on the
RFS.
Note: For use of the local sftp host, the user/password are defined during the sftp
server configuration on the RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
11
12
on the RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
14
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to retrieve information related to transferred files on a remote file
server.
Related TL1 commands
RTRV-RFILE
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS must be in a stable state, that is no configuration changes or
maintenance actions must be started or must be in progress.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Protocol: select the protocol to be used for file transfer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
sftp
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:User ID enter the user identifier used for the connection on the
RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Password enter the user password used for the connection on the
RFS.
Note: For use of the local sftp host, the user/password are defined during the sftp
server configuration on the CT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Remote File Server(IP Addr.) enter the IP address of the host (the
remote file server).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following information can be retrieved for database backups stored on a remote file
server:
Parameter
Values
Details
Name
RFSDB
A database backup on a
Remote File Server
System Type
1830 PSS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Release
Identification
{E, F, P,
R}{00-99}.{00-99}.{0099}
SID
Site Identifier
A database backup on a
Remote File Server
E
Engineering Load. When software has
progressed to the point where
components and functions are brought
together in a single testable load (Internal
load only).
F
First Office Application, the software
load is intended for FOA evaluation and
testing and is qualified to carry traffic
under specified conditions or constraints
(Load given to customer during
development that could be changed to an
R load pending customer acceptance).
P
Preliminary, the software load is only
intended for evaluation and testing under
controlled, nontraffic-bearing conditions
(Load given to customer during
development, not meant for deployment
or real traffic).
R
Released, the software load is fully
qualified to carry traffic per applicable
ALU specifications.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Values
Details
Matrix Type
MT960C
MT1T9
MT1T9C
MT3T8
Backup Date
Backup Time
REGION
ANSI, ETSI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to download a database from a remote file server to the standby
database.
Related TL1 commands
COPY-RFILE
Important Information
Due to the redundant system control, there is no interruption on the active FLC during
the download.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS must be in a stable state, that is no configuration changes or
maintenance actions must be started or must be in progress.
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Remote File Server(IP Addr.) enter the IP address of the host (the
remote file server).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Protocol select the protocol to be used for file transfer.
Possible values are:
sftp
In the field LOCATION:User ID enter the user identifier used for the connection on the
RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Password enter the user password used for the connection on the
RFS.
Note: For use of the local sftp host, the user/password are defined during the sftp
server configuration on the CT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Forced
Normal
11
12
13
14
15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to copy the backup database stored on STBYDB to the primary
backup database (ACT-DSK-DB) and resets the system to activate the new database.
Related TL1 commands
RESTORE-DB
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forced
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The software release identifier indicated for the STBYDB does not match the
software release identifier indicated for the system.
The REGION parameter indicated for the STBYDB does not match the REGION
parameter indicated for the system.
Normal
The command is denied if there is a mismatch between the SID, the software release
identifier, system type, Region parameter, or the backup time stamp of the system and
the information stored in the STBYDB.
Note: Independent from Command Execution Mode restoration of the database is not
possible in case of system or matrix type or shelf type mismatch.A detailed list of
command denials can be found in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS OCS TL1 Command
Guide, when searching for RESTORE-DB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes the procedures for Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE database backup
and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE database restore.
Contents
Procedure 17-6: Backup database
17-33
17-34
17-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
Note: The information here describes procedures using the WebUI. For procedures
using 1354 RM-PhM or CLI, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 11.0
Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Database > Backup and Restore.
Result: The database Backup and Restore screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK. Next, click Refresh to display the status of the Backup.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Values/Format
Additional Info
Backup/Restore Settings
Protocol
FTP
TFTP
SFTP
User ID
<0-32 chars>
Password
<0-32 chars>
Confirm Password
<0-32 chars>
Server IP
<IP address>
Directory
<1-255 chars>
Filename
<1-255 chars>
<1-255 chars>
<0-100> %
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Values/Format
Additional Info
Backup
Restore
Request to restore a
previously backed up
database to the NE.
Force Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Note: The information here describes procedures using the WebUI. For procedures
using 1354 RM-PhM or CLI, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 11.0
Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide and Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 Command Line Interface Guide.
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Database > Backup and Restore.
Result: The database Backup and Restore screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
after the database has been restored, the system will automatically restart.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK. Next, click Refresh to display the status of the restore.
Result: When the NE resets, the WebUI will be refreshed and will navigate to the
main screen. Select Administration > Database to see the status of the database
restore.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
17-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
18
18
Software
installation and
upgrade procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes both the procedures which have to be carried out for the first
installation and the procedures for the software upgrade of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS.
Important! An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS NE consisting of an OCS and an DWDM
compound can be installed and upgraded each compound independently.
Contents
OCS software installation and upgrade procedures
18-2
18-3
Procedure 18-2: Download a software generic from a remote file server to the
standby software load
18-9
18-14
Procedure 18-4: Switch from the current release to the new release
18-18
Procedure 18-5: Switch back from the current release and database to previous
release
18-20
Procedure 18-6: Make the current release software the permanent active
software
18-22
18-24
18-25
18-27
Software Upgrade
18-28
18-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
This chapter describes both the procedures which have to be carried out for the first
installation and the procedures for the software upgrade of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
application OCS using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC.
Contents
Procedure 18-1: Upgrade to a new release of the NE software
18-3
Procedure 18-2: Download a software generic from a remote file server to the
standby software load
18-9
18-14
Procedure 18-4: Switch from the current release to the new release
18-18
Procedure 18-5: Switch back from the current release and database to previous
release
18-20
Procedure 18-6: Make the current release software the permanent active
software
18-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
COPY-RFILE
INIT-SYS-NEW
RTRV-ISU-STATUS
RMV-ISU-OLD
changing cables,
un-powering HW or opening latches
changing HW,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
All alarms on the NE (for instance alarm list, UPL) are cleared. If it is not possible to
clear all alarms the cause for the remaining alarms must be fully understood and clear.
Protection switches (for instance equipment protection, traffic protection) should be
avoided during the upgrade.
Release all loopbacks before performing the SW upgrade. See Chapter 13, TDM
traffic maintenance procedures and Chapter 15, TDM Ethernet/Data traffic
maintenance procedures .
During new release restart it may come to a MTX side switch. To avoid this perform
Procedure 5-23: Inhibit equipment protection switching (p. 5-113).
The following has to be fulfilled for upgrading of NEs managed via Control Plane and
located within one Control Plane network domain.
GMRE supports a phased approach in order to In-Service-Upgrade all nodes within an
ASON, by distinguishing between
Before starting the In-Service-Upgrade of a NE, Active and Installed SW version must be
equal. Once the In-Service-Upgrade of a single NE is completed, its Installed SW
Version is increased to the GMRE version of the new SW release, while its Active SW
Version remains at the old value, thus providing backward compatibility of the CP
protocols with all NEs that have not been upgraded yet to the new SW release.
When the In-Service-Upgrade of all NEs is completed, i.e. all nodes belonging to the
ASON have the same Installed SW Version, the value of the Active SW Version is
increased to the Installed SW Version. This enables the GMRE features of the new SW
release. In order to raise the Active SW Version simultaneously on all nodes of the
ASON domain, the operation is to be performed via 1350 OMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
During deployment of a new software release in a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS network, the
following has to be done:
1. first all nodes receive the new release SW (see Procedure 18-2: Download a
software generic from a remote file server to the standby software load (p. 18-9).)
2. start with one node and set each port in use by Control Plane into link maintenance on
this node and its direct adjacency port in neighbor node, if all IOC Firmware shall be
upgraded together with the new software release
3. upgraded the node command to the new software release as described below
4. set back the link maintenance for the neighbour node's ports and on the upgraded
node if it was set before. During this phase an Control Plane interworking of new SW
releases with current SW releases shall be supported, due to all nodes still running
their Control Plane network protocols on the same Active SW Version.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for all nodes in the network domain.
If the IOC firmware was not upgraded together with the release software, the firmware
shall now be upgraded according to the operator planning.
On a PortGroup or slot basis, depending on the affected IOC, use a sequence of:
1. Enable link maintenance for the affected neighbor node's ports affected from the
PortGroup/slot under upgrade and on the ports of the node where the firmware
upgrade shall take place using OMS.
2. ED-PORTGP or INIT-SYS TL1 commands, to update the firmware on the PortGroup
or IOC
3. Disable link maintenance for the port using OMS
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until all PortGroups/slot are updated
5. Continue with next node, execute steps 1 to 4 for each node.
To verify all firmware being upgraded, apply the TL1 commands RTRVPORTGP::ALL and RTRV-EQPT::ALL on each node and make sure no
FWUPGRADEABLE=YES is reported.
At this point on each node the Active Software Version (ASV) can be provisioned by
the operator via ED-CPNODE TL1 command to use the latest version deployed; than also
the control plane is on the new release SW function. Backward CP compatiblity from here
on is no longer supported.
The control plane isolates a node from the CP network if its "Installed Software Version"
is less than the "Activated Software Version" of its control plane neighbors.
Prior to initializing the new release, set all NNI physical connections of this node to link
maintenance state Enabled using OMS. Be aware that links in this mode will not react on
interruptions and permanent traffic outage can occur.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
The following equipment is required for upgrading the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS software
from a former release to Release 6.0.0:
Instructions
Download the software generic from the remote file server to the standby software load.
See Procedure 18-2: Download a software generic from a remote file server to the
standby software load (p. 18-9).
Note: In case of active GMRE application, set all NNI physical connections of this
node to link maintenance state Enabled using OMS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
INITNC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
INITNIP
STAF
STAC
Important! If the ISU takes longer than accounted for, it may occur that a timeout
exceeded, which is used for awaiting the pre-loading autonomous actions
finishing. TheISU status is then Pre-load-Fail (PRELF).
In ISU state PRELF, which can be seen, trigger the ISU preparation newly with
STA-ISU command. The repetition of the ISU pre-loading will be accumulative
and the timeout will not expire for the same reason again.
Additional information If during in-service upgrade only one FLC was used or one
FLC was pulled out or it's latches where opened, and in ISU state Init-NewCompleted (INITNC) a second FLC is equipped again (plugged in or latches closed),
the FLC replacement procedure does not take place immediately but is delayed to ISU
state No-STArt-isu-In-Progress (NOSTAIP) - after the ISU is finished completely. No
TL1 indication other than Software-Downloading (SWDL) is provided during that
time on TL1 for this pack and for the group state TL1 reports a change to recovery
(RECCOVERY).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
IF
THEN
End of Steps
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of active GMRE application, after upgrading the last NE in a network, please refer
to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 6.0 GMRE/GMPLS
Configuration Guide for increasing the Active Network Version.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to download a software generic from a remote file server to the
standby software load
Important! Run this procedure during quiet provisioning hours. Dont download
from server while other download/upload of generic or Performance Monitoring Data
is in progress.
During Start In-Service-Upgrade In Progress (STAIP), provisioning is limited.
Related TL1 commands
COPY-RFILE
Have loaded the software generic to onto a specific folder on the remote file server
(therefor create a folder on the file server; example: /download/1830/R05_00_
00/builds) If the remote file server is not a local PC this has to be done by the
owner of the remote file server.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS must be in a stable state, that means no configuration
changes or maintenance actions must be started or must be in progress.
Note: The system must use the loopback IP address to initiate SFTP, as no other
source IP address can be used on the unnumbered interfaces (GCCs).
On the GNE, one of the addresses on OAMP-LAN will be used.
Therefore you must ensure that the SFTP server is able to route the loopback address
of the NE. This can be achieved by running OSPF on the SFTP server, attaching the
SFTP server to a router, or adding static routes to the SFTP server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field Protocol: select the protocol to be used for file transfer.
Possible values are:
sftp
In the field LOCATION:FTPHost: enter the IP address of the host (the remote file server).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:User ID enter the user identifier used for the connection on the
RFS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field LOCATION:Password enter the user password used for the connection on the
RFS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: For use of the local SFTP host, the user/password are defined during the SFTP
server configuration on the CT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
0.25 hour for download via LAN and one hop ODU-4 GCC connection, when the
GCC bandwidth is exclusively used for this download.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGA firmware of the new release is distributed onto available Flash RAM storage on
I/O packs. The FPGA firmware distribution onto the Flash RAM on I/O packs as
consequent action of a successful SW download has a completion time maximum of 2
hours for a fully equipped system. As consequent action of a successful FPGA
firmware distribution the system autonomously performs a feasibility check that the
current system configuration allows a successful upgrade to the new release. The
feasibility check on the current system configuration as consequent action of a
successful FPGA image distribution has a completion time maximum of 15 minutes
for a fully equipped system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
DLIP
PRELIP
STAIP
PRELF
STAF
STAC
Note: The first ISU step starts from the initial state NOSTAIP and remains in the ISU
state DLIP until the file transfer is finished. Afterwards the ISU states PRELIP and
STAIP are traversed automatically (performing some consequent actions after the
software release download succeeded) to reach the first stable interim ISU state
STAC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
THEN
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to install the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system software after a
catastrophic failure which causes complete or partial loss of both FLCs` disk contents.
The software is initially delivered to the customer on a DVD. The software generic has to
be copied from the DVD to an empty USB flash drive. In addition the software can be
downloaded (via a special browser add-on) from the ALED (Alcatel-Lucent web portal) to
a customers computer (file server or PC) for creating a DVD on customer premises.
Afterwards, the USB flash drive is used to transfer and to load the software generic onto
the disk of the FLC.
Safety precautions
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Circuit packs must therefore always be kept in antistatic covers. Use the original
antistatic packaging if possible. Always observe the ESD instructions (see Electrostatic
discharge (p. 1-26)).
To assure both personal safety and the proper functioning of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
product, it is imperative to observe the preceding precautions.
Before you begin
make sure that the most recent database backup is available on a remote file server
(RFS) or Laptop.
Required equipment
PC/Laptop with
PC/Laptop with USB 2.0 interface, sftp capabilities and a web-browser, connected to
the F/.DBG connector on main shelf via LAN cable
Java 1.6.0_31 and above is recommended.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Technical requirements
The USB flash drive (USB stick) to be used is not part of the Alcatel-Lucent delivery.
Table 18-1
Property
Value
Capacity
4 GB
Interface type
USB 2.0
Formatted with
Alcatel-Lucent successfully tested several types of USB flash drives. For further
information contact your Local Customer Support or the Alcatel-Lucent support team
(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/).
If the USB flash drive is supplied with a smart device, application auto start, or
password protection option, these have to be removed by the operator using the tools
provided by the USB flash drive vendor before it can be used for the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS software. The USB flash drive used must be empty before the software load is
copied to it.
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power up the PC and log into Windows . If you are already logged in, close any open
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Copy the NE software from the DVD to the USB flash drive.
To do this, proceed as follows.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS DVD with the new NE software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the USB flash drive into a free USB plug of the PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Windows Explorer , right-click the DVD-ROM drive of your computer and select
Explore.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the complete directories and the files in the root directory of the DVD (i.e.
1830PSS.DSC, release.info, TRANS.TBL) and copy them to the USB flash drive.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Copying filesmessage will disappear when the file transfer is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the USB driver software you are using requires you to stop the USB flash drive before
ejecting it, stop the USB flash drive now.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Eject the USB flash drive from the USB plug of the PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Depending which FLC is plugged in, the procedure has to be continued as follows
If
then
no FLC is plugged in
plug in the first FLC (at slot 73), (at slot 23),
and continue with the next step.
insert second FLC (at slot 75), (at slot 40), and
leave open both latches only and continue with
the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Insert the USB flash drive containing the system software into the USB plug of the FLC
located at worker slot (slot number 23). Please observe ESD instructions.
Insert the USB flash drive containing the system software into the USB plug of the FLC
located at worker slot (slot number 73). Please observe ESD instructions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Press the reset button R on the FLC (This will initiate a hard reset of the FLC)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
on the FLC and hold it until the LED STAT is flashing green
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The progress of the initial SW installation from the USB flash drive is
indicated by the LED STAT on the FLC. The LED STAT lits until the FLC has booted
the release software with the default name FLCHCA and the default IP address
18.70.1.3.
After approx. 30 minutes the SW installation has finished and the FLC is ready
(indicates to be in active state) when both, the STAT and the EPS LEDs display
Green color.
After the FLC has booted the release software, a TL1 and/or http connection can be
established on the CIT interface via a point-to-point connection with a PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
After installing the NE software you have to perform a database restore. Therefore
proceed with the following procedures as needed:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
After successful database restore, close both latches of the standby FLC, await FLC
replacement procedure to finish.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to perform the actual switch over from the current release to the new
release.
Important! Initializing the Network Element New will cause traffic impact if new I/O
card firmware is activated.
Related TL1 commands
INIT-SYS-NEW
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to switch back from the current release and database to previous
release.
Important! Initializing the Network Element Old will cause traffic impact if old I/O
card firmware is activated.
Related TL1 commands
INIT-SYS-OLD
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In case of active GMRE application, set all NNI physical connections of this node to link
maintenance state "Disabled" using OMS.
Note: This step needs to be executed after the Initialize NE Old has been completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
INITNC
NOSTAIP
INITOIP
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to make the current release software the permanent active software.
It effectively prevents reversion to a previous release.
Related TL1 commands
RMV-ISU-OLD
Required equipment
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
are set to indicate that the current release is now the permanently active one. The
system remains in service on the currently active release and all system functionality
remains operational.
Note: In case of active GMRE application, set all NNI physical connections of this
node to link maintenance state "Disabled" using OMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
INITNC
NOSTAIP
RMVOIP
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The WebUI supports the steps of an upgrade to a later release (load, activate) and any
steps needed during installation (commit), or a back out or downgrade from a newer
release.
The following actions can be performed via the WebUI with respect to a software
upgrade:
Audit
Download
Activate
Commit
Revert
Contents
Procedure 18-7: Software upgrade procedure
18-25
18-27
Software Upgrade
18-28
18-31
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Software > FTP Server. Enter the FTP Server
settings.
Note: PM and log (event log, security log, etc.) information will be lost as a result of
the system restart that occurs during software release upgrade. This information
should be retrieved if you would like to retain it for your records.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the folder name containing the NE software in the Release Directory. Select Audit
for the Action Type and click Apply.
Note: If this is a software downgrade, check the Force Upgrade box. This field can
only be chosen after Audit has been selected for the Action Type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: When Activate is requested as part of the software upgrade process, the WebUI
displays a warning message to the user, indicating that activating the software will
cause the NE to reboot. As a result, the WebUI will lose connectivity with the NE and
the user must login after activate is complete. The user will be allowed to continue
with the Activate request or cancel.
Result: The NE will reboot and the WebUI connection will drop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait about 2 minutes after the fan speed drops back down to normal speed and log back
into the NE.
Note: 1830 PSS-32/PSS-16/PSS-32S supports the ability to control fan speed via the
WebUI. When the Fan module is selected in the WebUI equipment tree, the fan speed
can be set to the following values:
Verify the Software Status now indicates Completed, and verify the Result is
Success. Check the alarms on the system and make sure traffic is still unaffected.
Note: This is the last point where a software back out can be performed. After this a
downgrade procedure is required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
performed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Generate commissioning files via 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide,
then use 1830 PSS Commissioning and Power Balancing Tool User Guide to provision
the impairments and transfer the feasibility file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value/Format
Additional Info
Protocol
FTP
SFTP
Server IP
<IP address>
Root Directory
<0-255 chars>
User ID
<0-32 chars>
Password
<0-32 chars>
Confirm Password
<0-32 chars>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Software Upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Upgrade
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Release Directory
<0-255 chars>
Force Upgrade
(checkbox)
Backup
(checkbox)
Activate
Audit Settings
Software Status
Action
Audit
Auto Install
Auto Upgrade
Card Activate
Card Load
Commit
Download
No Action
Revert
Unknown
Status
Complete
In Progress
Failed
None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Software Upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Value/Format
Additional Info
Percent Complete
<0-100>
Result
<0-255 chars>
FTP Server IP
<IP address>
<0-255 chars>
Release Directory
<0-255 chars>
Active Release
<0-20 chars>
Working Release
<0-20 chars>
Committed Release
<0-20 chars>
Yes
No
Action
Audit
Download
Activate
Commit
Revert
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Software Upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute
Abort
Value/Format
Additional Info
Request to cancel a software
upgrade action.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to modify and view the software NE attributes.
Before you begin
The following procedure is available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to the
NE and logs into the system (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI (p. 20-42)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
18-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
19
Routine procedures
19
Overview
Purpose
19-2
19-3
19-6
19-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes periodic activities for maintaining OCS parts of the system.
Contents
Procedure 19-1: Replace the dust filter
19-3
19-6
19-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure illustrates the dust filter replacement in the PSS-64 subrack. For
a replacement of the dust filter in the PSS-36 subrack, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
Installation and System Turn-Up Guide for the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 - Air filter
installation and replacement.
Use this procedure to replace the dust filter
Dust filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Instructions
Remove the subrack cover plate of the dust filter carrier (A).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On the replacement filter check that the protective adhesive film has been removed from
the wire mesh.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the replacing wire mesh dust filter into the carrier.
Observe that the foam is covered by the wire mesh and foam is correctly placed beneath
the wire mesh. Observe correct orientation and assembly as shown in the following
picture.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the dust filter carrier beneath the fan into the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to replace the Fan Unit (FAN3T8) or in case of initial installation (then
start on Step 3).
Recommended tools
The following figure illustrates the position of the fan units in the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-64 subrack (slots 92 and 93) as an example..
Figure 19-1 Fan Unit positions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
During the fan unit replacement in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack, cooling air
for the subrack is supplied only by one fan unit. Therefore only one fan unit can be
exchanged at once. Due to the heat capacities involved, the system can sustain this
condition for a short period of time. The target for the fan unit replacement is 2 minutes. 5
minutes can be used as long as the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 C (104 F).
During the fan unit replacement in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack, the only fan
unit supplying cooling air for the subrack is removed. Therefore, the fan unit should never
be removed for more than 2 minutes.
Before you begin
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS subracks and the related cabling are designed to make it
possible to exchange the fan unit within less than 2 minutes because the running system
can not be operated longer without getting damaged. Of course preparation time and
re-installation time (for loosening/fixing screws of the fan unit) are not included in these 2
minutes.
Unpack the new fan unit and check installation materials.
Note: The following information is provided in case of maintenance and repair. For
initial installation proceed with Step 3.
(Some figs. may refer to preceding figures but are still valid as reference from the
location and function perspective.)
Instructions
NOTICE
Equipment damage hazard
Replacing both fan units at the same time can lead to overheating and cause serious
equipment damage.
Always replace only one fan unit at a time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the fan unit to be replaced. In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-64 subrack it is
located in slot 92 at the top part or slot 93 at the bottom part as depicted before.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the fan unit to be replaced. In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack, it is
located in slot 41.
Figure 19-2 Fan Unit fixing screws
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Hot-surface hazard
Hot surfaces of system components can cause burns to the hands.
Do not touch system components that are marked with the hot surfaces warning label.
Uninstall the Fan Unit to be replaced by loosening the marked screws (see previous
image), open the slide latches at the Fan Unit (details see Correct operations for card
extraction (p. 19-13)) and pull out the unit using the slide latches as shown.
Note: Do not use any tools to pull out the Fan Unit.
Note: Do not detach finger guards positioned above the fans after extraction.
Figure 19-3 Fan Unit extraction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Pinch hazard
Your fingers can be pinched when sliding in the fan unit.
Do not place your fingers on top of the fan unit when sliding it into the subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Slide in the new Fan Unit and push it carefully using the slide latches.
Figure 19-4 Fan Unit insertion
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Fan Unit must be pushed against the gasket to allow proper screw to thread
positioning.
Note: Do not use any tools to push the Fan Unit.
Fix the inserted Fan Unit using the marked screws.
Figure 19-5 Fan Unit fastening
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
handle all the circuit packs with care, especially the fairly heavy Matrix card
visually check that the connector blocks of circuit packs and NE backplanes are
undamaged
do not insert a circuit pack in the case of a damaged connector block!
Fan Unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the latches prior to the plug-in of the unit (see (A) and (B) on fig. following).
Figure 19-6 Correct insert operations
Slide
latches
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To mate the plastic body of the connectors push on the front panel, balancing the strain
without push on the latches (see (C) on preceding fig.).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Close the first latch. (see (D) on preceding fig.) and follow next step at the same time.
Result: After the first latch is closed:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
I/O cards:
The SLC on the active MTX first checks whether the I/O card can be powered or
not (e.g. due to provisioning constraints). Only if there are none the 48 V supply
voltage for the I/O card is switched on by the SLC.
Note: The 48 V supply voltage will only be switched-on automatically for controller
cards (which get also automatically provisioned).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fix the unit to the subrack by means of screws (if applicable), before to insert another
unit.
Note: For some cards are designed with self-locking latches (for example,
10XANY10G, 24XANYMR, 2XANY40G, and their substituting blank front plate) no
fasting screws are applied.
Note: For blank front plates that are designed without latches fasten screws in any
case after insertion.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NO
NO
NO
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: Some cards will need unscrewing them from the subrack first by means of
screws.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the first latch. Shift the latch according to the figure, see (A). Act on the latch
opening gently as shown on (B) in the figure.
Figure 19-8 Slide latch usage
Note: Not shifting the slide will damage either the latch or the locking mechanism of
the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: If the first latch is opened on card without graceful shutdown support:
Condition INTLANFAIL raised and OOS for the card after validation time (no
secondary voltages anymore)
48 V supply voltage of the card is still present.
Service voltage of the card still present.
After successful shutdown the 48 V power supply is switched off
After successful shutdown the CARD STATUS LED changes to off, based on HW
consequent action. (No restart after 15 min.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open the second latch. Shift the latch according to the figure, see (A). Act on the latch
opening gently as shown on (B) in the figure.
Note: Not shifting the slide will damage either the latch or the locking mechanism of
the card.
Result: If the second latch is opened on card without graceful shutdown support:
Service voltage from the backplane still present. Latch state can still be evaluated.
CARD STATUS LED changed to permanent RED, based on HW consequent
action.
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condition INTLANFAIL raised and OOS for the card after validation time, if not
already performed by step 1.
Service voltage from the backplane still present. Latch state can still be evaluated.
Important! For the FLC, it may happen that a graceful shutdown is not possible. In
that case the FLC is stopped immediately after the first latch has been opened, no
LED indications and no "Latch open" alarming takes place. The FLC can be removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Condition LATCHOPEN cleared after validation time, as the Latch state can not be
evaluated anymore.
Condition IMPROPRMVL raised after validation time.
other standing conditions for this card cleared after validation time.
But due to the fact that 48 V supply is switched off other functionalities do not
work anymore. This can result in equipment defects of the card (for example,
dHWFail or dTransmHW)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
Maintaining OCS parts of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If an FLC is currently in the phase of graceful shutdown (power still on), then this
FLC restarts at the end of the shutdown if both latches are closed at that time (no
power off to take place).
If an FLC has been shutdown its power at the end of the graceful shutdown
period, then this FLC starts up again upon closure of that single-opened latch.
Note: For all cards that are designed without latches (for example, blank front plates,
BT3T8 and BTC3T8) use relating handle to pull for extraction, after loosening the
screws.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Routine procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
19-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
20
Supporting procedures
20
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the installation procedures of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) and WebUI application software on a PC
and to give basic operating instructions.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC application has a graphical user interface (GUI)
allowing the user to interact with the NE through visual and graphical elements along
with text navigation representing the information and actions available to the user.
Compared to the Command Line Interface (CLI) which required numerous commands to
be typed on the keyboard, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC application allows greater
efficiency and ease of use through its GUI.
The web user interface (WebUI) provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 6.0.0 the WebUI interface is started from within the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC for managing the WDM application of the NE.
Depending on the configuration of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system either the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC or the WebUI is to be used.
If the system is a mixed application the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC is to be used.
For configuring WDM specific parts the WebUI is to be used.
If the system is a OCS only application the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC is to be
used (see The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
(p. 20-3)).
Contents
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC)
20-3
General information
20-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-6
Navigation pane
20-8
Toolbar
20-10
Context menu
20-11
Property window
20-12
20-13
20-14
20-15
Tool tip
20-16
20-17
Common Commands
20-18
Search function
20-19
Go To menu
20-21
View menu
20-22
20-23
20-24
Concepts for connecting the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC) to the NE
20-25
20-26
20-27
Procedure 20-2: Call up the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
20-37
Procedure 20-3: Logout from Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
20-41
20-42
20-43
20-45
20-46
20-48
20-49
20-51
20-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes the basic functions of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC .
Relationship between Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC and the WebUI
The Navigation Pane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Management Window allows
the user to navigate through the NE equipment in a hierarchical fashion from the system
level down to the port level and select a single entity from the hierarchy. The navigation
panel provides the equipment selection mechanism for all the NE management functions
supported. The selection on the NE Equipment Tree is always in sync with the
information displayed in the display pane.
If WDM application is to be handled you have to simple click on the WDM tab on top of
the frame. Then the WebUI is opened in the ZIC browser.
Note: Once opened all WebUI functions are available.
Relationship between Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC and TL1
20-5
20-6
Navigation pane
20-8
Toolbar
20-10
Context menu
20-11
Property window
20-12
20-13
20-14
20-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tool tip
20-16
20-17
Common Commands
20-18
Search function
20-19
Go To menu
20-21
View menu
20-22
20-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
General information
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General information
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) is a web interface
embedded in the NE software. As it does not require any special installation, it is called
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC), or short Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS ZIC because it is especially used to configure NE units.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC runs as a Java Application, which requires as a
prerequisite a Java runtime environment to be installed on the ZIC host. The Java
Application is loaded from the NE via https requests.
The Java version running on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC PC must be Java
version 1.6.0_31 or higher. You can verify the used version using http://www.java.com/
verify/.
For the User Assistance functionality of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation
Craft Terminal (ZIC) application a weblication is used that displays information in
HTML. Therefore the off-the-shelf browsers Mozilla Firefox, Version 3 (or newer) or
Internet Explorer 7.0 (or newer) are recommended. It is recommended only to use the 32
bit versions of the browsers. The browser to be used must be set the default browser on
the personal computer on which the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC) is running.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-5
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC management window
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The components of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Management window are the
following (see Figure 20-1, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC Management Window
(p. 20-7)):
Title Bar
Shows the name of the NE for which the console has been launched.
Tool Bar
Provides navigation buttons that are always available. See Toolbar (p. 20-10).
Navigation Pane
Displays the navigation tree and node configurations. See Navigation pane
(p. 20-8).
Display Pane
Displays the contents of the node selected in the Navigation Pane in either Details
View or Graphical View. In Details View, click a column heading to sort data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-6
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC management window
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Title Bar
Display Pane
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-7
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Navigation pane
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation pane
Navigation tree
The Navigation Tree in the Navigation Pane displays all domains and nodes supported by
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC for the selected NE. Next to each node is a folder icon, or
an alarm icon, or both.
Domains
Domains are top-level entities. The following domains are available at the first-level of
the Navigation Tree: Equipment, Facilities, Protection, Cross-Connection, and System.
Each domain contains at least one node.
Nodes
Nodes are parts of a domain. In the Navigation Tree, nodes are indicated by folders that
begin at the second level and branch out into deeper detail. Some nodes contain other
nodes. For example, the NE Security folder in the System domain may contain a Users
folder to perform general user account tasks, and a User Instances folder to manage
specific user accounts.
Folder icon
Indicates that more information is available inside the node. Click the folder icon to open
a folder (expand) or close a folder (collapse).
Alarm icon
Indicates the highest-level alarm among all of the contents of the node.
Alarm icons are colored balls with a letter indicating the highest-level alarm.
Four alarm icons are defined as follows:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Navigation pane
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Primary State icons are colored balls indicating the primary state of the entity.
Three primary state icons are defined as follows:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Toolbar
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar
The tool bar provides push-button access to common menu options.
Home
Click the Home button to move to the top level in the Navigation Tree in the Navigation
Pane.
Parent
Click the Go To Parent button to move up one level in the Navigation Tree in the
Navigation Pane.
Back
Click the Go Forward button to move to the next location visited. This button is available
only if used in conjunction with the Go Backward button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Context menu
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Context menu
A context menu is a list of command shortcuts that changes based on the actions available
for the selected entity. Context menus are available from the Navigation Tree, Display
Pane, inside tables, and other parts of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC. Context menus
are accessed by right-clicking the selected entity.
If multiple entities are selected, only the actions valid for all selected entities are shown.
Actions unavailable due to the state of the selected entity are shown in gray. Actions
unavailable due to security access privileges are not shown.
Figure 20-2 Example: Context menu
Context menu
Context submenu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Property window
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Property window
Entity properties are displayed and edited in a property window. Property windows
typically use mutable tables, which contain editable or non-editable text fields, spinners,
or combo boxes.
Click the arrow inside a column heading to sort the column in ascending or descending
order. In some cases, click the drop-down arrow inside a cell to launch a browser. The
first cell of a mutable table typically contains the AID of the entity and its alarm status.
A red triangle at the top, left corner of a cell indicates that a change has been made. If the
value of the cell is changed back to its original value, the red triangle is removed. All red
triangles in a table are removed when the Apply button at the bottom of the property
window is clicked. A red plus sign at the top, left corner of a cell indicates that a conflict
exists. The red plus sign is removed when the conflict is resolved.
Figure 20-3 Example: Properties window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-12
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Configurable dialog box
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If an error occurs and the dialog box is relaunched, it opens with the values that were
previously entered. This data is available only for the relaunched session. Data is not
saved and is not available if a user logs out, then logs back into the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Response Dialog Box
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The data displayed in this table is static and cannot be changed directly. Click Send to
refresh information.
If any parameters can be modified or deleted, a Modify or Delete button will be displayed
at the bottom of the table. Select a single row, then click the Modify or Delete button to
launch a separate dialog box. Click Send again to update the information when the
modify or delete is complete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Confirmation Dialog Box
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Tool tip
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tool tip
To display a tool tip, place the cursor over any part of the Navigation Pane or inside
views, tables, and dialog boxes in the Display Pane.
Figure 20-7 Example: Tool tip
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-16
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Error dialog box
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Common Commands
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Common Commands
Purpose
The following commands are common to most domains through the Main Menu Bar or
Context Menus.
Open
The Open menu option displays contents of the selected node. In the Navigation Tree,
click the key symbol to the left of the node. In the Display Pane, double-click a folder.
Open in New Window
The Open in New Window menu option opens a new ALMC window with the selected
node in the Navigation Pane and its contents in the Display Pane.
Refresh
The Refresh menu option verifies that displayed data is the same as the data on the NE.
The Refresh command performs the following:
All attributes for the selected node are re-retrieved from the NE.
The contents of the selected node are re-retrieved. Contents that are unavailable on the
NE are removed, and new contents are added.
General
The General menu option launches a properties window that displays general properties
of the current selection.
Figure 20-9 Example: General properties window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-18
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Search function
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Search function
The search function is available from many node drop-down menus. Search can be used
to quickly find specific boards or facilities. The search function looks for matches based
upon a selected criteria, starting from the currently selected folder and sub-folders
Figure 20-10 Example: Search command
The following criteria are available for the search function in the Equipment Management
domain (see Figure 20-11, Example: Search dialog (p. 20-20)):
NE AID
Part Number
Serial Number
The following criteria are available for the search function in the Facility Management
domain:
NE AID
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-19
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Search function
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EMA AID searches for an object based on the AID as presented in the EMA while an NE
AID searches for an object based on the AID as on the NE. For most equipment and
facilities, these are the same.
A percent sign (%) is a wildcard character that is used to search for multiple matching
entities. If only one match is found, the EMA navigates directly to the matched item. If
multiple matches are found, a table of search results is displayed with the matched items.
See Figure 20-12, Example: Search result (p. 20-20). The wildcard character may not
be used to search on an NE AID.
Figure 20-12 Example: Search result
Double-click a row in the search results table to navigate to the selected equipment or
facility.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Go To menu
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Go To menu
The Go To menu provides fast navigation to the most common functions based on the
current selection.
Figure 20-13 Example: Go to
The Go To command menu provides the following domain navigation short cuts:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
View menu
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View menu
Equipment selected in the navigation tree is displayed in different ways:
An overview of the inventory data of the selected equipment called Inventory view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-22
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Show Alarms menu
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-23
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The purpose of this section is to describe the installation procedures of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) application software on a PC and how to
log into and log out from the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal
(ZIC).
Contents
Concepts for connecting the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC) to the NE
20-25
20-26
20-27
Procedure 20-2: Call up the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
20-37
Procedure 20-3: Logout from Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC)
20-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-24
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The purpose of this section is to describe how the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero
Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) can be connected to an NE and how you can establish a
connection to the NE on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal
(ZIC).
Ways of connecting the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) to a
network element
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) can be connected to
a network element in different ways:
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) (LAN card) is
connected to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS via the CIT port on one of the two FLCs. A
crossover LAN cable (CAT5) with RJ-45 connectors must be used for this connection.
NOTE: The crossing can also be realized by a C5XOVER adapter (female to female).
This adapter works inline with two CAT5 straight cables.
The usage of shielded 100BaseT LAN cables is only allowed if the applicable national
safety requirements have been met by the user. Otherwise, there is a risk of electrical
shock and/or serious injury.
Important! Use a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or
working on a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system, to prevent electrostatic discharge
damage to sensitive components.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) access via TCP/IP
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) can be connected to
NEs via TCP/IP in the following ways:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before accessing the WDM functionality via the ZIC, the following needs to be
provisioned.
1. The Connected Photonic Compound / Partner NE has to be entered on the OCS
compound. This is the IP address of the WDM compound. The converged
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC / WebUI uses this to access the WDM compound. If the
Partner NE is not provisioned on the OCS compound, then the WDM functionality
can only be accessed via the stand-alone WebUI.
How to enter the Connected Photonic Compound / Partner NE on the OCS
compound is described in Procedure 20-1: Initialize the NE using EZ setup tool
(p. 20-27).
2. The user ID and password that is used to access the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC
must also be provisioned on the WDM compound. This could be provisioned via the
stand-alone WebUI (see Procedure 2-25: Create a user (p. 2-93)).
If the User ID/Password is not provisioned on the WDM compound and the Partner
NE is provisioned using the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, then the ZIC displays the
WebUI login screen when trying to access the WDM compound.
When prompted with the WebUI login screen, the user must enter a valid User ID and
password that pertains to the WDM compound (see Procedure 20-4: Log into the
WebUI (p. 20-46)).
Changing Partner NE
the FLC has to be restarted, refer to Procedure 5-25: Initiate a circuit pack reset
(p. 5-117).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or newer is installed on the PC (32 bit versions only).
Internet Explorer 7.0 or newer is installed on the PC (32 bit versions only).
Note: For entering IP address data certain steps require to use dashes - instead of
dots for number separation. (as common IP notation). Compare Step 13 to Step 17,
Step 23, Step 25, and Step 29.
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect your PC to the CIT interface located on the FLC cards using a LAN cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: If a dialog box opens telling that there is a problem with the security
from the 1830 NE, by displaying the certificate. To display the certificate act as
recommended in the Online Help of your used browser.
The self-signed certificate must have the following content:
CN = Alcatel-Lucent
OU = Optics
O = Alcatel-Lucent
L = Nuremberg
S = Germany
C = DE
Thumbprint is: 2e 61 2b 78 c4 0c fb b1 ea 5e df fc 74 f6 9c 11 41 b6 a8 21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-28
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The very first thing to do is to Change the Password. Everything else will fail
otherwise.
Important! If the session is dropped due to 3 minutes idle time after login please
leave Easy Setup by clicking on Home and start Easy Setup again.
The following steps have to be performed using this tool, either sequentially (it is
recommended to follow the wizard in the right order), or, if needed, in single steps:
If you want to
then
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-29
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you want to
then
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the field User Name enter a User Identifier (UID) and the respective Password
Identifier (PID).
You can use your User Identifier (UID) or one of the following predefined user types:
Table 20-1
Default User
USER05
SERVICE
EML001
EML002
Default Password
identifier
ADMIn005
Ansi_4GX
Eml__001
Eml__002
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Current Password text box, then type in the current password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the New Password text box, then type in your new password.
Reference: See Passwords (p. 2-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the cursor in the Confirm New Password text box, then type in your new password
again.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Using the Network Element Region spin box, select the region, either ETSI or ANSI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click Submit.
Result: The Network Element Initialization : Change FLC IP window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
In the field Active FLC IP Address enter the IP address for the active FLC.
Note: The IP address must be entered with - (dashes) as separator between the
segment numbers.
Additional information: {1-99,101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}.
Neither the network nor the host portion of the address (with respect to the value of
the MASK parameter) when viewed in binary format may be all 0s or all 1s.
This address follows the active FLC on each FLC EPS switch.
The factory default is 18-70-1-3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
In the field FLCA IP Address modify the IP address of the left FLC.
Additional information: {1-99,101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}.
Neither the network nor the host portion of the address (with respect to the value of
the MASK parameter) when viewed in binary format may be all 0s or all 1s.
The factory default is 18-70-1-1. This address is always configured on the (front
view) leftmost FLC card (Slot 73 in PSS-64 system, slot 23 in PSS-36 system)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
In the field FLCB IP Address modify the IP address of the right FLC.
Additional information: {1-99,101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}.
Neither the network nor the host portion of the address (with respect to the value of
the MASK parameter) when viewed in binary format may be all 0s or all 1s.
The factory default is 18-70-1-2. This address is always configured on the rightmost
FLC card (Slot 75 in PSS-64 system, slot 40 in PSS-36 system)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
In the field LAN Gateway IP Address: enter the IP address of the Customer LAN default
gateway router (connected to the OAMP LAN).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-31
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internet Protocol address of the gateway router, connected to the OAMP LAN. The
address must be part of the IP subnet configured on the OAMP LAN via the
ACTIVEFLCIP, FLCAIP, FLCBIP, MASK parameters. The address must not be
identical to any of the ACTIVEFLCIP, FLCAIP, FLCBIP addresses. Neither the
network nor the host portion of the address (with respect to the value of the MASK
parameter) when viewed in binary format may be all 0s or all 1s.
The factory default is 0-0-0-0, meaning that no default route is set via the OAMP
LAN. Changing the value back to 0-0-0-0 is equivalent to removing the default route.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
In the field Subnet Mask enter the subnet mask of the network the NE is connected to on
the Customer LAN.
Additional information: {128-255} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-248}
18
Click Submit.
Result: The ZIC Server Logout Page is displayed.
Additional information: After submitting the previous settings (FLC IP addresses
19
You can either return to the main page or logout by clicking on the respective button.
Result: In the Welcome to Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Craft Terminal window the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
21
22
23
The NE loopback address is also used as OSPF Router Id. The address must not be
part of the IP subnet configured on the customer LAN via the ACTIVEFLCIP,
FLCAIP, FLCBIP, MASK parameters. The address must not be identical to the
GMRE IP address.
The factory default is 0-0-0-0. Once changed, this parameter cannot be reset to factory
default.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
Click Submit.
Result: The Network Element Initialization : Change Control Plane IP window is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
In the field GMRE IP Address: enter the IP address of the Control Plane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The address must not be part of the IP subnet configured on the customer LAN via the
ACTIVEFLCIP, FLCAIP, FLCBIP, MASK parameters. The address must not be
identical to the LOOPBACK IP address.
The factory default is 0-0-0-0. Once changed, this parameter cannot be reset to factory
default.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26
Click Submit.
Result: The Network Element Initialization : Create NTP Server window is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27
In the field Server IP enter the network address of the NTP server.
Note: To separate the fields use a hyphen instead of a dot.
Additional info: NTP servers are used for time of day synchronization. You can enter
28
Click Submit.
Result: The Create Partner NE window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29
In the field Connected Photonic Compound / Partner NE: enter the IP Address of the
WDM Partner NE to define to which WDM Partner NE the OCS node belongs.
Additional information: {0-99,101-126,128-223} - {0-255} - {0-255} - {0-255}.
The factory default is 0-0-0-0. The default value is not valid if a photonic shelf is
connected.
The converged ZIC uses this to access the WDM compound. If Partner NE is not
provisioned on the OCS compound, then the WDM functionality can only be accessed
via the stand-alone WebUI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30
Click Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-34
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
31
Click Yes.
Result: The ZIC server application is restarted. All logged-in user sessions will be
closed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32
Using the Main Shelf Type spin box, select the used Shelf Type, either PSS36 or PSS64.
Additional info: When selecting a shelf type the respective matrix capacity will be
defined, too:
for PSS64:
3840 Gb/s
1920 Gb/s
for PSS36:
1920 Gb/s
960 Gb/s
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33
Using the Shelf Position In Rack: spin box, select the used Shelf Position in the rack.
Additional info: Possible values
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34
Click Submit.
Result: The Network Element Initialization : NE Name Init window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35
Place the cursor in the Network Element Name text box, then type in the Network
Element Name (SID).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SID must start with a letter and must end with an alphanumeric character.
Consecutive hyphens (-) are not allowed.
Number of hyphens must not be greater than 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36
Click Submit.
Result: The ZIC Server Logout Page is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use this procedure to call up the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC).
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC software is embedded on the NE.
Required equipment
Table 20-2
CPU
RAM
2 GB
Hard Disk
40 GB
Interface
Display Resolution
1024768
For the User Assistance functionality of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation
Craft Terminal (ZIC) application a weblication is used that displays information in
HTML. Therefore the off-the-shelf browsers Mozilla Firefox, Version 3 (or newer) or
Internet Explorer 7.0 (or newer) are recommended. It is recommended only to use the 32
bit versions of the browsers. The browser to be used must be set the default browser on
the personal computer on which the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft
Terminal (ZIC) is running.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required Java version
The Java version running on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC PC must be Java
version 1.6.0_31 or higher. You can verify the used version using http://www.java.com/
verify/.
Before you begin
The installation program cannot install system files or update shared files if they are in
use by other programs. For this reason you should stop as many Windows applications
as possible, before starting with the installation procedure.
Prior to performing this task, you have to assure that:
you have a temporary certification on secure http (for example, https://). Customers
can get it, following the browser indications.
a fixed IP address has to be set on your PC before. In the same subnet as the NE, but
different from any used IP (the subnet mask as configured using Procedure 20-1:
Initialize the NE using EZ setup tool (p. 20-27)).
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power up the PC and log into Windows 7 / Windows XP . If you are already logged in,
close any open window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect your PC to the DCN (OAMP) interface located on the FLC boards using a LAN
cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: When opening this web page for the first time the following or similar
The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted
certificate authority.
The security certificate presented by this website was issued for a different
website`s address.
In this release the system supports only a self-signed certificate to build up a secure
SSL/HTTPS connection between NE and Client PC.
In a future release the NE will be enhanced, that customer related certificates can be
installed. This avoids the security messages above.
Additional info: You can check if the secure SSL/HTTPS connection is originated
from the 1830 NE, by displaying the certificate. To display the certificate act as
recommended in the Online Help of your used browser.
The self-signed certificate must have the following content:
CN = Alcatel-Lucent
OU = Optics
O = Alcatel-Lucent
L = Nuremberg
S = Germany
C = DE
Thumbprint is: 2e 61 2b 78 c4 0c fb b1 ea 5e df fc 74 f6 9c 11 41 b6 a8 21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-39
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter your User Identifier (UID) and the respective Password Identifier (PID).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK to connect.
Note: If the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC is used with Internet Explorer the
following Security Warning is displayed:
Do you want to view only the weppage content that was
delivered securely?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Many procedures throughout this document require the user log out of the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) GUI. The following procedure describes
how this is accomplished.
Instructions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Zero Installation Craft Terminal (ZIC) main window,
click File Exit.
Result: An confirmation window window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
IF
THEN
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The web user interface (WebUI) provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
For Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 6.0.0 the WebUI interface is started from the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC for managing the WDM application of the NE. But
Depending on the configuration of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS system either the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC or the WebUI is to be used.
Contents
Using the WebUI
20-43
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The web user interface (WebUI) provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
You access the WebUI interface using Internet Explorer running on a computer that is
connected via Ethernet to the NE, either directly or over a LAN.
WebUI hardware requirements
Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows 7 updated to the most recent patch level.
Internet Explorer 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, or 9.0 updated to the most recent patch level
or
Firefox 15
Note: The following functionality is not supported with the Firefox browser:
Power Commissioning page
Export to Excel
Show in separate window
J2SE Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 5.0 or later. The supported version for
the NE software version you are running is included on the NE software CD-ROM.
The Equipment Tree allows the user to navigate through the NE equipment in a
hierarchical fashion from the system level down to the port level and select a single entity
from the hierarchy. The NE Equipment Tree provides the equipment selection mechanism
for all the NE management functions supported. The selection on the NE Equipment Tree
is always in sync with the information displayed in the Display Panel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-43
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the plus sign (+) next to the piece of equipment to expand the tree.
Click on the minus sign (-) next to a piece of equipment to collapse the tree.
Click on a piece of equipment to select it.
Figure 20-15, Equipment tree hierarchy (p. 20-44) depicts the equipment tree hierarchy:
Figure 20-15 Equipment tree hierarchy
The user will traverse the hierarchy and select a specific equipment to access the
functions supported by that equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-44
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The purpose of this section is to describe basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI
procedures
Contents
Procedure 20-4: Log into the WebUI
20-46
20-48
20-49
20-51
20-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-45
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
then
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If you are logging into the NE for the first time (that is, the NE has not yet been
provisioned), see Instructions (p. 20-49)
When a user connects to an NE after the initial NE configuration, the WebUI displays
a window where the user can enter their User ID and Password and submit the login
request.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the password associated with the User ID in the Password: field. The characters you
enter for the password are not displayed.
Note: Passwords are case sensitive. If you experience difficulty logging in, verify that
the Caps Lock key is off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-46
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-47
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-48
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When connecting to an NE for the first time, connect the Ethernet cable (RJ45) from the
PC to the EC CIT port on the NE and type in the default IP address of 172.16.0.1 in order
to connect to the NE.
Result: A window is displayed where the user can enter their User ID and Password
Enter the password associated with the User ID in the Password: field. The characters you
enter for the password are not displayed.
Note: Passwords are case sensitive. If you experience difficulty logging in, verify that
the Caps Lock key is off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the login is successful, the WebUI displays a message indicating that the database needs
to be initialized. The user will be given 2 options:
OK upon selection, the WebUI sends a request to the NE to initialize the database.
database is invalid.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-49
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the user logs into the NE after database initialization, the WebUI prompts the user
to enter NE information (NE Name). Enter and submit this information.
Result: The WebUI sends the data to the NE resulting in another NE reboot. The NE
and WebUI are now ready for normal operation. The WebUI will automatically
reconnect to the NE when it is available.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-50
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-51
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Supporting procedures
Basic Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS WebUI procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
20-52
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Numerics
16FS
ABN
Abnormal (condition)
ABS (Absent)
A received trace identifier is considered accepted if the same trace identifier value has been
received at least three times in sequence.
ACO (Alarm Cut-Off)
A button on the user panel used to clear the network element alarm indicators (LEDs on the active
FLC, rack top lamp interface, the remote alarms interface).
ACT (Active)
Used to indicate that a circuit pack or module is in-service and currently providing service
functions.
ACT
Mode of operation of a port in which tributaries are not explicitly provisioned for the expected
signal rates. The signal rates are automatically identified.
AEL
Performs operations on managed objects and issues events on behalf of these managed objects.
All SDH managed objects will support at least an agent. Control of distant agents is possible via
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
local Managers.
AGNE
Adapted Information
AID (Access Identifier)
A technical specification for explicitly naming entities (both physical and logical) of an NE using
a grammar comprised of ASCII text, keywords, and grammar rules.
AINS (Automatic In-Service)
One possible state of a port or slot. When a port is in the AINS state and a good signal is detected,
the port automatically enters the IS (in-service) state. When a port or slot is in the AINS state and
a circuit pack is detected, the slot/port automatically enters the IS state. The important things
about AINS state is that alarms are suppressed. Absence of the circuit pack is not alarmed.
Absence of a signal is not alarmed on the port.
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
A code transmitted downstream in a digital network that indicates that an upstream failure has
been detected and alarmed if the upstream alarm has not been suppressed.
Alarm
An alarm is a human observable alerting indication, for example visually, to a condition that may
have immediate or potential negative impact on the state of the monitoring network element.
Alarm Correlation
The search for a directly-reported alarm that can account for a given symptomatic condition.
Alarm Severity
An attribute defining the priority of the alarm message. The way alarms are processed depends on
the severity.
Alarm Suppression
Selective removal of alarm messages from being forwarded to the GUI or to network management
layer OSs.
AMCC
A line code that employs a ternary signal to convert binary digits, in which successive binary ones
are represented by signal elements that are normally of alternative positive and negative polarity
but equal in amplitude and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements that have
zero amplitude.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-2
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMP
Gathering together of payload data with overhead and pointer information (an indication of the
direction of the signal).
Association
A logical connection between manager and agent through which management information can be
exchanged.
ASTN
Administrative Unit
Autolock
Action taken by the system in the event of circuit pack failure/trouble. System switches to
protection and prevents a return to the working circuit pack even if the trouble clears. Multiple
protection switches on a circuit pack during a short period of time cause the system to autolock
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the pack.
Autonomous Message
A message transmitted from the controlled Network Element to a management system which was
not a response to a management system originated command.
AVAIL
Available
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bandwidth
The difference in Hz between the highest and lowest frequencies in a transmission channel. The
data rate that can be carried by a given communications circuit.
Baud Rate
The ratio of error bits received to the total number of bits transmitted.
BI
Backward Indication
BIAE
A transmission path consisting of two fibers that handle traffic in both the transmit and receive
directions.
Bidirectional Switch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-4
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The setting up of a cross-connection leg with the same input tributary as that of an existing
cross-connection leg. Thus, forming a 1:2 bridge from an input tributary to two output tributaries.
Broadband Communications
STM-1 concatenation transport over the 1675 LambdaUnite MSS for ATM applications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Container
CAUI
Control Block
CBR
A digital circuit where no framing or control bits are required, thus making the full bandwidth
available for communications.
CC (Cross-connection)
Path-level connections between input and output tributaries or specific ports within a single NE.
Cross-connections are made in a consistent way even though there are various types of ports and
various types of port protection. Cross-connections are re-configurable interconnections between
tributaries of transmission interfaces.
CFP (C form-factor pluggable)
A CFP is a pluggable optical module with either 40 or 100 Gb/s transmission rate. The CFP layout
has been standardized by a consortium of leading suppliers of telecommunications equipment.
Channel
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CI
Characteristic Information
Circuit
A set of transmission channels through one or more network elements that provides transmission
of signals between two points, to support a single communications path.
CISPR
Clear
CLEI code
Subsystem that configures the network and processes messages from the network.
Cm
Connection Monitoring
CMEP
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CMOH
A hardware configuration where two applications can be active at the same time independently on
the same hardware and software platform without interfering with each others functioning.
Collocated
A procedure whereby multiple virtual containers are associated one with each other resulting in a
combined capacity that can be used as a single container across which bit sequence integrity is
maintained.
Correlation
IP routing performed by an NE for RSVP notify messages, and for management traffic. OSPF is
used as routing protocol. A CPR domain contains NEs and Network Operation Centers (NOCs).
CPR domains can be decoupled from IP routing in the operator's DCN, by setting up IP-in-IP
tunnels between NEs attached to the Out-of-band DCN, and NOCs.
CPRI
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Client Specific
CSF
Cyclic redundancy checking is a widespread error detection method based on parity bit
calculations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DAPI
A databearer represents a physical link connection between two nodes in the transport plane.
DCE (Data Communications Equipment)
The equipment that provides signal conversion and coding between the data terminating
equipment (DTE) and the line. The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of the
DTE or of intermediate equipment. A DCE may perform other functions usually performed at the
network end of the line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-8
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCF
A device used to compensate the dispersion, the pulse spreading properties of an optical fiber.
DCMs are necessary for very-long-haul applications and high bit rates.
DCN
An operation or value that the system or application assumes, unless a user makes an explicit
choice.
Default Provisioning
The parameter values that are pre-programmed as shipped from the factory.
Defect
A limited interruption of the ability of an item to perform a required function. It may or may not
lead to maintenance action depending on the results of additional analysis.
Demultiplexing
A process applied to a multiplexed signal for recovering signals combined within it and for
restoring the distinct individual channels of these signals.
DEMUX (Demultiplexer)
A device that splits a combined signal into individual signals at the receiver end of transmission.
Deprovisioning
The inverse order of provisioning. To manually remove/delete a parameter that has (or parameters
that have) previously been provisioned.
Digital Multiplexer
Equipment that combines by time-division multiplexing several digital signals into a single
composite digital signal.
Digital Section
A transmission span such as an STM-N signal. A digital section may contain multiple digital
channels.
Disassembly
Splitting up a signal into its constituents as payload data and overhead (an indication of the
direction of a signal).
Dispersion
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-9
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When there is unequal amplification of incoming wavelengths, the result is a power divergence
between wavelengths.
DMp
A topology in which two rings are interconnected at two nodes on each ring and operate so that
inter-ring traffic is not lost in the event of a node or link failure at an interconnecting point.
DNU
Do Not Use
Doping
At or towards the destination of the considered transmission stream, for example, looking in the
same direction of transmission.
DPR
A circuit configuration that provides redundant signal appearances at the outputs of two network
elements in a ring. Can be used for Dual Node Ring Interworking (DNI) and for video distribution
applications.
DS1
The equipment that originates data for transmission and accepts transmitted data.
DWDM (Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing)
Transmitting two or more signals of different wavelengths simultaneously over a single fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-10
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EBCN
Equipment Controller
ECC
A trade association of the electronic industry that establishes electrical and functional standards.
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cables passing
through the fields.
EMS
A specific piece of hardware (usually a circuit pack, slot, or module) that has been assigned a
name recognized by the system.
Entity Identifier
The name used by the system to refer to a circuit pack, memory device, or communications link.
EOS
End of Sequence
ES (Errored Seconds)
A performance monitoring parameter. ES type A is a second with exactly one error; ES type
B is a second with more than one and less than the number of errors in a severely errored second
for the given signal. ES by itself means the sum of the type A and type B ESs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-11
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ESNCP
Electrostatic Protection
Establish
A user-initiated command, at the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, to create an entity and its
associated attributes in the absence of certain hardware.
ETR
A significant change. Events in controlled Network Elements include signal failures, equipment
failures, signals exceeding thresholds, and protection switch activity. When an event occurs in a
controlled Network Element, the controlled Network Element will generate an alarm or status
message and send it to the management system.
Event Driven
A required characteristic of network element software system: NEs are reactive systems, primarily
viewed as systems that wait for and then handle events. Events are provided by the external
interface packages, the hardware resource packages, and also by the software itself.
EXP
Experimental
Externally Timed
An operating condition of a clock in which it is locked to an external reference and is using time
constants that are altered to quickly bring the local oscillators frequency into approximate
agreement with the synchronization reference frequency.
ExTI
Unprotected traffic that is carried over protection channels when their capacity is not used for the
protection of working traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FAS
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FAS
Term used when a circuit pack or signal has a hard (not temporary) fault and cannot perform its
normal function. For signals the fault may be temporary.
Fault Management
Flag Continuation
FCC
The Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health.
FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface)
Fiber interface that connects computers and distributes data among them.
FDI
Any other network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user is at or
working on. Also called remote.
FEBE (Far-End Block Error)
An indication returned to the transmitting node that an errored block has been detected at the
receiving node. A block is a specified grouping of bits.
FEC (Forward Error Correction)
An error correction technique in which redundant bits are added to the payload signal enabling the
receiving station to detect and correct bit errors that unavoidably occur when an optical line signal
is transmitted over longer distances over an optical fiber. FEC is used to increase the transmission
span length.
FEPROM (Flash EPROM)
A technology that combines the non-volatility of EPROM with the in-circuit re-programmability
of EEPROM.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-13
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An indication returned to a transmitting Network Element that the receiving Network Element has
detected an incoming section failure. Also known as RDI.
FIT (Failures in Time)
Circuit pack failure rates per 109 hours as calculated using the method described in Reliability
Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment, BellCore Method I, Issue 6, December 1997.
Fixed-rate tributary operation of a port
Mode of operation of a port in which tributaries are provisioned for the expected signal rates. This
provisioning information is used for cross-connection rate validation and for alarm handling (for
example Loss of Pointer).
FLC
First-Level Controller
Folded Rings
Folded (collapsed) rings are rings without fiber diversity. The terminology derives from the image
of folding a ring into a linear segment.
Forced
Term used when a circuit pack (either working or protection) has been locked into a
service-providing state by user command.
FPS
A form of packet switching that relies on high-quality phone lines to minimize errors. It is very
good at handling high-speed, bursty data over wide area networks. The frames are variable
lengths and error checking is done at the end points.
Frame
An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an internal
synchronization reference and is using no storage techniques to sustain its accuracy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GCC
Group Identification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-14
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Corresponds to the time to wait before switching back to the timing reference. It occurs after a
timing link failure has cleared. This time applies for all timing sources in a system hence the name
global. This can be between 0 and 60 minutes, in increments of one minute.
GMP
A protocol suite (defined by IETF) that extends the label switching paradigm introduced in MPLS
to include both packet-switched and circuit-switched networks and that provides the distributed
intelligence required to build efficient and resilient multi-layer networks.
GMRE
A network element that passes information between other network elements and management
systems through a data communication network.
GPON
Hard Failure
Higher Order
Holdover
An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an external
reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to the last known
frequency comparison with a synchronization reference.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-15
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hot Standby
A circuit pack ready for fast, automatic placement into operation to replace an active circuit pack.
It has the same signal as the service going through it, so that choice is all that is required.
HPCFAP
I/O
Input/Output
IaDI
Intra-Domain Interface
IAE
Identifier
IEC
To physically insert a circuit pack into a slot, thus causing a system initiated restore of an entity
into service and/or creation of an entity and associated attributes.
Interface Capacity
The total number of STM-1 equivalents (bidirectional) tributaries in all transmission interfaces
with which a given transmission interface subrack can be equipped at one time. The interface
capacity varies with equipage.
Intermediate System (IS)
Internet Protocol
IPCP (IP Control Protocol)
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IPL
Inter-processor link
IrDI
Inter-Domain Interface
IS (In-Service)
A memory administrative state for ports. IS refers to a port that is fully monitored and alarmed.
ISDN
JC
Justification Control
Jitter
Short term variations of amplitude and frequency components of a digital signal from their ideal
position in time.
JOH
Justification Overhead
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A communications network that covers a limited geographic area, is privately owned and user
administered, is mostly used for internal transfer of information within a business, is normally
contained within a single building or adjacent group of buildings, and transmits data at a very
rapid speed.
LBC
An attenuating (signal-reducing) element used to keep an optical output signal strength within
desired limits.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-17
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LC
Lucent Connector (also called Little Connector or Local Connector an optical fiber
connector type according to IEC 61754-20 using a ferrule diameter of 1.25 mm.
LCAS
Light-Emitting Diode
LF
Local Fault
LH
Long Haul
Line
A transmission medium, together with the associated equipment, required to provide the means of
transporting information between two consecutive network elements. One network element
originates the line signal; the other terminates it.
Line Protection
The optical interfaces can be protected by line protection. Line protection switching protects
against failures of line facilities, including the interfaces at both ends of a line, the optical fibers,
and any equipment between the two ends. Line protection includes protection of equipment
failures.
Line Timing
Refers to a network element that derives its timing from an incoming STM-N signal.
Link
The mapping between in-ports and out-ports. It specifies how components are connected to one
another.
LLM
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LMP
Lower Order
Location
An identifier for a specific circuit pack, interface module, interface port, or communications link.
Lockout of Protection
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC command that prevents the system from switching traffic to
the protection line from a working line. If the protection line is active when a Lockout of
Protection is entered this command causes the working line to be selected. The protection line
is then locked from any Automatic, Manual, or Forced protection switches.
Lockout State
The Lockout State is defined for each working or protection circuit pack. The two permitted states
are: None meaning no lockout is set for the circuit pack, set meaning the circuit pack has been
locked out. The values (None & Set) are taken independently for each working or protection
circuit pack.
LOF (Loss of Frame)
Loss of Multiframe
Loop Timing
A special case of line timing. It applies to network elements that have only one STM-N/OC-N
interface. For example, terminating nodes in a linear network are loop timed.
Loopback
Type of diagnostic test used to compare an original transmitted signal with the resulting received
signal. A loopback is established when the received optical or electrical external transmission
signal is sent from a port or tributary input directly back toward the output.
LOP (Loss of Pointer)
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
LSB
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE
MAF
Capable of issuing network management operations and receiving events. The manager
communicates with the agent in the controlled network element.
Manual Switch State
A protection group enters the Manual Switch State upon the initiation and successful completion
of the Manual Switch command. The protection group leaves the Manual Switch state by means
of the Clear or Forced Switch commands. While in the Manual Switch state the system may
switch the active unit automatically if required for protection switching.
MCF (Message Communications Function)
Function that provides facilities for the transport and routing of Telecommunications Management
Network messages to and from the Network Manager.
MD (Mediation Device)
Allows for exchange of management information between Operations System and Network
Elements.
MEC (Manufacturer Executable Code)
Network Element system software in binary format that after being downloaded to one of the
stores can be executed by the system controller of the network element.
MEM
Memory
MFAS
Multiframe Indicator
MJ (Major (alarm))
Indicates a service-affecting failure, main or unit controller failure, or power supply failure.
MMF
Multi-Mode Fiber
MN (Minor (alarm))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-20
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MO
Managed Object
MPLS
Maintenance Signal
MSB
Member Status
MTBF
A device (circuit pack) that combines two or more transmission signals into a combined signal on
a shared medium.
Multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path,
or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NA
Not Applicable
naOH
A node in a telecommunication network that supports network transport services and is directly
manageable by a management system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-21
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NEBS
Network-Network Interface
NNI
This is the routine-operation quiet state in which no external command activities are occurring.
NOC
A network element in a ring or, more generally, in any type of network. In a network element
supporting interfaces to more than one ring, node refers to an interface that is in a particular ring.
Node is also defined as all equipment that is controlled by one system controller. A node is not
always directly manageable by a management system.
Non-Revertive Switching
In non-revertive switching, an active and standby line exist on the network. When a protection
switch occurs, the standby line is selected to support traffic, thereby becoming the active line. The
original active line then becomes the standby line. This status remains in effect even when the
fault clears. That is, there is no automatic switch back to the original status.
Non-Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time-scales or signals such that their corresponding significant
instants do not necessarily occur at the same average rate.
NORM
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NRZ
Non-Return to Zero
NSA
Non-Service Affecting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA
Optical Amplifier
OAM&P
Optical Carrier
OCC
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ODTUG
According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the ODUk is an information structure consisting
of the information payload (OPUk, Optical Channel Payload Unit) and ODUk related overhead.
ODUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the
client signa (1.2 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.4 Gbit/s, 40.4 Gbit/s, 41.8 Gbit/s, 104.8 Gbit/s).
ODUk-Xv
X virtually concatenated ODUks
ODUkP
Overhead
OI (Operations Interworking)
The capability to access, operate, provision, and administer remote systems through craft interface
access from any site in an SDH network or from a centralized operations system.
OMD
Optical Multiplex/Demultiplex
OMFI
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OMU
Out of band
OOBDCN
Out-of-band DCN
OOF
Out-of-Frame
OOS (Out-of-Service)
An equipment entity is not providing its normal service function (removed from either the
working or protection state) either because of a system problem or because the pack has been
removed from service.
OOS
A hierarchical link-state protocol for network routing, developed by the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF).
Operations Interface
Any interface providing you with information on the system behavior or control. These include
the equipment LEDs, user panel, Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC, office alarms, and all telemetry
interfaces.
Operator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-25
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OPSM
According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the OPUk is the information structure used to
adapt client information for the transport over an optical channel. It comprises client information
together with any overhead needed to perform rate adaptation between the client signal rate and
the OPUk payload rate and other OPUk overhead supporting the client signal transport. This
overhead is adaptation specific.
OPUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the
client signa (1.2 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.4 Gbit/s, 40.4 Gbit/s, 41.8 Gbit/s, 104.8 Gbit/s).
OPUk-Xv
Outside plant
OSPF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-26
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTLC
The physical link between equipment at two different NEs; may be referred to the as OTS
transmit line, or OTS receive line, or the OTS link.
OTS
According to the ITU-T Recommendation G.709, the OTUk is the information structure used for
the transport of an ODUk over one or more optical channel connections. It consists of the optical
channel data unit and OTUk related overhead (FEC and overhead for management of an optical
channel connection). It is characterized by its frame structure, bit rate, and bandwidth.
OTUk capacities are defined for k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 3e2, and 4 where k indicates the bit rate of the
client signa (1.2 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 10.0 Gbit/s, 10.4 Gbit/s, 40.4 Gbit/s, 41.8 Gbit/s, 104.8 Gbit/s).
OTUk-v
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-27
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P-CMEP
A variable that is given a value for a specified application. A constant, variable, or expression that
is used to pass values between components.
Parity Check
Tests whether the number of ones (or zeros) in an array of binary bits is odd or even; used to
determine that the received signal is the same as the transmitted signal.
Pass-Through
A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signal at the
given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for the signal is
disassembled.
Path Terminating Equipment
The Power Distribution Unit is used to provide the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-36 subrack with
power. PDU1C is the ETSI market version, PDU2C is used for the ANSI market.
PFC
Physical Interface
Platform
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLD
Payload
Plesiochronous Network
A network that contains multiple subnetworks, each internally synchronous and all operating at
the same nominal frequency, but whose timing may be slightly different at any particular instant.
PM (Performance Monitoring)
Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems (before
an alarm would be generated).
PM
Path Monitoring
PMA
Output pulse broadening due to random coupling of the two polarization modes in an optical fiber.
PMI
Pseudo-random Number
POP
Point of Presence
Port State Provisioning
A feature that allows a user to suppress alarm reporting and performance monitoring during
provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service, and not monitored) for
low-speed ports.
POS
Position field
POTS
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRBS
The process by which the user specifies parameter values for an entity in advance of some of the
equipment being present. These parameters are maintained only in NVM. These modifications are
initiated locally or remotely by a management system (such as Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS ZIC for
example). Preprovisioning provides for the decoupling of manual intervention tasks (for example,
install circuit packs) from those tasks associated with configuring the node to provide services
(for example, specifying the entities to be cross-connected).
PRI
Primary
Proactive Maintenance
Refers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initiate protection
switching or alarming, but indicative of an impending signal fail or signal degrade defect.
Protection Access
To provision traffic to be carried by protection tributaries when the port tributaries are not being
used to carry the protected working traffic.
Protection Group Configuration
The members of a group and their roles, for example, working protection, line number, etc.
Protection Path
One of two signals entering a path selector used for path protection switching or dual ring
interworking. The other is the working path. The designations working and protection are
provisioned by the user, whereas the terms active path and standby path indicate the current
protection state.
Protection State
When the working unit is currently considered active by the system and that it is carrying traffic.
The active unit state specifically refers to the receive direction of operation since protection
switching is unidirectional.
PROTN (Protection)
Extra capacity (channels, circuit packs) in transmission equipment that is not intended to be used
for service, but rather to serve as backup against equipment failures.
PROV (Provisioned)
Indicating that a circuit pack is ready to perform its intended function. A provisioned circuit pack
can be active (ACT), in-service (IS), standby (STBY), provisioned out-of-service (POS), or
out-of-service (OOS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-30
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSDN
Payload Type
PTF
Power
PWR ON
Power On
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QOS
Quality of Service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RADIUS
An indication returned to a transmitting terminal that the receiving terminal has detected an
incoming section failure. [Previously called far-end-receive failure (FERF).]
Reactive Maintenance
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Regeneration
The process of reconstructing a digital signal to eliminate the effects of noise and distortion.
Regenerator Section Termination (RST)
Function that generates the Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) in the transmit direction and
terminates the RSOH in the receive direction.
Reliability
The ability of a software system performing its required functions under stated conditions for a
stated period of time. The probability for an equipment to fulfill its function. Some of the ways in
which reliability is measured are: MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) expressed in hours;
Availability = (MTBF)/(MTBF+MTTR)(%) [where MTTR = mean time to restore]; outage in
minutes per year; failures per hour; percentage of failures per 1,000 hours.
Remote Network Element
Any Network Element that is connected to the referenced Network Element through either an
electrical or optical link. It may be the adjacent node on a ring, or N nodes away from the
reference. It also may be at the same physical location but is usually at another (remote) site.
Restore Timer
Counts down the time (in minutes) during which the switch waits to let the worker line recover
before switching back to it. This option can be set to prevent the protection switch continually
switching if a line has a continual transient fault.
Revertive
A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment returns to
the nominal configuration (that is, the working equipment is active, and the protection equipment
is standby) after any failure conditions that caused a protection switch to occur, clear, or after any
external switch commands are reset. (See Non-Revertive.)
Revertive Switching
In revertive switching, there is a working and protection high-speed line, circuit pack, etc. When a
protection switch occurs, the protection line, circuit pack, etc. is selected. When the fault clears,
service reverts to the working line.
RF
Remote Fault
RJ45
An interface between two networks. While routers are like bridges, they work differently. Routers
provide more functionality than bridges. For example, they can find the best route between any
two networks, even if there are several different networks in between. Routers also provide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-32
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
network management capabilities such as load balancing, partitioning of the network, and
trouble-shooting.
RS
Regenerator Section
RS
Reed-Solomon
RS-Ack
Re-sequence acknowledge
RSOH
Reservation Protocol
RZ (Return to Zero)
A code form having two information states (termed zero and one) and having a third state or an
at-rest condition to which the signal returns during each period.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA
Service Affecting
SAPI
Signal Degrade
SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy)
A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitable adapted
payloads over transmission networks.
SDS
The portion of a transmission facility, including terminating points, between a terminal network
element and a line-terminating network element, or two line-terminating network elements.
Self-Healing
A networks ability to automatically recover from the failure of one or more of its components.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-33
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Server
Computer in a computer network that performs dedicated main tasks which generally require
sufficient performance.
Service
The operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is providing service. This
designation will change with each switch action.
SES (Severely Errored Seconds)
This performance monitoring parameter is a second in which a signal failure occurs, or more than
a preset amount of coding violations (dependent on the type of signal) occurs.
SFP (small form-factor pluggable)
Short Haul
Single-Ended Operations
Provides operations support from a single location to remote Network Elements in the same SDH
subnetwork. With this capability you can perform operations, administration, maintenance, and
provisioning on a centralized basis. The remote Network Elements can be those that are specified
for the current release.
Site Address
Sink
SLC
Second-level controller
Slot
A physical position in a subrack designed for holding a circuit pack and connecting it to the
backplane. This term is also used loosely to refer to the collection of ports or tributaries connected
to a physical circuit pack placed in a slot.
SM
Section Monitoring
SM or SMF (Single-Mode Fiber)
A low-loss, long-span optical fiber typically operating at either 1310 nm, 1550 nm, or both.
SMOH
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNBF
Subnetwork Connection
SNC/I
Source
Software Backup
The process of saving an image of the current network elements databases, which are contained
in its NVM, to a remote location.
Software Download
The process of transferring a software release generic from a remote file server to the network
elements memory.
Software ID
Number that provides the software version information for the system.
SONET (Synchronous Optical Network)
The North American standard for the rates and formats that defines optical signals and their
constituents.
Span
A type of growth in which one wavelength is added to all lines before the next wavelength is
added.
SPE
A single failure in the network that causes isolation of more than one nodek. The use of IS-IS
areas, without obeying all rules and guidelines, increases the risk of a single point of failure in the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-35
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
network.
SPI
Sequence Indicator
Standby Path
One of two signals entering a constituent path selector, the standby path is the path not currently
being selected.
State
The state of a circuit pack indicates whether it is defective or normal (ready for normal use).
Operational state indicates dynamic system view: defective or normal. Administrate state
indicates provisioned user view: in-service, out-of-service, maintenance. Alarms are generated
only when administrative state is in-service.
Status
The circuit pack is in service but is not providing service functions. It is ready to be used to
replace a similar circuit pack either by protection or by duplex switching.
STM-N (Synchronous Transport Module, Level N)
A building block information structure that supports SDH section layer connections, where N
represents a multiple of 155.52 Mbit/s. Normally N = 1, 4, 16, 64 or 256.
Supervisor
A process where service-affecting alarms that have been identified as an effect are not displayed
to a user.
SYNC
Synchronizer
Synchronization Messaging
Synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of network timing, internal timing
status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork.
Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time scales or signals such that their corresponding significant
instances occur at precisely the same average rate, generally traceable to a single Stratum 1
source.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-36
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System Administrator
A user of the computer system on which the systems OS software application can be installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TC
Tandem Connection
TC-CMEP
A message type sent from a Network Element that indicates that a certain performance monitoring
parameter has exceeded a specified threshold.
TCM
A technique for transmitting a number of separate data, voice, and/or video signals simultaneously
over one communications medium by interleaving a portion of each signal one after another.
Through (or continue) cross-connection
A cross-connection within a ring, where the input and output tributaries have the same tributary
number but are in lines opposite each other.
TID (Target Identifier)
A provisionable parameter that is used to identify a particular Network Element within a network.
It is a character string of up 20 characters where the characters are letters, digits, or hyphens (-).
TIM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-37
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TMN
Indicates the presence of a VLAN tag in a MAC frame. Furthermore, it indicates that the
length/type field can be found at a different position in the frame (moved by 4 bytes).
Transmit Direction
Tributary Slot
TSOH
An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer and the
higher path layer. Consists of a VC-n plus a tributary unit pointer (TU PTR).
Two-Way Point-to-Point Cross-Connection
A two-legged interconnection, that supports two-way transmission, between two and only two
tributaries.
TxTI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-38
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed or in which
10 consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when 10 consecutive
non-SES occur.
UITS (Unacknowledged Information Transfer Service)
User-to-Network Interface
Upstream
At or towards the source of the considered transmission stream, for example, looking in the
opposite direction of transmission.
USB
Permissions a user must perform on the computer system on which the system software runs.
UTC (Universal Time Coordinated )
A time-zone independent indication of an event. The local time can be calculated from the
Universal Coordinated Time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Value
An item of data named by an identifier. Each variable has a type, such as int or Object, and a
scope.
VCG
Voice frequency
Virtual Circuit
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A communication network that uses common-carrier provided lines and covers an extended
geographical area.
Wavelength Interchange
The ability to change the wavelength associated with an STM-N signal into another wavelength.
WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexing)
Voice, data, and/or video communication at digital rates from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s.
Working
Label attached to a physical entity. In case of revertive switching the working line or unit is the
entity that is carrying service under normal operation. In case of non-revertive switching the label
has no particular meaning. Working/Protection assignments are provisioned and do not change
dynamically. Active/Standby status changes dynamically. When the "working" entity is failed, the
protection entity is active and the working entity is standby. Otherwise the working entity is active
and the protection entity is standby. "Protection" is the label attached to the *other* entity, not one
that is active when the "Working" entity is failed.
WRK (Working)
Secondary state of system components. In case of revertive switching the working line or unit is
the entity that is carrying service under normal operation. In case of non-revertive switching the
label has no particular meaning. Working/Protection assignments are provisioned and do not
change dynamically. Active/Standby status changes dynamically. When the "working" entity is
failed, the protection entity is active and the working entity is standby. Otherwise the working
entity is active and the protection entity is standby. "Protection" is the label attached to the
*other* entity, not one that is active when the "Working" entity is failed.
WRT (Wait to Restore Time)
Corresponds to the time to wait before switching back after a failure has cleared, in a revertive
protection scheme. This can be between 0 and 15 minutes, in increments of one minute.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-40
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WS
Work Station
WTR (Wait to Restore)
Applies to revertive switching operation. The protection group enters the WTR state when all
Equipment Fail (EF) conditions are cleared, but the system has not yet reverted back to its
working line. The protection group remains in the WTR state until the Wait-to-Restore timer
completes the WTR time interval.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XC
Cross-connect
XFP (extended form-factor pluggable)
A technique used to reduce the number of consecutive zeros in a line-coded signal (B3ZS, B8ZS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-41
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
GL-42
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Index
.............................................................
.............................................................
C card
(DCC), 3-5
Data Communication Network
(DCN), 3-5
CCAL
See: command community
authorization levels (CCAL)
AID, 5-548
Deprovisioning, 5-9
ASAP, 7-7
climatic conditions
DHCP, 20-27
ASAP profile
dust filter
delete, 7-18
.............................................................
command community
authorization levels (CCAL), 2-9
E EIFE
B2 bytes, 16-5
B3 byte, 16-5
Background Block Errors (BBE),
16-10, 16-12
Configure
External timing SDH, 8-15
Configure BITS
in SDH, 8-8
Control plane IP address, 3-36
Control Plane IP address, 20-27
Cooling, 5-15
BIP
See: Bit-interleaved parity
Cross-connection
modify, 11-15
Current timing configurationNew
for Release R6.0, 8-36
replace, 19-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
IN-1
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EOFE
See: Ethernet Outgoing Frame
Errors
EONB
See: Ethernet Outgoing
Number of Bytes
EONF
See: Ethernet Outgoing
Number of Frames
Equipment provisioning, 5-6
replace, 19-6
ESD
See: electrostatic discharge
(ESD)
ESP
See: electrostatic protection
(ESP)
Ethernet, 3-6
Ethernet Incoming Frame Errors
(EIFE), 16-11
Ethernet Incoming Number of
Bytes (EINB), 16-10
Ethernet Incoming Number of
Frames (EINF), 16-11
.............................................................
G General user, 2-13
.............................................................
H Hazard level, 1-22
Mandatory equipment
components, 5-6
Manual provisioning, 5-8
Media access protocols, 3-6
Menu Topic
Disable User Login, 8-12
.............................................................
I
Maintenance-oriented performance
monitoring, 16-3
HPCFAP
See: High Power Connection,
Fuse & Alarm Panel
Exchangeability, 5-9
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Node Manager
NE Equipment Tree, 20-3,
20-43
nominal voltage, 1-51
Non-mandatory equipment
components, 5-7
Notification code, 7-16
NTP server, 2-7, 2-38
NTP Server, 20-27
.............................................................
O ODU path termination, 5-84, 5-89,
5-92
Optical modules
provisioning, 5-57
optical transponder
112SCA1 OT, 5-168
112SCX10 OT, 5-169
OSI network protocol, 3-6
OTH performance monitoring,
16-5
OTH performance parameters,
16-12
Out of Frame Seconds - Near End
Regenerator Section (OFS-RS),
16-10
Out-of-band FEC, 16-25
.............................................................
P passwords, 2-10
Performance parameters
Optical Channel (OCh), 16-14
SDH, 16-13
SONET, 16-13
PM byte, 16-5
Port group, 5-9, 5-9
Port group mode, 5-9, 5-11
Power Supply, Filter, and Clock
Interface Card (PSF3T8), 1-50,
1-51, 1-53, 1-54, 1-56, 1-57,
1-63
power wiring, 1-49
PRBS
See: pseudo-random binary
sequence
Preprovisioning, 5-8
Priority level, 2-42, 2-45, 2-49,
2-52, 2-53, 2-54, 2-55, 2-56,
2-59, 2-60, 2-65, 2-67, 2-70,
2-75, 2-76, 2-77, 2-79, 2-81,
2-83, 2-86, 2-88, 2-90, 3-41,
3-42, 3-43, 3-44
Privileged user, 2-13
Protection leg, 9-16
Provisioning, 5-8
pseudo-random binary sequence,
GL-31
PSF3T8
See: Power Supply, Filter, and
Clock Interface Card
(PSF3T8)
.............................................................
PC requirements
CPU, 20-37
Display Resolution, 20-37
Operating System, 20-37
RAM, 20-37
Performance monitoring points,
16-8
Q Q-LAN, 3-5
Quality-of-service-oriented
performance monitoring, 16-3
REI
See: Remote Error Indication
Remote Error Indication (REI),
16-5, 16-5
Reports only (user), 2-13
Reprovisioning, 5-9
RTRV-BITS, 8-39
RTRV-SYNCN, 8-38
.............................................................
S Sa bit Location, 8-42
.............................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1830 PSS
IN-3
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA Release 6.0.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................